Apple iMac_Mid2010_UG_BR.pdf Apple sur FNAC.COM - Pour voir la liste complète des manuels APPLE, cliquez ici

 

 

TELECHARGER LE PDF :

 

 

http://support.apple.com/manuals/pt_BR/iMac_Mid2010_UG_BR.pdf

 

 

Voir également d'autres Guides APPLE :

Apple_macbook_pro_13inch_early2011_f

Apple_Guide_de_l_utilisateur_d_Utilitaire_RAID

Apple_Time_Capsule_Early2009_Setup_F

Apple_iphone_4s_finger_tips_guide_rs

Apple_iphone_upute_za_uporabu

Apple_ipad_user_guide_ta

Apple_iPod_touch_User_Guide

apple_earpods_user_guide

apple_iphone_gebruikershandleiding

apple_iphone_5_info

apple_iphone_brukerhandbok

apple_apple_tv_3rd_gen_setup_tw

apple_macbook_pro-retina-mid-2012-important_product_info_ch

apple_Macintosh-User-s-Guide-for-Macintosh-PowerBook-145

Apple_ipod_touch_user_guide_ta

Apple_TV_2nd_gen_Setup_Guide_h

Apple_ipod_touch_manual_del_usuario

Apple_iphone_4s_finger_tips_guide_tu

Apple_macbook_pro_retina_qs_th

Apple-Manuel_de_l'utilisateur_de_Final_Cut_Server

Apple-iMac_G5_de_lutilisateur

Apple-Cinema_Tools_4.0_User_Manual_F

Apple-Personal-LaserWriter300-User-s-Guide

Apple-QuickTake-100-User-s-Guide-for-Macintosh

Apple-User-s-Guide-Macintosh-LC-630-DOS-Compatible

Apple-iPhone_iOS3.1_User_Guide

Apple-iphone_4s_important_product_information_guide

Apple-iPod_shuffle_Features_Guide_F

Liste-documentation-apple

Apple-Premiers_contacts_avec_iMovie_08

Apple-macbook_pro-retina-mid-2012-important_product_info_br

Apple-macbook_pro-13-inch-mid-2012-important_product_info

Apple-macbook_air-11-inch_mid-2012-qs_br

Apple-Manuel_de_l_utilisateur_de_MainStage

Apple-Compressor_3_User_Manual_F

Apple-Color_1.0_User_Manual_F

Apple-guide_de_configuration_airport_express_4.2

Apple-TimeCapsule_SetupGuide

Apple-Instruments_et_effets_Logic_Express_8

Apple-Manuel_de_l_utilisateur_de_WaveBurner

Apple-Macmini_Guide_de_l'utilisateur

Apple-PowerMacG5_UserGuide

Disque dur, ATA parallèle Instructions de remplacement

Apple-final_cut_pro_x_logic_effects_ref_f

Apple-Leopard_Installationshandbok

Manuale Utente PowerBookG4

Apple-thunderbolt_display_getting_started_1e

Apple-Compressor-4-Benutzerhandbuch

Apple-macbook_air_11inch_mid2011_ug

Apple-macbook_air-mid-2012-important_product_info_j

Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-des-fonctionnalites

Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-des-fonctionnalites

Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-4eme-generation

Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-4eme-generation

Apple-Manuel_de_l_utilisateur_d_Utilitaire_de_reponse_d_impulsion

Apple-Aperture_2_Raccourcis_clavier

AppleTV_Setup-Guide

Apple-livetype_2_user_manual_f

Apple-imacG5_17inch_harddrive

Apple-macbook_air_guide_de_l_utilisateur

Apple-MacBook_Early_2008_Guide_de_l_utilisateur

Apple-Keynote-2-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Apple-PowerBook-User-s-Guide-for-PowerBook-computers

Apple-Macintosh-Performa-User-s-Guide-5200CD-and-5300CD

Apple-Macintosh-Performa-User-s-Guide

Apple-Workgroup-Server-Guide

Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-des-fonctionnalites

Apple-iPad-User-Guide-For-iOS-5-1-Software

Apple-Boot-Camp-Guide-d-installation-et-de-configuration

Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-4eme-generation

Power Mac G5 Guide de l’utilisateur APPLE

Guide de l'utilisateur PAGE '08 APPLE

Guide de l'utilisateur KEYNOTE '09 APPLE

Guide de l'Utilisateur KEYNOTE '3 APPLE

Guide de l'Utilisateur UTILITAIRE RAID

Guide de l'Utilisateur Logic Studio

Power Mac G5 Guide de l’utilisateur APPLE

Guide de l'utilisateur PAGE '08 APPLE

Guide de l'utilisateur KEYNOTE '09 APPLE

Guide de l'Utilisateur KEYNOTE '3 APPLE

Guide de l'Utilisateur UTILITAIRE RAID

Guide de l'Utilisateur Logic Studio

Guide de l’utilisateur ipad Pour le logiciel iOS 5.1

PowerBook G4 Premiers Contacts APPLE

Guide de l'Utilisateur iphone pour le logiciel ios 5.1 APPLE

Guide de l’utilisateur ipad Pour le logiciel iOS 4,3

Guide de l’utilisateur iPod nano 5ème génération

Guide de l'utilisateur iPod Touch 2.2 APPLE

Guide de l’utilisateur QuickTime 7  Mac OS X 10.3.9 et ultérieur Windows XP et Windows 2000

Guide de l'utilisateur MacBook 13 pouces Mi 2010

Guide de l’utilisateur iPhone (Pour les logiciels iOS 4.2 et 4.3)

Guide-de-l-utilisateur-iPod-touch-pour-le-logiciel-ios-4-3-APPLE

Guide-de-l-utilisateur-iPad-2-pour-le-logiciel-ios-4-3-APPLE

Guide de déploiement en entreprise iPhone OS

Guide-de-l-administrateur-Apple-Remote-Desktop-3-1

Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Apple-Xserve-Diagnostics-Version-3X103

Guide-de-configuration-AirPort-Extreme-802.11n-5e-Generation

Guide-de-configuration-AirPort-Extreme-802-11n-5e-Generation

Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Capteur-Nike-iPod

Guide-de-l-utilisateur-iMac-21-5-pouces-et-27-pouces-mi-2011-APPLE

Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Apple-Qadministrator-4

Guide-d-installation-Apple-TV-3-eme-generation

User-Guide-iPad-For-ios-5-1-Software

Parabéns, você e seu iMac foram feitos um para o outro.Diga olá ao seu iMac. www.apple.com/br/imac finder Finder Navegue pelos seus arquivos como você navega pela sua música com o Cover Flow. Ajuda Mac Câmera iSight integrada e iChat Realize um bate-papo de vídeo com o seus amigos e família em qualquer parte do mundo. Ajuda Mac isight Mail Administre todas as suas contas de e-mail em um único lugar. Ajuda Mac mail iCal e Agenda Mantenha sua programação e seus contatos em sincronia. Ajuda Mac isyncTime Machine Faça o backup e restaure os seus arquivos automaticamente. Ajuda Mac Spotlight Encontre qualquer coisa no seu Mac num piscar de olhos. Ajuda Mac time machine spotlight Safari Utilize a Internet com o navegador mais rápido do mundo. Ajuda Mac safari Quick Look Pré-visualize os seus arquivos de forma instantânea. Ajuda Mac quick look Mac OS X Snow Leopard www.apple.com/br/macosx iLife www.apple.com/br/ilife iPhoto Transforme suas fotos em algo espetacular. Ajuda iPhoto iMovie Crie filmes lindos em minutos. Ajuda iMovie GarageBand Crie uma música harmônica facilmente. Ajuda GarageBand foto filme gravarÍndice 5 Índice Capítulo 1: Preparado, Configurado, Já 9 O que vem na caixa 10 Como configurar o seu iMac 15 Como colocar o seu iMac em repouso ou desligá-lo Capítulo 2: A vida com o seu iMac 18 Recursos básicos do seu iMac 20 Portas de seu iMac 22 Outros componentes de seu iMac 24 Recursos do teclado Apple Wireless Keyboard e do mouse Apple Magic Mouse 26 Como usar o teclado Apple Wireless Keyboard 28 Como usar o mouse Apple Magic Mouse 30 Como usar o controle remoto Apple Remote 32 Como obter respostas Capítulo 3: Melhore a sua Memória 37 Como instalar a memória 42 Como comprovar que o iMac reconhece a nova memória6 Índice Capítulo 4: A solução para os seus problemas 45 Problemas que o impedem de usar o iMac 47 Como trocar as pilhas 49 Como utilizar o Apple Hardware Test 50 Problemas com a conexão à Internet 53 Problemas com a comunicação sem fio AirPort 54 Como manter seu software atualizado 55 Quando um aplicativo não responde 55 Como reinstalar o software fornecido com o seu iMac 57 Outros problemas 58 Mais informações sobre serviço e suporte 60 Como localizar o número de série do seu produto Capítulo 5: E finalmente... 62 Informações importantes de segurança 66 Informações importantes de manuseio 67 Como limpar o iMac 68 Dicas sobre ergonomia 70 A Apple e o meio ambienteAjuda Mac Assistente de migração www.apple.com/br/imac Preparado, Configurado, Já 18 Capítulo 1 Preparado, Configurado, Já O seu iMac foi projetado para que você comece a utilizá-lo de maneira rápida e imediata. Se você nunca usou um iMac ou é novo com os computadores Mac, leia este capítulo para obter uma introdução. Importante: Leia todas as instruções de instalação deste capítulo e as informações de segurança começando na página 62 antes de conectar o iMac à tomada. Se você for um usuário avançado, talvez já saiba como começar. Mesmo assim, leia as informações do capítulo 2,“A vida com o seu iMac,” para saber quais são os novos recursos deste iMac. As respostas à maioria das perguntas podem ser encontradas na Ajuda Mac do seu iMac. Para obter informações sobre a Ajuda Mac, consulte “Como obter respostas” na página 32. Remova todas as películas protetoras da parte externa de seu iMac antes de configurá-lo.Capítulo 1 Preparado, Configurado, Já 9 O que vem na caixa O seu iMac é fornecido com um teclado Apple Wireless Keyboard, com um mouse Apple Magic Mouse sem fio e com um cabo de corrente alternada. Se você tiver comprado um controle remoto Apple Remote, ele também estará na caixa. Cabo de corrente alternada Teclado Apple Wireless Keyboard Mouse Apple Magic Mouse10 Capítulo 1 Preparado, Configurado, Já Como configurar o seu iMac Siga os seguintes passos para configurar o seu iMac. Espere até o passo 4 para ligar o seu iMac. Passo 1: Passe o cabo de alimentação através da abertura do suporte, conecte-o à porta de alimentação da parte posterior do seu iMac e depois conecte-o a uma tomada elétrica.Capítulo 1 Preparado, Configurado, Já 11 Passo 2: Para acessar a Internet ou uma rede, conecte a extremidade de um cabo Ethernet à porta Ethernet de seu iMac. Conecte a outra extremidade a um modem a cabo, a um modem DSL ou a uma rede. O seu iMac vem com a tecnologia AirPort Extreme para redes sem fio. Para obter informações sobre a configuração de uma conexão sem fio, escolha Ajuda > Ajuda Mac, e busque “AirPort”. Para usar uma conexão discada, é necessário ter um modem USB externo. Conecte o modem a uma porta USB do seu iMac e, em seguida, use o cabo telefônico para conectar o modem à tomada telefônica.12 Capítulo 1 Preparado, Configurado, Já Passo 3: Ligue o seu teclado e mouse sem fio. Pressione o botão interruptor no lado direito do seu teclado Apple Wireless Keyboard e deslize o interruptor da parte inferior do seu mouse Apple Magic Mouse para ligá-los. O seu teclado e mouse sem fios são fornecidos com pilhas AA instaladas e já estão emparelhados com o iMac. O emparelhamento permite a eles comunicarem-se com o iMac sem o uso de fios. Botão de Força Indicador luminoso Indicador luminoso Interruptor On/off Quando você liga o teclado ou o mouse pela primeira vez, o indicador luminoso se mantém aceso por 5 segundos, indicando que as pilhas funcionam adequadamente. Se o seu teclado ou mouse não funcionarem, certifique-se de que as pilhas estejam instaladas e carregadas (consulte a página 47). O indicador luminoso pisca até que você ligue o iMac e uma conexão seja estabelecida. Nota: Se você tiver comprado um teclado USB ou um mouse USB, conecte o cabo a uma porta USB (d) na parte posterior de seu iMac.Capítulo 1 Preparado, Configurado, Já 13 Passo 4: Pressione o botão de Força (®) da parte posterior para ligar o seu iMac. Você deve ouvir um toque ao ligar o iMac. Clique com o seu mouse para conectá-lo ao iMac. ® ® ® Importante: Se o teclado e o mouse não estiverem emparelhados, siga as instruções na tela para emparelhá-los com o iMac. Talvez seja necessário clicar uma vez no mouse para estabelecer uma conexão. Para obter mais informações sobre emparelhamento, consulte a página 27.14 Capítulo 1 Preparado, Configurado, Já Passo 5: Use o Assistente de Configuração para configurar o seu iMac. Ao ligar o seu iMac pela primeira vez, o Assistente de Configuração também se inicia. O Assistente de Configuração ajuda você a inserir as suas informações de Internet e de e-mail e a configurar uma conta de usuário em seu iMac. Se você já possui um Mac, o Assistente de Configuração pode ajudá-lo a transferir arquivos, aplicativos e outras informações automaticamente do seu antigo Mac para o seu novo iMac. Se você não pretende guardar ou usar o seu outro Mac, é melhor desautorizá-lo a tocar músicas, vídeos ou livros de áudio que você tenha comprado na loja iTunes Store. Desautorizar um computador impede que as músicas ou livros de áudio que você tenha comprado sejam reproduzidos por outras pessoas e libera uma outra autorização de uso. Para obter mais informações sobre como desautorizar, escolha Ajuda iTunes no menu Ajuda do iTunes. Se você não usar o Assistente de Configuração para transferir as informações quando inicializar pela primeira vez o seu computador, você poderá fazer isso em outra oportunidade usando o Assistente de Migração. Vá para a pasta Aplicativos, abra Utilitários e clique duas vezes em Assistente de Migração. Após a configuração, verifique se há atualizações de software. Escolha Apple () > Atualização de Software na barra de menus e siga as instruções na tela.Capítulo 1 Preparado, Configurado, Já 15 Passo 6: Personalize sua mesa e ajuste suas preferências. Você pode facilmente fazer que sua mesa fique com a aparência desejada facilmente usando as Preferências do Sistema, que é a sua central de comandos para a maioria dos ajustes de seu iMac. Escolha Apple () > Preferências do Sistema na barra de menus, ou clique no ícone Preferências do Sistema no Dock. Para obter mais informações, abra a Ajuda Mac e busque “Preferências do Sistema” ou busque a preferência específica que deseja alterar. Como colocar o seu iMac em repouso ou desligá-lo Quando você terminar de trabalhar com seu iMac, poderá colocá-lo em repouso ou desligá-lo. Como colocar o iMac em repouso Se você não for utilizar o iMac por apenas alguns dias, coloque-o em repouso. Quando o seu iMac está em repouso, a tela fica escurecida. Você pode interromper rapidamente o repouso do seu iMac e, assim, evitar o processo de inicialização. Para colocar o iMac em repouso, siga qualquer uma destas instruções:  Escolha Apple () > Repouso na barra de menus.  Pressione o botão de Força (®) da parte posterior do seu iMac.  Escolha Apple () > Preferências do Sistema, clique em Economizador de Energia e defina um temporizador de repouso.  Mantenha pressionado o botão Reprodução/Pausa (’) no controle remoto Apple Remote opcional por 3 segundos.16 Capítulo 1 Preparado, Configurado, Já Para interromper o repouso do seu iMac, você pode fazer o seguinte:  Pressionar qualquer tecla do teclado.  Clicar no mouse.  Pressionar o botão de Força (®) da parte posterior do seu iMac.  Pressionar qualquer botão no controle remoto Apple Remote opcional. Quando o repouso do iMac for interrompido, os aplicativos, documentos e configurações do computador estarão exatamente da maneira como você os deixou. Como desligar o seu iMac Se você não for utilizar o iMac por muitos dias, desligue-o. Escolha Apple () > Desligar. Para ligar novamente o seu iMac, pressione o botão de Força (®). NOTA: Desligue o seu iMac antes de movê-lo. Mover o seu iMac enquanto o disco rígido estiver girando pode danificá-lo, causando a perda de dados ou uma incapacidade de inicializar a partir do disco rígido.Ajuda Mac iLife www.apple.com/br/macosx A vida com o seu iMac 218 Capítulo 2 A vida com o seu iMac Recursos básicos do seu iMac Unidade SuperDrive sem bandeja Câmera iSight integrada Microfone integrado Indicador luminoso da câmera Slot da placa SD Alto-falantes estéreo integrados Receptor de infravermelho integradoCapítulo 2 A vida com o seu iMac 19 Microfone integrado Capture sons diretamente no seu iMac ou fale com seus amigos ao vivo através da conexão de banda larga usando o aplicativo iChat incluído. Indicador luminoso da câmera O indicador luminoso da câmera acende quando a câmera iSight está funcionando. Câmera iSight integrada Faça videoconferências com amigos e familiares pela Internet usando o aplicativo iChat, tire fotos com o Photo Booth ou crie vídeos com o iMovie. Unidade SuperDrive sem bandeja A unidade SuperDrive sem bandeja lê e grava os CDs e DVDs de tamanho padrão. Slot da placa SD Transfere facilmente fotos, vídeos e dados de e para o iMac com uma placa SD. Alto-falantes estéreo integrados Ouça músicas, filmes, jogos e outros arquivos multimídia. Receptor de infravermelho integrado Use um controle remoto Apple Remote opcional (disponível separadamente) com o receptor infravermelho para controlar o Front Row e o Keynote no iMac de até 9,1 metros de distância.20 Capítulo 2 A vida com o seu iMac Portas de seu iMac ® Porta de saída óptica de áudio digital/saída de fone de ouvido Porta de entrada óptica de áudio digital/ entrada de áudio , f Porta Mini DisplayPort £ d Portas USB 2.0 (4) Porta Ethernet (10/100/1000 Base-T) G H Porta FireWire 800Capítulo 2 A vida com o seu iMac 21 G Porta Ethernet (10/100/1000Base-T) Conecte-se a uma rede Ethernet 10/100/1000Base-T de alta velocidade, conecte-se a um modem DSL ou a cabo ou conecte-se a um outro computador e transfira arquivos. A porta Ethernet detecta automaticamente outros dispositivos Ethernet. £ Porta Mini DisplayPort Porta de saída compatível com DVI, VGA e dual-link DVI. O modelo de 27 polegadas também é compatível com a entrada das origens do DisplayPort externo. Os cabos e adaptadores requeridos estão disponíveis separadamente. d Quatro portas USB (Universal Serial Bus) 2.0 de alta velocidade Conecte um iPod, um iPhone, um iPad, um mouse, um teclado, uma impressora, um disco rígido, uma câmera digital, um joystick, um modem USB externo e muito mais. Você pode também conectar dispositivos USB 1.1. , Porta de entrada óptica de áudio digital/ entrada de áudio Conecte um microfone com alimentação externa ou um equipamento de áudio digital. Esta porta também é uma tomada estéreo S/PDIF 3.5 minifono. f Porta de saída óptica de áudio digital/saída de fone de ouvido Conecte fones de ouvido, alto-falantes com alimentação externa ou equipamento de áudio digital. Esta porta também é uma tomada estéreo S/PDIF 3.5 minifono. H Porta FireWire 800 Conecte dispositivos externos de alta velocidade, como câmeras de vídeo digital e dispositivos de armazenamento. A porta fornece até 7 watts de potência.22 Capítulo 2 A vida com o seu iMac Outros componentes de seu iMac ® Botão de Força Porta de alimentação de energia ® Acesso à memória (embaixo) Slot de segurançaCapítulo 2 A vida com o seu iMac 23 Porta de alimentação de energia Conecte o cabo de alimentação ao seu iMac. Slot de segurança Conecte um cadeado e um cabo para desencorajar furtos (disponíveis separadamente). ® Botão de Força Pressione para ligar o seu iMac ou colocá-lo em repouso. Mantenha pressionado para reiniciar o iMac durante a solução de problemas. Acesso à memória O seu iMac é fornecido com pelo menos 4 GB de memória instalada como dois módulos de memória de 2 GB. Z Tecnologia sem fio AirPort Extreme (interior) Conecte-se a uma rede sem fio utilizando a tecnologia integrada AirPort Extreme. ◊ Tecnologia sem fio Bluetooth ® 2.1+EDR (interior) Conecte os dispositivos sem fio, como o teclado Apple Wireless Keyboard e o mouse Apple Magic Mouse, os telefones celular Bluetooth, PDAs e impressoras.24 Capítulo 2 A vida com o seu iMac Recursos do teclado Apple Wireless Keyboard e do mouse Apple Magic Mouse Teclas de brilho Teclado Apple Wireless Keyboard Teclas de volume - Exposé Dashboard Mouse Apple Magic Mouse Tecla Ejetora de Mídia C Teclas de mídiaCapítulo 2 A vida com o seu iMac 25 Mouse Apple Magic Mouse Apresenta um mecanismo de rastreamento a laser, tecnologia sem fio Bluetooth e uma cobertura superior sem junções que usa uma tecnologia Multi-Touch compatível com botões múltiplos, rolagem de 360°, ampliação de tela e controle do seu iMac com a passagem dos dedos. Use as Preferências do Mouse para ajustar a velocidade do rastreamento, do clique e da rolagem, ou para adicionar um botão secundário (consulte a página 29). Teclado Apple Wireless Keyboard Combina a liberdade sem fio com teclas de função integradas que estão pré- -programadas para funcionar com os seus aplicativos. C Tecla Ejetora de Mídia Mantenha esta tecla pressionada para ejetar um disco. Você pode também ejetar um disco arrastando seu ícone da Mesa para o Lixo. Tecla Dashboard (F4) Abra o Dashboard para poder acessar seus widgets. Tecla Exposé (F3) Abra o Exposé para ver todas as janelas abertas em sua mesa de uma vez. Teclas de brilho (F1, F2) Aumente ( ) ou diminua ( ) o brilho da tela . ’ Teclas de mídia (F7, F8, F9) Retroceda ( ), reproduza ou coloque em pausa (’), ou avance rapidamente ( ) uma música, um filme ou uma apresentação de slides. - Teclas de volume (F10, F11, F12) Coloque em mudo (—), diminua (–) ou aumente (-) o volume do som produzido pelos alto-falantes ou pela porta de fones de ouvido de seu iMac.26 Capítulo 2 A vida com o seu iMac Como usar o teclado Apple Wireless Keyboard O teclado sem fio é fornecido com duas pilhas AA instaladas e já vem emparelhado com o iMac. Emparelhamento significa que o teclado e o iMac estão conectados sem fio e podem comunicar-se entre eles. Sobre o indicador luminoso O indicador luminoso (LED) no teclado sem fio funciona como um indicador de bateria e um indicador de estado. Quando você liga o teclado pela primeira vez, a luz se mantém acesa por 5 segundos, indicando que as pilhas estão funcionando adequadamente e, em seguida, se apaga. Se você pressionar o botão On/off (®) no seu teclado sem fio e o indicador luminoso não acender, talvez seja necessário trocar as pilhas. Consulte “Como trocar as pilhas” na página 47. Botão de Força Indicador luminosoCapítulo 2 A vida com o seu iMac 27 Como emparelhar o teclado sem fio com o seu iMac Se o seu teclado sem fio não estiver emparelhado com o iMac, o indicador luminoso começará a piscar indicando que o teclado está acessível acessível e pronto para ser emparelhado com o seu iMac. Para emparelhar o seu teclado sem fio: 1 Pressione o botão de força (®) para ligar o teclado sem fio. 2 Escolha Apple () > Preferências do Sistema e clique em Teclado. 3 Clique em“Configurar o Teclado Bluetooth...” no canto inferior direito. 4 Selecione o seu teclado sem fio e, em seguida, siga as instruções na tela. Se você não conseguir emparelhar o seu teclado com o iMac em 3 minutos, o indicador luminoso e o teclado se apagarão para preservar as pilhas. Pressione o botão de força (®) para reativar o seu teclado, permitindo o emparelhamento com o iMac. Quando você tiver conseguido emparelhar o teclado com o iMac, o indicador luminoso ficará aceso durante 3 segundos e, em seguida, apagará. Como usar o seu teclado Personalize o seu teclado usando a preferência Teclado. Você pode alterar as teclas modificadoras, atribuir atalhos de teclado aos comandos de menu de um aplicativo do Mac OS X ou no Finder e muito mais. Para personalizar o seu teclado: 1 Escolha Apple () > Preferências do Sistema. 2 Clique em Teclado e, em seguida, clique em Atalhos de Teclado.28 Capítulo 2 A vida com o seu iMac Como usar o mouse Apple Magic Mouse O seu mouse Apple Magic Mouse sem fio, fornecido com duas pilhas AA instaladas, já está emparelhado com o iMac. Emparelhamento significa que o mouse Apple Magic Mouse e o iMac estão conectados sem fio e podem comunicar-se entre eles. Sobre o indicador luminoso Quando você liga o mouse Apple Magic Mouse pela primeira vez, a luz se mantém acesa durante 5 segundos, indicando que as pilhas estão funcionando adequadamente. Se você ligar o seu mouse e o indicador luminoso não acender, talvez seja necessário trocar as pilhas. Consulte “Como trocar as pilhas” na página 47. Indicador luminoso Interruptor On/offCapítulo 2 A vida com o seu iMac 29 Como emparelhar o mouse Apple Magic Mouse com o seu iMac Se o seu mouse Apple Magic Mouse não estiver emparelhado com o iMac, o indicador luminoso começará a piscar, indicando que o mouse está acessível e pronto para ser emparelhado com o seu iMac. Para emparelhar o mouse: 1 Deslize o interruptor on/off na parte inferior do mouse para ligá-lo. 2 Escolha Apple () > Preferências do Sistema e clique em Mouse. 3 Clique em“Configurar o Mouse Bluetooth...” no canto inferior direito. 4 Selecione o seu mouse sem fio e, em seguida, siga as instruções na tela. Se você não conseguir emparelhar o seu mouse com o iMac em 3 minutos, o indicador luminoso e o mouse se apagarão para preservar as pilhas. Deslize o interruptor on/off para ligar o mouse novamente, permitindo o emparelhamento com o iMac. Quando o mouse estiver corretamente emparelhado com o iMac, o indicador luminoso ficará aceso permanentemente. Como usar o mouse Apple Magic Mouse Para saber mais sobre sobre os gestos do Multi-Touch que podem ser usados com o mouse Apple Magic Mouse ou para alterar a forma que eles funcionam, use as Preferências do Mouse. Escolha Apple () > Preferências do Sistema e clique em Mouse.30 Capítulo 2 A vida com o seu iMac Como usar o controle remoto Apple Remote Se o seu iMac vier com um controle remoto Apple Remote, você poderá usá-lo com produtos Apple que tenham um receptor de infravermelho (IR) integrado. Controle e reproduza filmes de DVD ou músicas de sua biblioteca do iTunes, assista a apresentações de slides de fotos, assista a trailers de filmes e muito mais. Acima Abaixo Menu Reprodução/Pausa Esquerda Direita Selecionar Para usar o seu controle remoto Apple Remote: 1 Pressione Reproduzir/Pausa para reproduzir ou colocar em pausa uma música, uma apresentação de slides ou um filme. 2 Pressione Direita ou Esquerda para pular para a próxima música ou para a música anterior em sua biblioteca do iTunes ou para o próximo capítulo ou para o capítulo anterior em um DVD. 3 Mantenha Direita ou Esquerda pressionada para avançar rapidamente ou retroceder em uma música ou filme. 4 Pressione Acima ou Abaixo para ajustar o volume.Capítulo 2 A vida com o seu iMac 31 Como emparelhar seu controle remoto Apple Remote Emparelhe seu controle remoto Apple Remote com o iMac ou com outro produto da Apple. Depois que você emparelha o iMac ou o produto Apple, ele fica controlado apenas pelo controle remoto emparelhado. Para emparelhar o seu controle remoto: 1 Distancie-se de 8 a 10 cm do seu produto iMac ou Apple. 2 Aponte o controle remoto para o receptor de IR que fica na frente de seu iMac ou produto Apple. 3 Mantenha Direita e Menu pressionados por 5 segundos. Quando você tiver emparelhado seu controle remoto, aparecerá um símbolo de corrente. Para desemparelhar seu controle remoto em um iMac: 1 Escolha Apple () > Preferências do Sistema na barra de menus. 2 Clique em Segurança e, em seguida, clique em Desemparelhar. Para o Apple TV ou outros produtos Apple, mantenha pressionados Menu e Esquerda para desemparelhar. Como trocar a bateria Para trocar a bateria: 1 Use uma moeda para remover a tampa do compartimento da bateria. 2 Coloque uma bateria CR2032 com o lado positivo (+) para cima. 3 Recoloque a tampa e use uma moeda para apertá-la. Tampa da pilha32 Capítulo 2 A vida com o seu iMac Como obter respostas Você pode encontrar muitas outras informações sobre como usar o seu iMac na Ajuda Mac e na Internet em www.apple.com/br/support/imac. Para abrir a Ajuda Mac: 1 Clique no ícone do Finder no Dock (a barra de ícones que fica ao longo da borda da tela). 2 Escolha Ajuda > Ajuda Mac (clique no menu Ajuda na barra de menus e escolha Ajuda Mac). 3 Clique no campo de busca, digite uma pergunta e pressione a tecla Retorno do teclado. Mais informações Para obter mais informações sobre o uso de seu iMac, consulte: Para saber mais sobre Consulte Como instalar a memória O capítulo 3,“Melhore a sua Memória” na página 35. Como solucionar um problema com o seu iMac O capítulo 4,“A solução para os seus problemas” na página 43. Como localizar serviço e suporte para o seu iMac “Mais informações sobre serviço e suporte” na página 58. Ou consulte o site de suporte da Apple em www.apple.com/br/support. Como utilizar o Mac OS X O site do Mac OS X fica no endereço www.apple.com/br/macosx. Ou busque “Mac OS X”na Ajuda Mac. Como mudar de um PC para o Mac “Por que você vai amar o Mac” no site www.apple.com/br/getamac/whymac. Como utilizar os aplicativos iLife O site do iLife em www.apple.com/br/ilife. Ou abra um aplicativo iLife, abra a Ajuda do aplicativo e digite uma pergunta no campo de busca.Capítulo 2 A vida com o seu iMac 33 Para saber mais sobre Consulte Como alterar as Preferências do Sistema Abra as Preferências do Sistema escolhendo Apple (K) > Preferências do Sistema. Ou busque “preferências do sistema” na Ajuda Mac. Como usar a câmera iSight Abra a Ajuda Mac e busque “iSight”. Como utilizar o teclado ou o mouse Vá para Preferências do Sistema e escolha Teclado ou Mouse. Ou abra a Ajuda Mac e busque “teclado” ou “mouse.” Como utilizar a tecnologia sem fio AirPort Extreme Consulte a página de suporte da AirPort no endereço www.apple.com/br/support/airport. Ou abra a Ajuda Mac e busque “AirPort”. Como utilizar a tecnologia sem fio Bluetooth Abra a Ajuda Mac e busque “Bluetooth”. Ou vá para a página de suporte do Bluetooth em www.apple.com/br/support/bluetooth. Como conectar uma impressora Abra a Ajuda Mac e busque “impressão”. Conexões FireWire e USB Abra a Ajuda Mac e busque “FireWire” ou “USB”. Como conectar seu computador à Internet Abra a Ajuda Mac e busque “Internet”. Monitor externo Abra a Ajuda Mac e busque “porta do monitor” ou “modo do monitor de destino”. Controle remoto Apple Remote Abra a Ajuda Mac e procure busque “remoto”. Front Row Abra a Ajuda Mac e busque “Front Row”. Como usar a SuperDrive Abra a Ajuda Mac e busque “unidade óptica”.34 Capítulo 2 A vida com o seu iMac Para saber mais sobre Consulte Especificações Visite a página de especificações no site www.apple.com/support/specs para obter as especificações técnicas. Ou abra o utilitário Visão do Sistema escolhendo Apple (K) > Sobre este Mac na barra de menus e, em seguida, clicando em Mais Informações. Novidades da Apple, downloads gratuitos e catálogos on-line de software e hardware. Visite o site da Apple em www.apple.com/br. Instruções, suporte técnico e manuais de produtos Apple. Visite o site de suporte da Apple em www.apple.com/br/support.Ajuda Mac RAM www.apple.com/br/store Melhore a sua Memória 336 Capítulo 3 Melhore a sua Memória O seu iMac é fornecido com pelo menos 4 gigabytes (GB) de memória DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory) DDR33 (Double Data Rate 3) instalado como dois módulos de memória de 2 GB. Você pode substituir ou instalar módulos de memória adicionais de 2 GB ou 4 GB até o máximo de 16 GB. Os módulos de memória precisam atender a estas especificações:  Formato SO-DIMM  1333 MHz, PC3-8500, compatível com DDR3 (também referido como DDR3 1333)  Sem armazenamento intermediário e não registrado AVISO: A Apple recomenda que a instalação seja feita por um técnico certificado pela Apple. Consulte as informações de serviço e suporte fornecidas com o seu iMac para obter informações sobre como contatar a Apple e obter assistência técnica. Se você tentar instalar memória e danificar o seu equipamento, os danos não serão cobertos pela garantia limitada do iMac.Capítulo 3 Melhore a sua Memória 37 Como instalar a memória O seu iMac possui quatro slots de memória. Dois estão preenchidos com um módulo de memória de 2 GB, no mínimo. Você pode instalar memória adicional nos slots livres ou substituir a memória nos slots preenchidos com módulos de memória de 2 GB ou 4 GB (até 16 GB de memória). Você pode adquirir memória adicional da Apple em um revendedor autorizado Apple, em uma loja distribuidora da Apple Store ou na Apple Store on-line em www.apple.com/br/store. AVISO: Sempre desligue o iMac e remova o cabo de alimentação antes de instalar memória. Não tente instalar memória com o iMac ligado. Para instalar memória: 1 Desligue o iMac, escolhendo Apple () > Desligar. 2 Desconecte todos os cabos e o cabo de alimentação do iMac. 3 Coloque uma toalha ou um tecido limpo e macio em sua superfície de trabalho. Segure o iMac pelas laterais e coloque-o com a tela voltada para baixo e com a parte inferior voltada para você.38 Capítulo 3 Melhore a sua Memória 4 Levante o suporte e utilize uma chave Phillips número 2 para soltar os três parafusos que prendem a tampa de acesso à memória. Gire-os no sentido anti-horário. Chave Phillips Levante o suporte Tampa de acesso à memória ® 5 Remova a porta de acesso à memória e coloque-a de lado.Capítulo 3 Melhore a sua Memória 39 6 Abra as abas do compartimento de memória. 7 Para substituir os módulos de memória, puxe a aba para ejetar os módulos de memória que estão instalados. Remova os módulos de memória que você deseja substituir. ® Abra a abas Puxe a aba40 Capítulo 3 Melhore a sua Memória 8 Insira os novos módulos de memória nos slots com os encaixes voltados para a direita, conforme mostrado na ilustração.  Se instalar módulos de memória adicionais, insira-os nos slots abertos.  Se você substituir os módulos de memória instalados, insira um novo módulo de memória em cada um dos slots frontais próximos ao monitor. 9 Pressione firmemente cada módulo de memória, alinhando-o dentro de seu respectivo slot. Quando o módulo de memória for corretamente encaixado, você ouvirá um leve clique. 10 Feche as abas do compartimento de memória. ® Módulos de memória Feche a abaCapítulo 3 Melhore a sua Memória 41 11 Coloque a tampa de acesso à memória e aperte os três parafusos com uma chave Phillips número 2. AVISO: Não se esqueça de colocar de volta a porta de acesso à memória depois da instalação. O iMac não funcionará corretamente sem a porta de acesso à memória. Chave Phillips Levante o suporte Tampa de acesso à memória ® 12 Segure o seu iMac pelas laterais e recoloque-o na posição correta. Em seguida, reconecte os cabos e o cabo de alimentação. 13 Pressione o botão de força (®) que fica na parte de trás do iMac para ligá-lo.42 Capítulo 3 Melhore a sua Memória Como comprovar que o iMac reconhece a nova memória Depois da instalação, certifique-se de que o iMac reconhece a nova memória. Para verificar a memória instalada no iMac: 1 Inicialize o iMac. 2 Ao ver a mesa do Mac OS X, escolha Apple () > Sobre este Mac. Você verá a quantidade total de memória instalada no iMac. Para obter uma visão detalhada da quantidade de memória instalada, abra o utilitário Visão do Sistema, clicando em Mais Informações. Se a memória que você instalou não cumprir com as especificações (veja a página 36), o iMac emitirá três toques a cada cinco segundos. Se isso ocorrer, desligue o iMac e verifique as instruções de instalação novamente para certificar-se de que a memória é compatível com o iMac e de que ela está instalada corretamente. Se ainda estiver com problemas, remova a memória e consulte as informações de suporte fornecidas ou entre em contato com o fornecedor da mesma.Ajuda Mac ajuda www.apple.com/br/support A solução para os seus problemas 444 Capítulo 4 A solução para os seus problemas Ocasionalmente, você pode encontrar algum problema ao trabalhar com o seu iMac. Leia as dicas de solução de problemas a serem utilizadas, caso tenha um problema. Você também pode encontrar mais informações para a solução de problemas na Ajuda Mac ou no site de Serviço e Suporte do iMac em www.apple.com/br/support/imac. Se tiver algum problema ao trabalhar com seu iMac, geralmente existe uma solução simples e rápida. Se você se deparar com um problema, tente se lembrar de todos os passos executados antes da ocorrência do problema. Isto pode ajudá-lo a diminuir as possíveis causas do problema e a encontrar as respostas que você precisa. Itens a anotar:  Os aplicativos que você estava utilizando quando o problema ocorreu. Os problemas que ocorrem apenas com um aplicativo específico podem indicar que este aplicativo não é compatível com a versão do Mac OS X instalada no seu computador.  Qualquer software que você instalou recentemente.  Todos os novos hardwares (como memória adicional ou periféricos) que foram conectados ou instalados. AVISO: Não tente abrir o seu iMac, exceto para instalar memória. Se o seu iMac precisar ser reparado, consulte“Mais informações sobre serviço e suporte”na página 58 para obter informações sobre como entrar em contato com a Apple ou com um Fornecedor de Serviços Autorizado da Apple para obter assistência. O seu iMac não tem peças que possam ser reparadas pelo usuário, a não ser a memória.Capítulo 4 A solução para os seus problemas 45 Problemas que o impedem de usar o iMac Se o iMac não estiver respondendo ou se o cursor não estiver se movendo  Certifique-se de que o seu teclado Apple Wireless Keyboard ou o mouse Apple Magic Mouse estejam ligados e as pilhas estejam carregadas. (Consulte “Como trocar as pilhas” na página 47.) Se você estiver usando um teclado ou um mouse USB, certifique-se de que eles estejam conectados. Desconecte os conectores e conecte-os novamente para ter certeza de que estão bem presos.  Tente fazer com que os aplicativos que estão com problema sejam encerrados. Pressione as teclas Opção e Comando (x) e pressione a tecla Esc. Se aparecer uma caixa de diálogo, selecione o aplicativo e clique em Forçar Encerrar. Em seguida, salve o trabalho que estiver fazendo em todos os aplicativos abertos e reinicie o iMac para ter certeza de que o problema foi totalmente resolvido.  Se você não conseguir encerrar o aplicativo, mantenha o botão de força (®) na parte posterior do seu iMac pressionado por cinco segundos para desligar o computador. Desconecte o cabo de alimentação do iMac. Em seguida, conecte o cabo de alimentação novamente e pressione o botão de Força (®) do iMac para ligá-lo. Se o problema voltar a ocorrer ao utilizar um determinado aplicativo, entre em contato com o fabricante desse aplicativo e confirme se ele é compatível com o computador. Para obter suporte e informações de contato sobre o software fornecido com o seu computador, visite www.apple.com/guide ou o site do fabricante. Se o problema ocorrer frequentemente, tente reinstalar o software do seu sistema (consulte “Como reinstalar o software fornecido com o seu iMac” na página 55).46 Capítulo 4 A solução para os seus problemas Se o iMac ficar bloqueado durante a inicialização ou se aparecer um ponto de interrogação piscando  Aguarde alguns segundos. Se o seu iMac não inicializar após um período de espera, desligue-o mantendo o botão de Força (®) pressionado por cerca de 5 segundos. Em seguida, mantenha pressionada a tecla Opção e pressione o botão de Força (®) novamente para reiniciar o seu computador. Mantenha a tecla Opção pressionada até que o iMac reinicie; depois, clique na seta sob o ícone do disco rígido que você deseja usar como disco de inicialização.  Quando o iMac reiniciar, abra as Preferências do Sistema e clique em Disco de Inicialização. Selecione uma pasta do Sistema Mac OS X local.  Se o problema ocorrer frequentemente, talvez você tenha que reinstalar o software do seu sistema (consulte “Como reinstalar o software fornecido com o seu iMac” na página 55). Se o iMac não estiver respondendo ou inicializando  Verifique se o cabo de alimentação está conectado ao iMac e se a tomada de energia está funcionando.  Pressione o botão de Força (®) e imediatamente mantenha pressionadas as teclas Comando (x), Opção, P e R até ouvir o som de inicialização uma segunda vez. Isto redefinirá a PRAM (RAM de parâmetro).  Se você instalou uma memória recentemente e o seu iMac estiver emitindo toques a cada cinco segundos, certifique-se de que a memória esteja instalada corretamente e de que ela seja compatível com o seu iMac. Verifique se a remoção da memória instalada permite que o seu iMac inicialize (consulte a página 42).Capítulo 4 A solução para os seus problemas 47  Desconecte o cabo de alimentação e espere pelo menos 30 segundos. Conecte o cabo de alimentação novamente e pressione o botão de alimentação (®) novamente para iniciar o iMac.  Se você ainda não estiver conseguindo reiniciar o seu iMac, consulte “Mais informações sobre serviço e suporte” na página 58 para obter mais informações sobre como entrar em contato com a Apple para obter serviço. Como trocar as pilhas O teclado Apple Wireless Keyboard e o mouse Apple Magic Mouse são fornecidos com duas pilhas AA instaladas. Você pode substituí-las por pilhas AA alcalinas, de lítio ou recarregáveis. Mantenha a tampa do compartimento da bateria e as pilhas fora do alcance de crianças. AVISO: Ao trocar as baterias, troque todas ao mesmo tempo. Não misture baterias novas com velhas, nem misture tipos de baterias (por exemplo, não misture baterias alcalinas com baterias de lítio). Não abra ou perfure as baterias, não instale-as ao contrário ou exponha-as ao fogo, altas temperaturas ou água. Mantenha as baterias fora do alcance de crianças. Para trocar as pilhas em um teclado sem fio: 1 Pressione o botão de força (®) para desligar o seu teclado. 2 Use uma moeda para remover a tampa do compartimento das pilhas. Tampa do compartimento das pilhas48 Capítulo 4 A solução para os seus problemas 3 Coloque duas pilhas AA no compartimento como ilustrado abaixo. Inserir pilhas 4 Recoloque a tampa do compartimento das pilhas. Para verificar o estado das pilhas, pressione o botão de força (®). Se o indicador luminoso não acender, talvez seja necessário trocar as pilhas. Você pode verificar o nível das pilhas na Preferência do Teclado. Escolha Apple () > Preferências do Sistema e clique em Teclado. O nível das pilhas aparecerá no canto inferior esquerdo. Para trocar as pilhas em um mouse Apple Magic Mouse: 1 Deslize o interruptor on/off na parte inferior do mouse para desligá-lo. 2 Deslize o fecho para baixo e remova a tampa das pilhas. Fecho PilhasCapítulo 4 A solução para os seus problemas 49 3 Insira as pilhas com as extremidades positivas (+) viradas para cima, como mostrado abaixo. 4 Recoloque a tampa e ligue o mouse. Talvez seja necessário clicar no mouse Apple Magic Mouse uma vez para reconectá-lo ao iMac. Para verificar o estado das pilhas, deslize o interruptor on/off para ligar o mouse. Se o indicador luminoso não acender, talvez seja necessário trocar as pilhas. Você pode verificar o nível das pilhas na Preferência do Mouse. Escolha Apple () > Preferências do Sistema e clique em Mouse. O nível das pilhas aparecerá no canto inferior esquerdo. Como utilizar o Apple Hardware Test Se você suspeitar que existe um problema com o hardware do seu iMac, use o aplicativo Apple Hardware Test para ajudar a determinar se existe um problema com algum componente do computador, como a memória ou o processador. Para utilizar o Apple Hardware Test: 1 Desconecte todos os dispositivos externos do seu iMac, exceto um teclado e um mouse USB, caso você os utilize. Se você tiver um cabo Ethernet conectado ao computador, desconecte-o. 2 Reinicie o iMac mantendo pressionada a tecla D. 3 Quando aparecer a tela de seleção de idioma do Apple Hardware Test, selecione o idioma que deseja usar. 4 Pressione a tecla Retorno ou clique no botão de seta direita.50 Capítulo 4 A solução para os seus problemas 5 Quando a tela principal do Apple Hardware Test aparecer (depois de 45 segundos), siga as instruções da tela. 6 Se o Apple Hardware Test detectar um problema, ele exibirá um código de erro. Anote o código do erro antes de buscar alternativas de suporte. Se o Apple Hardware Test não detectar uma falha de hardware, talvez o problema esteja relacionado com o software. Se este procedimento não funcionar, você pode inserir o DVD de Instalação de Aplicativos fornecido com o seu iMac para usar o Apple Hardware Test. Para obter mais informações, consulte o arquivo Leia-me do Apple Hardware Test no DVD de Instalação de Aplicativos. Problemas com a conexão à Internet O seu iMac é fornecido com o aplicativo Assistente de Configuração de Rede para ajudá-lo a configurar uma conexão de Internet. Abra as Preferências do Sistema e clique em Rede. Clique no botão “Obter auxílio” para abrir o Assistente de Configuração de Rede. Se estiver com problemas com sua conexão à Internet, você pode tentar realizar os passos desta seção de acordo com o seu tipo de conexão ou pode usar o Diagnóstico da Rede. Para usar o Diagnóstico da Rede: 1 Escolha Apple () > Preferências do Sistema. 2 Clique em Rede e, em seguida, clique em“Obter Auxílio”. 3 Clique em Diagnóstico para abrir o Diagnóstico da Rede. 4 Siga as instruções que aparecem na tela.Capítulo 4 A solução para os seus problemas 51 Se o Diagnóstico da Rede não resolver o problema, talvez haja um problema com o provedor de acesso à Internet (ISP) ao qual você está tentando se conectar, com um dispositivo externo que você está utilizando para conectar-se ao ISP ou com o servidor que você está tentando acessar. Você pode tentar os passos das seções a seguir. Conexão com a Internet através de Modem a Cabo, DSL e LAN Certifique-se de que todos os cabos do modem estejam firmemente conectados, incluindo o cabo de alimentação, o cabo do modem ao computador e o cabo do modem à tomada. Verifique também os cabos e fontes de alimentação conectados a hubs ou roteadores de Ethernet. Desligue o modem e ligue-o novamente e redefina o hardware do modem. Desligue o modem a cabo ou DSL por alguns minutos e, em seguida, ligue-o novamente. Alguns provedores de acesso à Internet recomendam que você desconecte o cabo de alimentação do modem. Se o seu modem tiver um botão de reinício, você poderá pressioná-lo antes ou depois de desligar e ligar a energia. Importante: As instruções que se referem a modems não se aplicam a usuários de LAN. Os usuários de LAN podem ter hubs, comutadores, roteadores ou bases de conexão que os usuários de modem a cabo e DSL não possuem. Os usuários de LAN devem entrar em contato com seu administrador de rede e não com um ISP. Conexões PPPoE Se você não estiver conseguindo conectar-se ao seu provedor de serviços de Internet utilizando PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet), verifique se digitou as informações corretas no painel de preferências Rede.52 Capítulo 4 A solução para os seus problemas Para digitar as configurações de PPPoE: 1 Escolha Apple () > Preferências do Sistema. 2 Clique em Rede. 3 Clique em Adicionar (+) na parte inferior da lista de serviços de conexão de rede e escolha PPPoE no menu Interface. 4 Escolha uma interface para o serviço PPPoE no menu Ethernet. Escolha Ethernet se você estiver se conectando a uma rede cabeada ou AirPort se estiver se conectando a uma rede sem fio. 5 Digite as informações que você recebeu do seu provedor de acesso, como nome da conta, senha e nome do serviço PPPoE (se o seu provedor de serviço solicitar). 6 Clique em Aplicar para ativar os ajustes. Conexões de Rede Certifique-se de que o cabo Ethernet esteja conectado ao seu iMac e à rede. Verifique se os cabos e as fontes de alimentação dos hubs e roteadores Ethernet estão bem conectados. Se você tiver dois ou mais computadores compartilhando uma conexão de Internet, verifique se a rede está corretamente configurada. Você precisa saber se o seu provedor de acesso à Internet fornece apenas um ou vários endereços IP, um para cada computador.Capítulo 4 A solução para os seus problemas 53 Se ele fornecer apenas um endereço IP, então você deve possuir um roteador capaz de compartilhar a conexão, também conhecido como NAT (network address translation) ou “mascaramento de IP”. Para obter informações de configuração, verifique a documentação fornecida com o seu roteador ou pergunte à pessoa que configurou a sua rede. A estação base AirPort pode ser usada para compartilhar um endereço IP entre vários computadores. Para obter mais informações sobre como usar uma estação base AirPort, verifique a Ajuda Mac ou visite o site da AirPort Extreme em www.apple.com/br/support/airport. Se você não conseguir resolver o problema realizando estes passos, entre em contato com o provedor de serviços de Internet ou com o administrador da rede. Problemas com a comunicação sem fio AirPort Se tiver problemas ao usar a comunicação sem fio AirPort  Certifique-se de que o computador ou a rede com a qual você está tentando conectar-se esteja funcionando e tenha um ponto de acesso sem fio.  Certifique-se de que tenha configurado o software adequadamente de acordo com as instruções fornecidas com a sua estação base ou ponto de acesso.  Certifique-se de que você esteja dentro do alcance da antena do outro computador ou ponto de acesso da rede. Dispositivos eletrônicos ou estruturas de metal próximas podem interferir na comunicação sem fio e reduzir o raio de alcance. Reposicionar ou girar o computador pode melhorar a recepção.  Verifique o menu de estado da AirPort (Z) na barra de menus. Aparecem até quatro barras, indicando a potência do sinal. Se o sinal for fraco, tente mudar a sua localização.54 Capítulo 4 A solução para os seus problemas  Consulte a Ajuda AirPort (escolha Ajuda > Ajuda Mac e, em seguida, escolha Biblioteca > Ajuda AirPort na barra de menus). Consulte também as instruções fornecidas com o dispositivo sem fio para obter mais informações. Como manter seu software atualizado Você pode se conectar à Internet para transferir e instalar automaticamente as últimas versões de software gratuitas, drivers e outras melhorias da Apple. Quando você estiver conectado à Internet, a Atualização de Software verifica se existe alguma atualização disponível para o seu computador. Você pode ajustar o seu iMac para verificar periodicamente as atualizações e depois transferir e instalar o software que foi atualizado. Para verificar o software atualizado: 1 Escolha Apple () > Preferências do Sistema. 2 Clique no ícone Atualização de Software e siga as instruções na tela.  Para obter mais informações, busque “Atualização de Software”na Ajuda Mac.  Para obter as informações mais recentes sobre o Mac OS X, visite a página www.apple.com/br/macosx.Capítulo 4 A solução para os seus problemas 55 Quando um aplicativo não responde Em raras ocasiões, um aplicativo pode ficar“congelado”. O Mac OS X fornece uma maneira de encerrar um aplicativo que não esteja respondendo sem ter de reiniciar o iMac. O encerramento de um aplicativo bloqueado pode permitir que você salve o seu trabalho em outros aplicativos abertos. Para forçar o encerramento de um aplicativo: 1 Pressione Comando (x) + Opção + Esc ou escolha Apple () > Forçar Encerrar. A caixa de diálogo Forçar Encerrar Aplicativos aparece com o aplicativo selecionado. 2 Clique em Forçar Encerrar. O aplicativo é encerrado, deixando todos os outros aplicativos abertos. Como reinstalar o software fornecido com o seu iMac Use os discos de instalação de software fornecidos com o seu iMac para reinstalar o Mac OS X e quaisquer aplicativos fornecidos com o seu computador. Importante: A Apple recomenda que você faça sempre um backup dos dados do disco rígido antes de restaurar o software. A Apple não se responsabiliza pela perda de dados. Como instalar o Mac OS X Para instalar o Mac OS X: 1 Faça o backup dos arquivos importantes. 2 Insira o DVD de Instalação do Mac OS X fornecido com o seu computador.56 Capítulo 4 A solução para os seus problemas 3 Clique duas vezes em Instalar o Mac OS X. 4 Siga as instruções que aparecem na tela. No painel que aparece pedindo a seleção de um disco, selecione seu disco rígido do Mac OS X atual (na maioria dos casos, só há um disponível). 5 Para controlar quais partes do Mac OS X devem ser instaladas, clique em Personalizar e selecione as partes que deseja instalar. Clique no triângulo de abertura ao lado de Aplicativos para selecionar as caixas dos aplicativos que deseja instalar. 6 Quando a instalação estiver concluída, clique em Reiniciar para reiniciar o seu iMac. 7 Siga os avisos do Assistente de Configuração para configurar a sua nova conta de usuário. Se quiser apagar e instalar, não se esqueça de fazer backup dos dados importantes antes de começar. Utilize o Utilitário de Disco do DVD de Instalação do Mac OS X para apagar o disco rígido. Para obter mais informações sobre o Utilitário de Disco e suas opções, consulte a Ajuda Mac ou abra o Utilitário de Disco (em /Aplicativos/Utilitários/) e escolha Ajuda > Ajuda Utilitário de Disco. Você pode também ver instruções detalhadas no seguinte artigo da base de dados: http://support.apple.com/kb/HT3910? ?viewlocale=pt_BR Como instalar os aplicativos iLife Você pode reinstalar os aplicativos iLife fornecidos com o iMac caso os exclua acidentalmente ou depois de realizar um apagamento e reinstalação. Para instalar os aplicativos iLife fornecidos com o iMac: 1 Insira o DVD de Instalação de Aplicativos fornecido com o seu iMac. 2 Siga as instruções que aparecem na tela. No painel Tipo de Instalação, clique em Personalizar. 3 Quando a instalação estiver concluída, clique em Fechar.Capítulo 4 A solução para os seus problemas 57 Outros problemas Se você tiver um problema com o software de um fabricante que não seja a Apple, entre em contato com o fabricante. Normalmente, os fabricantes de software fornecem atualizações dos mesmos em seus sites. Você pode procurar e instalar o software Apple mais recente utilizando o painel Atualização de Software que se encontra nas Preferências do Sistema. Seu iMac está configurado para buscar atualizações automaticamente uma vez por semana, mas você pode configurá-lo para buscar as atualizações diariamente ou mensalmente. Também é possível verificar se há atualizações manualmente. Para obter mais informações, escolha Ajuda > Ajuda Mac e busque “atualização de software”. Se tiver problemas para inserir um disco  Empurre o disco na unidade com um movimento contínuo até que seus dedos toquem a parte lateral do seu iMac.  Use apenas um disco de tamanho padrão. Se tiver problemas para ejetar um disco  Encerre todos os aplicativos que possam estar utilizando o disco e pressione a tecla Ejetar Mídia (C) do teclado.  Abra uma janela do Finder e clique no ícone Ejetar próximo ao ícone do disco na barra lateral ou arraste o ícone do disco da Mesa para o Lixo.  Finalize a sessão de sua conta do usuário, escolhendo Apple () > Finalizar Sessão de “Usuário”(seu nome de conta aparece no menu), e, em seguida, pressione a tecla Ejetar Mídia (C) no teclado.  Reinicie o iMac, mantendo o botão do mouse pressionado.58 Capítulo 4 A solução para os seus problemas Se tiver problemas com a esfera de rolagem do mouse  Se você tiver um mouse com uma esfera de rolagem e a esfera não estiver rolando adequadamente para cima, para baixo e para os lados, segure o mouse de cabeça para baixo e role a esfera energicamente enquanto efetua a limpeza.  Consulte o item“Como limpar o mouse” na página 68 para obter mais informações. Se estiver com problemas para utilizar o iMac ou para trabalhar com o Mac OS X  Se a resposta à sua pergunta não estiver neste manual, consulte a Ajuda Mac para obter instruções e informações para solução de problemas. No Finder, escolha Ajuda > Ajuda Mac.  Consulte o site de suporte da Apple no endereço www.apple.com/br/support para obter as últimas informações sobre solução de problemas e atualizações de software. Se os seus ajustes de data e hora não permanecem corretamente ajustados  Pode ser que você tenha de substituir a bateria de reserva interna. Para obter mais informações sobre como contatar a Apple e obter assistência, consulte “Mais informações sobre serviço e suporte” abaixo. Mais informações sobre serviço e suporte O seu iMac não tem nenhuma peça que possa ser consertada ou substituída pelo usuário, a não ser o teclado, o mouse e a memória. Se precisar de assistência técnica, entre em contato com a Apple ou leve o iMac a um fornecedor de serviços autorizado Apple. Você poderá encontrar mais informações sobre o seu iMac utilizando os recursos on-line, a ajuda na tela, o utilitário Visão do Sistema ou o Apple Hardware Test.Capítulo 4 A solução para os seus problemas 59 Recursos on-line Para obter informações sobre serviço e suporte on-line, visite o site www.apple.com/br/support. Escolha o seu país no menu. Você pode buscar no banco de dados AppleCare Knowledge Base para ver se há atualizações de software ou buscar ajuda nos fóruns de discussão da Apple. Ajuda na tela Na Ajuda Mac, você poderá encontrar respostas às suas perguntas e também instruções e informações para a solução de problemas. Escolha Ajuda > Ajuda Mac. Visão do Sistema Para obter informações sobre o seu iMac, use o utilitário Visão do Sistema. Ele mostra a você quais hardwares e softwares estão instalados, o número de série, a versão do sistema operacional, quanta memória está instalada e muito mais. Para abrir o utilitário Visão do Sistema, escolha Apple () > Sobre este Mac na barra de menus e clique em Mais Informações. Serviço e suporte AppleCare Seu iMac vem com 90 dias de garantia para suporte técnico e um ano de cobertura de garantia para reparações de hardware. As reparações em garantia podem ser solicitadas em uma loja Apple Store ou em um centro de reparações autorizado Apple como, por exemplo, um fornecedor de serviços autorizado Apple. Você pode aumentar o prazo de cobertura da garantia comprando um plano AppleCare Protection Plan. Para obter mais informações, visite o site www.apple.com/br/support/products ou visite o site de seu país relacionado abaixo.60 Capítulo 4 A solução para os seus problemas Se precisar de assistência técnica, os representantes de suporte telefônico da AppleCare poderão ajudá-lo a instalar e abrir aplicativos e a solucionar problemas básicos. Ligue para a central de suporte mais próxima (os primeiros 90 dias são gratuitos). Quando ligar, tenha à mão a data da compra e o número de série de seu iMac. Nota: Os 90 dias de suporte telefônico gratuitos começam na data da compra. As ligações telefônicas poderão ser cobradas. País Telefone Site Brasil 0800-761-0880 www.apple.com/br/support Itália (39) 199 120 800 www.apple.com/it/support México 001-866-676-5682 www.apple.com/mx/support Espanha (34) 902 151 992 www.apple.com/es/support Os números de telefone estão sujeitos a alteração e talvez sejam aplicadas tarifas telefônicas locais e nacionais. Veja a lista completa na Internet: www.apple.com/support/contact/phone_contacts.html Como localizar o número de série do seu produto Use qualquer um destes métodos para encontrar o número de série do seu iMac:  Escolha Apple () > Sobre este Mac. Clique no número de versão abaixo das palavras “Mac OS X” para alternar entre o número de versão do Mac OS X, a versão da fase e o número de série.  Clique no ícone do Finder e abra /Aplicativos/Utilitários/Visão do Sistema. Clique em Hardware no painel Conteúdo.  Verifique embaixo do suporte do iMac.Ajuda Mac ergonomia www.apple.com/br/environment E finalmente... 562 Capítulo 5 E finalmente... Para a sua segurança e do seu equipamento, siga estas regras para utilizar e limpar o seu iMac e para trabalhar com mais comodidade. Mantenha estas instruções à mão para que você ou outras pessoas possam consultá-las. NOTA: O armazenamento e o uso incorreto do seu computador pode fazer com que você perca a garantia do fabricante. Informações importantes de segurança AVISO: A falha em seguir estas instruções de segurança pode resultar em incêndio, choque elétrico ou outros danos e prejuízos. Manuseio adequado Configure o seu iMac em uma superfície de trabalho estável. Nunca coloque objetos dentro das aberturas de ventilação. Água e locais úmidos Mantenha o seu iMac longe de fontes de líquido, como bebidas, pias, banheiras, chuveiros etc. Proteja o seu iMac da umidade e de climas úmidos, como chuva, neve ou neblina. Energia A única maneira de desconectar completamente a energia é desconectando o cabo de alimentação. Puxe pelo plugue, não pelo cabo. Sempre desconecte o cabo de alimentação antes de abrir o iMac para instalar memória.Capítulo 5 E finalmente... 63 Desconecte o cabo de alimentação (puxando pelo plugue, não pelo cabo) e desconecte o cabo Ethernet ou telefônico, caso exista alguma das seguintes condições:  Para adicionar memória.  Se o cabo de alimentação ou o plugue estiverem desgastados ou danificados.  Se você derramar alguma substância dentro do gabinete do computador.  Se o iMac foi exposto a chuva ou a umidade excessiva.  Se o iMac caiu ou o gabinete foi danificado.  Se você achar que o iMac precisa de serviços ou reparos.  Se você quiser limpar o gabinete (utilize apenas o procedimento recomendado descrito posteriormente). Importante: A única maneira de desconectar totalmente a energia é desconectando o cabo de alimentação da tomada. Certifique-se de que pelo menos uma parte do cabo de alimentação pode ser facilmente alcançada para que você possa desconectar o iMac quando precisar. AVISO: O cabo de alimentação de corrente alternada possui um plugue aterrado de três fios (trata-se de um plugue com um terceiro pino de aterramento). Esse plugue somente se conecta a uma tomada de corrente alternada aterrada. Se você não conseguir inserir o plugue em uma tomada porque ela não está aterrada, entre em contato com um eletricista qualificado para substituir a tomada por uma tomada devidamente aterrada. Não subestime a necessidade de ter um plugue aterrado.64 Capítulo 5 E finalmente... Especificações de potência:  Voltagem: 100 a 240 V AC  Corrente: 3 A, máximo  Frequência: 50 a 60 Hz Danos à audição Se os fones de ouvido tipo tampão ou fones de ouvido comuns forem usados em um volume muito alto, pode ocorrer a perda permanente da audição. Ajuste o volume para um nível seguro. Com o tempo, você pode se adaptar a um volume de som muito alto e ele parecerá normal, mas, mesmo assim, esse volume ainda pode ser prejudicial à sua audição. Se estiver ouvindo zumbidos ou sons muito abafados nos seus ouvidos, pare de utilizar os fones e faça um exame auditivo. Quanto mais alto o volume, mais rápido a sua audição pode ser afetada. Os especialistas em audição dão estas sugestões para a proteção de sua audição:  Limite a quantidade de tempo que você usa os fones de ouvido tipo tampão ou fones de ouvido com um volume alto.  Evite aumentar o volume para bloquear ruídos do ambiente.  Abaixe o volume se não puder ouvir as pessoas falando com você. Atividades de alto risco Este sistema de computador não foi projetado para ser usado na operação de instalações nuclear, sistemas de comunicação ou navegação de aeronaves, sistemas de controle de tráfego aéreo ou qualquer outro uso onde a falha do sistema de computador pode causar a morte, danos pessoais ou danos graves ao meio ambiente.Capítulo 5 E finalmente... 65 Informações sobre laser para unidades de disco ópticas AVISO: Fazer ajustes ou executar procedimentos diferentes dos especificados no manual do seu equipamento pode resultar em perigosas exposições a radiações. A unidade de disco óptica do seu iMac contém um laser que é seguro no uso normal, mas que pode ser prejudicial aos seus olhos caso seja desmontado. Para a sua segurança, permita apenas que este equipamento seja reparado por um fornecedor de serviços autorizado da Apple. Importante: Os equipamentos elétricos podem ser perigosos se forem usados incorretamente. A operação deste produto ou de produtos similares precisa sempre ser supervisionada por um adulto. Não permita que crianças tenham acesso à parte interna de equipamentos elétricos e não deixe que manuseiem qualquer tipo de cabo. AVISO: Nunca introduza objetos de nenhum tipo dentro deste produto através das aberturas de ventilação do gabinete. Isto pode ser perigoso e danificar o seu computador. Não faça reparos sozinho O seu iMac não tem nenhuma peça que possa ser reparada ou substituída pelo usuário, a não ser o teclado, o mouse e a memória (consulte “Como instalar a memória” na página 37). Não tente abrir o seu iMac. Se o seu iMac necessitar de reparação, entre em contato com o Fornecedor de Serviços Autorizado Apple ou a Apple. Consulte “Mais informações sobre serviço e suporte” na página 58. Se você abrir o iMac ou instalar outros itens que não sejam a memória, você corre o risco de danificar o equipamento. Tal risco não está coberto pela garantia limitada do iMac.66 Capítulo 5 E finalmente... Informações importantes de manuseio NOTA: A falha em seguir estas instruções de segurança pode resultar em danos ao seu iMac ou em outras propriedades. Ambiente de funcionamento Utilizar o iMac fora destes limites de funcionamento pode afetar o desempenho do mesmo:  Temperatura de funcionamento: 10° a 35° C  Temperatura de armazenamento: -20° a 47° C  Umidade relativa: 5% a 95% (sem condensação)  Altitude máxima de funcionamento: 3.048 metros Não utilize o seu iMac em áreas com quantidades significativas de poeira dispersa no ar ou com fumaça de cigarros, charutos, cinzeiros, fogões ou lareiras, ou ainda perto de um umidificador ultrassônico que use água de torneira não filtrada. As pequenas partículas dispersas no ar produzidas por cigarros, cozimentos ou queimadas, ou ainda por um umidificador ultrassônico que não use água filtrada, podem, em raras circunstâncias, entrar nas aberturas de ventilação do iMac e,sob certas condições, resultar em uma ligeiro névoa na superfície interna do painel de vidro que cobre o monitor do iMac. Como ligar o seu iMac Nunca ligue o seu iMac se todas as suas peças internas e externas não estiverem no lugar. Utilizar o computador quando estão faltando componentes pode ser perigoso e pode danificá-lo. Como transportar o iMac Antes de levantar ou reposicionar o iMac, desligue-o e desconecte todos os cabos conectados a ele. Para levantar ou mover o iMac, segure pelas laterais do mesmo.Capítulo 5 E finalmente... 67 Como usar conectores e portas Nunca force um conector para que entre em uma porta. Ao conectar um dispositivo, certifique-se de que a porta esteja livre de fragmentos, que o conector coincida com a porta e que você posicionou o conector corretamente em relação à porta. Como usar a unidade óptica A SuperDrive de seu iMac é compatível com discos padrão de 12 cm. Discos de formato irregular ou menores que 12 cm não são compatíveis. Como guardar o seu iMac Se você for guardar o seu iMac por um período prolongado, mantenha-o em um local fresco (idealmente, 22° C). Como limpar o iMac Siga estas instruções para limpar a parte externa do iMac e seus componentes:  Desligue o iMac e desconecte todos os cabos.  Use um pano úmido, macio e sem fiapos para limpar a parte externa do iMac. Evite deixar entrar umidade nas aberturas. Não borrife líquidos diretamente no iMac.  Não use sprays aerossóis, solventes ou abrasivos. Como limpar a tela do iMac Use o pano que acompanha o seu iMac para limpar a tela. Para limpar a tela do seu iMac, faça o seguinte:  Desligue o iMac e desconecte todos os cabos.  Umedeça o pano que acompanha o seu iMac — ou outro tecido limpo, suave, sem fiapos — somente com água e limpe a tela. Não borrife líquidos diretamente sobre a tela.68 Capítulo 5 E finalmente... Como limpar o mouse Pode ser necessário limpar o mouse de vez em quando para remover a sujeira acumulada. Use um pano sem fiapos ligeiramente úmido. Não deixe entrar umidade em nenhuma das aberturas nem use sprays em aerossol, solventes ou abrasivos. Se você comprou um mouse Apple USB com o seu iMac, segure o mouse de cabeça para baixo e gire o botão de rolagem energicamente com o pano fornecido com o iMac (ou com outro tecido limpo, suave, sem fiapos) para ajudar a remover qualquer partícula que possa interferir em um deslizamento adequado. Dicas sobre ergonomia Aqui estão algumas dicas para ajudar a criar um ambiente de trabalho saudável. Teclado Quando você estiver utilizando o teclado, os seus ombros precisam estar relaxados. O braço e o antebraço devem formar um ângulo reto aproximadamente, com o pulso e a mão ligeiramente em linha reta. Mude frequentemente a posição das mãos para evitar fadiga. Alguns usuários de computadores podem desenvolver desconforto nas mãos, pulsos ou braços depois de trabalho intenso e sem paradas. Se você começar a ter dores crônicas ou desconforto nas mãos, pulsos ou braços, um médico especialista qualificado. Mouse Posicione o mouse na mesma altura que o teclado e com um alcance confortável.Capítulo 5 E finalmente... 69 Monitor Posicione o monitor de maneira que a parte superior da tela fique ligeiramente abaixo do nível dos olhos quando você estiver de frente para o teclado. A melhor distância entre seus olhos e a tela depende de você, embora a maioria das pessoas parece preferir a distância de 45 a 70 cm. Posicione o monitor de maneira a minimizar o brilho e os reflexos na tela provenientes de luzes e janelas próximas. A base permite que você ajuste o monitor no melhor ângulo de visualização, ajudando a reduzir ou eliminar o brilho de fontes de luz que você não pode mover. Coxas levemente inclinadas Ombros relaxados Tela posicionada para evitar reflexos Antebraços e mãos formando uma linha reta Antebraços em ângulo reto ou levemente inclinados Zona lombar apoiada Pés apoiados totalmente no chão ou em um apoio para pés. Parte superior da tela na mesma altura dos olhos ou a um nível levemente inferior. Espaço livre debaixo da superfície de trabalho 45–70 cm70 Capítulo 5 E finalmente... Cadeira O ideal é utilizar uma cadeira regulável que proporcione um apoio confortável e firme. Ajuste a altura da cadeira de forma que suas pernas fiquem horizontalmente assentadas e seus pés fiquem apoiados no chão. O encosto da cadeira deve apoiar a parte inferior de suas costas (a região lombar). Siga as instruções do fabricante para ajustar o encosto da cadeira de forma que se adapte perfeitamente ao seu corpo. Talvez você tenha que aumentar a altura da cadeira para que seus antebraços e mãos fiquem no ângulo correto em relação ao teclado. Se não for possível descansar seus pés apoiados no chão, use um descanso para pés com altura ajustável e incline-o para que se ajuste a qualquer espaço entre o chão e seus pés. Ou você pode abaixar a sua mesa para eliminar a necessidade de um descanso para os pés. Uma outra opção é usar uma mesa com uma bandeja para teclado que fique mais baixa que a superfície normal de trabalho. Na Internet você poderá encontrar mais informações sobre ergonomia: www.apple.com/br/about/ergonomics A Apple e o meio ambiente A Apple Inc. reconhece que tem grande responsabilidade na minimização do impacto ambiental causado por seus produtos e operações. Na Internet você poderá encontrar mais informações: www.apple.com/br/environment71 Regulatory Compliance Information FCC Compliance Statement This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. See instructions if interference to radio or television reception is suspected. L‘utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux conditions suivantes: (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l’utilisateur du dispositif doit étre prêt à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. Radio and Television Interference This computer equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not installed and used properly—that is, in strict accordance with Apple’s instructions—it may cause interference with radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules. These specifications are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. You can determine whether your computer system is causing interference by turning it off. If the interference stops, it was probably caused by the computer or one of the peripheral devices. If your computer system does cause interference to radio or television reception, try to correct the interference by using one or more of the following measures: • Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops. • Move the computer to one side or the other of the television or radio. • Move the computer farther away from the television or radio. • Plug the computer into an outlet that is on a different circuit from the television or radio. (That is, make certain the computer and the television or radio are on circuits controlled by different circuit breakers or fuses.) If necessary, consult an Apple Authorized Service Provider or Apple. See the service and support information that came with your Apple product. Or consult an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. Important: Changes or modifications to this product not authorized by Apple Inc. could void the EMC compliance and negate your authority to operate the product. This product has demonstrated EMC compliance under conditions that included the use of compliant peripheral devices and shielded cables between system components. It is important that you use compliant peripheral devices and shielded cables (including Ethernet network cables) between system components to reduce the possibility of causing interference to radios, television sets, and other electronic devices.72 Responsible party (contact for FCC matters only): Apple Inc. Corporate Compliance 1 Infinite Loop, MS 26-A Cupertino, CA 95014 Wireless Radio Use This device is restricted to indoor use when operating in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency band. Cet appareil doit être utilisé à l’intérieur. この製品は、周波数帯域 5.18 ~ 5.32 GHz で動作しているときは、 屋内においてのみ使用可能です。 Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy The radiated output power of this device is well below the FCC and EU radio frequency exposure limits. However, this device should be operated with a minimum distance of at least 20 cm between its antennas and a person’s body and the antennas used with this transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter subject to the conditions of the FCC Grant. FCC Bluetooth Wireless Compliance The antenna used with this transmitter must not be colocated or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter subject to the conditions of the FCC Grant. Bluetooth Industry Canada Statement This Class B device meets all requirements of the Canadian interference-causing equipment regulations. Cet appareil numérique de la Class B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada. Industry Canada Statement Complies with the Canadian ICES-003 Class B specifications. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Bluetooth Europe—EU Declaration of Conformity This wireless device complies with the R&TTE Directive. Europe—EU Declaration of Conformity See www.apple.com/euro/compliance. European Community Complies with European Directives 72/23/EEC and 89/336/EEC. Korea Warning Statements Singapore Wireless Certification73 Taiwan Wireless Statements Taiwan Class B Statement VCCI Class B Statement Russia Mouse Class 1 Laser Information The Apple Magic Mouse is a Class 1 laser product in accordance with IEC60825-1 A1 A2 and 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26, 2001. Caution: Modification of this device may result in hazardous radiation exposure. For your safety, have this equipment serviced only by an Apple Authorized Service Provider. A Class 1 laser is safe under reasonably foreseeable conditions per the requirements in IEC 60825-1 AND 21 CFR 1040. However, it is recommended that you do not direct the laser beam at anyone’s eyes. External USB Modem Information When connecting your iMac to the phone line using an external USB modem, refer to the telecommunications agency information in the documentation that came with your modem.74 ENERGY STAR ® Compliance As an ENERGY STAR ® partner, Apple has determined that standard configurations of this product meet the ENERGY STAR ® guidelines for energy efficiency. The ENERGY STAR ® program is a partnership with electronic equipment manufacturers to promote energy-efficient products. Reducing energy consumption of products saves money and helps conserve valuable resources. This computer is shipped with power management enabled with the computer set to sleep after 10 minutes of user inactivity. To wake your computer, click the mouse or press any key on the keyboard. For more information about ENERGY STAR ® , visit: www.energystar.gov Türkiye:75 Informações sobre descarte e reciclagem Este símbolo indica que o seu produto deve ser descartado de acordo com as leis e normas locais que regem o descarte de detritos tóxicos. Quando seu produto alcançar o fim de sua vida útil, entre em contato com a Apple ou com as autoridades locais para obter mais informações sobre as opções de reciclagem. Para obter informações sobre o programa de reciclagem da Apple, visite o site www.apple.com/br/environment/recycling. Brazil—Disposal Information: Brasil: Informações sobre eliminação e reciclagem O símbolo indica que este produto e/ou sua bateria não devem ser descartadas no lixo doméstico. Quando decidir descartar este produto e/ou sua bateria, faça-o de acordo com as leis e diretrizes ambientais locais. Para informações sobre o programa de reciclagem da Apple, pontos de coleta e telefone de informações, visite www.apple.com/br/environment. União europeia — Informações sobre descarte: O símbolo acima significa que, de acordo com as leis e regulamentações locais, o produto deve ser descartado separado do lixo doméstico. Quando este produto atingir o fim de sua vida útil, leve-o a um ponto de coleta designado pelas autoridades locais. Alguns pontos de coleta aceitam produtos gratuitamente. A coleta separada e a reciclagem do produto no momento do descarte ajudará a conservar os recursos naturais e garantirá uma reciclagem de forma respeitosa com o meio-ambiente e a saúde humana. Caution: There is a risk of explosion if the battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions in this manual. Achtung: Wenn die Batterie nicht mit dem richtigen Batterietyp ersetzt wird, besteht Explosionsgefahr. Entsorgen Sie verbrauchte Batterien gemäß der Anweisungen in diesem Handbuch. Attenzione: C’è rischio di esplosione se la batteria viene sostituita con un tipo di batteria non corretto. Smaltire le batterie usate secondo le istruzioni riportate in questo manuale. VARNING: Om batteriet ersätts med ett batteri av fel typ finns det risk för explosion. Lämna in batteriet för återvinning i enlighet med anvisningarna i denna handbok. 76 Informações sobre descarte de baterias Descarte as baterias de acordo com as normas e leis ambientais locais. California: The coin cell battery in the optional Apple Remote contains perchlorates. Special handling and disposal may apply. Refer to: www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate Deutschland: Dieses Gerät enthält Batterien. Bitte nicht in den Hausmüll werfen. Entsorgen Sie dieses Gerätes am Ende seines Lebenszyklus entsprechend der maßgeblichen gesetzlichen Regelungen. Das Gerät enthält Batterien. Diese gehören nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können verbrauchte Batterien beim Handel oder bei den Kommunen unentgeltlich abgeben. Um Kurzschlüsse zu vermeiden, kleben Sie die Pole der Batterien vorsorglich mit einem Klebestreifen ab. Nederlands: Gebruikte batterijen kunnen worden ingeleverd bij de chemokar of in een speciale batterijcontainer voor klein chemisch afval (kca) worden gedeponeerd. Taiwan:KApple Inc. © 2010 Apple Inc. Todos os direitos reservados. De acordo com as leis de copyright (direitos autorais), este manual não pode ser copiado, em sua totalidade ou em parte, sem o consentimento por escrito da Apple. Todos os esforços foram feitos para assegurar que as informações deste manual sejam precisas. A Apple não se responsabiliza por erros de impressão ou de transcrição. Apple 1 Infinite Loop Cupertino, CA 95014 408-996-1010 www.apple.com O logotipo Apple é uma marca de fábrica da Apple, Inc., registrada nos EUA e em outros países. O uso do logotipo Apple do “teclado”(Opção-Maiúsculas-K) para fins comerciais, sem o consentimento prévio por escrito da Apple, pode constituir infração comercial e concorrência desleal no que se refere às leis estaduais e federais. Apple, o logotipo Apple, AirPort, AirPort Extreme, Cover Flow, Exposé, FireWire, GarageBand, iCal, iChat, iLife, iMac, iMovie, iPhone, iPhoto, iPod, iSight, iTunes, Keynote, Mac, Mac OS, Photo Booth, QuickTime, Safari, Snow Leopard, Spotlight, SuperDrive e Time Machine são marcas de fábrica da Apple Inc. registradas nos EUA e em outros países. Finder, o logotipo do FireWire e iPad Multi-Touch são marcas comerciais da Apple Inc. AppleCare, Apple Store e iTunes Store são marcas de serviço da Apple Inc., registradas nos EUA e em outros países. ENERGY STAR ® é uma marca registrada nos EUA. A marca e os logotipos Bluetooth ® são marcas de fábrica da Bluetooth SIG, Inc. e a Apple possui licença para utilizá-los. Outras empresas e nomes de produtos aqui mencionados podem ser marcas registradas de suas respectivas empresas. A menção de produtos de terceiros possui apenas um objetivo informativo e não constitui um endosso ou recomendação. A Apple não assume nenhuma responsabilidade com respeito ao desempenho ou uso desses produtos. Fabricadas sob a licença da Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic” e o símbolo D duplo são marcas registradas da Dolby Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished Works, © 19921997 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. Todos os direitos reservados. Publicado simultaneamente nos Estados Unidos e no Canadá. iDVD 5 Getting Started Get to know the iDVD window and controls and learn how to create your own DVD 019-0261.book Page 1 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AM019-0261.book Page 2 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AM 3 1 Contents Chapter 1 4 Introduction 4 Using This Document 5 What’s New in iDVD 5 Chapter 2 7 iDVD At a Glance 8 Main Window 9 Customize Drawer 15 Slideshow Editor 16 Map View Chapter 3 18 iDVD Tutorial 18 Before You Begin 19 Goals 19 What You Need 19 Create a New Project 22 Add a Movie With Chapter Markers 24 Customize the Main Menu 27 Add a Submenu and Replace Its Background 29 Create a Slideshow 30 Use Map View 33 Check the Status Pane 34 Burn Your DVD Appendix 36 Keyboard Shortcuts 019-0261.book Page 3 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AM1 4 1 Introduction Welcome to iDVD. This document helps familiarize you with how to use the basic features of iDVD, and tells you about the new features in iDVD 5. Use iDVD to create DVDs that contain your own movies and photo slideshows, along with professionally designed and easy-to-navigate DVD menus, just like Hollywood DVDs. Discs burned using iDVD can be played in most DVD players, including computers with DVD drives and most set-top DVD players. For the latest news and information about iDVD 5, go to the iDVD website at www.apple.com/ilife/iDVD. Using This Document This document is organized into three chapters and a Keyboard Shortcuts appendix, allowing you easy access to the information you’ll need. You can use the chapters in the order that suits you, but the following order is recommended. • Chapter 1, Introduction: Gives a brief description of the major new features in this version of iDVD. • Chapter 2, At a Glance: Shows you the controls in the iDVD window. These pages will familiarize you with what each part of the iDVD window is used for. Looking through them will make it easier for you to follow the steps in the tutorial in Chapter 3. You can also use the “At a Glance” for handy reference as you create your own iDVD projects. • Chapter 3, Tutorial: Takes you through a path to creating a DVD. Following the steps in the tutorial with your own media is a great way to get your feet wet and learn your way around iDVD’s basic features, so you can confidently explore from there. The tutorial also provides tips on other things you can try, and how to find more information. Specific goals of the tutorial are listed at the beginning of Chapter 3. • Keyboard Shortcuts: Provides easy reference to common keyboard shortcuts. 019-0261.book Page 4 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AMChapter 1 Introduction 5 What’s New in iDVD 5 iDVD 5 adds many new features that make DVD creation faster and easier, with more professional results than ever. New Themes With Dynamic Drop Zones: iDVD 5 continues the tradition of delivering the most exciting and innovative theme designs available for your DVDs. The new, Apple-designed themes include dynamic, moving drop zones that take your navigation menus to the next level—making your DVD more visually exciting and professional than ever. OneStep DVD: When you just need to transfer your video footage from your camcorder to a disc, iDVD 5 provides a one click, tape-to-DVD solution. Simply plug in your camcorder, click one button, and insert a blank disc. The tape is rewound and your footage is mastered directly to the disc as an auto-play movie, automatically. This makes creating a DVD easier and faster. High Definition and Widescreen Video: iDVD 5 now imports high definition video (HDV) and 16:9 widescreen formats from iMovie HD. iDVD 5 converts these formats to a standard definition DVD format that allows you to create the coolest-looking DVDs, while retaining the highest quality video. Disc Image Support: iDVD 5 provides a great way to save duplicates of your finished projects directly to your hard disk. Use disc image support to save your project in final form, or to quickly duplicate a disc at any time. Since disc images have been fully encoded, you can burn them to blank DVDs whenever you want, without having to wait for encoding. Full Format Support: Virtually any DVD media available is now compatible with iDVD, including -R, +R, and even +RW and –RW on some SuperDrives. 019-0261.book Page 5 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AM6 Chapter 1 Introduction Additional enhancements: • Enhanced DVD Map: Beyond the convenience and power of navigating your entire project, now you can edit your DVD right in the map view. Change themes, remove items, or add movies, slideshows, and buttons with drag-and-drop ease. Even zoom in or out for a detailed close-up view or a bird's-eye perspective. • Detailed Burn Progress: See exactly where you are in the process of burning your DVD with new progress feedback. Stage-by stage indicators with detailed progress bars—and even a live video thumbnail—show you exactly where you are in the burning progress. • Transitions for Individual Buttons: iDVD 5 lets you set your own custom transitions for each button on your DVD menus. • Optimized Editing: iDVD 5’s increased performance makes creating and editing your DVD responsive and quick. Enhanced iLife Support: • iMovie: Support for new iMovie HD formats, including high definition video, MPEG-4, iSight, and 16:9 widescreen movies. • iTunes: iTunes playlist support gives you the ability to use any of your custom playlists in iDVD. • iPhoto: Drag your iPhoto albums directly into iDVD, even new iPhoto folders. Access iPhoto’s movie clips and add them to your DVD. Save RAW originals of your photos, when you specify Save to DVD-ROM. 019-0261.book Page 6 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AM2 7 2 iDVD At a Glance This chapter helps familiarize you with all the tools available in the iDVD window. Use it as a reference as you work. When you work on an iDVD project, the menu you are designing is displayed in the main window. You use the controls and options in the Customize drawer to change the look and feel of your DVD menus. The pages that follow introduce you to the different views and controls in the iDVD window and the panes in the Customize drawer. Looking at these pages will help you learn the names of the iDVD controls, so you can easily follow the instructions in iDVD Help. 019-0261.book Page 7 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AM8 Chapter 2 iDVD At a Glance Main Window A DVD menu: This is where you see the DVD menu you are creating as you build it. Drag movies, pictures, and audio files into this area to create buttons that play your movies and slideshows, or change the look and sound of the background. B Drop zone: Some themes include special areas called drop zones where you can place still pictures or a short movie that plays as part of the DVD menu background. Placing images in the drop zone gives visual interest to the menu. Double-click the drop zone to open the drop zone editor, where you can set the order of images and short movies that play in the drop zone. C Customize: Click this button to open the Customize drawer. The Customize drawer contains all of the tools you need to customize your DVD menu. See “Customize Drawer” on page 9 for details. D Folder: Click to create a submenu button on the current DVD menu. A submenu is an additional menu where you can put more slideshows and movies on the same DVD. E Scrubber bar and motion playhead: Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar to move slowly through a motion menu. For themes with dynamic drop zones (drop zones that move), the playhead allows you to stop their motion so you can drag movies or photos into them. F Slideshow: Click to add a slideshow button to your menu. Double-click the slideshow button to add and arrange photos in your slideshow. G Motion: Click to turn the motion and sound on or off while you work. This makes it easier to work on motion menus. H Map: Click to open the map view of your DVD. The map view helps you edit and navigate more easily through your iDVD project and is shown in more detail on page 16. A C B D E F G H I J 019-0261.book Page 8 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AMChapter 2 iDVD At a Glance 9 Customize Drawer The Customize drawer contains all the tools you need to select and customize a menu theme, add your own media to your project, and keep track of how you are using your media resources as you work. Themes Pane The Themes pane is where you select a theme for the menu. When you select a theme from the themes list, it appears in the iDVD main window. I Preview: Click to preview your DVD. In preview mode, a DVD player remote control appears on the screen, and you can use it to navigate through the menus and play the slideshows and movies as though you were viewing them on a set-top DVD player. J Burn: Click this button twice to burn your DVD disc when you are finished with your iDVD project. A Pane selection buttons: Click these buttons to switch between the Themes, Settings, Media, and Status panes. Each of these panes is described in more detail in the following pages. B Theme sets: Choose a set of themes to preview or choose All to view all the themes at once. No themes appear in the Favorites list until you have customized your own theme and saved it as a favorite in the Settings pane. See “Settings Pane” on page 10 for more information. C Themes list: Scroll through the themes that appear in this list to select one for the menu you are creating. Click a theme to select it. A C B 019-0261.book Page 9 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AM10 Chapter 2 iDVD At a Glance Settings Pane Use the controls in the Settings pane to customize the look and sound of your DVD menu. Here you can add background video or sound, change the shape of the menu buttons, and change the font and color of the menu text. A Background well: Drag images or movies into this well to make them appear as the background of your DVD menu. B Audio well: Drag sound files here to make them play as the background music for your DVD menu. Click the microphone icon in the Audio well if you want to turn off the sound in iDVD as you work. C Duration slider: Drag this slider to choose how much of the background movie and music you want to play as a loop. The duration you set applies to both background movies and audio, as well as the video in motion buttons. Your DVD menus can contain a total of 15 minutes of motion. D Text controls: Use these controls to customize the look of the text in menu titles, buttons, and text elements. Choose a font from the Font pop-up menu and a color from the Color pop-up menu. Drag the Size slider to the right to make the text larger. Choose a text alignment from the Position pop-up menu. For example, you can choose to have the text appear directly beneath menu buttons, or offset to the left or right, or you can select no text. Different themes provide different text position options. E Button controls: Use these controls to set the shape, size, and position of the buttons on the DVD menu. Choose a shape from the Style pop-up menu. Different themes provide different button shape options. Selecting Free Position allows you to move the buttons anywhere you like on the menu, rather than having them aligned to an invisible grid. Drag the Size slider to the right to make the buttons larger. A C B D F G E 019-0261.book Page 10 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AMChapter 2 iDVD At a Glance 11 Media Pane The Media pane gives you easy access to the movies that are stored on your computer, as well as all the photos in your iPhoto library and all the music in your iTunes library. Movies View Here you can locate the movies that are stored on your computer. Movies stored in the Movies folder on your hard disk appear automatically. If you store your movies in other folders, you can make them appear here, too. F Transition pop-up menu and directional control: Choose a transition that moves the viewer between the button and the action that follows it, such as playing a movie. With some transitions, you can pick a direction for the transition to play using the arrow buttons to the right of the pop-up menu. G Save as Favorite: Click this button to save a theme you have customized with your favorite media and settings. Your customized theme will appear in the Favorites list in the Themes pane so you or others can use it again. A Media pop-up menu: Use this pop-up menu to choose whether you want to look at your movies, photos, or music. B Movie folders list: Finder folders appear in this list, making it easy to locate your movies while you work in iDVD. You can add any folders where you store movies to this list by making selections in the iDVD Preferences window. A C B D 019-0261.book Page 11 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AM12 Chapter 2 iDVD At a Glance Photos View Here you can find all of the photos in your iPhoto library. C Movies list: Drag a movie from here to a menu to create a movie button. Drag it to a drop zone to create a video loop in the drop zone. To make the movie the full motion background of a menu, drag it to the Background well in the Settings pane (To switch to the Settings pane, drag the movie to the Settings button.) You can add movies to the list by dragging them from the Finder. D Search field: If you have too many movies to easily find what you are looking for, you can type the movie name in the search field to locate it. A iPhoto albums list: Select the iPhoto album that contains the photos you want to use. Drag an album to the main iDVD window to create a button that links to a slideshow containing all of the photos in that album. If there are more than 99 photos in an album, another slideshow will be created. Drag an album with up to 99 photos to a drop zone to create a slideshow in the drop zone. B Photos list: Scroll to see thumbnails of all your photos. Drag a photo or a group of photos to a drop zone to place a still image in the drop zone. To make a photo the full background of a menu, drag it to the menu or drag it up to the Settings button to switch to the Settings pane, and then drop it in the Background well. You can also drag photos from the Finder to the photos list. C Search field: If you have too many photos to easily find what you are looking for, you can type the photo name in the search field to locate it. A C B 019-0261.book Page 12 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AMChapter 2 iDVD At a Glance 13 Audio View Here you can see all the music in your iTunes library, including music you have created in GarageBand. A iTunes playlists: Select the playlist that contains the music you want to use, or select Library to see all the songs in your iTunes library. B Songs list: Drag a song or playlist from here to set the background music for the menu. Drag it to the Audio well in the slideshow editor to set the background music for a slideshow. Scroll to see all your music. See “Slideshow Editor” on page 15 to learn more about the slideshow editor. You can also add audio files to this list by dragging them from the Finder. C Search field: If you have too much music to easily find what you are looking for, you can type a song name in the search field to locate it. D Apply button: Select a song or playlist and then click Apply to make the selection the background music for a menu or slideshow (if you are in the slideshow editor). A C B D 019-0261.book Page 13 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AM14 Chapter 2 iDVD At a Glance Status Pane Use the Status pane to keep an eye on your iDVD project resources as you work. A DVD Capacity: Check here to see how much space is left in your iDVD project. Clicking the text on the right switches between disc space in gigabytes (GB), and time in minutes. The project’s size is limited by the size of the DVD disc. B Motion Menus: Check here to see how much time you can still use for video and audio in menu backgrounds and buttons. You can have a total of 15 minutes of looping video and audio for any iDVD project. C Tracks: Look here to see how many audio tracks and slideshows you can still add to your DVD. Each iDVD project can accommodate up to 99 slideshows and audio tracks. D Menus: Check here to see how many more submenus you can add to your iDVD project. Each project can include up to 99 submenus. E Asset list: Look here to see the names of the movies you have added to your iDVD project. The Status column to the right indicates whether the movie has been encoded. All the movies must be encoded before the project is ready to burn to a DVD disc. (If you click the Burn button, iDVD will finish encoding the movies before burning the disc.) A C B D E 019-0261.book Page 14 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AMChapter 2 iDVD At a Glance 15 Slideshow Editor The slideshow editor displays a list of all the photos in the selected slideshow and provides controls for you to set up how the slideshow plays. A Slideshow length: Look here to see how long the slideshow will last in minutes and seconds. B Slideshow photos list: Scroll through the list to see the photos in this slideshow. Drag to rearrange the order of the photos in your slideshow. C List or thumbnail view: Click these buttons to switch between a list of the slides in the selected slideshow, or a thumbnail view. D Loop slideshow: Select to make the slideshow automatically repeat when it reaches the end. E Display navigation: Select to add Back and Forward visual indicators to the slideshow. F Add original photos on DVD-ROM: Select to include copies of all the photos in the slideshow on the part of the disc reserved as DVD-ROM space. This way, viewers can copy full-quality photos in the original format (including RAW) from the DVD-ROM portion of the disc to their own hard disk. G Slide Duration: Choose how long each slide should appear when the slideshow plays. By default, each slide appears for 3 seconds. H Transition: Choose a transition to move from slide to slide. With some transitions you can pick a direction for the transition to play using the arrow buttons to the right of the pop-up menu. A E F G H I J B C D 019-0261.book Page 15 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AM16 Chapter 2 iDVD At a Glance Map View The map view shows you a graphic representation of your iDVD project. This way, you can keep track of how all your submenus, slideshows, and movies are linked together. Double-clicking one of the icons in the map takes you directly to that item in the iDVD project so that you can edit it in more detail, or plays the slideshow or movie it represents. You can also edit your DVD menus directly in map view, adding or removing elements from your project. You can scroll the map horizontally and vertically by dragging it. You can also adjust the size of the icons using the Size slider. Map view offers two layouts, one showing all the elements in your project laid out horizontally, and the other laid out vertically. Below is a sample of how an iDVD project map might look. In this example, there is one movie, one slideshow, one submenu, and one movie with chapter markers. I Audio well: Drag a song or iTunes playlist to this well to play it in the background while the slideshow plays. If you hold the pointer over the sound file icon in the Audio well, you can see the song’s title and length (or the title of the first song in a playlist). J Return button: Click this button to exit the slideshow editor. A C B D E F G H I 019-0261.book Page 16 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AMChapter 2 iDVD At a Glance 17 A Autoplay well: Drag a movie or slides to the well to make them play before the main menu appears on the DVD. Double-click the image in the well to preview the autoplay movie or edit the slideshow. B Main menu: This is the menu viewers will see first when they watch your DVD. Double-click this icon to open the main menu. You can drag movies onto the icon to place movie buttons on the main menu, or drag a set of slides onto the icon to create a slideshow button on the main menu. C Play Full Movie: This is a movie with chapter markers that’s available from the submenu (E). Double-click here to play the movie. D Scene Selection Menu: This is the menu that lists the chapters in the movie with chapter markers. Double-click here to go to the scene selection menu. E Disclosure triangles: Click to hide the parts of the map that are linked to the disclosure triangle. Click again to reveal the linked items. F Slideshow: This is a slideshow that’s accessible from the main menu. Double-click here to go to the slideshow editor for that slideshow. G Horizontal or vertical view: Click to change between a layout showing all the icons and a hierarchical layout with disclosure triangles. H Size slider: Drag to adjust the size of the icons to see more of the project. I Return: Click to ext the Map view. 019-0261.book Page 17 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AM3 18 3 iDVD Tutorial This tutorial takes you step-by-step through the process of creating a simple iDVD project using your own movies, photos, and music. To create an iDVD project, you must first select a theme from the list in the Themes pane. iDVD provides a variety of professionally designed themes to use for your DVD menus. Customize the theme by adding your own background music, photos, or video loops. Then add buttons that link to your movies and slideshows. You can create several levels of menus to organize your movies and slideshows on a single DVD. This tutorial takes you through each of these steps to create a basic DVD. You can follow each step or just the parts of the tutorial you want. When you are done, you will have a complete project ready to burn on a DVD. As you move through the tutorial, you’ll also see tips for alternative ways of doing tasks as well as how to find out more information about them from iDVD’s onscreen help system. Before You Begin To make it easier to do the tasks in this tutorial, print the document before you start. In many tasks shown in this lesson and in iDVD Help, you need to choose menu commands, which look like this: Choose Edit > Copy. The first term after Choose is the name of a menu in the iDVD menu bar. The next term (or terms) are the items you choose from that menu. 019-0261.book Page 18 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AMChapter 3 iDVD Tutorial 19 Goals If you follow all the steps in this tutorial, you will build an iDVD project that includes a movie with chapter markers and a slideshow, and you’ll learn to do the following: • Start an iDVD project. • Use media from your other iLife applications, and bring them into a iDVD project. • Customize the iDVD menus. • Make and customize slideshows. • Use map view for efficient editing. • Burn a DVD. • Play a DVD. As you go through the tutorial, look for the “Did you know?” boxes that point out more things you can do, as well as how to find more information. What You Need To complete all the parts of this tutorial, you need the following: • A movie, optionally with chapter markers You can use any iMovie format, including MPEG-4, iSight, and 16:9 widescreen movies, and high-definition (HD) formats such as HDV • Images for a slideshow in your iPhoto library, including iPhoto RAW format • Audio files in your iTunes library, including custom playlists • A computer with a SuperDrive (This is not required if you will not burn your project on a DVD.) Create a New Project In this section of the tutorial, you will create a new project, locate the movies, photos, and audio files you will use in the project, and select a theme. Open a New Project in iDVD To begin a new project: • If iDVD isn’t open, double-click the iDVD application icon on your hard disk. If this is the first time iDVD has been opened, click the “Create a New Project” button in the dialog. • If iDVD is already open, choose File > New. Select a location for your new project, and click Create. 019-0261.book Page 19 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AM20 Chapter 3 iDVD Tutorial Locate the Movies, Photos, and Audio Files to Use in the Tutorial Before you can create a DVD, you need to assemble your images and be sure your movies and audio files are in the right format for iDVD. (Movies created using iMovie are in the proper format. For more information, look for “file formats” in iDVD Help.) To locate media in the Media Browser: 1 Click the Customize button at the bottom of the iDVD window. The Customize drawer opens. 2 Click the Media button at the top of the Customize drawer. Choose Audio, Photos, or Movies from the pop-up menu at the top of the Customize drawer to see the media you have available. If you have opened iTunes and iPhoto, and have added songs and photos to the libraries in those applications, your libraries are available to use in iDVD in the Media Browser. If you have audio and image files in folders outside of iTunes and iPhoto, you can drag those folders into the list of photos or audio files in the Media Browser. Movies that are stored in the Movies folder on your hard disk appear automatically in the Movies pane of the Media Browser. You can add movies you keep in other folders on your hard disk to the Movies pane by opening iDVD Preferences, clicking Movies, and locating the folders, or by dragging movies to the Media Browser from the Finder. Did You Know?—Starting a Project There are other ways to begin a new iDVD project: • Use the OneStep DVD method to create a DVD directly from your camcorder. This is useful when you need to transfer your unedited video footage from your camcorder to a disc that plays automatically and doesn’t include menus. For more information, search in iDVD Help for OneStep DVD. • Click the iDVD button in iMovie to open an iDVD project that contains your iMovie. Use this method when you want to make a DVD that has links to the movie you have just created on its main menu. • Starting in iMovie, use the Magic iMovie feature to automatically transfer autogenerated movies to an iDVD project. 019-0261.book Page 20 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AMChapter 3 iDVD Tutorial 21 Select a Theme for Your DVD A theme is a combination of the background image or movie that appears on your DVD menu, along with the button style, fonts, sizes, and locations for titles and button labels. You can use one of the themes that come with iDVD, or you can customize and create your own theme. In this tutorial, you will learn how to select an existing iDVD theme and customize it. To choose the theme for your DVD menu: 1 Click the Customize button at the bottom of the iDVD window. The Customize drawer opens. 2 Click the Themes button at the top of the Customize drawer. Choose 4.0 Themes from the pop-up menu at the top of the Customize drawer. Some themes contain animation and music. To see the motion or hear the music included in these themes, you need to turn on motion by clicking the Motion button. To turn on motion: 1 Click the Motion button toward the right of the main iDVD window, which looks like this: If motion is already turned on, this button appears green. 2 Move the scroller up and down to see the themes. Use the pop-up menu at the top to check out all the different kinds of themes. Click each theme to see it in the iDVD window. 3 Click the theme named Kids Theater One to select it for your project. This theme already contains an autoplay movie, a short movie that plays before the main DVD menu appears. To view the autoplay movie, click the Preview button. (You will see more about autoplay movies later in the tutorial.) The symbol in the upper-left corner of the theme, and pictured below, indicates that the theme includes an autoplay movie. 019-0261.book Page 21 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AM22 Chapter 3 iDVD Tutorial Add a Movie With Chapter Markers After you have chosen your theme, you can add movies to your iDVD project. In this section, you’ll add a movie that contains chapter markers, so that viewers have the option of jumping to a scene when they watch your DVD, like in Hollywood-style DVDs. (Chapter markers must be set using iMovie or other video-editing software at the time you create your movie, before you add the movie to your iDVD project.) When you drag a movie with chapter markers to the menu, iDVD recognizes the chapter markers and automatically creates scene selection menus with buttons that link to each of the chapters. To add a movie with chapter markers: 1 Click the Media button at the top of the Customize drawer and choose Movies from the pop-up menu. Drag a movie with chapter markers from the movies list in the Media Browser to the menu background. Be sure to drop the movie in an area outside of the gray drop zone. (Movies added to the drop zone become part of the menu background, rather than featured movies on the DVD.) The DVD menu title changes to the name of the movie. iDVD automatically creates two buttons on the menu: a Play Movie button [A], so the viewer can play the entire movie, and a Scene Selection button [B] that links to the scene selection menu. In this illustration, the movie is titled “Oh Dog!” The drop zone contains the text “Drag Zone 1”. A B 019-0261.book Page 22 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AMChapter 3 iDVD Tutorial 23 2 Double-click the Scene Selection button to open the scene selection menu. You see a button for each chapter in the movie. The button names match the names that you assigned to each of the movie chapters when you created them. 3 Click the theme named Kids Theater Two in the Themes pane of the Customize drawer to select it as the theme of the scene menu. This theme was designed to be used as a submenu with the Kids Theater One theme. The buttons now have images on them that match the thumbnails you set in your video-editing software. 4 Double-click the Back button to return to the main menu. Each submenu contains a Back button to get to the previous menu and a Next Scenes button to navigate to the next scene menu, if there are more scene selection buttons than can fit on a single menu. 5 If you want to take a break, choose File > Save to save your project. If you quit iDVD, when you open it again, your project opens. 019-0261.book Page 23 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AM24 Chapter 3 iDVD Tutorial Customize the Main Menu Each iDVD menu can be customized to suit your project, by adding background images, slideshows, or short movies. You can add a subtitle to the main menu and change the main menu title, or change the color, style, and position of the text, set a transition to the next menu or movie, and add or change the music in the menu. In this tutorial, you will learn how to add a slideshow to the Kids Theater menu background, and then change the look of the menu buttons and text. Did You Know?—Themes and Scene Selection Menus iDVD includes pairs of themes for you to use when you want to create two levels of menus. The Kids Theater One theme, used in this tutorial, is an example of this. Paired themes allow you to create DVD menus with some variety, while still keeping with the same overall theme. It’s especially useful when you add movies with chapter markers to your project. The second-level menu themes are a great way to display buttons that link to each chapter of your movie. If you don’t want to create a scene selection menu, and instead you want your movie to be accessed only by a single button, you can turn off the automatic scene selection menu generation in iDVD Preferences. To learn more, search iDVD Help for “chapter marker submenu.” iDVD also features new themes with dynamic drop zones. To see an example, select themes from the 5.0 Themes list in the Themes pane of the Customize drawer. You can drop short movies, slideshows, or still images into each of the dynamic drop zones, which move around on the screen. To learn about editing dynamic drop zones, search iDVD Help for “dynamic drop zones.” 019-0261.book Page 24 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AMChapter 3 iDVD Tutorial 25 Adding Background Images to Drop Zones Background images, slideshows, and movies can be placed within drop zones, which are numbered and labeled on each theme. The drop zone is not a button that lets viewers play a slideshow or movie; it just lets you add interest to your menu background. Note: You can also replace the entire theme graphic with an image, slideshow, or movie. To learn more about this, see “Add a Submenu and Replace Its Background” on page 27. To add a slideshow to the drop zone: 1 Click the Media button at the top of the Customize drawer and choose Photos from the pop-up menu. 2 Drag the pictures you want to see on your menu from the Photos list to the drop zone in the menu. A slideshow of the pictures plays in the drop zone. If you prefer, you can add a short movie or a single still image to a drop zone, instead of a slideshow. If you add a short movie, it plays repeatedly in the drop zone; if you add a still image, the image fills the drop zone. 019-0261.book Page 25 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AM26 Chapter 3 iDVD Tutorial Changing the Look of Menu Text and Buttons As you modify and design your menus, it helps to turn on the TV safe area, so that you can be sure to keep buttons and text within the viewable area of most TV screens. (The masked area that appears around the border does not appear on your burned DVD.) To customize the text and buttons on the menu: 1 With your project open and the main menu showing, choose Advanced > Show TV Safe Area. This shows the area on the menu that will be visible on most television sets. 2 To add a subtitle or descriptive text, choose Project > Add Text. Double-click the text that appears to select it, and then type a subtitle, such as “A Boy and His Dog.” 3 Make the text smaller by dragging the Size slider in the Text section of the Settings pane to the left. Then click outside the text to get out of text edit mode, and drag it below the title. 4 To change the title, double-click it, and then type a new title. 5 To move the title to a new position, choose Custom from the Position pop-up menu, so that you can freely position the text. Drag the title where you want it. Click outside the text. 019-0261.book Page 26 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AMChapter 3 iDVD Tutorial 27 6 To set a dissolve transition that plays when the movie button is clicked, select the Play Movie button for the movie. Choose Dissolve from the Transition pop-up menu in the Button section of the Settings pane. The menu will dissolve into the movie when the viewer clicks a button on the burned DVD. (To view the results as you work, use the Preview button. For more information, search for “preview” in iDVD Help.) 7 To change the background music for the menu, click Media in the Customize Drawer, choose Audio from the pop-up menu, and then drag the audio file you want to use to the Settings icon at the top of the Customize drawer. Hold it until the Settings pane opens, and then drag the file into the Audio well. 8 Click the Preview button to check your results. A remote control appears on your screen which you can use like a regular DVD remote control. 9 When you are finished, click Exit on the DVD remote control to leave preview mode, or click the Preview button again. Add a Submenu and Replace Its Background You can add submenus to your DVD to hold more movie and slideshow buttons. Here, you’ll create a new submenu and set a custom background for it. To add and customize a submenu: 1 Click the Folder button to place a new button on the main menu. Select the text on the new button (labeled “My Folder”) and type “Extras.” 2 Double-click the button to edit the new submenu. 019-0261.book Page 27 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AM28 Chapter 3 iDVD Tutorial 3 Drag an image file from the Photos pane of the Media Browser to the Settings button. When the Settings pane opens, drag the image to the Background well in the Settings pane. The new background is set, and the drop zone that was on the menu disappears. Did You Know?—Replacing the Menu Background There’s a shortcut to changing the menu background and deleting the drop zone: Drag an image or movie from the Media Browser or Finder and hold it over the menu in an area outside the drop zone. Press the Command key and drop the file in place. If you want to replace the background, but retain the drop zones in a theme, drag a new image into the background area outside the drop zone, but do not hold down the Command key as you drop. 019-0261.book Page 28 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AM4 To change the background music for the menu, drag an audio file from the Audio pane of the Media Browser to the Audio well in the Settings pane. Create a Slideshow You can use iDVD to create a slideshow from a group of pictures and add a soundtrack to it. You can even make the original picture files available to copy from the DVD. To add a slideshow: 1 Open the menu you created in “Add a Submenu and Replace Its Background,” above. 2 Click the Slideshow button at the bottom of the iDVD window. A button named “My Slideshow” appears on the menu. 3 To change the name of the button, select the text on it and type a title. In the illustration after step 11 below, the new title is “More Photos.” 4 To make the button an image button, click Settings in the Customize drawer and choose a button shape from the Style pop-up menu. 5 Double-click the button to open the slideshow editor. 6 Drag a photo album or a group of pictures from the Photos pane in the Media Browser to the slideshow editor. 7 Choose Droplet from the Transition pop-up menu to set the transition between photos in your slideshow. 8 To set a musical soundtrack for the slideshow, drag a playlist or a group of songs from the Audio pane in the Media Browser to the Audio well in the slideshow editor to add it to your slideshow. Notice that the slideshow duration changes, depending on how long the music is. Hold the pointer over the Audio well to see how long the music is. The Slide Duration pop-up menu is automatically set to “Fit to Audio.” 9 To add the original versions of your slideshow photos to the DVD-ROM portion of the disc, select “Add original photos on DVD-ROM. ” Viewers will be able to copy the photos to their hard disks from the DVD. 10 Click the Return button to exit the slideshow editor and return to the previous menu. Did You Know?—Creating Custom Themes Once you have set the background, music, text, and buttons the way you like, you can save your customized menu as a custom theme. A custom theme appears in the Themes pane of the Customize drawer, and you can select it to use for future projects, just as you would with any theme. 019-0261.book Page 29 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AM30 Chapter 3 iDVD Tutorial 11 To make a different image appear on the slideshow button, select the button and drag the slider above it until you see the image you want. 12 Preview the slideshow you have just created by clicking Preview (at the bottom of the iDVD window), and then clicking the slideshow button. 13 When you are finished, click Exit on the DVD remote control to leave preview mode. 14 Choose File > Save Project to save your work. Use Map View Using map view, you can see a graphical overview of your project that shows icons for each element in the project and navigational paths to each submenu, slideshow, and movie. You can use map view to quickly edit menus and preview parts of the DVD. In this section of the tutorial, you will use map view to see the autoplay movie that is included with the Kids Theater One theme, which you selected at the beginning. Project icon 019-0261.book Page 30 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AMChapter 3 iDVD Tutorial 31 View the Autoplay Movie To view the autoplay movie: 1 Click the Map button at the bottom of the iDVD window to open map view. Your current location is selected on the map. 2 If the entire map doesn't fit in the window, drag the size slider at the top of the window to the left to reduce the size of the icons. You can also use the horizontal and vertical scrollers to move through the map, or drag the map to see other parts of it. (If you have a complex project, you might need to scroll to see all the elements in your project.) 3 Double-click the project icon at the top left corner of the map. The autoplay movie plays once through. Note: Autoplay movies play when the DVD is inserted, before the main menu appears. Only some themes include autoplay movies, but you can add one to any theme, or change the existing one, by dragging a movie or photo album to the project icon. Remove an autoplay movie or slideshow by dragging it out of the project icon. Did You Know?—Map View From map view, you can jump quickly to different parts of your project. Just doubleclick a menu or slideshow icon to open it for editing. Click the Map button again to return to map view. In map view, you can set a movie or slideshow to repeat (or “loop”) by selecting its icon, and then choosing Advanced > Loop Movie or Slideshow. You can also make changes to menus by selecting the menu icon—even select more than one at a time by holding down the Shift key as you click—and then making selections in the Settings pane of the Customize drawer. Or select menu icons and change the theme by selecting a new theme in the Themes pane of the Customize drawer. Map view also shows you what transitions you have set between each item in the project.To see which transition has been set, rest the pointer over the circle at the left side of an icon. The transition title appears. Add additional media files to menus and slideshows by dragging them to the menu or slideshow icons. Remove a movie by dragging it off a menu icon. 019-0261.book Page 31 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AM32 Chapter 3 iDVD Tutorial Changing Views Map view provides two different layouts for your project: horizontal and vertical. Use the one that best fits your style. Both views allow you to hide (collapse) sections of the map to simplify the view. To change views in map view: 1 In the project you have created, click the Map button to open map view. 2 Click a view layout button at the bottom left of the window to switch between the horizontal and vertical map layouts. 3 Scroll down the map until you find a menu icon with several items linked to it. For example, find the scene selection menu that links to the different chapters of your movie. 4 Click the disclosure triangle. The menu contents collapse to simplify the map. 5 Click the disclosure triangle again. The menu contents expand. 019-0261.book Page 32 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AMChapter 3 iDVD Tutorial 33 Check the Status Pane You can monitor the space taken up by the various elements of your project in the Status pane of the Customize drawer. To check the status of your project: m Click Customize, then click Status. Four resource meters are displayed. • The DVD Capacity meter shows the size of your DVD, indicated as running time (the total time for all the media and transitions) or as disc space used. Click the text to the right of it to switch between minutes and gigabytes (GB). • The Motion Menus meter shows the total duration of all the menus in the project. You can have up to a total of 15 minutes of motion menus. • The Tracks meter shows the number of tracks and slideshows you have used, including autoplay movies and slideshows. You can have up to 99 total tracks. • The Menus meter shows the overall number of still and motion menus used in the project. You can have up to 99 total menus. • The Background Encoding section shows if the movies in your project have been encoded. If you click Burn before the movies are finished encoding, iDVD will finish the encoding before burning the disc. 019-0261.book Page 33 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AM34 Chapter 3 iDVD Tutorial Burn Your DVD When you are finished with your iDVD project, you can burn it to a DVD for viewing in DVD players or computers equipped with DVD-reading drives. Burn a disc only when you are sure that you are finished with your project. You can use the following media types to burn a disc in iDVD 5: • DVD-R: can only be used once This is the recommended media for iDVD, since it’s compatible with most DVD players and computers on the market today. It can hold about 4.38 gigabytes (GB). • DVD+R: can only be used once These discs, too, can hold about 4.38 GB. • DVD-RW: can be used more than once RW stands for “rewritable.” These discs can hold about 4.38 GB. • DVD+RW: can be used more than once These can hold about 4.38 GB. These discs may not be viewable in all DVD players. To burn your DVD: m Click the Burn button once to indicate that you are ready to burn, and a second time to begin the burning process. When prompted, insert a blank disc into the drive. iDVD burns your disc. The time it takes for the disc to be created depends on the amount of video on the disc and the speed of your computer. While your project is burning, a progress dialog indicates exactly what is happening in the five stages of burning: Prepare, Process Menus, Process Slideshows, Process Movies, and Burn. 019-0261.book Page 34 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AMChapter 3 iDVD Tutorial 35 Did You Know?—Saving Your Finished Project If you can’t burn a disc right away, or if you want to move or back up your finished project on another computer, you can archive it or save it as a disc image. Archiving your project creates a copy of your project, keeping all of its elements together and linked within the project file. It can take a while to archive a large project, but you can move the file to another computer or hard disk, and then open it at any time for further editing or burning onto a DVD. Saving a disc image of your project means creating a file that is formatted just like a finished DVD, except it’s not actually burned onto a disc. All the media has been encoded into the format used on a DVD, and you can play it on your computer by double-clicking the disc image icon. The disc image can be moved to another computer or hard disk, but cannot be edited further. You can use Disk Utility in Mac OS X to burn the disc image to a DVD when you are ready. For more information, search in iDVD Help for “archiving a project” and “saving a project as a disc image.” 019-0261.book Page 35 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AMAppendix 36 Keyboard Shortcuts You can use your keyboard to quickly accomplish many tasks in iDVD. To find the shortcuts for common commands, look in the menus (or see the menu shortcuts below). To complete an action, press the shortcut keys indicated below Action Shortcut iDVD menu shortcuts Preferences x-comma (,) Hide iDVD x-H Hide others x-Option-H Quit the iDVD application x-Q File menu shortcuts New x-N Open x-O Close x-W Save x-S Save As x-Shift-S Burn DVD x-R Save As Disc Image x-Shift-R Edit menu shortcuts Undo x-Z Redo x-Shift-Z Cut x-X Copy x-C Paste x-V Select all x-A Select none x-Shift-A 019-0261.book Page 36 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AMAppendix Keyboard Shortcuts 37 Action Shortcut Project menu shortcuts Project Info x-I Show Customize Panel x-Shift-B Show/Hide Map x-Shift-M Add Folder x-Shift-N Add Slideshow x-L AddText x-K Go Back x-B Advanced menu shortcuts Motion x-J Show TV Safe Area x-T Window menu shortcuts Minimize x-M Help menu shortcuts iDVD Help x-? 019-0261.book Page 37 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AMwww.apple.com/ilife/idvd © 2005 Apple Computer, Inc. All rights reserved. Apple, the Apple logo, iDVD, iLife, iMovie, and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. GarageBand, iPhoto, iSight, and SuperDrive are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. 019-0261 019-0261.book Page 38 Friday, December 10, 2004 10:27 AM iPhone User Guide For iOS 6 SoftwareContents 7 Chapter 1: iPhone at a Glance 7 iPhone 5 overview 7 Accessories 8 Buttons 10 Status icons 12 Chapter 2: Getting Started 12 What you need 12 Installing the SIM card 13 Setting up and activating iPhone 13 Connecting iPhone to your computer 13 Connecting to the Internet 14 Setting up mail and other accounts 14 Apple ID 14 Managing content on your iOS devices 15 iCloud 16 Syncing with iTunes 16 Viewing this user guide on iPhone 17 Chapter 3: Basics 17 Using apps 20 Customizing iPhone 22 Typing 25 Dictation 26 Voice Control 27 Searching 28 Notifications 29 Sharing 30 Connecting iPhone to a TV or other device 30 Printing with AirPrint 31 Apple headset 32 Bluetooth devices 33 File sharing 33 Security features 34 Battery 36 Chapter 4: Siri 36 What is Siri? 37 Using Siri 40 Restaurants 41 Movies 41 Sports 241 Dictation 42 Correcting Siri 43 Chapter 5: Phone 43 Phone calls 47 FaceTime 47 Visual voicemail 48 Contacts 49 Call forwarding, call waiting, and caller ID 49 Ringtones, Ring/Silent switch, and vibrate 49 International calls 50 Setting options for Phone 51 Chapter 6: Mail 51 Reading mail 52 Sending mail 53 Organizing mail 53 Printing messages and attachments 54 Mail accounts and settings 55 Chapter 7: Safari 58 Chapter 8: Music 58 Getting music 58 Playing music 60 Cover Flow 60 Podcasts and audiobooks 61 Playlists 61 Genius 62 Siri and Voice Control 62 iTunes Match 63 Home Sharing 63 Music settings 64 Chapter 9: Messages 64 Sending and receiving messages 65 Managing conversations 65 Sharing photos, videos, and other info 66 Messages settings 67 Chapter 10: Calendar 67 At a glance 68 Working with multiple calendars 69 Sharing iCloud calendars 69 Calendar settings 70 Chapter 11: Photos 70 Viewing photos and videos 71 Organizing photos and videos 71 Photo Stream 72 Sharing photos and videos 73 Printing photos Contents 374 Chapter 12: Camera 74 At a glance 75 HDR photos 75 Viewing, sharing, and printing 76 Editing photos and trimming videos 77 Chapter 13: Videos 79 Chapter 14: Maps 79 Finding locations 80 Getting directions 81 3D and Flyover 81 Maps settings 82 Chapter 15: Weather 84 Chapter 16: Passbook 86 Chapter 17: Notes 88 Chapter 18: Reminders 90 Chapter 19: Clock 91 Chapter 20: Stocks 93 Chapter 21: Newsstand 94 Chapter 22: iTunes Store 94 At a glance 95 Changing the browse buttons 96 Chapter 23: App Store 96 At a glance 97 Deleting apps 98 Chapter 24: Game Center 98 At a glance 99 Playing with friends 99 Game Center settings 100 Chapter 25: Contacts 100 At a glance 101 Adding contacts 102 Contacts settings 103 Chapter 26: Calculator 104 Chapter 27: Compass 105 Chapter 28: Voice Memos 105 At a glance 106 Sharing voice memos with your computer Contents 4107 Chapter 29: Nike + iPod 109 Chapter 30: iBooks 109 At a glance 110 Reading books 111 Organizing the bookshelf 111 Syncing books and PDFs 112 Printing or emailing a PDF 112 iBooks settings 113 Chapter 31: Podcasts 115 Chapter 32: Accessibility 115 Accessibility features 115 VoiceOver 124 Routing the audio of incoming calls 124 Siri 124 Triple-click Home 125 Zoom 125 Large Text 125 Invert Colors 125 Speak Selection 126 Speak Auto-text 126 Mono Audio 126 Hearing aids 127 Assignable ringtones and vibrations 127 LED Flash for Alerts 127 Guided Access 128 AssistiveTouch 128 Accessibility in OS X 129 TTY support 129 Minimum font size for mail messages 129 Assignable ringtones 129 Visual voicemail 129 Widescreen keyboards 129 Large phone keypad 129 Voice Control 129 Closed captioning 130 Chapter 33: Settings 130 Airplane mode 130 Wi-Fi 131 Bluetooth 131 VPN 132 Personal Hotspot 132 Do Not Disturb and Notifications 133 Carrier 134 General 139 Sounds 139 Brightness & Wallpaper 140 Privacy Contents 5141 Appendix A: iPhone in Business 141 Using configuration profiles 141 Setting up Microsoft Exchange accounts 142 VPN access 142 LDAP and CardDAV accounts 143 Appendix B: International Keyboards 143 Using international keyboards 144 Special input methods 146 Appendix C: Safety, Handling, & Support 146 Important safety information 148 Important handling information 149 iPhone Support site 149 Restarting or resetting iPhone 149 “Wrong Passcode” or “iPhone is disabled” appears 149 “This accessory is not supported by iPhone” appears 150 Can’t view email attachments 150 Backing up iPhone 152 Updating and restoring iPhone software 152 Software and service information 153 Using iPhone in an enterprise environment 153 Using iPhone with other carriers 153 Disposal and recycling information 155 Apple and the environment Contents 61 7 iPhone at a Glance iPhone 5 overview SIM ca SIM carrd tray d tray Receiver/ front microphone Receiver/ front microphone Headset jack Headset jack Ring/Silent switch Ring/Silent switch FaceTime camera FaceTime camera Volume buttons Volume buttons Multi-Touch display Multi-Touch display Home button Home button Bottom microphone Bottom microphone Sleep/Wake button Sleep/Wake button iSight camera iSight camera LED flash LED flash Rear microphone Rear microphone App icons App icons Status bar Status bar Speaker Speaker Lightning connector Lightning connector Note: iPhone apps and features may vary based on your location, language, carrier, and model of iPhone. Apps that send or receive data over a cellular network may incur additional fees. Contact your carrier for information about your iPhone service plan and fees. Accessories The following accessories are included with iPhone: Apple headset: Use the Apple EarPods with Remote and Mic (iPhone 5, shown above) or the Apple Earphones with Remote and Mic (iPhone 4S or earlier) to listen to music and videos, and make phone calls. See Apple headset on page 31. Connecting cable: Use the Lightning to USB Cable (iPhone 5, shown above) or the Dock Connector to USB Cable (iPhone 4S or earlier) to connect iPhone to your computer to sync and charge. The cable can also be used with the iPhone Dock (sold separately).Chapter 1 iPhone at a Glance 8 Apple USB power adapter: Use with the Lightning to USB Cable or Dock Connector to USB Cable to charge the iPhone battery. SIM eject tool: Use to eject the SIM card tray. (Not included in all areas.) Buttons Sleep/Wake button When you’re not using iPhone, you can lock it to turn off the display and save the battery. Lock iPhone: Press the Sleep/Wake button. When iPhone is locked, nothing happens if you touch the screen. iPhone can still receive calls, text messages, and other updates. You can also: • Listen to music • Adjust the volume • Use the center button on your headset to take calls or listen to music Sleep/Wake button Sleep/Wake button Unlock iPhone: Press the Sleep/Wake button or the Home button , then drag the slider. Turn iPhone off: Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button for a few seconds until the red slider appears, then drag the slider. Turn iPhone on: Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo appears. Open Camera when iPhone is locked: Press the Sleep/Wake button or the Home button , then drag up. Access the audio controls when iPhone is locked: Double-click the Home button . iPhone locks if you don’t touch the screen for a minute or so. You can adjust the auto-lock time (or turn it off), and require a passcode to unlock iPhone. Adjust the auto-lock timing or turn it off: See Auto-Lock on page 136. Require a passcode to unlock iPhone: See Passcode Lock on page 136.Chapter 1 iPhone at a Glance 9 Home button The Home button takes you to the Home screen, no matter what you’re doing. It also provides other convenient shortcuts. Go to the Home screen: Press the Home button . On the Home screen, tap an app to open it. See Opening and switching between apps on page 17. Display recently used apps: With iPhone unlocked, double-click the Home button . The multitasking bar appears at the bottom of the screen, showing the most recently used apps. Swipe the bar to the left to see more apps. Display audio playback controls: • When iPhone is locked: Double-click the Home button . See Playing music on page 58. • When you’re using another app: Double-click the Home button , then swipe the multitasking bar from left to right. Use Siri (iPhone 4S or later) or Voice Control: Press and hold the Home button . See Chapter 4, Siri, on page 36 and Voice Control on page 26. Volume controls While you’re on the phone or listening to songs, movies, or other media, the buttons on the side of iPhone adjust the audio volume. Otherwise, the buttons control the volume for the ringer, alerts, and other sound effects. WARNING: For important information about avoiding hearing loss, see Important safety information on page 146. Volume up Volume up Volume down Volume down Lock the ringer and alerts volume: Go to Settings > Sounds and turn off “Change with Buttons.” Limit the volume for music and videos: Go to Settings > Music > Volume Limit. Note: In some countries, iPhone may indicate when you’re setting the volume above the European Union hearing safety guidelines. To increase the volume beyond this level, you may need to briefly release the volume control. You can also use either volume button to take a picture or record a video. See Chapter 12, Camera, on page 74.Chapter 1 iPhone at a Glance 10 Ring/Silent switch Flip the Ring/Silent switch to put iPhone in ring mode or silent mode . Ring Ring Silent Silent In ring mode, iPhone plays all sounds. In silent mode, iPhone doesn’t ring or play alerts and other sound effects. Important: Clock alarms, audio apps such as Music, and many games still play sounds through the built-in speaker when iPhone is in silent mode. In some areas, the sound effects for Camera and Voice Memos are played even if the Ring/Silent switch is set to silent. For information about changing sound and vibrate settings, see Sounds on page 139. You can also use the Do Not Disturb setting to silence calls, alerts, and notifications. Set iPhone to Do Not Disturb ( ): Go to Settings and turn on Do Not Disturb. Do Not Disturb keeps calls, alerts, and notifications from making any sounds or lighting up the screen when the screen is locked. Alarms still sound, however, and if the screen is unlocked, Do Not Disturb has no effect. To schedule quiet hours, allow certain people to call, or enable repeated calls to ring through, go to Settings > Notifications > Do Not Disturb. See Do Not Disturb and Notifications on page 132. Status icons The icons in the status bar at the top of the screen give information about iPhone: Status icon What it means Cell signal* Shows whether you’re in range of the cellular network and can make and receive calls. The more bars, the stronger the signal. If there’s no signal, the bars are replaced with “No service.” Airplane mode Shows that airplane mode is on—you cannot use the phone, access the Internet, or use Bluetooth® devices. Non-wireless features are available. See Airplane mode on page 130. LTE Shows that your carrier’s LTE network is available, and iPhone can connect to the Internet over that network. (iPhone 5. Not available in all areas.) See Cellular on page 135. UMTS Shows that your carrier’s 4G UMTS (GSM) network is available, and iPhone can connect to the Internet over that network. (iPhone 4S or later. Not available in all areas.) See Cellular on page 135. UMTS/EV-DO Shows that your carrier’s 3G UMTS (GSM) or EV-DO (CDMA) network is available, and iPhone can connect to the Internet over that network. See Cellular on page 135. EDGE Shows that your carrier’s EDGE (GSM) network is available, and iPhone can connect to the Internet over that network. See Cellular on page 135.Chapter 1 iPhone at a Glance 11 Status icon What it means GPRS/1xRTT Shows that your carrier’s GPRS (GSM) or 1xRTT (CDMA) network is available, and iPhone can connect to the Internet over that network. See Cellular on page 135. Wi-Fi* Shows that iPhone is connected to the Internet over a Wi-Fi network. The more bars, the stronger the connection. See Wi-Fi on page 130. Do Not Disturb Shows that “Do Not Disturb” is turned on. See Sounds on page 139. Personal Hotspot Shows that iPhone is connected to another iPhone providing a Personal Hotspot. See Personal Hotspot on page 132. Syncing Shows that iPhone is syncing with iTunes. Network activity Shows network activity. Some third-party apps may also use the icon to show an active process. Call Forwarding Shows that Call Forwarding is set up on iPhone. See Call forwarding, call waiting, and caller ID on page 49. VPN Shows that you’re connected to a network using VPN. See Cellular on page 135. Lock Shows that iPhone is locked. See Sleep/Wake button on page 8. TTY Shows that iPhone is set to work with a TTY machine. See TTY support on page 129. Play Shows that a song, audiobook, or podcast is playing. See Playing music on page 58. Portrait orientation lock Shows that the iPhone screen is locked in portrait orientation. See Portrait and landscape orientation on page 19. Alarm Shows that an alarm is set. See Chapter 19, Clock, on page 90. Location Services Shows that an item is using Location Services. See Privacy on page 140. Bluetooth* Blue or white icon: Bluetooth is on and paired with a device. Gray icon: Bluetooth is on and paired with a device, but the device is out of range or turned off. No icon: Bluetooth is not paired with a device. See Bluetooth devices on page 32. Bluetooth battery Shows the battery level of a supported paired Bluetooth device. Battery Shows battery level or charging status. See Battery on page 34. * Accessories and wireless performance: The use of certain accessories with iPhone may affect wireless performance. Not all iPod accessories are fully compatible with iPhone. Turning on airplane mode on iPhone may eliminate audio interference between iPhone and an accessory. While airplane mode is on, you cannot make or receive calls or use features that require wireless communication. Reorienting or relocating iPhone and the connected accessory may improve wireless performance.2 12 Getting Started · WARNING: To avoid injury, read Important safety information on page 146 before using iPhone. What you need To use iPhone, you need: • A wireless service plan with a carrier that provides iPhone service in your area • An Internet connection for your computer (broadband is recommended) • An Apple ID for some features, including iCloud, the App Store and iTunes Store, and online purchases. An Apple ID can be created during setup. To use iPhone with your computer, you need: • A Mac with a USB 2.0 or 3.0 port, or a PC with a USB 2.0 port, and one of the following operating systems: • Mac OS X version 10.6.8 or later • Windows 7, Windows Vista, or Windows XP Home or Professional with Service Pack 3 or later • iTunes 10.7 or later (for some features), available at www.itunes.com/download Installing the SIM card If you were given a SIM card to install, install it before setting up iPhone. Important: A SIM card is required in order to use cellular services when connecting to GSM networks and some CDMA networks. An iPhone 4S or later that’s been activated on a CDMA wireless network may also use a SIM card for connecting to a GSM network, primarily for international roaming. Your iPhone is subject to your wireless service provider’s policies, which may include restrictions on switching service providers and roaming, even after conclusion of any required minimum service contract. Contact your wireless service provider for more details. Availability of cellular capabilities depends on the wireless network. Installing the SIM Card in iPhone 5 Nano SIM card Nano SIM card Nano SIM card tray Nano SIM card tray Paper clip or SIM eject tool Paper clip or SIM eject toolChapter 2 Getting Started 13 Install the SIM card: Insert the end of a small paper clip or SIM eject tool into the hole on the SIM card tray. Pull out the SIM card tray and place the SIM card in the tray as shown. With the tray aligned and the SIM card on top, carefully replace the tray. Setting up and activating iPhone To set up and activate iPhone, turn on iPhone and follow the Setup Assistant. The Setup Assistant steps you through the setup process, including connecting to a Wi-Fi network, signing in with or creating a free Apple ID, setting up iCloud, turning on recommended features such as Location Services and Find My iPhone, and activating iPhone with your carrier. You can also restore from an iCloud or iTunes backup during setup. Activation can be done over a Wi-Fi network or, with iPhone 4S or later, over your carrier’s cellular network (not available in all areas). If neither option is available, you need to connect iPhone to your computer running iTunes for activation. Connecting iPhone to your computer You may need to connect iPhone to your computer in order to complete activation. Connecting iPhone to your computer also lets you sync information, music, and other content with iTunes. See Syncing with iTunes on page 16. Connect iPhone to your computer: Use the Lightning to USB Cable (iPhone 5) or Dock Connector to USB Cable (earlier iPhone models) provided with iPhone. Connecting to the Internet iPhone connects to the Internet whenever necessary, using a Wi-Fi connection (if available) or your carrier’s cellular network. For information about connecting to a Wi-Fi network, see Wi-Fi on page 130. Note: If a Wi-Fi connection to the Internet isn’t available, some iPhone apps and services may transfer data over your carrier’s cellular network, which may result in additional fees. Contact your carrier for information about your cellular data plan rates. To manage cellular data usage, see Cellular on page 135.Chapter 2 Getting Started 14 Setting up mail and other accounts iPhone works with iCloud, Microsoft Exchange, and many of the most popular Internet-based mail, contacts, and calendar service providers. If you don’t already have a mail account, you can set up a free iCloud account when you first set up iPhone, or later in Settings > iCloud. See iCloud on page 15. Set up an iCloud account: Go to Settings > iCloud. Set up some other account: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars. You can add contacts using an LDAP or CardDAV account, if your company or organization supports it. See Adding contacts on page 101. You can add calendars using a CalDAV calendar account, and you can subscribe to iCalendar (.ics) calendars or import them from Mail. See Working with multiple calendars on page 68. Apple ID An Apple ID is the user name for a free account that lets you access Apple services, such as the iTunes Store, the App Store, and iCloud. You need only one Apple ID for everything you do with Apple. There may be charges for services and products that you use, purchase, or rent. If you have an Apple ID, use it when you first set up iPhone, and whenever you need to sign in to use an Apple service. If you don’t already have an Apple ID, you can create one whenever you’re asked to sign in. For more information, see support.apple.com/kb/he37. Managing content on your iOS devices You can transfer information and files between your iOS devices and computers using either iCloud or iTunes. • iCloud stores content such as music, photos, calendars, contacts, documents, and more, and wirelessly pushes it to your other iOS devices and computers, keeping everything up to date. See iCloud below. • iTunes syncs music, video, photos, and more, between your computer and iPhone. Changes you make on one device are copied to the other when you sync. You can also use iTunes to copy a file to iPhone for use with an app, or to copy a document you’ve created on iPhone to your computer. See Syncing with iTunes on page 16. You can use iCloud or iTunes, or both, depending on your needs. For example, you can use iCloud Photo Stream to automatically get photos you take on iPhone to your other devices, and use iTunes to sync photo albums from your computer to iPhone. Important: Don’t sync items in the Info pane of iTunes (such as contacts, calendars, and notes) and also use iCloud to keep that information up to date on your devices. Otherwise, duplicated data may result.Chapter 2 Getting Started 15 iCloud iCloud stores your content, including music, photos, contacts, calendars, and supported documents. Content stored in iCloud is pushed wirelessly to your other iOS devices and computers set up with the same iCloud account. iCloud is available on devices with iOS 5 or later, on Mac computers with OS X Lion v10.7.2 or later, and on PCs with the iCloud Control Panel for Windows (Windows Vista Service Pack 2 or Windows 7 required). iCloud features include: • iTunes in the Cloud—Download previous iTunes music and TV show purchases to iPhone for free, anytime. • Apps and Books—Download previous App Store and iBookstore purchases to iPhone for free, anytime. • Photo Stream—Photos you take appear on all your devices. You can also create photo streams to share with others. See Photo Stream on page 71. • Documents in the Cloud—For iCloud-enabled apps, keep documents and app data up to date across all your devices. • Mail, Contacts, Calendars—Keep your mail contacts, calendars, notes, and reminders up to date across all your devices. • Backup—Back up iPhone to iCloud automatically when connected to power and Wi-Fi. See Backing up iPhone on page 150. • Find My iPhone—Locate your iPhone on a map, display a message, play a sound, lock the screen, or remotely wipe the data. See Find My iPhone on page 34. • Find My Friends—Share your location with people who are important to you. Download the free app from the App Store. • iTunes Match—With an iTunes Match subscription, all your music—including music you’ve imported from CDs or purchased somewhere other than iTunes—appears on all of your devices and can be downloaded and played on demand. See iTunes Match on page 62. • iCloud Tabs—See the webpages you have open on your other iOS devices and OS X computers. See Chapter 7, Safari, on page 55. With iCloud, you get a free email account and 5 GB of storage for your mail, documents, and backups. Your purchased music, apps, TV shows, and books, as well as your photo streams, don’t count against your free space. Sign in or create an iCloud account, and set iCloud options: Go to Settings > iCloud. Purchase additional iCloud storage: Go to Settings > iCloud > Storage & Backup, then tap Manage Storage. For information about purchasing iCloud storage, go to help.apple.com/icloud. View and download previous purchases: • iTunes Store purchases: Go to iTunes, tap More, then tap Purchased. • App Store purchases: Go to App Store, tap Updates, then tap Purchased. • iBookstore purchases: Go to iBooks, tap Store, then tap Purchased. Turn on Automatic Downloads for music, apps, or books: Go to Settings > iTunes & App Stores. For more information about iCloud, go to www.apple.com/icloud. For support information, go to www.apple.com/support/icloud.Chapter 2 Getting Started 16 Syncing with iTunes Syncing with iTunes copies information from your computer to iPhone, and vice versa. You can sync by connecting iPhone to your computer, or you can set up iTunes to sync wirelessly with Wi-Fi. You can set iTunes to sync music, photos, videos, podcasts, apps, and more. For information about syncing iPhone with your computer, open iTunes, then choose iTunes Help from the Help menu. Set up wireless iTunes syncing: Connect iPhone to your computer. In iTunes on the computer, select your iPhone (under Devices), click Summary, then turn on “Sync over Wi-Fi connection.” When Wi-Fi syncing is turned on, iPhone syncs every day. iPhone must be connected to a power source, iPhone and your computer must both be on the same wireless network, and iTunes must be open on your computer. For more information, see iTunes Wi-Fi Sync on page 136. Tips for syncing with iTunes • If you use iCloud to store your contacts, calendars, bookmarks, and notes, don’t also sync them to your device using iTunes. • Purchases you make from the iTunes Store or the App Store on iPhone are synced back to your iTunes library. You can also purchase or download content and apps from the iTunes Store on your computer, and then sync them to iPhone. • In the device’s Summary pane, you can set iTunes to automatically sync when your device is attached to your computer. To temporarily override this setting, hold down Command and Option (Mac) or Shift and Control (PC) until you see iPhone appear in the sidebar. • In the device’s Summary pane, select “Encrypt iPhone backup” if you want to encrypt the information stored on your computer when iTunes makes a backup. Encrypted backups are indicated by a lock icon , and a separate password is required to restore the backup. If you don’t select this option, other passwords (such as those for mail accounts) aren’t included in the backup and will have to be reentered if you use the backup to restore the device. • In the device’s Info pane, when you sync mail accounts, only the settings are transferred from your computer to iPhone. Changes you make to an email account on iPhone don’t affect the account on your computer. • In the device’s Info pane, click Advanced to select options to let you replace the information on iPhone with the information from your computer during the next sync. • If you listen to part of a podcast or audiobook, the place you left off is included if you sync the content with iTunes. If you started listening on iPhone, you can pick up where you left off using iTunes on your computer—or vice versa. • In the device’s Photo pane, you can sync photos and videos from a folder on your computer. Viewing this user guide on iPhone You can view the iPhone User Guide on iPhone in Safari, and in the free iBooks app. View the user guide in Safari: Tap , then tap the iPhone User Guide bookmark. • Add an icon for the guide to the Home screen: Tap , then tap “Add to Home Screen.” • View the guide in a different language: Tap “Change Language” on the main contents page. View the user guide in iBooks: If you haven’t installed iBooks, open App Store, then search for and install “iBooks.” Open iBooks and tap Store. Search for “iPhone User,” then select and download the guide. For more information about iBooks, see Chapter 30, iBooks, on page 109.3 17 Basics Using apps You interact with iPhone using your fingers to tap, double-tap, swipe, and pinch objects on the touchscreen. Opening and switching between apps To go to the Home screen, press the Home button . Open an app: Tap it. To return to the Home screen, press the Home button again. See another Home screen: Swipe left or right. Swipe left or right to switch to another Home screen. Swipe left or right to switch to another Home screen. Go to the first Home screen: Press the Home button . View recently used apps: Double-click the Home button to reveal the multitasking bar. Chapter 3 Basics 18 Tap an app to use it again. Swipe left to see more apps. Recently used apps Recently used apps If you have a lot of apps, you might want to use Spotlight to locate and open them. See Searching on page 27. Scrolling Drag up or down to scroll. On some screens, such as webpages, you can also scroll side to side. Dragging your finger to scroll won’t choose or activate anything on the screen. Flick to scroll quickly. You can wait for the scrolling to come to a stop, or touch the screen to stop it immediately. To quickly scroll to the top of a page, tap the status bar at the top of the screen. Lists Depending on the list, choosing an item can do different things—for example, it may open another list, play a song, open an email, or show someone’s contact information. Choose an item in a list: Tap it.Chapter 3 Basics 19 Some lists have an index along the side to help you navigate quickly. Drag your finger along the index to scroll quickly. Tap a letter to jump to a section. Drag your finger along the index to scroll quickly. Tap a letter to jump to a section. Return to a previous list: Tap the back button in the upper-left corner. Zooming in or out Depending on the app, you may be able to zoom in to enlarge, or zoom out to reduce the image on the screen. When viewing photos, webpages, mail, or maps, for example, pinch two fingers together to zoom out or spread them apart to zoom in. For photos and webpages, you can also double-tap (tap twice quickly) to zoom in, then double-tap again to zoom out. For maps, doubletap to zoom in and tap once with two fingers to zoom out. Zoom is also an accessibility feature that lets you magnify the screen with any app you’re using, to help you see what’s on the display. See Zoom on page 125. Portrait and landscape orientation You can view many iPhone apps in either portrait or landscape orientation. Rotate iPhone and the display rotates too, adjusting to fit the new orientation. Lock the screen in portrait orientation: Double-click the Home button , swipe the multitasking bar from left to right, then tap . The orientation lock icon appears in the status bar when the screen orientation is locked.Chapter 3 Basics 20 Adjusting brightness You can manually adjust the brightness of the screen, or turn on Auto-Brightness to have iPhone use the built-in ambient light sensor to automatically adjust the brightness. Adjust the screen brightness: Go to Settings > Brightness & Wallpaper, then drag the slider. Turn Auto-Brightness on or off: Go to Settings > Brightness & Wallpaper. See Brightness & Wallpaper on page 139. Customizing iPhone You can customize the layout of your apps on the Home screen, organize them in folders, and change the wallpaper. Rearranging apps Customize your Home screen by rearranging apps, moving apps to the Dock along the bottom of the screen, and creating additional Home screens. Rearrange apps: Touch and hold any app on the Home screen until it jiggles, then move apps around by dragging them. Press the Home button to save your arrangement. Create a new Home screen: While arranging apps, drag an app to the right edge of the rightmost screen, until a new screen appears. You can create up to 11 Home screens. The dots above the Dock show the number of screens you have, and which screen you’re viewing. Swipe left or right to switch between screens. To go to the first Home screen, press the Home button . Move an app to another screen: While it’s jiggling, drag an app to the side of the screen. Customize the Home screen using iTunes: Connect iPhone to your computer. In iTunes on your computer, select iPhone, then click the Apps button to see the image of the iPhone Home screen. Reset the Home screen to its original layout: In Settings, go to General > Reset, then tap Reset Home Screen Layout. Resetting the Home screen removes any folders you’ve created and applies the default wallpaper to your Home screen.Chapter 3 Basics 21 Organizing with folders You can use folders to organize the apps on your Home screens. Rearrange folders—just as you do apps—by dragging them around your Home screens or to the Dock. Create a folder: Touch an app until the Home screen icons begin to jiggle, then drag the app onto another. iPhone creates a new folder that includes the two apps, and names the folder based on the type of apps. To enter a different name, tap the name field. Open a folder: Tap the folder. To close a folder, tap outside the folder, or press the Home button . Organize with folders: While arranging apps (the icons are jiggling): • Add an app to a folder: Drag the app onto the folder. • Remove an app from a folder: Open the folder if necessary, then drag the app out. • Delete a folder: Move all apps out of the folder. The folder is automatically deleted. • Rename a folder: Tap to open the folder, then tap the name and enter a new one. When you finish, press the Home button . Changing the wallpaper You can customize both the Lock screen and the Home screen by choosing an image or photo to use as wallpaper. Choose one of the supplied images, or a photo from your Camera Roll or another album on iPhone. Change the wallpaper: Go to Settings > Brightness & Wallpaper.Chapter 3 Basics 22 Typing The onscreen keyboard lets you type when you need to enter text. Entering text Use the onscreen keyboard to enter text, such as contact information, mail, and web addresses. Depending on the app and the language you’re using, the keyboard may correct misspellings, predict what you’re typing, and even learn as you use it. You can also use an Apple Wireless Keyboard to type. See Apple Wireless Keyboard on page 24. To use dictation instead of typing, see Dictation on page 25. Enter text: Tap a text field to bring up the keyboard, then tap keys on the keyboard. As you type, each letter appears above your thumb or finger. If you touch the wrong key, you can slide your finger to the correct key. The letter isn’t entered until you release your finger from the key. • Type uppercase: Tap the Shift key before tapping a letter. Or touch and hold the Shift key, then slide to a letter. • Quickly type a period and space: Double-tap the space bar. • Turn on caps lock: Double-tap the Shift key . To turn caps lock off, tap the Shift key. • Enter numbers, punctuation, or symbols: Tap the Number key . To see additional punctuation and symbols, tap the Symbol key . • Enter accented letters or other alternate characters: Touch and hold a key, then slide to choose one of the options. To type an alternate character, touch and hold a key, then slide to choose one of the options. To type an alternate character, touch and hold a key, then slide to choose one of the options. Set options for typing: Go to Settings > General > Keyboard.Chapter 3 Basics 23 Editing text If you need to edit text, an onscreen magnifying glass lets you position the insertion point where you need it. You can select text, and cut, copy, and paste text. In some apps, you can also cut, copy, and paste photos and videos. Position the insertion point: Touch and hold to bring up the magnifying glass, then drag to position the insertion point. Select text: Tap the insertion point to display the selection buttons. Tap Select to select the adjacent word, or tap Select All to select all text. You can also double-tap a word to select it. Drag the grab points to select more or less text. In read-only documents, such as webpages, touch and hold to select a word. Cut or copy text: Select text, then tap Cut or Copy. Paste text: Tap the insertion point, then tap Paste to insert the last text that you cut or copied. To replace text, select it before tapping Paste. Undo the last edit: Shake iPhone, then tap Undo. Make text bold, italic, or underlined: Select text, tap , then tap B/I/U (not always available). Get the definition of a word: Select the word, then tap Define (not always available). Get alternative words: Select a word, then tap Suggest (not always available). Auto-correction and spell checking For many languages, iPhone uses the active dictionary to correct misspellings or make suggestions as you type. When iPhone suggests a word, you can accept the suggestion without interrupting your typing. For a list of supported languages, see www.apple.com/iphone/specs.html. Suggested word Suggested word Accept the suggestion: Type a space, punctuation mark, or return character. Reject a suggestion: Tap the “x” next to the suggestion.Chapter 3 Basics 24 Each time you reject a suggestion for the same word, iPhone becomes more likely to accept the word. iPhone may also underline words you’ve already typed that might be misspelled. Replace a misspelled word: Tap the underlined word, then tap the correct spelling. If the word you want doesn’t appear, just retype it. Turn auto-correction or spell checking on or off: Go to Settings > General > Keyboard. Shortcuts and your personal dictionary Shortcuts lets you type just a few characters instead of a longer word or phrase. The expanded text appears whenever you type the shortcut. For example, the shortcut “omw” expands to “On my way!” Create a shortcut: Go to Settings > General > Keyboard, then tap Add New Shortcut. Prevent iPhone from trying to correct a word or phrase: Create a shortcut, but leave the Shortcut field blank. Edit a shortcut: Go to Settings > General > Keyboard, then tap the shortcut. Use iCloud to keep your personal dictionary up to date on your other iOS devices: Go to Settings > iCloud and turn on “Documents & Data.” Keyboard layouts You can use Settings to set the layouts for the onscreen keyboard or for an Apple Wireless Keyboard that you use with iPhone. The available layouts depend on the keyboard language. See Apple Wireless Keyboard below and Appendix B, International Keyboards, on page 143. Select keyboard layouts: Go to Settings > General > International > Keyboards, select a language, then choose the layouts. Apple Wireless Keyboard You can use an Apple Wireless Keyboard (available separately) for typing on iPhone. The Apple Wireless Keyboard connects via Bluetooth, so you must first pair it with iPhone. See Pairing Bluetooth devices on page 32. Once the keyboard is paired, it connects whenever the keyboard is within range of iPhone—up to about 33 feet (10 meters). When a wireless keyboard is connected, the onscreen keyboard doesn’t appear when you tap a text field. To save the battery, turn off the keyboard when not in use. Switch the language when using a wireless keyboard: Press Command–Space bar to display a list of available languages. Press the Space bar again while holding down the Command key to choose a different language. Turn off a wireless keyboard: Hold down the power button on the keyboard until the green light goes off. iPhone disconnects the keyboard when the keyboard is turned off or out of range. Unpair a wireless keyboard: Go to Settings > Bluetooth, tap next to the keyboard name, then tap “Forget this Device.”Chapter 3 Basics 25 Dictation On iPhone 4S or later, you can dictate text instead of typing. To use dictation, Siri must be turned on and iPhone must be connected to the Internet. You can include punctuation and give commands to format your text. Note: Cellular data charges may apply. Turn on dictation: Go to Settings > General > Siri, then turn on Siri. Dictate text: From the onscreen keyboard, tap , then speak. When you finish, tap Done. Tap to begin dictation. Tap to begin dictation. These appear while Siri composes the text from your dictation. These appear while Siri composes the text from your dictation. To add text, tap again and continuing dictating. To insert text, tap to place the insertion point first. You can also replace selected text by dictating. You can bring iPhone to your ear to start dictation, instead of tapping on the keyboard. To finish, move iPhone back down in front of you. Add punctuation or format text: Say the punctuation or formatting command. For example, “Dear Mary comma the check is in the mail exclamation mark” results in “Dear Mary, the check is in the mail!” Punctuation and formatting commands include: • quote … end quote • new paragraph • cap—to capitalize the next word • caps on … caps off—to capitalize the first character of each word • all caps—to make the next word all uppercase • all caps on … all caps off—to make the enclosed words all uppercase • no caps on … no caps off—to make the enclosed words all lowercase • no space on … no space off—to run a series of words together • smiley—to insert :-) • frowny—to insert :-( • winky—to insert ;-)Chapter 3 Basics 26 Voice Control Voice Control lets you make phone calls and control music playback using voice commands. On iPhone 4S or later, you can also use Siri to control iPhone by voice. See Chapter 4, Siri, on page 36. Note: Voice Control and Voice Control settings are not available when Siri is turned on. Use Voice Control: Press and hold the Home button until the Voice Control screen appears and you hear a beep. You can also press and hold the center button on your headset. See Apple headset on page 31. For best results: • Speak clearly and naturally. • Say only iPhone commands, names, and numbers. Pause slightly between commands. • Use full names. Voice Control normally expects you to speak voice commands in the language that’s set for iPhone (in Settings > General > International > Language). Voice Control settings let you change the language for speaking voice commands. Some languages are available in different dialects or accents. Change the language or country: Go to Settings > General > International > Voice Control, then tap the language or country. Voice Control for the Music app is always on, but you can prevent voice dialing when iPhone is locked. Prevent voice dialing when iPhone is locked: Go to Settings > General > Passcode Lock, then turn off Voice Dial (available only when Siri is turned off in Settings > General > Siri). To use voice dialing, you must first unlock iPhone. For specific commands, see Making calls on page 43 and Siri and Voice Control on page 62. For more about using Voice Control, including information about using Voice Control in different languages, go to support.apple.com/kb/HT3597.Chapter 3 Basics 27 Searching You can search many of the apps on iPhone, as well as Wikipedia and the web. Search an individual app, or search all the apps at once using Spotlight. Spotlight also searches the names of apps on iPhone—if you have a lot of apps, you might want to use Spotlight to locate and open them. Search an individual app: Enter text in the search field. Search iPhone using Spotlight: Swipe right from your first Home screen, or press the Home button from any Home screen. Enter text in the search field. Search results appear as you type. To dismiss the keyboard and see more results, tap Search. Tap an item in the list to open it. The icons let you know which apps the results are from. iPhone may display a top hit for you, based on previous searches. Spotlight searches the following: • Contacts—All content • Apps—Titles • Music—Names of songs, artists, and albums, and the titles of podcasts and videos • Podcasts—Titles • Videos—Titles • Audiobooks—Titles • Notes—Text of notes • Calendar (Events)—Event titles, invitees, locations, and notes • Mail—To, From, and Subject fields of all accounts (the text of messages isn’t searched) • Reminders—Titles • Messages—Names and text of messages Search the web or Wikipedia from Spotlight: Scroll to the bottom of the search results, then tap Search Web or Search Wikipedia. Open an app from Search: Enter all or part of the app name, then tap the app. Choose which items are searched, and the order they’re searched: Go to Settings > General > Spotlight Search.Chapter 3 Basics 28 Notifications To help make sure you don’t miss important events, many iPhone apps can provide alerts. An alert can appear briefly as a banner at the top of the screen, which goes away if you don’t respond to it, or as a notice in the center of the screen that remains until you acknowledge it. Some apps can also display badges on their icons on the Home screen, to let you know how many new items await—for example, how many new email messages you have. If there’s a problem—such as a message that couldn’t be sent—an exclamation mark appears on the badge. A numbered badge on a folder shows the total number of alerts for all the apps in the folder. Alerts can also appear on the Lock screen. Respond to an alert when iPhone is locked: Swipe the alert from left to right. Notification Center displays all your alerts in one place. So if you weren’t able to respond when you first received an alert, you can respond to them in Notification Center when you’re ready. Alerts can include: • Missed phone calls and voice messages • New email • New text messages • Reminders • Calendar events • Friend requests (Game Center) You can also get the local weather, and display your personal stock ticker. If you’ve signed in to your Twitter and Facebook accounts, you can tweet and post to those accounts from Notification Center. View Notification Center: Swipe down from the top of the screen. Scroll the list to see additional alerts. • Respond to an alert: Tap it. • Remove an alert: Tap , then tap Clear.Chapter 3 Basics 29 Manage alerts for your apps: Go to Settings > Notifications. See Do Not Disturb and Notifications on page 132. Choose alert sounds, adjust the alert volume, or turn vibrate on or off: Go to Settings > Sounds. Sharing iPhone gives you lots of way to share with other people. Sharing within apps In many apps, tapping displays options for sharing, as well as other actions such as printing or copying. The options vary depending on the app you’re using. Facebook Sign in to your Facebook account (or create a new account) in Settings to enable posting directly from many of the apps on iPhone. Sign in to or create a Facebook account: Go to Settings > Facebook. Post from Notification Center: Tap “Tap to Post.” Post using Siri: Say “Post to Facebook ….” Post an item from an app: In most apps, tap . In Maps, tap , tap Share Location, then tap Facebook. Set options for Facebook: Go to Settings > Facebook to: • Update Contacts on iPhone with Facebook names and photos • Allow App Store, Calendar, Contacts, or iTunes to use your account Install the Facebook app: Go to Settings > Facebook, then tap Install. Twitter Sign in to your Twitter account (or create a new account) in Settings to enable Tweets with attachments from many of the apps on iPhone. Sign in to or create a Twitter account: Go to Settings > Twitter. Tweet from Notification Center: Tap “Tap to Tweet.” Tweet using Siri: Say “Tweet ….” Tweet an item from an app: View the item, tap , then tap Twitter. If isn’t showing, tap the screen. To include your location, tap Add Location. Tweet a location in Maps: Tap the location pin, tap , tap Share Location, then tap Twitter. Chapter 3 Basics 30 When you’re composing a Tweet, the number in the lower-right corner of the Tweet screen shows the number of characters remaining that you can enter. Attachments use some of a Tweet’s 140 characters. Add Twitter user names and photos to your contacts: Go to Settings > Twitter, then tap Update Contacts. Install the Twitter app: Go to Settings > Twitter, then tap Install. To learn how to use the Twitter app, open the app, tap Me, then tap Help. Connecting iPhone to a TV or other device You can use AirPlay with Apple TV to stream content to an HDTV, or connect iPhone to your TV using cables. AirPlay With AirPlay, you can stream music, photos, and video wirelessly to Apple TV and other AirPlay-enabled devices. The AirPlay controls appear when an AirPlay-enabled device is available on the same Wi-Fi network that iPhone is connected to. You can also mirror the contents of your iPhone screen on a TV. Stream content to an AirPlay-enabled device: Tap , then choose the device. Access the AirPlay and volume controls while using any app: When the screen is on, double-click the Home button and scroll to the left end of the multitasking bar. Switch playback back to iPhone: Tap , then choose iPhone Mirror the iPhone screen on a TV: Tap at the left end of the multitasking bar, choose an Apple TV, then tap Mirroring. A blue bar appears at the top of the iPhone screen when AirPlay mirroring is turned on. Everything on the iPhone screen appears on the TV. Connecting iPhone to a TV using a cable Apple cables and adapters (available separately) may be used to connect iPhone to a TV, projector, or other external display. For more information, go to support.apple.com/kb/HT4108. Printing with AirPrint AirPrint lets you print wirelessly to AirPrint-enabled printers from the following iOS apps: • Mail—email messages and attachments that can be viewed in Quick Look • Photos and Camera—photos • Safari—webpages, PDFs, and other attachments that can be viewed in Quick Look • iBooks—PDFs • Maps—the portion of the map showing on the screen • Notes—the currently displayed note Other apps available from the App Store may also support AirPrint. iPhone and the printer must be on the same Wi-Fi network. For more information about AirPrint, go to support.apple.com/kb/HT4356.Chapter 3 Basics 31 Print a document: Tap or (depending on the app you’re using), then tap Print. See the status of a print job: Double-click the Home button , then tap Print Center in the multitasking bar. The badge on the icon shows how many documents are ready to print, including the current one. Cancel a print job: In Print Center, select the print job, if necessary, then tap Cancel Printing. Apple headset The Apple EarPods with Remote and Mic (iPhone 5) and the Apple Earphones with Remote and Mic (iPhone 4S or earlier) feature a microphone, volume buttons, and an integrated button that allows you to answer and end calls, and control audio and video playback. Center button Center button Plug in the headset to listen to music or make a phone call. Press the center button to control music playback and answer or end calls, even when iPhone is locked. Adjust the volume: Press the or button. Use the center button to control music playback: • Pause a song or video: Press the center button. Press again to resume playback. • Skip to the next song: Press the center button twice quickly. • Return to the previous song: Press the center button three times quickly. • Fast-forward: Press the center button twice quickly and hold. • Rewind: Press the center button three times quickly and hold. Use the center button to answer or make phone calls: • Answer an incoming call: Press the center button. • End the current call: Press the center button. • Decline an incoming call: Press and hold the center button for about two seconds, then let go. Two low beeps confirm you declined the call. • Switch to an incoming or on-hold call, and put the current call on hold: Press the center button. Press again to switch back to the first call. • Switch to an incoming or on-hold call, and end the current call: Press and hold the center button for about two seconds, then let go. Two low beeps confirm you ended the first call. Use Siri or Voice Control: Press and hold the center button. See Chapter 4, Siri, on page 36 or Voice Control on page 26. If you get a call while the headset is plugged in, you can hear the ringtone through both the iPhone speaker and the headset.Chapter 3 Basics 32 Bluetooth devices You can use iPhone with the Apple Wireless Keyboard and other Bluetooth devices, such as Bluetooth headsets, car kits, and stereo headphones. For supported Bluetooth profiles, go to support.apple.com/kb/HT3647. Pairing Bluetooth devices WARNING: For important information about avoiding hearing loss and avoiding distraction while driving, see Important safety information on page 146. Before you can use a Bluetooth device with iPhone, you must first pair them. Pair a Bluetooth device with iPhone: 1 Make the device discoverable. See the documentation that came with the device. For an Apple Wireless Keyboard, press the power button. 2 Go to Settings > Bluetooth and turn Bluetooth on. 3 Select the device and, if prompted, enter the passkey or PIN. See the instructions about the passkey or PIN that came with the device. For information about using an Apple Wireless Keyboard, see Apple Wireless Keyboard on page 24. To use a Bluetooth headset with iPhone, see the documentation that came with the device. Return audio output to iPhone when a Bluetooth headset is connected: Turn off or unpair the device, or turn off Bluetooth in Settings > Bluetooth. Audio output returns to iPhone whenever the device is out of range. You can also use AirPlay to switch audio output to iPhone. See AirPlay on page 30. Bluetooth status After you pair a device with iPhone, the Bluetooth icon appears in the status bar at the top of the screen: • or : Bluetooth is on and paired with a device. (The color depends on the current color of the status bar.) • : Bluetooth is on and paired with a device, but the device is out of range or turned off. • No Bluetooth icon: Bluetooth is not paired with a device. Unpairing a Bluetooth device from iPhone You can unpair a Bluetooth device if you don’t want to use it with iPhone any more. Unpair a Bluetooth device: Go to Settings > Bluetooth and turn on Bluetooth. Tap next to the device name, then tap “Forget this Device.”Chapter 3 Basics 33 File sharing You can use iTunes to transfer files between iPhone and your computer. You can also view files received as email attachments on iPhone. See Reading mail on page 51. If you have the same apps that work with iCloud on more than one device, you can use iCloud to automatically keep your documents up to date across all your devices. See iCloud on page 15. Transfer files using iTunes: Connect iPhone to your computer using the included cable. In iTunes on your computer, select iPhone, then click the Apps button. Use the File Sharing section to transfer documents between iPhone and your computer. Apps that support file sharing appear in the File Sharing Apps list in iTunes. To delete a file, select the file in the Files list, then press the Delete key. Security features Security features help protect the information on iPhone from being accessed by others. Passcodes and data protection For security, you can set a passcode that you must enter each time you turn on or wake up iPhone, or when you access the passcode lock settings. Setting a passcode turns on data protection, which uses your passcode as the key for encrypting mail messages and attachments stored on iPhone. (Some apps available from the App Store may also use data protection.) A notice at the bottom of the Passcode Lock screen in Settings shows that data protection is enabled. Important: On an iPhone 3GS that didn’t ship with iOS 4 or later, you must also restore iOS software to enable data protection. See Updating and restoring iPhone software on page 152. Set a passcode: Go to Settings > General > Passcode Lock, then tap Turn Passcode On and enter a 4-digit passcode. Use a more secure passcode: To increase security, turn off Simple Passcode and use a longer passcode with a combination of numbers, letters, punctuation, and special characters. To unlock iPhone when it’s protected by a combination passcode, you enter the passcode using the keyboard. If you prefer to unlock iPhone using the numeric keypad, you can set up a longer passcode using numbers only. Prevent access to Siri when iPhone is locked: Go to Settings > General > Passcode Lock, then turn Siri off. Prevent voice dialing when iPhone is locked: Go to Settings > General > Passcode Lock, then turn Voice Dial off. (Available only when Siri is turned off in Settings > General > Siri.) See Passcode Lock on page 136.Chapter 3 Basics 34 Find My iPhone Find My iPhone can help you locate and secure your iPhone using the free Find My iPhone app on another iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch, or using a Mac or PC web browser signed in to www.icloud.com. Find My iPhone includes: • Play Sound: Play a sound for two minutes. • Lost mode: You can immediately lock your missing iPhone with a passcode and send it a message displaying a contact number. iPhone also tracks and reports its location, so you can see where it’s been when you check the Find My iPhone app. • Erase iPhone: Protects your privacy by erasing all the information and media on your iPhone and restoring iPhone to its original factory settings. Important: To use these features, Find My iPhone must have been turned on in iCloud settings on your iPhone before it was lost, and iPhone must be connected to the Internet. Turn on Find My iPhone: Go to Settings > iCloud, then turn on Find My iPhone. Battery iPhone has an internal, lithium-ion rechargeable battery. For more information about the battery—including tips for maximizing battery life—go to www.apple.com/batteries. WARNING: For important safety information about the battery and charging iPhone, see Important safety information on page 146. Charge the battery: Connect iPhone to a power outlet using the included cable and USB power adapter. Note: Connecting iPhone to a power outlet can start an iCloud backup or wireless iTunes syncing. See Backing up iPhone on page 150 and Syncing with iTunes on page 16. Charge the battery and sync iPhone using a computer: Connect iPhone to your computer using the included cable. Or connect iPhone to your computer using the included cable and the Dock, available separately.Chapter 3 Basics 35 Unless your keyboard has a high-power USB 2.0 or 3.0 port, you must connect iPhone to a USB 2.0 or 3.0 port on your computer. Important: The iPhone battery may drain instead of charge if iPhone is connected to a computer that’s turned off or is in sleep or standby mode. The battery icon in the upper-right corner shows the battery level or charging status. Charging Charging Charged Charged Display the percentage of battery charge: Go to Settings > General > Usage and turn on the setting under Battery Usage. If you charge the battery while syncing or using iPhone, it may take longer to charge. Important: If iPhone is very low on power, it may display one of the following images, indicating that iPhone needs to charge for up to ten minutes before you can use it. If iPhone is extremely low on power, the display may be blank for up to two minutes before one of the low-battery images appears. or or Rechargeable batteries have a limited number of charge cycles and may eventually need to be replaced. Replace the battery: The iPhone battery isn’t user replaceable; it can be replaced only by an authorized service provider. See www.apple.com/batteries/replacements.html.4 36 Siri What is Siri? Siri is the intelligent personal assistant that helps you get things done just by talking. Siri understands natural speech, so you don’t have to learn specific commands or remember keywords. You can ask things in different ways. For example, you can say “Set the alarm for 6:30 a.m.” or “Wake me at 6:30 in the morning.” Either way, Siri gets it. WARNING: For important information about avoiding distraction while driving, see Important safety information on page 146. Note: Siri is available on iPhone 4S or later, and requires Internet access. Cellular data charges may apply. Siri lets you write and send a message, schedule a meeting, place a phone call, get directions, set a reminder, search the web, and much more—simply by talking naturally. Siri asks a question if it needs clarification or more information. Siri also uses information from your contacts, music library, calendars, reminders, and so forth to understand what you’re talking about. Siri works seamlessly with most of the built-in apps on iPhone, and uses Search and Location Services when needed. You can also ask Siri to open an app for you. There’s so much you can say to Siri—here are some more examples, for starters: • Call Joe • Set the timer for 30 minutes • Directions to the nearest Apple store • Is it going to rain tomorrow? • Open Passbook • Post to Facebook • TweetChapter 4 Siri 37 Using Siri Starting Siri Siri comes to life with the press of a button. Start Siri: Press the Home button until Siri appears. If you didn’t turn Siri on when you set up iPhone, go to Settings > General > Siri. You’ll hear two quick beeps and see “What can I help you with?” on the screen. Just start speaking. The microphone icon lights up to let you know that Siri hears you talking. Once you’ve started a dialogue with Siri, tap the microphone icon to talk to it again. Siri waits for you to stop speaking, but you can also tap the microphone icon to tell Siri you’re done. This is useful when there’s a lot of background noise. It can also speed up your conversation with Siri, since Siri won’t have to wait for your pause. When you stop speaking, Siri displays what it heard and provides a response. Siri often includes related info that might be useful. If the info is related to an app—for example, a text message you’ve composed, or a location you asked for—just tap the display to open the app for details and further action. What Siri heard you say What Siri heard you say Tap to speak to Siri. Tap to speak to Siri. Siri’s response Siri’s response Related info—tap to open the app. Related info—tap to open the app. Siri may ask you for clarification in order to complete a request. For example, tell Siri to “Remind me to call mom,” and Siri may ask “What time would you like me to remind you?” Cancel a request: Say “cancel,” tap , or press the Home button . Stop a phone call you started with Siri: Before the Phone app opens, press the Home button . If Phone is already open, tap End.Chapter 4 Siri 38 Telling Siri about yourself The more Siri knows about you, the more it can use your information to help you. Siri gets your information from your personal info card (“My Info”) in Contacts. Tell Siri who you are: Go to Settings > General > Siri > My Info, then tap your name. Put your home and work addresses on your card, so you can say things like “How do I get home?” and “Remind me to call Bob when I get to work.” Siri also wants to know about the important people in your life, so put those relationships on your personal info card—Siri can help you. For example, the first time you tell Siri to call your sister, Siri asks you who your sister is (if you don’t already have that info on your card). Siri adds that relationship to your personal info card so it doesn’t have to ask next time. Create cards in Contacts for all your important relationships, and include information such as phone numbers, email addresses, home and work addresses, and nicknames you like to use. Onscreen guide Siri prompts you with examples of things you can say, right on screen. Ask Siri “what can you do” or tap when Siri first appears. Siri displays a list of the apps it supports, with an example request. Tap an item in the list to more examples.Chapter 4 Siri 39 Raise to Speak You can start talking to Siri just by bringing iPhone to your ear, like making a phone call. If the screen isn’t on, first press the Sleep/Wake or Home button. You’ll hear two quick beeps to indicate Siri is listening. Then start talking. Turn on Raise to Speak: Go to Settings > General > Siri. If Siri doesn’t respond when you bring iPhone to your ear, start with the screen facing you, so your hand rotates on the way up. Handsfree Siri You can use Siri with the headset that came with iPhone, and with other compatible wired or Bluetooth headsets. Talk to Siri using a headset: Press and hold the center button (or the call button on a Bluetooth headset). To continue a conversation with Siri, press and hold the button each time you want to talk. When you use a headset, Siri speaks its responses to you. Siri reads back text messages and email messages that you’ve dictated before sending them. This gives you a chance to change the message if you want. Siri also reads back the subjects of reminders before creating them. Location Services Because Siri knows locations (iPhone 4S or later) like “current,” “home,” and “work,” it can remind you to do a certain task when you leave a location or arrive at a location. Tell Siri “Remind me to call my daughter when I leave the office,” and Siri does just that. Location information isn’t tracked or stored outside iPhone. You can still use Siri if you turn Location Services off, but Siri won’t do anything that requires location information. Turn off Location Services for Siri: Go to Settings > Privacy > Location Services. Accessibility Siri is accessible to blind and visually impaired users through VoiceOver, the screen reader built into iOS. VoiceOver describes aloud what’s onscreen—including any text in Siri’s responses—so you can use iPhone without seeing it. Turn on VoiceOver: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility. Turning on VoiceOver causes even your notifications to be read aloud for you. For more information, see VoiceOver on page 115.Chapter 4 Siri 40 Setting options for Siri Turn Siri on or off: Go to Settings > General > Siri. Note: Turning Siri off resets Siri, and Siri forgets what it’s learned about your voice. Set options for Siri: Go to Settings > General > Siri. • Language: Select the language you want to use with Siri. • Voice Feedback: By default, Siri speaks its responses only when you hold iPhone to your ear or use Siri with a headset. If you want Siri to always speak its responses, set this option to Always. • My Info: Let Siri know which card in Contacts contains your personal info. See Telling Siri about yourself on page 38. • Raise to Speak: Talk to Siri by bringing iPhone to your ear when the screen is on. To turn this feature on or off, go to Settings > General > Siri. Allow or prevent access to Siri when iPhone is locked with a passcode: Go to Settings > General > Passcode Lock. You can also disable Siri by turning on restrictions. See Restrictions on page 137. Restaurants Siri works with Yelp, OpenTable, and others to provide information about restaurants and help you make reservations. Ask to find restaurants by cuisine, price, location, outdoor seating, or a combination of options. Siri can show you available photos, Yelp stars, price range, and reviews. Get more information by using the Yelp and OpenTable apps—iPhone prompts you to download them if you don’t already have them installed. See detailed info about a restaurant: Tap a restaurant that Siri suggests. Find the location in Maps. Find the location in Maps. See Yelp reviews. See Yelp reviews. Call the restaurant. Call the restaurant. Visit the website. Visit the website. Make a reservation through OpenTable. Make a reservation through OpenTable.Chapter 4 Siri 41 Movies Ask Siri about what movies are playing, or where you can see a specific movie. Find out when a film premiered, who directed it and what awards it won. Siri gives theater locations, show times, and Rotten Tomato reviews. See detailed info about a movie: Tap a movie that Siri suggests. Get theaters and showtimes. Get theaters and showtimes. Watch the trailer. Watch the trailer. Read Rotten Tomato reviews. Read Rotten Tomato reviews. Sports Siri knows a lot about sports—including baseball, basketball, football, soccer, and hockey. Ask Siri for game schedules, scores from the current season’s games, or up-to-the minute scores from live games. Tell Siri to show you player stats and compare them against other players’ stats. Siri tracks team records, too. Here are some things you might ask: • What was the score of the last Giants game? • What are the National League standings? • When is the Chicago Cubs first game of the season? Dictation When Siri is turned on, you can also dictate text. See Dictation on page 25. Although you can compose email, text messages, and other text by talking directly with Siri, you might prefer dictation. Dictation lets you edit a message instead of replacing the entire text. Dictation also gives you more time to think while composing. Siri understands a pause to mean you finished talking for the moment, and takes that opportunity to respond. While this lets you have a natural conversation with Siri, Siri might interrupt you before you’re really done if you pause too long. With dictation, you can pause as much as you like, and resume talking when you’re ready. You can also start composing text using Siri, then continue using dictation. For example, you can create an email with Siri, then tap the draft to open the message in Mail. In Mail, you can complete or edit the message and make other changes, such as adding or removing recipients, revising the subject, or changing the account you’re sending the email from.Chapter 4 Siri 42 Correcting Siri If Siri is having trouble Siri may sometimes have trouble understanding you—in a noisy environment, for example. If you speak with an accent, it can take Siri some time to get used to your voice. If Siri doesn’t hear you exactly right, you can make corrections. Siri shows what it heard you say, along with its response. Correct what Siri hears you say: Tap the bubble showing what Siri heard you say. Edit your request by typing, or tap on the keyboard to dictate. For information about using dictation, see Dictation on page 41. If some of the text is underlined in blue, tap it and Siri suggests some alternatives. Tap one of the suggestions, or replace the text by typing or dictating. Correct Siri by voice: Tap , then restate or clarify your request. For example, “I meant Boston.” When correcting Siri, don’t say what you don’t want—just tell Siri what you do want. Correct a mail or text message: If Siri asks if you want to send the message, say something like: • Change it to: Call me tomorrow. • Add: See you there question mark. • No, send it to Bob. • No. (to keep the message without sending it) • Cancel. To have Siri read the message to you, say “Read it back to me” or “Read me the message.” If it’s correct, say something like “Yes, send it.” Noisy environments In a noisy environment, hold iPhone close to your mouth, but don’t talk directly into the bottom edge. Continue to speak clearly and naturally. Tap when you finish speaking. You can also try holding iPhone to your ear to speak to Siri. Network connection Siri might tell you it’s having trouble connecting to the network. Because Siri relies on Apple servers for voice recognition and other services, you need to have a good 3G, 4G, or LTE cellular connection or a Wi-Fi connection to the Internet. 5 43 Phone Phone calls Making calls Making a call on iPhone is as simple as tapping a name or number in your contacts, using Siri to say “call Bob” (iPhone 4S or later), tapping one of your favorites, or tapping a recent call to return it. Call a favorite with a single tap. Call a favorite with a single tap. View your recent incoming and outgoing calls to return a call or get more info. The red badge indicates the number of missed calls. View your recent incoming and outgoing calls to return a call or get more info. The red badge indicates the number of missed calls. Call, email, or text someone in your contacts list. Call, email, or text someone in your contacts list. Dial manually. Dial manually. View a list of your voicemail messages. View a list of your voicemail messages. WARNING: For important information about avoiding distraction, see Important safety information on page 146. Buttons at the bottom of the Phone screen give you quick access to your favorites, recent calls, your contacts, and a numeric keypad for dialing manually.Chapter 5 Phone 44 Manually dial a number: Tap Keypad, enter the number, then tap Call. • Paste a number to the keypad: Tap the screen above the keyboard, then tap Paste. • Enter a soft (2-second) pause: Touch the “*” key until a comma appears. • Enter a hard pause (to pause dialing until you tap the Dial button): Touch the “#” key until a semicolon appears. • Redial the last number: Tap Keypad, tap Call to display the number, then tap Call again. Add a contact to Favorites: In Contacts, tap “Add to Favorites” at the bottom of a contact card. To delete or rearrange your favorites list, tap Edit. Use Siri or Voice Control: Press and hold the Home button , say call or dial, then say the name or number. You can add at home, work, or mobile. See Chapter 4, Siri, on page 36 and Voice Control on page 26. For best results, speak the full name of the person you’re calling. When voice dialing a number, speak each digit separately—for example, four one five, five five five, one two one two. For the 800 area code in the U.S., you can say eight hundred. Receiving calls Answer a call: Tap Answer. If iPhone is locked, drag the slider. You can also press the center button on your headset. Silence a call: Press the Sleep/Wake button or either volume button. You can still answer the call after silencing it, until it goes to voicemail. Reply to an incoming call with a text message: Swipe up, tap “Reply with Message,” then choose a reply or tap Custom. To create your own default replies, go to Settings > Phone > “Reply with Message” and replace any of the default messages. Remind yourself to return an incoming call: Swipe up, tap Remind Me Later, then choose when you want to be reminded. Decline a call and send it directly to voicemail: Do one of the following: • Press the Sleep/Wake button twice quickly. • Press and hold the center button on your headset for about two seconds. Two low beeps confirm that the call was declined. • Tap Decline (if iPhone is awake when the call comes in). Block calls and maintain Wi-Fi access to the Internet: Go to Settings and turn on Airplane Mode, then tap Wi-Fi to turn it on. Set iPhone to Do Not Disturb ( ): Go to Settings and turn on Do No Disturb. See Do Not Disturb and Notifications on page 132. When iPhone is turned off, in airplane mode, or set to Do Not Disturb, incoming calls go directly to voicemail.Chapter 5 Phone 45 While on a call When you’re on a call, the screen shows call options. Mute your line. iPhone 4 or later: Touch and hold to put your call on hold. Mute your line. iPhone 4 or later: Touch and hold to put your call on hold. Dial a number or enter numbers. Dial a number or enter numbers. Use the speakerphone or a Bluetooth device. Use the speakerphone or a Bluetooth device. Get contact info. Get contact info. Make another Make a FaceTime call. Make a FaceTime call. call. Make another call. Use another app during a call: Press the Home button , then open the app. To return to the call, tap the green bar at the top of the screen. End a call: Tap End. Or press the center button on your headset. Respond to a second incoming call: • Ignore the call and send it to voicemail: Tap Ignore. • Put the first call on hold and answer the new one: Tap Hold Call + Answer. • End the first call and answer the new one: When using a GSM network, tap End Call + Answer. With a CDMA network, tap End Call and when the second call rings back, tap Answer, or drag the slider if the phone is locked. If you’re on a FaceTime video call, you can either end the video call and answer the incoming call, or decline the incoming call. Switch between calls: Tap Swap. The active call is put on hold. With CDMA, you can’t switch between calls if the second call was outgoing, but you can merge the calls. If you end the second call or the merged call, both calls are terminated. Merge calls: Tap Merge Calls. With CDMA, you can’t merge calls if the second call was incoming. Conference calls With GSM, you can set up a conference call with up to five people at a time, depending on your carrier. Create a conference call: While on a call, tap Add Call, make another call, then tap Merge Calls. Repeat to add more people to the conference. • Drop one person: Tap Conference, tap next to a person, then tap End Call. • Talk privately with one person: Tap Conference, then tap Private next to the person. Tap Merge Calls to resume the conference. • Add an incoming caller: Tap Hold Call + Answer, then tap Merge Calls. Note: You can’t make a FaceTime video call when you’re on a conference call.Chapter 5 Phone 46 Using a Bluetooth device For information about using a Bluetooth device, see the documentation that came with the device. See Pairing Bluetooth devices on page 32. Bypass your Bluetooth device: • Answer a call by tapping the iPhone screen. • During a call, tap Audio and choose iPhone or Speaker Phone. • Turn off Bluetooth in Settings > Bluetooth. • Turn off the Bluetooth device, or move out of range. You must be within about 30 feet (10 meters) of a Bluetooth device for it to be connected to iPhone. Emergency calls Make an emergency call when iPhone is locked: On the Enter Passcode screen, tap Emergency Call. Important: iPhone can be used to make an emergency call in many locations, provided that cellular service is available, but it should not be relied on for emergencies. Some cellular networks may not accept an emergency call from iPhone if iPhone is not activated, if iPhone is not compatible with or configured to operate on a particular cellular network, or (when applicable) if iPhone does not have a SIM card or if the SIM card is PIN-locked. In the U.S., location information (if available) is provided to emergency service providers when you dial 911. With CDMA, when an emergency call ends, iPhone enters emergency call mode for a few minutes to allow a call back from emergency services. During this time, data transmission and text messages are blocked. Exit emergency call mode (CDMA): Do one of the following: • Tap the back button. • Press the Sleep/Wake button or the Home button . • Use the keypad to dial a non-emergency number.Chapter 5 Phone 47 FaceTime With iPhone 4 or later, you can make a video call to someone with a Mac or other iOS device that supports FaceTime. The FaceTime camera lets you talk face-to-face; switch to the iSight camera on the back to share what you see around you. Note: On iPhone 3GS or iPhone 4, you need a Wi-Fi connection to the Internet. On iPhone 4S or later, you can also make FaceTime calls over a cellular data connection. Cellular data charges may apply. To turn off FaceTime using cellular data, go to Settings > General > Cellular. Make a FaceTime call: In Contacts, choose a name, tap FaceTime, then tap the phone number or email address that the person uses for FaceTime. To call someone who has an iPhone 4 or later, you can start by making a voice call, then tap FaceTime. Switch cameras. Switch cameras. Drag your image to any corner. Drag your image to any corner. Mute (you can hear and see; the caller can see but not hear). Mute (you can hear and see; the caller can see but not hear). Note: With FaceTime, your phone number is displayed even if caller ID is blocked or turned off. Use Siri or Voice Control: Press and hold the Home button , then say “FaceTime,” followed by the name of the person to call. Set FaceTime options: Go to Settings > FaceTime to: • Turn FaceTime on or off • Specify your Apple ID or an email address for receiving FaceTime calls Visual voicemail Visual voicemail lets you see a list of your messages and choose which ones to listen to or delete, without having to listen to instructions or prior messages. The badge on the Voicemail icon tells you how many unheard messages you have. Set up visual voicemail: The first time you tap Voicemail, you’re prompted to create a voicemail password and record your voicemail greeting. Listen to a voicemail message: Tap Voicemail, then tap a message. To listen again, select the message and tap . If visual voicemail isn’t available with your service, tap Voicemail and follow the voice prompts.Chapter 5 Phone 48 Check voicemail from another phone: Dial your own number or your carrier’s remote access number. Drag the playhead to skip to any point in a message. Drag the playhead to skip to any point in a message. Unheard messages Unheard messages Play/pause Play/pause Contact info Contact info Speakerphone (Audio, when a Bluetooth device is connected. Tap to choose audio output.) Speakerphone (Audio, when a Bluetooth device is connected. Tap to choose audio output.) Return the call. Return the call. Messages are saved until you delete them or your carrier erases them. Delete a message: Swipe or tap the message, then tap Delete. Note: In some areas, deleted messages may be permanently erased by your carrier. Manage deleted messages: Tap Deleted Messages (at the end of the messages list), then: • Listen to a deleted message: Tap the message. • Undelete a message: Tap the message and tap Undelete. • Delete messages permanently: Tap Clear All. Change your greeting: Tap Voicemail, tap Greeting, tap Custom, then tap Record and say your greeting. Or, to use your carrier’s generic greeting, tap Default. Set an alert sound for new voicemail: Go to Settings > Sounds, then tap New Voicemail. Note: If the Ring/Silent switch is off, iPhone won’t sound alerts. Change the voicemail password: Go to Settings > Phone > Change Voicemail Password. Contacts From a contact’s Info screen, a quick tap lets you make a phone call, create an email message, find the contact’s location, and more. See Chapter 25, Contacts, on page 100.Chapter 5 Phone 49 Call forwarding, call waiting, and caller ID The following information applies only to GSM networks. For CDMA networks, contact your carrier for information about enabling and using these features. See support.apple.com/kb/HT4515. Turn call forwarding on or off: Go to Settings > Phone > Call Forwarding. The Call Forwarding icon ( ) appears in the status bar when call forwarding is on. You must be in range of the cellular network when you set iPhone to forward calls, or calls won’t be forwarded. FaceTime calls are not forwarded. Turn call waiting on or off: Go to Settings > Phone > Call Waiting. If you’re on a call and call waiting is turned off, incoming calls go directly to voicemail. Turn caller ID on or off: Go to Settings > Phone > Show My Caller ID. Note: For FaceTime calls, your phone number is displayed even if caller ID is turned off. Ringtones, Ring/Silent switch, and vibrate iPhone comes with ringtones that sound for incoming calls, Clock alarms, and the Clock timer. You can also purchase ringtones from songs in iTunes. See Chapter 22, iTunes Store, on page 94. Set the default ringtone: Go to Settings > Sounds > Ringtone. Turn the ringer on or off: Flip the switch on the side of iPhone. Important: Clock alarms still sound even if you set the Ring/Silent switch to silent. Turn vibrate on or off: Go to Settings > Sounds. Assign a different ringtone for a contact: In Contacts, choose a contact, tap edit, then tap Ringtone and choose a ringtone. For more information, see Sounds on page 139. International calls For information about making international calls from your home area, including rates and other charges that may apply, contact your carrier or go to your carrier’s website. When traveling abroad, you may be able to use iPhone to make calls, send and receive text messages, and use apps that access the Internet, depending on available networks. Enable international roaming: Contact your carrier for information about availability and fees. Important: Voice, text message, and data roaming charges may apply. To avoid charges when roaming, turn off Voice Roaming and Data Roaming. If you have an iPhone 4S or later that’s been activated to work on a CDMA network, you may be able to roam on GSM networks if the phone has a SIM card installed. When roaming on a GSM network, iPhone has access to GSM network features. Charges may apply. Contact your carrier for more information. Set network options: Go to Settings > General > Cellular to: • Turn data roaming on or off. • Turn cellular data on or off. • Turn voice roaming on or off (CDMA). • Use GSM networks abroad (CDMA).Chapter 5 Phone 50 Turn off cellular services: Go to Settings, turn on Airplane Mode, then tap Wi-Fi and turn Wi-Fi on. Incoming phone calls are sent to voicemail. To resume cellular service, turn Airplane Mode off. Automatically add the prefix or country code for calls to the U.S.: (GSM) Go to Settings > Phone, then turn on Dial Assist. This lets you use contacts and favorites to make calls while abroad. Choose a carrier: Go to Settings > Carrier. This option is available only when you’re traveling outside your service provider’s network, and for carriers that have roaming agreements with your provider. See Carrier on page 133. Get voicemail when visual voicemail isn’t available: Dial your own number (with CDMA, add # after your number), or touch and hold “1” on the numeric keypad. Setting options for Phone Go to Settings > Phone to: • See the phone number for your iPhone • Change the default text message replies for incoming calls • Turn call forwarding, call waiting, and caller ID on or off (GSM) • Turn TTY on or off • Change your voicemail password (GSM) • Require a PIN to unlock your SIM when you turn iPhone on (required by some carriers) Go to Settings > FaceTime to: • Turn FaceTime on or off • Use your Apple ID for FaceTime • Add an email address for FaceTime • Turn cellular data on or off Go to Settings > Sounds to: • Set ringtones and volume • Set vibration options • Set the sound for new voicemail6 51 Mail Reading mail Change mailboxes or accounts. Change mailboxes or accounts. Search this mailbox. Search this mailbox. VIP VIP Compose a message. Compose a message. Change the preview length in Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars. Change the preview length in Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars. Delete, move, or mark multiple messages. Delete, move, or mark multiple messages. Flag a message or mark it as unread: Tap . To mark multiple messages at once, tap Edit while viewing the message list. Identify messages addressed specifically to you: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars, then turn Show To/Cc Label on or off. Messages with your address in the To or Cc field are indicated with an icon in the message list. See all the recipients of a message: Tap the word Details in the From field. Tap a recipient’s name or email address to view the recipient’s contact information or add them to Contacts or your VIP list. Prevent downloading remote images: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars, then turn Load Remote Images on or off. Open a link: Tap the link to use its default action, or touch and hold to see other actions. For example, for an address, you can show its location in Maps or add it to Contacts. For a web link, you can add it to Reading List. Open a meeting invitation or attachment: Tap the item. If the attachment can be used by multiple apps, touch and hold to choose an app that works with the file. Save an attached photo or video: Touch and hold the photo or video, then tap Save Image or Video. It’s saved to your Camera Roll in the Photos app.Chapter 6 Mail 52 Load new messages: Pull the message list or mailbox list down to refresh the list. • Set the number of older messages retrieved: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars > Show. Turn off new message notifications for an account: Go to Settings > Notifications > Mail > account name, then turn Notification Center off. Change the tones played by Mail: Go to Settings > Sound. • Change the tone played for new mail in each account: Go to Settings > Notifications > Mail > account name > New Mail Sound. • Change the tone played for new mail from VIPs: Go to Settings > Notifications > Mail > VIP > New Mail Sound. Sending mail Tap to change From, Cc, or Bcc. Tap to change From, Cc, or Bcc. Change your signature in Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars. Change your signature in Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars. Tap to attach a photo or video. Tap to attach a photo or video. Compose a message: Tap , then type a name or email address. After you enter recipients, you can drag to move them between fields, such as from To to Cc. If you have multiple mail accounts, tap From to change the account you’re sending from. Automatically Bcc yourself on outgoing messages: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars > Always Bcc Myself. Save a draft of a message: Tap Cancel, then tap Save. The message is saved in the account’s Drafts mailbox. Touch and hold to see your saved drafts. Reply to a message: Tap , then tap Reply. Files or images attached to the initial message aren’t sent back. To include the attachments, forward the message instead of replying. Forward a message: Open a message and tap , then tap Forward. This also forwards the message’s attachments. Quote a portion of the message you’re replying to or forwarding: Touch and hold to select text. Drag the grab points to select the text you want to include in your reply, then tap . • Change the indentation level: Select the text to indent, tap at least twice, then tap Quote Level. • Automatically increase the quote level: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars, then turn on Increase Quote Level. Send a photo or video in a message: Tap the insertion point to display the selection buttons. Tap , tap Insert Photo or Video, then choose a photo or video from an album. You can also email multiple photos using Photos—see Sharing photos and videos on page 72. Change your email signature: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars > Signature. If you have more than one mail account, tap Per Account to specify a different signature for each account.Chapter 6 Mail 53 Organizing mail See messages from VIPs: Go to the mailbox list (tap Mailboxes to get there), then tap VIP. • Add a person to the VIP list: Tap the person’s name or address in a From, To, or CC/Bcc field, then tap Add to VIP. Group related messages together: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars, then turn Organize by Thread on or off. Search messages: Open a mailbox, scroll to the top, then enter text in the Search field. You can search the From, To, or the Subject field in the mailbox that’s currently open. For mail accounts that support searching messages on the server, tap All to search From, To, Subject, and the message body. Delete a message: If the message is open, Tap . • Delete a message without opening it: Swipe over the message title, then tap Delete. • Delete multiple messages: While viewing the message list, tap Edit. • Turn off deletion confirmation: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars > Ask Before Deleting. Recover a message: Go to the account’s Trash mailbox, open the message, tap , then move the message to the account’s Inbox or other folder. • Set how long your messages stay in Trash before being permanently deleted: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars > account name > Account > Advanced. Turn archiving on or off: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars > account name > Account > Advanced. When you archive a message, it moves to the All Mail mailbox. Not all mail accounts support archiving. Move a message to a different mailbox: While viewing the message, tap , then choose a destination. Add, rename, or delete a mailbox: In the mailbox list, tap Edit. Some mailboxes can’t be renamed or deleted. Printing messages and attachments Print a message: Tap , then tap Print. Print an inline image: Touch and hold the image, then tap Save Image. Go to Photos and print the image from your Camera Roll album. Print an attachment: Tap the attachment to open it in Quick Look, tap , then tap Print. For more information about printing, see Printing with AirPrint on page 30.Chapter 6 Mail 54 Mail accounts and settings Change Mail and mail account settings: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars. You can set up: • iCloud • Microsoft Exchange and Outlook • Google • Yahoo! • AOL • Microsoft Hotmail • Other POP and IMAP accounts Settings vary based on the type of account you’re setting up. Your Internet service provider or system administrator can provide the information you need to enter. Temporarily stop using an account: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars, choose an account, then turn off mail service for the account. When the service is turned off, iPhone doesn’t display or sync that information until you turn it back on. This is a good way to stop receiving work email while on vacation, for example. Delete an account: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars, choose an account, then scroll down and tap Delete Account. All information synced with that account, such as bookmarks, mail, and notes, is removed. Set Push settings: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars > Fetch New Data. Push delivers new information whenever it appears on the server and there’s an Internet connection (some delays may occur). When Push is turned off, use the Fetch New Data setting to determine how often data is requested. The setting you choose here overrides individual account settings. For optimal battery life, don’t fetch too often. Not all accounts support push. Send signed and encrypted messages: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars > account name > Account > Advanced. Turn on S/MIME, then select certificates for signing and encrypting outgoing messages. To install certificates, you may get a configuration profile from your system administrator, download the certificates from the issuer’s website using Safari, or receive them as mail attachments. Set advanced options: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars > account name > Account > Advanced. Options vary depending on the account, and may include: • Store drafts, sent messages, and deleted messages on iPhone • Set how long deleted messages are kept before being permanently removed • Adjust mail server settings • Adjust SSL and password settings Ask your Internet service provider or system administrator if you’re not sure what the appropriate settings are for your account.7 55 Safari Safari features include: • Reader—view articles without ads or clutter • Reading list—collect articles to read later • Full-screen mode—when viewing webpages in landscape orientation Use iCloud to see pages you have open on other devices, and to keep your bookmarks and reading list up to date on your other devices. Search the web and the current page. Search the web and the current page. Swipe through open webpages or open a new page. Swipe through open webpages or open a new page. Double-tap an item or pinch to zoom in or out. Double-tap an item or pinch to zoom in or out. Enter a web address (URL). Enter a web address (URL). Add a bookmark, Reading List item, or icon to the Home Page, or share or print the page. Add a bookmark, Reading List item, or icon to the Home Page, or share or print the page. Tap the status bar to quickly scroll to the top. Tap the status bar to quickly scroll to the top. View your reading list, history, and bookmarks. View your reading list, history, and bookmarks. View a webpage: Tap the address field (in the title bar), enter the URL, then tap Go. • Scroll a webpage: Drag up, down, or sideways. • Scroll within a frame: Drag two fingers inside the frame. • View in full-screen landscape: Rotate iPhone, then tap . • Reload a webpage: Tap in the address field. Close a webpage: Tap , then tap by the page.Chapter 7 Safari 56 See webpages you have open on your other devices: Tap , then tap iCloud Tabs. To share webpages you have open on iPhone with your other devices using iCloud Tabs, go to Settings > iCloud and turn on Safari. Follow a link on a webpage: Tap the link. • See a link’s destination: Touch and hold the link. • Open a link in a new tab: Touch and hold the link, then tap “Open in New Page.” Detected data—such as phone numbers and email addresses—may also appear as links in webpages. Touch and hold a link to see the available options. View an article in Reader: Tap the Reader button, if it appears in the address field. • Adjust the font size: Tap . • Share the article: Tap . Note: When you email an article from Reader, the full text of the article is sent, in addition to the link. • Return to normal view: Tap Done. Use Reading List to collect webpages and read them later: • Add the current webpage: Tap , then tap “Add to Reading List.” With iPhone 4 or later, the webpage is saved as well as the link, so you can read it even when you can’t connect to the Internet. • Add the destination of a link: Touch and hold the link, then tap “Add to Reading List.” • View your reading list: Tap , then tap Reading List. • Delete an item from your reading list: Swipe the item, then tap Delete. Fill out a form: Tap a text field to bring up the keyboard. • Move to a different text field: Tap the text field, or tap Next or Previous. • Submit a form: Tap Go, Search, or the link on the webpage to submit the form. • Enable AutoFill: Go to Settings > Safari > AutoFill. Search the web, the current webpage, or a searchable PDF: Enter text in the search field. • Search the web: Tap one of the suggestions that appear, or tap Search. • Find the search text on the current webpage or PDF: Scroll to the bottom of the screen, then tap the entry below On This Page. The first instance is highlighted. To find later instances, tap . Bookmark the current webpage: Tap , then tap Bookmark. When you save a bookmark, you can edit its title. By default, bookmarks are saved at the top level of Bookmarks. To choose a different folder, tap Bookmarks on the Add Bookmarks screen. Create an icon on the Home screen: Tap , then tap “Add to Home Screen.” Safari adds an icon for the current webpage to your Home Screen. Unless the webpage has a custom icon, that image is also used for the web clip icon on the Home screen. Web clips are backed up by iCloud and iTunes, but they aren’t pushed to other devices by iCloud or synced by iTunes. Share or copy a link for the current webpage: Tap , then tap Mail, Message, Twitter, Facebook, or Copy. Print the current webpage: Tap , then tap Print. See Printing with AirPrint on page 30.Chapter 7 Safari 57 Use iCloud to keep your bookmarks and reading list up to date on your other devices: Go to Settings > iCloud and turn on Safari. See iCloud on page 15. Set options for Safari: Go to Settings > Safari. Options include: • Search engine • AutoFill for filling out forms • Opening links in a new page or in the background • Private browsing to help protect private information and block some websites from tracking your behavior • Clearing history, cookies, and data • Cellular data for Reading List • Fraud warning8 58 Music Getting music Get music and other audio content onto iPhone: • Purchase and download from the iTunes Store: In Music, tap Store. See Chapter 22, iTunes Store, on page 94. • Automatically download music purchased on your other iOS devices and computers: See iCloud on page 15. • Sync content with iTunes on your computer: See Syncing with iTunes on page 16. • Use iTunes Match to store your music library in iCloud: See iTunes Match on page 62. Playing music WARNING: For important information about avoiding hearing loss, see Important safety information on page 146. You can listen to audio from the built-in speaker, headphones attached to the headset jack, or wireless Bluetooth stereo headphones paired with iPhone. When headphones are attached or paired, no sound comes from the speaker. Open iTunes Store. Open iTunes Store. Choose how to browse. Choose how to browse. See additional browse buttons. See additional browse buttons. Tap to listen. Tap to listen.Chapter 8 Music 59 Play a track: Browse by playlist, artist, song, or other category, then tap the track. • See additional browse buttons: Tap More. • Change which browse buttons appear at the bottom: Tap More, tap Edit, then drag an icon over the button you want to replace. The Now Playing screen shows you what’s playing, and provides playback controls. Next/Fast-forward Next/Fast-forward Play/Pause Play/Pause Track list Track list Back Back Previous/ Volume Volume Rewind Previous/ Rewind AirPlay AirPlay Lyrics appear on the Now Playing screen if you’ve added them to the song using the song’s Info window in iTunes and you’ve synced iPhone with iTunes. Display additional controls (iPhone 4S or earlier): Tap the album artwork on the Now Playing screen to display the scrubber bar and playhead, and the Repeat, Genius, and Shuffle buttons. Skip to any point in a song: Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Slide your finger down to slow down the scrub rate. Shake to shuffle: Shake iPhone to turn on shuffle, and to change songs. To turn Shake to Shuffle on or off, go to Settings > Music. See all tracks on the album containing the current song: Tap . To play a track, tap it. Tap a star to rate this song for creating smart playlists in iTunes. Tap a star to rate this song for creating smart playlists in iTunes. Return to the Now Playing screen. Return to the Now Playing screen. Album tracks Album tracks Search music (titles, artists, albums, and composers): While browsing, tap the status bar to reveal the search field at the top of the screen, then enter your search text. You can also search audio content from the Home screen. See Searching on page 27.Chapter 8 Music 60 Display audio controls while in another app: Double-click the Home button , then swipe the multitasking bar to the right. Swipe right again to display a volume control and the AirPlay button (when in range of an Apple TV or AirPlay speakers). Current audio app—tap to open it. Current audio app—tap to open it. Currently playing song. Currently playing song. Display audio controls while the screen is locked: Double-click the Home button . Play music on AirPlay speakers or Apple TV: Tap . See AirPlay on page 30. Cover Flow When you rotate iPhone, your music content appears in Cover Flow. Browse albums in Cover Flow: Drag left or right. • See the tracks on an album: Tap the album artwork or . Drag up or down to scroll; tap a track to play it. • Return to the artwork: Tap the title bar, or tap again. Podcasts and audiobooks On iPhone 5, podcast and audiobook controls and info appear on the Now Playing screen when you begin playback. Note: The Podcasts app is available for free in the App Store. See Chapter 31, Podcasts, on page 113. If you install the Podcasts app, podcast content and controls are removed from Music. Show or hide the controls and info (iPhone 4S or earlier): Tap the center of the screen. Playhead Playhead Scrubber bar Scrubber bar Playback speed Playback speed Skip 15 seconds. Skip 15 seconds. Email Email Repeat last 15 seconds. Repeat last 15 seconds. Get more podcast episodes: Tap Podcasts (tap More first, if Podcasts isn’t visible), then tap a podcast to see available episodes. To download more episodes, tap Get More Episodes. Hide lyrics and podcast info: Go to Settings > Music, then turn off Lyrics & Podcasts Info.Chapter 8 Music 61 Playlists Create a playlist: View Playlists, tap Add Playlist near the top of the list, then enter a title. Tap to add songs and videos, then tap Done. Edit a playlist: Select the playlist to edit, then tap Edit. • Add more songs: Tap . • Delete a song: Tap . Deleting a song from a playlist doesn’t delete it from iPhone. • Change the song order: Drag . New and changed playlists are copied to your iTunes library the next time you sync iPhone with your computer, or via iCloud if you’ve subscribed to iTunes Match. Clear or delete a playlist: Select the playlist, then tap Clear or Delete. Delete a song from iPhone: In Songs, swipe the song, then tap Delete. The song is deleted from iPhone, but not from your iTunes library on your Mac or PC, or from iCloud. When iTunes Match is turned on, you can’t delete music. If space is needed, iTunes Match removes music for you, starting with the oldest and least played songs. Genius A Genius playlist is a collection of songs from your library that go together. Genius is a free service, but it requires an Apple ID. A Genius Mix is a selection of songs of the same kind of music, recreated from your library each time you listen to the mix. Use Genius on iPhone: Turn on Genius in iTunes on your computer, then sync iPhone with iTunes. Genius Mixes are synced automatically, unless you manually manage your music. You can also sync Genius playlists. Browse and play Genius Mixes: Tap Genius (tap More first, if Genius isn’t visible). Swipe left or right to access other mixes. To play a mix, tap . Make a Genius playlist: View Playlists, then tap Genius Playlist and choose a song. Or, from the Now Playing screen, tap the screen to display the controls, then tap . • Replace the playlist using a different song: Tap New and pick a song. • Refresh the playlist: Tap Refresh. • Save the playlist: Tap Save. The playlist is saved with the title of the song you picked and marked by . Edit a saved Genius playlist: Tap the playlist, then tap Edit. • Delete a song: Tap . • Change the song order: Drag . Delete a saved Genius playlist: Tap the Genius playlist, then tap Delete. Genius playlists created on iPhone are copied to your computer when you sync with iTunes. Note: Once a Genius playlist is synced to iTunes, you can’t delete it directly from iPhone. Use iTunes to edit the playlist name, stop syncing, or delete the playlist.Chapter 8 Music 62 Siri and Voice Control You can use Siri (iPhone 4S or later) or Voice Control to control music playback. See Chapter 4, Siri, on page 36 and Voice Control on page 26. Use Siri or Voice Control: Press and hold the Home button . • Play or pause music: Say “play” or “play music.” To pause, say “pause,” “pause music,” or “stop.” You can also say “next song” or “previous song.” • Play an album, artist, or playlist: Say “play,” then say “album,” “artist,” or “playlist” and the name. • Shuffle the current playlist: Say “shuffle.” • Find out more about the current song: Say “what’s playing,” “who sings this song,” or “who is this song by.” • Use Genius to play similar songs: Say “Genius” or “play more songs like this.” iTunes Match iTunes Match stores your music library in iCloud—including songs imported from CDs—and lets you play your collection on iPhone and your other iOS devices and computers. iTunes Match is available as a paid subscription. Subscribe to iTunes Match: In iTunes on your computer, choose Store > Turn On iTunes Match, then click the Subscribe button. Once you subscribe, iTunes adds your music, playlists, and Genius Mixes to iCloud. Your songs that match music already in the iTunes Store are automatically available in iCloud. Other songs are uploaded. You can download and play matched songs at up to iTunes Plus quality (256 kbps DRM-free AAC), even if your original was of lower quality. For more information, see www.apple.com/icloud/features. Turn on iTunes Match: Go to Settings > Music. Turning on iTunes Match removes synced music from iPhone, and disables Genius Mixes and Genius Playlists. Note: If Use Cellular Data is turned on, cellular data charges may apply. Songs are downloaded to iPhone when you play them. You can also download songs manually. Download an album to iPhone: While browsing, tap Albums, tap an album, then tap . Show only music that’s been downloaded from iCloud: Go to Settings > Music, then turn off Show All Music (available only when iTunes Match is turned on). Manage your devices using iTunes Match or Automatic Downloads: In iTunes on your computer, go to Store > View My Account. Sign in, then click Manage Devices in the “iTunes in the Cloud” section.Chapter 8 Music 63 Home Sharing Home Sharing lets you play music, movies, and TV shows from the iTunes library on your Mac or PC. iPhone and your computer must be on the same Wi-Fi network. Note: Home Sharing requires iTunes 10.2 or later, available at www.itunes.com/download. Bonus content, such as digital booklets and iTunes Extras, can’t be shared. Play music from your iTunes library on iPhone: 1 In iTunes on your computer, choose Advanced > Turn On Home Sharing. Log in, then click Create Home Share. 2 On iPhone, go to Settings > Music, then log in to Home Sharing using the same Apple ID and password. 3 In Music, tap More, then tap Shared and choose your computer’s library. Return to content on iPhone: Tap Shared and choose My iPhone. Music settings Go to Settings > Music to set options for Music, including: • Shake to Shuffle • Sound Check (to normalize the volume level of your audio content) • Equalization (EQ) Note: EQ affects all sound output, including the headset jack and AirPlay. EQ settings generally apply only to music played from the Music app. The Late Night setting applies to all audio output—video as well as music. Late Night compresses the dynamic range of the audio output, reducing the volume of loud passages and increasing the volume of quiet passages. You might want to use this setting when listening to music on an airplane or in some other noisy environment, for example. • Lyrics and podcast info • Grouping by album artist • iTunes Match • Home Sharing Set the volume limit: Go to Settings > Music > Volume Limit, then adjust the volume slider. Note: In European Union countries, you can limit the maximum headset volume to the European Union recommended level. Go to Settings > Music > Volume Limit, then turn on EU Volume Limit. Restrict changes to the volume limit: Go to Settings > General > Restrictions > Volume Limit, then tap Don’t Allow Changes.9 64 Messages Sending and receiving messages WARNING: For important information about avoiding distraction while driving, see Important safety information on page 146. Messages lets you exchange text messages with other SMS and MMS devices via your cellular connection, and with other iOS devices using iMessage. iMessage is an Apple service that lets you send unlimited messages over Wi-Fi (as well as cellular connections) to other iOS and OS X Mountain Lion users. With iMessage, you can see when other people are typing, and let them know when you’ve read their messages. iMessages are displayed on all of your iOS devices logged in to the same account, so you can start a conversation on one of your devices, and continue it on another device. iMessages are encrypted for security. Tap the attach media button to include a photo or video. Tap the attach media button to include a photo or video. Tap to enter text. Tap to enter text. Blue indicates an iMessage conversation. Blue indicates an iMessage conversation. Start a text conversation: Tap , then tap and choose a contact, search your contacts by entering a name, or enter a phone number or email address manually. Enter a message, then tap Send. An alert badge appears if a message can’t be sent. Tap the alert in a conversation to try sending the message again. Double-tap to send the message as an SMS text message. Resume a conversation: Tap the conversation in the Messages list.Chapter 9 Messages 65 Use picture characters: Go to Settings > General > Keyboard > Keyboards > Add New Keyboard, then tap Emoji to make that keyboard available. Then while typing a message, tap to bring up the Emoji keyboard. See Special input methods on page 144. See a person’s contact info: Scroll to the top (tap the status bar) to see actions you can perform, such as making a FaceTime call. See earlier messages in the conversation: Scroll to the top (tap the status bar). Tap Load Earlier Messages if needed. Send messages to a group (iMessage and MMS): Tap , then enter multiple recipients. With MMS, group messaging must also be turned on in Settings > Messages, and replies are sent only to you—they aren’t copied to the other people in the group. Managing conversations Conversations are saved in the Messages list. A blue dot indicates unread messages. Tap a conversation to view or continue it. Forward a conversation: Tap Edit, select parts to include, then tap Forward. Edit a conversation: Tap Edit, select the parts to delete, then tap Delete. To clear all text and attachments without deleting the conversation, tap Clear All. Delete a conversation: In the Message list, swipe the conversation, then tap Delete. Search a conversation: Tap the top of the screen to display the search field, then enter the text you’re looking for. You can also search conversations from the Home screen. See Searching on page 27. Add someone to your contacts list: Tap a phone number in the Messages list, then tap “Add to Contacts.” Sharing photos, videos, and other info With iMessage or MMS, you can send and receive photos and videos, and send locations, contact info, and voice memos. The size limit of attachments is determined by your service provider— iPhone may compress photo and video attachments when needed. Send a photo or video: Tap . Send a location: In Maps, tap for a location, tap Share Location, then tap Message. Send contact info: In Contacts, choose a contact, tap Share Contact, then tap Message. Send a voice memo: In Voice Memos, tap , tap the voice memo, tap Share, then tap Message. Save a photo or video you receive to your Camera Roll album: Tap the photo or video, then tap . Copy a photo or video: Touch and hold the attachment, then tap Copy. Add someone to your contacts from the Messages list: Tap the phone number or email address, tap the status bar to scroll to the top, then tap “Add Contact.” Save contact info you receive: Tap the contact bubble, then tap Create New Contact or “Add to Existing Contact.”Chapter 9 Messages 66 Messages settings Go to Settings > Messages to set options for Messages, including: • Turning iMessage on or off • Notifying others when you’ve read their messages • Specifying an Apple ID or email address to use with Messages • SMS and MMS options • Showing the Subject field • Showing the character count Manage notifications for messages: See Do Not Disturb and Notifications on page 132. Set the alert sound for incoming text messages: See Sounds on page 139.10 67 Calendar At a glance iPhone makes it easy to stay on schedule. You can view calendars individually, or view several calendars at once. A day with a dot has events. A day with a dot has events. Change calendars or accounts. Change calendars or accounts. View invitations. View invitations. View or edit an event: Tap the event. You can: • Set a primary and secondary alert • Change the event’s date, time, or duration • Move an event to a different calendar • Invite others to attend events on iCloud, Microsoft Exchange, and CalDAV calendars • Delete the event You can also move an event by holding it down and dragging it to a new time, or by adjusting the grab points. Add an event: Tap and enter event information, then tap Done. • Set the default calendar for new events: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars > Default Calendar. • Set default alert times for birthdays and events: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars > Default Alert Times.Chapter 10 Calendar 68 Search for events: Tap List, then enter text in the search field. The titles, invitees, locations, and notes for the calendars you’re viewing are searched. You can also search Calendar events from the Home screen. See Searching on page 27. Set the calendar alert tone: Go to Settings > Sounds > Calendar Alerts. View by week: Rotate iPhone sideways. Import events from a calendar file: If you receive an .ics calendar file in Mail, open the message and tap the calendar file to import all of the events it contains. You can also import an .ics file published on the web by tapping a link to the file. Some .ics files subscribe you to a calendar instead of adding events to your calendar. See Working with multiple calendars on page 68. If you have an iCloud account, a Microsoft Exchange account, or a supported CalDAV account, you can receive and respond to meeting invitations from people in your organization. Invite others to an event: Tap an event, tap Edit, then tap Invitees to select people from Contacts. Respond to an invitation: Tap an invitation in the calendar. Or tap to display the Event screen, then tap an invitation. You can view information about the organizer and other invitees. If you add comments, which may not be available for all types of calendars, your comments are visible to the organizer but not other attendees. Accept an event without marking the time as reserved: Tap the event, then tap Availability and select “free.” The event stays on your calendar, but doesn’t appear as busy to others who send you invitations. Working with multiple calendars You can view individual calendars, or several calendars at once. You can subscribe to iCloud, Google, Yahoo!, or iCalendar calendars, as well as your Facebook events and birthdays. Turn on iCloud, Google, Exchange, or Yahoo! calendars: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars, tap an account, then turn on Calendar. Add a CalDAV account: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars, tap Add an Account, then tap Other. Under Calendars, tap Add CalDAV Account. View Facebook events: Go to Settings > Facebook, then sign in to your Facebook account and turn on access to Calendar. Select calendars to view: Tap Calendars, then tap to select the calendars you want to view. The events for all selected calendars appear in one view. View the Birthdays calendar: Tap Calendars, then tap Birthdays to include birthdays from your Contacts with your events. If you’ve set up a Facebook account, you can also include your Facebook friends’ birthdays. You can subscribe to calendars that use the iCalendar (.ics) format. Many calendar-based services support calendar subscriptions, including iCloud, Yahoo!, Google, and the Calendar application in OS X. Subscribed calendars are read-only. You can read events from subscribed calendars on iPhone, but you can’t edit events or create new ones. Subscribe to a calendar: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars, then tap Add Account. Tap Other, then tap Add Subscribed Calendar. Enter the server and filename of the .ics file to subscribe to. You can also subscribe to an iCalendar (.ics) calendar published on the web, by tapping a link to the calendar.Chapter 10 Calendar 69 Sharing iCloud calendars You can share an iCloud calendar with other iCloud users. When you share a calendar, others can view it, and you can let them add or change events, too. You can also share a read-only version that anyone can view. Create an iCloud calendar: Tap Calendars, tap Edit, then tap Add Calendar. Share an iCloud calendar: Tap Calendars, tap Edit, then tap the iCloud calendar you want to share. Tap Add Person, then choose someone from Contacts. The person will receive an email invitation to join the calendar, but needs an Apple ID and iCloud account to accept your invitation. Turn off notifications for shared calendars: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars and turn off Shared Calendar Alerts. Change a person’s access to a shared calendar: Tap Calendars, tap Edit, then tap a person you’re sharing with. You can turn off their ability to edit the calendar, resend the invitation to join the calendar, or stop sharing with them. Share a read-only calendar with anyone: Tap Calendars, tap Edit, then tap the iCloud calendar you want to share. Turn on Public Calendar, then tap Share Link to copy or send the URL for the calendar. Anyone can use the URL to subscribe to your calendar using a compatible app, such as Calendar for iOS or OS X. Calendar settings There are several settings in Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars that affect Calendar and your calendar accounts. These include: • Syncing of past events (future events are always synced) • Alert tone played for new meeting invitations • Calendar time zone support, to show dates and times using a different time zone11 70 Photos Viewing photos and videos Photos lets you view photos and videos on iPhone, in your: • Camera Roll album—photos and videos you took on iPhone, or saved from an email, text message, webpage, or screenshot • Photo Stream albums—photos in My Photo Stream and your shared photo streams (see Photo Stream on page 71) • Photo Library and other albums synced from your computer (see Syncing with iTunes on page 16) Edit the photo. Edit the photo. Delete the photo. Delete the photo. Tap the screen to display the controls. Tap the screen to display the controls. Share the photo, assign it to a contact, use it as wallpaper, or print it. Share the photo, assign it to a contact, use it as wallpaper, or print it. Play a slideshow. Play a slideshow. Stream photos using AirPlay. Stream photos using AirPlay. View photos and videos: Tap an album, then tap a thumbnail. • See the next or previous photo or video: Swipe left or right. • Zoom in or out: Double-tap or pinch. • Pan a photo: Drag it. • Play a video: Tap in the center of the screen. To change between full-screen and fit-to-screen viewing, double-tap the screen.Chapter 11 Photos 71 Albums you sync with iPhoto 8.0 (iLife ’09) or later, or Aperture v3.0.2 or later, can be viewed by events or by faces. You can also view photos by location, if they were taken with a camera that supports geotagging. View a slideshow: Tap a thumbnail, then tap . Select options, then tap Start Slideshow. To stop the slideshow, tap the screen. To set other options, go to Settings > Photos & Camera. Stream a slideshow or video to a TV: See AirPlay on page 30. Organizing photos and videos Create an album: Tap Albums, tap , enter a name, then tap Save. Select items to add to the album, then tap Done. Note: Albums created on iPhone aren’t synced back to your computer. Add items to an album: When viewing thumbnails, tap Edit, select items, then tap Add To. Manage albums: Tap Edit: • Rename an album: Select the album, then enter a new name. • Rearrange albums: Drag . • Delete an album: Tap . Only albums created on iPhone can be renamed or deleted. Photo Stream With Photo Stream, a feature of iCloud (see iCloud on page 15), photos you take on iPhone automatically appear on your other devices set up with Photo Stream, including your Mac or PC. Photo Stream also lets you share select photos with friends and family, directly to their devices or on the web. About Photo Stream When Photo Stream is turned on, photos you take on iPhone (as well as any other photos added to your Camera Roll) appear in your photo stream after you leave the Camera app and iPhone is connected to the Internet via Wi-Fi. These photos appear in the My Photo Stream album on iPhone and on your other devices set up with Photo Stream. Turn on Photo Stream: Go to Settings > iCloud > Photo Stream. Photos added to your photo stream from your other iCloud devices also appear in My Photo Stream. iPhone and other iOS devices can keep up to 1000 of your most recent photos in My Photo Stream. Your computers can keep all your Photo Stream photos permanently. Note: Photo Stream photos don’t count against your iCloud storage. Manage photo stream contents: In a photo stream album, tap Edit. • Save photos to iPhone: Select the photos, then tap Save. • Share, print, copy, or save photos to your Camera Roll album: Select the photos, then tap Share. • Delete photos: Select the photos, then tap Delete. Chapter 11 Photos 72 Note: Although deleted photos are removed from photo streams on your devices, the original photos remain in the Camera Roll album on the device they originated from. Photos saved to a device or computer from a photo stream are also not deleted. To delete photos from Photo Stream, you need iOS 5.1 or later on iPhone and your other iOS devices. See support.apple.com/kb/HT4486. Shared photo streams Shared photo streams let you share selected photos with just the people you choose. iOS 6 and OS X Mountain Lion users can subscribe to your shared photo streams, view the latest photos you’ve added, “like” individual photos, and leave comments—right from their devices. You can also create a public website for a shared photo stream, to share your photos with others over the web. Note: Shared photo streams work over both Wi-Fi and cellular networks. Cellular data charges may apply. Turn on Shared Photo Streams: Go to Settings > iCloud > Photo Stream. Create a shared photo stream: Tap Photo Stream, then tap . To invite other iOS 6 or OS X Mountain Lion users to subscribe to your shared photo stream, enter their email addresses. To post the photo stream on icloud.com, turn on Public Website. Name the album, then tap Create. Add photos to a shared photo stream: Select a photo, tap , tap Photo Stream, then select the shared photo stream. To add several photos from an album, tap Edit, select the photos, then tap Share. Delete photos from a shared photo stream: Tap the shared photo stream, tap Edit, select the photos, then tap Delete. Edit a shared photo stream: Tap Photo Stream, then tap . You can: • Rename the photo stream • Add or remove subscribers, and resend an invitation • Create a public website, and share the link • Delete the photo stream Sharing photos and videos You can share photos in email, text messages (MMS or iMessage), photo streams, Twitter posts, and Facebook. Videos can be shared in email and text messages (MMS or iMessage), and on YouTube. Share or copy a photo or video: Choose a photo or video, then tap . If you don’t see , tap the screen to show the controls. The size limit of attachments is determined by your service provider. iPhone may compress photo and video attachments, if necessary. You can also copy photos and videos, and then paste them into an email or text message (MMS or iMessage). Share or copy multiple photos and videos: While viewing thumbnails, tap Edit, select the photos or videos, then tap Share. Chapter 11 Photos 73 Save a photo or video from: • Email: Tap to download it if necessary, tap the photo or touch and hold the video, then tap Save. • Text message: Tap the item in the conversation, tap , than tap Save to Camera Roll. • Webpage (photo only): Touch and hold the photo, then tap Save Image. Photos and videos that you receive, or that you save from a webpage, are saved to your Camera Roll album. Printing photos Print to AirPrint-enabled printers: • Print a single photo: Tap , then tap Print. • Print multiple photos: While viewing a photo album, tap Edit, select the photos, tap Share, then tap Print. See Printing with AirPrint on page 30.12 74 Camera At a glance To quickly open Camera when iPhone is locked, swipe up. With iPhone, you can take both still photos and videos. In addition to the iSight camera on the back, there’s a FaceTime camera on the front for FaceTime calls and self-portraits. An LED flash on the back gives you extra light when you need it. Tap a person or object to focus and set exposure. Tap a person or object to focus and set exposure. Switch between cameras. Switch between cameras. Take a photo. Take a photo. Camera/ Video switch Camera/ Video switch View the photos and videos you’ve taken. View the photos and videos you’ve taken. Set LED flash mode. Set LED flash mode. Turn on the grid or HDR, or take a Panorama photo. Turn on the grid or HDR, or take a Panorama photo. A rectangle briefly appears where the camera is focused and setting the exposure. When you photograph people with iPhone 4S or later, iPhone uses face detection to automatically focus on and balance the exposure across up to 10 faces. A rectangle appears for each face detected. Take a photo: Tap or press either volume button. • Zoom in or out: Pinch the screen (iSight camera only).Chapter 12 Camera 75 Take a panorama photo (iPhone 4S or later): Tap Options, then tap Panorama. Point iPhone where you want to start, then tap . Pan slowly in the direction of the arrow, holding iPhone steady. Try to keep the arrow directly on top of the horizontal line. When you finish, tap Done. • Reverse the panning direction: Tap the arrow. Record a video: Switch to , then tap or press either volume button to start or stop recording. • Capture a still photo while recording: Tap . When you take a photo or start a video recording, iPhone makes a shutter sound. You can control the volume with the volume buttons, or mute the sound using the Ring/Silent switch. Note: In some countries, muting iPhone does not prevent the shutter sound. If Location Services is turned on, photos and videos are tagged with location data that can be used by other apps and photo-sharing websites. See Privacy on page 140. Set the focus and exposure: • Set the focus and exposure for the next shot: Tap the object on the screen. Face detection is temporarily turned off. • Lock the focus and exposure: Touch and hold the screen until the rectangle pulses. AE/AF Lock is displayed at the bottom of the screen, and the focus and exposure remain locked until you tap the screen again. Take a screenshot: Press and release the Sleep/Wake button and the Home button at the same time. The screenshot is added to your Camera Roll album. HDR photos HDR (iPhone 4 or later) combines three separate exposures into a single “high dynamic range” photo. For best results, iPhone and the subject should be stationary. Turn on HDR: Tap Option, then set HDR. When HDR is on, the flash is turned off. Keep the normal photo in addition to the HDR version: Go to Settings > Photos & Camera. When you keep both versions, appears in the upper-left corner of the HDR photo when viewed in your Camera Roll album with the controls visible. Viewing, sharing, and printing The photos and videos you take with Camera are saved in your Camera Roll album. If you have Photo Stream turned on, new photos also appear in your Photo Stream album and are streamed to your other iOS devices and computers. See Photo Stream on page 71. View your Camera Roll album: Swipe to the right, or tap the thumbnail image. You can also view your Camera Roll album in the Photos app. • Show or hide the controls while viewing a photo or video: Tap the screen. • Share a photo or video: Tap . To send multiple photos or videos, tap while viewing thumbnails, select the items, then tap Share. • Print a photo: Tap . See Printing with AirPrint on page 30. • Delete a photo or video: Tap . Return to the camera: Tap .Chapter 12 Camera 76 Upload photos and videos to your computer: Connect iPhone to your computer. • Mac: Select the photos and videos you want, then click the Import or Download button in iPhoto or other supported photo application on your computer. • PC: Follow the instructions that came with your photo application. If you delete photos or videos from iPhone when you upload them to your computer, they’re removed from your Camera Roll album. You can use the Photos settings pane in iTunes to sync photos and videos to the Photos app on iPhone (videos can be synced only with a Mac). See Syncing with iTunes on page 16. Editing photos and trimming videos Rotate Rotate Auto-enhance Auto-enhance Remove red-eye Remove red-eye Crop Crop Edit a photo: While viewing a photo in full screen, tap Edit, then tap a tool. • Auto-enhance: Enhancing improves a photo’s overall darkness or lightness, color saturation, and other qualities. If you decide against the enhancement, tap the tool again (even if you saved the changes). • Remove red-eye: Tap each eye that needs correcting. • Crop: Drag the corners of the grid, drag the photo to reposition it, then tap Crop. To set a specific ratio, tap Constrain. Trim a video: While viewing a video, tap the screen to display the controls. Drag either end of the frame viewer at the top, then tap Trim. Important: If you choose Trim Original, the trimmed frames are permanently deleted from the original video. If you choose “Save as New Clip,” a new trimmed video clip is saved in your Camera Roll album and the original video is unaffected.13 77 Videos Use the Videos app to watch movies, TV shows, and music videos. To watch video podcasts, install the free Podcasts app from the App Store. See Chapter 31, Podcasts, on page 113. To watch videos you record using Camera on iPhone, open the Photos app. Swipe down to search. Swipe down to search. See additional episodes of a series. See additional episodes of a series. Tap a video to play it. Tap a video to play it. WARNING: For important information about avoiding hearing loss, see Important safety information on page 146. Get videos: • Buy or rent videos from the iTunes store (not available in all areas): Open the iTunes app on iPhone and tap Videos. See Chapter 22, iTunes Store, on page 94. • Transfer videos from your computer: Connect iPhone, then sync videos in iTunes on your computer. See Syncing with iTunes on page 16. • Stream videos from your computer: Turn on Home Sharing in iTunes on your computer. Then, on iPhone, go to Settings > Videos and enter the Apple ID and password you used to set up Home Sharing on your computer. Then, open Videos on iPhone and tap Shared at the top of the list of videos.Chapter 13 Videos 78 Convert a video to work with iPhone: If you try to add a video from iTunes to iPhone and a message says the video can’t play on iPhone, you can convert the video. Select the video in your iTunes library and choose Advanced > “Create iPod or iPhone Version.” Then add the converted video to iPhone. Tap the video to show or hide controls. Tap the video to show or hide controls. Watch the video on a TV with Apple TV. Watch the video on a TV with Apple TV. Drag to skip forward or back. Drag to skip forward or back. Choose a chapter. Choose a chapter. Drag to adjust the volume. Drag to adjust the volume. Watch a video: Tap the video in the list of videos. • Scale the video to fill the screen or fit to the screen: Tap or . Or, double-tap the video to scale without showing the controls. • Start over from the beginning: If the video contains chapters, drag the playhead along the scrubber bar all the way to the left. If there are no chapters, tap . • Skip to the next or previous chapter (if available): Tap or . You can also press the center button or equivalent on a compatible headset two times (skip to next) or three times (skip to previous). • Rewind or fast-forward: Touch and hold or . • Select a different audio language (if available): Tap , then choose a language from the Audio list. • Show or hide subtitles (if available): Tap , then choose a language, or Off, from the Subtitles list. • Show or hide closed captioning (if available): Go to Settings > Videos. • Watch the video on a TV: See Connecting iPhone to a TV or other device on page 30. Set a sleep timer: Open the Clock app and tap Timer, then swipe to set the number of hours and minutes. Tap When Timer Ends and choose Stop Playing, tap Set, then tap Start to start the timer. When the timer ends, iPhone stops playing music or video, closes any other open app, and then locks itself. Delete a video: Swipe left or right over the video in the list. Deleting a video (other than a rented movie) from iPhone doesn’t delete it from your iTunes library. Important: If you delete a rented movie from iPhone, it’s deleted permanently and cannot be transferred back to your computer. When you delete a video (other than a rented movie) from iPhone, it isn’t deleted from your iTunes library on your computer, and you can sync the video back to iPhone later. If you don’t want to sync the video back to iPhone, set iTunes to not sync the video. See Syncing with iTunes on page 16.14 79 Maps Finding locations WARNING: For important information about navigating safely and avoiding distraction while driving, see Important safety information on page 146. Print, show traffic, list results, or choose the view. Print, show traffic, list results, or choose the view. Tap a pin to display the info banner. Tap a pin to display the info banner. Quick driving directions Quick driving directions Get more info. Get more info. Double-tap to zoom in; tap with two fingers to zoom out. Or, pinch. Double-tap to zoom in; tap with two fingers to zoom out. Or, pinch. Current location Current location Enter a search. Enter a search. Show your current location. Show your current location. Flyover (3D in standard view) Flyover (3D in standard view) Get directions. Get directions. Important: Maps, directions, 3D, Flyover, and location-based apps depend on data services. These data services are subject to change and may not be available in all areas, resulting in maps, directions, 3D, Flyover, or location-based information that may be unavailable, inaccurate, or incomplete. Compare the information provided on iPhone to your surroundings, and defer to posted signs to resolve any discrepancies. Some Maps features require Location Services. See Privacy on page 140.Chapter 14 Maps 80 Find a location: Tap the search field, then type an address or other information, such as: • Intersection (“8th and market”) • Area (“greenwich village”) • Landmark (“guggenheim”) • Zip code • Business (“movies,” “restaurants san francisco ca,” “apple inc new york”) Or, tap one of the suggestions in the list below the search field. Navigate maps: • Move up or down, left or right: Drag the screen. • Rotate the map: Rotate two fingers on the screen. A compass appears in the upper-right corner to show the map’s orientation. • Return to the north-facing orientation: Tap . Find the location of a contact, or of a bookmarked or recent search: Tap . Get and share info about a location: Tap the pin to display the info banner, then tap . When available, you can get reviews and photos from Yelp. You can also get directions, contact the business, visit the home page, add the business to your contacts, share the location, or bookmark the location. • Read reviews: Tap Reviews. To use other Yelp features, tap the buttons beneath the reviews. • See photos: Tap Photos. • Email, text, tweet, or post a location to Facebook: Tap Share Location. To tweet or post to Facebook, you must be signed in to your accounts. See Sharing on page 29. Use the drop pin to mark a location: Touch and hold the map until the drop pin appears. Choose standard, hybrid, or satellite view: Tap the lower-right corner. Report a problem: Tap the lower-right corner. Getting directions Get driving directions: Tap , tap , enter the starting and ending locations, then tap Route. Or, choose a location or a route from the list, when available. If multiple routes appear, tap the one you want to take. Tap Start to begin. • Hear turn-by-turn directions (iPhone 4S or later): Tap Start. Maps follows your progress and speaks turn-by-turn directions to your destination. To show or hide the controls, tap the screen. If iPhone auto-locks, Maps stays onscreen and continues to announce instructions. You can also open another app and continue to get turn-by-turn directions. To return to Maps, tap the banner across the top of the screen. • View turn-by-turn directions (iPhone 4 or earlier): Tap Start, then swipe left to see the next instruction. • Return to the route overview: Tap Overview. • View the directions as a list: Tap on the Overview screen. • Stop turn-by-turn directions: Tap End. Get quick driving directions from your current location: Tap on the banner of your destination, then tap Directions To Here.Chapter 14 Maps 81 Get walking directions: Tap , tap , enter the starting and ending locations, then tap Route. Or, choose a location or a route from the list, when available. Tap Start, then swipe left to see the next instruction. Get public transit directions: Tap , tap , enter the starting and ending locations, then tap Route. Or, choose a location or a route from the list, when available. Download and open the routing apps for the transit services you want to use. Show traffic conditions: Tap the bottom-right corner of the screen, then tap Show Traffic. Orange dots show slowdowns, and red dots show stop-and-go traffic. To see an incident report, tap a marker. 3D and Flyover On iPhone 4S or later, use 3D (standard view) or Flyover (satellite or hybrid view) for threedimensional views of many cities around the world. You can navigate in the usual ways, and zoom in to see buildings. You can also adjust the camera angle. The Transamerica Pyramid Building is a registered service mark of Transamerica Corporation. The Transamerica Pyramid Building is a registered service mark of Transamerica Corporation. Use 3D or Flyover: Zoom in until or becomes active, then tap the button. Or, drag two fingers up. You can switch between 3D and Flyover by tapping the lower-right corner and changing views. Adjust the camera angle: Drag two fingers up or down. Maps settings Set options for Maps: Go to Settings > Maps. Settings include: • Navigation voice volume (iPhone 4S or later) • Miles or kilometers for distance • Language and size of labels15 82 Weather Get the current temperature and six-day forecast for one or more cities around the world, with hourly forecasts for the next 12 hours. Weather also uses Location Services to get the forecast for your current location. Current conditions Current conditions Add or delete cities. Add or delete cities. Current temperature Current temperature Current hourly forecast Current hourly forecast Number of cities stored Number of cities stored If the weather board is light blue, it’s daytime in that city. Dark purple indicates nighttime. Manage your list of cities: Tap , then add a city or make other changes. Tap Done when you finish. • Add a city: Tap . Enter a city or zip code, then tap Search. • Rearrange the order of cities: Drag up or down. • Delete a city: Tap , then tap Delete. • Choose Fahrenheit or Celsius: Tap °F or °C. See weather for another city: Swipe left or right. The leftmost screen shows your local weather. View the current hourly forecast: • iPhone 5: Swipe the hourly display left or right. • iPhone 4S or earlier: Tap Hourly.Chapter 15 Weather 83 Turn local weather on or off: Go to Settings > Privacy > Location Services. See Privacy on page 140. See information about a city at yahoo.com: Tap . Use iCloud to push your list of cities to your other iOS devices: Go to Settings > iCloud > Documents & Data, then turn on Documents & Data (it’s on by default). See iCloud on page 15.16 84 Passbook Passbook lets you organize all of your passes, such as boarding passes or movie tickets, in one place. Tap a pass to view it. Tap a pass to view it. Store your gift cards, coupons, tickets, and other passes in Passbook. When you need to see or use a pass, view it in Passbook or on the Lock screen. Add a pass to Passbook: Tap Add to Passbook on a merchant’s website or in a confirmation email. You can also add a pass from a Passbook-enabled app. You must be signed in to your iCloud account to add passes to Passbook. Use a pass: Select the pass, then point the barcode at the reader or scanner. Chapter 16 Passbook 85 If Location Services is turned on and the merchant supports it, a pass appears on your Lock screen when you need it. For example, when you arrive at the airport, your hotel, or the movie theater. Tap to view details. Tap to view details. View more information: Tap . Delete a pass: Tap , then tap . Prevent passes from appearing on your Lock screen: Go to Settings > General > Passcode Lock, tap Turn Passcode On, then go to Allow Access When Locked, and turn Passbook off. Push a pass to your other iPhone or iPod touch: Go to Settings > iCloud and turn on Passbook. 17 86 Notes Type notes on iPhone, and iCloud makes them available on your other iOS devices and Mac computers. You can also read and create notes in other accounts, such as Gmail or Yahoo!. Tap the note to edit it. Tap the note to edit it. Delete the note. Delete the note. Email or print the note. Email or print the note. Add a new note. Add a new note. View the list of notes. View the list of notes. View the previous or next note. View the previous or next note. Use iCloud to keep your notes up to date on your iOS devices and Mac computers: • If you use a me.com or mac.com email address for iCloud: Go to Settings > iCloud and turn on Notes. • If you use a Gmail or other IMAP account for iCloud: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars and turn on Notes for the account. Choose the default account for new notes: Go to Settings > Notes. Create a note in a specific account: Tap Accounts and select the account, then tap to create the note. If you don’t see the Accounts button, tap the Notes button first. See only notes in a specific account: Tap Accounts and choose the account. If you don’t see the Accounts button, tap Notes first. Delete a note while viewing the list of notes: Swipe left or right across the note in the list.Chapter 17 Notes 87 Search for notes: While viewing the list of notes, scroll to the top of the list to reveal the search field. Tap in the field and type what you’re looking for. You can also search for notes from the Home screen. See Searching on page 27. Print or email a note: While reading the note, tap . To email the note, iPhone must be set up for email. See Setting up mail and other accounts on page 14. Change the font: Go to Settings > Notes.18 88 Reminders Reminders lets you keep track of all the things you need to do. Completed item Completed item Add an item. Add an item. View lists View lists See reminder details: Tap a reminder. You can: • Change or delete it • Set a due date • Set a priority • Add notes • Move it to a different list Reminders can alert you when you arrive at or leave a location. Add a location alert: While entering a reminder, tap , then turn on “Remind Me At a Location.” To use a different location, tap your current location. Locations in the list include addresses from your personal info card in Contacts, such as the home and work addresses you’ve added. To use a different address, tap Enter an Address. Note: Location reminders are not available on iPhone 3GS. You cannot set locations for reminders in Microsoft Exchange and Outlook accounts. Search your reminders: Tap to see the search field, or search from the Home screen. Reminders are searched by name. You can also use Siri to find or add reminders.Chapter 18 Reminders 89 Turn off reminder notifications: Go to Settings > Notifications. For information, see Do Not Disturb and Notifications on page 132. Set the tone played for notifications: Go to Settings > Sounds. Keep your reminders up to date on other devices: Go to Settings > iCloud, then turn on Reminders. To keep up to date with Reminders on OS X Mountain Lion, turn on iCloud on your Mac, too. Some other types of accounts, such as Exchange, also support Reminders. Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars and turn on Reminders for the accounts you want to use. Set a default list for new reminders: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars, then under Reminders, tap Default List.19 90 Clock Add a clock. Add a clock. View clocks, set an alarm, time an event, or set a timer. View clocks, set an alarm, time an event, or set a timer. Delete clocks or change their order. Delete clocks or change their order. Add a clock: Tap , then type the name of a city or choose a city from the list. If you don’t see the city you’re looking for, try a major city in the same time zone. Organize clocks: Tap Edit, then drag to move or tap to delete. Set an alarm: Tap Alarm, then tap . Change an alarm: Tap Edit, then tap to change settings or tap to delete. Set a sleep timer for iPhone: Set a timer, tap When Timer Ends, and choose Stop Playing.20 91 Stocks Keep track of your stocks, see the change in value over time, and get news about your investments. Tap to see percent change. Tap again to see market capitalization. Tap to see percent change. Tap again to see market capitalization. Customize your stock list. Customize your stock list. Go to yahoo.com for more info. Go to yahoo.com for more info. Swipe left or right to see stats or news articles. Swipe left or right to see stats or news articles. Manage your stock list: Tap , then add stocks or make other changes. When you finish, tap Done. • Add an item: Tap . Enter a symbol, company name, fund name, or index, then tap Search. • Delete an item: Tap . • Rearrange the order of items: Drag up or down. View stock info: • Switch the display to percentage change, price change, or market capitalization: Tap any of the values along the right side of the screen. • See the summary, chart, or news: Swipe the info beneath the stock list. Tap a news headline to view the article in Safari. To change the chart’s time period, tap 1d, 1w, 1m, 3m, 6m, 1y, or 2y. • Add a news article to your reading list: Touch and hold the news headline, then tap Add to Reading List. • See more stock information at yahoo.com: Tap . Quotes may be delayed 20 minutes or more, depending upon the reporting service. To display your stocks as a ticker in Notification Center, see Notifications on page 28.Chapter 20 Stocks 92 View a full-screen chart: Rotate iPhone to landscape orientation. • See the value at a specific date or time: Touch the chart with one finger. • See the difference in value over time: Touch the chart with two fingers. Use iCloud to keep your stock list up to date on your iOS devices: Go to Settings > iCloud > Documents & Data, then turn on Documents & Data (it’s on by default). See iCloud on page 15.21 93 Newsstand Newsstand organizes your magazine and newspaper apps and lets you know when new issues are ready for reading. Touch and hold a publication to rearrange. Touch and hold a publication to rearrange. Find Newsstand apps. Find Newsstand apps. Newsstand organizes magazine and newspaper apps with a shelf for easy access. Find Newsstand apps: Tap Newsstand to reveal the shelf, then tap Store. When you purchase a newsstand app, it’s added to your shelf. After the app is downloaded, open it to view its issues and subscription options. Subscriptions are In-App purchases, billed to your store account. Turn off automatically downloading new issues: Go to Settings > Newsstand. If an app supports it, Newsstand downloads new issues when connected to Wi-Fi.22 94 iTunes Store At a glance Use the iTunes Store to add music and TV shows, music, and podcasts to iPhone. Browse Browse See purchases, downloads, and more. See purchases, downloads, and more. Use iTunes Store to: • Find music, TV shows, movies, tones, and more, by browsing or searching • See your personal Genius recommendations • Download previous purchases Note: You need an Internet connection and an Apple ID to use the iTunes Store. Browse content: Tap one of the categories. Tap Genres to refine the listings. To see more information about an item, tap it. Search for content: Tap Search, then tap the search field and enter one or more words, then tap Search. Preview an item: Tap a song or video to play a sample. Purchase an item: Tap the item’s price (or tap Free), then tap again to buy it. If you already purchased the item, “Download” appears instead of the price and you won’t be charged again. When items are being downloaded, tap More, then tap Downloads to see their progress. Rent a movie: In some areas, certain movies are available to rent. You have 30 days to begin viewing a rented movie. Once you’ve started playing it, you can watch it as many times as you want in 24 hours. After these time limits, the movie is deleted.Chapter 22 iTunes Store 95 Download a previous purchase: Tap More, then tap Purchased. To automatically download purchases made on other devices, go to Settings > iTunes & App Stores. Redeem a gift card or code: Tap any category (such as music), scroll to the bottom, then tap Redeem. View or edit your account: Go to Settings > iTunes & App Stores, tap your Apple ID, then tap View Apple ID. Tap an item to edit it. To change your password, tap the Apple ID field. Turn iTunes Match on or off: Go to Settings > iTunes & App Stores. iTunes Match is a subscription service that stores all of your music in iCloud so you can access it from wherever you are. Sign in using a different Apple ID: Go to Settings > iTunes & App Stores, tap your account name, then tap Sign Out. The next time you download an app, you can enter a different Apple ID. Download purchases using the cellular network: Go to Settings > iTunes & App Stores > Use Cellular Data. Downloading purchases and using iTunes Match over the cellular network may incur charges from your carrier. Changing the browse buttons You can replace and rearrange the buttons at the bottom of the screen. For example, if you often download tones but don’t watch many TV shows, you could replace those buttons. Change the browse buttons: Tap More, tap Edit, then drag a button to the bottom of the screen, over the button you want to replace. When you finish, tap Done.23 96 App Store At a glance Use the App Store to browse, purchase, and download apps to iPhone. View a category. View a category. View updates and previous purchases. View updates and previous purchases. Browse buttons Browse buttons Use the App Store to: • Find new free or purchased apps by browsing or searching • Download previous purchases and updates • Redeem a gift card or download code • Recommend an app to a friend • Manage your App Store account Note: You need an Internet connection and an Apple ID to use the App Store. Purchase an app: Tap the app’s price (or tap Free), then tap Buy Now. If you already purchased the app, “install” appears instead of the price. You won’t be charged to download it again. While an app is being downloaded, its icon appears on the Home screen with a progress indicator. Download a previous purchase: Tap Updates, then tap Purchased. To automatically download new purchases made on other devices, go to Settings > iTunes & App Stores. Download updated apps: Tap Updates. Tap an app to read about the new version, then tap Update to download it. Or tap Update All to download all the apps in the list.Chapter 23 App Store 97 Redeem a gift card or download code: Tap Featured, scroll to the bottom, then tap Redeem. Tell a friend about an app: Find the app, then tap and select how you want to share it. View and edit your account: Go to Settings > iTunes & App Stores, tap your Apple ID, then tap View Apple ID. You can turn subscribe to iTunes newsletters, and view Apple’s privacy policy. To change your password, tap the Apple ID field. Sign in using a different Apple ID: Go to Settings > iTunes & App Stores, tap your account name, then tap Sign Out. The next time you download an app, you can enter a different Apple ID. Create a new Apple ID: Go to Settings > iTunes & App Stores, then tap Create New Apple ID and follow the onscreen instructions. Download purchases using the cellular network: Go to Settings > iTunes & App Stores > Use Cellular Data. Downloading purchases over the cellular network may incur charges from your carrier. Newsstand apps update only over Wi-Fi. Deleting apps Delete an App Store app: Touch and hold its icon on the Home screen until the icon starts to jiggle, then tap . You can’t delete built-in apps. When you finish, press the Home button . Deleting an app also deletes all of its data. You can re-download any app you’ve purchased from the App Store, free of charge. For information about erasing all of your apps, data, and settings, see Reset on page 138.24 98 Game Center At a glance Game Center lets you play your favorite games with friends who have an iPhone, iPad, iPod touch, or a Mac with OS X Mountain Lion. WARNING: For important information about avoiding repetitive motion injuries, see Important safety information on page 146. See who’s the best. See who’s the best. Respond to friend requests. Respond to friend requests. See a list of game goals. See a list of game goals. Play the game. Play the game. Find someone to play against. Find someone to play against. Choose a game to play. Choose a game to play. Check for challenges from friends. Check for challenges from friends. Invite friends to play. Invite friends to play. Declare your status, change your photo, or sign out. Declare your status, change your photo, or sign out. Sign in: Open Game Center. If you see your nickname and photo at the top of the screen, you’re already signed in. If not, enter your Apple ID and password, then tap Sign In. You can use the same Apple ID you use for iCloud or Store purchases, or tap Create New Account if you want a separate Apple ID for gaming. Purchase a game: Tap Games, then tap a recommended game or tap Find Game Center Games. Play a game: Tap Games, choose a game, then tap Play. Return to Game Center after playing: Press the Home button , then tap Game Center on the Home screen. Sign out: Tap Me, tap the Account banner, then tap Sign Out. You don’t need to sign out each time you quit Game Center.Chapter 24 Game Center 99 Playing with friends Invite friends to a multiplayer game: Tap Friends, choose a friend, choose a game, then tap Play. If the game allows or requires more players, choose additional players, then tap Next. Send your invitation, then wait for the others to accept. When everyone is ready, start the game. If a friend isn’t available or doesn’t respond to your invitation, you can tap Auto-Match to have Game Center find another player for you, or tap Invite Friend to invite someone else. Send a friend request: Tap Friends or Requests, tap , then enter your friend’s email address or Game Center nickname. To browse your contacts, tap . To add several friends in one request, type Return after each address. Challenge someone to outdo you: Tap one of your scores or achievements, then tap Challenge Friends. See the games a friend plays and check your friend’s scores: Tap Friends, tap your friend’s name, then tap Games or Points. Purchase a game your friend has: Tap Friends, then tap the name of your friend. Tap the game in your friend’s list of games, then tap the price at the top of the screen. See a list of a friend’s friends: Tap Friends, tap the friend’s name, then tap Friends just below their picture. Remove a friend: Tap Friends, tap a name, then tap Unfriend. Keep your email address private: Turn off Public Profile in your Game Center account settings. See “Game Center settings” below. Disable multiplayer activity or friend requests: Go to Settings > General > Restrictions and turn off Multiplayer Games or Adding Friends. If the switches are disabled, tap Enable Restrictions (at the top) first. Report offensive or inappropriate behavior: Tap Friends, tap the person’s name, then tap “Report a Problem.” Game Center settings Some Game Center settings are associated with the Apple ID you use to sign in. Others are in the Settings app on iPhone. Change Game Center settings for your Apple ID: Sign in with your Apple ID, tap Me, tap the Account banner, then choose View Account. Specify which notifications you want for Game Center: Go to Settings > Notifications > Game Center. If Game Center doesn’t appear, turn on Notifications. Change restrictions for Game Center: Go to Settings > General > Restrictions.25 100 Contacts At a glance iPhone lets you easily access and edit your contact lists from personal, business, and organizational accounts. Open in Mail. Open in Mail. Send a Tweet. Send a Tweet. Dial a number. Dial a number. Set your My Info card: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars, then tap My Info and select the contact card with your name and information. The My Info card is used by Siri and other apps. Use the related persons fields to define relationships you want Siri to know about, so you can say things like “call my sister.” Search contacts: Tap the search field at the top of the contact list and enter your search. You can also search your contacts from the Home screen. See Searching on page 27. Share a contact: Tap a contact, then tap Share Contact. You can send the contact info by email or message. Add a contact: Tap . You can’t add contacts to a directory you’re only viewing, such as a Microsoft Exchange Global Address List. Add a contact to your Favorites list: Choose a contact, then scroll down and tap the Add to Favorites button. The Favorites list is used by Do Not Disturb. See Do Not Disturb and Notifications on page 132. Add a phone number to Contacts when dialing: In Phone, tap Keypad, enter a number, then tap . Tap Create New Contact or tap “Add to Existing Contact” and choose a contact.Chapter 25 Contacts 101 Add a recent caller to Contacts: In Phone, tap Recents and tap next to the number. Then tap Create New Contact, or tap “Add to Existing Contact” and choose a contact. Delete a contact: Choose a contact, than tap Edit. Scroll down and tap Delete Contact. Edit a contact: Choose a contact, then tap Edit. You can: • Add a new field: Tap , then choose or enter a label for the field. • Change a field label: Tap the label and choose a different one. To add a new field, tap Add Custom Label. • Change the ringtone or text tone for the contact: Tap the ringtone or text tone field, then choose a new sound. To change the default tone for contacts, go to Settings > Sounds. • Change how iPhone vibrates for call or messages from the contact: Tap the ringtone or text tone vibration field, then select a vibration pattern. If you don’t see the vibration field, tap Edit and add it. For information about creating custom vibration patterns, see Sounds on page 139. • Assign a photo to the contact: Tap Add Photo. You can take a photo with the camera or use an existing photo. • Update contact info using Twitter: Go to Settings > Twitter > Update Contacts. Contacts are matched using email addresses. For friends that you’re following, their contact card is updated with their Twitter user name and photo. • Update contact info using Facebook: Go to Settings > Facebook > Update Contacts. Contacts are matched using email addresses. For each match in your friend list, their contact card is updated with their Facebook user name and photo. • Enter a pause in a telephone number: Tap , then tap Pause or Wait. Each pause lasts two seconds. Each wait stops dialing until you tap Dial again. Use these to automate dialing of an extension or passcode, for example. Adding contacts In addition to adding contacts on iPhone, you can: • Use your iCloud contacts: Go to Settings > iCloud, then turn on Contacts. • Import your Facebook Friends: Go to Settings > Facebook, then turn on Contacts in the “Allow These Apps to Use Your Accounts” list. This creates a Facebook group in Contacts. • Access a Microsoft Exchange Global Address List: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars, then tap your Exchange account and turn on Contacts. • Set up an LDAP or CardDAV account to access business or school directories: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars > Add Account > Other. Then tap “Add LDAP Account” or “Add CardDAV Account” and enter the account information. • Sync contacts from your computer, Yahoo!, or Google: In iTunes on your computer, turn on contact syncing in the device info pane. For information, see iTunes Help. • Import contacts from a SIM card (GSM): Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars > Import SIM Contacts. • Import contacts from a vCard: Tap a .vcf attachment in an email or message, or on a webpage. Search a GAL, CardDAV, or LDAP server: Tap Groups, tap the directory you want to search, then enter your search. Save contact information from a GAL, LDAP, or CardDAV server: Search for the contact you want to add, then tap Add Contact.Chapter 25 Contacts 102 Show or hide a group: Tap Groups then select the groups you want to see. This button only appears if you have more than one source of contacts. When you have contacts from multiple sources, you might have multiple entries for the same person. To keep redundant contacts from appearing in the All Contacts list, contacts from different sources that have the same name are linked and displayed as a single unified contact. When you view a unified contact, the title Unified Info appears at the top of the screen. Link a contact: Edit a contact, tap Edit, then tap and choose the contact entry to link to. Linked contacts aren’t merged. If you change or add information in a unified contact, the changes are copied to each source account where that information already exists. If you link contacts with different first or last names, the names on the individual cards won’t change, but only one name appears on the unified card. To choose which name appears when you view the unified card, tap the linked card with the name you prefer, then tap Use This Name For Unified Card. View contact information from a source account: Tap one of the source accounts. Unlink a contact: Tap Edit, tap , then tap Unlink. Contacts settings To change Contacts settings, go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars. Available options let you: • Change how contacts are sorted • Display contacts by first or last name • Set a default account for new contacts • Set your My Info card26 103 Calculator Tap numbers and functions in Calculator just as you would with a standard calculator. Add a number to memory. Add a number to memory. Clear memory. Clear memory. Clear the display. Clear the display. Subtract a number from memory. Subtract a number from memory. Get a number from memory (a white ring indicates a number is stored in memory). Get a number from memory (a white ring indicates a number is stored in memory). Use the scientific calculator: Rotate iPhone to landscape orientation.27 104 Compass Choose magnetic or true north. Choose magnetic or true north. Current location Current location The direction iPhone is pointing The direction iPhone is pointing Show your current location in Maps. Show your current location in Maps. Find the direction your iPhone is pointing: Hold iPhone flat in your hand, level with the ground. If Location Services is turned off when you open Compass, you may be asked to turn it on. You can use Compass without turning on Location Services. See Privacy on page 140. Important: The accuracy of the compass can be affected by magnetic or environmental interference; even the magnets in the iPhone earbuds can cause a deviation. Use the digital compass only for basic navigation assistance and don’t rely on it to determine precise location, proximity, distance, or direction.28 105 Voice Memos At a glance Voice Memos lets you use iPhone as a portable recording device using the built-in microphone, iPhone or Bluetooth headset mic, or supported external microphone. Start, pause, or stop recording. Start, pause, or stop recording. Recording level Recording level See your list of recordings. See your list of recordings. Make a recording: Tap or press the center button on your headset. Tap to pause or to stop recording, or press the center button on your headset. Recordings using the built-in microphone are mono, but you can record stereo using an external stereo microphone that works with the iPhone headset jack, or with the Lightning connector (iPhone 5) or Dock connector (earlier iPhone models). Look for accessories marked with the Apple “Made for iPhone” or “Works with iPhone” logo. Adjust the recording level: Move the microphone closer to or further away from what you’re recording. For better recording quality, the loudest level on the level meter should be between –3 dB and 0 dB. Play or mute the start/stop tone: Use the iPhone volume buttons to turn the volume all the way down. Use another app while recording: Press the Home button and open an app. To return to Voice Memos, tap the red bar at the top of the screen.Chapter 28 Voice Memos 106 Play a recording: Tap , tap a recording, then tap . Tap to pause. Trim or relabel the recording. Trim or relabel the recording. Listen to the recording. Listen to the recording. Attach the recording to an email or text message. Attach the recording to an email or text message. Drag to skip to any point. Drag to skip to any point. Switch between the speaker and the receiver. Switch between the speaker and the receiver. Trim a recording: Tap next to the recording, then tap Trim Memo. Drag the edges of the audio region, then tap to preview. Adjust if necessary, then tap Trim Voice Memo to save. The portions you trim can’t be recovered. Sharing voice memos with your computer iTunes can sync voice memos with your iTunes library when you connect iPhone to your computer. When you sync voice memos to iTunes, they remain in the Voice Memos app until you delete them. If you delete a voice memo on iPhone, it isn’t deleted from the Voice Memos playlist in iTunes. However, if you delete a voice memo from iTunes, it is deleted from iPhone the next time you sync with iTunes. Sync voice memos with iTunes: Connect iPhone to your computer and select iPhone in the iTunes device list. Select Music at the top of the screen (between Apps and Movies), select Sync Music, select “Include voice memos,” and click Apply. The voice memos from iPhone appear in the Voice Memos playlist in iTunes.29 107 Nike + iPod With a Nike + iPod Sensor (sold separately), the Nike + iPod app provides audible feedback on your speed, distance, time elapsed, and calories burned during a run or walk. Review your workout history. Review your workout history. Calibrate based on your last workout. Calibrate based on your last workout. Choose a standard workout. Choose a standard workout. Choose or create a custom workout. Choose or create a custom workout. Choose a workout type. Choose a workout type. The Nike + iPod app doesn’t appear on the Home screen until you turn it on. Turn on Nike + iPod: Go to Settings > Nike + iPod. Nike + iPod collects workout data from a wireless sensor (sold separately) that you attach to your shoe. Before you use it the first time, you need to link your sensor to iPhone. Link your sensor to iPhone: Attach the sensor to your shoe, then go to Settings > Nike + iPod > Sensor. Start a workout: Tap Workouts, and choose a workout. • Pause a workout: Wake iPhone and tap on the lock screen. Tap when you’re ready to continue. • End a workout: Wake iPhone, tap , then tap End Workout. Change workout settings: Go to Settings > Nike + iPod. Calibrate Nike + iPod: Record a workout over a known distance of at least a quarter mile (400 meters). Then, after you tap End Workout, tap Calibrate on the workout summary screen and enter the actual distance you covered.Chapter 29 Nike + iPod 108 Reset to the default calibration: Go to Settings > Nike + iPod. Send workout data to nikeplus.com: With iPhone connected to the Internet, open Nike + iPod, tap History, then tap “Send to Nike+.” See your workouts on nikeplus.com: In Safari, go to nikeplus.com, log in to your account, and follow the onscreen instructions.30 109 iBooks At a glance iBooks is a great way to read and buy books. Download the free iBooks app from the App Store, and then enjoy everything from classics to bestsellers. Go to a different page. Go to a different page. Bookmark Bookmark Contents, bookmarks, and notes Contents, bookmarks, and notes iBooks is a great way to enjoy books and PDFs. Download the free iBooks app from the App Store, and then get everything from classics to bestsellers from the built-in iBookstore. To download the iBooks app and use the iBookstore, you need an Internet connection and an Apple ID. Visit the iBookstore: In iBooks, tap Store to: • Find books by browsing or searching • Get a sample of a book to see if you like it • Read and write reviews, and see current bestsellers • Tell a friend about a book via email Purchase a book: Find one you want, tap the price, then tap again to get it. Get information about a book: You can read a summary of the book, read reviews, and try a sample of the book before buying it. After buying a book, you can write a review of your own.Chapter 30 iBooks 110 Download a previous purchase: Tap Purchased. To download while browsing, tap Download where you usually see the price. You won’t be charged again. To automatically download items purchased on other devices, go to Settings > iTunes & App Stores. Reading books Reading a book is easy. Go to the bookshelf and tap the book you want to read. Each book has a particular set of features, based on its contents and format. Some of the features described below might not be available in the book you’re reading. Open a book: Tap the book you want to read. If you don’t see it on the shelf, swipe left or right to see other collections. • Show the controls: Tap near the center of the page. • Enlarge an image: Double-tap the image. In some books, touch and hold to display a magnifying glass you can use to view an image. • Go to a specific page: Use the page navigation controls at the bottom of the screen. Or, tap and enter a page number, then tap the page number in the search results. • Look up a word: Double-tap a word, use the grab points to adjust the selection, then tap Define in the menu that appears. Definitions are not available for all languages. • View the table of contents: Tap . With some books, you can also pinch to see the the table of contents. • Add or remove a bookmark: Tap . Tap again to remove the bookmark. You don’t need to add a bookmark when you close the book, because iBooks remembers where you left off. You can have multiple bookmarks—to see them all, tap , then tap Bookmarks. Annotate a book: You can add notes and highlights to a book. • Add a highlight: Double-tap a word, use the grab points to adjust the selection, then tap Highlight and choose a color or underline. • Remove a highlight: Tap the highlighted text, then tap . • Add a note: Double-tap a word, tap Highlight, then choose from the menu that appears. • Remove a note: Delete its text. To remove the note and its highlight, tap the highlighted text, then tap . • See all your notes: Tap , then tap Notes. Tap to print or email your notes. Change a book’s appearance: Some books let you change the type size, font, and page color. • Change the font or type size: Tap near the center of a page to display the controls, then tap . Tap Fonts to select a typeface. Some books allow you to change the type size only when iPhone is in portrait orientation. • Change the color of the page and text: Tap near the center of the page to display the controls, tap , then tap Theme. This setting applies to all books that support it. • Change the brightness: Tap near the center of a page to display the controls, then tap . If you don’t see , tap first. • Turn justification and hyphenation on or off: Go to Settings > iBooks. PDFs and some books can’t be justified or hyphenated.Chapter 30 iBooks 111 Organizing the bookshelf Use the bookshelf to browse your books and PDFs. You can also organize items into collections. Touch and hold a book to rearrange. Touch and hold a book to rearrange. View collections. View collections. Move a book or PDF to a collection: Tap Edit. Select the items you want to move, then tap Move and select a collection. View and manage collections: Tap the name of the current collection at the top of the screen, such as Books or PDFs, to display the collections list. You can’t edit or remove the built-in Books and PDFs collections. Sort the bookshelf: Tap the status bar to scroll to the top of the screen, then tap and select a sort method at the bottom of the screen. Delete an item from the bookshelf: Tap Edit, then tap each item that you want to delete, so that a checkmark appears. Tap Delete. When you finish, tap Done. If you delete an item you purchased, you can download it again from Purchases in the iBookstore. Search for a book: Go to the bookshelf. Tap the status bar to scroll to the top of the screen, then tap . Searching looks for the title and the author’s name. Syncing books and PDFs Use iTunes to sync your books and PDFs between iPhone and your computer, and to buy books from the iTunes Store. When iPhone is connected to your computer, the Books pane lets you select which items to sync. You can also find DRM-free ePub books and PDFs on the web and add them to your iTunes library. Sync a book or PDF to iPhone: In iTunes on your computer, choose File > Add to Library and select the file. Then sync. Add a book or PDF to iBooks without syncing: If the book or PDF isn’t too large, email it to yourself from your computer. Open the email message on iPhone, then touch and hold the attachment and choose “Open in iBooks” from the menu that appears.Chapter 30 iBooks 112 Printing or emailing a PDF You can use iBooks to email a copy of a PDF, or to print all or a portion of the PDF to an AirPrint printer. Email a PDF: Open the PDF, tap then choose Email Document. Print a PDF: Open the PDF, tap then choose Print. For more information, see Printing with AirPrint on page 30. iBooks settings iBooks stores your collections, bookmarks, notes, and current page information using your Apple ID, so you can read books seamlessly across all your iOS devices. iBooks saves information for all of your books when you open or quit the app. Information for individual books is also saved when you open or close the book. Turn syncing on or off: Go to Settings > iBooks. You can sync collections and bookmarks, too. Some books might access video or audio that’s stored on the web. If iPhone has a cellular data connection, playing these files may incur carrier charges. Turn online video and audio access on or off: to Settings > iBooks > Online Audio & Video. Change the direction the page turns when you tap the left margin: Go to Settings > iBooks > Tap Left Margin.31 113 Podcasts Download the free Podcasts app from the App Store, then browse, subscribe to, and play your favorite audio and video podcasts. View the podcasts in your library. View the podcasts in your library. Browse all available podcasts. Browse all available podcasts. Tap a podcast to view available episodes. Tap a podcast to view available episodes. Browse and preview the most popular podcasts. Browse and preview the most popular podcasts. Scroll to see your entire library. Scroll to see your entire library. See the playback controls. See the playback controls. Get podcasts: • Browse the full catalog: Tap Catalog, then tap any podcast that interests you. • Browse the most popular podcasts: Tap Top Stations (if you don’t see it, tap Library first). Swipe left or right to change the category, or swipe up or down to browse the current category. Tap a podcast to preview the latest episode, or tap to see a list of episodes. • Stream an episode: Tap any episode. • Download an episode so you can listen to it when you’re not connected to Wi-Fi: Tap next to any episode. • Subscribe to a podcast to always get the latest episode: If you’re browsing the catalog, tap a podcast to see the list of episodes, then tap Subscribe. If you’ve already downloaded an episode, tap the podcast in your library, then tap it again at the top of the list of episodes, and turn on Subscription. • Automatically get the latest episode of a subscribed podcast: Tap the podcast in your library, tap it again at the top of the episode list, then turn on Auto-Download.Chapter 31 Podcasts 114 Control audio playback: Swipe up on the artwork of the currently playing podcast to see all of the playback controls. Play previous episode. Play previous episode. Share this podcast. Share this podcast. Skip to the next episode. Skip to the next episode. Skip forward 30 seconds. Skip forward 30 seconds. Set the sleep timer. Set the sleep timer. Drag the playhead to jump to another part of the podcast. Drag the playhead to jump to another part of the podcast. Swipe up or down to show or hide the controls. Swipe up or down to show or hide the controls. Adjust the playback speed. Adjust the playback speed. Control video playback: Tap the screen while you’re watching a video podcast.32 115 Accessibility Accessibility features iPhone incorporates these accessibility features: • VoiceOver • Call audio routing • Siri voice assistant • Zoom magnification • Large Text • Invert Colors • Speak Selection • Speak Auto-text • Mono Audio and balance • Hearing aids and Hearing Aid Mode • Assignable ringtones and vibrations • LED Flash for Alerts • Guided Access • AssistiveTouch • Support for braille displays • Playback of closed-captioned content Turn on accessibility features using iPhone: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility. Turn on accessibility features using iTunes: Connect iPhone to your computer and select iPhone in the iTunes device list. Click Summary, then click Configure Universal Access at the bottom of the Summary screen. For more information about iPhone accessibility features, go to www.apple.com/accessibility. Large Text can only be turned on or off in iPhone settings. See Large Text on page 125. VoiceOver VoiceOver describes aloud what appears onscreen, so you can use iPhone without seeing it. VoiceOver tells you about each item on the screen as you select it. When you select an item, the VoiceOver cursor (a black rectangle) encloses it and VoiceOver speaks the name or describes the item.Chapter 32 Accessibility 116 Touch the screen or drag your fingers to hear different items on the screen. When you select text, VoiceOver reads the text. If you turn on Speak Hints, VoiceOver may tell you the name of the item and provide instructions—for example, “double-tap to open.” To interact with items on the screen, such as buttons and links, use the gestures described in Learning VoiceOver gestures on page 118. When you go to a new screen, VoiceOver plays a sound, then selects and speaks the first item on the screen (typically in the upper-left corner). VoiceOver also lets you know when the display changes to landscape or portrait orientation, and when the screen becomes locked or unlocked. Note: VoiceOver speaks in the language specified in International settings, which may be influenced by the Region Format setting in Settings > General > International. VoiceOver is available in many languages, but not all. VoiceOver basics Important: VoiceOver changes the gestures you use to control iPhone. Once VoiceOver is turned on, you must use VoiceOver gestures to operate iPhone—even to turn VoiceOver off again and resume standard operation. Turn VoiceOver on or off: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > VoiceOver. You can also set Triple-click Home to turn VoiceOver on or off. See Triple-click Home on page 124. Explore the screen: Drag your finger over the screen. VoiceOver speaks each item you touch. Lift your finger to leave an item selected. • Select an item: Tap it, or lift your finger while dragging over it. • Select the next or previous item: Swipe right or left with one finger. Item order is left-to-right, top-to-bottom. • Select the item above or below: Use the rotor to turn on Vertical Navigation, then swipe up or down with one finger. • Select the first or last item on the screen: Swipe up or down with four fingers. • Select an item by name: Triple-tap with two fingers anywhere on the screen to open the Item Chooser. Then type a name in the search field, or swipe right or left to move through the list alphabetically, or tap the table index to the right of the list and swipe up or down to move quickly through the list of items. • Change the name of the selected item so it’s easier to find: Tap and hold with two fingers anywhere on the screen. • Speak the text of the selected item: Set the rotor control to characters or words, then swipe down or up with one finger. • Turn spoken hints on or off: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > VoiceOver. • Include phonetic spelling: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Use Phonetics. • Speak the entire screen from the top: Swipe up with two fingers. • Speak from the current item to the bottom of the screen: Swipe down with two fingers. • Stop speaking: Tap once with two fingers. Tap again with two fingers to resume speaking. Speaking resumes when you select another item. • Mute VoiceOver: Triple-tap with three fingers. Triple-tap again with three fingers to turn speaking back on. To turn off only VoiceOver sounds, set the Ring/Silent switch to Silent. If an external keyboard is connected, you can also press the Control key on the keyboard to mute or unmute VoiceOver.Chapter 32 Accessibility 117 Adjust the speaking voice: You can adjust the characteristics of the VoiceOver speaking voice to make it easier for you to understand: • Change the speaking volume: Use the volume buttons on iPhone. You can also add volume to the rotor and swipe up and down to adjust; see Using the VoiceOver rotor control on page 119. • Change the speaking rate: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > VoiceOver and drag the Speaking Rate slider. You can also add Speech Rate to the rotor, then swipe up or down to adjust. • Use pitch change: VoiceOver uses a higher pitch when speaking the first item of a group (such as a list or table) and a lower pitch when speaking the last item of a group. Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Use Pitch Change. • Change the language for iPhone: Go to Settings > General > International > Language. VoiceOver pronunciation of some languages is affected by Settings > General > International > Region Format. • Change pronunciation: Set the rotor to Language, then swipe up or down. Language is available in the rotor only if you select more than one pronunciation. • Select the pronunciations available in the language rotor: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Language Rotor. To change the position of a language in the list, drag up or down. • Change the basic reading voice: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Use Compact Voice. Using iPhone with VoiceOver Unlock iPhone: Select the Unlock slide, then double-tap the screen. “Tap” to activate the selected item: Double-tap anywhere on the screen. “Double-tap” the selected item: Triple-tap anywhere on the screen. Adjust a slider: Select the slider, then swipe up or down with one finger. Use a standard gesture when VoiceOver is turned on: Double-tap and hold your finger on the screen. A series of tones indicates that normal gestures are in force. They remain in effect until you lift your finger, when VoiceOver gestures resume. Scroll a list or area of the screen: Swipe up or down with three fingers. When paging through a list, VoiceOver speaks the range of items displayed (for example, “showing rows 5 through 10”). • Scroll continuously through a list: Double-tap and hold. When you hear a series of tones, move your finger up or down to scroll the list. Continuous scrolling stops when you lift your finger. • Use a list index: Some lists have an alphabetical index along the right side. The index can’t be selected by swiping between items; you must touch the index directly to select it. With the index selected, swipe up or down to move along the index. You can also double-tap, then slide your finger up or down. • Reorder a list: You can change the order of items in some lists, such as the Rotor and Language Rotor items in Accessibility settings. Select on the right side of an item, double-tap and hold until you hear a sound, then drag up or down. VoiceOver speaks the item you’ve moved above or below, depending on the direction you’re dragging. Rearrange your Home screen: On the Home screen, select the icon you want to move. Doubletap and hold the icon, then drag it. VoiceOver speaks the row and column position as you drag the icon. Release the icon when it’s in the location you want. You can drag additional icons. Drag an item to the left or right edge of the screen to move it to a different page of the Home screen. When you finish, press the Home button .Chapter 32 Accessibility 118 Speak the iPhone status information: Tap the top of the screen to hear information about the time, battery life, Wi-Fi signal strength, and more. Speak notifications: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > VoiceOver and turn on Speak Notifications. Notifications, including the text of incoming text messages, are spoken as they occur, even if iPhone is locked. Unacknowledged notifications are repeated when you unlock iPhone. Turn the screen curtain on or off: Tap four times with three fingers. When the screen curtain is on, the screen contents are active even though the display is turned off. Learning VoiceOver gestures When VoiceOver is turned on, the standard touchscreen gestures have different effects. These and some additional gestures let you move around the screen and control individual items when they’re selected. VoiceOver gestures include two- and three-finger gestures to tap or swipe. For best results when using two- and three-finger gestures, relax and let your fingers touch the screen with some space between them. You can use different techniques to enter VoiceOver gestures. For example, you can enter a two-finger tap using two fingers from one hand, or one finger from each hand. You can also use your thumbs. Many find the “split-tap” gesture especially effective: instead of selecting an item and double-tapping, you can touch and hold an item with one finger, then tap the screen with another finger. Try different techniques to discover which works best for you. If your gestures don’t work, try quicker movements, especially for double-tapping and swiping gestures. To swipe, try quickly brushing the screen with your finger or fingers. When VoiceOver is turned on, the VoiceOver Practice button appears, which gives you a chance to practice VoiceOver gestures before proceeding. Practice VoiceOver gestures: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > VoiceOver, then tap VoiceOver Practice. When you finish practicing, tap Done. If you don’t see the VoiceOver Practice button, make sure VoiceOver is turned on. Here’s a summary of key VoiceOver gestures: Navigate and read • Tap: Speak the item. • Swipe right or left: Select the next or previous item. • Swipe up or down: Depends on the Rotor Control setting. See Using the VoiceOver rotor control on page 119. • Two-finger tap: Stop speaking the current item. • Two-finger flick up: Read all from the top of the screen. • Two-finger flick down: Read all from the current position. • Two-finger “scrub”: Move two fingers back and forth three times quickly (making a “z”) to dismiss an alert or go back to the previous screen. • Three-finger swipe up or down: Scroll one page at a time. • Three-finger swipe right or left: Go to the next or previous page (such as the Home screen, Stocks, or Safari). • Three-finger tap: Speak additional information, such as position within a list or whether text is selected. • Four-finger tap at top of screen: Select the first item on the page. • Four-finger tap at bottom of screen: Select the last item on the page.Chapter 32 Accessibility 119 Activate • Double-tap: Activate the selected item. • Triple-tap: Double-tap an item. • Split-tap: As an alternative to selecting an item and double-tapping to activate it, touch an item with one finger, and then tap the screen with another. • Double-tap and hold (1 second) + standard gesture: Use a standard gesture. The double-tap and hold gesture tells iPhone to interpret the next gesture as standard. For example, you can double-tap and hold, and then without lifting your finger, drag your finger to slide a switch. • Two-finger double-tap: Answer or end a call. Play or pause in Music, Videos, Voice Memos, or Photos. Take a photo in Camera. Start or pause recording in Camera or Voice Memos. Start or stop the stopwatch. • Two-finger double-tap and hold: Change an item’s label to make it easier to find. • Two-finger triple-tap: Open the Item Chooser. • Three-finger triple-tap: Mute or unmute VoiceOver. • Three-finger quadruple-tap: Turn the screen curtain on or off. Using the VoiceOver rotor control Use the rotor to choose what happens when you swipe up or down with VoiceOver turned on. Operate the rotor: Rotate two fingers on the iPhone screen around a point between them. Change the options included in the rotor: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Rotor and select the options you want to be available using the rotor. The effect of the rotor setting depends on what you’re doing. For example, if you’re reading an email, you can use the rotor to switch between hearing text spoken word-by-word or characterby-character when you swipe up or down. If you’re browsing a webpage, you can set the rotor to speak all the text (either word-by-word or character-by-character), or to jump from one item to another of a certain type, such as headers or links. Entering and editing text with VoiceOver When you enter an editable text field, you can use the onscreen keyboard or an external keyboard connected to iPhone to enter text. Enter text: Select an editable text field, double-tap to display the insertion point and the onscreen keyboard, then type characters. • Standard typing: Select a key on the keyboard by swiping left or right, then double-tap to enter the character. Or move your finger around the keyboard to select a key and, while continuing to touch the key with one finger, tap the screen with another finger. VoiceOver speaks the key when it’s selected, and again when the character is entered. • Touch typing: Touch a key on the keyboard to select it, then lift your finger to enter the character. If you touch the wrong key, move your finger on the keyboard until you select the key you want. VoiceOver speaks the character for each key as you touch it, but doesn’t enter a character until you lift your finger. Touch typing works only for the keys that enter text—use standard typing for other keys such as Shift, Delete, and Return.Chapter 32 Accessibility 120 • Choose standard or touch typing: With VoiceOver turned on and a key selected on the keyboard, use the rotor to select Typing Mode, then swipe up or down. Move the insertion point: Swipe up or down to move the insertion point forward or backward in the text. Use the rotor to choose whether you want to move the insertion point by character, by word, or by line. VoiceOver makes a sound when the insertion point moves, and speaks the character, word, or line that the insertion point moves across. When moving forward by words, the insertion point is placed at the end of each word, before the space or punctuation that follows. When moving backward, the insertion point is placed at the end of the preceding word, before the space or punctuation that follows it. Move the insertion point past the punctuation at the end of a word or sentence: Use the rotor to switch back to character mode. When moving the insertion point by line, VoiceOver speaks each line as you move across it. When moving forward, the insertion point is placed at the beginning of the next line (except when you reach the last line of a paragraph, when the insertion point is moved to the end of the line just spoken). When moving backward, the insertion point is placed at the beginning of the line that’s spoken. Change typing feedback: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Typing Feedback. Use phonetics in typing feedback: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Use Phonetics. Text is read character-by-character. Voiceover first speaks the character, then its phonetic equivalent—for example, “f” and then “foxtrot.” Delete a character: Select the , then double-tap or split-tap. You must do this even when touch typing. To delete multiple characters, touch and hold the Delete key, then tap the screen with another finger once for each character you want to delete. VoiceOver speaks the character as it’s deleted. If Use Pitch Change is turned on, VoiceOver speaks deleted characters in a lower pitch. Select text: Set the rotor to Edit, swipe up or down to choose Select or Select All, then double tap. If you chose Select, the word closest to the insertion point is selected when you double-tap. If you chose Select All, all text is selected. Pinch to increase or decrease the selection. Cut, copy, or paste: Make sure the rotor is set to Edit. With text selected, swipe up or down to choose Cut, Copy, or Paste, then double-tap. Undo: Shake iPhone, swipe left or right to choose the action to undo, then double-tap. Enter an accented character: In standard typing mode, select the plain character, then doubletap and hold until you hear a sound indicating alternate characters have appeared. Drag left or right to select and hear the choices. Release your finger to enter the current selection. Change the keyboard language: Set the rotor to Language, then swipe up or down. Choose “default language” to use the language specified in International settings. The Language rotor appears only if you select more than one language in Settings > General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Language Rotor.Chapter 32 Accessibility 121 Making phone calls with VoiceOver Answer or end a call: Double-tap the screen with two fingers. When a phone call is established with VoiceOver on, the screen displays the numeric keypad by default, instead of showing call options. Display call options: Select the Hide Keypad button in the lower-right corner and double-tap. Display the numeric keypad again: Select the Keypad button near the center of the screen and double-tap. Using VoiceOver with Safari When you search the web in Safari with VoiceOver on, the Search Results rotor items lets you hear the list of suggested search phrases. Search the web: Select the search field, enter your search, then swipe right or left to move down or up the list of suggested search phrases. Then double-tap the screen to search the web using the selected phrase. Set the rotor options for web browsing: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Rotor. Tap to select or deselect options, or drag up to reposition an item. Skip images while navigating: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Navigate Images. You can choose to skip all images or only those without descriptions. Reduce page clutter for easier reading and navigation: Select the Reader item in the Safari address field (not available for all pages). Using VoiceOver with Maps You can use VoiceOver to explore a region, browse points of interest, follow roads, zoom in or out, select a pin, or get information about a location. Explore the map: Drag your finger around the screen, or swipe left or right to move to another item. Zoom in or out: Select the map, set the rotor to Zoom, then swipe up or down with one finger. Pan the map: Swipe with three fingers. Browse visible points of interest: Set the rotor to Points of Interest, then swipe up or down with one finger. Follow a road: Hold your finger down on the road, wait until you hear “pause to follow,” then move your finger along the road while listening to the guide tone. The pitch increases when you stray from the road. Select a pin: Touch a pin, or swipe left or right to select the pin. Get information about a location: With a pin selected, double-tap to display the information flag. Swipe left or right to select the More Info button, then double-tap to display the information page. Hear location cues as you move about: Turn on tracking with heading to hear street names and points of interest as you approach them.Chapter 32 Accessibility 122 Editing videos and voice memos with VoiceOver You can use VoiceOver gestures to trim Camera videos and Voice Memo recordings. Trim a voice memo: On the Voice Memos screen, select the button to the right of the memo you want to trim, then double-tap. Then select Trim Memo and double-tap. Select the beginning or end of the trim tool. Swipe up to drag right, or swipe down to drag left. VoiceOver announces the amount of time the current position will trim from the recording. To complete the trim, select Trim Voice Memo and double-tap. Trim a video: While viewing a video in Photos, double-tap the screen to display the video controls, then select the beginning or end of the trim tool. Then swipe up to drag to the right, or swipe down to drag to the left. VoiceOver announces the amount of time the current position will trim from the recording. To complete the trim, select Trim and double-tap. Controlling VoiceOver using an Apple Wireless Keyboard You can control VoiceOver using an Apple Wireless Keyboard paired with iPhone. See Apple Wireless Keyboard on page 24. You can use VoiceOver keyboard commands to navigate the screen, select items, read screen contents, adjust the rotor, and perform other VoiceOver actions. All the keyboard commands (except one) include Control-Option, abbreviated in the table below as “VO.” VoiceOver Help speaks keys or keyboard commands as you type them. You can use VoiceOver Help to learn the keyboard layout and the actions associated with key combinations. VoiceOver keyboard commands VO = Control-Option • Read all, starting from the current position: VO–A • Read from the top: VO–B • Move to the status bar: VO–M • Press the Home button: VO–H • Select the next or previous item: VO–Right Arrow or VO–Left Arrow • Tap an item: VO–Space bar • Double-tap with two fingers: VO–”-” • Choose the next or previous rotor item: VO–Up Arrow or VO–Down Arrow • Choose the next or previous speech rotor item: VO–Command–Left Arrow or VO–Command– Right Arrow • Adjust the speech rotor item: VO–Command–Up Arrow or VO–Command–Down Arrow • Mute or unmute VoiceOver: VO–S • Turn the screen curtain on or off: VO–Shift-S • Turn on VoiceOver help: VO–K • Return to the previous screen, or turn off VoiceOver help: Escape Quick Nav Turn on Quick Nav to control VoiceOver using the arrow keys. • Turn Quick Nav on or off: Left Arrow–Right Arrow • Select the next or previous item: Right Arrow or Left Arrow • Select the next or previous item specified by the rotor setting: Up Arrow or Down Arrow • Select the first or last item: Control–Up Arrow or Control–Down ArrowChapter 32 Accessibility 123 • "Tap” an item: Up Arrow–Down Arrow • Scroll up, down, left, or right: Option–Up Arrow, Option–Down Arrow, Option–Left Arrow, or Option–Right Arrow • Change the rotor: Up Arrow–Left Arrow or Up Arrow–Right Arrow You can also use the number keys on an Apple Wireless Keyboard to dial a phone number in Phone or enter numbers in Calculator. Single-letter Quick Nav for the web When you view a webpage with Quick Nav enabled, you can use the following keys on the keyboard to navigate the page quickly. Typing the key moves to the next item of the indicated type. To move to the previous item, hold the Shift key as you type the letter. • Heading: H • Link: L • Text field: R • Button: B • Form control: C • Image: I • Table: T • Static text: S • ARIA landmark: W • List: X • Item of the same type: M • Level 1 heading: 1 • Level 2 heading: 2 • Level 3 heading: 3 • Level 4 heading: 4 • Level 5 heading: 5 • Level 6 heading: 6 Using a braille display with VoiceOver You can use a refreshable Bluetooth braille display to read VoiceOver output in braille, and you can use a braille display with input keys and other controls to control iPhone when VoiceOver is turned on. iPhone works with many wireless braille displays. For a list of supported displays, go to www.apple.com/accessibility/iphone/braille-display.html. Set up a braille display: Turn on the display, then go to Settings > Bluetooth and turn on Bluetooth. Then, go to Settings > General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Braille and choose the display. Turn contracted or eight-dot braille on or off: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Braille. For information about common braille commands for VoiceOver navigation, and for information specific to certain displays, go to support.apple.com/kb/HT4400. The braille display uses the language that’s set for Voice Control. This is normally the language set for iPhone in Settings > International > Language. You can use the VoiceOver language setting to set a different language for VoiceOver and braille displays.Chapter 32 Accessibility 124 Set the language for VoiceOver: Go to Settings > General > International > Voice Control, then choose the language. If you change the language for iPhone, you may need to reset the language for VoiceOver and your braille display. You can set the leftmost or rightmost cell of your braille display to provide system status and other information: • Announcement History contains an unread message • The current Announcement History message hasn’t been read • VoiceOver speech is muted • The iPhone battery is low (less than 20% charge) • iPhone is in landscape orientation • The screen display is turned off • The current line contains additional text to the left • The current line contains additional text to the right Set the leftmost or rightmost cell to display status information: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Braille > Status Cell, and tap Left or Right. See an expanded description of the status cell: On your braille display, press the status cell’s router button. Routing the audio of incoming calls You can have the audio of incoming calls automatically routed to a headset or speaker phone instead of the iPhone receiver. Reroute audio for incoming calls: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > Incoming Calls and choose where you want to hear your calls. Siri With Siri, you can do things with your iPhone, such as opening apps, just by asking, and VoiceOver can read Siri responses to you. For information, see Chapter 4, Siri, on page 36. Triple-click Home Triple-click Home lets you turn some Accessibility features on or off by pressing the Home button quickly three times. You can use Triple-click Home for: • VoiceOver • Invert Colors • Zoom • AssistiveTouch • Hearing Aid Control • Guided Access (Triple-click Home starts Guided Access if it’s already turned on. See Guided Access on page 127.) Set the Triple-click Home function: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > Triple-click Home. If you select more than one, you’re asked which one you want to control whenever you tripleclick the Home button. Slow down the click speed: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > Home-click Speed.Chapter 32 Accessibility 125 Zoom Many apps let you zoom in or out on specific items. For example, you can double-tap or pinch to expand webpage columns in Safari. But, there’s also a Zoom accessibility feature that lets you magnify the entire screen of any app you’re using. And, you can use Zoom together with VoiceOver. Turn Zoom on or off: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > Zoom. Or, use Triple-click Home. See Triple-click Home on page 124. Zoom in or out: Double-tap the screen with three fingers. Vary the magnification: With three fingers, tap and drag up or down. The tap-and-drag gesture is similar to a double-tap, except you don’t lift your fingers on the second tap—instead, drag your fingers on the screen. Once you start dragging, you can drag with a single finger. iPhone returns to the adjusted magnification when you zoom out and in again using the three-finger double-tap. Pan around the screen: While zoomed in, drag the screen with three fingers. Once you start dragging, you can drag with a single finger so that you can see more of the screen. Or, hold a single finger near the edge of the display to pan to that side. Move your finger closer to the edge to pan more quickly. When you open a new screen, Zoom goes to the top-middle of the screen. While using Zoom with an Apple Wireless Keyboard (see Apple Wireless Keyboard on page 24), the screen image follows the insertion point, keeping it in the center of the display. Large Text Large Text lets you increase the text size in alerts, and in Calendar, Contacts, Mail, Messages, and Notes. Set the text size: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > Large Text. Invert Colors Sometimes, inverting the colors on the iPhone screen may make it easier to read. When Invert Colors is turned on, the screen looks like a photographic negative. Invert the screen’s colors: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > Invert Colors. Speak Selection Even with VoiceOver turned off, you can have iPhone read aloud any text you select. iPhone analyzes the text to determine the language, then reads it to you using the appropriate pronunciation. Turn on Speak Selection: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > Speak Selection. There you can also: • Adjust the speaking rate • Choose to have individual words highlighted as they’re read Have text read to you: Select the text, then tap Speak.Chapter 32 Accessibility 126 Speak Auto-text Speak Auto-text speaks the text corrections and suggestions iPhone makes when you type. Turn Speak Auto-text on or off: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > Speak Auto-text. Speak Auto-text also works with VoiceOver and Zoom. Mono Audio Mono Audio combines the left and right stereo channels into a mono signal played through both channels. You can adjust the balance of the mono signal for greater volume on the right or left. Turn Mono Audio on or off and adjust the balance: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > Mono Audio. Hearing aids Made for iPhone hearing aids If you have a Made for iPhone hearing aid (available for iPhone 4S and later), you can adjust its settings on iPhone to suit your listening needs. Adjust your hearing aid settings: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > Hearing Aids, or set Triple-Click Home to open Hearing Aid Control. See Triple-click Home on page 124. Hearing aid compatibility The FCC has adopted hearing aid compatibility (HAC) rules for digital wireless phones. These rules require certain phones to be tested and rated under the American National Standard Institute (ANSI) C63.19-2007 hearing aid compatibility standards. The ANSI standard for hearing aid compatibility contains two types of ratings: • An “M” rating for reduced radio frequency interference to enable acoustic coupling with hearing aids that are not operating in telecoil mode • A “T” rating for inductive coupling with hearing aids operating in telecoil mode These ratings are given on a scale from one to four, where four is the most compatible. A phone is considered hearing aid compatible under FCC rules if it is rated M3 or M4 for acoustic coupling and T3 or T4 for inductive coupling. For iPhone hearing aid compatibility ratings, go to www.apple.com/support/hac. Hearing aid compatibility ratings don’t guarantee that a particular hearing aid works with a particular phone. Some hearing aids may work well with phones that don’t meet particular ratings. To ensure interoperability between a hearing aid and a phone, try using them together before purchase. This phone has been tested and rated for use with hearing aids for some of the wireless technologies it uses. However, there may be some newer wireless technologies used in this phone that have not been tested yet for use with hearing aids. It is important to try the different features of this phone thoroughly and in different locations, using your hearing aid or cochlear implant, to determine if you hear any interfering noise. Consult your service provider or Apple for information on hearing aid compatibility. If you have questions about return or exchange policies, consult your service provider or phone retailer.Chapter 32 Accessibility 127 Hearing Aid Mode iPhone has a Hearing Aid Mode that, when activated, may reduce interference with some hearing aid models. Hearing Aid Mode reduces the transmission power of the cellular radio in the GSM 1900 MHz band and may result in decreased 2G cellular coverage. Activate Hearing Aid Mode: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > Hearing Aids. Assignable ringtones and vibrations You can assign distinctive ringtones to people in your contacts list for audible caller ID. You can also assign vibration patterns for notifications from specific apps, for phone calls, for FaceTime calls or messages from special contacts, and to alert you of a variety of other events, including new voicemail, new mail, sent mail, Tweet, Facebook Post, and reminders. Choose from existing patterns, or create new ones. See Sounds on page 139. You can purchase ringtones from the iTunes Store on iPhone. See Chapter 22, iTunes Store, on page 94. LED Flash for Alerts If you can’t hear the sounds that announce incoming calls and other alerts, you can have iPhone flash its LED (next to the camera lens on the back of the iPhone). This works only when iPhone is locked or asleep. Available for iPhone 4 or later. Turn on LED Flash for Alerts: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > LED Flash for Alerts. Guided Access Guided Access helps someone using iPhone to stay focused on a particular task. Guided Access limits iPhone to a single app, and lets you control which app features are available. Use Guided Access to: • Temporarily restrict iPhone to a particular app • Disable areas of the screen that aren’t relevant to a task, or areas where an accidental gesture might cause a distraction • Disable the iPhone hardware buttons Use Guided Access: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > Guided Access, where you can: • Turn Guided Access on or off • Set a passcode that controls the use of Guided Access and prevents someone from leaving an active session • Set whether iPhone can go to sleep during a session Start a Guided Access session: Open the app you want to run, then triple-click the Home button. Adjust settings for the session, then click Start. • Disable app controls and areas of the app screen: Circle any part of the screen you want to disable. You can use the handles to adjust the area. • Ignore all screen touches: Turn off Touch. • Keep iPhone from switching from portrait to landscape or from responding to any other motions: Turn off Motion. End a Guided Access session: Triple-click the Home button and enter the Guided Access passcode.Chapter 32 Accessibility 128 AssistiveTouch AssistiveTouch helps you use iPhone if you have difficulty touching the screen or pressing the buttons. You can use a compatible adaptive accessory (such as a joystick) together with AssistiveTouch to control iPhone. You can also use AssistiveTouch without an accessory to perform gestures that are difficult for you. Turn on AssistiveTouch: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > AssistiveTouch. To set Triple-click Home to turn AssistiveTouch on or off, go to Settings > General > Accessibility > Triple-click Home. Adjust the tracking speed (with accessory attached): Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > AssistiveTouch > Touch speed. Show or hide the AssistiveTouch menu: Click the secondary button on your accessory. Move the menu button: Drag it to any edge of the screen. Hide the menu button (with accessory attached): Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > AssistiveTouch > Always Show Menu. Perform a swipe or drag that uses 2, 3, 4, or 5 fingers: Tap the menu button, tap Gestures, and then tap the number of digits needed for the gesture. When the corresponding circles appear on the screen, swipe or drag in the direction required by the gesture. When you finish, tap the menu button. Perform a pinch gesture: Tap the menu button, tap Favorites, and then tap Pinch. When the pinch circles appear, touch anywhere on the screen to move the pinch circles, then drag the pinch circles in or out to perform a pinch gesture. When you finish, tap the menu button. Create your own gesture: Tap the menu button, tap Favorites, and then tap an empty gesture placeholder. Or, go to Settings > General > Accessibility > AssistiveTouch > Create New Gesture. Lock or rotate the screen, adjust iPhone volume, or simulate shaking iPhone: Tap the menu button, then tap Device. Simulate pressing the Home button: Tap the menu button, then tap Home. Exit a menu without performing a gesture: Tap anywhere outside the menu. Accessibility in OS X Take advantage of the accessibility features in OS X when you use iTunes to sync information and content from your iTunes library to iPhone. In the Finder, choose Help > Help Center, then search for “accessibility.” For more information about iPhone and OS X accessibility features, go to www.apple.com/accessibility.Chapter 32 Accessibility 129 TTY support You can use the iPhone TTY Adapter cable (sold separately in many areas) to connect iPhone to a TTY machine. Go to www.apple.com/store (may not be available in all areas) or check with your local Apple retailer. Connect iPhone to a TTY machine: Go to Settings > Phone and turn TTY on, and then connect iPhone to your TTY machine using the iPhone TTY Adapter. When TTY on iPhone is turned on, the TTY icon appears in the status bar at the top of the screen. For information about using a particular TTY machine, see the documentation that came with the machine. Minimum font size for mail messages To increase readability, you can set the minimum font size for Mail message text to Large, Extra Large, or Giant. Set the minimum mail message font size: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars > Minimum Font Size. The Large Text setting overrides this minimum font size. Assignable ringtones You can assign distinctive ringtones to people in your contacts list for audible caller ID. You can purchase ringtones from the iTunes Store on iPhone. See Chapter 22, iTunes Store, on page 94. Visual voicemail The play and pause controls in visual voicemail let you control the playback of messages. Drag the playhead on the scrubber bar to repeat a portion of the message that’s hard to understand. See Visual voicemail on page 47. Widescreen keyboards Many apps, including Mail, Safari, Messages, Notes, and Contacts, let you rotate iPhone when you’re typing, so you can use a larger keyboard. Large phone keypad Make phone calls simply by tapping entries in your contacts and favorites lists. When you need to dial a number, iPhone’s large numeric keypad makes it easy. See Phone calls on page 43. Voice Control Voice Control lets you make phone calls and control Music playback using voice commands. See Making calls on page 43, and Siri and Voice Control on page 62. Closed captioning Turn on closed captioning for videos: Go to Settings > Videos > Closed Captioning. Not all video content includes closed captions.33 130 Settings Settings lets you configure iPhone, set app options, add accounts, and set other preferences. See other chapters for information about settings for the built-in apps. For example, for Safari settings, see Chapter 7, Safari, on page 55. Airplane mode Airplane mode disables the wireless features in order to reduce potential interference with aircraft operation and other electrical equipment. Turn on airplane mode: Go to Settings and turn on airplane mode. When airplane mode is on, appears in the status bar at the top of the screen. No phone, Wi-Fi, or Bluetooth signals are emitted from iPhone, and GPS reception is turned off. You won’t be able to use apps or features that depend on these signals, such as connecting to the Internet, placing or receiving phone calls or messages, getting visual voicemail, and so on. If allowed by the aircraft operator and applicable laws and regulations, you can use iPhone and apps that don’t require these signals. If Wi-Fi is available and allowed by the aircraft operator and applicable laws and regulations, go to Settings > Wi-Fi to turn it on. You can also turn on Bluetooth in Settings > Bluetooth. Wi-Fi Joining Wi-Fi networks Wi-Fi settings determine whether iPhone uses local Wi-Fi networks to connect to the Internet. When iPhone is joined to a Wi-Fi network, the Wi-Fi icon in the status bar at the top of the screen shows signal strength. The more bars you see, the stronger the signal. If no Wi-Fi networks are available, or if you’ve turned Wi-Fi off, then iPhone connects to the Internet via your cellular data network when available. Once you join a Wi-Fi network, iPhone connects to it whenever the network is in range. If more than one previously used network is in range, iPhone joins the one last used. You can also use iPhone to set up a new AirPort base station that provides Wi-Fi services to your home or office. See Setting up an AirPort base station on page 131.Chapter 33 Settings 131 Turn Wi-Fi on or off: Go to Settings > Wi-Fi. You can: • Set iPhone to ask if you want to join a new network: Turn “Ask to Join Networks” on or off. If “Ask to Join Networks” is off, you must manually join a network to connect to the Internet when a previously used network isn’t available. • Forget a network, so iPhone doesn’t join it: Tap next to a network you’ve joined before. Then tap “Forget this Network.” • Join a closed Wi-Fi network: In the list of network names, tap Other, then enter the name of the closed network. You must already know the network name, password, and security type to connect to a closed network. • Adjust the settings for connecting to a Wi-Fi network: Tap next to a network. You can set an HTTP proxy, define static network settings, turn on BootP, or renew the settings provided by a DHCP server. Setting up an AirPort base station An AirPort base station provides a Wi-Fi connection to your home, school, or small business network. You can use iPhone to set up a new AirPort Express, AirPort Extreme, or Time Capsule base station. Use the AirPort Setup Assistant: Go to Settings > Wi-Fi. Under “Set up an AirPort base station,” tap the name of the base station you want to set up. Then follow the onscreen instructions. If the base station you want to set up isn’t listed, make sure that it has power, that you’re within range, and that it hasn’t already been configured. You can only set up base stations that are new or have been reset. Some older AirPort base stations cannot be set up using an iOS device. For setup instructions, see the documentation that came with the base station. Manage an AirPort network: If iPhone is connected to an AirPort base station, tap next to the network name. If you haven’t already downloaded AirPort Utility, the App Store opens so you can get it. Bluetooth iPhone can connect wirelessly to Bluetooth devices such as headsets, headphones, and car kits for music listening and and hands-free talking. You can also connect the Apple Wireless Keyboard with Bluetooth. See Apple Wireless Keyboard on page 24. Turn Bluetooth on or off: Go to Settings > Bluetooth. Connect to a Bluetooth device: Tap the device in the Devices list, then follow the onscreen instructions to connect to it. See the documentation that came with the device for information about Bluetooth pairing. VPN Your organization may use a VPN to communicate private information securely over a nonprivate network. You may need to configure VPN, for example, to access your work email. This setting appears when you have VPN configured on iPhone, allowing you to turn VPN on or off. See Cellular on page 135.Chapter 33 Settings 132 Personal Hotspot You can use Personal Hotspot (iPhone 4 or later) to share an Internet connection with a computer or other device—such as an iPod touch, iPad, or other iPhone—connected to your iPhone via Wi-Fi. You can also use Personal Hotspot to share an Internet connection with a computer connected to iPhone via Bluetooth or USB. Personal Hotspot works only if iPhone is connected to the Internet over the cellular data network. Note: This feature may not be available in all areas. Additional fees may apply. Contact your carrier for more information. Share an Internet connection: Go to Settings > General > Cellular and tap Set Up Personal Hotspot—if it appears—to set up the service with your carrier. After you turn on Personal Hotspot, other devices can connect in the following ways: • W-Fi: On the device, choose your iPhone from the list of available Wi-Fi networks. • USB: Connect your iPhone to your computer using the cable that came with it. In your computer’s Network preferences, choose iPhone and configure the network settings. • Bluetooth: On iPhone, go to Settings > Bluetooth and turn on Bluetooth. To pair and connect iPhone with your device, refer to the documentation that came with your computer. When a device is connected, a blue band appears at the top of the iPhone screen. Personal Hotspot remains on when you connect with USB, even when you aren’t actively using the Internet connection. Note: The Personal Hotspot icon appears in the status bar of iOS devices using Personal Hotspot. Change the Wi-Fi password for iPhone: Go to Settings > Personal Hotspot > Wi-Fi Password, then enter a password of at least 8 characters. Monitor your cellular data network usage: Go to Settings > General > Usage > Cellular Usage. Do Not Disturb and Notifications Push notifications appear in Notification Center and alert you to new information, even when the associated app isn’t running. Notifications vary by app, but may include text or sound alerts, and a numbered badge on the app icon on the Home screen. Turn off all notifications: Go to Settings and turn on Do Not Disturb. When it’s turned on and iPhone is locked, all notifications and calls are silenced, but alarms will still sound. You can set the following options in Settings > Notifications > Do Not Disturb: • Automatically turn on Do Not Disturb: Set the starting and ending hours for when you don’t want to be disturbed. iPhone turns on Do Not Disturb during these hours each day. • Allow some phone calls during Do Not Disturb: When Do Not Disturb is on, calls are silently sent to voice mail. To allow some callers to ring through, tap Allow Calls From. You can allow calls from your Favorites list or other Contacts groups you define. For information about Favorites, see Chapter 25, Contacts, on page 100. • Allow persistant callers to ring through: Turn on Repeated Calls. If the same caller (based on their Caller ID) calls you twice within three minutes, iPhone will ring. Turn an app’s notifications on or off: Go to Settings > Notifications. Tap an item in the list, then turn notifications on or off for that item. Apps that have notifications turned off appear in the Not In Notification Center list. Chapter 33 Settings 133 Change how notifications appear: Go to Settings > Notifications. You can: • Change the number of notifications: Choose an item in the In Notification Center list. To set how many notifications of this type appear in Notification Center, tap Show. • Change the alert styles: Choose an item in the In Notification Center list. Choose an alert style, or select None to turn off alerts and banners. Notifications will still appear in Notification Center. • Change the order of notifications: Tap Edit. Drag the notifications into the order you want. To turn off a notification, drag it to the Not In Notification Center list. • Display numbered badges on apps with notifications: Choose an item in the In Notification Center list and turn on Badge App Icon. • Hide alerts from an app when iPhone is locked: Choose the app in the In Notification Center list, then turn off “View in Lock Screen.” Some apps have additional options. For example, Messages lets you specify how many times the alert sound repeats and whether message previews appear in the notification. Remove Post and Tweet from Notification Center: These sharing options appear only if you have Facebook or Twitter accounts configured. To remove these buttons, go to Settings > Notifications and turn off the Share Widget. Show government alerts in Notification Center: Choose the alerts you want to see from the Government Alerts list. Government alerts are not available in all areas, vary by carrier and iPhone model, and may not work under all conditions. For example, in the United States, iPhone 4S or later can receive presidential alerts and you can turn AMBER and Emergency Alerts (which includes both Severe and Extreme Imminent Threat alerts) on or off. In Japan, iPhone 4 or later can receive Emergency Earthquake Alerts from the Japan Meteorological Agency. Carrier This setting appears on GSM networks when you’re outside your carrier’s network and other local carrier data networks are available to use for your phone calls, visual voicemail, and cellular network Internet connections. You can make calls only on carriers that have a roaming agreement with your carrier. Additional fees may apply. Roaming charges may be billed to you by the other carrier, through your carrier. Select a carrier: Go to Settings > Carrier and select the network you want to use. Once you select a network, iPhone uses only that network. If the network is unavailable, “No service” appears on the iPhone.Chapter 33 Settings 134 General General settings include network, sharing, security, and other settings. You can also find information about your iPhone, and reset various iPhone settings. About Display information about iPhone: Go to Settings > General > About. The items you can view include: • Available storage space • Serial number • iOS version • Network addresses • IMEI (International Mobile Equipment Identity) • ICCID (Integrated Circuit Card Identifier, or Smart Card) for GSM networks • MEID (Mobile Equipment Identifier) for CDMA networks • Legal notices, license, and regulatory marks. To copy the serial number and other identifiers, touch and hold the identifier until Copy appears. Change the device name: Go to Settings > General > About, then tap Name. The device name appears in the sidebar when it’s connected to iTunes, and it’s used by iCloud. To help Apple improve products and services, iPhone sends diagnostic and usage data. This data does not personally identify you but may include location information. View or turn off diagnostic information: Go to Settings > General > About > Diagnostics & Usage. Software Update Software Update lets you download and install iOS updates from Apple. Update to the latest iOS version: Go to Settings > General > Software Update. If a newer version of iOS is available, follow the onscreen instructions to download and install it. Usage View usage information: Go to Settings > General > Usage. You can: • See your cellular usage and reset statistics • View and delete iCloud backups, turn off backing up the Camera Roll, and buy additional storage • View each app’s storage • Display battery level as a percentage • See the elapsed time since iPhone has been charged Siri Enable Siri: Go to Settings > General > Siri. For information about using Siri and changing Siri settings, see Setting options for Siri on page 40.Chapter 33 Settings 135 Cellular Use Cellular settings to turn cellular data and roaming on or off, to set up Personal Hotspot, and to set cellular data options. When an app needs to use the Internet, iPhone does the following, in order, until connected: • Connects over the most recently used available Wi-Fi network. • Shows a list of Wi-Fi networks in range, and connects using the one you choose. • Connects over the cellular data network, if available. If iPhone is connected to the Internet via the cellular data network, the , , , , or icon appears in the status bar. LTE, 4G and 3G service on GSM cellular networks support simultaneous voice and data communications. For all other cellular connections, you can’t use Internet services while you’re talking on the phone unless iPhone also has a Wi-Fi connection to the Internet. Depending on your network connection, you may not be able to receive calls while iPhone transfers data over the cellular network—when downloading a webpage, for example. GSM networks: On an EDGE or GPRS connection, incoming calls may go directly to voicemail during data transfers. For incoming calls that you answer, data transfers are paused. CDMA networks: On EV-DO connections, data transfers are paused when you answer incoming calls. On 1xRTT connections, incoming calls may go directly to voicemail during data transfers. For incoming calls that you answer, data transfers are paused. Data transfer resumes when you end the call. If Cellular Data is turned off, all data services will use only Wi-Fi—including email, web browsing, push notifications, and other services. If Cellular Data is turned on, carrier charges may apply. For example, certain features and services such as Siri and Messages transfer data, and your use of these features and services could impact charges to your data plan. Turn Cellular Data on or off: Go to Settings > General > Cellular, then turn Cellular Data on or off. The following options may also be available: • Turn Voice Roaming on or off (CDMA): Turn Voice Roaming off to avoid charges from using other carrier’s networks. When your carrier’s network isn’t available, iPhone won’t have cellular (data or voice) service. • Turn Data Roaming on or off: Data Roaming permits Internet access over a cellular data network when you’re in an area not covered by your carrier’s network. When you’re traveling, you can turn off Data Roaming to avoid roaming charges. See Carrier on page 133. • Enable or disable 3G: Using 3G loads Internet data faster in some cases, but may decrease battery performance. If you’re making a lot of phone calls, you may want to turn 3G off to extend battery life. This option is not available in all areas. Set up Personal Hotspot: Go to Settings > General > Cellular > Set Up Personal Hotspot. Personal Hotspot shares iPhone’s Internet connection with your computer and other iOS devices. See Personal Hotspot on page 132. Set when cellular data is used: Go to Settings > General > Cellular, then turn cellular data on or off for iCloud Documents, iTunes, FaceTime, Passbook updates, or Reading List. When these settings are off, iPhone will use only Wi-Fi. iTunes includes both iTunes Match and automatic downloads from iTunes and App Store.Chapter 33 Settings 136 VPN VPNs used within organizations allow you to communicate private information securely over a non-private network. You may need to configure VPN, for example, to access your work email. Ask the network’s administrator for the settings necessary to configure VPN for your network. After one or more VPN settings are defined you can: • Turn VPN on or off: Go to Settings > VPN. • Switch between VPNs: Go to Settings > General > VPN, then choose a configuration. See also Appendix A, iPhone in Business, on page 141. iTunes Wi-Fi Sync You can sync iPhone with iTunes on a computer that’s connected to the same Wi-Fi network. Enable iTunes Wi-Fi Sync: To set up Wi-Fi syncing for the first time, connect iPhone to the computer that you want to sync with. For instructions see Syncing with iTunes on page 16. After you configure Wi-Fi Sync, iPhone automatically syncs with iTunes once a day, when: • iPhone is connected to a power source, • iPhone and your computer are both connected to the same Wi-Fi network, and • iTunes on your computer is running. Spotlight Search The Spotlight Search setting lets you specify the content areas searched by Search, and rearrange the order of the results. Set which content areas are searched by Search: Go to Settings > General > Spotlight Search, then select the items to search. You can also change the order of the result categories. Auto-Lock Locking iPhone turns off the display in order to save the battery and prevent unintended operation of iPhone. You can still receive calls and text messages, and you can adjust the volume and use the mic button on your headset while listening to music or on a call. Set the amount of time before iPhone locks: Go to Settings > General > Auto-Lock, then choose a time. Passcode Lock By default, iPhone doesn’t require you to enter a passcode to unlock it. Set a passcode: Go to Settings > General > Passcode Lock and set a 4-digit passcode. To increase security, turn off Simple Passcode and use a longer passcode. If you forget your passcode, you must restore the iPhone software. See Updating and restoring iPhone software on page 152. Allow access when iPhone is locked: Go to Settings > General > Passcode Lock. You can use the following without unlocking iPhone: • Siri (See Setting options for Siri on page 40.) • Voice Dial (This setting is available only when Siri is turned off.) • Reply with Message (See Receiving calls on page 44.) • Passbook (See Chapter 16, Passbook, on page 84.)Chapter 33 Settings 137 Erase data after ten failed passcode attempts: Go to Settings > General > Passcode Lock and tap Erase Data. After ten failed passcode attempts, all settings are reset, and all your information and media are erased by removing the encryption key to the data (which is encrypted using 256-bit AES encryption). Restrictions You can set restrictions for some apps and for purchased content. For example, parents can restrict explicit music from being seen on playlists, or prevent the installation of apps. Turn on restrictions: Go to Settings > General > Restrictions, then tap Enable Restrictions. You’ll be asked to define a restrictions passcode that’s necessary in order to change the settings you make. This is distinct from the passcode for unlocking iPhone. Important: If you forget your restrictions passcode, you must restore the iPhone software. See Updating and restoring iPhone software on page 152. You can set restrictions for the following apps: • Safari • Camera (and apps that use the camera) • FaceTime • iTunes Store • iBookstore • Siri (including voice command and dictation) You can also restrict the following: • Installing Apps: The App Store is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. You cannot install apps on iPhone. • Deleting Apps: You cannot delete apps from iPhone. doesn’t appear on app icons when you’re customizing the Home screen. • Explicit Language: Siri attempts to replace explicit words you speak by replacing them with asterisks and beep sounds • Privacy: The current privacy settings for Location Services, Contacts, Calendars, Reminders, Photos, Bluetooth Sharing, Twitter, and Facebook can each be locked. • Accounts: The current Mail, Contacts, Calendar settings are locked. You cannot add, modify, or delete accounts. You also cannot modify iCloud settings. • Find My Friends: The current Find My Friends settings are locked. This option is available when the Find My Friends app is installed. • Volume Limit: The current sound volume limit setting is locked. • In-App Purchases: When In-App Purchases is turned off, you can’t purchase additional content or functionality for apps you download from the App Store. • Require Passwords: Requires you to enter your Apple ID for in-app purchases after the time period you specify. • Content Restrictions: Tap Ratings For, then select a country from the list. Then set restrictions for music, podcasts, movies, TV shows, and apps. Content that doesn’t meet the rating you select won’t appear on iPhone. • Multiplayer Games: When Multiplayer Games is off, you can’t request a match, send or receive invitations to play games, or add friends in Game Center. • Adding Friends: When Adding Friends is off, you can’t make or receive friend requests in Game Center. If Multiplayer Games is turned on, you can continue to play with existing friends.Chapter 33 Settings 138 Date & Time These settings affect the time shown in the status bar at the top of the screen, and in world clocks and calendars. Set whether iPhone shows 24-hour time or 12-hour time: Go to Settings > General > Date & Time, then turn 24-Hour Time on or off. (24-Hour Time may not be available in all areas.) Set whether iPhone updates the date and time automatically: Go to Settings > General > Date & Time, then turn Set Automatically on or off. If you set iPhone to update the time automatically, it gets the correct time over the cellular network and updates it for the time zone you’re in. Some carriers don’t support network time, so in some areas iPhone may not be able to automatically determine the local time. Set the date and time manually: Go to Settings > General > Date & Time, then turn Set Automatically off. Tap Time Zone to set your time zone. Tap the Date & Time button, then tap Set Date & Time. Keyboard You can turn on keyboards for writing in different languages, and you can turn typing features, such as spell-checking, on or off. For information about the keyboard, see Typing on page 22. For information about international keyboards, see Appendix B, International Keyboards, on page 143. International Go to Settings > General > International to set the following: • The language for iPhone. • The calendar format. • The language for Voice Control. • The keyboards you use. • The date, time, and telephone number formats. Accessibility Go to Settings > General > Accessibility and turn on the features you want. See Chapter 32, Accessibility, on page 115. Profiles This setting appears if you install one or more profiles on iPhone. Tap Profiles to see information about the profiles you’ve installed. For more information see Using configuration profiles on page 141. Reset You can reset the word dictionary, network settings, home screen layout, and location warnings. You can also erase all of your content and settings. Reset iPhone: Go to Settings > General > Reset, then choose an option: • Reset all settings: All your preferences and settings are reset. • Erase all content and settings: Your information, and settings are removed. iPhone cannot be used until it’s set up again.Chapter 33 Settings 139 • Reset network settings: When you reset network settings, your list of previously used networks and VPN settings not installed by a configuration profile are removed. Wi-Fi is turned off and then back on, disconnecting you from any network you’re on. The Wi-Fi and “Ask to Join Networks” settings remain turned on. To remove VPN settings installed by a configuration profile, go to Settings > General > Profile, then select the profile and tap Remove. This also removes other settings or accounts provided by the profile. • Reset the keyboard dictionary: You add words to the keyboard dictionary by rejecting words iPhone suggests as you type. Resetting the keyboard dictionary erases all words you’ve added. • Reset the Home screen layout: Returns the built-in apps to their original layout on the Home screen. • Reset location and privacy: Resets the location services and privacy settings to their factory defaults. Sounds You can set iPhone to play a sound whenever you get a new message, email, call, Tweet, Facebook post, voicemail, or reminders. You can also set sounds for appointments, sending an email, keyboard clicks, and when you lock iPhone. For information about silencing iPhone see Ring/Silent switch on page 10. Change sound settings: Go to Settings > Sounds. Available options include: • Set whether iPhone vibrates when get a call. • Set whether iPhone vibrates when you turn on silent mode. • Adjust the ringer and alerts volume. • Prevent the side buttons from changing the ringer volume. • Set the ringtone. To set a ringtone for a person, go to their card in Contacts. • Set alert and other tones. • Turn on keyboard clicks and a sound for when when iPhone locks. Set vibration patterns: Go to Settings > Sounds and choose an item from the Sounds and Vibration Patterns list. Tap Vibration to select a pattern. • Define a custom vibration pattern: Tap an item in the Sounds and Vibrations list, then tap Vibration. Tap Create New Vibration then define the pattern by touching and tapping the screen. Brightness & Wallpaper Screen brightness affects battery life. Dim the screen to extend the time before you need to recharge iPhone, or use Auto-Brightness. Adjust the screen brightness: Go to Settings > Brightness & Wallpaper and drag the slider. If Auto-Brightness is on, iPhone adjusts the screen brightness for current light conditions using the built-in ambient light sensor. Wallpaper settings let you set an image or photo as wallpaper for the Lock screen or Home screen. See Changing the wallpaper on page 21.Chapter 33 Settings 140 Privacy Privacy settings let you see and control which apps and system services have access to Location Services, and to contacts, calendars, reminders, and photos. Location Services lets location-based apps such as Reminders, Maps, and Camera gather and use data indicating your location. Your approximate location is determined using available information from cellular network data, local Wi-Fi networks (if you have Wi-Fi turned on), and GPS (may not be available in all areas). The location data collected by Apple isn’t collected in a form that personally identifies you. When an app is using Location Services, appears in the menu bar. Turn Location Services on or off: Go to Settings > Privacy > Location Services. You can turn it off for some or for all apps and services. If you turn off Location Services, you’re prompted to turn it on again the next time an app or service tries to use it. Turn Location Services off for system services: Several system services, such as compass calibration and location-based iAds, use Location Services. To see their status, turn them on or off, or show in the menu bar when these services use your location, go to Settings > Privacy > Location Services > System Services. Turn off access to private information: Go to Settings > Privacy. You can see which apps have requested and been granted access to the following information: • Contacts • Calendar • Reminders • Photos • Bluetooth Sharing • Twitter • Facebook You can turn off each app’s access to each category of information. Review the terms and privacy policy for each third-party app to understand how it uses the data it’s requesting.A 141 iPhone in Business With support for secure access to corporate networks, directories, and Microsoft Exchange, iPhone is ready to go to work. For detailed information about using iPhone in business, go to www.apple.com/iphone/business. Using configuration profiles If you’re in an enterprise environment, you may be able to set up accounts and other items on iPhone by installing a configuration profile. Configuration profiles let your administrator set up your iPhone to use the information systems at your company, school, or organization. For example, a configuration profile might set up your iPhone to access the Microsoft Exchange servers at work, so iPhone can access your Exchange email, calendars, and contacts, and it may turn on Passcode Lock to help keep the information secure. Your administrator may distribute configuration profiles by email, by putting them on a secure webpage, or by installing them directly on iPhone for you. Your administrator may have you install a profile that ties your iPhone to a mobile device management server, which allows your administrator to configure your settings remotely. Install configuration profiles: On iPhone, open the email message or download the configuration profiles from the website your administrator provides. When you open a configuration profile, installation begins. Important: You may be asked whether a configuration profile is trusted. If in doubt, ask your administrator before installing the configuration profile. You can’t change the settings defined by a configuration profile. If you want to change settings, you must first remove the configuration profile, or install a new configuration profile with the new settings. Remove a configuration profile: Go to Settings > General > Profile, then select the configuration profile and tap Remove. Removing a configuration profile deletes the settings and all other information installed by the profile. Setting up Microsoft Exchange accounts Microsoft Exchange provides email, contact, tasks, and calendar information that you can automatically sync wirelessly to iPhone. You can set up an Exchange account directly on iPhone. Set up an Exchange account on iPhone: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars. Tap Add Account, then tap Microsoft Exchange. Ask your service provider or administrator what settings you should use. AppendixAppendix A iPhone in Business 142 VPN access VPN (virtual private network) provides secure access over the Internet to private networks, such as the network at your company or school. Use Network settings on iPhone to configure and turn on VPN. Ask your administrator what settings you should use. VPN can also be set up automatically by a configuration profile. When VPN is set up by a configuration profile, iPhone may turn VPN on automatically whenever it’s needed. For more information, contact your administrator. LDAP and CardDAV accounts When you set up an LDAP account, you can view and search for contacts on your organization’s LDAP server. The server appears as a new group in Contacts. Because LDAP contacts aren’t downloaded to iPhone, you must have an Internet connection to view them. Check with your administrator for account settings and other requirements (such as VPN). When you set up a CardDAV account, your account contacts are synced with iPhone over the air. You may also be able to search for contacts on your organization’s CardDAV server. Set up an LDAP or CardDAV account: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars, then tap Add Account. Tap Other. Ask your service provider or administrator what settings you should use.B 143 International Keyboards International keyboards let you type text in many different languages, including Asian languages and languages that are written from right to left. Using international keyboards International keyboards let you type text in many different languages, including Asian languages and languages written from right to left. For a list of supported keyboards, go to www.apple.com/iphone/specs.html. Manage keyboards: Go to Settings > General > International > Keyboards. • Add a keyboard: Tap Add New Keyboard, then choose a keyboard from the list. Repeat to add more keyboards. • Remove a keyboard: Tap Edit, tap next to the keyboard you want to remove, then tap Delete. • Edit your keyboard list: Tap Edit, then drag next to a keyboard to a new place in the list. To enter text in a different language, switch keyboards. Switch keyboards while typing: Touch and hold the Globe key to show all your enabled keyboards. To choose a keyboard, slide your finger to the name of the keyboard, then release. The Globe key appears only if you enable more than one keyboard. You can also just tap . When you tap , the name of the newly activated keyboard appears briefly. Continue tapping to access other enabled keyboards. Many keyboards provide letters, numbers, and symbols that aren’t visible on the keyboard. Enter accented letters or other characters: Touch and hold the related letter, number, or symbol, then slide to choose a variant. For example: • On a Thai keyboard: Choose native numbers by touching and holding the related Arabic number. • On a Chinese, Japanese, or Arabic keyboard: Suggested characters or candidates appear at the top of the keyboard. Tap a candidate to enter it, or flick left to see more candidates. Use the extended candidate list: Tap the up arrow at the right to view the full candidate list. • Scroll the list: Flick up or down. • Return to the short list: Tap the down arrow. When using certain Chinese or Japanese keyboards, you can create a shortcut for word and input pairs. The shortcut is added to your personal dictionary. When you type a shortcut while using a supported keyboard, the paired word or input is substituted for the shortcut. AppendixAppendix B International Keyboards 144 Turn shortcuts on or off: Go to Settings > General > Keyboard > Shortcuts. Shortcuts are available for: • Simplified Chinese: Pinyin • Traditional Chinese: Pinyin and Zhuyin • Japanese: Romaji and 50 Key Special input methods You can use keyboards to enter some languages in different ways. A few examples are Chinese Cangjie and Wubihua, Japanese Kana, and Facemarks. You can also use your finger or a stylus to write Chinese characters on the screen. Build Chinese characters from the component Cangjie keys: As you type, suggested characters appear. Tap a character to choose it, or continue typing up to five components to see more options. Build Chinese Wubihua (stroke) characters: Use the keypad to build Chinese characters using up to five strokes, in the correct writing sequence: horizontal, vertical, left falling, right falling, and hook. For example, the Chinese character 圈 (circle) should begin with the vertical stroke 丨. • As you type, suggested Chinese characters appear (the most commonly used characters appear first). Tap a character to choose it. • If you’re not sure of the correct stroke, enter an asterisk (*). To see more character options, type another stroke, or scroll through the character list. • Tap the match key (匹配) to show only characters that match exactly what you typed. Write Chinese characters: Write Chinese characters directly on the screen with your finger when Simplified or Traditional Chinese handwriting formats are turned on. As you write character strokes, iPhone recognizes them and shows matching characters in a list, with the closest match at the top. When you choose a character, its likely follow-on characters appear in the list as additional choices Touchpad Touchpad Some complex characters, such as 鱲 (part of the name for the Hong Kong International Airport), 𨋢 (elevator), and 㗎 (particle used in Cantonese), can be typed by writing two or more component characters in sequence. Tap the character to replace the characters you typed. Roman characters are also recognized. Type Japanese kana: Use the Kana keypad to select syllables. For more syllable options, tap the arrow key and select another syllable or word from the window.Appendix B International Keyboards 145 Type Japanese romaji: Use the Romaji keyboard to type syllables. Alternative choices appear along the top of the keyboard, tap one to type it. For more syllable options, tap the arrow key and select another syllable or word from the window. Type facemarks or emoticons: Use the Japanese Kana keyboard and tap the ^_^ key. Or you can: • Use the Japanese Romaji keyboard (QWERTY-Japanese layout): Tap the Number key , then tap the ^_^ key. • Use the Chinese (Simplified or Traditional) Pinyin or (Traditional) Zhuyin keyboard: Tap the Symbols key , then tap the ^_^ key.C 146 Safety, Handling, & Support Important safety information WARNING: Failure to follow these safety instructions could result in fire, electric shock, or other injuries, or damage to iPhone or other property. Read all the safety information below before using iPhone. Handling Handle iPhone with care. It is made of metal, glass, and plastic and has sensitive electronic components inside. iPhone can be damaged if dropped, burned, punctured, or crushed, or if it comes in contact with liquid. Don’t use a damaged iPhone, such as one with a cracked screen, as it may cause injury. If you’re concerned about scratching, consider using a case. Repairing Don’t open iPhone and don’t attempt to repair iPhone by yourself. Disassembling iPhone may cause injury to you or damage to iPhone. If iPhone is damaged, malfunctions, or comes in contact with liquid, contact Apple or an Apple Authorized Service Provider. You can find more information about getting service at www.apple.com/support/iphone/service/faq. Battery Don’t attempt to replace the iPhone battery yourself—you may damage the battery, which could cause overheating and injury. The lithium-ion battery in iPhone should be replaced only by Apple or an Apple Authorized Service Provider, and must be recycled or disposed of separately from household waste. Don’t incinerate the battery. For information about battery recycling and replacement, go to www.apple.com/batteries. Distraction Using iPhone in some circumstances can distract you and may cause a dangerous situation. Observe rules that prohibit or restrict the use of mobile phones or headphones (for example, avoid texting while driving a car or using headphones while riding a bicycle). Navigation Maps, directions, Flyover, and location-based apps depend on data services. These data services are subject to change and may not be available in all areas, resulting in maps, directions, Flyover, or location-based information that may be unavailable, inaccurate, or incomplete. Compare the information provided on iPhone to your surroundings, and defer to posted signs to resolve any discrepancies. Some Maps features require Location Services. See Privacy on page 140. Use common sense when navigating. AppendixAppendix C Safety, Handling, & Support 147 Charging Charge iPhone with the included USB cable and power adapter or other third-party “Made for iPhone” cables and power adapters that are compatible with USB 2.0 or power adapters compliant with one or more of the following standards EN 301489-34, IEC 62684, YD/T 1591-2009, CNS 15285, ITU L.1000, or another applicable mobile phone power adapter interoperability standard. An iPhone Micro USB Adapter (available separately in some areas) or other adapter may be needed to connect iPhone to some compatible power adapters. Using damaged cables or chargers, or charging when moisture is present, can cause electric shock. When you use the Apple USB Power Adapter to charge iPhone, make sure that the AC plug or AC power cord is fully inserted into the adapter before you plug it into a power outlet. Power adapters may become warm during normal use, and prolonged contact may cause injury. Always allow adequate ventilation around power adapters when using them. Note: Only micro USB power adapters in certain regions that comply with applicable mobile phone power adapter interoperability standards are compatible. Please contact the power adapter manufacturer to find out if your micro USB power adapter complies with these standards. Hearing loss Listening to sound at high volumes may damage your hearing. Background noise, as well as continued exposure to high volume levels, can make sounds seem quieter than they actually are. Turn on the audio and check the volume before inserting anything in your ear. For more information about hearing loss, see www.apple.com/sound. For information about how to set a maximum volume limit on iPhone, see Music settings on page 63. WARNING: To prevent possible hearing damage, do not listen at high volume levels for long periods. Apple headsets The headsets sold with iPhone 4S or later in China (identifiable by dark insulating rings on the plug) are designed to comply with Chinese standards and are compatible with iPhone 4S or later, iPad 2 or later, and iPod touch 5th generation. Use only compatible headsets with your device. Radio signals iPhone uses radio signals to connect to wireless networks. For information about the amount of power used to transmit these signals, and about steps you can take to minimize exposure, see Settings > General > About > Legal > RF Exposure. Radio frequency interference Observe signs and notices that prohibit or restrict the use of mobile phones (for example, in healthcare facilities or blasting areas). Although iPhone is designed, tested, and manufactured to comply with regulations governing radio frequency emissions, such emissions from iPhone can negatively affect the operation of other electronic equipment, causing them to malfunction. Turn off iPhone or use Airplane Mode to turn off the iPhone wireless transmitters when use is prohibited, such as while traveling in aircraft, or when asked to do so by authorities. Medical devices iPhone contains radios that emit electromagnetic fields. These electromagnetic fields may interfere with pacemakers or other medical devices. If you wear a pacemaker, maintain at least 6 inches (approximately 15 cm) of separation between your pacemaker and iPhone. If you suspect iPhone is interfering with your pacemaker or any other medical device, stop using iPhone and consult your physician for information specific to your medical device. iPhone has magnets near the bottom, and the included headphones also have magnets in the earbuds, which may interfere with pacemakers, defibrillators or other medical devices. Maintain at least 6 inches (approximately 15 cm) of separation between your pacemaker or defibrillator and iPhone or the earbuds.Appendix C Safety, Handling, & Support 148 Medical conditions If you have any other medical condition that you believe could be affected by iPhone (for example, seizures, blackouts, eyestrain, or headaches), consult with your physician prior to using iPhone. Explosive atmospheres Do not charge or use iPhone in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere, such as at a fueling area, or in areas where the air contains chemicals or particles (such as grain, dust, or metal powders). Obey all signs and instructions. Repetitive motion When you perform repetitive activities such as typing or playing games on iPhone, you may experience occasional discomfort in your hands, arms, wrists, shoulders, neck, or other parts of your body. If you experience discomfort, stop using iPhone and consult a physician. High-consequence activities This device is not intended for use where the failure of the device could lead to death, personal injury, or severe environmental damage. Choking hazard Some iPhone accessories may present a choking hazard to small children. Keep these accessories away from small children. Important handling information Cleaning Clean iPhone immediately if it comes in contact with anything that may cause stains— such as dirt, ink, makeup, or lotions. To clean: • Disconnect all cables and turn iPhone off (press and hold the Sleep/Wake button, then slide the onscreen slider). • Use a soft, lint-free cloth. • Avoid getting moisture in openings. • Don’t use cleaning products or compressed air. The front or back cover of iPhone may be made of glass with a fingerprint-resistant oleophobic (oil repellant) coating. This coating wears over time with normal usage. Cleaning products and abrasive materials will further diminish the coating, and may scratch the glass. Abrasive media may also scratch iPhone. Using connectors, ports, and buttons Never force a connector into a port or apply excessive pressure to a button, because this may cause damage that is not covered under the warranty. If the connector and port don’t join with reasonable ease, they probably don’t match. Check for obstructions and make sure that the connector matches the port and that you have positioned the connector correctly in relation to the port. Lightning Discoloration of the Lightning plug after regular use is normal. Dirt, debris, and exposure to liquids may cause discoloration. To remove the discoloration or if the cable becomes warm during use or won’t charge or sync your iPhone, disconnect the Lightning cable from your computer or power adapter and clean it with a soft, dry, lint-free cloth. Do not use liquids or cleaning products when cleaning the Lightning connector. Operating temperature iPhone is designed to work in ambient temperatures between 32° and 95° F (0° and 35° C) and stored in temperatures between -4° and 113° F (-20° and 45° C). iPhone can be damaged and battery life shortened if stored or operated outside of these temperature ranges. Avoid exposing iPhone to dramatic changes in temperature or humidity. When you’re using iPhone or charging the battery, it is normal for iPhone to get warm.Appendix C Safety, Handling, & Support 149 If the interior temperature of iPhone exceeds normal operating temperatures (for example, in a hot car or in direct sunlight for extended periods of time), you may experience the following as it attempts to regulate its temperature: • iPhone stops charging. • The screen dims. • A temperature warning screen appears. • Some apps may close. Important: You may not be able to use iPhone while the temperature warning screen is displayed. If iPhone can’t regulate its internal temperature, it goes into deep sleep mode until it cools. Move iPhone to a cooler location out of direct sunlight and wait a few minutes before trying to use iPhone again. For more information, go to support.apple.com/kb/HT2101. iPhone Support site Comprehensive support information is available online at www.apple.com/support/iphone. To contact Apple for personalized support (not available in all areas), see www.apple.com/support/contact. Restarting or resetting iPhone If something isn’t working right, try restarting iPhone, forcing an app to close, or resetting iPhone. Restart iPhone: Hold down the Sleep/Wake button until the red slider appears. Slide your finger across the slider to turn off iPhone. To turn iPhone back on, hold down the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo appears. Force an app to close: Hold down the Sleep/Wake button for a few seconds until a red slider appears, then hold down the Home button until the app closes. You can also remove an app from the recents list to force it to close. See Opening and switching between apps on page 17. If you can’t turn off iPhone or if the problem continues, you may need to reset iPhone. A reset should be done only if turning iPhone off and on doesn’t resolve the problem. Reset iPhone: Hold down the Sleep/Wake button and the Home button at the same time for at least ten seconds, until the Apple logo appears. “Wrong Passcode” or “iPhone is disabled” appears If you forget your passcode or iPhone displays an alert that it is disabled, see “iOS: Wrong passcode results in red disabled screen” at support.apple.com/kb/HT1212. “This accessory is not supported by iPhone” appears The accessory you attached may not work with iPhone. Make sure the USB cable and connectors are free of debris, and refer to the documentation that came with the accessory.Appendix C Safety, Handling, & Support 150 Can’t view email attachments If iPhone can’t view email attachments, try the following: • View an attached file: Tap the attachment to open it in Quick Look. You may need to wait while it downloads before viewing. • Save an attached photo or video: Tap the attachment to open it in Quick Look. You may need to wait while it downloads before viewing. Quick Look supports the following document types: • .doc, .docx—Microsoft Word • .htm, .html—webpage • .key—Keynote • .numbers—Numbers • .pages—Pages • .pdf—Preview, Adobe Acrobat • .ppt, .pptx—Microsoft PowerPoint • .rtf—Rich Text Format • .txt—text • .vcf—contact information • .xls, .xlsx—Microsoft Excel For additional troubleshooting information, go to www.apple.com/support/iphone. Backing up iPhone You can use iCloud or iTunes to automatically back up iPhone. If you choose to back up using iCloud, you can’t also use iTunes to automatically back up to your computer, but you can use iTunes to manually back up to your computer. Backing up with iCloud iCloud backs up to iPhone daily over Wi-Fi, when it’s connected to a power source and is locked. The date and time of the last backup is listed at the bottom of the Storage & Backup screen. iCloud backs up your: • Purchased music, TV shows, apps, and books • Photos and videos in your Camera Roll • iPhone settings • App data • Home screen and app organization • Messages (iMessage, SMS, and MMS) • Ringtones Note: Purchased music is not backed up in all areas and TV shows are not available in all areas. If you didn't enable iCloud backup when you first set up iPhone, you can turn it on in iCloud settings. Turn on iCloud backups: Go to Settings > iCloud, then log in with your Apple ID and password, if required. Go to Storage & Backup, then turn on iCloud Backup. Back up immediately: Go to Settings > iCloud > Storage & Backup, then tap Back Up Now.Appendix C Safety, Handling, & Support 151 Manage your backups: Go to Settings > iCloud > Storage & Backup, then tap Manage Storage. Tap the name of your iPhone. Turn Camera Roll backup on or off: Go to Settings > iCloud > Storage & Backup, then tap Manage Storage. Tap the name of your iPhone, then turn Camera Roll backup on or off. View the devices being backed up: Go to Settings > iCloud > Storage & Backup > Manage Storage. Stop iCloud backups: Go to Settings > iCloud > Storage & Backup > Backup, then turn off iCloud Backup. Music that isn’t purchased in iTunes isn't backed up in iCloud. You have to use iTunes to back up and restore that content. See Syncing with iTunes on page 16. Important: Backups for music or TV show purchases are not available in all areas. Previous purchases may be unavailable if they are no longer in the iTunes Store, App Store, or iBookstore. Purchased content, as well as Photo Stream content, doesn’t count against your 5 GB of free iCloud storage. Backing up with iTunes iTunes creates a backup of photos in your Camera Roll or Saved Photos album, and backups of text messages, notes, call history, your Favorites list, sound settings, and more. Media files, such as songs, and some photos, aren’t backed up, but can be restored by syncing with iTunes. When you connect iPhone to the computer you normally sync with, iTunes creates a backup each time you: • Sync with iTunes: iTunes syncs iPhone each time you connect iPhone to your computer. iTunes won’t automatically back up an iPhone that isn’t configured to sync with that computer. See Syncing with iTunes on page 16. • Update or restore iPhone: iTunes always backs up iPhone before updating and restoring. iTunes can also encrypt iPhone backups to secure your data. Encrypt iPhone backups: Select “Encrypt iPhone backup” in the iTunes Summary pane. Restore iPhone files and settings: Connect iPhone to the computer you normally sync with, select iPhone in the iTunes window, and click Restore in the Summary pane. For more information about backups, go to support.apple.com/kb/HT1766. Removing an iTunes backup You can remove an iPhone backup from the list of backups in iTunes. You may want to do this, for example, if a backup was created on someone else’s computer. Remove a backup: 1 In iTunes, open iTunes Preferences. • Mac: Choose iTunes > Preferences. • Windows: Choose Edit > Preferences. 2 Click Devices (iPhone doesn’t need to be connected). 3 Select the backup you want to remove, then click Delete Backup. 4 Click Delete, to confirm you wish to remove the selected backup, then click OK.Appendix C Safety, Handling, & Support 152 Updating and restoring iPhone software You can update iPhone software in Settings, or by using iTunes. You can also erase or restore iPhone, and then use iCloud or iTunes to restore from a backup. Deleted data is no longer accessible through the iPhone user interface, but it isn’t erased from iPhone. For information about erasing all content and settings, see Reset on page 138. Updating iPhone You can update software in iPhone Settings or by using iTunes. Update wirelessly on iPhone: Go to Settings > General > Software Update. iPhone checks for available software updates. Update software in iTunes: iTunes checks for available software updates each time you sync iPhone using iTunes. See Syncing with iTunes on page 16. For more information about updating iPhone software, go to support.apple.com/kb/HT4623. Restoring iPhone You can use iCloud or iTunes to restore iPhone from a backup. Restore from an iCloud backup: Reset iPhone to erase all settings and information. Sign in to iCloud and choose Restore from a Backup in the Setup Assistant. See Reset on page 138. Restore from an iTunes backup: Connect iPhone to the computer you normally sync with, select iPhone in the iTunes window, and click Restore in the Summary pane. When the iPhone software is restored, you can either set it up as a new iPhone, or restore your music, videos, app data, and other content from a backup. For more information about restoring iPhone software, go to support.apple.com/kb/HT1414. Software and service information This table describes where to get more iPhone-related safety, software, and service information. To learn about Do this Using iPhone safely See Important safety information on page 146. iPhone service and support, tips, forums, and Apple software downloads Go to www.apple.com/support/iphone. Service and support from your carrier Contact your carrier or go to your carrier’s website. The latest information about iPhone Go to www.apple.com/iphone. Managing your Apple ID account Go to appleid.apple.com. Using iCloud Go to www.apple.com/support/icloud. Using iTunes Open iTunes and choose Help > iTunes Help. For an online iTunes tutorial (may not be available in all areas), go to www.apple.com/support/itunes. Using other Apple iOS apps Go to www.apple.com/support/ios. Finding your iPhone serial number, IMEI, ICCID, or MEID You can find your iPhone serial number, International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI), ICCD, or Mobile Equipment Identifier (MEID) on the iPhone packaging. Or, on iPhone, choose Settings > General > About. For more information, go to support.apple.com/kb/ht4061.Appendix C Safety, Handling, & Support 153 To learn about Do this Obtaining warranty service First follow the advice in this guide. Then go to www.apple.com/support/iphone. Viewing iPhone regulatory information On iPhone, go to Settings > General > About > Legal > Regulatory. Battery replacement service Go to www.apple.com/batteries/replacements.html. Using iPhone in an enterprise environment Go to www.apple.com/iphone/business to learn more about the enterprise features of iPhone, including Microsoft Exchange, IMAP, CalDAV, CardDAV, VPN, and more. Using iPhone in an enterprise environment Go to www.apple.com/iphone/business to learn more about the enterprise features of iPhone, including Microsoft Exchange, IMAP, CalDAV, CardDAV, VPN, and more. Using iPhone with other carriers Some carriers let you unlock iPhone for use with their network. To see if your carrier offers this option, go to support.apple.com/kb/HT1937. Contact your carrier for authorization and setup information. You need to connect iPhone to iTunes to complete the process. Additional fees may apply. For troubleshooting information, go to support.apple.com/kb/TS3198. Disposal and recycling information Apple Recycling Program (available in some areas): For free recycling of your old mobile phone, a prepaid shipping label, and instructions, see www.apple.com/recycling. iPhone disposal and recycling: You must dispose of iPhone properly according to local laws and regulations. Because iPhone contains electronic components and a battery, iPhone must be disposed of separately from household waste. When iPhone reaches its end of life, contact local authorities to learn about disposal and recycling options, or simply drop it off at your local Apple retail store or return it to Apple. The battery will be removed and recycled in an environmentally friendly manner. For more information, see www.apple.com/recycling. Battery replacement: The lithium-ion battery in iPhone should be replaced only by Apple or an Apple Authorized Service Provider, and must be recycled or disposed of separately from household waste. For more information about battery replacement services, go to www.apple.com/batteries/replacements.html. Battery Charger EfficiencyAppendix C Safety, Handling, & Support 154 Türkiye Türkiye Cumhuriyeti: EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur. European Union—electronics and battery disposal information The symbol above means that according to local laws and regulations your product and/or its battery shall be disposed of separately from household waste. When this product reaches its end of life, take it to a collection point designated by local authorities. The separate collection and recycling of your product and/or its battery at the time of disposal will help conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment. Union Européenne—informations sur l’élimination Le symbole ci-dessus signifie que, conformément aux lois et réglementations locales, vous devez jeter votre produit et/ou sa batterie séparément des ordures ménagères. Lorsque ce produit arrive en fin de vie, apportez-le à un point de collecte désigné par les autorités locales. La collecte séparée et le recyclage de votre produit et/ou de sa batterie lors de sa mise au rebut aideront à préserver les ressources naturelles et à s’assurer qu’il est recyclé de manière à protéger la santé humaine et l’environnement. Europäische Union—Informationen zur Entsorgung Das oben aufgeführte Symbol weist darauf hin, dass dieses Produkt und/oder die damit verwendete Batterie den geltenden gesetzlichen Vorschriften entsprechend und vom Hausmüll getrennt entsorgt werden muss. Geben Sie dieses Produkt zur Entsorgung bei einer offiziellen Sammelstelle ab. Durch getrenntes Sammeln und Recycling werden die Rohstoffreserven geschont und es ist sichergestellt, dass beim Recycling des Produkts und/oder der Batterie alle Bestimmungen zum Schutz von Gesundheit und Umwelt eingehalten werden. Unione Europea—informazioni per lo smaltimento Il simbolo qui sopra significa che, in base alle leggi e alle normative locali, il prodotto e/o la sua batteria dovrebbero essere riciclati separatamente dai rifiuti domestici. Quando il prodotto diventa inutilizzabile, portalo nel punto di raccolta stabilito dalle autorità locali. La raccolta separata e il riciclaggio del prodotto e/o della sua batteria al momento dello smaltimento aiutano a conservare le risorse naturali e assicurano che il riciclaggio avvenga nel rispetto della salute umana e dell’ambiente. Europeiska unionen—information om kassering Symbolen ovan betyder att produkten och/eller dess batteri enligt lokala lagar och bestämmelser inte får kastas tillsammans med hushållsavfallet. När produkten har tjänat ut måste den tas till en återvinningsstation som utsetts av lokala myndigheter. Genom att låta den uttjänta produkten och/eller dess batteri tas om hand för återvinning hjälper du till att spara naturresurser och skydda hälsa och miljö.Appendix C Safety, Handling, & Support 155 Brasil: Informações sobre descarte e reciclagem O símbolo acima indica que este produto e/ou sua bateria não devem ser descartadas no lixo doméstico. Quando decidir descartar este produto e/ou sua bateria, faça-o de acordo com as leis e diretrizes ambientais locais. Para informações sobre o programa de reciclagem da Apple, pontos de coleta e telefone de informações, visite www.apple.com/br/environment. Apple and the environment At Apple, we recognize our responsibility to minimize the environmental impacts of our operations and products. For more information, go to www.apple.com/environment.KApple Inc. © 2012 Apple Inc. All rights reserved. Apple, the Apple logo, AirPlay, AirPort, AirPort Express, AirPort Extreme, Aperture, Apple TV, Cover Flow, FaceTime, Finder, iBooks, iCal, iLife, iMovie, iPad, iPhone, iPhoto, iPod, iPod touch, iSight, iTunes, Keynote, Mac, Mac OS, Numbers, OS X, Pages, Passbook, Safari, Siri, Spotlight, Time Capsule, and the Works with iPhone logo are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. AirPrint, EarPods, Flyover, Guided Access, iMessage, the Made for iPhone logo, and Multi-Touch are trademarks of Apple Inc. Apple Store, Genius, iAd, iCloud, iTunes Extras, iTunes Plus, and iTunes Store are service marks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. App Store, iBookstore, and iTunes Match are service marks of Apple Inc. IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license. NIKE and the Swoosh Design are trademarks of NIKE, Inc. and its affiliates, and are used under license. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Apple Inc. is under license. Adobe and Photoshop are trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the U.S. and/or other countries. Other company and product names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective companies. Mention of third-party products is for informational purposes only and constitutes neither an endorsement nor a recommendation. Apple assumes no responsibility with regard to the performance or use of these products. All understandings, agreements, or warranties, if any, take place directly between the vendors and the prospective users. Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Apple is not responsible for printing or clerical errors. 019-2344/2012-09 iPod touch Guide des fonctionnalités2 1 Table des matières Chapitre 1 4 Démarrage 4 Éléments nécessaires 4 Configuration de l’iPod touch 5 Obtention de musique, de vidéos et d’autre contenu sur l’iPod touch 10 Déconnexion de l’iPod touch de votre ordinateur Chapitre 2 11 Notions élémentaires 11 Vue d’ensemble de l’iPod touch 13 Menu principal 16 Boutons et écran tactile de l’iPod touch 22 Connexion à Internet 23 Recharge de la batterie 24 Entretien de l’iPod touch Chapitre 3 25 Musique et vidéo 25 Synchronisation de contenu à partir de votre bibliothèque iTunes 27 Lecture de musique 33 Visionnage de vidéos 36 Réglage d’une minuterie de veille 36 Modification des boutons de l’écran Musique Chapitre 4 37 Photos 37 Synchronisation de photos à partir de votre ordinateur 38 Visionnage de photos 40 Utilisation d’une photo comme fond d’écran Chapitre 5 42 iTunes Wi-Fi Music Store 42 Parcours et recherche 45 Achat de morceaux et d’albums 46 Synchronisation du contenu acheté 47 Vérification des achats 47 Modification des informations de votre compte iTunes StoreTable des matières 3 Chapitre 6 48 Applications 48 Safari 53 Calendrier 56 Courrier 62 Contacts 64 YouTube 67 Bourse 68 Plans 73 Météo 74 Horloge 76 Calculette 77 Notes Chapitre 7 78 Réglages 78 Wi-Fi 79 Luminosité 80 Général 84 Musique 85 Vidéo 85 Photos 86 Courrier 88 Safari 89 Contacts 90 Restauration ou transfert des réglages de votre iPod touch Annexe A 91 Conseils et dépannage 91 Suggestions à caractère général 95 Mise à jour et restauration du logiciel de l’iPod touch 96 Utilisation des fonctionnalités d’accessibilité de l’iPod touch Annexe B 97 En savoir plus, service et assistance1 4 1 Démarrage Éléments nécessaires Pour utiliser l’iPod touch, vous avez besoin des éléments suivants :  Un Mac ou un PC avec un port USB 2.0 et l’un des systèmes d’exploitation suivants :  Mac OS X version 10.4.10 ou ultérieure  Windows XP Édition familiale ou Professionnel avec Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur  Windows Vista Édition Familiale Premium, Professionnel, Entreprise ou Édition Intégrale  iTunes 7.6 ou ultérieur, disponible à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/itunes  Un compte iTunes Store (pour acheter de la musique en mode Wi-Fi)  Une connexion Internet Configuration de l’iPod touch Avant de pouvoir vous servir des fonctionnalités qu’offrent l’iPod touch, vous devez utiliser iTunes pour configurer l’iPod touch. Vous avez également la possibilité d’enregistrer l’iPod touch et de créer un compte iTunes Store (disponible dans certains pays) si vous n’en possédez pas déjà un. Configuration de l’iPod touch 1 Téléchargez et installez la dernière version d’iTunes à la page www.apple.com/fr/itunes. 2 Connectez votre iPod touch à un port USB 2.0 de votre Mac ou PC à l’aide du câble fourni. · Pour éviter toute blessure, lisez toutes les instructions relatives au fonctionnement reprises dans ce guide et les informations portant sur la sécurité mentionnées dans le Guide d’informations importantes sur le produit accessible à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/support/manuals/ipod, avant d’utiliser votre iPod touch.Chapitre 1 Démarrage 5 Le port USB de la majorité des claviers ne fournit pas une alimentation suffisante. Sauf si votre clavier dispose d’un port USB 2.0 à forte alimentation, vous devez connecter votre iPod touch à un port USB 2.0 de votre ordinateur. 3 Suivez les instructions à l’écran dans iTunes pour configurer l’iPod touch et synchroniser votre musique, vos vidéos, vos photos et vos autres contenus. Votre ordinateur doit être connecté à Internet. Par défaut, iTunes synchronise automatiquement avec votre iPod touch tous les morceaux et toutes les vidéos de votre bibliothèque iTunes. Si vous avez plus de contenu dans votre bibliothèque que ne peut contenir votre iPod touch, iTunes vous alerte en indiquant qu’il ne peut synchroniser votre contenu. Vous devez alors utiliser iTunes pour sélectionner la partie de votre contenu musical, vidéo ou autre à synchroniser. Les sections suivantes vous indiquent comment procéder. Obtention de musique, de vidéos et d’autre contenu sur l’iPod touch Grâce à son son excellent et à son stupéfiant affichage écran large de 3,5 pouces, l’iPod touch vous permet de profiter de morceaux de musique, de vidéos, de photos et de beaucoup plus. Pour mettre du contenu multimédia et autre sur votre iPod touch, connectez l’iPod touch à votre ordinateur et utilisez iTunes pour synchroniser votre bibliothèque iTunes et d’autres informations présentes sur votre ordinateur.6 Chapitre 1Démarrage Vous pouvez régler iTunes de manière à synchroniser certains ou tous les éléments suivants :  Musique et livres audio.  Films.  Émissions de télévision.  Podcasts.  Photos.  Contacts (noms, numéros de téléphone, adresses, adresses électroniques, etc.).  Calendriers (rendez-vous et événements).  Réglages de compte de messagerie.  Signets de pages web. La musique, les films, les émissions de télévision et les podcasts sont synchronisés à partir de votre bibliothèque iTunes. Si vous n’avez pas encore de contenu dans iTunes, l’iTunes Store (qui fait partie d’iTunes et est disponible dans certains pays) facilite l’achat de contenu ou l’abonnement à du contenu, et son téléchargement sur iTunes. Vous pouvez également placer de la musique dans iTunes à partir de vos CD. Pour en savoir plus sur iTunes et l’iTunes Store, ouvrez iTunes et choisissez Aide > Aide iTunes. Les photos, contacts, calendriers et signets de pages web sont synchronisés à partir d’applications situées sur votre ordinateur, comme indiqué ci-dessous. Les réglages de compte de messagerie ne se synchronisent que depuis l’application de messagerie électronique de votre ordinateur vers votre iPod touch. Cela vous permet de personnaliser vos comptes de messagerie sur l’iPod touch sans influer pour autant les réglages de compte de messagerie instaurés sur votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez régler l’iPod touch pour qu’il ne synchronise qu’une partie du contenu de votre ordinateur. Par exemple, si vous souhaitez synchroniser certaines listes de lecture, le plus récent film non visionné ou les plus récents épisodes de vos émissions de télévision préférées, ou tous les podcasts non lus. Grâce aux réglages de synchronisation, il est facile de n’obtenir sur votre iPod touch que le contenu souhaité. Vous pouvez ajuster vos réglages de synchronisation chaque fois que l’iPod touch est connecté à votre ordinateur. Important :vous ne pouvez pas connecter et synchroniser plus qu’un seul iPod à la fois. Déconnectez-en un avant d’en connecter un autre. Vous devez toujours avoir ouvert une session avec votre propre compte utilisateur sur l’ordinateur avant de connecter l’iPod touch. Sur un PC,si vous synchronisez plus d’un iPod avec le même compte utilisateur, utilisez les mêmes réglages de synchronisation pour chacun d’entre eux.Chapitre 1 Démarrage 7 Synchronisation de l’iPod touch Utilisez les volets de réglage de l’iPod touch dans iTunes pour indiquer le contenu iTunes et les autres informations que vous souhaitez synchroniser avec l’iPod touch. Synchronisation de l’iPod touch 1 Connectez l’iPod touch à votre ordinateur et ouvrez iTunes (s’il ne s’est pas ouvert automatiquement). Le port USB de la majorité des claviers ne fournit pas une alimentation suffisante. Vous devez connecter votre iPod touch à un port USB 2.0 de votre ordinateur, sauf si votre clavier dispose d’un port USB 2.0 à forte alimentation. 2 Sélectionnez l’iPod touch dans liste des sources d’iTunes (au-dessous d’Appareils, sur la gauche). 3 Ajustez les réglages de synchronisation dans chacun des volets de réglage. 4 Cliquez sur Appliquer dans le coint inférieur droit de l’écran. Les sections suivantes offrent un aperçu de chacun des volets de réglage de l’iPod touch. Pour plus de renseignements, ouvrez iTunes et choisissez iTunes > Aide iTunes.8 Chapitre 1Démarrage Volet Résumé Sélectionnez « Ouvrir iTunes à la connexion de cet iPod » pour qu’iTunes s’ouvre et synchronise automatiquement l’iPod touch chaque fois que vous le connectez à votre ordinateur. Désélectionnez cette option si vous souhaitez ne synchroniser qu’en cliquant le bouton Synchroniser d’iTunes. Pour en savoir plus sur la manière d’éviter la synchronisation automatique, consultez la page 10. Sélectionnez « Ne synchroniser que les morceaux et vidéos cochés » si vous ne souhaitez synchroniser que les éléments cochés de votre bibliothèque iTunes. Sélectionnez « Gérer manuellement la musique et les vidéos » pour désactiver la synchronisation dans les volets de réglage Musique, Films et Émissions de télévision. Volets Musique, Films, Émissions de télévision et Podcasts Utilisez ces volets pour indiquer le contenu de la bibliothèque iTunes que vous souhaitez synchroniser. Vous pouvez synchroniser l’intégralité de votre musique, vos films, vos émissions de télévision et vos podcasts, ou ne sélectionner que les listes de lecture et les élé- ments spécifiques que vous souhaitez obtenir sur votre iPod touch. Les livres audio et les clips vidéo de musique sont synchronisés avec la musique. Si vous désirez visionner des films loués sur l’iPod touch, transférez-les sur votre iPod touch par le biais de la sous-fenêtre Films dans iTunes. Si l’iPod touch ne dispose pas de suffisamment d’espace pour tout le contenu que vous avez indiqué, iTunes vous demande si vous souhaitez créer une liste de lecture spéciale et la synchroniser avec l’iPod touch. iTunes remplit alors aléatoirement la liste de lecture en question. Volet Photos Vous pouvez synchroniser des photos à partir d’iPhoto 4.0.3 ou ultérieur sur un Mac, ou à partir d’Adobe Photoshop Album 2.0 ou ultérieur ou d’Adobe Photoshop Elements 3.0 ou ultérieur sur un PC. Vous pouvez également synchroniser des photos à partir de tout dossier de votre ordinateur qui contient des images. Volet Infos Le volet Info vous permet de configurer les réglages de synchronisation de vos contacts, calendriers et signets de navigateur web. Contacts Vous pouvez synchroniser vos contacts avec des applications telles que Carnet d’adresses Mac OS X, Microsoft Entourage, et le carnet d’adresses Yahoo! sur un Mac, ou avec le carnet d’adresses Yahoo!, le Carnet d’adresses de Windows (Outlook Express) ou Microsoft Outlook 2003 ou 2007 sur PC. (Dans le cas du Mac, vous pouvez synchroniser vos contacts sur votre computer à l’aide de plusieurs applications. Sur un PC, vous ne pouvez synchroniser vos contacts qu’avec une seule application.)Chapitre 1 Démarrage 9 Si vous synchronisez avec le carnet d’adresses Yahoo! , vous avez seulement besoin de cliquer sur Configurer pour saisir vos nouvelles informations de connexion lorsque vous changez de nom d’utilisateur ou de mot de passe Yahoo! après avoir réglé la synchronisation. Remarque :la synchronisation ne supprime dans le carnet d’adresses Yahoo! aucun contact contenant un identifiant Messenger, même si vous avez supprimé le contact de votre carnet d’adresses sur votre ordinateur. Pour supprimer un contact associé à un identifiant Messenger, ouvrez une session sur votre compte Yahoo! en ligne et supprimez le contact à l’aide du carnet d’adresses Yahoo! en ligne. Calendriers Vous pouvez synchroniser des calendriers à partir d’applications telles qu’iCal et Microsoft Entourage sur un Mac ou Microsoft Outlook sur un PC. (Sur un Mac, vous pouvez synchroniser des calendriers sur votre ordinateur avec plus d’une application. Sur un PC, vous ne pouvez synchroniser vos calendriers qu’avec une seule application.) Comptes de messagerie Vous pouvez synchroniser les réglages de compte de messagerie depuis l’application Mail sur Mac et depuis Microsoft Outlook 2003 ou 2007 ou Outlook Express sur PC. Les réglages de compte ne sont transférés que depuis votre ordinateur vers l’iPod touch. Les modifications que vous apportez à un compte de messagerie sur l’iPod touch n’affectent donc en rien le compte correspondant sur votre ordinateur. Le mot de passe de votre compte de messagerie Yahoo! n’est pas enregistré sur votre ordinateur. Si vous synchronisez un compte Yahoo!, vous devez dans ce cas saisir le mot de passe sur l’iPod touch. Dans le menu principal, choisissez Réglages > Courrier, choisissez votre compte Yahoo!, puis saisissez votre mot de passe dans le champ approprié. Navigateur web Vous pouvez synchroniser des signets à partir de Safari sur un Mac, ou de Safari ou Microsoft Internet Explorer sur un PC. Avancé Ces options vous permettent de remplacer lors de la prochaine synchronisation les informations qui se trouvent sur l’iPod touch par celles qui se trouvent sur votre computer.10 Chapitre 1Démarrage Prévention de la synchronisation automatique Vous pouvez souhaiter empêcher l’iPod touch de synchroniser automatiquement, par exemple parce que vous préférez ajouter manuellement des éléments ou lorsque vous connectez l’iPod touch à un ordinateur autre que celui avec lequel vous synchronisez habituellement. Désactivation de la synchronisation automatique pour l’iPod touch m Connectez l’iPod touch à votre ordinateur, puis sélectionnez l’iPod touch dans la liste des sources d’iTunes (au-dessous d’Appareils,sur la gauche) et cliquez sur l’onglet Résumé. Désélectionnez « Ouvrir iTunes à la connexion de cet iPod ». Vous pouvez toujours utiliser iTunes pour synchroniser manuellement en cliquant sur le bouton Synchroniser. Prévention unique de la synchronisation automatique sans modification des réglages m Ouvrez iTunes. Lorsque vous connectez l’iPod touch à votre ordinateur, appuyez sur les touches Commande-Option et maintenez-les enfoncées (si vous utilisez un Mac) ou Maj-Contrôle (si vous utilisez un PC) jusqu’à ce que l’iPod touch apparaisse dans la liste des sources d’iTunes (au-dessous d’Appareils, sur la gauche). Synchronisation manuelle m Sélectionnez l’iPod touch dans la liste des sources d’iTunes, puis cliquez sur Synchroniser dans le coin inférieur droit de la fenêtre. En alternative,si vous avez modifié les réglages de synchronisation, cliquez sur Appliquer. Déconnexion de l’iPod touch de votre ordinateur Sauf si l’iPod touch est en cours de synchronisation avec votre ordinateur, vous pouvez l’en déconnecter à tout moment. Lorsque l’iPod touch se synchronise avec votre ordinateur, il indique « Synchronisation en cours ». Si vous déconnectez l’iPod touch avant qu’il ait terminé la synchronisation, il se peut que certaines données ne soient pas transférées. Lorsque l’iPod touch termine la synchronisation, iTunes affiche « Synchronisation de l’iPod terminée ». Pour annuler une synchronisation de manière à pouvoir déconnecter l’iPod touch, faites glisser le curseur « glisser pour annuler ».2 11 2 Notions élémentaires Vue d’ensemble de l’iPod touch Bouton de marche/veille Port écouteurs Connecteur Dock Antenne Wi-Fi Bouton principal Écran tactile Icônes des applications Barre d’état12 Chapitre 2 Notions élémentaires Icônes d’état Les icônes de la barre d’état située en haut de l’écran fournissent des informations sur l’iPod touch : Élément Utilisation Écouteurs stéréo Écouter de la musique et des vidéos. Câble connecteur Dock vers USB Synchroniser et recharger l’iPod touch en le branchant sur votre ordinateur à l’aide du câble, ou pour le recharger en le branchant sur l’adaptateur secteur (vendu séparément). Le câble est utilisable avec le socle vendu en option, ou peut être directement branché sur l’iPod touch. Socle Faire tenir l’iPod touch debout pour visualiser des vidéos ou des diaporamas de photos. Chiffon de nettoyage Essuyer l’écran de l’iPod touch. Socle Écouteurs stéréo Câble connecteur Dock vers USB Chiffon de nettoyage iPod Icône d’état Signification Wi-Fi Indique que l’iPod touch est connecté à Internet à travers un réseau Wi-Fi. Le nombre de barres est proportionnel à la qualité de la connexion. Voir la page 22. ¥ Verrouillage Indique que l’iPod touch est verrouillé. Voir la page 16. Lecture Indique qu’un morceau est en cours de lecture. Voir la page 27. Alarme Indique qu’une alarme est réglée. Voir la page 75. Batterie Indique la charge de la batterie ou l’état de son rechargement en cours. Voir la page 23.Chapitre 2 Notions élémentaires 13 Menu principal Appuyez sur le bouton du menu principal pour accéder à tout moment aux applications sur l’iPod touch. Touchez l’icône de n’importe quelle application pour démarrer. Applications iPod touch Les applications suivantes sont fournies avec l’iPod touch : Musique Écouter des morceaux, des podcasts ou des livres audio. Vidéos Visionner des films, des clips vidéo, des podcasts vidéo et des programmes télévisés. Photos Visualiser des photos transférées depuis votre ordinateur, les présenter en mode Portrait ou Paysage, zoomer sur une photo, visionner un diaporama, utiliser une photo quelconque comme fond d’écran. iTunes Effectuer des recherches dans le catalogue musical de l’iTunes Wi-Fi Music Store ou parcourir, écouter des extraits et acheter des morceaux parmi les nouveautés, les dix meilleures ventes de morceaux et d’albums, etc.1 Dans certains cafés Starbucks2 , connaître le morceau à l’écoute pour l’acheter en un instant, parcourir d’autres morceaux des collections Starbucks, en écouter des extraits et les acheter. Safari Accéder à des sites web à travers une connexion Wi-Fi, avec la possibilité de faire pivoter l’iPod touch pour un affichage en mode Paysage, double-toucher pour agrandir ou réduire l’affichage (Safari adaptant alors automatiquement les parties de l’écran pour faciliter la lecture), ajouter des Web Clips Safari au menu principal pour accéder rapidement à vos sites web préférés. Calendrier Afficher votre calendrier iCal, Microsoft Entourage ou Microsoft Outlook synchronisé depuis votre ordinateur. Courrier Envoyer et recevoir du courrier électronique à l’aide de vos comptes de messagerie existants (L’iPod touch fonctionne avec les systèmes de messagerie électronique les plus courants, y compris Yahoo! Mail, Google Gmail, AOL et .Mac Mail, ainsi que la plupart des systèmes de messagerie POP3 et IMAP standard.) Contacts Obtenir les informations de vos contacts, synchronisées du Carnet d’adresses de Mac OS X, Yahoo! Windows (Outlook Express) ou Microsoft Outlook, ajouter, modifier ou supprimer des contacts à resynchroniser vers votre ordinateur. YouTube Visionner des vidéos en ligne issues de YouTube3 , rechercher des vidéos ou explorer celles les plus visionnées, les plus à jour ou mises en vedette par les utilisateurs.14 Chapitre 2 Notions élémentaires Personnalisation de la disposition du menu principal Vous pouvez personnaliser la disposition des icônes sur le menu principal, notamment celles du Dock en bas de l’écran. Vous avez la possibilité de les réorganiser sur plusieurs menus principaux. Réorganisation des icônes 1 Touchez et maintenez le contact sur l’icône du menu principal jusqu’à ce que toutes les icônes s’agitent. 2 Réorganisez les icônes en les faisant glisser. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton du menu principal pour enregistrer votre agencement. Vous pouvez aussi ajouter sur le menu principal des liens vers vos pages web favorites. Voir « Ajout de Web Clips Safari au menu principal » à la page 52. Bourse Afficher la cotation de titres choisis, actualisée automatiquement via Internet. Plans Afficher le plan d’une ville, une vue satellite ou hybride de lieux à travers le monde, détailler une carte par un zoom avant, afficher votre localisation approximative, obtenir des itinéraires routiers détaillés et afficher les conditions actualisées du trafic autoroutier, rechercher des professionnels dans la région4 . Météo Connaître la météo du jour et obtenir des prévisions à six jours, Mémoriser les villes de votre choix afin d’afficher à tout moment un bulletin météo succinct. Horloge Afficher l’heure qu’il est dans des villes du monde entier (vous pouvez créer des horloges pour les villes de votre choix), régler une ou plusieurs alarmes, utiliser le chronomè- tre ou régler un compte à rebours. Calculette Ajouter, soustraire, multiplier et diviser. Notes Prendre des notes à tout moment (pense-bête, listes de courses, idées), et les envoyer par courrier électronique. Réglages Ajuster tous les réglages de l’iPod touch de façon centralisée, accéder à des réseaux Wi-Fi, définir votre fond d’écran et la luminosité de l’écran, ainsi que les réglages relatifs à la musique, aux vidéos, aux photos, etc., activer le verrouillage automatique et un code de sécurité. 1 N’est pas disponible partout 2 Disponible aux États-Unis uniquement 3 N’est pas disponible partout 4 Certaines fonctionnalités ou certains services ne sont pas disponibles partoutChapitre 2 Notions élémentaires 15 Création de menus principaux supplémentaires m Lors de la réorganisation de vos icônes, vous pouvez faire glisser un bouton vers le bord de l’écran de façon à ce qu’un nouvel écran apparaisse. Feuilletez la page écran afin de revenir à l’écran d’origine et faire glisser d’autres icônes vers le nouvel écran. Vous pouvez créer jusqu’à neuf écrans. Le nombre de points vers le bas indique le nombre d’écrans dont vous disposez et lequel vous visualisez. Passage à un autre menu principal m Feuilletez vers la gauche ou la droite Réinitialisation de votre menu principal à la disposition par défaut m Choisissez Réglages > Général > Réinitialiser, puis touchez « Réinitialiser le menu principal ».16 Chapitre 2 Notions élémentaires Boutons et écran tactile de l’iPod touch Quelques boutons simples et un écran tactile haute résolution ont été élaborés pour faire de l’iPod touch un produit intuitif. Verrouillage de l’iPod touch, et allumage et arrêt de l’appareil Si vous n’utilisez pas l’iPod touch, vous pouvez le verrouiller. En cas de verrouillage, l’iPod touch ne répond pas si vous touchez son écran. Par défaut, l’iPod touch se verrouille automatiquement si vous ne touchez pas pendant une minute son écran. Le verrouillage de l’iPod touch n’entraîne pas l’arrêt de la lecture de la musique. Vous pouvez par conséquent verrouiller l’iPod touch et continuer à écouter votre musique. Pour afficher temporairement les commandes de lecture si l’iPod touch est verrouillé, double-touchez le bouton du menu principal. Pour en savoir plus sur le verrouillage de l’iPod touch à l’aide d’un code, reportez-vous à la rubrique « Verrouillage par code » à la page 81. Bouton de marche/veille Pour Procédez ainsi Verrouiller l’iPod touch Appuyez sur le bouton de veille/réactivation. Déverrouiller l’iPod touch Appuyez sur le bouton du menu principal ou sur le bouton de veille/réactivation, puis faites glisser le curseur. Éteindre complètement l’iPod touch Maintenez le bouton de veille/réactivation enfoncé pendant quelques secondes jusqu’à ce que le curseur rouge apparaisse, puis faites glisser le curseur. Allumer l’iPod touch Maintenez le bouton de veille/réactivation enfoncé jusqu’à ce que le logo Apple apparaisse. Afficher les commandes de lecture si l’iPod touch est verrouillé Double-touchez le bouton du menu principal.Chapitre 2 Notions élémentaires 17 Utilisation de l’écran tactile Les commandes de l’écran tactile changent de façon dynamique en fonction de la tâche à accomplir. m Touchez une application pour l’ouvrir. m Appuyez sur le bouton du menu principal situé en dessous de l’affichage pour revenir à tout moment au menu où se trouvent toutes les applications. m Faites défiler verticalement l’affichage en faisant glisser votre doigt. Utiliser ainsi le doigt pour faire défiler l’affichage n’entraîne pas la sélection ou l’activation d’éléments à l’écran.18 Chapitre 2 Notions élémentaires m Feuilletez pour faire défiler l’affichage rapidement. Vous pouvez attendre que le défilement s’achève ou toucher n’importe où sur l’écran pour l’interrompre. Toucher ou tapoter ainsi pour interrompre le défilement n’entraîne pas la sélection ou l’activation d’éléments à l’écran. m Certaines listes présentent un index sur le côté droit. Touchez une lettre pour passer directement aux éléments commençant par la lettre en question. Faites glisser le doigt le long de l’index pour faire rapidement défiler la liste. m Touchez un élément de la liste pour le choisir. Selon la liste, cela permet d’accomplir diverses opérations, telles qu’ouvrir une nouvelle liste, lire un morceau ou afficher les données d’une personne à contacter. m Le bouton Retour situé dans le coin supérieur gauche affiche le nom de la liste précé- dente. Touchez le bouton pour revenir en arrière. IndexChapitre 2 Notions élémentaires 19 m En cas de visualisation de photos, de pages web, de courriers électroniques ou de cartes, vous pouvez effectuer un zoom avant et arrière. Rapprochez ou éloignez vos doigts pour contrôler ainsi le zoom. Concernant les photos et les pages web, vous pouvez double-toucher (tapoter deux fois rapidement) une photo pour l’agrandir, puis la double-toucher à nouveau pour la réduire. Dans le cas de cartes routières, double-touchez pour effectuer un zoom avant et touchez l’écran une seule fois avec deux doigts pour effectuer un zoom arrière. Clavier à l’écran Le clavier à l’écran vous permet de saisir du texte, par exemple des coordonnées. Le clavier intelligent suggère automatiquement des corrections lors de votre saisie (dans certaines langues seulement), afin de contribuer à éviter les fautes d’orthographe. L’iPod touch offre des claviers pour plusieurs langues et prend en charge les formats de clavier suivants :  QWERTY  QWERTZ  AZERTY  QZERTY  Japonais IME Reportez-vous à la rubrique « Clavier » à la page 82 pour en savoir plus sur l’activation de claviers dans différentes langues et sur les autres réglages de clavier.20 Chapitre 2 Notions élémentaires Saisie de texte Commencez par taper seulement avec votre index. En gagnant en dextérité, vous pourrez par la suite taper plus rapidement avec vos pouces. 1 Touchez un champ de texte, par exemple dans une note ou un nouveau contact, pour activer le clavier. 2 Touchez les touches du clavier selon vos besoins. Lors de votre saisie, chaque lettre apparaît au-dessus de votre doigt. Si vous touchez la mauvaise touche, vous pouvez faire glisser votre doigt jusqu’à la bonne. La lettre n’est en effet pas prise en compte tant que vous ne perdez pas le contact de votre doigt de l’écran. Pour Procédez ainsi Taper en majuscules Touchez la touche Maj avant de toucher une lettre. Saisir rapidement un point et un espace Double-touchez la barre d’espace. Activer le verrouillage majuscules Activez le verrouillage majuscules (reportez-vous à la page 82), puis double-touchez la touche Maj . La touche Maj devient bleue et toutes les lettres que vous tapez s’affichent en majuscules. Touchez à nouveau la touche Maj pour déverrouiller les majuscules. Saisir des chiffres, des signes de ponctuation ou des symboles Touchez la touche Nombre . Touchez la touche Symbole pour accéder aux signes de ponctuation et aux symboles complémentaires.Chapitre 2 Notions élémentaires 21 Validation ou rejet de propositions de correction L’iPod touch propose un dictionnaire pour l’anglais standard, l’anglais (Royaume-Uni), le français standard, le français (du Canada), l’allemand, le japonais, l’espagnol, l’italien, et le néerlandais. Le dictionnaire approprié s’active automatiquement en sélectionnant un clavier sur l’iPod touch. iPod touch utilise le dictionnaire correspondant pour suggérer une correction ou compléter le mot que vous saisissez. Si vous utilisez un clavier ne proposant pas de dictionnaire, l’iPod touch ne suggère alors rien. Vous n’avez pas besoin d’interrompre votre frappe pour accepter le mot proposé.  Pour utiliser le mot suggéré, tapez un espace, un signe de ponctuation ou le caractère Retour.  Pour refuser le mot proposé, finissez de taper le mot souhaité puis touchez la croix pour passer outre la suggestion avant de taper autre chose. Chaque fois que vous rejetez une proposition pour un même mot, l’iPod touch tend à accepter votre mot. Modification de texte m Touchez et maintenez le contact pour obtenir l’agrandissement de l’affichage, puis faites glisser le doigt pour positionner le point d’insertion. Mot suggéré22 Chapitre 2 Notions élémentaires Connexion à Internet iPod touch se connecte automatiquement à Internet par le biais de réseaux Wi-Fi . iPod touch peut accéder aux réseaux AirPort et autres réseaux Wi-Fi domestiques, professionnels ou aux points d’accès Wi-Fi de par le monde. En accédant à un réseau Wi-Fi connecté à Internet, l’iPod touch se connecte automatiquement à Internet lorsque vous ouvrez Courrier, Safari, YouTube, Bourse, Plans, Météo ou le magasin en ligne iTunes Wi-Fi Music Store. De nombreux réseaux Wi-Fi sont proposés gratuitement. Certains réseaux sont payants. Pour accéder dans ce cas à un point d’accès dont le réseau Wi-Fi est payant, vous pouvez généralement ouvrir une page web dans Safari afin de vous abonner. Accès à un réseau Wi-Fi Les réglages Wi-Fi vous permettent d’activer la fonction Wi-Fi et d’accéder aux réseaux Wi-Fi. Activation de la fonction Wi-Fi m Choisissez Réglages > Wi-Fi, puis activez la fonction. Accès à un réseau Wi-Fi m Choisissez Réglages > Wi-Fi, patientez quelques instants pendant que l’iPod touch détecte les réseaux dans le rayon de détection, puis sélectionnez un réseau. Le cas échéant, tapez un mot de passe et touchez Rejoindre (les réseaux qui nécessitent un mot de passe présentent une icône représentant un cadenas). Une fois que vous avez accédé manuellement un réseau Wi-Fi, l’iPod touch s’y connecte automatiquement chaque fois que le réseau est dans le rayon de détection. Si plusieurs réseaux déjà utilisés sont à portée, l’iPod touch rejoint le dernier utilisé. Lorsque l’iPod touch est connecté à un réseau Wi-Fi, l’icône Wi-Fi située dans la barre d’état en haut de l’écran affiche l’intensité du signal de connexion. Le nombre de barres qui s’affiche est proportionnel à la qualité de la connexion. Pour en savoir plus sur l’accès aux réseaux Wi-Fi et à la configuration des réglages Wi-Fi, reportez-vous à la page 78.Chapitre 2 Notions élémentaires 23 Recharge de la batterie L’iPod touch est doté d’une batterie interne rechargeable. Recharge de la batterie et synchronisation de l’iPod touch m Branchez l’iPod touch sur votre ordinateur (directement, et non sur le clavier de l’ordinateur) à l’aide du câble fourni. Remarque :si l’iPod touch est branché sur un ordinateur éteint, en veille ou dont l’activité est suspendue, il se peut que la batterie de l’iPod touch se décharge plutôt que de se recharger. Une icône située dans le coin supérieur droit de l’écran indique l’état de charge de la batterie. Si vous chargez la batterie pendant qu’une synchronisation est en cours ou tout en utilisant l’iPod touch, l’opération peut prendre plus de temps . Vous pouvez aussi recharger l’iPod touch à l’aide de adaptateur secteur USB Apple, vendu séparément. AVERTISSEMENT :pour connaître toutes les informations importantes relatives au rechargement de la batterie de l’iPod touch en toute sécurité, consultez le Guide d’informations importantes sur le produit accessible à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/support/manuals/ipod. En charge Rechargé24 Chapitre 2 Notions élémentaires Important :si la charge de la batterie de l’iPod touch est particulièrement faible, il se peut que l’une des images suivantes vous informe que l’iPod touch doit être rechargé pendant un délai pouvant aller jusqu’à dix minutes avant de pouvoir l’utiliser. Au cas où l’alimentation de l’iPod touch est extrêmement faible, il se peut que l’écran reste éteint pendant un temps pouvant s’étendre jusqu’à deux minutes avant que l’une des images de faible charge apparaisse. Le nombre de cycles de recharge des batteries rechargeables reste limité et il peut s’avérer nécessaire de les remplacer. La batterie de l’iPod touch n’est pas prévue pour être remplacé par l’utilisateur. Elle doit par conséquent être remplacée uniquement par un réparateur agréé. Pour en savoir plus, rendez-vous à l’adresse : www.apple.com/fr/batteries Entretien de l’iPod touch Utilisez le chiffon de nettoyage fourni avec iPod touch pour nettoyer en douceur l’écran en verre et le boîtier. Vous pouvez également vous servir d’un chiffon doux, légèrement humide et non pelucheux. Débranchez et éteignez l’iPod touch (maintenez pour ce faire le bouton de veille/ réactivation enfoncé, puis faites glisser le curseur rouge sur l’écran). Évitez que toute humidité pénètre dans les orifices de l’appareil. N’utilisez pas de produit pour le nettoyage des vitres, de produit d’entretien ménager, d’aérosol, de solvant, d’alcool, d’ammoniac ou d’abrasif pour nettoyer iPod touch. ou3 25 3 Musique et vidéo Touchez Musique pour écouter des morceaux, des livres audio et des podcasts, ou touchez Vidéos pour regarder des émissions de télévision, des films et d’autres vidéos. L’iPod touch se synchronise avec iTunes sur votre ordinateur pour obtenir des morceaux, des films, des émissions de télévision et d’autres contenus que vous avez rassemblé dans votre bibliothèque iTunes. Pour en savoir plus sur l’utilisation d’iTunes pour obtenir de la musique et d’autres élé- ments multimédias sur votre ordinateur, ouvrez iTunes et choisissez Aide > Aide iTunes. Synchronisation de contenu à partir de votre bibliothèque iTunes Si vous avez activé la synchronisation, iTunes synchronise automatiquement le contenu de votre bibliothèque iTunes vers l’iPod touch chaque fois que vous connectez celui-ci à votre ordinateur. iTunes vous permet de synchroniser l’intégralité de votre contenu multimédia, ou des morceaux, des films, des vidéos ou des podcasts spécifiques. Par exemple, vous pouvez souhaiter synchroniser certaines listes de lecture de musique, le plus récent film non visionné et les trois plus récents épisodes de votre émission de télévision préférée.26 Chapitre 3 Musique et vidéo S’il y a plus de morceaux dans votre bibliothèque iTunes que ne peut en contenir votre iPod touch, iTunes vous demande si vous souhaitez créer une liste de lecture spéciale et la régler pour une synchronisation avec l’iPod touch. iTunes remplit alors aléatoirement la liste de lecture en question. Vous pouvez ajouter des morceaux à la liste de lecture ou en supprimer, puis la synchroniser. Si vous avez réglé iTunes pour synchroniser plus de morceaux, vidéos et autres contenus que ne peut en contenir votre iPod touch, vous pouvez demander à iTunes de supprimer automatiquement du contenu aléatoire à partir de votre iPod touch de manière à libérer de l’espace, ou vous pouvez interrompre la synchronisation et reconfigurer vos réglages de synchronisation. Lorsque vous synchronisez les podcasts ou les livres audio de votre iPod touch avec ceux de votre ordinateur, à la fois iTunes et l’iPod touch mémorisent l’endroit où vous avez interrompu l’écoute et reprennent la lecture à partir de cette position. Pour plus de renseignements sur la synchronisation de l’iPod touch avec votre bibliothèque iTunes, consultez la section « Obtention de musique, de vidéos et d’autre contenu sur l’iPod touch » à la page 5. Transfert du contenu acheté de l’iPod touch à un autre ordinateur autorisé La musique, la vidéo et les podcasts se synchronisent de votre bibliothèque iTunes à l’iPod touch, mais pas de l’iPod touch à votre bibliothèque iTunes. Cependant, le contenu que vous avez acheté sur l’iPod touch auprès de l’iTunes Wi-Fi Music Store est automatiquement copié à votre bibliothèque iTunes. Vous pouvez également transférer sur un autre ordinateur ou sur la bibliothèque iTunes d’un autre ordinateur autorisé du contenu acheté à l’aide d’iTunes et se trouvant sur l’iPod touch. Transfert de contenu à partir de l’iPod touch et vers un autre ordinateur m Connectez l’iPod touch à l’autre ordinateur. iTunes vous demande si vous souhaitez transférer le contenu acheté. Vous pouvez également connecter l’iPod touch et, dans iTunes, choisir Fichier > Transférer les achats. Pour pouvoir lire le contenu, l’ordinateur doit être autorisé à jouer du contenu à partir de votre compte iTunes. Formats de musique et de vidéo autorisés Seuls les morceaux et les vidéos codés dans des formats gérés par l’iPod touch sont transférés sur l’iPod touch. Pour en savoir plus sur les formats gérés par l’iPod touch, consultez la page 93.Chapitre 3 Musique et vidéo 27 Conversion de vidéos pour l’iPod touch Vous pouvez ajouter à l’ iPod touch des vidéos autres que celles achetées sur iTunes, par exemple des vidéos que vous créez dans iMovie sur un Mac ou des vidéos que vous téléchargez sur Internet. Si vous essayez d’ajouter une vidéo sur l’iPod touch à partir d’iTunes et qu’un message indique que la vidéo ne peut pas être lue sur l’iPod touch, vous pouvez la convertir. Conversion d’une vidéo pour qu’elle soit lisible sur l’iPod touch m Sélectionnez la vidéo dans votre bibliothèque iTunes et choisissez Avancé > « Convertir la sélection pour l’iPod ». Ajoutez ensuite la vidéo convertie à l’iPod touch. Lecture de musique L’affichage multitouche haute résolution fait de l’écoute de morceaux de l’iPod touch une expérience tout aussi visuelle que musicale. Vous pouvez faire défiler vos listes de lecture ou utiliser Cover Flow pour explorer les pochettes de vos albums. Lecture de morceaux, de livres audio et de podcasts Navigation dans votre collection m Touchez Musique puis touchez Listes de lect., Artistes, Morceaux ou Albums. Touchez Plus pour explorer les livres audio, les compilations, les compositeurs, les genres ou les podcasts. Ecoute d’un morceau m Touchez la piste. AVERTISSEMENT :pour connaître toutes les informations importantes relatives au risque de perte auditive, consultez le Guide d’informations importantes sur le produit accessible à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/support/manuals/ipod.28 Chapitre 3 Musique et vidéo Contrôle de la lecture de morceaux Lors de la lecture d’un morceau, l’écran En lecture apparaît : Pour Procédez ainsi : Ajuster le volume Faites glisser le curseur de volume. Mettre en pause un morceau Touchez . Reprendre la lecture Touchez . Redémarrer un morceau ou un chapitre de livre audio ou de podcast Touchez . Passer au morceau ou chapitre de livre audio ou de podcast précé- dent ou suivant Touchez deux fois pour passer au morceau précédent. Touchez pour passer au morceau suivant. Effectuer un retour ou une avance rapide Touchez ou et gardez le doigt dessus. Revenir aux listes d’exploration Touchez . ou balayez vers la droite par dessus la couverture de l’album. Revenir à l’écran En lecture Touchez En lecture. Afficher les pistes de l’album actuel faisant partie de votre collection Touchez . Touchez une piste pour la lire. Afficher les paroles d’un morceau Touchez la couverture de l’album pendant la lecture du morceau. (Les paroles ne s’affichent que si vous les avez ajoutées au morceau par le biais de la fenêtre Infos correspondant au morceau dans iTunes.) Suivant/Avance rapide Lecture/Pause Liste des pistes Écran En lecture Retour Précédent/ Retour rapide VolumeChapitre 3 Musique et vidéo 29 Affichage des commandes de lecture à tout moment Vous pouvez afficher les commandes de lecture à tout moment lorsque vous écoutez de la musique et utilisez une autre application, ou même lorsque l’iPod touch est verrouillé, en double-cliquant le bouton principal . Si l’iPod touch est actif, les commandes de lecture apparaissent par-dessus l’application en cours d’utilisation. Après avoir utilisé les commandes, vous pouvez les fermer ou toucher Musique pour accéder à l’écran En lecture. Si l’iPod touch est verrouillé, les commandes apparaissent à l’écran puis sont automatiquement éliminées lorsque vous avez fini de les utiliser. Commandes supplémentaires m Dans l’écran En lecture, touchez la pochette de l’album. Le commandes de répétition et de lecture aléatoire apparaissent, ainsi que le défileur, le temps écoulé, le temps restant et le numéro du morceau. Les paroles s’affichent également si vous les avez ajoutées au morceau dans iTunes. Pour Procédez ainsi : Régler l’iPod touch pour la répétition de morceaux Touchez . Touchez à nouveau pour régler l’iPod touch de manière à répéter seulement le morceau actuel. = l’iPod touch est réglé de manière à répéter tous les morceaux de l’album ou la liste en cours. = l’iPod touch est réglé de manière à répéter sans arrêt le morceau en cours de lecture. = l’iPod touch n’est pas réglé de manière à répéter les morceaux. Passer à n’importe quel endroit d’un morceau Faites glisser la tête de lecture le long du défileur. Défileur Répétition Aléatoire Tête de lecture30 Chapitre 3 Musique et vidéo Régler l’iPod touch pour le choix aléatoire de morceaux Touchez . Touchez à nouveau pour régler l’iPod touch de manière à jouer les morceaux dans l’ordre. = l’iPod touch est réglé de manière à choisir aléatoirement les morceaux. = l’iPod touch est réglé de manière à lire les morceaux dans l’ordre. Choisir aléatoirement les pistes d’une liste de lecture, d’un album ou de toute autre liste de morceaux Touchez Aléatoire en haut de la liste. Par exemple, pour choisir aléatoirement parmi tous les morceaux de votre iPod touch, choisissez Morceaux > Aléatoire. Que l’iPod touch soit ou non réglé sur la lecture aléatoire, si vous touchez Aléatoire en haut d’une liste des morceaux, l’’iPod touch la lit dans un ordre aléatoire. Pour Procédez ainsi :Chapitre 3 Musique et vidéo 31 Exploration des pochettes d’album en mode Cover Flow Lorsque vous explorez votre musique, vous pouvez faire pivoter l’iPod touch d’un quart de tour pour afficher votre contenu iTunes en mode Cover Flow et explorer votre musique par pochette d’album. Pour Procédez ainsi : Passer en mode Cover Flow Faites pivoter l’iPod touch d’un quart de tour. Parcourir les pochettes d’album Faites glisser ou « feuilletez » vers la gauche ou la droite. Afficher les pistes d’un album Touchez une pochette ou . Pour Procédez ainsi : Lire une piste Touchez la piste. Faites défiler vers le haut ou le bas pour faire défiler les pistes. Revenir à la pochette Touchez la barre de titre ou touchez à nouveau. Lire ou mettre en pause le morceau actuel Touchez ou . 32 Chapitre 3 Musique et vidéo Affichage de toutes les pistes d’un album Affichage de toutes les pistes de l’album contenant le morceau actuel m À partir de l’écran En lecture, touchez . Touchez une piste pour la lire. Touchez la vignette de la pochette d’album pour revenir à l’écran En lecture. En affichage de la liste des pistes, vous pouvez affecter des notes aux morceaux. Vous pouvez utiliser ces notes pour créer dans iTunes des listes de lecture intelligentes qui s’actualisent dynamiquement pour afficher, par exemple, les morceaux auxquels vous avez affecté la note la plus élevée. Affectation d’une note à un morceau m Faites glisser votre doigt sur la barre de classements pour donner au morceau entre zéro et cinq étoiles. Création de listes de lecture directement sur l’iPod touch Création d’une liste de lecture On-The-Go : 1 Touchez Listes de lect. et touchez On-The-Go. 2 Recherchez des morceaux à l’aide des boutons situés au bas de l’écran. Touchez un morceau ou une vidéo pour l’ajouter à la liste de lecture. Touchez Tous les morceaux en haut de toute liste de morceaux pour ajouter tous les morceaux de la liste. 3 Lorsque vous avez fini, touchez Terminé. Lorsque vous créez une liste de lecture On-The-Go puis synchronisez l’iPod touch à votre ordinateur, la liste de lecture est enregistrée dans votre bibliothèque iTunes puis supprimée de l’iPod touch. La première s’appelle « On-The-Go 1 », la seconde « On-The-Go 2 » et ainsi de suite. Pour récupérer une liste de lecture sur l’iPod touch, sélectionnez l’iPod touch dans la liste des sources d’iTunes, cliquez l’onglet Musique puis réglez la liste de lecture pour une synchronisation. Modification d’une liste de lecture On-The-Go : m Touchez Listes de lect., On-The-Go et Modifier, puis effectuez l’une des actions suivantes :  Pour déplacer un morceau vers le haut ou vers le bas dans la liste, faites glisser à côté du morceau. Affichage de la liste des pistes Barre de classement Retour à l’écran En lecture Pistes de l’albumChapitre 3 Musique et vidéo 33  Pour supprimer un morceau de la liste de lecture, touchez à côté du morceau puis touchez Supprimer. Lorsque vous supprimez un morceau d’une liste de lecture On-The-Go, il n’est pas supprimé de l’iPod touch.  Pour effacer l’intégralité d’une liste de lecture, touchez Effacer la liste de lecture.  Pour ajouter plus de morceaux, touchez . Visionnage de vidéos L’iPod touch vous permet de visionner du contenu vidéo comme des films, des clips et des podcasts. Les vidéos sont lues en mode Écran large pour profiter au mieux de l’affichage. Si une vidéo contient des chapitres, vous pouvez passer au chapitre suivant ou précédent ou activer une liste pour lancer la lecture à partir du chapitre de votre choix. Si une vidéo propose plusieurs langues, vous pouvez choisir celle de l’audio ou celle du sous-titrage. Lecture de vidéos sur l’iPod touch Lecture d’une vidéo m Touchez Vidéos puis la vidéo en question. Affichage des commandes de lecture m Touchez l’écran pour afficher les commandes. Touchez à nouveau pour les masquer. Say It Right de Nelly Furtado est disponible sur iTunes pour certains pays. Redémarrer/ Retour rapide Commandes vidéo Tête de lecture Redimensionner Lecture/Pause Avance rapide Volume Défileur Pour Procédez ainsi : Lire ou mettre en pause une vidéo Touchez ou . Augmenter ou diminuer le volume Faites glisser le curseur de volume.34 Chapitre 3 Musique et vidéo Visionnage de films loués Il vous est possible de louer des films depuis l’iTunes Store pour les visionner sur l’iPod touch. iTunes vous permet de les louer et de les transférer directement sur votre iPod touch. (La location de films n’est disponible que pour certains pays ou certaines régions. iTunes 7.6 ou ultérieur est alors requis.) Les films loués ne sont visionnables que pour un temps limité. La période restante pour finir de les regarder apparaît en regard du titre. Les films sont ensuite automatiquement supprimés à leur expiration. Consultez l’iTunes Store pour connaître les délais d’expiration avant de louer un film. Transfert de films loués à l’iPod touch m Connectez l’iPod touch à votre ordinateur. Sélectionnez ensuite votre iPod touch dans la fenêtre d’iTunes (sous Appareils dans la partie de gauche) , cliquez sur Films puis sélectionnez les films loués à transférer. Votre ordinateur doit être connecté à Internet. Redémarrer une vidéo Faites glisser complètement sur la gauche la tête de lecture sur le défileur, ou touchez si la vidéo n’inclut pas de chapitres. Passer au chapitre précédent ou suivant (si proposé) Touchez pour revenir au chapitre précédent. Touchez pour passer au chapitre suivant. Lancer la lecture depuis un chapitre précis Touchez , puis choisissez le chapitre dans la liste. Effectuer un retour ou une avance rapide Touchez ou et gardez le doigt dessus. Passer directement à un point particulier d’une vidéo Faites glisser la tête de lecture le long du défileur. Interrompre une vidéo avant sa fin Touchez Terminé ou appuyez sur le bouton principal . Redimensionner une vidéo de manière à remplir l’écran ou à s’adapter à l’écran Touchez pour que la vidéo remplisse l’écran. Touchez pour qu’elle s’adapte à l’écran. Vous pouvez également double-toucher la vidéo de manière à basculer entre les deux affichages. Lorsque vous redimensionnez une vidéo de manière à remplir l’écran, il est possible que les côtés ou la partie supérieure soient éliminés de l’affichage. En la redimensionnant pour l’adapter à l’écran, il est possible que des barres noires apparaissent au-dessus et en dessous ou sur les côtés de la vidéo. Sélectionner une autre langue pour l’audio (si proposé) Touchez , puis choisissez une langue dans la liste Audio. Afficher ou masquer le sous-titrage (si proposé) Touchez , puis choisissez une langue ou l’option Désactivé dans la liste Sous-titrage. Lire le son d’une vidéo musicale ou d’un podcast vidéo sans afficher la vidéo Explorez vidéos de musique ou podcasts dans les listes Musique. Pour lire la musique et la vidéo d’une vidéo musicale ou d’un podcast, explorez dans les listes Vidéo. Pour Procédez ainsi :Chapitre 3 Musique et vidéo 35 Remarque :après le transfert d’un film loué sur l’iPod touch, vous ne pouvez pas le retransférer sur votre ordinateur pour le visionner. Visionnage d’un film loué m Touchez Vidéos puis sélectionnez un film. Visionnage de vidéos sur un téléviseur connecté à l’iPod touch Vous pouvez connecter l’iPod touch à votre téléviseur et regarder vos vidéos sur un écran de plus grande dimension. Utilisez le câble AV composantes Apple, le câble AV composite Apple ou tout autre câble compatible avec l’iPod touch. Vous pouvez également utiliser ces câbles avec la station d’accueil Apple Universal Dock disponible séparément pour connecter l’iPod touch à votre téléviseur. (La station d’accueil Apple Universal Dock est fournie avec une télécommande qui vous permet de commander la lecture à distance.) Les câbles et stations d’accueil Apple sont en vente sur www.apple.com/fr/ipodstore. Réglages vidéo Les réglages vidéo vous permettent d’indiquer où reprendre la lecture de vidéos que vous avez commencé auparavant, d’activer ou de désactiver les sous-titres, d’activer ou de désactiver l’écran large et de régler le signal vidéo sur NTSC ou PAL. Voir la page 85. Ajustement des réglages vidéo m Choisissez Réglages > Vidéo. Suppression de vidéos à partir de l’iPod touch Vous pouvez supprimer directement des vidéos de l’iPod touch pour économiser de la place. Suppression d’une vidéo m Dans les listes Vidéos, balayez vers la gauche ou la droite sur la vidéo puis touchez Supprimer. Lorsque vous supprimez une vidéo (hors films loués) de l’iPod touch, elle n’est en fait pas supprimée de votre bibliothèque iTunes et vous pouvez la resynchroniser sur l’iPod touch ultérieurement. Si vous ne souhaitez pas la retransférer à l’iPod touch par le biais de la synchronisation, indiquez à iTunes de ne pas la synchroniser (voir la page 7). Si vous supprimez de l’iPod touch un film loué, ce dernier est alors définitivement supprimé et ne peut plus être retransféré à votre ordinateur.36 Chapitre 3 Musique et vidéo Réglage d’une minuterie de veille Vous pouvez régler l’iPod touch de manière à interrompre la lecture de musique ou de vidéos après un certain temps. m Dans l’écran principal, choisissez Horloge > Minuterie, puis faites défiler de manière à régler le nombre d’heures et de minutes. Touchez À expiration et choisissez Mettre l’iPod en veille, touchez Choisir puis touchez Démarrer pour lancer la minuterie. À l’expiration de la minuterie, l’iPod touch interrompt la lecture de la musique ou de la vidéo, ferme les éventuelles applications ouvertes et se verrouille. Modification des boutons de l’écran Musique Vous pouvez remplacer les boutons Listes de lect., Artiste, Morceaux et Albums situés au bas de l’écran par d’autres que vous utilisez plus fréquemment. Par exemple, si vous aimez écouter des podcasts mais n’explorez pas votre musique par album, vous pouvez remplacer le bouton Albums par le bouton Podcasts. m Touchez Plus puis Modifier, puis faites glisser un bouton vers le bas de l’écran, par-dessus celui que vous souhaitez remplacer. Vous pouvez faire glisser vers la gauche ou la droite les boutons situés au bas de l’écran afin de les réarranger. Lorsque vous avez fini, touchez Terminé. Touchez Plus à tout moment pour accéder aux boutons que vous avez remplacés.4 37 4 Photos Touchez Photos pour afficher vos photos, utiliser une photo comme fond d’écran ou visionner des diaporamas. L’iPod touch vous permet de synchroniser vos photos à partir de votre ordinateur de sorte que vous pouvez les partager avec vos proches et vos collègues sur l’écran haute résolution. Synchronisation de photos à partir de votre ordinateur Si vous avez réglé la synchronisation de photos, iTunes copie ou met à jour automatiquement votre photothèque (ou les albums sélectionnés) de votre ordinateur à votre iPod touch chaque fois que vous connectez l’iPod touch à votre ordinateur. iTunes peut synchroniser vos photos à partir des applications suivantes :  Sur un Mac : iPhoto 4.0.3 ou ultérieur  Sur un PC : Adobe Photoshop Album 2.0 ou ultérieur, ou Adobe Photoshop Elements 3.0 ou ultérieur Pour plus de renseignements sur la synchronisation de l’iPod touch avec des photos ou d’autres informations se trouvant sur votre ordinateur, consultez la section « Obtention de musique, de vidéos et d’autre contenu sur l’iPod touch » à la page 5.38 Chapitre 4 Photos Visionnage de photos Vous pouvez visionner dans Photos les photos synchronisées à partir de votre ordinateur. Affichage de photos m Touchez Photothèque pour afficher toutes vos photos ou touchez un album pour n’afficher que les photos correspondantes. Affichage d’une photo en plein écran m Touchez la vignette d’une photo pour qu’elle s’affiche en grand écran. Touchez la photo en plein écran pour masquer les commandes. Touchez à nouveau la photo pour afficher les commandes. Affichage de la photo précédente ou suivante m Feuilletez vers la gauche ou la droite ou touchez l’écran pour afficher les commandes puis touchez ou .Chapitre 4 Photos 39 Modification de la taille ou de l’orientation Affichage une photo en orientation Paysage m Faites pivoter l’iPod touch d’un quart de tour. La photo se réoriente automatiquement et, si elle est en format Paysage, couvre tout l’écran. Zoom sur une partie d’une photo m Double-touchez la partie sur laquelle vous souhaitez zoomer. Double-touchez à nouveau pour la réduire. Zoom avant ou arrière m Pincez la photo pour la réduire ou effectuez le geste inverse pour l’agrandir. Déplacement de la partie d’une photo affichée à l’écran m Faites glisser la photo.40 Chapitre 4 Photos Visionnage de diaporamas Affichage de photos dans un diaporama m Touchez un album puis une photo, puis touchez . Si vous ne voyez pas , touchez la photo pour afficher les commandes. Interruption d’un diaporama m Touchez l’écran. Ajustement des réglages du diaporama 1 Dans l’écran principal, choisissez Réglages > Photos. 2 Pour régler :  la durée d’apparition de chaque diapositive, touchez Afficher chaque photo pendant puis choisissez une durée ;  les effets de transition lors du passage d’une photo à la suivante, touchez Transition puis choisissez un type de transition ;  la répétition ou non des diaporamas, activez ou désactivez Boucle ;  l’affichage aléatoire ou non des photos, activez ou désactivez Aléatoire. Lecture de musique pendant un diaporama m Dans l’écran principal, choisissez Musique et jouez un morceau. Choisissez ensuite Photos dans l’écran principal et lancez un diaporama. Utilisation d’une photo comme fond d’écran Une photo apparaît en tant que fond d’écran lorsque que vous déverrouillez votre iPod touch. Choix d’une photo comme fond d’écran 1 Choisissez une photo. 2 Faites glisser pour déplacer la partie de la photo affichée, pincez la photo pour la réduire, écartez les doigts pour l’agrandir jusqu’à ce que la photo ait l’aspect souhaité. 3 Touchez la photo pour afficher les commandes, puis touchez et Utiliser comme fond d’écran. Vous pouvez également choisir parmi différents fonds d’écran fournis avec l’iPod touch en choisissant Réglages > Général > Fond d’écran > Fond d’écran à partir de l’écran principal. Envoi d’une photo par courrier électronique Envoi d’une photo par courrier électronique m Choisissez une photo, touchez , puis Envoyer par courrier. L’iPod touch doit être configuré pour pouvoir utiliser la messagerie électronique (reportez-vous à la rubrique « Configuration de comptes de messagerie » à la page 56).Chapitre 4 Photos 41 Envoi d’une photo à une galerie web Si vous possédez un compte .Mac, vous pouvez envoyer des photos directement depuis l’iPod touch vers une galerie web créée à l’aide d’iPhoto ‘08. Vous pouvez également transmettre des photos à la galerie web .Mac d’une autre personne si cette dernière a activé les contributions par e-mail. Pour envoyer des photos à une galerie web, procédez comme suit :  Configurez votre compte de messagerie .Mac sur l’iPod touch.  Publiez un album iPhoto ‘08 sur une galerie web .Mac.  Activez l’option « Autoriser le téléchargement de photo par courrier électronique » dans la sous-fenêtre Réglages de publication d’iPhoto ‘08. Pour en savoir plus sur la création d’une galerie web dans iPhoto ‘08, ouvrez iPhoto ‘08, choisissez Aide et recherchez les termes « galerie web ». Envoi d’une photo à votre galerie web Choisissez une photo, touchez , puis « Envoyer à Galerie Web ». Attribution d’une photo à un contact Vous avez la possibilité d’attribuer une photo à un contact. Attribution d’une photo à un contact 1 Sélectionner une photo sur l’iPod touch et touchez . 2 Touchez « Assigner à un contact » puis désignez le contact. 3 Faites glisser la photo pour déplacer son affichage, pincez-la pour la réduire ou écartez les doigts pour l’agrandir, jusqu’à ce que la photo prenne les dimensions souhaitées. 4 Touchez Valider. Vous avez également la possibilité d’affecter une photo à un contact dans Contacts en touchant Modifier, puis en touchant l’icône la représentant.5 42 5 iTunes Wi-Fi Music Store Touchez iTunes pour acheter des morceaux et des albums auprès de l’iTunes Wi-Fi Music Store. Vous pouvez effectuer des recherches dans le catalogue musical de l’iTunes Wi-Fi Music Store ou parcourir, écouter des extraits, acheter et télécharger des morceaux et des albums, le tout directement de l’iPod touch. Le contenu acheté est automatiquement copié dans votre bibliothèque iTunes dès que vous synchronisez l’iPod touch avec votre ordinateur. Pour pouvoir utiliser l’iTunes Wi-Fi Music Store, vous devez accéder à un réseau Wi-Fi connecté à Internet à l’aide de votre iPod touch. Pour plus de renseignements sur la connexion à un réseau Wi-Fi, consultez la page 22. Vous avez également besoin d’un compte iTunes Store pour acheter de la musique par le biais d’une connexion Wi-Fi (disponible dans certains pays). Si vous ne possédez pas déjà d’un compte iTunes Store, ouvrez iTunes puis choisissez Store > Compte pour en configurer un. Parcours et recherche Il vous est possible de parcourir les sélections de titres et les dix meilleures ventes par catégories ou rechercher dans le catalogue musical de l’iTunes Wi-Fi Music Store les morceaux et albums que vous recherchez. Les sélections de titres vous permettent de découvrir les nouveautés et les recommandations de l’iTunes Wi-Fi Music Store. Les classements des dix meilleures ventes vous permettent de connaître les morceaux et les albums les plus populaires de chaque catégorie. Si vous recherchez un morceau, un album ou un artiste donnée, utilisez le champ Recherche.Chapitre 5 iTunes Wi-Fi Music Store 43 Parcours des morceaux et albums sélectionnés m Touchez Recommandés et sélectionnez une catégorie en haut de l’écran. Parcours des morceaux et albums parmi les dix meilleures ventes m Touchez Classements, choisissez une catégorie, puis touchez Classement morceaux ou Classement albums.44 Chapitre 5 iTunes Wi-Fi Music Store Recherche de morceaux et d’albums m Touchez Recherche, le champ de recherche, saisissez un ou plusieurs mots, puis touchez Rechercher. Afficher les morceaux d’un album m Touchez l’album. Affichage de l’album contenant un morceau m Double-touchez le morceau. Parcours des sélections Starbucks Si vous vous trouvez dans l’un des emplacements Starbucks désignés (disponible seulement aux États-Unis), l’icône Starbucks apparaît au bas de l’écran, en regard de Recommandés. Touchez l’icône Starbucks pour connaître le morceau diffusé dans le café et pour parcourir les collections Starbucks de titres recommandés. Une liste des emplacements Starbucks désignés se trouve à la page www.apple.com/itunes/starbucks (en anglais).Chapitre 5 iTunes Wi-Fi Music Store 45 Recherche du morceau diffusé m Touchez Starbucks. Le morceau en cours de lecture apparaît en haut de l’écran. Touchez le morceau pour accéder à l’album qui le contient et retrouver les autres morceaux de l’album. Affichage des derniers morceaux diffusés et autres listes de lecture Starbucks m Touchez Starbucks, puis choisissez Morceaux récents l’une des listes de lecture Starbucks. Achat de morceaux et d’albums Si vous trouvez un morceau ou un album qui vous plaît dans l’iTunes Wi-Fi Music Store, vous pouvez l’acheter et le télécharger sur l’iPod touch. Il vous est possible d’écouter un extrait du morceau avant de l’acheter pour vous assurer qu’il s’agit bien d’un morceau que vous voulez. Dans les emplacements Starbucks désignés (disponible seulement aux États-Unis), vous pouvez également écouter un extrait du morceau diffusé, et l’acheter le cas échéant, ainsi que d’autres morceaux des collections Starbucks de titres recommandés. Écoute d’un extrait de morceau m Touchez le morceau. Achat et téléchargement d’un morceau ou d’un album 1 Touchez le prix, puis l’option Acheter maintenant. Remarque :pour acheter des morceaux directement sur l’iPod touch, vous devez avoir ouvert une session sous votre compte iTunes Store dans iTunes lors de la dernière synchronisation de votre iPod touch. 46 Chapitre 5 iTunes Wi-Fi Music Store 2 Saisissez votre mot de passe, puis touchez OK. Votre achat est débité de votre compte iTunes Store. Pour tout achat supplémentaire effectué dans un délai de quinze minutes, le mot de passe ne vous est pas redemandé. Un avertissement vous informe au cas où vous auriez déjà acheté un ou plusieurs morceaux d’un album. Touchez Acheter si vous voulez acheter l’intégralité de l’album, y compris les morceaux déjà acquis, ou touchez Annuler si vous voulez acheter seulement des morceaux précis parmi ceux restants. Remarque :certains albums prévoient du contenu en bonus, téléchargé dans la bibliothèque iTunes de votre ordinateur. Tout ces bonus ne sont pas transférés directement sur votre iPod touch. Affichage de l’état du téléchargement de morceaux et d’albums m Touchez Téléchargés. Pour interrompre un téléchargement, touchez . Si vous devez éteindre votre iPod touch ou quitter le champs de votre connexion Wi-Fi, l’interruption du téléchargement ne doit pas vous inquiéter. L’iPod touch redémarre le téléchargement lorsque l’iPod touch accède à un réseau Wi-Fi connecté à Internet. Sinon, si vous ouvrez iTunes sur votre ordinateur, l’application termine alors le téléchargement sur votre bibliothèque iTunes. Les morceaux achetés s’ajoutent à une liste de lecture intitulée Achats sur l’iPod touch. Si vous supprimez cette liste, iTunes en crée une nouvelle lorsque vous achetez un article auprès de l’iTunes Wi-Fi Music Store. Synchronisation du contenu acheté iTunes synchronise automatiquement les morceaux et les albums achetés à travers votre iPod touch avec votre bibliothèque iTunes lorsque vous branchez l’iPod touch sur votre ordinateur. Cela vous permet d’écouter vos acquisitions sur votre ordinateur et assure une copie de sauvegarde au cas où vous supprimiez les morceaux achetés depuis l’iPod touch. Les morceaux sont synchronisés à travers la liste de lecture « Acheté sur ». iTunes crée la liste de lecture si elle n’existe pas. iTunes copie également vos acquisitions dans la liste de lecture Achats dont iTunes se sert pour les achats effectués sur votre ordinateur, si cette liste de lecture existe et qu’elle est prévue pour se synchroniser avec l’iPod touch.Chapitre 5 iTunes Wi-Fi Music Store 47 Vérification des achats iTunes vous permet de vérifier que l’intégralité de la musique, des vidéos et autres articles achetés sur l’iTunes Wi-Fi Music Store est bien intégrée dans votre bibliothèque iTunes. Il peut s’avérer judicieux de procéder ainsi si un téléchargement s’est interrompu. Vérification de vos achats 1 Assurez-vous que votre ordinateur est connecté à Internet. 2 Dans iTunes, choisissez Store > Rechercher les achats effectués. 3 Saisissez l’identifiant de votre compte iTunes Store et son mot de passe, puis cliquez sur Rechercher. Les achats non encore téléchargés sur votre ordinateur le sont alors à ce moment. La liste de lecture Achats reprend tous vos achats. Comme vous pouvez ajouter ou supprimer des éléments de la liste, cette dernière peut ne pas être exacte. Pour retrouver tous vos achats, assurez-vous d’avoir ouvert une session sous votre compte, choisissez Store > Visualiser mon compte, puis cliquez sur Historique des achats. Modification des informations de votre compte iTunes Store L’iPod touch reprend les données relatives à votre compte iTunes Store depuis iTunes, notamment si vous avez opté pour la musique iTunes Plus (le cas échéant). Vous pouvez consulter et modifier les données de votre compte iTunes Store par le biais d’iTunes. Consultation et modification des informations de votre compte iTunes Store m Dans iTunes, choisissez Store > Visualiser mon compte. Vous devez avoir ouvert une session sous votre compte iTunes Store. Si l’option « Visualiser mon compte » n’apparaît pas dans le menu Store, choisissez Store > Se connecter. Achat de musique sous un autre compte iTunes Store m Ouvrez une session sous le compte de votre choix au moment de vous connecter à l’iTunes Wi-Fi Music Store.6 48 6 Applications Safari Navigation sur le Web Safari vous permet de voir les pages exactement comme elles sont conçues pour apparaître sur les navigateurs d’ordinateur. Il vous suffit de double-toucher pour zoomer sur la page. Faites pivoter l’iPod touch d’un quart de tour pour un affichage en mode Paysage. Effectuez des recherches en utilisant Google ou Yahoo! : les deux sont intégrés. Pour pouvoir utiliser Safari, l’iPod touch doit rejoindre un réseau Wi-Fi connecté à Internet. Pour plus de renseignements sur la connexion à un réseau Wi-Fi, consultez la page 22. Ouverture et navigation de pages web Ouverture d’une page web m Touchez le champ d’adresse situé en haut de l’écran, tapez l’adresse web (par exemple apple.com ou www.google.com) et touchez Accéder. Si vous ne voyez pas le champ d’adresse, touchez la barre d’état située en haut de l’écran. Pendant que vous tapez, les éventuelles adresses web situées dans vos signets ou votre historique et qui contiennent les lettres que vous avez écrites apparaissent au-dessous. Touchez une adresse web pour accéder à la page web correspondante. Effacement de tout le texte du champ d’adresse m Touchez le champ d’adresse, puis touchez . Suivi d’un lien vers une page web m Touchez le lien. Les liens de type texte sont généralement soulignés en bleu. De nombreuses images sont également des liens. Chapitre 6 Applications 49 Si un lien conduit à un fichier audio ou vidéo géré par l’iPod touch, Safari lit le son ou le film correspondant. Une liste des types de fichier gérés se trouve à la page 93. Agrandissement d’une page pour la voir plus facilement Affichage d’une page web en orientation Paysage m Faites pivoter l’iPod touch d’un quart de tour. Safari réoriente et étend automatiquement la page. Pour Procédez ainsi : Afficher l’adresse de destination d’un lien Touchez le lien et maintenez votre doigt dessus. L’adresse apparaît à côté de votre doigt. Vous pouvez touchez une image et maintenir votre doigt dessus pour voir si elle comprend un lien. Empêcher une page de se charger si vous changez d’idée Touchez . Recharger une page web Touchez . Revenir à la page web suivante ou précédente Touchez ou au bas de l’écran. Revenir à l’un des quelques dernières pages que vous avez consultées Touchez puis touchez Historique. Pour effacer l’historique, touchez Effacer. Envoyer l’adresse d’une page web par courrier électronique Touchez puis touchez « Envoyer le lien de cette page ». Vous devez pour cela avoir configuré un compte de messagerie sur l’iPod touch (reportez-vous à la page 56).50 Chapitre 6 Applications Redimensionnement de colonnes à la taille de l’écran m Double-touchez la colonne. Elle s’étend pour en faciliter la lecture. Double-touchez à nouveau pour la réduire. Zoom sur une partie d’une page web m Double-touchez la partie de la page sur laquelle vous souhaitez zoomer. Double-touchez à nouveau pour la réduire. Zoom avant ou arrière manuel m Pincez la photo pour la réduire ou effectuez le geste inverse pour l’agrandir. Déplacement au sein d’une page m Faites glisser la page vers le haut, le bas ou le côté. Pendant le défilement, vous pouvez toucher et faire glisser n’importe quel endroit de la page sans activer les éventuels liens. Si vous touchez un lien, vous le suivez, mais si vous le faites glisser, la page défile. Déplacement au sein d’un cadre sur une page web Servez-vous de deux doigts pour faire défiler l’affichage dans un cadre sur une page web. Servez-vous d’un seul doigt pour faire défiler l’affichage de la page web entière. Accès direct au début d’une page web Touchez la barre d’état située en haut de l’écran de l’iPod touch. Recherche sur le Web Par défaut, Safari utilise Google pour effectuer les recherches. Vous pouvez cependant le régler pour utiliser Yahoo! à la place. Recherche de contenu sur le Web 1 Touchez pour accéder au champ de recherche Google. 2 Tapez un mot ou une phrase décrivant ce que vous recherchez, puis touchez Google. 3 Touchez un lien dans la liste de résultats pour ouvrir une page web.Chapitre 6 Applications 51 Réglage de Safari de manière à rechercher à l’aide de Yahoo! m À partir de l’écran principal, choisissez Réglages > Safari > Moteur de recherche, puis choisissez Yahoo! Ouverture simultanée de plusieurs pages Vous pouvez ouvrir plus d’une page web en même temps. Certains liens ouvrent automatiquement une nouvelle page au lieu de remplacer la page actuelle. Le nombre situé dans l’icône de page au bas de l’écran indique le nombre de pages ouvertes. Si ce nombre est absent, une seule page est ouverte. Par exemple : = une page est ouverte = trois pages sont ouvertes Ouverture d’une nouvelle page m Touchez puis touchez Nouvelle page. Affichage de toutes les pages ouvertes et accès à une autre page ouverte m Touchez et feuilletez vers la droite ou la gauche. Lorsque vous atteignez la page souhaitée, touchez-la. Fermeture d’une page m Touchez puis . Il est impossible de fermer une page si c’est la seule ouverte. Saisie de champs de texte Certaines pages web comportent des formulaires ou des champs de texte dans lesquels vous pouvez saisir des informations. Appel du clavier m Touchez à l’intérieur d’un champ de texte.52 Chapitre 6 Applications Passage à d’autres champs de texte sur la page m Touchez un autre champ de texte ou touchez un des boutons Suivant et Précédent. Envoi du formulaire m Une fois que vous avez fini de remplir les champs de texte sur la page, touchez Accéder ou Rechercher. La plupart des pages comportent un lien que vous pouvez toucher pour envoyer le formulaire. Élimination du clavier sans envoyer le formulaire m Touchez Terminé Ajout de Web Clips Safari au menu principal Vous pouvez ajouter des Web Clips de vos pages web préférées au menu principal pour y accéder rapidement. Les Web Clips apparaissent sous forme d’icônes qu’il vous est possible de réorganiser à votre guise sur le menu principal. Voir « Personnalisation de la disposition du menu principal » à la page 14. Ajout d’un Web Clip au menu principal m Ouvrez la page et touchez puis « Ajouter au menu principal ». Les Web Clips mémorisent la partie affichée, le niveau de zoom et l’emplacement, des pages web. Si vous ouvrez un Web Clip, Safari agrandit et fait défiler automatiquement l’affichage de façon à se recentrer sur la partie de la page web. La partie affichée sert également à générer l’icône du Web Clip sur le menu principal. Avant de pouvoir ajouter un Web Clip, vous pouvez en modifier le nom. Si le nom est trop long (dépassant 10 caractères), il se peut qu’il soit abrégé automatiquement sur le menu principal. Suppression d’un Web Clip du menu principal 1 Touchez et maintenez le contact sur l’icône du menu principal jusqu’à ce que les icônes s’agitent. 2 Touchez la croix située dans le coin du Web Clip à supprimer. 3 Touchez Supprimer et appuyez sur le bouton du menu principal pour enregistrer votre disposition. Utilisation de signets Vous pouvez associer des signets à des pages web afin de pouvoir y revenir rapidement sans devoir en taper l’adresse. Mise en signet d’une page web m Ouvrez la page et touchez puis Nouv. signet. Avant d’enregistrer un signet, vous pouvez modifier son titre ou choisir l’endroit où l’enregistrer. Par défaut, le signet est enregistré dans le dossier de signets de plus haut niveau. Touchez Signets pour choisir un autre dossier.Chapitre 6 Applications 53 Ouverture d’une page web mise en signet m Touchez puis choisissez un signet ou touchez un dossier pour voir les signets qui s’y trouvent. Modification d’un signet ou d’un dossier de signets m Touchez , choisissez le dossier qui contient le signet ou le dossier que vous souhaitez modifier, puis touchez Modifier. Effectuez ensuite l’une des actions suivantes :  Pour créer un nouveau dossier, touchez Nouveau dossier.  Pour supprimer un signet ou un dossier, touchez à côté du signet ou dossier en question, puis toucher Supprimer.  Pour repositionner un signet ou dossier, faites glisser à côté de l’élément à déplacer.  Pour modifier le nom ou l’adresse d’un signet ou dossier ou pour placer celui-ci dans un dossier différent, touchez le signet ou le dossier en question. Lorsque vous avez fini, touchez Terminé. Synchronisation de signets Si vous utilisez Safari sur un Mac, ou Safari ou Microsoft Internet Explorer sur un PC, vous pouvez synchroniser les signets de l’iPod touch avec ceux de votre ordinateur. Synchronisation de signets entre l’iPod touch et votre ordinateur m Connectez l’iPod touch à votre ordinateur. Si les signets sont réglés pour la synchronisation (voir la page 9), la synchronisation commence. Réglages Safari À partir du menu principal, choisissez Réglages > Safari, pour ajuster les réglages de sécurité et autres réglages. Voir la page 88. Calendrier Ajout d’événements de calendrier à l’iPod touch Si vous avez configuré iTunes de façon à synchroniser vos calendriers, vous pouvez saisir des rendez-vous et des événements sur votre ordinateur et les synchroniser avec ceux de l’iPod touch. Vous pouvez aussi procéder directement de l’iPod touch. Saisie d’événements de calendrier sur votre ordinateur Vous pouvez synchroniser des rendez-vous et des événements à partir d’iCal et Microsoft Entourage sur un Mac, ou à partir de Microsoft Outlook 2003 ou 2007 sur un PC.54 Chapitre 6 Applications Synchronisation de calendriers Synchronisation de calendriers entre l’iPod touch et votre ordinateur Connectez l’iPod touch à votre ordinateur. Si l’iPod touch est configuré de façon à effectuer la synchronisation automatiquement (voir la page 7), l’actualisation se lance. Ajout et modification d’événements de calendrier directement sur l’iPod touch Ajout d’un événement m Touchez puis saisissez les informations de l’événement. Touchez ensuite Terminé. Vous pouvez saisir n’importe quel élément parmi les suivants :  Le titre.  Le lieu.  Les heures de début et de fin (ou activez l’option « jour entier » si l’événement s’étend sur la journée complète).  Le fréquence de répétition, à savoir Aucune, tous les jours, toutes les semaines, toutes les deux semaines, tous les mois ou toutes les années.  L’alarme, allant de cinq minutes à deux jours avant l’événement. Si vous définissez une alarme, l’iPod touch vous propose l’option de définir une seconde alarme au cas où vous louperiez la première.  Notes. Configuration de l’iPod touch afin d’émettre un son au moment de l’alarme du calendrier m Dans Réglages, sélectionnez Général > Effets sonores et indiquez si les effets sonores doivent être transmis par le haut-parleur interne, les écouteurs ou par les deux. Pour désactiver les effets sonores, sélectionnez Désactivé. Lorsque les effets sonores sont désactivés, l’iPod touch affiche un message au lieu d’émettre un son lorsque vous recevez une alerte de calendrier. Modification d’un événement m Touchez l’événement puis Modifier. Suppression d’un événement Touchez l’événement, l’option Modifier, puis faites défiler l’affichage et touchez Supprimer l’événement. Affichage de votre calendrier Affichage de votre calendrier m Touchez Calendrier. Basculement d’affichage m Touchez Liste, Jour ou Mois. Chapitre 6 Applications 55  Affichage en liste : tous vos rendez-vous et événements apparaissent dans une liste facile à parcourir. Faites défiler vers le haut ou le bas pour voir les jours précédents ou suivants.  Affichage par jour : faites défiler vers le haut ou le bas pour voir les heures précédentes ou suivantes de la journée. Touchez ou pour voir le jour précédent ou suivant.  Affichage par mois : un point apparaît sous la date des jours comportant des événements. Touchez un jour pour voir ses événements sous forme de liste sous le calendrier. Touchez ou pour voir le mois précédent ou suivant. Affichage des événements du jour m Touchez Aujourd’hui. Affichage des détails concernant un événement m Touchez l’événement. Réglage l’iPod touch de manière à régler les heures des événements sur un fuseau horaire sélectionné m Dans l’écran principal, touchez Réglages > Général > Date et heure, puis activez Heure locale. Touchez ensuite Fuseau horaire et recherchez une ville importante située dans le fuseau horaire souhaité. Lorsque l’option Heure locale est activée, Calendrier affiche les dates et heures des évé- nements dans le fuseau horaire réglé pour vos calendriers. Lorsque l’option est désactivée, Calendrier affiche les événements dans le fuseau horaire où vous vous trouvez. Les jours accompagnés de points comportent des événements Affichage par mois Basculement d’affichage Événements du jour sélectionné Accès aux événements du jour56 Chapitre 6 Applications Courrier Mail est un client de messagerie HTML évolué permettant de récupérer vos courriers électroniques en arrière-plan pendant d’autres manipulations avec votre iPod touch. L’iPod touch fonctionne avec les systèmes de messagerie électronique les plus courants, y compris Yahoo! Mail, Google Gmail, AOL et .Mac Mail, ainsi que la plupart des systèmes de messagerie POP3 et IMAP standard. Mail vous permet d’envoyer et de recevoir des photos et des images s’intégrant directement au texte de vos messages. Vous pouvez aussi recevoir des documents PDF et autres pièces jointes pour les afficher sur l’iPod touch. Configuration de comptes de messagerie Vous devez disposer d’une adresse électronique, se présentant sous la forme « nom@exemple.com », pour pouvoir utiliser l’iPod touch avec vos courriers électroniques. Si vous avez accès à Internet, il est très probable que votre fournisseur d’accès à Internet vous ait offert une adresse électronique. Si vous optez pour la synchronisation automatique lors de l’étape de configuration, vous devez avoir configurés vos comptes de messagerie existants. Dans le cas contraire, vous pouvez indiquer à iTunes de synchroniser vos comptes de messagerie ou configurer les comptes directement sur l’iPod touch. Synchronisation des comptes de messagerie sur l’iPod touch iTunes vous permet de synchroniser vos comptes de messagerie sur l’iPod touch. iTunes prend en charge Mail et Microsoft Entourage sur Mac, et Microsoft Outlook 2003 ou 2007 et Outlook Express sur PC. Voir la rubrique « Obtention de musique, de vidéos et d’autre contenu sur l’iPod touch » à la page 5. Remarque :la synchronisation d’un compte de messagerie sur iPod touch copie la configuration du compte et non les messages mêmes. Les messages de votre boîte de réception apparaissent sur votre iPod touch et sur votre ordinateur à la fois en fonction du type de compte de messagerie que vous possédez et de sa configuration. Si vous ne possédez pas un compte de messagerie Les comptes de messagerie sont mis à disposition par la plupart des fournisseurs d’accès à Internet. Si vous utilisez un Mac, vous pouvez obtenir une adresse électronique, ainsi que d’autres services, à l’adresse www.mac.com/fr. Ce service est éventuellement payant.Chapitre 6 Applications 57 Des comptes gratuits sont également disponibles en ligne, tels que :  www.mail.yahoo.com  www.google.com/mail  www.aol.com Configuration d’un compte de messagerie sur l’iPod touch Vous pouvez configurer et apporter des modifications à un compte de messagerie directement sur l’iPod touch. Votre fournisseur de service de messagerie doit pouvoir vous indiquer les réglages à saisir relatifs à votre compte. Les modifications que vous effectuez sur l’iPod touch pour un compte de messagerie synchronisé depuis votre ordinateur ne sont pas copiées sur votre ordinateur. Pour utiliser l’Assistant réglages en ligne de Mail, rendez-vous à l’adresse : www.apple.com/fr/support/ipodtouch/mailhelper. Saisie des réglages de compte directement sur l’iPod touch 1 S’il s’agit de la configuration de votre premier compte sur l’iPod touch, touchez Mail. Dans le cas contraire, dans le menu principal, choisissez Réglages > Mail > Comptes > Ajouter un compte. 2 Sélectionner le type de votre compte de messagerie : Y! Mail (pour Yahoo!), Google Gmail, .Mac, AOL ou autre. 3 Saisissez les informations de votre compte : Si vous configurez un compte Yahoo!, Google Gmail, .Mac ou AOL, saisissez vos nom, adresse électronique et mot de passe. C’est tout, votre compte est à présent opérationnel. Dans le cas contraire, cliquez sur Autre, sélectionnez un type de serveur (IMAP, POP ou Exchange), puis saisissez les informations de votre compte, à savoir :  Votre adresse électronique  Le type de serveur de messagerie (IMAP, POP ou Exchange)  Le nom d’hôte Internet de votre serveur de courrier entrant (tel que « mail.exemple.com »)  Le nom d’hôte Internet de votre serveur de courrier sortant (se présentant sous la forme « smtp.exemple.com »)  Vos nom d’utilisateur et mot de passe pour les serveurs de courrier entrant et sortant (il n’est pas toujours utile de fournir ce type de données pour le serveur sortant) Remarque :les comptes de messagerie Exchange doivent être configurés pour le protocole IMAP de façon à fonctionner avec l’iPod touch. Pour en savoir plus, contactez votre service informatique.58 Chapitre 6 Applications Envoi de courriers électroniques Vous pouvez envoyer un courrier électronique à quiconque possède une adresse de messagerie. Ce message peut être adressé aussi bien à une personne qu’à un groupe de personnes. Formulation et envoi d’un message 1 Touchez . 2 Tapez le ou les noms ou adresses électroniques dans les champs À ou Cc (en copie) ou touchez et choisissez un destinataire dont l’adresse électronique s’ajoute au message. Au fur et à mesure de votre saisie d’une adresse électronique, celles s’y rapprochant et faisant partie de votre liste de contacts apparaissent en dessous. Touchez celle que vous voulez ajouter. 3 Attribuez un objet au message, puis rédigez le corps. 4 Touchez Envoyer. Envoi d’une photo dans un message m Dans le menu principal, choisissez Photos, puis sélectionnez une photo. Touchez ensuite et « Envoyer par courrier ». Si vous possédez plusieurs comptes de messagerie sur l’iPod touch, la photo est transmise à travers le compte par défaut (voir la page 88). Enregistrement du message en tant que brouillon pour y revenir ultérieurement m Commencez la rédaction du courrier, touchez Annuler, puis touchez Enregistrer. Le message figure dans la boîte à lettres Brouillons, de sorte que vous pouvez l’ouvrir pour y ajouter des éléments ou le modifier, puis l’envoyer. Réponse à un message m Ouvrez un message et touchez . Touchez Répondre pour répondre à l’expéditeur du message. Touchez Répondre à tous pour répondre à l’expéditeur et aux autres destinataires du message. Complétez ensuite votre message au besoin, puis touchez Envoyer. Lorsque vous répondez à un message, les fichiers ou images rattachés au message d’origine ne sont pas transmis. Réexpédition d’un message m Ouvrez un message et touchez , puis Réexpédier. Ajoutez une ou plusieurs adresses électroniques et rédigez votre message, puis touchez Envoyer. Lorsque vous réexpédiez à un message, vous pouvez joindre les fichiers ou images rattachés au message d’origine. Envoi d’un message à un destinataire d’un message que vous avez reçu m Ouvrez le message et touchez le nom ou l’adresse électronique du destinataire, puis Email.Chapitre 6 Applications 59 Relève et lecture du courrier Le bouton Courrier indique le nombre total de messages non lus de toutes vos boîtes de réception. Il se peut que d’autres boîtes à lettres incluent des messages non lus. Sur l’écran de chaque compte figure le nombre de messages non lus correspondant à chaque boîte à lettres. Touchez une boîte à lettres pour en afficher le contenu. Les messages non lus sont signalés d’un point bleu . Lecture d’un message m Touchez une boîte à lettres, puis un message. Dans le message sélectionné, touchez ou pour afficher le courrier suivant ou précédent. Suppression d’un message m Ouvrez le message et touchez . Nombre de courriers non lus Nombre de messages non lus Touchez pour afficher tous les comptes de messagerie Messages non lus60 Chapitre 6 Applications Vous pouvez aussi supprimer un message directement depuis la liste de la boîte à lettres en « poussant » vers la gauche ou vers la droite le titre du message et en touchant Supprimer. Vous pouvez également toucher Modifier et toucher en regard du message voulu. Relève des nouveaux courriers m Choisissez une boîte à lettres ou touchez à tout moment. Ouverture d’un fichier joint Vous pouvez visualiser ou lire certains types de fichiers et d’images joints aux courriers reçus. Par exemple, si vous recevez un document PDF, Microsoft Word ou Microsoft Excel, vous pouvez ainsi le lire sur votre iPod touch. m Touchez la pièce jointe. L’iPod touch procède à son téléchargement puis l’ouvre. Vous pouvez visualiser les pièces jointes dans le sens portait ou paysage. Si le format d’une pièce jointe n’est pas pris en charge par l’iPod touch, le nom de son fichier est bien visible mais vous ne pouvez pas l’ouvrir. iPod touch prend en charge les formats de pièces jointes suivants :  .doc, .docx, .htm, .html, .pdf, .txt, .xls, .xlsx Pour faire apparaître le bouton Supprimer, poussez le message vers la gauche ou vers la droite. Toucher la pièce jointe pour la téléchargerChapitre 6 Applications 61 Affichage de tous les destinataires d’un message m Ouvrez le message et touchez Détails. Touchez un nom ou une adresse électronique pour afficher les informations du destinataire. Touchez ensuite l’adresse électronique de la personne à contacter par courrier. Touchez enfin Masquer pour ne pas afficher les destinataires. Ajout d’un destinataire de courrier électronique à votre liste de contacts m Touchez le message et, le cas échéant, touchez Détails pour voir les destinataires. Touchez un nom ou une adresse électronique et touchez « Créer un nouveau contact » ou « Ajouter au contact ». Signalement d’un message non lu m Ouvrez le message et touchez « Signaler comme non lu ». Un point bleu s’affiche en regard du message dans la liste de la boîte à lettres jusqu’à ce que vous le rouvriez. Déplacement d’un message vers une autre boîte à lettres m Ouvrez un message et touchez , puis choisissez une boîte à lettres. Zoom sur une partie d’un message m Double-touchez la partie sur laquelle vous souhaitez zoomer. Double-touchez à nouveau pour la réduire. Redimensionnement d’une colonne de texte à la taille de l’écran m Double-touchez le texte. Redimensionnement manuel d’un message m Pincez la photo pour la réduire ou effectuez le geste inverse pour l’agrandir. Ouverture d’un lien m Touchez le lien. Les liens de type texte sont généralement soulignés en bleu. De nombreuses images possèdent également des liens. Un lien peut pointer sur une page web, ouvrir une carte ou un nouveau courrier électronique dont le champ du destinataire est prérempli. Les liens vers le web et des plans entraînent l’ouverture de Safari ou de Plans sur l’iPod touch. Pour revenir à votre courrier électronique, appuyez sur le bouton du menu principal et touchez Courrier. Réglages de messagerie Dans le menu principal, choisissez Réglages > Courrier, pour configurer et personnaliser vos comptes de messagerie pour l’iPod touch. Voir la page 86.62 Chapitre 6 Applications Contacts Avec Contacts , il est facile d’avoir toujours avec vous les coordonnées de vos contacts. Synchronisation de coordonnées à partir de votre ordinateur Si vous avez réglé iTunes de manière à synchroniser vos contacts, iTunes conserve automatiquement vos contacts à jour, que vous effectuiez des modifications sur votre ordinateur ou votre iPod touch. Vous pouvez synchroniser vos contacts à partir d’applications telles que :  Sur un Mac : Carnet d’adresses Mac OS X, Microsoft Entourage et carnet d’adresses Yahoo!  Sur un PC : Carnet d’adresses Yahoo!, Carnet d’adresses Windows (Outlook Express) ou Microsoft Outlook. Pour plus de renseignements sur la synchronisation de l’iPod touch avec vos contacts, consultez la section « Obtention de musique, de vidéos et d’autre contenu sur l’iPod touch » à la page 5. Affichage d’un contact m Touchez Contacts puis touchez un contact. Pour afficher un groupe donné, touchez le bouton Groupe. Réglage de l’ordre de tri et d’affichage Utilisez les réglages des contacts pour indiquer si vos contacts sont triés par prénom ou par nom, ainsi que l’ordre dans lequel les noms sont affichés. m Touchez Réglages > Contacts, puis touchez Ordre de tri ou Ordre d’affichage et sélectionnez « Prénom Nom » ou « Nom Prénom ».Chapitre 6 Applications 63 Ajout et modification de contacts directement sur l’iPod touch Vous pouvez saisir de nouveaux contacts sur l’iPod touch, modifier des contacts existants ou en supprimer. Ajout d’un contact sur l’iPod touch m Choisissez Contacts et touchez puis saisissez les informations du contact. Modification du numéro de téléphone d’un contact, de son adresse ou d’autres informations m Touchez Contacts et choisissez un contact puis toucher Modifier.  Pour ajouter un élément tel qu’une adresse web ou un numéro de téléphone mobile, touchez à côté de l’élément correspondant.  Pour supprimer un élément, touchez à côté de celui-ci.  Pour supprimer le contact de votre liste de contacts, faites défiler vers le bas et touchez Supprimer le contact. Saisir une pause dans un numéro m Touchez puis Pause. Certains systèmes de téléphone nécessitent parfois des pauses, par exemple avant un numéro de poste ou un mot de passe. Chaque pause dure deux secondes. Vous pouvez avoir à en saisir plus qu’une. Affectez une photo à un contact ou modifier la photo d’un contact 1 Touchez Contacts et choisissez un contact. 2 Touchez Modifier et touchez Ajouter une photo ou touchez la photo existante. 3 Choisissez une photo. 64 Chapitre 6 Applications 4 Déplacez la photo et redimensionnez-la comme vous le souhaitez. Faites-la glisser vers le haut, le bas ou les côtés. Pincez ou double-touchez la photo pour l’agrandir ou la réduire. 5 Touchez Valider. Supprimer un contact 1 Touchez Contacts et choisissez un contact. 2 Touchez Modifier 3 Faites défiler jusqu’au bas des informations du contact et touchez Supprimer. YouTube Recherche et visualisation de vidéos YouTube présente de courtes vidéos ajoutées par des personnes du monde entier (le site n’est pas disponible dans toutes les langues et peut ne pas être disponible partout). Pour pouvoir utiliser YouTube, l’iPod touch doit rejoindre un réseau Wi-Fi connecté à Internet. Pour plus de renseignements sur la connexion à un réseau Wi-Fi, consultez la page 22. Parcourir les vidéos m Touchez Sélection, Populaires ou Signets, ou touchez Plus pour parcourir par Récentes, Les mieux cotées ou Historique.  Sélection : vidéos passées en revue et conseillées par l’équipe de YouTube.  Populaires:vidéos le plus visionnées par les utilisateurs de YouTube. Touchez Tout pour afficher la liste des vidéos les plus visionnées de tous les temps, ou Aujourd’hui ou Cette semaine pour afficher les vidéos les plus visionnées pendant la dernière journée ou semaine.  Signets : vidéos que vous avez mises en signet.  Récentes :vidéos le plus récemment envoyées à YouTube.  Les mieux cotées :vidéos les mieux notées par les utilisateurs de YouTube. Pour noter une vidéo, accédez à www.youtube.com.  Historique : vidéos que vous avez visionnées le plus récemment.Chapitre 6 Applications 65 Rechercher une vidéo 1 Touchez Recherche puis touchez le champ de recherche YouTube. 2 Touchez un mot ou une phrase décrivant ce que vous recherchez, puis touchez Rechercher. YouTube affiche des résultats après avoir effectué une recherche sur le titre, la description, les balises et le nom d’utilisateur associés aux vidéos. Lecture d’une vidéo m Touchez la vidéo. Elle commence à se télécharger sur l’iPod touch et une barre de progression apparaît. Dès qu’une partie suffisante de la vidéo s’est téléchargée, la lecture commence. Vous pouvez également toucher pour lancer la vidéo. Contrôle de la lecture de la vidéo Lorsque la lecture d’une vidéo commence, les commandes disparaissent pour ne pas gêner. m Touchez l’écran pour afficher ou masquer les commandes. Pour Procédez ainsi : Lire ou mettre en pause une vidéo Touchez ou . Augmenter ou diminuer le volume Faites glisser le curseur de volume. Redémarrer une vidéo Touchez . Passer à la vidéo suivante ou précédente Touchez deux fois pour passer à la vidéo précédente. Touchez pour passer à la vidéo suivante. Effectuer un retour ou une avance rapide Touchez ou et gardez le doigt dessus. Passer directement à un point particulier d’une vidéo Faites glisser la tête de lecture le long du défileur. Interrompre une vidéo avant sa fin Touchez Terminé ou appuyez sur le bouton principal . Basculer le redimensionnement de la vidéo entre le remplissage de l’écran et à l’adaptation à l’écran. Double-touchez la vidéo. Vous pouvez également toucher pour que la vidéo remplisse l’écran ou pour qu’elle s’adapte à l’écran. Suivant/Avance rapide Lecture/Pause Redimensionner Progression du téléchargement Commandes de lecture Volume Précédent/Retour rapide Signet Tête de lecture Défileur66 Chapitre 6 Applications Changement des boutons situés au bas de l’écran Vous pouvez remplacer les boutons Sélection, Populaires, Signets et Recherche situés au bas de l’écran par d’autres que vous utilisez plus fréquemment. Par exemple, supposons que vous regardiez souvent les vidéos les mieux cotées mais ne regardiez pas beaucoup les vidéos conseillées. Vous pouvez dans ce cas remplacer le bouton Sélection par le bouton Les mieux cotées. m Touchez Plus puis Modifier, puis faites glisser un bouton vers le bas de l’écran, par-dessus celui que vous souhaitez remplacer. Vous pouvez faire glisser vers la gauche ou la droite les boutons situés au bas de l’écran afin de les réarranger. Lorsque vous avez fini, touchez Terminé. Pendant que vous explorez les vidéos, touchez Plus pour accéder aux boutons qui ne sont pas visibles. Mettre une vidéo en signet Touchez à côté de la vidéo et touchez Créer un signet. Vous pouvez également commencer à lire la vidéo puis toucher . Touchez Signets pour afficher vos vidéos mises en signet. Voir les détails concernant une vidéo et explorer les vidéos associées Lisez l’intégralité de la vidéo, touchez Terminé en cours de lecture ou touchez à côté d’une vidéo d’une liste. iPod touch affiche le classement de la vidéo, la date de son ajout et d’autres informations. Vous pouvez également voir *une liste de vidéos associées ; vous pouvez toucher ces dernières pour les visualiser. Pour Procédez ainsi :Chapitre 6 Applications 67 Ajout de vos propres vidéos à YouTube Pour plus de renseignements sur la manière d’ajouter vos propres vidéos à YouTube, accédez à www.youtube.com et touchez Aide. Bourse Visualisation des cours de la Bourse Lorsque vous touchez Bourse dans le menu principal, le lecteur de titres boursiers affiche les cotations actualisées de tous vos titres. Elles le sont chaque fois que vous ouvrez Bourse si vous êtes connecté à Internet. L’actualisation des cotations peut faire preuve d’un décalage allant jusqu’à 20 minutes. Ajout d’un titre, d’un indice ou d’un fond au lecteur de titres boursiers 1 Touchez , puis . 2 Tapez le code du titre, le nom de la société, l’indice ou le nom du fond, puis touchez Rechercher. 3 Choisissez un élément dans la liste de recherche. Suppression d’un titre m Touchez et en regard du titre, et touchez Supprimer. Réorganisation de titres m Touchez . Faites ensuite glisser à côté d’un titre vers son nouvel emplacement dans la liste. Passage entre l’affichage de la variation des titres en pourcentage et celle en valeur m Touchez le nombre représentant la variation. Touchez-le pour repasser à l’autre mode de présentation. Vous pouvez également toucher et toucher % ou Nombres. Affichage de l’évolution d’un titre sur une période m Touchez le symbole d’un titre, puis touchez 1j, 1s, 1m, 3m, 6m, 1a ou 2a. Le graphique s’adapte alors pour afficher l’évolution sur la journée, la semaine, sur un, trois ou six mois, ou sur un ou deux ans. Retrouvez des informations relatives à un titre sur Yahoo.com m Touchez . Vous y retrouverez l’actualité du titre, des informations, des sites web en rapport avec le titre, etc.68 Chapitre 6 Applications Plans Plans propose des plans de rues, des photos satellite et des vues hybrides d’endroits du monde entier. Il vous est ainsi possible d’obtenir des indications détaillées pour la conduite et, dans certaines régions, des informations sur la circulation. Toujours applicable à certaines régions, vous pouvez retrouver votre localisation approximative pour obtenir l’itinéraire en partant d’un autre endroit ou vers une destination prévue.1 Recherche et visualisation de lieux Recherche d’un lieu et affichage sur une carte m Touchez le champ de recherche pour accéder au clavier, tapez une adresse, un carrefour, une zone, le nom d’un lieu, d’un signet, d’un contact répertorié dans votre liste ou un code postal. Touchez ensuite Rechercher. Une punaise indique la localisation sur la carte. Touchez la punaise pour afficher le nom ou la description du lieu. 1. Les informations des cartes, des itinéraires et des lieux dépendent de données recueillies et de services fournis par des partenaires de tierce partie. Ces services de fourniture de données sont sujets à modification et peuvent ne pas être disponibles dans toutes les zones géographiques, pouvant entraîner l’indisponibilité, l’inexactitude ou le manque d’informations de cartes, d’itinéraires ou de lieux. Pour en savoir plus, consultez www.apple.com/fr/ipodtouch. Afin de vous indiquer votre localisation, des données sont recueillies sans pour autant être en mesure de vous identifier personnellement. Si vous ne voulez pas que de telles données soient recueillies, n’utilisez simplement pas cette fonctionnalité. La non utilisation de cette fonctionnalité n’influe en rien sur le bon fonctionnement de votre iPod touch. AVERTISSEMENT :pour connaître toutes les informations importantes relatives à une conduite en toute sécurité, consultez le Guide d’informations importantes sur le produit accessible à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/support/manuals/ipod. Touchez pour obtenir des informations sur le lieu, accéder à l’itiné- raire ou ajouter le lieu à vos signets ou à votre liste des contactsChapitre 6 Applications 69 Affichage de votre localisation approximative sur une carte m Touchez . Un cercle vous indique votre localisation approximative. Elle est déterminée à l’aide des informations recueillies auprès de réseaux Wi-Fi locaux (si vous avez activé la fonction Wi-Fi). Plus les informations disponibles sont précises, plus le cercle est petit sur la carte. Cette fonctionnalité n’est pas disponible partout. Usage de la punaise m Touchez , puis Placer la punaise. Une punaise se place ainsi sur la carte ; vous pouvez la faire glisser à loisir sur l’emplacement de votre choix. Pour déplacer rapidement la punaise sur la zone affichée, touchez , puis Replacer la punaise. Zoom sur une partie de la carte m Pincez la carte à l’aide de deux doigts ou double-touchez la partie sur laquelle vous souhaitez zoomer. Procédez ainsi à nouveau pour zoomer plus encore. Zoom arrière m Pincez la carte, ou touchez la carte à l’aide de deux doigts Procédez ainsi à nouveau pour zoomer davantage en arrière. Sélection ou défilement d’une autre partie de la carte m Faites glisser l’affichage vers le haut, le bas, la gauche ou la droite.70 Chapitre 6 Applications Affichage d’une vue satellite ou hybride m Touchez , puis Satellite ou Hybride pour accéder simplement à une vue satellite ou pour afficher un plan des rues combiné à une vue satellite. Touchez Plan pour revenir à la présentation de la carte simple. Affichage du lieu d’habitation d’une personne répertoriée dans votre liste des contacts m Touchez dans le champ de recherche, puis Contacts pour choisir un contact. Pour retrouver ainsi une adresse, le contact doit présenter dans ses données au moins une adresse. S’il dispose de plusieurs adresses, vous devez choisir celle que vous recherchez. Vous pouvez aussi retrouver l’emplacement d’une adresse en touchant l’adresse directement dans Contacts. Placement d’un lieu dans les signets m Recherchez un lieu, touchez la punaise qui l’indique, touchez en regard du nom ou de la description, puis touchez Ajouter aux signets. Affichage d’un lieu placé dans les signets ou récemment affiché m Touchez dans le champ de recherche, puis Signets ou Récents. Ajout d’un lieu à votre liste des contacts m Recherchez un lieu, touchez la punaise qui l’indique, touchez en regard du nom ou de la description, puis touchez « Créer un nouveau Contact » ou « Ajouter à un contact existant ». Itinéraires Itinéraires de conduite 1 Touchez Itinéraires. 2 Saisissez les lieux de départ et d’arrivée dans les champs Début et Fin. Par défaut, iPod touch part de votre localisation approximative (en cas de disponibilité du service). Touchez dans l’un des deux champs puis choisissez un emplacement dans Signets (y compris votre localisation approximative et la punaise placée, le cas échéant), Récents ou Contacts. Chapitre 6 Applications 71 Par exemple, si l’adresse d’un proche figure dans votre liste de contacts, vous pouvez toucher Contacts et toucher le nom du proche au lieu de taper son adresse. Pour intervertir les lieux de départ et d’arrivée, touchez . 3 Touchez Itinéraire, puis effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes :  Pour afficher un itinéraire étape par étape, touchez Début, puis afin d’afficher le tronçon suivant du parcours. Touchez pour revenir en arrière.  Pour afficher tous les itinéraires repris dans une liste, touchez , puis Liste. Touchez un élément de la liste pour accéder à une carte indiquant le tronçon correspondant du parcours. La durée de conduite approximative apparaît en haut de l’écran. Si des informations sur le trafic routier sont disponibles, le temps de conduite s’adapte en conséquence. Vous pouvez également obtenir des itinéraires en recherchant un lieu sur la carte, en touchant la punaise qui l’indique, en touchant en regard du nom, puis en touchant « Itinéraire jusqu’ici » ou « Itinéraire à partir d’ici ».. Affichage ou masquage des conditions de circulation Lorsque cela est possible, les conditions de circulation sur les autoroutes s’affichent sur la carte. m Touchez , puis Afficher le trafic ou Masquer le trafic. Selon les conditions de circulation, des codes de couleur sont attribués aux autoroutes : Si vous touchez Afficher le trafic mais qu’aucune couleur ne suit le tracé des autoroutes, il se peut que vous deviez effectuer un zoom arrière pour revenir aux principaux axes routiers, ou qu’aucune information routière n’existe pour cette zone. Trafic routier Gris = aucune information disponible pour le moment Rouge = moins de 40 km/h Jaune = de 40 à 75 km/h Vert = plus de 75 km/h72 Chapitre 6 Applications Inversion des points de départ et d’arrivée, pour une conduite dans l’autre sens m Touchez . Si ne s’affiche pas, touchez Liste, puis Modifier. Affichage d’itinéraires consultés dernièrement m Touchez dans le champ de recherche, puis Récents. Recherche et contacts de professionnels Recherche de professionnels dans une région 1 Recherchez un lieu (tel qu’une ville et une région ou un pays, ou une adresse postale) ou faites défiler l’affichage jusqu’à un lieu sur une carte. 2 Tapez le type de professionnel dans le champ de texte et touchez Rechercher. Les punaises indiquent les lieux qui répondent aux critères. Par exemple, si vous pointez sur votre ville, que vous tapez « films », puis touchez Recherche, les punaises désignent alors tous les cinémas de votre ville. Touchez la punaise qui indique un professionnel pour révéler son nom ou sa description. Recherche de professionnels sans passer au préalable par son lieu m Tapez une description, par exemple :  restaurants lyon fr  apple inc new york Appel à un professionnel ou itinéraire pour y accéder m Touchez la punaise qui indique un professionnel, puis touchez en regard de son nom. Vous pouvez ensuite procéder comme suit :  Selon les informations disponibles sur l’entreprise ou le professionnel, vous pouvez toucher l’adresse électronique pour lui envoyer un courrier ou l’adresse web pour visiter son site web.  Pour obtenir l’itinéraire pour vous rendre sur les lieux, touchez « Itinéraire jusqu’ici » ou « Itinéraire à partir d’ici ». Pour se rendre sur les lieux Pour accéder au site web Pour appeler Touchez pour accé- der à la fiche de contactChapitre 6 Applications 73  Pour ajouter le professionnel à votre liste de contacts, faites défiler l’affichage et touchez « Créer un nouveau contact » ou « Ajouter à un contact existant ». Affichage de la liste des professionnels trouvés À partir de l’écran Plan, touchez Liste. Touchez une entreprise pour afficher son emplacement sur la carte, ou touchez en regard de son nom pour accéder à ses données. Météo Affichage de bulletins météo Touchez Météo dans le menu principal pour afficher la température actuelle et un bulletin de prévisions à six jours pour la ville de votre choix. Vous pouvez mettre plusieurs villes en mémoire pour accéder rapidement à leur bulletin respectif. Si le tableau météo s’affiche en bleu clair, il fait jour dans la ville en question, c’est-à- dire qu’il est entre 6 h 00 et 18 h 00. Si le tableau s’affiche en bleu foncé, il fait alors nuit, c’est-à-dire qu’il est entre 18 h 00 et 6 h 00. Passage à une autre ville m Feuilletez vers la gauche ou la droite le nombre de points sous le tableau météo indiquant le nombre de villes en mémoire. Réorganisation des villes m Touchez . Faites ensuite glisser le symbole en regard d’une ville vers son nouvel emplacement dans la liste. Prévisions à six jours Température actuelle Conditions actuelles Minima et maxima du jour Ajout et suppression de villes Nombre de villes en mémoire Écran Météo74 Chapitre 6 Applications Ajout d’une ville 1 Touchez , puis . 2 Saisissez le nom d’une ville ou un code postal, puis touchez Rechercher. 3 Choisissez une ville dans la liste de recherche. Suppression d’une ville m Touchez et en regard d’une ville, puis touchez Supprimer. Températures en Fahrenheit ou en Celsius sur l’iPod touch m Touchez , puis ºF ou ºC. Affichage d’informations sur une ville en accédant à Yahoo.com m Touchez . Vous pouvez visualiser entre autres un bulletin météo plus détaillé, des nouvelles et des sites web associés à la ville. Horloge Ajout et affichage d’horloges pour des lieux du monde entier Vous pouvez ajouter plusieurs horloges afin d’afficher l’heure dans des villes importantes et des fuseaux horaires du monde entier. Affichage d’horloges m Touchez Horloge. Si la face de l’horloge est blanche, il fait jour dans la ville correspondance. Si elle est noire, il fait nuit. Si vous avez plus de quatre horloges, faites défiler pour toutes les voir. Ajout d’une horloge m Touchez Horloges puis touchez et tapez le nom d’une ville. La liste des villes correspondant à ce que vous avez tapé apparaît au-dessous. Touchez une ville pour ajouter une horloge qui lui correspond. Si vous ne voyez pas la ville ou vous vous trouvez, essayez une ville importante située dans le même fuseau horaire. Suppression d’une horloge m Touchez Horloges puis Modifier. Touchez ensuite à côté d’une horloge, puis Supprimer.Chapitre 6 Applications 75 Disposition des horloges m Touchez Horloges puis Modifier. Faites ensuite glisser à côté d’une horloge vers un autre endroit de la liste. Réglage des réveils Vous pouvez régler plusieurs alarmes. Réglez chaque alarme de manière qu’elle se répète les jours que vous indiquez ou qu’elle ne sonne qu’une fois. Réglage d’une alarme m Touchez Alarme et , puis effectuez l’un des réglages suivants :  Pour régler une alarme de manière qu’elle se répète certains jours, touchez Récurrence et choisissez les jours.  Pour choisir le son de l’alarme, touchez Sonorité.  Pour indiquer si un rappel est associé à l’alarme, activez ou désactivez Rappel d’alarme. Si l’option Rappel d’alarme est activée et que vous touchez Rappel d’alarme lorsque l’alarme sonne, celle-ci s’arrête et sonne à nouveau dix minutes plus tard.  Pour associer une description à l’alarme, touchez Description. L’iPod touch affiche le libellé lorsque l’alarme sonne. Si au moins une alarme est réglée et activée, l’icône apparaît dans la barre d’état, en haut de l’écran. Activation/désactivation d’une alarme m Touchez Alarme et activez ou désactivez l’alarme de votre choix. Si l’alarme vient à être désactivée, elle ne sonne plus jusqu’à ce que vous la réactiviez. Si une alarme est réglée pour ne sonner qu’une fois, elle se désactive automatiquement après avoir sonné. Vous pouvez la réactiver ultérieurement. Modification des réglages d’une alarme m Touchez Alarme puis Modifier, puis touchez à côté de l’alarme que vous souhaitez modifier. Suppression d’une alarme m Touchez Alarme puis Modifier, puis touchez à côté de l’alarme et touchez Supprimer. Utilisation du chronomètre Utilisation du chronomètre pour compter le temps m Touchez Chronomètre. Touchez Démarrer pour lancer le chronomètre. Pour enregistrer les temps au tour, touchez Tour après chaque tour. Touchez Arrêter pour interrompre le chronomètre puis touchez Démarrer pour qu’il reprenne. Touchez Effacer pour remettre le chronomètre à zéro. Si vous démarrez le chronomètre puis passez à une autre application de l’iPod touch, le chronomètre continue à fonctionner en arrière-plan.76 Chapitre 6 Applications Réglage de la minuterie Réglage de la minuterie m Touchez Minuterie, puis faites défiler pour régler le nombre d’heures et de minutes. Touchez À expiration pour choisir le son qu’émet l’iPod touch lorsque la minuterie s’arrête. Touchez Démarrer pour lancer la minuterie. Réglage une minuterie de veille m Réglez la minuterie, puis touchez À expiration et choisissez Mettre l’iPod en veille. Lorsqu’une minuterie de veille est définie, l’iPod touch arrête de lire de la musique ou des vidéos lorsque la minuterie s’arrête. Si vous démarrez la minuterie puis passez à une autre application de l’iPod touch, la minuterie continue à fonctionner en arrière-plan. Calculette Utilisation de la calculette m Effectuez des additions, soustractions, multiplications et divisions comme sur une calculatrice normale. Lorsque vous touchez sur le bouton d’addition, de soustraction, de multiplication ou de division, un anneau blanc apparaît autour du bouton pour indiquer l’opération à effectuer. Utilisation des fonctions de mémoire m C :touchez pour effacer le nombre affiché. m M+ :touchez pour ajouter le nombre affiché au nombre en mémoire. Si la mémoire ne contient aucun nombre, touchez pour stocker en mémoire le nombre affiché. m M– :touchez pour soustraire le nombre affiché du nombre en mémoire. m MR/MC :touchez une fois pour remplacer le nombre affiché par le nombre en mémoire. Touchez deux fois pour effacer la mémoire. Si le bouton MR/MC est entouré d’un anneau blanc, un nombre est stocké en mémoire. Si zéro (« 0 ») est affiché, touchez une fois pour voir le nombre stocké en mémoire.Chapitre 6 Applications 77 Notes Rédaction, lecture et envoi de notes par courrier électronique Les notes sont classées par date de leur ajout, la note la plus récente figurant en début de liste. Les premiers mots de chaque note sont repris dans la liste. Ajout d’une note m Touchez , saisissez la note, puis touchez Terminé. Lecture ou modification d’une note m Touchez la note. Touchez n’importe quel endroit de la note pour activer le clavier et apporter vos modifications. Touchez ou pour afficher la note suivante ou précédente. Suppression d’une note m Touchez la note, puis . Envoi d’une note par courrier électronique m Touchez la note, puis . Pour envoyer une note par courrier électronique, vous devez activer la fonction de messagerie électronique sur l’iPod touch (voir la rubrique « Configuration de comptes de messagerie » à la page 56).7 78 7 Réglages Touchez Réglages pour ajuster les réglages de l’iPod touch. Les réglages vous permettent de personnaliser les applications de l’iPod touch, de régler la date et l’heure, de configurer les connexions Wi-Fi et de saisir d’autres préfé- rences pour l’iPod touch. Wi-Fi Les réglages Wi-Fi déterminent la manière et le moment où l’iPod touch rejoint un réseau Wi-Fi. Activation ou désactivation du mode Wi-Fi m Choisissez Wi-Fi puis activez ou désactivez le mode Wi-Fi. Accès à un réseau Wi-Fi m Choisissez Wi-Fi, patientez quelques instants pendant que l’iPod touch détecte les réseaux à portée puis sélectionnez un réseau. Si nécessaire, saisissez le mot de passe et touchez Rejoindre. (Les réseaux qui nécessitent un mot de passe sont accompagnés d’une icône de verrouillage.) Une fois que vous avez rejoint manuellement un réseau Wi-Fi, l’iPod touch s’y connecte automatiquement chaque fois que le réseau est à portée. Si plusieurs réseaux déjà utilisés sont à portée, l’iPod touch rejoint le dernier utilisé. Lorsque l’iPod touch est connecté à un réseau Wi-Fi, l’icône Wi-Fi située dans la barre d’état en haut de l’écran affiche la force de la connexion. Le nombre de barres affichées est proportionnel à la qualité du signal.Chapitre 7 Réglages 79 Réglage l’iPod touch de manière qu’il vous demande si vous souhaitez rejoindre à un nouveau réseau Cette option indique à l’iPod touch qu’il doit rechercher un autre réseau lorsque vous n’êtes pas à portée d’un réseau Wi-Fi auquel vous ne vous êtes jamais connecté. L’iPod touch affiche une liste des réseaux Wi-Fi disponibles à partir de laquelle vous pouvez choisir. (Les réseaux qui nécessitent un mot de passe sont accompagnés d’une icône de verrouillage.) m Choisissez Wi-Fi et activez ou désactivez l’option « Demander à joindre les réseaux ». Si vous activez cette option, vous pouvez toujours rejoindre manuellement de nouveaux réseaux. Oubli d’un réseau de manière que l’iPod touch ne le rejoigne pas automatiquement m Choisissez Wi-Fi et touchez à côté d’un réseau auquel vous vous êtes connecté auparavant. Touchez ensuite « Oublier ce réseau ». Accès à un réseau Wi-Fi fermé (un réseau Wi-Fi disponible qui n’apparaît pas encore dans la liste des réseaux balayés) m Choisissez Wi-Fi > Autre et saisissez le nom d’un réseau. Si le réseau requiert un mot de passe, touchez Sécurité, sélectionnez le type de sécurité qu’utilise le réseau puis touchez Autre réseau et saisissez le mot de passe. Vous devez connaître le nom du réseau, le mot de passe et le type de sécurité afin de vous connecter à un réseau fermé. Certains réseaux Wi-Fi peuvent nécessiter la saisie ou l’ajustement de réglages supplé- mentaires, par exemple un identificateur de client ou une adresse IP statique. Demandez à l’administrateur réseau quels réglages utiliser. Ajustement des réglages de manière à vous joindre à un réseau Wi-Fi m Choisissez Wi-Fi puis touchez à côté du réseau. Luminosité La luminosité de l’écran influe sur l’autonomie de la batterie. Baissez la luminosité de l’écran pour prolonger la période nécessaire avant de devoir charger l’iPod touch. Vous pouvez également utiliser Réglage automatique, qui est conçue pour préserver l’autonomie de la batterie. Réglage de la luminosité de l’écran m Choisissez Luminosité et faites glisser le curseur. Réglage de l’iPod touch de manière à ajuster ou non automatiquement la luminosité de l’écran m Choisissez Luminosité et activez ou désactivez Luminosité automatique. Si la luminosité automatique est activée, l’iPod touch ajuste la luminosité de l’écran en fonction des conditions d’éclairage actuelles à l’aide du capteur de lumière ambiante intégré.80 Chapitre 7 Réglages Général Les réglages Général comprennent la date et l’heure, la sécurité et d’autres réglages qui influent sur plusieurs applications. Ces réglages vous permettent également de trouver des informations concernant votre iPod touch et de restaurer les réglages d’origine de l’iPod touch. Informations Choisissez Général > Informations pour obtenir des informations sur l’iPod touch, notamment :  nombre de morceaux  nombre de vidéos  nombre de photos  capacité totale de stockage  stockage disponible  version de logiciel  numéro de série  numéro de modèle  adresse Wi-Fi  informations légales Fond d’écran Une photo apparaît en tant que fond d’écran lorsque que vous déverrouillez votre iPod touch. Vous pouvez sélectionner l’une des images fournies avec l’iPod touch ou utiliser une photo que vous avez synchronisée avec l’iPod touch à partir de votre ordinateur. Réglage du fond d’écran m Choisissez Général > Fond d’écran et choisissez une photo. Date et heure Ces réglages s’appliquent à l’heure affichée dans la barre d’état en haut de l’écran, aux horloges mondiales et à votre calendrier. Réglage de l’iPod touch de manière à afficher l’heure au format 24 heures ou 12 heures m Choisissez Général > Date et heure et activez ou désactivez le format 24 heures. Réglage du fuseau horaire m Choisissez Général > Date et heure > Fuseau horaire, puis saisissez votre emplacement. Réglage de la date et de l’heure 1 Choisissez Général > Date et heure > Régler la date et l’heure 2 Touchez un bouton pour sélectionner la date ou l’heure, puis utilisez les rouleaux pour modifier le réglage.Chapitre 7 Réglages 81 Réglages du calendrier Activation de la gestion de l’heure locale pour le calendrier m Choisissez Général > Date et heure et activez ou désactivez la gestion de l’heure locale. Lorsque l’option Heure locale est activée, Calendrier affiche les dates et heures des évé- nements dans le fuseau horaire réglé pour vos calendriers. Lorsque l’option est désactivée, Calendrier affiche les événements dans le fuseau horaire où vous vous trouvez. Réglage du fuseau horaire du calendrier m Choisissez Général > Date et heure > Fuseau horaire et choisissez le fuseau local de votre calendrier. International Utilisez les réglages International pour régler la langue de l’iPod touch, activer ou désactiver les claviers des différentes langues et régler les formats de date, d’heure et de numéro de téléphone pour votre région. Réglage de la langue pour l’iPod touch m Choisissez Général > International > Langue, choisissez la langue que vous souhaitez utiliser et touchez Terminé. Activation et désactivation des claviers internationaux Vous pouvez modifier la langue de votre clavier sur l’iPod touch ou rendre disponibles deux claviers ou plus. m Choisissez Général > International > Claviers et activez les claviers que vous souhaitez. Si plusieurs claviers sont activés, touchez pour basculer entre eux lorsque vous tapez. Lorsque vous touchez le symbole, le nom du nouveau clavier actif apparaît brièvement. Réglage des formats de date, d’heure et de numéro de téléphone m Choisissez Général > International > Format régional et choisissez votre région. Verrouillage automatique Le verrouillage de l’iPod touch désactive l’affichage de manière à économiser votre batterie et à empêcher toute utilisation de l’iPod touch par inadvertance. Réglage de la période après laquelle l’iPod touch se verrouille m Choisissez Général > Verrouillage auto. et choisissez une durée. Verrouillage par code Par défaut, l’iPod touch ne vous oblige pas à saisir un code pour le déverrouiller. Réglage d’un code m Choisissez Général > Verrouillage par code et saisissez un code à 4 chiffres. L’iPod touch vous demande alors de saisir le code pour le déverrouiller.82 Chapitre 7 Réglages Activation et désactivation du code m Choisissez Général > Verrouillage par code et touchez Activer le code puis saisissez votre code. Changement de code m Choisissez Général > Verrouillage par code et touchez Changer le code, saisissez le code actuel, puis deux fois le nouveau code. Si vous oubliez votre code, vous devrez restaurer le logiciel de l’iPod touch. Voir la page 95. Réglage de la durée à partir de laquelle votre code est nécessaire m Choisissez Général > Verrouillage par code > Exiger le code, puis sélectionnez la durée pendant laquelle l’iPod touch peut être verrouillé sans qu’un code soit nécessaire pour le déverrouiller. Effets sonores L’iPod touch peut produire des effets sonores lorsque vous :  avez un rendez-vous ;  verrouillez ou déverrouillez l’iPod touch ;  tapez sur le clavier. Pour activer ou désactiver les effets sonores m Choisissez Général > Effets sonores et sélectionnez si vous souhaitez que les effets sonores soit émis par le haut parleur interne, dans le casque ou les deux. Sélectionnez Non pour désactiver les effets sonores. Clavier Activation et désactivation de la capitalisation automatique Par défaut, l’iPod touch capitalise automatiquement le mot suivant lorsque vous tapez un signe de ponctuation terminant une phrase ou le caractère de retour à la ligne. m Choisissez Général > Clavier puis activez ou désactivez la capitalisation automatique. Réglage de l’activation du verrouillage des majuscules Si le verrouillage des majuscules est activé et que vous double-touchez la touche Maj du clavier, toutes les lettres que vous tapez sont en majuscules. La touche Maj devient bleue lorsque le verrouillage de majuscules est activé. m Choisissez Général > Clavier et activez ou désactivez le verrouillage des majuscules. Activation ou désactivation du raccourci « . » Le raccourci « . » vous permet de double-toucher la barre d’espace pour saisir un point suivi d’un espace lors de la frappe. Il est activé par défaut. m Choisissez Général > Clavier et activez ou désactivez le raccourci « . ».Chapitre 7 Réglages 83 Activation et désactivation des claviers internationaux Vous pouvez modifier la langue de votre clavier sur l’iPod touch ou rendre disponibles deux claviers ou plus. m Choisissez Général > Claviers > Claviers internationaux et activez les claviers que vous souhaitez. Si plusieurs claviers sont activés, touchez pour basculer entre eux lorsque vous tapez. Lorsque vous touchez le symbole, le nom du nouveau clavier actif apparaît brièvement. Réinitialisation des réglages de l’iPod touch Réinitialisation de tous les réglages m Choisissez Général > Réinitialiser et touchez Réinitialiser tous les réglages. Vos préférences et réglages sont tous réinitialisés. Les données (par exemple vos contacts et calendriers) et vos fichiers multimédias (par exemple vos morceaux et vidéos) ne sont pas supprimés. Suppression de tout le contenu et de tous les réglages m Choisissez Général > Réinitialiser et touchez « Effacer contenu et réglages ». Toutes vos données et tous vos fichiers multimédias sont supprimés. Vous devez synchroniser l’iPod touch avec votre ordinateur pour restaurer les contacts, morceaux, vidéos et autres données et fichiers multimédias. Réinitialisation du dictionnaire du clavier m Choisissez Général > Réinitialiser et touchez Réinitialiser le dictionnaire clavier. Vous ajoutez des mots au dictionnaire du clavier en rejetant les mots que l’iPod touch suggère lors de la frappe. Touchez un mot pour rejeter la correction et ajouter votre mot au dictionnaire de clavier. La réinitialisation du dictionnaire de clavier efface tous les mots que vous avez ajoutés. Réinitialisation des réglages réseau m Choisissez Général > Réinitialiser et touchez Réinitialiser les réglages réseau. Lorsque vous réinitialisez les réglages réseau, la liste des réseaux que vous avez précédemment utilisés est supprimée. Le mode Wi-Fi est désactivé puis réactivé (en vous déconnectant des éventuels réseaux auxquels vous êtes connecté), et le réglage « Demander à rejoindre les réseaux » est activé.84 Chapitre 7 Réglages Musique Les réglages Musique s’appliquent aux morceaux, aux podcasts et aux livres audio. Réglage d’iTunes de manière à lire tous les morceaux au même niveau sonore iTunes peut régler automatiquement le volume des morceaux, de manière qu’ils soient lus au même volume relatif. m Dans iTunes, sélectionnez iTunes > Préférences si vous utilisez un Mac ou sélectionnez Édition > Préférences si vous utilisez un PC, puis cliquez sur Lecture et sélectionnez Égaliseur de volume. Vous pouvez régler l’iPod touch de manière à utiliser les réglages de volume d’iTunes. Réglage de l’iPod touch de manière à utiliser les réglages de volumes d’iTunes (Égaliseur de volume) m Choisissez Musique et activez l’égaliseur de volume. Réglage de la vitesse de lecture d’un livre audio Vous pouvez augmenter la vitesse de lecture des livres audio pour de manière à les entendre plus rapidement, ou diminuer la vitesse de manière à les entendre plus clairement. m Choisissez Musique > Vitesse des livres audio puis choisissez Lente, Normale ou Rapide. Utilisation de l’égaliseur pour modifier le son sur l’iPod touch de manière à s’adapter à un son ou un style particulier. m Choisissez Musique > Égaliseur et choisissez un réglage. Définition d’une limite de volume pour la musique et les vidéos m Choisissez Musique > Volume maximum et faites glisser le curseur pour ajuster le volume maximal. Touchez Verrouiller le volume maximum pour affecter un code de manière à éviter que le réglage ne soit modifié. Le réglage d’une limite de volume ne s’applique qu’à celle de la musique (y compris au volume des podcasts et des livres audio) et des vidéos (y compris les films loués), et seulement lorsqu’un casque, des enceintes ou des écouteurs sont branchés sur le port écouteurs de l’iPod touch. AVERTISSEMENT :pour connaître toutes les informations importantes relatives au risque de perte auditive, consultez le Guide d’informations importantes sur le produit accessible à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/support/manuals/ipod.Chapitre 7 Réglages 85 Vidéo Les réglages vidéo s’appliquent au contenu vidéo (y compris aux films loués). Vous pouvez régler à quel endroit reprendre la lecture des vidéos que vous avez démarrées auparavant, activer ou désactiver les sous-titres et régler l’iPod touch de manière à restituer les vidéos sur votre téléviseur. Réglage du point de reprise de la lecture m Choisissez Vidéo > Démarrer la lecture puis sélectionnez si vous souhaitez que les vidéos que vous avez commencer à regarder reprennent à l’endroit où vous avez arrêté. Activation et désactivation des sous-titres codés m Choisissez Vidéo et activez ou désactivez les sous-titres codés. Réglages de la sortie télévision Utilisez ces réglages pour définir la manière dont l’iPod touch restitue les vidéos sur votre téléviseur. Pour plus de renseignements sur l’utilisation de l’iPod touch pour restituer des vidéos sur votre téléviseur, consultez la section « Visionnage de vidéos sur un téléviseur connecté à l’iPod touch » à la page 35. Activation ou désactivation de l’écran large m Choisissez Vidéo et activez ou désactivez l’écran large. Réglage du signal de télévision sur NTSC ou PAL m Choisissez Vidéo > Signal télévision et sélectionnez NTSC ou PAL. NTSC et PAL sont des normes de diffusion de télévision. NTSC affiche 480i et PAL affiche 576i. Votre téléviseur peut utiliser l’une ou l’autre de ces normes suivant l’endroit où il a été commercialisé. Si vous n’êtes pas sûr du réglage à utiliser, vérifiez la documentation qui accompagne votre téléviseur. Photos Les réglages photo vous permettent d’indiquer la manière dont les diaporamas affichent vos photos. Réglage de la durée d’apparition de chaque diapositive m Choisissez Photos > Afficher chaque photo pendant et sélectionnez la durée. Réglage des effets de transition m Choisissez Photos > Transition puis sélectionnez l’effet de transition souhaité. Réglage de la répétition des diaporamas m Choisissez Photos et activez ou désactivez Boucle. Réglage de l’apparition séquentielle ou aléatoire des photos m Choisissez Réglages > Photos et activez ou désactivez Aléatoire.86 Chapitre 7 Réglages Courrier Les réglages de Courrier vous permettent de personnaliser votre compte de messagerie pour l’iPod touch. Les modifications que vous apportez à ces réglages ne sont pas synchronisées avec votre ordinateur, ce qui permet de configurer la messagerie pour l’iPod touch sans incidence sur les réglages de votre compte de messagerie présent sur votre ordinateur. Réglages de compte Les réglages de compte à mettre en œuvre sur l’iPod touch dépendent du type de votre compte (POP ou IMAP). Remarque :les comptes de messagerie Microsoft Outlook 2003 ou 2007 doivent être configurés pour le protocole IMAP de façon à fonctionner avec l’iPod touch. Arrêt d’utilisation d’un compte m Choisissez Courrier, sélectionnez un compte, puis Désactiver le compte. Si un compte est désactivé, l’iPod touch ne l’affiche pas et ne l’utilise plus pour envoyer ou recevoir du courrier électronique jusqu’à ce que vous le réactiviez. Ajustement de réglages avancés m Choisissez Courrier > Comptes, choisissez un compte, puis procédez de l’une des manières suivantes :  Pour indiquer si les brouillons, les messages envoyés et les messages supprimés sont stockés sur l’iPod touch ou à distance sur votre serveur de messagerie (comptes IMAP uniquement), touchez Avancé et choisissez Brouillons, Messages envoyés ou Messages supprimés. Si vous stockez des messages sur l’iPod touch, vous pouvez alors les consulter même si l’iPod touch n’est pas connecté à Internet.  Pour définir le moment où les messages supprimés doivent être supprimés définitivement de l’iPod touch, touchez Avancé, Supprimer, puis choisissez un délai : Jamais, Après un jour, Après une semaine ou Après un mois.  Pour ajuster les réglages du serveur de messagerie, sous « Serveur de réception » ou « Serveur d’envoi », touchez Nom d’hôte, Nom d’utilisateur ou Mot de passe. Demandez les réglages appropriés à l’administrateur de votre réseau ou à votre fournisseur d’accès à Internet.  Pour ajuster les réglages SSL et de mot de passe, touchez Avancé. Demandez les réglages appropriés à l’administrateur de votre réseau ou à votre fournisseur d’accès à Internet. Suppression d’un compte de messagerie de l’iPod touch m Choisissez Courrier, touchez le compte voulu, puis faites défiler l’affichage et touchez Supprimer le compte.Chapitre 7 Réglages 87 La suppression d’un compte de messagerie de l’iPod touch n’a aucune incidence sur le compte de messagerie de votre ordinateur. Réglages relatifs aux courriers électroniques iPod touch relève les nouveaux courriers de vos comptes lorsque vous ouvrez Courrier. Vous pouvez également configurer Courrier de façon à ce que ces messages soient relevés et téléchargés même si Courrier est fermé. Relève automatique des nouveaux messages par l’iPod touch m Choisissez Courrier > Relever le courrier, puis « manuellement », « toutes les 15 minutes », « toutes les 30 minutes » ou « toutes les heures ». Si vous possédez un compte de messagerie Yahoo!, les courriers électroniques sont automatiquement transférés à l’iPod touch au fur et à mesure qu’ils parviennent au serveur Yahoo!. Définition du nombre de messages affichés sur l’iPod touch m Choisissez Courrier > Afficher, puis choisissez un réglage. Vous avez le choix de visualiser les 25, 50, 75, 100 ou 200 messages les plus récents. Pour télécharger davantage de messages dans Courrier, faites défiler l’affichage jusqu’à la fin de la boîte de réception et touchez « Charger x messages de plus ». Définition du nombre de lignes d’aperçu pour chaque message de la liste m Choisissez Courrier > Aperçu, puis choisissez un réglage. Vous avez le choix d’afficher entre zéro et cinq lignes pour chaque message. Ainsi, vous pouvez vous faire une idée du contenu des messages mentionnés dans la liste d’une boîte à lettres. Définition de la taille minimale de police des messages m Choisissez Courrier > Taille de la police, puis choisissez Petite, Moyenne, Grande, Très grande ou Géante. Réglage de l’affichage des étiquettes À et Cc dans les listes de messages de l’iPod touch m Choisissez Courrier, puis activez ou désactivez Champs À/Cc. Si l’option « Champs À/Cc » est activé, ou en regard de chaque message de la liste indique si le message vous a été adressé directement ou si vous étiez mis en copie. Définition sur l’iPod touch pour la confirmation de la suppression des messages m Choisissez Réglages > Courrier, puis activez ou désactivez Confirmer suppression. Si l’option « Confirmer suppression » est activé, vous devez toucher , puis confirmer en touchant Supprimer pour vous débarrasser effectivement du message. À Cc88 Chapitre 7 Réglages Réglages d’envoi de courriers électroniques Envoi par l’iPod touch d’une copie de chaque message que vous envoyez m Choisissez Courrier, puis activez ou désactivez « Me mettre en Cci ». Ajout d’une signature à vos messages Vous pouvez configurer l’iPod touch de sorte à ajouter une signature (votre citation préférée ou vos nom, fonction et numéro de téléphone) dans chaque message que vous envoyez. m Choisissez Courrier > Signature, puis saisissez une signature. Définition du compte de messagerie par défaut Lorsque vous envoyez un message à partir d’une autre application iPod touch (en envoyant une photo à partir de Photos ou en touchant l’adresse électronique d’une entreprise dans Plans), celui-ci est transmis depuis votre compte de messagerie par défaut. m Choisissez Courrier > Compte par défaut, puis choisissez un compte. Safari Réglages généraux Vous pouvez utiliser Google ou Yahoo! pour effectuer des recherches sur Internet. Sélection d’un moteur de recherche m Choisissez Safari > Moteur de recherche puis sélectionnez le moteur de recherche que vous souhaitez utiliser. Réglages de sécurité Par défaut, Safari est réglé de manière à afficher certaines des éléments disponibles sur le Web, telles que certains films, animations et applications web. Vous pouvez souhaiter désactiver certaines de ces possibilités afin de contribuer à protéger votre iPod touch contre le risques liés à la sécurité sur Internet. Modification des réglages de sécurité m Choisissez Safari, puis effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes :  Pour activer ou désactiver JavaScript, activez ou désactivez JavaScript. JavaScript permet aux développeurs web de contrôler les éléments de la page. Par exemple, une page qui utilise JavaScript pourrait afficher la date et l’heure actuelles ou faire qu’une page liée apparaisse dans une nouvelle fenêtre surgissante.  Pour activer ou désactiver les modules externes, activez ou désactivez Modules. Les modules externes permettent à Safari de lire certains types de fichiers audio et vidéo et d’afficher des fichiers Microsoft Word et des documents Microsoft Excel.Chapitre 7 Réglages 89  Pour bloquer ou autoriser les fenêtres surgissantes, activez ou désactivez Bloquer les « pop-ups ». Le blocage des fenêtres surgissantes empêche seulement l’apparition des fenêtres surgissantes qui apparaissent lorsque vous fermez une page ou ouvrez une page en tapant son adresse. Il ne bloque pas les fenêtres surgissantes qui apparaissent lorsque vous cliquez sur un lien.  Pour régler si Safari accepte les cookies, touchez Accepter les cookies et choisissez Jamais, « Sites visités » ou Toujours. Un cookie est une information placée par un site web sur votre iPod touch afin que le site web puisse se souvenir de vous lorsque vous le consultez à nouveau. Les pages web peuvent ainsi être personnalisées pour vous en fonction des informations que vous pouvez avoir fournies. Certaines pages ne fonctionnent pas correctement tant que l’iPod touch n’est pas réglé pour accepter les cookies.  Pour effacer l’historique des pagesweb que vous avez consultées,touchez Effacer l’historique.  Pour effacer les cookies de Safari, touchez Effacer les cookies.  Pour effacer la mémoire cache, touchez Effacer la mémoire cache. La mémoire cache du navigateur stocke le contenu des pages de manière qu’elles s’ouvrent plus rapidement la prochaine fois que vous le consultez. Si une page que vous avez ouverte n’affiche pas de nouveau contenu, l’effacement de a mémoire cache est susceptible d’aider. Réglages développeur La console de débogage peut vous aider à résoudre les erreurs de page web. Lorsqu’elle est activée, la console apparaît automatiquement lorsqu’une erreur de page web se produit. Activation ou désactivation de la console de débogage m Choisissez Safari > Développeur et activez ou désactivez Console de débogage. Contacts Utilisez les réglages Contacts pour déterminer l’ordre de tri et d’affichage de vos contacts. Réglage de l’ordre de tri m Choisissez Réglages > Contacts > Ordre de tri et sélectionnez « Prénom Nom » ou « Nom Prénom ». Réglage de l’ordre d’affichage m Choisissez Réglages > Contacts > Ordre d’affichage et sélectionnez « Prénom Nom » ou « Nom Prénom ».90 Chapitre 7 Réglages Restauration ou transfert des réglages de votre iPod touch Lorsque vous branchez l’iPod touch sur votre ordinateur, les réglages de l’iPod touch sont automatiquement sauvegardés sur votre ordinateur. Il vous est possible de les restaurer au besoin, par exemple si vous achetez un nouvel iPod touch, et cherchez à y transférer vos anciens réglages. Vous pouvez aussi réinitialiser les données de l’iPod touch si vous rencontrez des problèmes pour vous connecter à un réseau Wi-Fi. Les données automatiquement sauvegardées incluent les notes, les favoris pour la prise de contact, les réglages audio et autres préférences. Restauration ou transfert des réglages Procédez de l’une des manières suivantes : m Branchez le nouvel iPod touch sur le même ordinateur que vous utilisiez avec votre ancien iPod touch, ouvrez iTunes, puis suivez les instructions à l’écran. m Réinitialisez les informations de l’iPod touch. Dans Réglages, choisissez Général > Réinitialiser, puis choisissez « Réinitialiser tous les réglages », « Supprimer contenu et réglages » ou « Réinitialiser les réglages réseau ». Branchez ensuite l’iPod touch sur votre ordinateur, ouvrez iTunes, puis suivez les instructions à l’écran. Lorsque vous réinitialisez les réglages réseau, la liste des réseaux que vous avez précé- demment utilisés est supprimée. Wi-Fi est désactivé puis réactivé : vous êtes alors déconnecté de tout réseau le cas échéant. Les réglages Wi-Fi et « Confirmer l’accès » restent activés. Suppression d’un ensemble de réglages sauvegardés m Ouvrez iTunes, puis choisissez iTunes > Préférences (sur un Mac) ou Édition > Préférences (sur un PC). Sélectionnez ensuite Synchronisation en cours, iPod touch, puis cliquez sur Supprimer la sauvegarde. L’iPod touch n’a pas besoin d’être branché sur votre ordinateur. 91 A A Conseils et dépannage La plupart des problèmes que rencontre l’iPod touch peuvent se résoudre rapidement en suivant les conseils énumérés dans ce chapitre. Suggestions à caractère général Si l’écran est noir ou affiche une image représentant une batterie presque déchargée L’iPod touch n’est presque plus alimenté et doit être rechargé pendant un délai pouvant aller jusqu’à dix minutes avant de pouvoir l’utiliser. Pour en savoir plus sur le rechargement de la batterie de l’iPod touch, reportez-vous à la rubrique « Recharge de la batterie » à la page 23. Si l’iPod touch n’apparaît pas dans iTunes ou si vous ne parvenez pas à synchroniser les données de l’iPod touch  La batterie de l’iPod touch peut avoir besoin d’être rechargée. Pour en savoir plus sur le rechargement de la batterie de l’iPod touch, reportez-vous à la rubrique « Recharge de la batterie » à la page 23.  Si cela ne donne rien, débranchez tous les autres périphériques USB de votre ordinateur et connectez l’iPod touch à un autre port USB 2.0 de votre ordinateur (qui ne soit pas un port sur votre clavier). ou92 Annexe A Conseils et dépannage  Si cela ne donne toujours rien, éteignez l’iPod touch puis rallumez-le. Maintenez le bouton de veille/réactivation enfoncé, situé en haut de l’iPod touch pendant quelques secondes jusqu’à ce que le curseur rouge apparaisse, puis faites glisser le curseur. Maintenez ensuite le bouton de veille/réactivation enfoncé jusqu’à ce que le logo Apple apparaisse.  Si cela reste sans effet, redémarrez votre ordinateur et rebranchez l’iPod touch sur votre ordinateur.  Si cela ne donne rien, téléchargez et installez (ou réinstallez, le cas échéant) la dernière version d’iTunes, téléchargeable à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/itunes. Si l’iPod touch ne s’allume pas ou si l’affichage reste bloqué ou ne répond pas  Il se peut que l’iPod touch doive être rechargé. Voir « Recharge de la batterie » à la page 23.  Maintenez enfoncé le bouton du menu principal pendant au moins six secondes jusqu’à ce que l’application que vous utilisiez se ferme.  Si cela ne donne rien, éteignez l’iPod touch puis rallumez-le. Maintenez le bouton de veille/réactivation enfoncé, situé en haut de l’iPod touch pendant quelques secondes jusqu’à ce que le curseur rouge apparaisse, puis faites glisser le curseur. Maintenez ensuite le bouton de veille/réactivation enfoncé jusqu’à ce que le logo Apple apparaisse.  Si cela ne donne rien, réinitialisez l’iPod touch. Maintenez enfoncé les boutons de veille/réactivation et du menu principal pendant au moins dix secondes jusqu’à ce que le logo Apple apparaisse. Si l’iPod touch continue de se bloquer ou ne répond toujours pas après l’avoir réinitialisé  Réinitialisez les réglages de l’iPod touch. Dans le menu principal, choisissez Réglages > Général > Réinitialiser > Réinitialiser tous les réglages. Toutes vos préférences sont réinitialisées, mais vos données restent intactes à l’issue de l’opération.  Si cela ne donne rien, effacez tout contenu de l’iPod touch. Dans le menu principal, choisissez Réglages > Général > Réinitialiser > Effacer contenu et réglages. Toutes vos préférences sont réinitialisées, et toutes vos données sont supprimées de l’iPod touch.  Si cela reste sans effet, restaurez le logiciel de l’iPod touch. Voir la rubrique « Mise à jour et restauration du logiciel de l’iPod touch » à la page 95. Si l’iPod touch ne produit pas de son  Débranchez puis reconnectez les écouteurs. Assurez-vous que le connecteur est bien enfoncé.  Vérifiez que le volume n’est pas complètement coupé.  Il est possible que la musique sur l’iPod touch soit en pause. Dans le menu principal, touchez Musique, À l’écoute, puis .Annexe A Conseils et dépannage 93  Vérifiez si la limite du volume est activée. Dans le menu principal, choisissez Réglages > Musique > Volume maximum. Pour en savoir plus, consultez la page 84.  Assurez-vous que vous utilisez bien iTunes 7.6 ou ultérieur (rendez-vous à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/itunes). Les morceaux acquis auprès de l’iTunes Store à l’aide de versions antérieures d’iTunes ne sont pas lisibles sur l’iPod touch jusqu’à ce que vous mettiez iTunes à niveau.  Si vous utilisez le port de sortie de ligne du socle proposé en option, assurez-vous que vos enceintes ou haut-parleurs externes sont sous tension et en état de fonctionnement. Si l’iPod touch affiche un message indiquant que l’accessoire n’est pas pris en charge par l’iPod L’accessoire que vous avez raccordé ne fonctionnera pas avec l’iPod touch. S’il vous est impossible de reproduire un morceau que vous venez d’acheter Il se peut que votre achat soit toujours en cours de téléchargement. Fermez puis rouvrez Musique, puis réessayez de lire le morceau. Si vous ne parvenez pas à ajouter ou à lire un morceau, une vidéo ou tout autre élément Il se peut que l’élément multimédia ait été encodé dans un format que iPod touch ne prend pas en charge. Les formats de fichier audio suivants sont pris en charge par l’iPod touch. Ils englobent les formats de livres audio et de podcasts :  AAC (M4A, M4B, M4P, jusqu’à 320 Kbps)  Apple Lossless (format compressé de haute qualité)  MP3 (jusqu’à 320 Kbps)  MP3 VBR (Variable Bit Rate, débit binaire variable)  WAV  AA (texte parlé audible.com, formats 2, 3 et 4)  AAX (texte parlé audible.com, format AudibleEnhanced)  AIFF Les formats de fichier vidéo suivants sont pris en charge par l’iPod touch :  H.264 (profil de base de niveau 3.0)  MPEG-4 (profil simple) Un morceau encodé au format Apple Lossless présente un son de qualité CD optimale, mais n’occupe que la moitié environ de l’espace utilisé par un morceau encodé au format AIFF ou WAV. Un même titre encodé au format AAC ou MP3 occupe encore moins d’espace. Lors de l’importation de musique à partir d’un CD à l’aide d’iTunes, le son est converti par défaut au format AAC. iTunes pour Windows vous permet de convertir les fichiers WMA non protégés au format AAC ou MP3. Cela peut s’avérer utile si vous disposez d’une bibliothèque de musique encodée au format WMA. 94 Annexe A Conseils et dépannage L’iPod touch ne prend pas en charge les fichiers audio au format WMA, MPEG Layer 1, MPEG Layer 2 ou au format 1 audible.com. Si vous possédez dans votre bibliothèque iTunes un morceau ou une vidéo non pris en charge par l’iPod touch, il se peut que la conversion dans un format que l’iPod touch prend en charge vous soit possible. Reportez-vous à l’Aide iTunes pour en savoir plus. Si vous ne parvenez pas à vous souvenir de votre code Vous devez restaurer le logiciel de l’iPod touch. Voir la rubrique « Mise à jour et restauration du logiciel de l’iPod touch » à la page 95. Si vous avez saisi des contacts sur l’iPod touch que vous ne voulez pas synchroniser avec votre ordinateur Remplacez les contacts de l’iPod touch par les données issues de votre ordinateur. 1 Ouvrez iTunes. 2 Lorsque vous branchez l’iPod touch à votre ordinateur, maintenez les touches Commande + Option enfoncées (sur un Mac) ou Maj + Contrôle (sur un PC) jusqu’à ce que l’iPod touch apparaisse dans la liste Source d’iTunes. Cela empêche que l’iPod touch lance la synchronisation automatiquement. 3 Sélectionnez l’iPod touch dans la liste Source d’iTunes, puis cliquez sur l’onglet Infos. 4 Sous « Remplacer les informations sur cet iPod », sélectionnez Contacts. Vous pouvez en sélectionner plusieurs. 5 Cliquez sur Appliquer. Les contacts sur l’iPod touch sont alors remplacés par ceux de votre ordinateur. Lors de la synchronisation suivante, l’iPod touch se synchronise normalement en ajoutant sur l’ordinateur les données enregistrées sur l’iPod touch et vice-versa. Si vous ne parvenez pas à synchroniser les données avec le carnet d’adresses Yahoo! Il se peut qu’iTunes ne soit pas en mesure de se connecter à Yahoo!. Assurez-vous que votre ordinateur est bien connecté à Internet et que vous que vous avez saisi les bons identifiant et mot de passe Yahoo! dans iTunes. Branchez l’iPod touch sur votre ordinateur, cliquez sur l’onglet Infos dans iTunes, sélectionnez « Synchroniser les contacts du carnet d’adresses Yahoo! », puis saisissez vos identifiant et mot de passe Yahoo!. Si des contacts supprimés de l’iPod touch ou de votre ordinateur ne le sont pas du carnet d’adresses Yahoo! après une synchronisation carnet d’adresses Yahoo!, Le carnet d’adresses ne permet pas la suppression de contacts associés à un identifiant Messenger par le biais de la synchronisation. Pour supprimer un contact associé à un identifiant Messenger, ouvrez une session sur votre compte Yahoo! en ligne et supprimez le contact à l’aide du carnet d’adresses Yahoo!. Annexe A Conseils et dépannage 95 Si vous ne parvenez pas à accéder à l’iTunes Wi-Fi Music Store Pour pouvoir utiliser l’iTunes Wi-Fi Music Store, vous devez accéder à un réseau Wi-Fi connecté à Internet à l’aide de votre iPod touch. Pour plus de renseignements sur la connexion à un réseau Wi-Fi, consultez la page 22. Le magasin en ligne iTunes Wi-Fi Music Store n’est pas disponible dans tous les pays. Si vous ne parvenez pas à acheter de la musique sur l’iTunes Wi-Fi Music Store Pour acheter des morceaux auprès de l’iTunes Wi-Fi Music Store (disponible uniquement dans certains pays), vous devez disposer d’un compte iTunes Store et avoir ouvert une session sous ce compte la dernière fois que vous avez synchronisé l’iPod touch avec iTunes. Si un message vous indique qu’aucune information sur votre compte n’est trouvée lorsque vous essayez d’acheter de la musique, ouvrez iTunes, ouvrez une session sous votre compte iTunes Store, branchez votre iPod touch puis lancez la synchronisation. Mise à jour et restauration du logiciel de l’iPod touch iTunes vous permet de mettre à jour ou de restaurer le logiciel de l’iPod touch. Mettez régulièrement à jour l’iPod touch pour vous assurer que vous disposez toujours du dernier logiciel en date. Vous avez également la possibilité de restaurer le logiciel pour revenir à l’état d’origine de iPod touch.  Si vous effectuez une mise à jour, le logiciel de l’iPod touch n’affecte en rien vos réglages et vos morceaux.  Si vous procédez à une restauration, toutes les données sur l’iPod touch sont effacées, y compris les morceaux, les vidéos, les contacts, les photos, les données de calendrier et toute autre donnée. Tous les réglages de l’iPod touch reprennent alors leur état d’origine. Mise à jour ou restauration de l’iPod touch 1 Assurez-vous que vous disposez d’une connexion Internet et avez installé la dernière version d’iTunes depuis l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/itunes. 2 Connectez l’iPod touch à votre ordinateur. 3 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez iPod touch dans la liste Source puis cliquez sur l’onglet Résumé. 4 Cliquez sur « Rechercher les mises à jour ». iTunes vous indique alors si une version plus récente du logiciel de l’iPod touch est disponible. 5 Cliquez sur Mettre à jour pour installer la dernière version en date du logiciel ou cliquez sur Restaurer pour reprendre les réglages d’origine de l’iPod touch et effacer toutes les données sur l’iPod touch. Suivez les instructions à l’écran pour terminer le processus de restauration.96 Annexe A Conseils et dépannage Utilisation des fonctionnalités d’accessibilité de l’iPod touch Les fonctions suivantes peuvent vous faciliter l’usage de l’iPod touch si vous avez un handicap. Sous-titrage codé Si des vidéos prévoient le sous-titrage codé, vous pouvez activer la fonction. Voir « Activation et désactivation des sous-titres codés » à la page 85. Taille minimale de police dans les courriers électroniques Vous pouvez définir une taille de police minimale pour le texte composant les courriers électroniques sur la taille Grande, Très grande ou Géante pour en améliorer la lisibilité. Voir la rubrique « Définition de la taille minimale de police des messages » à la page 87. Zoom Double-touchez ou pincez des pages web, des photos et des cartes pour les agrandir. Voir la page 19. Accès universel sous Mac OS X Tirez parti des fonctionnalités d’accès universel de Mac OS X lorsque vous utilisez iTunes pour synchroniser des données de votre bibliothèque iTunes avec votre iPod touch. Dans le Finder, choisissez Aide > Aide Mac, puis recherchez les termes « accès universel ». Pour en savoir plus sur les fonctionnalités d’accessibilité de l’iPod touch et de Mac OS X, rendez-vous à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/accessibility. 97 B B En savoir plus, service et assistance Vous trouverez plus d’informations sur l’utilisation de l’iPod touch dans l’aide à l’écran et sur le Web. Le tableau suivant indique où trouver plus d’informations sur les logiciels et services liés à l’iPod. Pour en savoir plus sur : Procédez ainsi : L’usage de l’iPod touch en toute sécurité Rendez-vous à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/support/manuals/ipod pour accéder au Guide d’informations importantes sur le produit le plus récent, et notamment les informations à jour relatives à la sécurité et à la réglementation en vigueur. Le support iPod touch, les astuces, les forums d’utilisateur et les téléchargements de logiciels Apple Accédez à www.apple.com/fr/support/ipodtouch. Les toutes dernières informations sur l’ iPod touch Accédez à www.apple.com/fr/ipodtouch. L’utilisation d’iTunes Ouvrez iTunes et choisissez Aide > Aide iTunes. Pour un didacticiel sur iTunes (disponible seulement dans certains pays), accédez à www.apple.com/fr/support/itunes. L’utilisation d’iPhoto dans Mac OS X Ouvrez iPhoto et sélectionnez Aide > Aide iPhoto. L’utilisation de Carnet d’adresses dans Mac OS X Ouvrez Carnet d’adresses et choisissez Aide > Aide Carnet d’adresses. L’utilisation d’iCal sous Mac OS X Ouvrez iCal et sélectionnez Aide > Aide iCal. Microsoft Outlook, Carnet d’adresses Windows, Adobe Photoshop Album et Adobe Photoshop Elements Consultez la documentation fournie avec ces applications. La recherche du numéro de série de votre iPod touch Regardez au dos de votre iPod touch ou choisissez Réglages > Général > Informations à partir de l’écran principal. L’obtention du service assuré par la garantie Commencez par suivre les conseils prodigués dans ce guide et dans les ressources en ligne. Accédez ensuite à www.apple.com/fr/support ou consultez le Guide d’informations importantes sur le produit fourni avec l’iPod touch.K Apple Inc. © 2008 Apple Inc. Tous droits réservés. Apple, le logo Apple, AirPort, Cover Flow, iCal, iPhoto, iPod, iTunes, Mac, Macintosh et Mac OS sont des marques d’Apple Inc. déposées aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays. Finder, Safari et Shuffle sont des marques d’Apple Inc. .Mac est une marque de service d’Apple Inc., déposée aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays. iTunes Store est une marque de service d’Apple Inc. Adobe et Photoshop sont des marques ou des marques déposées d’Adobe Systems Incorporated aux États-Unis et/ou dans d’autres pays. Les autres noms de produits et d’entreprises mentionnés dans le présent document peuvent être des marques de leurs propriétaires respectifs. La mention de produits tiers n’est effectuée qu’à des fins informatives et ne constitue en aucun cas une approbation ni une recommandation. Apple n’assume aucune responsabilité vis-à-vis des performances ou de l’utilisation de ces produits. Tout arrangement, accord ou garantie, le cas échéant, s’applique directement entre le revendeur et les utilisateurs potentiels. Tous les efforts nécessaires ont été mis en œuvre pour que les informations contenues dans ce manuel soient les plus exactes possibles. Apple n’est pas responsable des erreurs typographiques. Le produit décrit dans ce manuel incorpore une technologie de protection des droits d’auteur qui est protégée par des droits de méthodes de certains brevets américains et autres droits de propriété intellectuelle détenus par Macrovision Corporation et autres propriétaires des droits. L’utilisation de cette technologie de protection de droits d’auteur est soumise à l’autorisation de Macrovision Corporation et est destinée à un usage personnel ou à d’autres utilisations de visionnage limitées uniquement, à moins d’obtenir une autorisation de Macrovision Corporation pour d’autres utilisations. L’ingénierie inverse ou le désassemblage est interdit. Le dispositif fait l’objet des. numéros de brevet américains 4,631,603, 4,577,216, 4,819,098 et 4,907,093 sous licence uniquement pour des utilisations de visionnage limitées. F019-1215/03-2008 iPod touch User Guide For iOS 5.1 SoftwareContents 9 Chapter 1: iPod touch at a Glance 9 iPod touch overview 10 Accessories 10 Buttons 12 Status icons 13 Chapter 2: Getting Started 13 Viewing this user guide on iPod touch 13 What you need 13 Setting up iPod touch 14 Connecting iPod touch to your computer 14 Connecting to the Internet 15 Setting up mail and other accounts 15 Managing content on your iOS devices 16 iCloud 17 Syncing with iTunes 18 Chapter 3: Basics 18 Using apps 21 Customizing the Home screen 23 Typing 26 Printing 27 Searching 28 Voice Control 29 Notifications 30 Twitter 30 AirPlay 31 Bluetooth devices 32 Battery 33 Security features 34 Cleaning iPod touch 34 Restarting or resetting iPod touch 35 Chapter 4: Music 35 Adding music and audio 35 Playing songs and other audio 37 Additional audio controls 37 Podcast and audiobook controls 38 Using Voice Control with Music 38 Browsing album artwork in Cover Flow 39 Viewing tracks on an album 39 Searching audio content 39 iTunes Match 240 Genius 41 Playlists 41 Home Sharing 42 Chapter 5: Videos 42 About Videos 42 Playing videos 43 Searching for videos 43 Watching rented movies 44 Watching videos on a TV 44 Deleting videos from iPod touch 44 Using Home Sharing 45 Setting a sleep timer 45 Converting videos for iPod touch 46 Chapter 6: Messages 46 Sending and receiving messages 47 Sending messages to a group 47 Sending photos, videos, and more 48 Editing conversations 48 Searching messages 49 Chapter 7: FaceTime 49 About FaceTime 50 Making a FaceTime call 50 While on a FaceTime call 51 Chapter 8: Camera 51 About Camera 51 Taking photos and videos 52 Viewing, sharing, and printing 53 Editing photos 53 Trimming videos 53 Uploading photos and videos to your computer 54 Photo Stream 55 Chapter 9: Photos 55 Viewing photos and videos 56 Viewing slideshows 56 Organizing photos and videos 57 Sharing photos and videos 57 Printing photos 58 Chapter 10: Game Center 58 About Game Center 59 Signing in to Game Center 59 Purchasing and downloading games 59 Playing games 59 Playing with friends 60 Game Center settings Contents 361 Chapter 11: Mail 61 Checking and reading email 62 Working with multiple accounts 62 Sending mail 63 Using links and detected data 63 Viewing attachments 63 Printing messages and attachments 64 Organizing mail 64 Searching mail 64 Mail accounts and settings 66 Chapter 12: Reminders 66 About Reminders 67 Setting a reminder 67 Managing reminders in list view 68 Managing reminders in date view 68 Managing completed reminders 68 Searching reminders 69 Chapter 13: Safari 69 Viewing webpages 70 Links 70 Reading List 70 Reader 70 Entering text and filling out forms 71 Searching 71 Bookmarks and history 71 Printing webpages, PDFs, and other documents 71 Web clips 72 Chapter 14: Newsstand 72 About Newsstand 72 Reading the latest issues 73 Chapter 15: Calendar 73 About Calendar 73 Viewing your calendars 74 Adding events 74 Responding to invitations 74 Searching calendars 75 Subscribing to calendars 75 Importing calendar events from Mail 75 Calendar accounts and settings 76 Chapter 16: YouTube 76 About YouTube 76 Browsing and searching for videos 77 Playing videos 77 Keeping track of videos you like 78 Sharing videos, comments, and ratings 78 Getting information about a video 78 Sending videos to YouTube 4 Contents79 Chapter 17: Stocks 79 Viewing stock quotes 80 Getting more information 81 Chapter 18: Maps 81 Finding locations 82 Getting directions 83 Getting and sharing info about a location 83 Showing traffic conditions 84 Map views 85 Chapter 19: Weather 85 Getting weather information 86 Chapter 20: Notes 86 About Notes 86 Writing notes 87 Reading and editing notes 87 Searching notes 87 Printing or emailing notes 88 Chapter 21: Clock 88 About Clock 88 Setting world clocks 89 Setting alarms 89 Using the stopwatch 89 Setting a timer 90 Chapter 22: Calculator 90 Using the calculator 90 Scientific calculator 91 Chapter 23: Voice Memos 91 About Voice Memos 91 Recording 92 Listening to a recording 92 Managing and sharing recordings 92 Sharing voice memos with your computer 93 Chapter 24: iTunes Store 93 About the iTunes Store 93 Finding music, videos, and more 94 Purchasing music, audiobooks, and tones 94 Purchasing or renting videos 95 Following artists and friends 95 Streaming or downloading podcasts 96 Checking download status 96 Changing the browse buttons 96 Viewing account information 96 Verifying downloads Contents 597 Chapter 25: App Store 97 About the App Store 98 Finding and downloading apps 98 Deleting apps 99 Store settings 100 Chapter 26: Settings 100 Airplane mode 100 Wi-Fi 101 Notifications 102 Location Services 102 VPN 102 Sounds 102 Brightness 103 Wallpaper 103 General 107 Settings for apps 108 Chapter 27: Contacts 108 About Contacts 108 Syncing contacts 109 Searching contacts 109 Adding and editing contacts 110 Unified contacts 110 Contacts accounts and settings 111 Chapter 28: Nike + iPod 111 About Nike + iPod 111 Activating Nike + iPod 111 Linking a sensor 112 Working out with Nike + iPod 112 Calibrating Nike + iPod 112 Sending workout data to nikeplus.com 113 Chapter 29: iBooks 113 About iBooks 113 Using the iBookstore 114 Syncing books and PDFs 114 Reading books 116 Changing a book’s appearance 116 Printing or emailing a PDF 116 Organizing the bookshelf 118 Chapter 30: Accessibility 118 Universal Access features 118 VoiceOver 128 Triple-click Home 128 Zoom 129 Large Text 129 White on Black 129 Speak Selection 129 Speak Auto-text 6 Contents129 Mono Audio 129 AssistiveTouch 130 Universal Access in OS X 130 Minimum font size for mail messages 130 Widescreen keyboards 130 Voice Control 130 Closed captioning 131 Appendix A: International Keyboards 131 Adding and removing keyboards 131 Switching keyboards 131 Chinese 133 Japanese 133 Typing emoji characters 133 Using the candidate list 133 Using shortcuts 134 Vietnamese 135 Appendix B: Support and Other Information 135 iPod touch Support site 135 Restarting and resetting iPod touch 135 Backing up iPod touch 137 Updating and restoring iPod touch software 137 File sharing 138 Safety, software, and service information 138 Disposal and recycling information 140 Apple and the environment 140 iPod touch operating temperature Contents 7iPod touch at a Glance 1 iPod touch overview iPod touch 4th generation Microphone (on back) On/Off button Volume buttons (on side) Headphones Speaker port Dock connector Front camera Home button Touchscreen App icons Status bar Main camera (on back) iPod touch 3rd generation On/Off button Volume buttons Headphones port Dock connector Wi-Fi antenna Home button Internal speaker Touchscreen App icons Status bar Your Home screen may look different, depending on the model of iPod touch you have and whether you’ve rearranged its icons. 9Accessories The following accessories are included with iPod touch: Apple Earphones Dock Connector to USB Cable Item What you can do with it Apple Earphones Listen to music and videos, FaceTime calls, audiobooks, podcasts, and games. Dock Connector to USB Cable Use this cable to connect iPod touch to your computer to sync and charge, or to the USB power adapter (sold separately) to charge. The cable can be used with the optional dock or plugged directly into iPod touch. Buttons On/Off button When you’re not using iPod touch, you can lock it to turn off the display and save the battery. When iPod touch is locked, nothing happens if you touch the screen. You can still listen to music and adjust the volume using the buttons on the side of iPod touch. Lock iPod touch: Press the On/Off button. On/Off button Unlock iPod touch Press the On/Off button or the Home button , then drag the slider. Open Camera when iPod touch is locked Press the On/Off button or the Home button , then drag up. Access the audio controls when iPod touch is locked Double-click the Home button . Turn off iPod touch Press and hold the On/Off button until the red slider appears, then drag the slider. Turn on iPod touch Press and hold the On/Off button until the Apple logo appears. iPod touch locks automatically if you don’t touch the screen for a minute or two. To change this auto-lock time, go to Settings > General > Auto-Lock. If you want to require a passcode to unlock iPod touch, go to Settings > General > Passcode Lock. 10 Chapter 1 iPod touch at a GlanceHome button The Home button takes you to the Home screen, no matter what you’re doing. It also provides other shortcuts. On the Home screen, tap any app to open it. See “Opening and switching apps” on page 18. Go to the home screen: Press the Home button . See recently used apps (iPod touch 3rd generation or later) With iPod touch unlocked, double-click the Home button . See the audio playback controls while iPod touch is locked Double-click the Home button . See “Playing songs and other audio” on page 35. See the audio playback controls while using any app Double-click the Home button , then flick to the left end of the multitasking bar that appears at the bottom of the screen. Volume buttons When you listen to songs, movies, or other media, the buttons on the side of iPod touch adjust the audio volume. Otherwise, the buttons control the volume for alerts and other sound effects. WARNING: For important information about avoiding hearing loss, see the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/ipodtouch. Volume up Volume down To set a volume limit for music and videos, go to Settings > Music. You can also use the volume up button to take a picture or record a video. See “Taking photos and videos” on page 51. Chapter 1 iPod touch at a Glance 11Status icons The icons in the status bar at the top of the screen give information about iPod touch: Status icon What it means Wi-Fi* Shows that iPod touch is connected to the Internet over a Wi-Fi network. The more bars, the stronger the connection. See “Wi-Fi” on page 100. Network activity Shows network activity. Some third-party apps may also use this icon to indicate an active process. Syncing Shows that iPod touch is syncing with iTunes. Airplane mode Shows that airplane mode is on—you cannot access the Internet or use Bluetooth® devices. Non-wireless features are available. See “Airplane mode” on page 100. VPN Shows that you are connected to a network using VPN. See “Network” on page 103. Lock Shows that iPod touch is locked. See “On/Off button” on page 10. Play Shows that a song, audiobook, or podcast is playing. See “Playing songs and other audio” on page 35. Portrait orientation lock Shows that the iPod touch screen is locked in portrait orientation. See “Viewing in portrait or landscape orientation” on page 20. Alarm Shows that an alarm is set. See “Setting alarms” on page 89. Location Services Shows that an app is using Location Services. See “Location Services” on page 102. Bluetooth* Blue or white icon: Bluetooth is on and paired with a device, such as a headset. Gray icon: Bluetooth is on and paired with a device, but the device is out of range or turned off. No icon: Bluetooth is turned off or not paired. See “Bluetooth devices” on page 31. Bluetooth battery Shows the battery level of a supported paired Bluetooth device. Battery Shows battery level or charging status. See “Charging the battery” on page 32. * The use of certain accessories with iPod touch may affect wireless performance. 12 Chapter 1 iPod touch at a GlanceGetting Started 2 WARNING: To avoid injury, read all operating instructions in this guide and safety information in the iPod touch Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/ipodtouch before using iPod touch. · Viewing this user guide on iPod touch You can view the iPod touch User Guide on iPod touch in Safari, and in the free iBooks app. View the user guide in Safari: Tap , then tap the iPod touch User Guide bookmark. To add an icon for the user guide to the Home screen, tap , then tap “Add to Home Screen.” To view the user guide in a different language, tap “Change Language” at the bottom of the screen on the main contents page. View the user guide in iBooks: If you haven’t installed iBooks, open App Store, then search for and install “iBooks.” Then you can open iBooks, tap Store, and download the free guide (search for “iPod touch User”). For more information about iBooks, see Chapter 29,“iBooks,” on page 113. What you need To use iPod touch, you need:  An Apple ID (for some features), which you can create during setup  A Mac or a PC with a USB 2.0 port and one of the following operating systems:  Mac OS X v10.5.8 or later  Windows 7, Windows Vista, or Windows XP Home or Professional (SP3)  An Internet connection for your computer (broadband is recommended)  iTunes 10.5 or later (for some features), available at www.itunes.com/download Setting up iPod touch To set up and activate iPod touch, just turn it on and follow the onscreen instructions that step you through the setup process, including:  Connecting to a Wi-Fi network  Signing in with or creating a free Apple ID  Setting up iCloud  Turning on recommended features such as Location Services and Find My iPod  Activating iPod touch You can also restore from an iCloud or iTunes backup during setup. Activation can be done over a Wi-Fi network. If you don’t have access to a Wi-Fi network, you can connect iPod touch to your computer and finish activation using iTunes. 13Connecting iPod touch to your computer If you don’t have Wi-Fi access, you might need to connect iPod touch to your computer to complete setup. You can also connect iPod touch to your computer to sync music, videos, and other information with iTunes. You can also sync your content wirelessly. See “iCloud” on page 16 and “Syncing with iTunes” on page 17. Connect iPod touch to your computer: Use the provided Dock Connector to USB Cable. Disconnect iPod touch from your computer: Check to make sure a sync is not in progress, then disconnect the cable. If a sync is in progress, first drag the slider on iPod touch to cancel. Connecting to the Internet iPod touch connects to the Internet via Wi-Fi networks. When joined to a Wi-Fi network that is connected to the Internet, iPod touch connects to the Internet automatically whenever you use Mail, Safari, YouTube, FaceTime, Game Center, Stocks, Maps, Weather, the App Store, or the iTunes Store. Joining a Wi-Fi network iPod touch can join AirPort and other Wi-Fi networks at home, at work, or at Wi-Fi hotspots around the world. See if you’re already connected: If you see the Wi-Fi icon in the status bar at the top of the screen, you’re already connected. Join a Wi-Fi network: Go to Settings > Wi-Fi and select a network. It may take a moment for iPod touch to detect networks in range. The number of bars in the Wi-Fi icon shows the signal strength. Networks that require a password appear with a lock icon . When you join a Wi-Fi network in this way, iPod touch reconnects to it whenever the network is in range. If more than one previously used network is in range, iPod touch joins the one last used. Turn on Wi-Fi Go to Settings > Wi-Fi. See a prompt before iPod touch joins a network Go to Settings > Wi-Fi > Ask to Join Networks. Checking connection details such as IP address Go to Settings > Wi-Fi and tap next to the network. Internet access on an airplane Airplane mode turns off the iPod touch Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and GPS transmitters and receivers to avoid interfering with aircraft operation. Airplane mode disables many of the iPod touch features. In some areas, where allowed by the aircraft operator and applicable laws and regulations, you can turn on Wi-Fi while airplane mode is on to use apps that require an Internet connection. You may also be allowed to turn on Bluetooth to use Bluetooth devices with iPod touch. For more information, see “Airplane mode” on page 100. 14 Chapter 2 Getting StartedVPN access VPN (virtual private network) provides secure access over the Internet to private networks, such as the network at your company or school. Use Network settings to configure and turn on VPN. See “Network” on page 103. Setting up mail and other accounts iPod touch works with iCloud, Microsoft Exchange, and many of the most popular Internet-based mail, contacts, and calendar service providers. If you don’t already have a mail account, you can set up a free iCloud account when you set up iPod touch, or in Settings > iCloud. Set up an iCloud account: Go to Settings > iCloud. Set up some other account: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars. For information about iCloud, see “iCloud” on page 16. You can add contacts using an LDAP or CardDAV account if your company or organization supports it. See “Syncing contacts” on page 108. You can add a CalDAV calendar account. See “Calendar accounts and settings” on page 75. You can subscribe to iCal (.ics) calendars or import them from Mail. See “Subscribing to calendars” and “Importing calendar events from Mail” on page 75. Managing content on your iOS devices You can transfer information and files between your iOS devices and computers using iCloud or iTunes.  iCloud stores your photos, apps, contacts, calendars, and more, and wirelessly pushes them to your devices. When you make a change on one of your devices, your other devices are automatically updated. See “iCloud” on page 16.  iTunes syncs music, video, photos, and more between your computer and iPod touch. You can connect iPod touch to your computer using USB, or set it up to sync wirelessly using Wi-Fi. Changes you make on one device are copied to the other when you sync. You can also use iTunes to copy a file to iPod touch for use with an app, or to copy a document you’ve created on iPod touch to your computer. See “Syncing with iTunes” on page 17. You can use iCloud, iTunes, or both, depending on your needs. For example, you can use Photo Stream to automatically put photos you take with iPod touch on all of your devices, and use iTunes to sync photo albums from your computer to iPod touch. Note: Don’t sync items in the Info pane of iTunes (such as contacts, calendars, and notes) if you use iCloud to keep that information up to date on your devices. Otherwise, you might see duplicate items. Chapter 2 Getting Started 15iCloud iCloud is a service that stores your content, including music, photos, contacts, calendars, and supported documents. Content stored in iCloud is wirelessly pushed to your other iOS devices and computers set up with the same iCloud account. iCloud is available on iOS devices running iOS 5, on Macs running OS X Lion v10.7.2 or later, and on PCs with the iCloud Control Panel for Windows (Windows Vista Service Pack 2 or Windows 7 required). iCloud features include:  iTunes in the Cloud—Download your previous iTunes music and TV show purchases to iPod touch for free, anytime you like.  Apps and Books—Download your previous App Store and iBookstore purchases to iPod touch for free, any time you like.  Photo Stream—Photos you take on one device appear automatically on all your other devices. See “Photo Stream” on page 54.  Documents in the Cloud—For iCloud-enabled apps, keep documents and app data up to date across all your devices.  Mail, Contacts, Calendars—Keep your mail contacts, calendars, notes, and reminders up to date across all your devices.  Backup—Back up iPod touch automatically when connected to power and Wi-Fi. See “Backing up iPod touch” on page 135.  Find My iPod—Locate your iPod touch on a map, display a message, play a sound, lock the screen, or remotely wipe the data. See “Find My iPod” on page 33.  Find My Friends—Share your location with people who are important to you. Download the free app from the App Store.  iTunes Match—With an iTunes Match subscription, all your music, including music you’ve imported from CDs or purchased somewhere other than iTunes, appears on all of your devices and can be downloaded and played on demand. See “iTunes Match” on page 39. With iCloud, you get a free mail account and 5 GB of storage for your mail, documents, and backups. Your purchased music, apps, TV shows, and books don’t count against your free space. If you have a MobileMe subscription, you can move it to iCloud from a Mac or PC at www.me.com/move until June 30, 2012. Note: iCloud is not available in all areas. For information, go to www.apple.com/icloud. Sign in or create an iCloud account: In Settings, tap iCloud. Enable or disable iCloud services Go to Settings > iCloud. Enable iCloud backups Go to Settings > iCloud > Storage & Backup. Find your iPod touch Visit www.icloud.com. Find My iPod must be turned on in Settings > iCloud. Purchase additional iCloud storage Go to Settings > iCloud > Storage & Backup and tap Manage Storage. For information about purchasing iCloud storage, go to help.apple.com/icloud. 16 Chapter 2 Getting StartedView and download previous iTunes Store purchases Go to iTunes and tap Purchased. View and download previous App Store purchases Go to App Store, tap Updates, then tap Purchased. View and download previous iBookstore purchases Go to iBooks, tap Store, then tap Purchased. Turn on Automatic Downloads for music, apps, or books Go to Settings > Store. For more information about iCloud, go to www.apple.com/icloud. For support, go to www.apple.com/support/icloud. Syncing with iTunes Syncing with iTunes copies information from a computer to iPod touch, and vice versa. You can sync by connecting iPod touch to your computer using the Dock Connector to USB Cable, or you can set up iTunes to sync wirelessly using Wi-Fi. You can set iTunes to sync photos, video, podcasts, apps, and much more. For detailed information about syncing iPod touch with a computer, open iTunes then select iTunes Help from the Help menu. Set up wireless iTunes syncing: Connect iPod touch to your computer using the Dock Connector to USB Cable, and in iTunes turn on “Sync over Wi-Fi connection” in the device’s Summary pane. When Wi-Fi syncing is turned on, iPod touch automatically syncs when it’s connected to a power source, both iPod touch and your computer are connected to the same wireless network, and iTunes is open on the computer. For more information, see “iTunes Wi-Fi Sync” on page 104. Tips for syncing with iTunes  If you’re using iCloud to store your contacts, calendars, and bookmarks, don’t also sync them to iPod touch using iTunes.  Purchases you make from the iTunes Store or the App Store on iPod touch are synced back to your iTunes library. You can also purchase or download content and apps from the iTunes Store on your computer, and then sync them to iPod touch.  In the device’s Summary pane, you can set iTunes to automatically sync iPod touch when it’s attached to your computer. To temporarily override this setting, hold down Command and Option (Mac) or Shift and Control (PC) until you see iPod touch appear in the sidebar.  In the device’s Summary pane, select “Encrypt iPod backup” if you want to encrypt the information stored on your computer when iTunes makes a backup. Encrypted backups are indicated by a lock icon , and a password is required to restore the backup. If you don’t select this option, passwords (such as those for mail accounts) aren’t included in the backup and will have to be reentered if you use the backup to restore iPod touch.  In the device’s Info pane, when you sync mail accounts, only the settings are transferred from your computer to iPod touch. Changes you make to a mail account on iPod touch don’t affect the account on your computer.  In the device’s Info pane, click Advanced to select options that let you replace the information on iPod touch with the information from your computer during the next sync.  If you listen to part of a podcast or audiobook, your place in the story is included if you sync the content with iTunes. If you started listening to the story on iPod touch, you can pick up where you left off using iTunes on your computer—or vice versa.  In the device’s Photo pane, you can sync photos and videos from a folder on your computer. Chapter 2 Getting Started 17Basics 3 Using apps The high-resolution Multi-Touch screen and simple finger gestures make it easy to use iPod touch apps. Opening and switching apps Open an app: Tap it. Press the Home button to see apps on the Home screen. Return to the Home screen: Press the Home button . See another Home screen: Flick left or right, or tap to the left or right of the row of dots. Flick left or right to switch to another Home screen. Go to the first Home screen: Press the Home button again. View recently used apps (iPod touch 3rd generation or later): Double-click the Home button to see the multitasking bar. Flick the bar left or right to see more apps. Recently used apps Switch to a recent app: Tap it in the multitasking bar. 18Force an app to close: Touch and hold the app icon until it begins to jiggle, then tap . Removing an app from the recents list forces it to quit. Scrolling Drag up or down to scroll. On some screens such as webpages, you can also scroll side to side. Dragging your finger to scroll won’t choose or activate anything on the screen. Flick to scroll quickly. You can wait for the scrolling to come to a stop, or touch anywhere on the screen to stop it immediately. Touching the screen to stop scrolling won’t choose or activate anything. To quickly scroll to the top of a list, webpage, or email, just tap the status bar. Find items in an indexed list: Tap a letter to jump to items starting with that letter. Drag your finger along the index to scroll quickly through the list. Drag your finger along the index to scroll quickly. Tap a letter to jump to a section. Choose an item: Tap an item in the list. Depending on the list, tapping an item can do different things—for example, it may open a new list, play a song, open an email, or show someone’s contact information. Chapter 3 Basics 19Zooming in or out When viewing photos, webpages, email, or maps, you can zoom in and out. Pinch your fingers together or apart. For photos and webpages, you can double-tap (tap twice quickly) to zoom in, then double-tap again to zoom out. For maps, double-tap to zoom in and tap once with two fingers to zoom out. Zoom is also an accessibility feature that lets you magnify the screen with any app you’re using, to help you see what’s on the display. See “Zoom” on page 128. Viewing in portrait or landscape orientation Many iPod touch apps let you view the screen in either portrait or landscape orientation. Rotate iPod touch and the display rotates too, adjusting automatically to fit the new screen orientation. You may prefer landscape orientation for viewing webpages in Safari, or when entering text, for example. Webpages scale to the wider screen, making the text and images larger. The onscreen keyboard is also larger, and may help your typing speed and accuracy. Movies viewed in Videos and YouTube appear only in landscape orientation. Street views in Maps also appear only in landscape orientation. Lock the screen in portrait orientation (iPod touch 3rd generation or later): Double-click the Home button , flick the bottom of the screen from left to right, then tap . The portrait orientation lock icon appears in the status bar when the screen orientation is locked. 20 Chapter 3 BasicsCustomizing the Home screen You can customize the layout of icons on the Home screen—including the Dock icons along the bottom of the screen. If you want, arrange them across multiple Home screens. You can also organize apps by grouping them in folders. Rearranging icons You can change the location of icons on the Home screen, change the items in the Dock, and group items in folders. Rearrange the Home screen: Touch and hold any icon on the Home screen until it jiggles, then drag items to new locations. When you finish, press the Home button . Move an icon to another screen While it’s jiggling, drag an icon to the side of the screen. Create additional Home screens While the icons are jiggling, flick to the rightmost Home screen, then drag an icon to the right edge of the screen. You can create up to 11 Home screens. Reset the Home screen to the default layout Go to Settings > General > Reset, then tap Reset Home Screen Layout. Resetting the Home screen removes any folders you’ve created and applies the default wallpaper. Rearrange your Home screens using iTunes Connect iPod touch to your computer, select iPod touch in the iTunes Devices list, then click Apps at the top of the screen. You can also add links to your favorite webpages on the Home screen. See “Web clips” on page 71. Organizing with folders You can use folders to organize items on your Home screens. You can put up to 12 items in a folder. iPod touch names a folder when you create it, based on the icons you use to create the folder, but you can change the name anytime you want. Like icons, folders can be rearranged by dragging them around the Home screen. You can move folders to a new Home screen or to the Dock. Create a folder: Touch and hold an icon until the Home screen icons begin to jiggle, then drag an icon onto another icon and release. Chapter 3 Basics 21The new folder contains the two icons, and shows the folder’s name. You can tap the name field and enter a different name. Put an item in a folder While arranging icons, drag the icon onto the folder. Remove an item from a folder While arranging icons, tap to open the folder, then drag the icon out of the folder. Open a folder Tap the folder. You can then tap an app icon to open that app. Close a folder Tap outside the folder, or press the Home button. Delete a folder Move all items out of the folder. The folder is deleted automatically when empty. Rename a folder While arranging icons, tap to open the folder, then tap the name at the top and use the keyboard to enter a new name. When you finish organizing your Home screens, press the Home button . Create a folder using iTunes: With iPod touch connected to your computer, select iPod touch in the Devices list in iTunes. Click Apps at the top of the screen, and on the Home screen near the top of the window, drag an app on top of another. Changing the wallpaper You can choose an image or photo to use as wallpaper for your Lock screen, and for the Home screen. Choose a supplied image, a photo from your Camera Roll album, or a photo synced to iPod touch from your computer. Change the wallpaper (iPod touch 3rd generation or later): Go to Settings > Wallpaper, tap the image of your current Lock and Home screens, and choose from supplied images or your Camera Roll album. 22 Chapter 3 BasicsTyping The onscreen keyboard appears anytime you need to type. Entering Text The onscreen keyboard appears when you tap an area where you need to enter text. The keyboard corrects misspellings, predicts what you’re typing, and learns as you use it. Depending on the app, the intelligent keyboard may suggest corrections as you type. Enter text: Tap any text field to bring up the keyboard, then tap keys on the keyboard. If you touch the wrong key, you can slide your finger to the correct key before you release your finger. Delete the last character you typed Tap . Type uppercase Tap the Shift key before you tap a letter. Or touch and hold the Shift key, then slide to a letter. Quickly type a period and space Double-tap the space bar. To turn this feature off, go to Settings > General > Keyboard. Use autocorrection to enter “’ll” Type “lll.” For example, type “youlll” to get “you’ll.” Turn caps lock on Double-tap the Shift key . Tap the Shift key again to turn off caps lock. To turn this feature off, go to Settings > General > Keyboard. Enter numbers, punctuation, or symbols Tap the Number key . Tap the Symbol key to see additional punctuation and symbols. Set options for typing Go to Settings > General > Keyboard. To type an alternate character, touch and hold a key, then slide to choose one of the options. Chapter 3 Basics 23Auto-correction and spell checking For many languages, iPod touch corrects misspellings or makes suggestions as you type. When iPod touch suggests a word, you can accept the suggestion without interrupting your typing. For a list of supported languages, see www.apple.com/ipodtouch/specs.html. iPod touch uses the active dictionary to suggest corrections or complete the word you’re typing. You don’t need to interrupt your typing to accept the suggested word. Suggested word Accept the suggested word: Type a space, punctuation mark, or return character. Reject the suggested word: Finish typing the word as you want it, then tap the “x”. Each time you reject a suggestion for the same word, iPod touch becomes more likely to accept the word. iPod touch also underlines words you type that might be misspelled. Use spell checking to replace a misspelled word Tap the underlined word, then tap a suggested correction. If none of the suggestions is correct, retype the word. Turn auto-correction or spell checking on or off Go to Settings > General > Keyboard. Add a word to the dictionary Go to Settings > General > Keyboard. Tap Add New Shortcut. Enter the word in the Phrase field, but leave the Shortcut field blank. This adds the word to your personal dictionary and it won’t be identified as being misspelled when you type it. Shortcuts and your personal dictionary Shortcuts lets you type just a few characters in place of a longer word or phrase. The expanded text appears whenever you type the shortcut. For example, the shortcut “omw” is expanded to “On my way!” Create a shortcut: Go to Settings > General > Keyboard, then tap Add New Shortcut. Add a word to your personal dictionary so iPod touch won’t correct it: Create a shortcut, but leave the Shortcut field blank. Edit a shortcut In Keyboard settings, tap the shortcut. 24 Chapter 3 BasicsEditing text It’s easy to make changes to text you enter. An onscreen magnifying glass helps you position the insertion point. Grab points on selected text let you select more or less text. You can also cut, copy, and paste text and photos, within an app or across apps. Position the insertion point: Touch and hold to bring up the magnifying glass, then drag to position the insertion point. Select text: Tap the insertion point to display the Select and Select All buttons. You can also double-tap to select a word. Drag the grab points to select more or less text. In read-only documents, such as webpages, or email or text messages you’ve received, touch and hold to select a word. Cut or copy text Select text, then tap Cut or Copy. Paste text Tap the insertion point and tap Paste. The last text that you cut or copied is inserted. Or select text and tap Paste to replace the text. Undo the last edit Shake iPod touch and tap Undo. Make text bold, italic, or underlined Tap , then tap B/I/U. (Not always available.) Get the definition of a word Tap , then tap Define. (Not always available.) Get alternative words Tap Suggest, then tap one of the words. (Not always available.) Changing the keyboard layout You can use Settings to set the keyboard layouts for software and hardware keyboards. The available layouts depend on the keyboard language. Select a keyboard layout: Go to Settings > General > Keyboard > International Keyboards, select a keyboard, and choose a layout. For each language, you can choose different layouts for the onscreen software and any external hardware keyboards. The software keyboard layout determines the layout of the keyboard on the iPod touch screen. The hardware keyboard layout determines the layout of an Apple Wireless Keyboard connected to iPod touch. Chapter 3 Basics 25Using an Apple Wireless Keyboard You can use an Apple Wireless Keyboard (available separately; iPod touch 3rd generation or later) for typing on iPod touch. The Apple Wireless Keyboard connects via Bluetooth, so you must pair the keyboard with iPod touch. See “Pairing a Bluetooth device with iPod touch” on page 31. Once the keyboard is paired with iPod touch, it connects whenever the keyboard is within range (up to 30 feet). You can tell that the keyboard is connected if the onscreen keyboard doesn’t appear when you tap in a text field. To save the battery, unpair the keyboard when not in use. Switch the language when using a hardware keyboard Press and hold the Command key, then tap the space bar to display a list of available languages. Tap the space bar again to choose a different language. Disconnect a wireless keyboard from iPod touch Press and hold the power button on the keyboard until the green light goes off. iPod touch disconnects the keyboard when it’s out of range. Unpair a wireless keyboard from iPod touch In Settings, choose General > Bluetooth, tap next to the device name, then tap “Forget this Device.” You can apply different layouts to a wireless keyboard. See Appendix A,“International Keyboards,” on page 131, and “Changing the keyboard layout” on page 25. Printing About AirPrint AirPrint lets you print wirelessly to AirPrint-enabled printers. You can print from these iOS apps:  Mail—email messages and attachments that can be viewed in Quick Look  Photos—photos  Safari—webpages, PDFs, and other attachments that can be viewed in Quick Look  iBooks—PDFs  Maps—view of map showing on the screen  Notes—currently displayed note Many apps available from the App Store also support AirPrint. If you’re not sure whether your printer is AirPrint-enabled, refer to its documentation. An AirPrint-enabled printer doesn’t need setup—just connect it to the same Wi-Fi network as iPod touch. For information about AirPrint, go to support.apple.com/kb/HT4356. Printing a Document AirPrint uses your Wi-Fi network to send print jobs to your printer. iPod touch must be connected to the same wireless network as the AirPrint printer. Print a document: Tap , , or (depending on the app you’re using), then tap Print. Select a printer and printing options, then tap Print. See the status of a print job Double-click the Home button , then tap Print Center. Cancel a print job Double-click the Home button , tap Print Center, select the print job (if you’re printing more than one document), then tap Cancel Printing. 26 Chapter 3 BasicsSearching You can search many apps on iPod touch, including Mail, Calendar, Music, Videos, Notes, Messages, and Contacts. You can search an individual app, or search all apps at once using Search. Search iPod touch: From your first Home screen, flick right or press the Home button , then tap the search field. From the Search screen, flick left or press the Home button to return to the main Home screen page. iPod touch searches:  Contacts—first, last, and company names  Mail—to, from, and subject fields of all accounts (but not the text of messages)  Calendar—event titles, invitees, and locations (but not notes)  Music—names of songs, artists, and albums  Videos—titles of podcasts, videos, and podcasts  Messages—names and text of messages  Notes—text of notes Search also searches the names of the native and installed apps on iPod touch, so if you have a lot of apps, you may want to use Search to locate and open apps. Open an app from Search Enter the app name, then tap to open the app directly from the search results. Use the Spotlight Search setting to specify which contents are searched and the order the results are presented in. See “Spotlight Search” on page 104. Chapter 3 Basics 27Voice Control Voice Control (iPod touch 3rd generation or later) lets you control music playback using voice commands. To use Voice Control with iPod touch 3rd generation, you need Apple Earphones with Remote and Mic, or a compatible accessory with a microphone. Note: Voice Control may not be available in all languages. Use Voice Control: Press and hold the Home button until the Voice Control screen appears and you hear a beep. For best results:  Speak clearly and naturally.  Say only iPod touch commands and names.  Pause slightly between commands. For a list of available commands, see “Using Voice Control with Music” on page 38. Voice Control normally expects you to speak voice commands in the language that’s set for iPod touch (the setting in General > International > Language). Voice Control settings let you change the language for speaking voice commands. Some languages are available in different dialects or accents. Change the language or country: In Settings, choose General > International > Voice Control and tap the language or country. For more about using Voice Control, including information about using Voice Control in different languages, go to support.apple.com/kb/HT3597. 28 Chapter 3 BasicsNotifications Notification Center displays all your alerts in one place, including alerts about:  New email  New text messages  Reminders  Calendar events  Friend requests (Game Center)  Weather  Stocks Alerts appear on the lock screen, or briefly at the top of the screen when you’re using iPod touch. You can see all current alerts by revealing Notification Center. Reveal Notification Center: Swipe down from the top of the screen. Many apps, such as Messages, Mail, and the App Store, can display an alert badge on their Home screen icon with a number (to indicate incoming items) or an exclamation mark (to indicate a problem). If these apps are in a folder, the badge appears on the folder. A badge with a number shows the total number of items you haven’t attended to, such as email messages, text messages, and updated apps to download. A badge with an exclamation mark indicates a problem with an app. Respond to an alert Lock screen: Swipe the alert from left to right. Notifications Center: Tap the alert. Remove an alert from Notification Center Tap , then tap Clear. Set options for notifications Go to Settings > Notifications. Chapter 3 Basics 29Twitter Sign in to your Twitter account (or create a new account) in Settings to enable Tweets with attachments from the following apps:  Camera—with a photo from your Camera Roll album  Safari—with a webpage  Maps—with a location  YouTube—with a video Sign in to (or create) a Twitter account: Go to Settings > Twitter and enter the user name and password for an existing account, or tap Create New Account. To add another account, tap Add Account. In Camera or Photos, tap the Action button to tweet a photo. Tweet a photo. Tweet a photo, video, or webpage View the item, tap , then tap Tweet. If isn’t showing, tap the screen. To include your location, tap Add Location. Location services must be turned on in Settings > Location Services. Tweet a location in Maps Tap the location pin, tap , tap Share Location, then tap Tweet. Add your current location to a Tweet Tap Add Location . Location Services must be turned on in Settings > Location Services. Add Twitter user names and photos to your contacts Go to Settings > Twitter, then tap Update Contacts. Turn Twitter on or off for Photos or Safari Go to Settings > Twitter. When you’re writing a Tweet, the number in the lower-right corner of the Tweet screen shows the number of available characters remaining. Attachments use some of a Tweet’s 140 characters. You can install and use the Twitter app to post a Tweet, view your timeline, search for trending topics, and more. Go to Settings > Twitter, then tap Install. To learn how to use the Twitter app, open the app, tap the More button (…), tap “Accounts & Settings,” tap Settings, then tap Manual. AirPlay You can stream music, photos, and video wirelessly to your HDTV or speakers using AirPlay and Apple TV. You can also use AirPlay to stream audio to an Airport Express or AirPort Extreme base station. Other AirPlay-enabled receivers are available from third-parties. Visit the online Apple Store for details. Stream content to an AirPlay-enabled device: Start the video, slideshow, or music, then tap and choose the AirPlay device. Once streaming starts, you can exit the app that’s playing the content. 30 Chapter 3 BasicsGet quick access to the AirPlay controls When the screen is on, double-click the Home button and scroll to the left end of the multitasking bar. Switch playback back to iPod touch Tap and choose iPod touch. Bluetooth devices You can use iPod touch with the Apple Wireless Keyboard and other Bluetooth devices, such as Bluetooth stereo headphones. For supported Bluetooth profiles, go to support.apple.com/kb/HT3647. Pairing a Bluetooth device with iPod touch WARNING: For important information about avoiding hearing loss and about driving safely, see the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/ipodtouch. Before you can use a Bluetooth device with iPod touch, you must first pair them. Pair a Bluetooth headset, car kit, or other device with iPod touch: 1 Follow the instructions that came with the device to make it discoverable or to set it to search for other Bluetooth devices. 2 Go to Settings > General > Bluetooth and turn Bluetooth on. 3 Choose the device on iPod touch, and enter its passkey or PIN number. See the instructions about the passkey or PIN that came with the device. After you pair headphones with iPod touch, the product name and appear on the screen when you are viewing audio or video playback controls. Tap to switch to a different audio output, such as the internal speaker. Pair an Apple Wireless Keyboard with iPod touch: 1 Go to Settings > General > Bluetooth and turn Bluetooth on. 2 Press the power button on the Apple Wireless Keyboard to turn it on. 3 On iPod touch, select the keyboard listed under Devices. 4 Type the passkey on the keyboard as instructed, then press Return. Note: You can pair only one Apple Wireless Keyboard with iPod touch at a time. To pair a different keyboard, you must first unpair the current one. For more information, see “Using an Apple Wireless Keyboard” on page 26. Bluetooth status The Bluetooth icon appears in the iPod touch status bar at the top of the screen:  or : Bluetooth is on and paired with a device. (The color depends on the current color of the status bar.)  : Bluetooth is on and paired with a device, but the device is out or range or turned off.  No Bluetooth icon: Bluetooth is turned off or not paired. Unpairing a Bluetooth device from iPod touch You can unpair a Bluetooth device if you don’t want to use it with iPod touch any more. Unpair a Bluetooth device: Go to Settings > General > Bluetooth and turn on Bluetooth. Then tap next to the device name and tap “Forget this Device.” Chapter 3 Basics 31Battery iPod touch has an internal rechargeable battery. The battery isn’t user accessible and should be replaced only by Apple or an Apple Authorized Service Provider. Charging the battery WARNING: For important safety information about charging iPod touch, see the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/ipodtouch. The battery icon in the upper-right corner shows the battery level or charging status. Charging Charged Charge the battery and sync iPod touch (using computer): Connect iPod touch to your computer using the included Dock Connector to USB Cable. Or connect iPod touch to your computer using the included cable and the Dock, available separately. Unless your keyboard has a high-powered USB 2.0 port, you must connect iPod touch to a USB 2.0 port on your computer. Important: The iPod touch battery may drain instead of charge if iPod touch is connected to a computer that’s turned off or is in sleep or standby mode. If you charge the battery while syncing or using iPod touch, it may take longer to charge. You can also charge iPod touch using the Apple USB Power Adapter, available separately. Charge the battery and sync iPod touch (using a power adapter): Connect iPod touch to a power outlet using the included Dock Connector to USB Cable and a USB power adapter (available separately). Note: Connecting iPod touch to a power outlet can initiate iCloud backup or wireless iTunes syncing. See “Backing up iPod touch” on page 135 and “Syncing with iTunes” on page 17. 32 Chapter 3 BasicsImportant: If iPod touch is very low on power, it may display one of the following images, indicating that iPod touch needs to charge for up to ten minutes before you can use it. If iPod touch is extremely low on power, the display may be blank for up to two minutes before one of the low-battery images appears. or Maximizing battery life iPod touch uses lithium-ion batteries. To learn more about how to maximize the battery life of iPod touch, go to www.apple.com/batteries. Replacing the battery Rechargeable batteries have a limited number of charge cycles and may eventually need to be replaced. The iPod touch battery isn’t user replaceable; it can be replaced only by an authorized service provider. For more information, go to www.apple.com/batteries/replacements.html. Security features Security features help protect the information on iPod touch from being accessed by others. Passcodes and data protection You can set a passcode that you must enter each time you turn on or wake up iPod touch. Set a passcode: Choose Settings > General > Passcode Lock and enter a 4-digit passcode. iPod touch then requires you to enter the passcode to unlock it or to display the passcode lock settings. Setting a passcode turns on data protection (iPod touch 3rd generation or later). Data protection uses your passcode as the key for encrypting mail messages and their attachments stored on iPod touch. (Some apps available from the App Store may also use data protection.) A notice at the bottom of the Passcode Lock screen in Settings shows whether data protection is enabled. To increase iPod touch security, turn off Simple Passcode and use a longer passcode with a combination of numbers, letters, punctuation, and special characters. See “Passcode Lock” on page 104. Important: On an iPod touch 3rd generation that didn’t ship with iOS 4 or later, you must also restore iOS software to enable data protection. See “Updating iPod touch” on page 137. Find My iPod Find My iPod helps you locate your iPod touch using the free Find My iPhone app on another iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch, or using a Mac or PC with a web browser signed in to www.icloud.com or www.me.com. Find My iPod includes:  Locate iPod touch on a map: View the approximate location of your iPod touch on a full-screen map.  Display a Message or Play a Sound: Lets you compose a message that will appear on your iPod touch screen, or play a sound at full volume for two minutes. Chapter 3 Basics 33 Remote Passcode Lock: Lets you remotely lock your iPod touch and create a 4-digit passcode, if you haven’t set one previously.  Remote Wipe: Lets you protect your privacy by erasing all media and data on iPod touch, restoring it to factory settings. Important: Find My iPod must be turned on in either iCloud or MobileMe settings on your iPod touch. Find My iPod can be turned on only in one account. Turn on Find My iPod using iCloud Go to Settings > iCloud and turn on Find My iPod. Turn on Find My iPod using MobileMe Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars, tap your MobileMe account, then turn on Find My iPod. Find My iPod uses Wi-Fi to locate your iPod touch. If Wi-Fi is turned off or if your iPod touch isn’t connected to a Wi-Fi network, Find My iPod can’t find it. See “iCloud” on page 16 or “Setting up mail and other accounts” on page 15. Cleaning iPod touch Clean iPod touch immediately if it comes in contact with any contaminants that may cause stains, such as ink, dyes, makeup, dirt, food, oils, or lotions. To clean iPod touch, disconnect all cables and turn off iPod touch (press and hold the On/Off button, then slide the onscreen slider). Then use a soft, slightly damp, lint-free cloth. Avoid getting moisture in openings. Don’t use window cleaners, household cleaners, compressed air, aerosol sprays, solvents, alcohol, ammonia, or abrasives to clean iPod touch. Rubbing the screen with an abrasive material may scratch the glass. For more information about handling iPod touch, see the iPod touch Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/ipodtouch. Restarting or resetting iPod touch If something isn’t working right, try restarting iPod touch, force quitting an app, or resetting iPod touch. Restart iPod touch: Press and hold the On/Off button until the red slider appears. Slide your finger across the slider to turn off iPod touch. To turn iPod touch back on, press and hold the On/Off button until the Apple logo appears. If you can’t turn off iPod touch or if the problem continues, you may need to reset iPod touch. A reset should be done only if turning iPod touch off and on doesn’t resolve the problem. Force an app to quit: Press and hold the On/Off button for a few seconds until a red slider appears, then press and hold the Home button until the app quits. You can also force an app to quit by removing it from the recents list. See “Opening and switching apps” on page 18. Reset iPod touch: Press and hold both the On/Off button and the Home button for at least ten seconds, until the Apple logo appears. For more troubleshooting suggestions, see Appendix B,“Support and Other Information,” on page 135. 34 Chapter 3 BasicsMusic 4 Adding music and audio To get music and other audio content onto iPod touch:  Purchase and download content from the iTunes Store on iPod touch. See Chapter 24,“iTunes Store,” on page 93. You can also go to the iTunes Store from Music by tapping the Store button when browsing.  Use Automatic Download to automatically download new music purchased on your other iOS devices and computers. See “iCloud” on page 16.  Sync with iTunes on your computer. You can sync all of your media, or you can select specific songs and other items. See “Syncing with iTunes” on page 17.  Use iTunes Match to store your music library in iCloud and access it on all your iOS devices and computers. See “iTunes Match” on page 39. Playing songs and other audio WARNING: For important information about avoiding hearing loss, see the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/ipodtouch. You can listen to audio from the internal speaker, headphones attached to the headphones port, or wireless Bluetooth stereo headphones paired with iPod touch. When headphones are connected, no sound comes out of the speaker. The buttons along the bottom of the screen let you browse content on iPod touch by playlists, artists, songs, and other categories. Play a song or other item: Tap the item. Use the onscreen controls to control playback. 35View the Now Playing screen: Tap Now Playing. Next/Fast-forward Play/Pause Track list Back Previous/ Volume Rewind AirPlay Customize the browse buttons Tap More, tap Edit, then drag an icon over the button you want to replace. Get more podcast episodes Tap Podcasts (tap More first, if Podcasts isn’t visible) then tap a podcast to see available episodes. Shake to shuffle Shake iPod touch to turn shuffle on and change songs. Shake again to change to another song. To turn Shake to Shuffle on or off, go to Settings > Music. Play music on AirPlay speakers or Apple TV Tap . See “AirPlay” on page 30. Display a song’s lyrics Tap the album artwork while playing a song. (Lyrics appear if you’ve added them to the song using the song’s Info window in iTunes and you’ve synced iPod touch with iTunes.) Set options for Music Go to Settings > Music. When using another app (iPod touch 3rd generation or later), you can display the audio playback controls by double-clicking the Home button , then flicking from left to right along the bottom of the screen. The controls operate the currently playing app, or—if the music is paused—the most recent app that played. The icon for the app appears on the right. Tap it to open the app. Flick right to display a volume control and the AirPlay button (while in range of an Apple TV or AirPlay speakers). Double-clicking the Home button also displays audio playback controls when the screen is locked. 36 Chapter 4 MusicAdditional audio controls To display additional controls, tap the album artwork on the Now Playing screen. You can see elapsed time, remaining time, and the song number. The song’s lyrics also appear, if you’ve added them to the song in iTunes. Repeat Ping like Scrubber bar Shuffle Genius Ping post Playhead Repeat songs Tap . = Repeat all songs in the album or list. = Repeat the current song only. = No repeat. Shuffle songs Tap . = Shuffle songs. = Play songs in order. Skip to any point in a song Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Slide your finger down to slow down the scrub rate. Make a Genius playlist Tap . See “Genius” on page 40. Use Ping See “Following artists and friends” on page 95. Podcast and audiobook controls Podcast and audiobook controls and information appear on the Now Playing screen when you begin playback. Scrubber bar Playhead Playback speed Email 30-second repeat Set the playback speed Tap . Tap again to change the speed. = Play at double speed. = Play at half speed. = Play at normal speed. Skip to any point along the timeline Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Slide your finger down to slow down the scrub rate. Show or hide the controls Tap the center of the screen. Hide podcast info Go to Settings > Music. Chapter 4 Music 37Using Voice Control with Music You can use Voice Control (iPod touch 3rd generation or later) to control music playback on iPod touch. See “Voice Control” on page 28. Control music playback Say “play” or “play music.” To pause, say “pause” or “pause music.” You can also say “next song” or “previous song.” Play an album, artist, or playlist Say “play,” then say “album,” “artist,” or “playlist” and the name. Shuffle the current playlist Say “shuffle.” Find out more about the currently playing song Say “what’s playing,” “what song is this,” “who sings this song,” or “who is this song by.” Use Genius to play similar songs Say “Genius,” “play more like this,” or “play more songs like this.” Cancel Voice Control Say “cancel” or “stop.” Browsing album artwork in Cover Flow When you browse music, rotate iPod touch to see your iTunes content in Cover Flow and browse your music by album artwork. Browse album artwork Drag left or right. See the tracks on an album Tap the album artwork or . Drag up or down to scroll; tap a track to play it. Return to the artwork Tap the title bar. Or tap again. 38 Chapter 4 MusicViewing tracks on an album See all the tracks on the album that contains the current song: On the Now Playing screen, tap . Tap a track to play it. Tap the thumbnail to return to the Now Playing screen. Rating bar Return to the Now Playing screen. Album tracks In track list view, you can assign ratings to songs. You can use ratings when creating smart playlists in iTunes. Searching audio content You can search the titles, artists, albums, and composers of songs, podcasts, and other audio content on iPod touch. Search music: Enter text in the search field at the top of a song list, playlist, artist list, or other view of your Music content. You can also search audio content from the Home screen. See “Searching” on page 27. iTunes Match iTunes Match stores your music library in iCloud—including songs imported from CDs—and lets you enjoy your collection anywhere, anytime on your iPod touch and other iOS devices and computers. iTunes Match is available as a paid subscription. Note: iTunes Match is not available in all areas. Subscribe to iTunes Match: In iTunes on your computer, choose Store > Turn On iTunes Match, then click the Subscribe button. Once you subscribe, iTunes adds your music, playlists, and Genius Mixes to iCloud. Your songs that match music already in the iTunes Store are automatically available in iCloud. Any remaining songs are uploaded. You can download and play matched songs at iTunes Plus quality (256 kbps DRM-free AAC), even if your original was of lower quality. For more information, see www.apple.com/icloud/features. Turn on iTunes Match Go to Settings > Music. Turning on iTunes Match removes synced music from iPod touch, and disables Genius Mixes and Genius Playlists. Chapter 4 Music 39Genius A Genius playlist is a collection of songs from your library that go great together. You can create Genius playlists in iTunes and sync them to iPod touch. You can also create and save Genius playlists directly on iPod touch. A Genius Mix is a selection of songs of the same kind of music, recreated from your library each time you listen to the mix. To use Genius on iPod touch, first turn on Genius in iTunes, then sync iPod touch with iTunes. Genius Mixes are synced automatically, unless you manually manage your music and choose which mixes you want to sync in iTunes. Genius is a free service, but it requires an Apple ID. When you sync a Genius Mix, iTunes may select and sync songs from your library that you haven’t specifically chosen to sync. Browse Genius Mixes: Tap Genius (tap More first, if Genius isn’t visible). Flick left or right to access your other mixes. To play a mix, tap . Make a Genius playlist: View Playlists, then tap Genius Playlist and choose a song in the list. To make a Genius playlist from the Now Playing screen, tap to display the controls, then tap . Save a Genius playlist In the playlist, tap Save. The playlist is saved in Playlists with the title of the song you picked. Genius playlists created on iPod touch are synced with iTunes the next time you connect. Refresh a Genius playlist In the playlist, tap Refresh. Make a Genius playlist using a different song Tap Genius Playlist, then tap New and pick a song. Delete a saved Genius playlist Tap the Genius playlist, then tap Delete. Note: Once a Genius playlist is synced to iTunes, you can’t delete it directly from iPod touch. Use iTunes to edit the playlist name, stop syncing, or delete the playlist. 40 Chapter 4 MusicPlaylists You can create and edit your own playlists on iPod touch, or edit playlists synced from iTunes on your computer. Create a playlist: View Playlists, then tap “Add Playlist” near the top of the list. Enter a title, tap to select songs and videos you want to include, then tap Done. When you make a playlist and then sync iPod touch to your computer, the playlist is synced to your iTunes library. Edit a playlist: View Playlists and select the playlist to edit. Tap Edit, then: To add more songs: Tap . To delete a song: Tap . Deleting a song from a playlist doesn’t delete it from iPod touch. To move a song higher or lower in the list: Drag . Your edits are copied to the playlist in your iTunes library, either the next time you sync iPod touch with your computer, or wirelessly via iCloud if you’ve subscribed to iTunes Match. Delete a playlist In Playlists, tap the playlist you want to delete, then tap Delete. Clear a playlist In Playlists, tap the playlist you want to clear, then tap Clear. Delete a song from iPod touch In Songs, swipe the song and tap Delete. The song is deleted from iPod touch, but not from your iTunes library on your Mac or PC. Home Sharing Home Sharing lets you play music, movies, and TV shows on iPod touch from the iTunes library on your Mac or PC. iPod touch and your computer must be on the same Wi-Fi network. On your computer, iTunes must be open, with Home Sharing turned on and logged in using the same Apple ID as Home Sharing on iPod touch. Note: Home Sharing requires iTunes 10.2 or later, available at www.itunes.com/download. Bonus content, such as digital booklets and iTunes Extras, can’t be shared. Play music from your iTunes library on iPod touch: 1 In iTunes on your computer, choose Advanced > Turn On Home Sharing. 2 Log in, then click Create Home Share. 3 On iPod touch, go to Settings > Music, then log in to Home Sharing using the same Apple ID and password. 4 In Music, tap More, then tap Shared and choose your computer’s library. Return to content on iPod touch Tap Shared and choose My iPod touch. Chapter 4 Music 41Videos 5 About Videos With iPod touch, you can view movies, music videos, and video podcasts from iTunes, and, if they’re available in your area, TV shows. Playing videos Play a video: Tap the video. Tap the video to show or hide controls. Watch the video on a TV with Apple TV. Drag to skip forward or back. Choose a chapter. Drag to adjust the volume. Cars 2 is available on iTunes. Cars 2 © Disney/Pixar. Show or hide the playback controls While a video is playing, tap the screen. Adjust the volume Drag the volume slider, or use the iPod touch volume buttons. Scale a video to fill the screen or fit to the screen Tap or . Or, double-tap the video. Pause or resume playback Tap or . Start over from the beginning If the video contains chapters, drag the playhead along the scrubber bar all the way to the left. If there are no chapters, tap . If you’re less than 5 seconds into the video, the previous video in your library opens. Skip to a specific chapter Tap , then choose a chapter. (Not always available.) Skip to the next chapter Tap . (Not always available.) Skip to the previous chapter Tap . If you’re less than 5 seconds into the video, the previous video in your library opens. (Not always available.) 42Rewind or fast-forward Touch and hold or . Stop watching a video Tap Done. Select a different audio language (if available) Tap , then choose a language from the Audio list. Show or hide subtitles (if available) Tap , then choose a language, or Off, from the Subtitles list. Show or hide closed captioning (if available) Go to Settings > Video. Searching for videos You can search the titles of movies, TV shows, and video podcasts on iPod touch. Search your videos: Tap the status bar at the top of the screen to reveal the search field, then tap the field and enter text. You can also search for videos from the Home screen. See “Searching” on page 27. Watching rented movies You can rent movies from the iTunes Store and watch them on iPod touch. You can download rented movies directly to iPod touch, or transfer them from iTunes on your computer to iPod touch. (Rented movies may not be available in all areas.) Rented movies expire, and once you start watching, you have a limited amount of time to finish. The time remaining appears near the title. Rented items are deleted when they expire. Before renting a movie, check the iTunes Store for the rental period. For information, see “Purchasing or renting videos” on page 94. View a rented movie: Tap the video you want to watch. If you don’t see the video in your list, it might still be downloading. Transfer rented movies to iPod touch: Connect iPod touch to your computer. Then select iPod touch in the iTunes sidebar, click Movies, and select the rented movies you want to transfer. Your computer must be connected to the Internet. Movies rented on iPod touch can’t be transferred to a computer. On iPod touch 3rd generation, you can transfer rented movies between iPod touch and your computer. On iPod touch 4th generation, you can transfer rented movies between iPod touch and your computer only if they were rented in iTunes on your computer. Movies rented on iPod touch 4th generation can’t be transferred to your computer. Chapter 5 Videos 43Watching videos on a TV You can stream videos wirelessly to your TV using AirPlay and Apple TV, or connect iPod touch to your TV using any of the following:  Apple Digital AV Adapter and an HDMI cable (iPod touch 4th generation)  Apple Component AV Cable  Apple Composite AV Cable  Apple VGA Adapter and a VGA cable Apple cables, adapters, and docks are available for purchase separately in many countries. Go to www.apple.com/ipodstore or check with your local Apple retailer. Stream videos using AirPlay: Start video playback, then tap and choose your Apple TV from the list of AirPlay devices. If doesn’t appear or if you don’t see Apple TV in the list of AirPlay devices, make sure it’s on the same wireless network as iPod touch. While video is playing, you can exit Videos and use other apps. To return playback to iPod touch, tap and choose iPod touch. Stream videos using a cable: Use the cable to connect iPod touch to your TV or AV receiver and select the corresponding input. Connect using an Apple Digital AV Adapter (iPod touch 4th generation) Attach the Apple Digital AV Adapter to the iPod touch Dock connector. Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI port of the adapter to your TV or receiver. To keep iPod touch charged while watching videos, use an Apple Dock Connector to USB Cable to connect the 30-pin port of the adapter to your computer, or to a USB Power Adapter plugged into a power outlet. Connect using an AV cable Use the Apple Component AV Cable, Apple Composite AV Cable, or other authorized iPod touch-compatible cable. You can also use these cables with the Apple Universal Dock to connect iPod touch to your TV. You can use the dock’s remote to control playback. Connect using a VGA Adapter Attach the VGA Adapter to the iPod touch Dock connector. Connect the VGA Adapter with a VGA cable to a compatible TV, projector, or VGA display. The Digital AV Adapter supports high-definition video up to 720p, with audio. Deleting videos from iPod touch You can delete videos from iPod touch to save space. Deleting a video from iPod touch (other than a rented movie) doesn’t delete the video from your iTunes library. It may reappear on iPod touch if the video in iTunes is still set to sync. Important: If you delete a rented movie from iPod touch, it’s deleted permanently and cannot be transferred back to your computer. Delete a video: In the videos list, swipe left or right over the video, then tap Delete. Using Home Sharing Home Sharing lets you play music, movies, and TV shows on iPod touch from the iTunes library on your Mac or PC. For information, see “Home Sharing” on page 41. 44 Chapter 5 VideosSetting a sleep timer You can set iPod touch to stop playing music or videos after a period of time. Set a sleep timer: From the Home screen choose Clock > Timer, then flick to set the number of hours and minutes. Tap When Timer Ends and choose Sleep iPod, tap Set, then tap Start to start the timer. When the timer ends, iPod touch stops playing music or video, closes any other open app, and then locks itself. Converting videos for iPod touch You can add videos other than those purchased from the iTunes Store to iPod touch, such as videos you create in iMovie on a Mac, or videos you download from the Internet and then add to iTunes. If you try to add a video from iTunes to iPod touch and a message says the video can’t play on iPod touch, you can convert the video. Convert a video to work with iPod touch: Select the video in your iTunes library and choose Advanced > “Create iPod or iPhone Version.” Then add the converted video to iPod touch. Chapter 5 Videos 45Messages 6 Sending and receiving messages Using the Messages app and the built-in iMessage service, you can send free text messages over Wi-Fi to other iOS 5 users. Messages can include photos, videos, and other info. You can see when the other person is typing, and let others be notified when you’ve read their messages. Because iMessages are displayed on all of your iOS 5 devices logged in to the same account, you can start a conversation on one of your devices, then continue it on another device. Messages are also encrypted. Note: Cellular data charges or additional fees may apply for iPhone and iPad users you exchange messages with over their cellular data network. Send a text message: Tap , then tap and choose a contact, search your contacts by entering a name, or enter a phone number or email address manually. Enter the message, then tap Send. Note: An alert badge appears if a message can’t be sent. If the alert appears in the address field, make sure you enter the name, phone number, or email address of another iOS 5 user. In a conversation, tap the alert to try sending the message again. Conversations are saved in the Messages list. A blue dot indicates unread messages. Tap a conversation to view or continue it. In an iMessage conversation, your outgoing messages appear in blue. Tap the attach media button to include a photo or video. Tap to enter text. 46Use emoji characters Go to Settings > General > Keyboard > International Keyboards > Add New Keyboard, then tap Emoji to make that keyboard available. To enter emoji characters when typing a message, tap to bring up the Emoji keyboard. See “Switching keyboards” on page 131. Resume a previous conversation Tap the conversation in the Messages list, then enter a message and tap Send. Display earlier messages in the conversation Scroll to the top (tap the status bar) and tap Load Earlier Messages. Receive messages using another address Go to Settings > Messages > Receive At > Add Another Email. Follow a link in a message Tap the link. A link may open a webpage in Safari, or add a phone number to your contacts, for example. Forward a conversation Select a conversation, then tap Edit. Select parts to include, then tap Forward. Add someone to your contacts list Tap a phone number in the Messages list, then tap “Add to Contacts.” Notify others when you’ve read their messages Go to Settings > Messages and turn on Send Read Receipts. Set other options for Messages Go to Settings > Messages. Manage notifications for messages See “Notifications” on page 101. Set the alert sound for incoming text messages See “Sounds” on page 102. Sending messages to a group Group messaging lets you send a message to multiple recipients. Send messages to a group: Tap , then enter multiple recipients. Sending photos, videos, and more You can send photos, videos, locations, contact info, and voice memos. Send a photo or video: Tap . The size limit of attachments is determined by your service provider. iPod touch may compress photo and video attachments, if necessary. Send a location In Maps, tap for a location, tap Share Location (bottom of screen), then tap Message. Send contact info In Contacts, choose a contact, tap Share Contact (bottom of screen), then tap Message. Send a voice memo In Voice Memos, tap , tap the voice memo, tap Share, then tap Message. Save a photo or video you receive to your Camera Roll album Tap the photo or video, then tap . Copy a photo or video Touch and hold the attachment, then tap Copy. Save contact information you receive Tap the contact bubble, then tap Create New Contact or “Add to Existing Contact.” Chapter 6 Messages 47Editing conversations If you want to keep just part of a conversation, you can delete the parts you don’t want. You can also delete entire conversations from the Messages list. Edit a conversation: Tap Edit, select the parts to delete, then tap Delete. Clear all text and attachments, without deleting the conversation Tap Edit, then tap Clear All. Delete a conversation Swipe the conversation, then tap Delete. Searching messages You can search the content of conversations in the Messages list. Search a conversation: Tap the top of the screen to display the search field, then enter the text you’re looking for. You can also search conversations from the Home screen. See “Searching” on page 27. 48 Chapter 6 MessagesFaceTime 7 About FaceTime FaceTime lets you make video calls over Wi-Fi. Use the front camera to talk face-to-face, or the main camera to share what you see around you. To use FaceTime, you need iPod touch 4th generation and a Wi-Fi connection to the Internet. The person you call must also have an iOS device or computer that works with FaceTime. Note: FaceTime may not be available in all areas. Switch cameras. Drag your image to any corner. Mute (you can hear and see; the caller can see but not hear). 49Making a FaceTime call To make a FaceTime call, choose someone from your contacts, favorites, or list of recent calls. When you open FaceTime, you may be prompted to sign in using your Apple ID, or to create a new account. Tap to make a FaceTime call. Call a contact: Tap Contacts, choose a name, then tap FaceTime. If you don’t see the FaceTime button, make sure FaceTime is turned on. Go to Settings > FaceTime. Call using Voice Control Press and hold the Home button until the Voice Control screen appears and you hear a beep. Then say “FaceTime,” followed by the name of the person you want to call. Restart a recent call Tap Recents, then choose a name or number. Call a favorite Tap Favorites, then tap a name in the list. Add a contact Tap Contacts, tap , then enter the person’s name and their email address or phone number that they use for FaceTime. For a contact outside your region, be sure to enter the complete number, including country code and area code. Set options for FaceTime Go to Settings > FaceTime. While on a FaceTime call While talking to someone using FaceTime, you can switch cameras, change camera orientation, mute your microphone, move your picture-in-picture display, open another app, and finally, end your call. Switch between the front and main cameras Tap . Change the camera orientation Rotate iPod touch. The image your friend sees changes to match. To avoid unwanted orientation changes as you move the camera around, lock iPod touch in portrait orientation. See “Viewing in portrait or landscape orientation” on page 20. Mute the call Tap . Your friend can still see you, and you can still see and hear your friend. Move your picture-in-picture display Drag the inset window to any corner. Use another app during a call Press the Home button , then tap an app icon. You can still talk with your friend, but you can’t see each other. To return to the video, tap the green bar at the top of the screen. End the call Tap . 50 Chapter 7 FaceTimeCamera 8 About Camera With iPod touch 4th generation, the built-in camera lets you take both still photos and videos. There’s a camera on the back, and a front camera for FaceTime and self-portraits. Tap a person or object to set the exposure. Switch between the main and front cameras. Take a photo. Camera/Video switch View the photos and videos you’ve taken. Turn on the grid. If Location Services is turned on, photos and videos are tagged with location data that can be used by some apps and photo-sharing websites. See “Location Services” on page 102. Note: If Location Services is turned off when you open Camera, you may be asked to turn it on. You can use Camera without Location Services. Taking photos and videos To quickly open Camera when iPod touch is locked, press the Home button or the On/Off button, then drag up. 51Take a photo: Make sure the Camera/Video switch is set to , then aim iPod touch and tap . You can also take a photo by pressing the volume up button. Record a video: Slide the Camera/Video switch to , then tap to start or stop recording, or press the volume up button. When you take a photo or start a video recording, iPod touch makes a shutter sound. You can control the volume with the volume buttons. Note: In some areas, the shutter sound can’t be silenced. Zoom in or out Pinch the screen (main camera, in camera mode only). Turn on the grid Tap Options. Set the exposure Tap a person or object on the screen. Lock the exposure Touch and hold the screen until the rectangle pulses. AE Lock appears on the screen, and the exposure remains locked until you tap the screen again. Take a screenshot Press and release the On/Off button and the Home button at the same time. The screenshot is added to your Camera Roll album. Note: On an iPod touch without a camera, screenshots are added to the Saved Photos album. Viewing, sharing, and printing The photos and videos you take with Camera are saved in your Camera Roll album. View your Camera Roll album: Flick left-to-right, or tap the thumbnail image in the lower-left corner of the screen. You can also view your Camera Roll album in the Photos app. To take more photos or videos, tap . If you have Photo Stream turned on in Settings > iCloud, new photos also appear in your Photo Stream album, and are streamed to your other iOS devices and computers. See “iCloud”on page 16. For more information about viewing and sharing photos and videos, see “Sharing photos and videos” on page 57 and “Uploading photos and videos to your computer” on page 53. Show or hide the controls while viewing a full-screen photo or video Tap the screen. Email or text a photo or video Tap . Tweet a photo View the photo in full screen, tap , then tap Tweet. You must be logged in to your Twitter account. Go to Settings > Twitter. To include your location, tap Add Location. Print a photo Tap . See “Printing” on page 26. Delete a photo or video Tap . 52 Chapter 8 CameraEditing photos You can rotate, enhance, remove red-eye, and crop photos. Enhancing improves a photo’s overall darkness or lightness, color saturation, and other qualities. Rotate Auto enhance Remove red-eye Crop Edit a photo: While viewing a photo in full screen, tap Edit, then choose a tool. With the red-eye tool, tap each eye to correct it. To crop, drag the corners of the grid, drag the photo to reposition it, then tap Crop. You can also tap Constrain when cropping, to set a specific ratio. Trimming videos You can trim the frames from the beginning and end of a video that you just recorded, or from any other video in your Camera Roll album. You can replace the original video, or save the trimmed version as a new video clip. Trim a video: While viewing a video, tap the screen to display the controls. Drag either end of the frame viewer at the top of the video, then tap Trim. Important: If you choose Trim Original, the trimmed frames are permanently deleted from the original video. If you choose “Save as New Clip,” a new trimmed video clip is saved in your Camera Roll album and the original video is unaffected. Uploading photos and videos to your computer You can upload the photos and videos you take with Camera to photo applications on your computer, such as iPhoto on a Mac. Upload photos and videos to your computer: Connect iPod touch to your computer using the Dock Connector to USB Cable.  Mac: Select the photos and videos you want, then click the Import or Download button in iPhoto or other supported photo application on your computer.  PC: Follow the instructions that came with your photo application. If you delete the photos and videos from iPod touch when you upload them to your computer, they’re removed from your Camera Roll album. You can use the Photos settings pane in iTunes to sync photos and videos to the Photos app on iPod touch (videos can be synced only with a Mac). See “Syncing with iTunes” on page 17. Chapter 8 Camera 53Photo Stream With Photo Stream—a feature of iCloud—photos you take on iPod touch are automatically uploaded to iCloud and pushed to all your other devices that have Photo Stream enabled. Photos uploaded to iCloud from your other devices and computers are also pushed to your Photo Stream album on iPod touch. See “iCloud” on page 16. Turn on Photo Stream: Go to Settings > iCloud > Photo Stream. New photos you’ve taken are uploaded to your Photo Stream when you leave the Camera app and iPod touch is connected to the Internet via Wi-Fi. Any other photos added to your Camera Roll—including photos downloaded from email and text messages, images saved from web pages, and screenshots—are also uploaded to your Photo Stream and pushed to your other devices. Photo Stream can share up to 1000 of your most recent photos across your iOS devices. Your computers can keep all your Photo Stream photos permanently. Save photos to iPod touch from Photo Stream In your Photo Stream album, tap , select the photos you want to save, then tap Save. Delete a photo from iCloud In your Photo Stream album, select the photo, then tap . Delete multiple photos from iCloud In your Photo Stream album, tap , select the photos you want to delete, then tap Delete. Note: To delete photos from Photo Stream, you need iOS 5.1 or later on iPod touch and all of your other iOS devices. See support.apple.com/kb/HT4486. Although deleted photos are removed from the Photo Stream on your devices, the original remains in the Camera Roll album on the device the photo originated from. 54 Chapter 8 CameraPhotos 9 Viewing photos and videos Photos lets you view photos and videos on iPod touch, in your:  Camera Roll album—photos and videos you take with the built-in camera, or save from an email, text message, or webpage  Photo Stream album—photos streamed from iCloud (see “Photo Stream” on page 54)  Photo Library and other albums synced from your computer (see “Syncing with iTunes” on page 17) Note: Camera and video features are available only on iPod touch 4th generation. On iPod touch 3rd generation or earlier, the Camera Roll album is named Saved Photos. Edit the photo. Delete the photo. Tap the screen to display the controls. Share the photo, assign it to a contact, use it as wallpaper, or print it. Play a slideshow. Stream photos using AirPlay. View photos and videos: Tap an album, then tap a thumbnail to see the photo or video in full screen. Albums you sync with iPhoto 8.0 (iLife ’09) or later, or Aperture v3.0.2 or later, can be viewed by events or by faces. You can also view photos by location, if they were taken with a camera that supports geotagging. 55Show or hide the controls Tap the full-screen photo or video. See the next or previous photo or video Flick left or right. Zoom in or out Double-tap or pinch. Pan a photo Drag the photo. Play a video Tap in the center of the screen. View a video in full screen, or fit to screen Double-tap the video. Stream a video to an HDTV See “AirPlay” on page 30. Edit photos or trim videos See “Editing photos” or “Trimming videos” on page 53. Viewing slideshows View a slideshow: Tap an album to open it, then tap a photo and tap . Select slideshow options, then tap Start Slideshow. Stream a slideshow to an HDTV See “AirPlay” on page 30. Stop a slideshow Tap the screen. Set additional options Go to Settings > Photos. Organizing photos and videos You can create, rename, and delete albums on iPod touch to help you organize your photos and videos. Create an album: When viewing albums, tap Edit, then tap Add. Select photos to add to the new album, then tap Done. Note: Albums created on iPod touch aren’t synced back to your computer. Rename an album Tap Edit, then select an album. Rearrange albums Tap Edit, then drag up or down. Delete an album Tap Edit, then tap . 56 Chapter 9 PhotosSharing photos and videos Send a photo or video in an email, text message, or Tweet: Choose a photo or video, then tap . If you don’t see , tap the screen to show the controls. Note: Video features are available only on iPod touch 4th generation. To post a Tweet, you must be logged in to your Twitter account. Go to Settings > Twitter. The size limit of attachments is determined by your service provider. iPod touch may compress photo and video attachments, if necessary. Send multiple photos or videos While viewing thumbnails, tap , select the photos or videos, then tap Share. Copy a photo or video Touch and hold the photo or video, then tap Copy. Copy multiple photos or videos Tap in the upper-right corner of the screen. Select the photos and videos, then tap Copy. Paste a photo or video in an email or text message Touch and hold where you want to place the photo or video, then tap Paste. Save a photo or video from an email message Tap to download the item if necessary, tap the photo or touch and hold the video, then tap Save. Save a photo or video from a text message Tap the image in the conversation, tap , than tap Save. Save a photo from a webpage Touch and hold the photo, then tap Save Image. Share a video on YouTube While viewing a video, tap , then tap “Send to YouTube.” Photos and videos that you receive, or that you save from a webpage, are saved to your Camera Roll album (or to Saved Photos, on an iPod touch with no camera). Printing photos Print a photo: Tap , then tap Print. Print multiple photos: While viewing a photo album, tap . Select the photos you want to print, then tap Print. For more information, see “Printing” on page 26. Chapter 9 Photos 57Game Center 10 About Game Center Discover new games and share your game experiences with friends around the world in Game Center (iPod touch 3rd generation or later). Invite friends to play, or use auto-match to find other worthy opponents. Earn bonus points by achieving specific accomplishments in a game, see what your friends have achieved, and check leaderboards to see who the best players are. Note: Game Center may not be available in all areas, and game availability may vary. To use Game Center, you need an Internet connection and an Apple ID. You can use the same Apple ID you use for iCloud or Store purchases, or create a new one if you want a separate Apple ID for gaming, as described below. See who’s the best. Respond to friend requests. See a list of game goals. Play the game. Find someone to play against. Choose a game to play. Invite friends to play. Declare your status, change your photo, or sign out. 58Signing in to Game Center Sign in: Open Game Center. If you see your nickname and photo at the top of the screen, you’re already signed in. If not, enter your Apple ID and password, then tap Sign In. Or, tap Create New Account to create a new Apple ID. Add a photo Tap the photo next to your name. Declare your status Tap Me, tap the status bar, then enter your status. View your account settings Tap Me, tap the Account banner, then tap View Account. Sign out Tap Me, tap the Account banner, then tap Sign Out. You don’t need to sign out each time you quit Game Center. Purchasing and downloading games Games for the Game Center are available from the App Store. Purchase and download a game: Tap Games, then tap a recommended game or tap Find Game Center Games. Purchase a game your friend has Tap Friends, then tap the name of your friend. Tap a game in your friend’s list of games, then tap the price of the game below its name at the top of the screen. Playing games Play a game: Tap Games, choose a game, then tap Play. See a list of top scorers Tap Games, then choose the game and tap Leaderboard. See the achievements you can try for Tap Games, choose a game, then tap Achievements. Return to Game Center after playing Press the Home button, then tap Game Center on the Home screen. Playing with friends Game Center can put you in contact with players around the world. Add friends to Game Center by making a request, or by accepting a request from another player. Invite friends to a multiplayer game: Tap Friends, choose a friend, choose a game, and tap Play. If the game allows or requires additional players, choose additional players to invite, then tap Next. Send your invitation, then wait for the others to accept. When everyone is ready, start the game. If a friend isn’t available or doesn’t respond to your invitation, you can tap Auto-Match to have Game Center find another player for you, or tap Invite Friend to try inviting some other friend. Send a friend request Tap Friends or Requests, tap , then enter your friend’s email address or Game Center nickname. Tap to browse your contacts. To add several friends in one request, type Return after each address. Respond to a friend request Tap Requests, tap the request, then tap Accept or Ignore. To report a problem with the request, flick up and tap “Report a Problem.” See the games a friend plays and check your friend’s scores Tap Friends, tap your friend’s name, then tap Games or Points. Chapter 10 Game Center 59Search for someone in your list of friends Tap the status bar to scroll to the top of the screen, then tap the search field and start typing. Prevent game invitations from others Turn off Game Invites in your Game Center account settings. See “Game Center settings” below. Keep your email address private Turn off Find Me By Email in your Game Center account settings. See “Game Center settings” below. Disable all multiplayer activity Go to Settings > General > Restrictions > Game Center and turn off Multiplayer Games. Disallow friend requests Go to Settings > General > Restrictions > Game Center and turn off Adding Friends. See a list of a friend’s friends Tap Friends, tap the friend’s name, then tap Friends just below their picture. Remove a friend Tap Friends, tap a name, then tap Unfriend. Report offensive or inappropriate behavior Tap Friends, tap the person’s name, then tap “Report a Problem.” Game Center settings Some Game Center settings are associated with the Apple ID you use to sign in. Others are in the Settings app on iPod touch. Change Game Center settings for your Apple ID: Sign in with your Apple ID, tap Me, tap the Account banner, then choose View Account. Specify which notifications you want for Game Center: Go to Settings > Notifications > Game Center. If Game Center doesn’t appear, turn on Notifications. Change restrictions affecting Game Center: Go to Settings > General > Restrictions > Game Center. 60 Chapter 10 Game CenterMail 11 Mail works with iCloud, Microsoft Exchange, and many of the most popular email systems— including Yahoo!, Google, Hotmail, and AOL—as well as other industry-standard POP3 and IMAP email systems. You can send and receive photos, videos, and graphics, and view PDFs and other attachments. You can also print messages, and attachments that open in Quick Look. Checking and reading email In Mail, the Mailboxes screen provides quick access to all your inboxes and other mailboxes. When you open a mailbox, Mail retrieves and displays the most recent messages. You can set the number of messages retrieved, in Mail settings. See “Mail accounts and settings” on page 64. Unread messages Number of   messages in  thread Organize messages by thread Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars and turn Organize By Thread on or off. If you organize messages by thread, related messages appear as a single entry in the mailbox. Check for new messages Choose a mailbox, or tap at any time. Load more messages Scroll to the bottom of the list of messages and tap Load More Messages. Zoom in on part of a message Double-tap an area of the message. Double-tap again to zoom out. Or pinch apart or together to zoom in or out. 61Resize a column of text to fit the screen Double-tap the text. See all the recipients of a message Tap Details. Tap a name or email address to see the recipient’s contact information. Then tap a phone number or email address to contact the person. Add an email recipient to your contacts list Tap the message and, if necessary, tap Details to see the recipients. Then tap a name or email address and tap Create New Contact or “Add to Existing Contact.” Flag or mark a message as unread Open the message and, if necessary, tap Details. Then tap Mark. To mark multiple messages as unread, see “Organizing mail” on page 64. Open a meeting invitation Tap the invitation. See “Responding to invitations” on page 74. Working with multiple accounts If you set up more than one account, the Accounts section of the Mailboxes screen lets you access those accounts. You can also tap All Inboxes to see all of your incoming messages in a single list. For information about adding accounts, see “Mail accounts and settings” on page 64. When you compose a new message, tap the From field and select the account to send the message from. Sending mail You can send an email message to anyone who has an email address. Compose a message: Tap Add a recipient from Contacts Type a name or email address in the To field, or tap . Rearrange recipients To move a recipient from one field to another, such as from To to Cc, drag the recipient’s name to the new location. Make text bold, italic, or underlined Tap the insertion point to display the selection buttons, then tap Select. Drag the points to select the text that you want to style. Tap , then tap B/I/U. Tap Bold, Italics, or Underline to apply the style. Send a photo or video in an email message In Photos, choose a photo or video, tap , then tap Email Photo or Email Video. You can also copy and paste photos and videos. To send multiple photos or videos, tap while viewing thumbnails in an album. Tap to select the photos and videos, tap Share, then tap Email. Save a draft of a message to finish later Tap Cancel, then tap Save. The message is saved in the Drafts mailbox. Touch and hold to quickly access it. Reply to a message Tap , then tap Reply. Files or images attached to the initial message aren’t sent back. To include the attachments, forward it instead of replying. Quote a portion of the message you’re replying to or forwarding Touch and hold to select text. Drag the grab points to select the text you want to include in your reply, then tap . To change the indentation of quoted text, touch and hold to select text, then tap . Tap Quote Level, then tap Increase or Decrease. Forward a message Open a message and tap , then tap Forward. Share contact information In Contacts, choose a contact, tap Share Contact at the bottom of the Info screen. 62 Chapter 11 MailUsing links and detected data iPod touch detects web links, phone numbers, email addresses, dates, and other types of information that you can use to open a webpage, create a preaddressed email message, create or add information to a contact, or perform some other useful action. Detected data appears as blue underlined text. Tap the data to use its default action, or touch and hold to see other actions. For example, for an address, you can display its location in Maps, or add it to Contacts. Viewing attachments iPod touch displays image attachments in many commonly used formats (JPEG, GIF, and TIFF) inline with the text in email messages. iPod touch can play many types of audio attachments, such as MP3, AAC, WAV, and AIFF. You can download and view files (such as PDF, webpage, text, Pages, Keynote, Numbers, and Microsoft Word, Excel, and PowerPoint documents) that are attached to messages you receive. View an attached file: Tap the attachment to open it in Quick Look. You may need to wait while it downloads before viewing. Open an attached file Touch and hold the attachment, then choose an app to open it. If neither Quick Look nor your apps support the file, you can see the name of the file but you can’t open it. Save an attached photo or video Touch and hold the photo or video, then tap Save Image or Video. The item is saved to your Camera Roll album in the Photos app. Quick Look supports the following document types: .doc, .docx Microsoft Word .htm, .html webpage .key Keynote .numbers Numbers .pages Pages .pdf Preview, Adobe Acrobat .ppt, .pptx Microsoft PowerPoint .rtf Rich Text Format .txt text .vcf contact information .xls, .xlsx Microsoft Excel Printing messages and attachments You can print email messages, and attachments that can be viewed in Quick Look. Print an email message: Tap , then tap Print. Print an inline image Touch and hold the image, then tap Save Image. Then open Photos and print the image from your Camera Roll album. Print an attachment Tap the attachment to view it in Quick Look, then tap and tap Print. For more information, see “Printing” on page 26. Chapter 11 Mail 63Organizing mail You can organize messages in any mailbox, folder, or search results window. You can delete or mark messages as read. You can also move messages from one mailbox or folder to another in the same account or between different accounts. You can add, delete, or rename mailboxes and folders. Delete a message: Open the message and tap . You can also delete a message directly from the mailbox message list by swiping left or right over the message title, then tapping Delete. Some mail accounts support archiving messages instead of deleting them. When you archive a message, it’s moved from your Inbox to All Mail. Turn archiving on or off in Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars. Recover a message Deleted messages are moved to the Trash mailbox. To change how long a message stays in the Trash before being deleted permanently, go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars. Then tap Advanced. Delete or move multiple messages While viewing a list of messages, tap Edit, select the messages you want to delete, then tap Move or Delete. Move a message to another mailbox or folder While viewing a message, tap , then choose a mailbox or folder. Add a mailbox Go to the mailboxes list, tap Edit, then tap New Mailbox. Delete or rename a mailbox Go to the mailboxes list, tap Edit and then tap a mailbox. Enter a new name or location for the mailbox. Tap Delete Mailbox to delete it and its contents. Flag and mark multiple messages as read While viewing a list of messages, tap Edit, select the messages you want then tap Mark. Choose either Flag or Mark as Read. Searching mail You can search the To, From, Subject and body text of email messages. Mail searches the downloaded messages in the current mailbox. For iCloud, Exchange, and some IMAP mail accounts, you can also search messages on the server. Search email messages: Open a mailbox, scroll to the top, and enter text in the Search field. Tap From, To, Subject, or All to choose which fields you want to search. If your mail account supports it, messages on the server are also searched. Mail messages can also be included in searches from the Home screen. See “Searching”on page 27. Mail accounts and settings Accounts Settings for Mail and your mail accounts are in Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars. You can set up:  Microsoft Exchange  iCloud  MobileMe  Google  Yahoo!  AOL  Microsoft Hotmail  Other POP and IMAP mail systems 64 Chapter 11 MailSome settings depend on the type of account. Your service provider or system administrator can provide the information you need to enter. Change an account’s settings: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars, choose an account, then make the changes you want. Stop using an account Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars, choose an account, then turn off an account service (such as Mail, Calendars, or Notes). If an account service is off, iPod touch doesn’t display or sync information with that account service until you turn it back on. This is a good way to stop receiving work email while on vacation, for example. Store drafts, sent messages, and deleted messages on iPod touch For IMAP accounts, you can change the location of the Draft, Deleted, and Sent mailboxes. Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars, choose an account, then tap Advanced. Set how long before messages are removed permanently from Mail Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars, choose an account, then tap Advanced. Tap Remove, then choose a time: Never, or after one day, one week, or one month. Adjust email server settings Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars, then choose an account. Ask your network administrator or Internet service provider for the correct settings. Adjust SSL and password settings Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars, choose an account, then tap Advanced. Ask your network administrator or Internet service provider for the correct settings. Turn Archive Messages on or off Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars, choose your account, then turn Archive Messages on or off. See “Organizing mail” on page 64. Delete an account Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars, choose an account, then scroll down and tap Delete Account. All email and the contacts, calendar, and bookmark information synced with the account are removed from iPod touch. Send signed and encrypted messages Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars, choose an account, then tap Advanced. Turn on S/MIME, then select certificates for signing and encrypting outgoing messages. To install certificates, obtain a configuration profile from your system administrator, download the certificates from the issuer’s website using Safari, or receive them in Mail attachments. Set Push settings Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars > Fetch New Data. Push delivers new information when iPod touch is connected to a Wi-Fi network (some delays may occur). Turn Push off to suspend delivery of email and other information, or to conserve battery life. When Push is off, use the Fetch New Data setting to see how often data is requested. Set other options for Mail For settings that apply to all of your accounts, go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars. Mail settings Mail settings, except where noted, apply to all your accounts on iPod touch. Set options for mail: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars. To change the tones played when mail is sent or received, go to Settings > Sounds. Chapter 11 Mail 65Reminders 12 About Reminders Reminders lets you organize your life—complete with reminders so you don’t miss a due date. Reminders works with your calendar accounts, so changes you make are updated automatically on all your iOS devices and computers. Change views. Mark as completed. Add a reminder. View and edit lists. Switch between list view and date view: At the top of the screen, tap List or Date. 66Setting a reminder You can set a reminder for a date and time and have Reminders alert you when the item is due. Add a reminder: In Reminders, tap , then enter a description and tap Done. After you add a reminder, you can fine-tune its settings: Set a day or time for a reminder Tap the reminder, then tap Remind Me. Turn on “On a Day” and then set the date and time you want to be reminded. Reminders that are due are displayed in Notification Center. Add notes to a reminder Tap the reminder, then tap Show More. Tap Notes. Move a reminder to another list Tap the reminder, then tap Show More. Tap List and choose a new list. To create or edit lists, see “Managing reminders in list view” on page 67. Delete a reminder Tap the reminder, tap Show More, then tap Delete. Edit a reminder Tap the reminder, then tap its name. Mark a reminder as completed Tap the box next to the reminder so that a checkmark appears. Completed reminders appear in the Completed list. See “Managing completed reminders” on page 68. Set the tone played for reminders Go to Settings > Sound. Use iCloud to keep Reminders up to date on your iOS devices and computers Go to Settings > iCloud, then turn on Reminders. See “iCloud” on page 16. Managing reminders in list view Organizing reminders into lists makes it easy to keep your work, personal, and other to-dos separate from each other. Reminders comes with one list for active reminders, plus a built-in list of completed items. You can add other lists of your own. Create a list: At the top of the screen, tap List, then tap . Tap Edit. Switch between lists Swipe across the screen to the left or right. You can also jump to a specific list. Tap , then tap a list name. View completed items Swipe across the screen to the left until you reach the Completed list. Change the order of lists In list view, tap , then tap Edit. Drag next to a list to change the order. You can’t move a list to a different account, and you can’t change the order of reminders in a list. Delete a list In list view, tap , then tap Edit. Tap for each list you want to delete. When you delete a list, all the items in the list are also deleted. Change the name of a list In list view, tap , then tap Edit. Tap the name you want to change, then type a new name. Tap Done. Set a default list for new reminders Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars, then under the Reminders heading, tap Default List. Chapter 12 Reminders 67Managing reminders in date view Use date view to view and manage reminders that have a due date. View reminders for a date: At the top of the screen, tap Date to view today’s reminders and uncompleted items from previous days. View a recent date Drag the time slider, located under the list, to a new day. View a specific day Tap , then select a date to view. Managing completed reminders Reminders keeps track of the items you mark as completed. You can see them in list view or date view, and also in the Completed list. View completed items: Tap the List button at the top of the screen, then swipe from left to right until the Completed list appears. View the number of completed items In list view or date view, scroll to the top of the reminder list then pull down on the list until Completed appears. Tap Completed to view all of the completed items. Mark a completed item as uncompleted Tap to remove the checkmark. The item automatically moves back to its original list. Sync previous reminders Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars, then, under Reminders, tap Sync. This setting applies to all of your reminder accounts. For best performance, don’t sync more previous items than you need to. Searching reminders You can quickly find pending or completed reminders. Reminders are searched by name. Search reminders in date view: Tap , then tap Search Reminders and enter a search phrase. Search reminders in list view: Tap , then tap Search Reminders and enter a search phrase. You can also search Reminders from the Home screen. See “Spotlight Search” on page 104. 68 Chapter 12 RemindersSafari 13 Safari lets you surf the web and view webpages. Create bookmarks on iPod touch and sync them with your computer. Add web clips to the Home screen for quick access to your favorite sites. Print webpages, PDFs, and other documents. Use Reading List to collect sites to read later. Viewing webpages Search the web and the current page. Flick through open webpages or open a new page. Double-tap an item or pinch to zoom in or out. Enter a web address (URL). Add a bookmark, add to the Reading List, add an icon to the Home screen, or share or print the page. Tap the status bar to quickly scroll to the top. View your bookmarks or Reading List. View a webpage: Tap the address field (in the title bar) to bring up the keyboard. Type the web address, then tap Go. If the address field isn’t visible, tap the status bar to quickly scroll to the top. You can view webpages in portrait or landscape orientation. Erase the text in the address field Tap . Scroll around a webpage Drag up, down, or sideways. Scroll within a frame on a webpage Scroll with two fingers inside the frame. Open a new page Tap , then tap New Page. You can have up to eight pages open at a time. A number inside indicates the number of open pages. 69Go to another page Tap , flick left or right, then tap the page. Stop a webpage from loading Tap . Reload a webpage Tap in the address field. Close a page Tap , then tap by the page. Protect private information and block some websites from tracking your behavior Go to Settings > Safari and turn on Private Browsing. Set options for Safari Go to Settings > Safari. Links Follow a link on a webpage: Tap the link. See a link’s destination address Touch and hold the link. Detected data—such as dates and email addresses—may also appear as links in webpages. Touch and hold a link to see the available options. See “Using links and detected data” on page 63. Reading List Reading List lets you collect links to webpages to read later. Add a link to the current page to your reading list: Tap , then tap “Add to Reading List.” Add a link to your reading list: Touch and hold the link, then choose “Add to Reading List.” View your reading list Tap , then tap Reading List. Use iCloud to keep your reading list up to date on your iOS devices and computers Go to Settings > iCloud, then turn on Bookmarks. See “iCloud” on page 16. Reader Reader displays web articles without ads or clutter, so you can read without distractions. On a webpage with an article, you can use Reader to view just the article. View an article in Reader: Tap the Reader button, if it appears in the address field. Adjust the font size Tap . Bookmark, save, share, or print the article Tap . Return to normal view Tap Done. Entering text and filling out forms Enter text: Tap a text field to bring up the keyboard. Move to another text field Tap the text field, or tap Next or Previous. Submit a form Tap Go or Search, or the link on the page to submit the form, if available. To enable AutoFill to help fill out forms, go to Settings > Safari > AutoFill. 70 Chapter 13 SafariSearching The search field in the upper-right corner lets you search the web, and the current page or PDF. Search the web, and the current page or searchable PDF: Enter text in the search field.  To search the web: Tap one of the suggestions that appear, or tap Search.  To find the search text on the current page or PDF: Scroll to the bottom of the screen, then tap the entry below On This Page. The first instance is highlighted. To find later occurrences, tap . Change the search engine Go to Settings > Safari > Search Engine. Bookmarks and history Bookmark a webpage: Open the page, tap , then tap Add Bookmark. When you save a bookmark, you can edit its title. By default, bookmarks are saved at the top level of Bookmarks. Tap Bookmarks to choose another folder. View previous webpages (history): Tap , then tap History. To clear the history, tap Clear. Open a bookmarked webpage Tap . Edit a bookmark or bookmark folder Tap , choose the folder that has the bookmark or folder you want to edit, then tap Edit. Use iCloud to keep bookmarks up to date on your iOS devices and computers Go to Settings > iCloud, then turn on Bookmarks. See “iCloud” on page 16. Sync bookmarks with the web browser on your computer See “Syncing with iTunes” on page 17. Printing webpages, PDFs, and other documents Print a webpage, PDF, or Quick Look document: Tap , then tap Print. For more information, see “Printing” on page 26. Web clips You can create web clips, which appear as icons on the Home screen. Add a web clip: Open the webpage and tap . Then tap “Add to Home Screen.” When you open a web clip, Safari automatically zooms to the part of the webpage showing when you saved the web clip. Unless the webpage has a custom icon, that image is also used for the web clip icon on the Home screen. Web clips are backed up by iCloud and by iTunes, but they aren’t synced by iTunes or MobileMe. They also aren’t pushed to other devices by iCloud. Chapter 13 Safari 71Newsstand 14 About Newsstand Newsstand organizes your magazine and newspaper app subscriptions with a shelf that lets you access your publications quickly and easily. Newsstand apps appear on the shelf, and as new issues become available, a badge lets you know they’re ready for reading. They’re delivered to iPod touch automatically. Touch and hold a publication to rearrange. Find Newsstand apps: Tap Newsstand to reveal the shelf, then tap Store. When you purchase a newsstand app, it’s added to your shelf for easy access. After the app is downloaded, open it to view its issues and subscription options. Subscriptions are In-App purchases, billed to your store account. See “Store settings” on page 99. Pricing varies, and Newsstand apps may not be available in all areas. Reading the latest issues When a newspaper or magazine has a new issue, Newsstand downloads it when connected to Wi-Fi and notifies you by displaying a badge on the app icon. To start reading, open Newsstand, and look for apps with a “New” banner. Each app has its own method of managing issues. For information about how to delete, find, or work with individual issues, see the app’s help information or App Store listing. You can’t remove a Newsstand app from the shelf, or put other types of apps on the shelf. Turn off automatic downloads: Go to Settings > Store and turn automatic downloads off for the publication. 72Calendar 15 About Calendar Calendar makes it easy to stay on schedule. You can view individual calendars, or several calendars at once. You can view your events by day, by month, or in a list. You can search the titles, invitees, locations, and notes of events. If you enter birthdays for your contacts, you can view those birthdays in Calendar. You can also make, edit, or cancel events on iPod touch, and sync them back to your computer. You can subscribe to iCloud, Google, Yahoo!, or iCal calendars. If you have a Microsoft Exchange or iCloud account, you can receive and respond to meeting invitations. Viewing your calendars You can view calendars individually or as a combined calendar, making it easy to manage work and family calendars at the same time. Add an event. Days with dots have scheduled events. Go to today. Switch views. Respond to a calendar invitation. Events for the selected day Change views: Tap List, Day, or Month. To view the week, rotate iPod touch sideways. In day view, swipe left or right to move between dates. 73View the Birthdays calendar Tap Calendars, then tap Birthdays to include birthdays from your Contacts with your events. See the details of an event Tap the event. You can tap information about the event to get more details. If an address for the location is specified, for example, tap it to open Maps. Edit or delete a calendar Tap Calendars, then tap Edit. Select calendars to view Tap Calendars, then tap to select the calendars you want to view. The events for all selected calendars appear in a single calendar on iPod touch. Adding events You can add and update calendar events directly on iPod touch. Add an event: Tap and enter event information, then tap Done. You can also touch and hold to add a new event to an empty spot on a calendar. Drag the grab points to adjust the event’s duration. Set an alert Set an alert for 5 minutes to two days before the event. Set a default alert for events Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendar > Default Alert Times. Update an event Tap Edit, then change event information. To adjust an event’s time or duration, touch and hold the event to select it. Then drag it to a new time, or drag the grab points to change its duration. Delete an event Tap the event, tap Edit, then scroll down and tap Delete Event. Invite others to an event Tap Invitees to select people from Contacts. Requires an iCloud, Microsoft Exchange, or CalDAV account. Responding to invitations If you have an iCloud, Microsoft Exchange, or a supported CalDAV account, you can receive and respond to meeting invitations from people in your organization. When you receive an invitation, the meeting appears in your calendar with a dotted line around it and appears in the lowerright corner of the screen. Respond to an invitation: Tap an invitation in the calendar. Or, tap to display the Event screen and tap the invitation. See the organizer’s contact information Tap “invitation from.” See other invitees Tap Invitees. Tap a name to see the person’s contact information. Add comments in reply Tap Add Comments. Your comments are visible to the organizer but not to other attendees. Comments may not be available, depending on the calendar service you’re using. Set your availability Tap Availability and select “busy” or “free.” Busy identifies the time as reserved when someone invites you to a meeting. Searching calendars In list view, you can search the titles, invitees, locations, and notes fields of the events in your calendars. Calendar searches the events for the calendars you’re currently viewing. Search for events: Tap List, then enter text in the search field. Calendar events can also be included in searches from the Home screen. See “Searching”on page 27. 74 Chapter 15 CalendarSubscribing to calendars You can subscribe to calendars that use the iCalendar (.ics) format. Many calendar-based services support calendar subscriptions, including iCloud, Yahoo!, Google, and the iCal application in OS X. Subscribed calendars are read-only. You can read events from subscribed calendars on iPod touch, but you can’t edit them or create new events. Subscribe to a calendar: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars, then tap Add Account. Tap Other, then tap Add Subscribed Calendar. You can also subscribe to an iCal (or other .ics) calendar published on the web by tapping a link to the calendar. Importing calendar events from Mail You can add events to a calendar by importing a calendar file from an email message. You can import any standard .ics calendar file. Import events from a calendar file: In Mail, open the message and tap the calendar file. Calendar accounts and settings There are several available for Calendar and your calendar accounts. Calendar accounts are also used to sync to-do items for Reminders. Add a CalDAV account: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars, tap Add an Account, then tap Other. Under Calendars, tap Add CalDAV Account. These options apply to all of your calendars: Set calendar alert tones Go to Settings > Sounds > Calendar Alerts. Sync past events Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars > Sync, then choose a time period. Future events are always synced. Set alerts to sound when you receive a meeting invitation Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars> New Invitation Alerts. Turn on Calendar time zone support Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars > Time Zone Support, then turn on Time Zone Support. Set a default calendar Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars > Default Calendar. Use iCloud to keep Calendar up to date on your iOS devices and computers Go to Settings > iCloud, then turn on Calendar. See “iCloud” on page 16. Important: When Time Zone Support is on, Calendar displays event dates and times in the time zone of the city you selected. When Time Zone Support is off, Calendar displays events in the time zone of your current location as can best be determined by your Internet connection. When you travel, iPod touch may not display events or sound alerts at the correct local time. To manually set the correct time, see “Date & Time” on page 106. Chapter 15 Calendar 75YouTube 16 About YouTube YouTube lets you watch short videos submitted by people from around the world. Some YouTube features require a YouTube account. To set up an account, go to www.youtube.com. Note: YouTube may not be available in all languages and locations. Browsing and searching for videos Browse videos: Tap any browse button at the bottom of the screen, or tap More to see additional browse buttons. If you’re watching a video, tap Done to see the browse buttons. See related videos, or save or share this video. See additional browse buttons, or rearrange the buttons. Tap a video to play it. Tap a browse button to see a list of videos. Rearrange the browse buttons Tap More, then tap Edit. Drag a button to the bottom of the screen, over the button you want to replace. Drag a button left or right to move it. When you’re finished, tap Done. Browse related videos Tap next to any video in a list. Search for a video Tap Search at the bottom of the screen, then tap the search field. See more videos submitted by the same account Tap next to the current video on the video information screen, then tap More Videos. 76Playing videos Watch a video: Tap any video as you browse. Playback starts when enough of the video is downloaded to iPod touch. The shaded portion of the scrubber bar shows download progress. Tap the video to show or hide the controls. Watch on a TV with Apple TV. Drag to skip forward or back. Download progress Add the video to your YouTube Favorites. Drag to adjust  the volume. Pause or resume playback Tap or . You can also press the center button on the iPod touch earphones. Start again from the beginning Tap while the video is playing. If you’ve watched less than five seconds of the video, you’ll skip instead to the previous video in the list. Scan back or forward Touch and hold or . Skip to any point Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Skip to the next or previous video in a list Tap to skip to the next video. Tap twice to skip to the previous video. If you’ve watched less than five seconds of the video, tap only once. Switch between fill screen and fit screen Double-tap the video while watching. You can also tap to make the video fill the screen, or tap to make it fit the screen. Watch YouTube on a TV Connect iPod touch to your TV or AV receiver using AirPlay or a cable. See “Watching videos on a TV” on page 44. Stop watching a video Tap Done. Keeping track of videos you like Add a video to your list of favorites or to a playlist: Tap next to a video to see buttons for adding the video to a list. Add a video to Favorites Tap “Add to Favorites.” If you’re watching the video, tap . Add a video to a playlist Tap “Add to Playlist” on the video information screen, then tap an existing playlist or tap to create a new playlist. Delete a favorite Tap Favorites, tap Edit, and then tap next to the video. Delete a video from a playlist Tap Playlists, tap the playlist, tap Edit, then tap . Delete an entire playlist Tap Playlists, tap Edit, then tap . Subscribe to an account Tap next to the current video (above the Related Videos list). Then tap More Videos, scroll to the bottom of the list, and tap “Subscribe to account.” Unsubscribe from an account Tap Subscriptions (tap More first if you don’t see it), tap an account in the list, then tap Unsubscribe. Chapter 16 YouTube 77Sharing videos, comments, and ratings Show the controls for sharing, commenting, and rating: Tap next to the video. Email a link to a video Tap next to a video and tap Share Video. Or, if you’re watching the video, just tap . Rate or comment on a video On the More Info screen, tap “Rate, Comment, or Flag,” then choose “Rate or Comment.” Send a video to YouTube Open the Photos app, select the video, then Tap . Getting information about a video View a description and viewer comments: Tap next to the video in a list, then tap again when it appears at the top of the screen. Sending videos to YouTube If you have a YouTube account, you can send videos directly to YouTube. See “Sharing photos and videos” on page 57. 78 Chapter 16 YouTubeStocks 17 Viewing stock quotes Stocks lets you see the latest available quotes for your selected stocks, funds, and indexes. To use Stocks, iPod touch must join a Wi-Fi network that’s connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to the Internet” on page 14. Quotes may be delayed up to 20 minutes or more, depending upon the reporting service. Add a stock, fund, or index to the stock reader: Tap , then tap . Enter a symbol, company name, fund name, or index, then tap Search. Show the change in value of a stock, fund, or index over time: Tap the stock, fund, or index in your list, then tap 1d, 1w, 1m, 3m, 6m, 1y, or 2y. When you view a chart in landscape orientation, you can touch the chart to display the value for a specific point in time. Use two fingers to see the change in value over a specific period of time. You can also view your stock ticker in Notification Center. See “Notifications” on page 29. 79Delete a stock Tap and tap next to a stock, then tap Delete. Change the order of the list Tap . Then drag next to a stock or index to a new place in the list. Switch the view to percentage change, price change, or market capitalization Tap any of the values along the right side of the screen. Tap again to switch to another view. Use iCloud to keep your stock list up to date on your iOS devices Go to Setting > iCloud > Document & Data, then turn on Documents & Data (it’s on by default). See “iCloud” on page 16. Getting more information See the summary, chart, or news page for a stock, fund, or index: Select the stock, fund, or index in your list, then flick the pages underneath the stock reader to view the summary, chart, or news page. On the news page, you can scroll up or down to read headlines, or tap a headline to view the article in Safari. See more stock information at Yahoo.com: Select the stock, fund, or index in your list, then tap . 80 Chapter 17 StocksMaps 18 Finding locations WARNING: For important information about driving and navigating safely, see the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/ipodtouch. Display the location of a business or person in your contacts list. Set options, such as showing traffic or satellite view. More information Double-tap to zoom in; tap with two fingers to zoom out. Or, pinch to zoom in or out. Current location Enter a search. Show your current location. Get directions by car, public transit, or walking. Find a location: Tap the search field to bring up the keyboard. Type an address or other information, then tap Search. You can search for information such as:  Intersection (“8th and market”)  Area (“greenwich village”)  Landmark (“guggenheim”)  Zip code  Business (“movies,” “restaurants san francisco ca,” “apple inc new york”) You can also tap to find the location of a contact. 81See the name or description of a location Tap the pin. See a list of the businesses found in a search Tap , then tap List. Tap a business to see its location. Find your current location Tap . Your current location is shown by a blue marker. If your location can’t be determined precisely, a blue circle appears around the marker. The smaller the circle, the greater the precision. Mark a location Touch and hold the map until the dropped pin appears. Important: Maps, directions, and location-based apps depend on data services. These data services are subject to change and may not be available in all areas, resulting in maps, directions, or location-based information that may be unavailable, inaccurate, or incomplete. Compare the information provided on iPod touch to your surroundings, and defer to posted signs to resolve any discrepancies. If Location Services is turned off when you open Maps, you may be asked to turn it on. You can use Maps without Location Services. See “Location Services” on page 102. Getting directions Get directions: 1 Tap Directions. 2 Enter starting and ending locations. Tap in either field to choose a location in Bookmarks (including your current location or the dropped pin), a recent location, or a contact. If isn’t visible, tap to delete the contents of the field. 3 Tap Route, then select directions for driving ( ), public transit ( ), or walking ( ). 4 Do one of the following:  To view directions one step at a time, tap Start, then tap to see the next leg of the trip.  To view all the directions in a list, tap , then tap List. Tap any item in the list to see a map showing that leg of the trip. Tap Route Overview to return to the overview screen. 5 If multiple routes appear, choose the one you want to use. 82 Chapter 18 MapsIf you’re taking public transit, tap to set your departure or arrival time, and to choose a schedule for the trip. Tap the icon at a stop to see the departure time for that bus or train, and to get a link to the transit provider’s website or contact info. Get directions from a location on the map Tap the pin, tap , then tap Directions To Here or Directions From Here. Bookmark a location Tap "Add to Bookmarks.” Getting and sharing info about a location Get directions. Visit the website. Tap to show contact info. Get or share info about a location: Tap the pin, then tap . Add a business to your contacts Tap “Add to Contacts.” Tweet, text, or email your location Tap Share Location. To post a Tweet, you must be logged in to your Twitter account. Go to Settings > Twitter. Showing traffic conditions You can show traffic conditions for major streets and highways on the map. Show or hide traffic conditions: Tap , then tap Show Traffic or Hide Traffic. Streets and highways are color-coded to indicate the flow of traffic:  Gray—no data is available  Green—posted speed limit  Yellow—slower than the posted speed limit  Red—stop and go Traffic conditions aren’t available in all areas. Chapter 18 Maps 83Map views See a satellite view or hybrid view: Tap , then select the view you want. See the Google Street View of a location: Tap . Flick left or right to pan through the 360° panoramic view (the inset shows your current view). Tap an arrow to move down the street. To return to map view, tap the map inset in the lower-right corner. Tap to return to map view Street View may not be available in all areas. 84 Chapter 18 MapsWeather 19 Getting weather information Tap Weather on the Home screen to get the current temperature and six-day forecast for one or more cities around the world. To use Weather, iPod touch must join a Wi-Fi network that’s connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to the Internet” on page 14. Current conditions Add or delete cities. Current temperature Six-day forecast See hourly forecast. Number of cities stored If the weather board is light blue, it’s daytime in that city. If the board is dark purple, it’s nighttime. Add a city: Tap , then tap . Enter a city or zip code, then tap Search. Switch to another city Flick left or right. Reorder cities Tap , then drag up or down. Delete a city Tap and tap , then tap Delete. Display the temperature in Fahrenheit or Celsius Tap , then tap °F or °C. Use iCloud to push your list of cities to your other iOS devices Go to Setting > iCloud > Document & Data, then turn on Documents & Data (it’s on by default). See “iCloud”on page 16. See information about a city at Yahoo.com Tap . 85Notes 20 About Notes Type notes on iPod touch, and iCloud makes them available on your other iOS devices and Mac computers. You can also read and create notes in other accounts, such as Gmail or Yahoo!. Tap the note to edit it. Delete the note. Email or print the note. Add a new note. View the list of notes. View the previous or next note. Writing notes Add a note: Tap , then type your note and tap Done. Use iCloud to keep your notes up to date on your iOS devices and Mac computers If you use a me.com or mac.com email address for iCloud, go to Settings > iCloud and turn on Notes. If you use a Gmail or other IMAP account for iCloud, go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars and turn on Notes for the account. See “iCloud” on page 16. Create a note in a specific account Tap Accounts and select the account, before you tap to create the note. Set the default account for new notes If you tap while viewing All Notes, the note is created in the default account you select in Settings > Notes. 86Reading and editing notes Notes are listed with the most recent at the top. If you use more than one iOS device or computer with your iCloud account, notes from all devices are listed. If you share notes with an application on your computer or with other online accounts such as Yahoo! or Gmail, those notes are organized by account. Read a note: Tap the note in the list. To see the next or previous note, tap or . Change the font Go to Settings > Notes. See notes in a specific account Tap Accounts and choose the account. See notes in all accounts Tap Accounts and choose All Notes. Edit a note Tap anywhere on the note to bring up the keyboard. Delete a note While looking at the list of notes, swipe left or right across the note. While reading a note, tap . Searching notes You can search the text of all your notes. Search for notes: While viewing a list of notes, flick down to scroll to the top of the list and reveal the search field, then tap in the field and type what you’re looking for. You can also search for notes from the iPod touch Home screen. See “Searching” on page 27. Printing or emailing notes To email a note, iPod touch must be set up for email. See “Setting up mail and other accounts” on page 15. Print or email a note: While reading the note, tap . Chapter 20 Notes 87Clock 21 About Clock You can use Clock to check the time anywhere in the world, set an alarm, time an event, or set a timer. Add a clock. View clocks, set an alarm, time an event, or set a timer. Delete clocks or change their order. Setting world clocks You can add clocks to show the time in other major cities and time zones around the world. Add a clock: Tap , then type the name of a city. If you don’t see the city you’re looking for, try a major city in the same time zone. Rearrange clocks Tap Edit, then drag . Delete a clock Tap Edit, then tap . 88Setting alarms You can set multiple alarms. Set each alarm to repeat on days you specify, or to sound only once. Set an alarm: Tap Alarm and tap . Change settings for an alarm Tap Edit, then tap . Delete an alarm Tap Edit, then tap . If at least one alarm is set and turned on, appears in the iPod touch status bar at the top of the screen. If an alarm is set to sound only once, it turns off automatically after it sounds. You can turn it on again to reenable it. Using the stopwatch Time an event: Tap Stopwatch, then tap Start. Stopwatch keeps timing if you switch to another app. Setting a timer You can set a timer that keeps running even while you use other apps. Set a timer: Tap Timer, flick to set the duration, then tap Start. Choose the alert sound Tap When Timer Ends. Set a sleep timer for iPod touch Set the timer, tap When Timer Ends, and choose Stop Playing. iPod touch stops playing music or video when the timer ends. Chapter 21 Clock 89Calculator 22 Using the calculator Tap numbers and functions in Calculator just as you would with a standard calculator. When you tap the add, subtract, multiply, or divide button, a white ring appears around the button to let you know the operation to be carried out. Get a number from memory (a white ring indicates a number is stored in memory). Clear the display. Add a number to memory. Subtract a number from memory. Clear memory. Scientific calculator Rotate iPod touch to landscape orientation to display the scientific calculator. 90Voice Memos 23 About Voice Memos Voice Memos lets you use iPod touch as a portable recording device using the built-in microphone, iPod touch or Bluetooth headset mic, or supported external microphone. Recordings using the built-in microphone are mono, but you can record stereo using an external stereo microphone. Note: External microphones must be designed to work with the iPod touch headset jack or Dock Connector. Look for accessories marked with the Apple “Made for iPod” or “Works with iPod” logo. Start, pause, or stop recording. Recording level See your list of recordings. Recording Make a recording: Tap or press the center button on the iPod touch earphones. Tap to pause or to stop recording, or press the center button on the iPod touch earphones. Adjust the recording level Move the microphone closer to or further away from what you’re recording. For better recording quality, the loudest level on the level meter should be between –3 dB and 0 dB. Play or mute the start/stop tone Use the iPod touch volume buttons to turn the volume all the way down. Use another app while recording Press the Home button and open an app. To return to Voice Memos, tap the red bar at the top of the screen. 91Listening to a recording Play a recording: Tap , tap a memo, then tap . Tap to pause. Trim or relabel the recording. Attach the recording to an email or text message. Drag to skip to any point. Listen to the recording. Skip to any point in a recording Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Trim a recording Tap next to the recording, then tap Trim Memo. Drag the edges of the audio region, then tap to preview. Adjust if necessary, then tap Trim Voice Memo to save. The portions you trim can’t be recovered. Managing and sharing recordings The default label for a recording is the time when it was recorded. Label a recording: Tap next to the recording, tap on the Info screen, then choose a label or choose Custom. Delete a recording Tap a recording in the list, then tap Delete. View recording details Tap next to the recording. Email a recording or send it in a message Tap a recording in the list, then tap Share. Sharing voice memos with your computer iTunes can sync voice memos with your iTunes library when you connect iPod touch to your computer. When you sync voice memos to iTunes, they remain in the Voice Memos app until you delete them. If you delete a voice memo on iPod touch, it isn’t deleted from the Voice Memos playlist in iTunes. However, if you delete a voice memo from iTunes, it is deleted from iPod touch the next time you sync with iTunes. Sync voice memos with iTunes: Connect iPod touch to your computer and select iPod touch in the iTunes device list. Select Music at the top of the screen (between Apps and Movies), select Sync Music, select “Include voice memos,” and click Apply. The voice memos from iPod touch appear in the Voice Memos playlist in iTunes. 92 Chapter 23 Voice MemosiTunes Store 24 About the iTunes Store Use the iTunes Store to add content to iPod touch. You can browse and purchase music, TV shows, and ringtones. You can also buy and rent movies, or download and play podcasts or iTunes U collections. An Apple ID is required to purchase content. See “Store settings” on page 99. Note: The iTunes Store may not be available in all areas, and iTunes Store content may vary. Features are subject to change. To access the iTunes Store, iPod touch must have an Internet connection. See “Connecting to the Internet” on page 14. Finding music, videos, and more Choose a category. Download purchases again. Browse content: Tap one of the content categories, such as Music or Videos. Or tap More to browse other content. Search for content Tap Search (tap More first, if Search isn’t visible), tap the search field and enter one or more words, then tap Search. Buy, review, or tell a friend about an item Tap an item in a list to see more details on its Info screen. Explore artist and friend recommendations Tap Ping (tap More first, if Ping isn’t visible) to find out what’s new from your favorite artists or see what music your friends are excited about. For information, see “Following artists and friends” on page 95. 93Purchasing music, audiobooks, and tones When you find a song, album, alert tone, or audiobook you like in the iTunes Store, you can purchase and download it. You can preview an item before you purchase it to make sure it’s what you want. Preview an item: Tap the item and follow the onscreen instructions. Redeem a gift card or code Tap Music (tap More first, if Music isn’t visible), then tap Redeem at the bottom of the screen and follow the onscreen instructions. While you’re signed in, your remaining store credit appears with your Apple ID information at the bottom of most iTunes Store screens. Complete an album While viewing any album, tap the discounted price for the remaining songs below Complete My Album (not available in all areas). To see offers for completing other albums, tap Music, then tap Complete My Album Offers. Download a previous purchase Tap Purchased. You can also download an item while browsing; just tap Download where you usually see the price. Automatically download purchases made on other iOS devices and computers In Settings, choose Store, then turn on the kinds of purchases you want to automatically download. Purchasing or renting videos The iTunes Store lets you purchase and download movies, TV shows, and music videos (may not be available in all areas). Some movies can also be rented for a limited time. Video content may be available in standard-definition (SD, or 480p) format, high-definition (HD, or 720p) format, or both. Purchase or rent a video: Tap Buy or Rent. Once you purchase an item, it begins downloading and appears on the Downloads screen. See “Checking download status” on page 96. Preview a video Tap Preview. View the preview on a TV with AirPlay and Apple TV When the preview starts, tap and choose Apple TV. See “AirPlay” on page 30. Note: If you purchase HD video on iPod touch, the video is downloaded in SD format. 94 Chapter 24 iTunes StoreFollowing artists and friends Use Ping to connect with the world’s most passionate music fans. Follow favorite artists to learn about new releases and upcoming concerts and tours, get an insider’s perspective through their photos and videos, and learn about their musical influences. Read friends’ comments about the music they’re listening to, and see what they’re buying and which concerts they plan to attend. Finally, express your musical likes and post comments for your own followers. To create and explore musical connections, you need to create a profile. Create your iTunes Ping profile: Open the iTunes application on your Mac or PC, click Ping, and follow the onscreen instructions. Tap Ping (if Ping isn’t visible, tap More first), then explore Ping. You can do the following: Follow an artist Tap Follow on their profile page. Follow a friend Tap People and enter your friend’s name in the search field. Tap your friend, then tap Follow. When you follow someone, they don’t automatically follow you. In your profile you can choose to approve or decline requests to be followed as they arrive, or simply accept all new followers without review (the default). Share your thoughts As you browse albums and songs, tap Post to comment on a piece of music, or tap Like just to say you like it. Your friends will see your thoughts in their Ping Activity feed. Share concert plans Tap Concerts on your profile page to see upcoming concerts by the artists you follow, and see which of your friends are going to a concert. Tap Tickets to buy your own ticket, or tap I’m Going to let others know you’ll be there too. (Not available in all areas.) Streaming or downloading podcasts You can listen to audio podcasts or watch video podcasts streamed over the Internet from the iTunes Store. You can also download audio and video podcasts. Stream a podcast: Tap Podcasts (tap More first, if Podcasts isn’t visible) to browse podcasts in the iTunes Store. Video podcasts are marked with a video icon . Download a podcast Tap the Free button, then tap Download. Downloaded podcasts appear in the Podcasts playlist in Music. Listen to or watch a podcast you’ve downloaded In Music, tap Podcasts (tap More first, if Podcasts isn’t visible), then tap the podcast. Video podcasts also appear in your list of videos. Chapter 24 iTunes Store 95Checking download status You can check the Downloads screen to see the status of in-progress and scheduled downloads, including purchases you pre-order. See the status of items being downloaded: Tap Downloads (tap More first, if Downloads isn’t visible). Pre-ordered items don’t download automatically when they’re released. Return to the Downloads screen to begin the download. Download a pre-ordered item Tap the item, then tap . If a download is interrupted, the download resumes when there’s an Internet connection. Or, if you open iTunes on your computer, iTunes completes the download to your iTunes library (if your computer is connected to the Internet and signed in using the same Apple ID). Changing the browse buttons You can replace the Music, Podcasts, Videos, and Search buttons at the bottom of the screen with ones you use more frequently. For example, if you download audiobooks often but don’t watch many videos, you could replace the Videos button with Audiobooks. Change the browse buttons: Tap More, tap Edit, then drag a button to the bottom of the screen, over the button you want to replace. You can drag the buttons at the bottom of the screen left or right to rearrange them. When you finish, tap Done. While you browse, tap More to access the browse buttons that aren’t visible. Viewing account information To view iTunes Store information for your Apple ID on iPod touch, tap your Apple ID (at the bottom of most iTunes Store screens). Or go to Settings > Store and tap View Apple ID. You must be signed in to view your account information. See “Store settings” on page 99. Verifying downloads You can use iTunes on your computer to verify that all the music, videos, apps, and other items you bought from the iTunes Store or App Store are in your iTunes library. You might want to do this if a download was interrupted. Verify your downloads: In iTunes on your computer, choose Store > Check for Available Downloads. To see all of your purchases, sign in using your Apple ID, choose Store > View My Account, and click Purchase History. 96 Chapter 24 iTunes StoreApp Store 25 About the App Store You can search for, browse, review, purchase, and download apps from the App Store directly to iPod touch. Note: The App Store may not be available in all areas, and App Store content may vary. Features are subject to change. To browse the App Store, iPod touch must be connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to the Internet” on page 14. To purchase apps, you also need an Apple ID. See “Store settings” on page 99. View Genius recommendations. Check for app updates. 97Finding and downloading apps Browse the featured selections to see new, notable, or recommended apps, or browse Top 25 to see the most popular apps. If you’re looking for a specific app, use Search. Browse the App Store: Tap Featured, Categories, or Top 25. Browse using Genius Tap Genius to see a list of recommended apps based on what’s already in your app collection. To turn Genius on, follow the onscreen instructions. Genius is a free service, but it requires an Apple ID. Search for apps Tap Search, tap the search field and enter one or more words, then tap Search. Get ratings and read reviews Tap Ratings near the bottom of the app’s Info screen. You can rate and review apps you’ve downloaded. Email a link to an app’s Info page in iTunes Tap “Tell a Friend” near the bottom of the app’s Info screen. Send the app to someone as a gift Tap “Gift This App” near the bottom of the app’s Info screen, then follow the onscreen instructions. Report a problem Tap “Report a Problem” near the bottom of the app’s Info screen. Select a problem from the list or type optional comments, then tap Report. Purchase and download an app Tap the price (or tap Free), then tap Buy Now. If you already purchased the app, “Install” appears instead of the price on the Info screen. You won’t be charged if you download it again. Redeem a gift card or code Tap Redeem near the bottom of the Featured screen, then follow the onscreen instructions. See the status of downloads After you begin downloading an app, its icon appears on the Home screen with a progress indicator. Download a previous purchase Tap Purchased. You can also download an item while browsing; just tap Download where you usually see the price. Automatically download purchases made on other iOS devices and computers Go to Settings > Store, then turn on the kinds of purchases you want to automatically download. Update an app At the bottom of the app’s Info screen, tap Updates and follow the onscreen instructions. Deleting apps You can delete apps you install from the App Store. If you delete an app, data associated with the app is also deleted. Delete an App Store app: Touch and hold the app icon on the Home screen, until the icons start to jiggle, then tap . Press the Home button when you finish deleting apps. For information about erasing every app and all of your data and settings, see “Erase All Content and Settings” on page 107. You can download any app that you’ve purchased from the App Store, free of charge. Download a deleted app In App Store, tap Updates, then tap Purchased. Tap the app, then tap Install. 98 Chapter 25 App StoreStore settings Use Store settings to sign in to an Apple ID, create a new Apple ID, or edit an existing one. If you have more than one Apple ID, you can use Store settings to sign out from one and in to another. By default, the Apple ID that appears in Store settings is the one you’re signed in to when you sync iPod touch with your computer. For iTunes Store terms and conditions go to www.apple.com/legal/itunes/ww/. Sign in using an Apple ID: Choose Store, tap Sign In, then tap Use Existing Apple ID and enter your Apple ID and password. View and edit your account information Go to Settings > Store, tap your Apple ID, then tap View Apple ID. Tap an item to edit it. To change your password, tap the Apple ID field. Sign in using a different Apple ID Go to Settings > Store, tap your account name, then tap Sign Out. Create a new Apple ID Go to Settings > Store, tap Sign In, then tap Create New Apple ID and follow the onscreen instructions. Automatically download purchases Go to Settings > Store, then turn on the types of purchases, such as Music or Books, that you want to automatically download to iPod touch. You can also turn off automatic updating of Newsstand apps. See Chapter 14,“Newsstand,” on page 72. Chapter 25 App Store 99Settings 26 Settings lets you configure iPod touch, set app options, add accounts, and enter other preferences. Airplane mode Airplane mode disables the wireless features in order to reduce potential interference with aircraft operation and other electrical equipment. Turn on airplane mode: Tap Settings and turn airplane mode on. When airplane mode is on, appears in the status bar at the top of the screen. No Wi-Fi, or Bluetooth signals are emitted from iPod touch. You won’t be able to use features or apps that depend on these connections. If allowed by the aircraft operator and applicable laws and regulations, you can continue to listen to music, watch videos, browse email, calendar, and other data you’ve previously received, and use apps that don’t require an Internet connection. If Wi-Fi is available and allowed by the aircraft operator and applicable laws and regulations, go to Settings > Wi-Fi to turn it on. Similarly, you can turn on BlueTooth in Settings > General > BlueTooth. Wi-Fi Joining a Wi-Fi network Wi-Fi settings determine whether iPod touch uses local Wi-Fi networks to connect to the Internet. When iPod touch is joined to a Wi-Fi network, the Wi-Fi icon in the status bar at the top of the screen shows signal strength. The more bars you see, the stronger the signal. Once you join a Wi-Fi network, iPod touch automatically connects to it whenever the network is in range. If more than one previously used network is in range, iPod touch joins the one last used. You can also use iPod touch to set up a new AirPort base station that provides Wi-Fi services to your home or office. See “Setting up an AirPort base station” on page 101. Turn Wi-Fi on or off: Go to Settings > Wi-Fi. Set iPod touch to ask if you want to join a new network Go to Settings > Wi-Fi and turn “Ask to Join Networks” on or off. If “Ask to Join Networks” is turned off, you must manually join a network to connect to the Internet when a previously used network isn’t available. Forget a network, so iPod touch doesn’t join it Go to Settings > Wi-Fi and tap next to a network you’ve joined before. Then tap “Forget this Network.” 100Join a closed Wi-Fi network To join a Wi-Fi network that isn’t shown in the list of scanned networks, go to Settings > Wi-Fi > Other, then enter the network name. You must already know the network name, password, and security type to connect to a closed network. Adjust settings for connecting to a Wi-Fi network Go to Settings > Wi-Fi, then tap next to a network. You can set an HTTP proxy, define static network settings, turn on BootP, or renew the settings from a DHCP server. Setting up an AirPort base station An AirPort base station provides a Wi-Fi connection to your home, school, or small business network. You can use iPod touch to set up a new AirPort Express base station, AirPort Extreme base station, or a Time Capsule. Use the AirPort Setup Assistant: Go to Settings > Wi-Fi. Under “Set up an AirPort base station,” tap the name of the base station you want to set up. Then follow the onscreen instructions. Some older AirPort base stations cannot be set up using an iOS device. For setup instructions, see the documentation that came with the base station. If the base station you want to set up isn’t listed, make sure it has power, that you’re within range, and that it hasn’t already been configured. You can set up only base stations that are new or have been reset. If your AirPort base station is already configured, the AirPort Utility app from the App Store lets you change the base station’s settings and monitor its status. Notifications Push notifications appear in the Notification Center and alert you to new information, even when an app isn’t running. Notifications vary by app, but may include text or sound alerts, and a numbered badge on the app icon on the Home screen. You can turn notifications off if you don’t want to be notified, and you can change the order in which notifications appear. Turn notifications on or off: Go to Settings > Notifications. Tap an item in the list, then turn notifications on or off for that item. Apps that have notifications turned off are shown in the Not In Notification Center list. Change the number of notifications Go to Settings > Notifications, then choose an item from the In Notification Center list. Tap Show to select how many notifications of this type appear in Notification Center. Change the alert styles Go to Settings > Notifications, then choose an item from the In Notification Center list. Choose an alert style, or select None to turn off alerts and banners. Notifications will still appear in Notification Center. Change the order of notifications Go to Settings > Notifications, then tap Edit. Drag the notifications to reorder them. To turn off a notification, drag it to the Not In Notification Center list. Display numbered badges on apps with notifications Go to Settings > Notifications, then choose an item from the In Notification Center list. Turn on Badge App Icon. Prevent alerts when iPod touch is locked Go to Settings > Notifications, then choose an app from the In Notification Center list. Turn off View in Lock Screen to hide alerts from the app when iPod touch is locked. Chapter 26 Settings 101Some apps have additional options. For example, Messages lets you specify how many times the alert sound is repeated, and whether message previews are included in the notification. Location Services Location Services lets apps such as Reminders, Maps, Camera, and third-party location-based apps gather and use data showing your location. The location data collected by Apple isn’t collected in a form that personally identifies you. Your approximate location is determined using local Wi-Fi networks (if you have Wi-Fi turned on). To conserve battery life, turn location services off when you’re not using it. When an app is using Location Services, appears in the status bar. Every app and system service that uses Location Services appears in the Location Services settings screen, showing whether Location Services is turned on or off for that app or service. If you don’t want to use Location Services, you can turn it off for some or for all apps and services. If you turn Location Services off, you’re prompted to turn it on again the next time an app or service tries to use it. The location data collected by Apple doesn’t personally identify you. If you have third-party apps on iPod touch that use Location Services, review the third party’s terms and privacy policy for each app to understand how it uses your location data. Turn Location Services on or off: Go to Settings > Location Services. VPN VPNs used within organizations let you communicate private information securely over a non-private network. You may need to configure VPN, for example, in order to access your work email. This setting appears when you have VPN configured on iPod touch, lets you turn VPN on or off. See “Network” on page 103. Sounds You can set iPod touch to play a sound whenever you get a new message, email, or reminder. Sounds can also play for appointments, sending an email, keyboard clicks, and when you lock iPod touch. Adjust the alerts volume: Go to Settings > Sounds and drag the slider. Or, if “Change with Buttons” is turned on, use the volume buttons on the side of iPod touch. Note: In some countries or regions, the sound effects for Camera and Voice Memos are always played. Allow the volume buttons to change the alerts volume Go to Settings > Sounds and turn on “Change with Buttons.” Set the alert and other sounds Go to Settings > Sounds and select tones for the items in the list. Brightness Screen brightness affects battery life. Dim the screen to extend the time before you need to recharge iPod touch, or use Auto-Brightness. Adjust the screen brightness: Go to Settings > Brightness and drag the slider. 102 Chapter 26 SettingsSet whether iPod touch adjusts screen brightness automatically Go to Settings > Brightness and turn Auto-Brightness on or off. If Auto-Brightness is on, iPod touch adjusts the screen brightness for current light conditions using the built-in ambient light sensor. Wallpaper Wallpaper settings let you set an image or photo as wallpaper for the Lock screen or Home screen. See “Changing the wallpaper” on page 22. General General settings include network, sharing, security, and other iOS settings. You can also find information about your iPod touch, and reset various iPod touch settings. About Go to Settings > General > About to get information about iPod touch, including available storage space, serial numbers, network addresses, and legal and regulatory information. You can also view and turn off diagnostic information that’s sent to Apple. Change the name of your iPod touch: Go to Settings > General > About, then tap Name. The name appears in the sidebar when iPod touch is connected to iTunes, and it’s also used by iCloud. Software Update Software Update lets you download and install iOS updates from Apple. Update to the latest iOS version: Go to Settings > General > Software Update. If a newer version of iOS is available, follow the onscreen instructions to download and install the update. Note: Make sure iPod touch is connected to a power source so that the installation, which can take several minutes, completes successfully. Usage View available storage: Go to Settings > General > Usage. View app storage Go to General > Usage. Each installed app’s total storage space is shown. For more details, tap the app’s name. For information about managing iCloud storage, see “iCloud” on page 16. Network Use Network settings to configure a VPN (virtual private network) connection and access Wi-Fi settings. Add a new VPN configuration Go to Settings > General > Network > VPN > Add VPN Configuration. Ask your network administrator which settings to use. In most cases, if you’ve set up VPN on your computer, you can use the same VPN settings for iPod touch. See “VPN” on page 102. Bluetooth iPod touch can connect wirelessly to Bluetooth devices such as headphones. You can also connect the Apple Wireless Keyboard via Bluetooth. See “Using an Apple Wireless Keyboard” on page 26. Chapter 26 Settings 103Turn Bluetooth on or off: Go to Settings > General > Bluetooth. Connect to a Bluetooth device Tap the device in the Devices list, then follow the onscreen instructions to connect to it. See the documentation that came with the device for instructions about Bluetooth pairing. iTunes Wi-Fi Sync You can sync iPod touch with iTunes on a computer that’s connected to the same Wi-Fi network. Enable iTunes Wi-Fi Sync: To set up Wi-Fi syncing for the first time you have to connect iPod touch to the computer that you want to sync with. For more information, see “Syncing with iTunes” on page 17. After you configure Wi-Fi Sync, iPod touch syncs with iTunes automatically, once a day, when it’s connected to a power source and:  iPod touch and your computer are both connected to the same Wi-Fi network.  iTunes on your computer is running. See Wi-Fi Sync status Go to Settings > General > iTunes Wi-Fi Sync. Immediately sync with iTunes Go to Settings > General > iTunes Wi-Fi Sync, then tap Sync Now. Spotlight Search The Spotlight Search setting lets you specify the content areas searched by Search, and rearrange the order of the results. Set which content areas are searched by Search: Go to Settings > General > Spotlight Search then select the items to search. Set the order of search result categories Go to Settings > General > Spotlight Search. Touch next to an item, then drag up or down. Auto-Lock Locking iPod touch turns off the display, saves your battery, and prevents unintended operation. You can still adjust the volume while listening to music. Set the amount of time before iPod touch locks: Go to Settings > General > Auto-Lock, then choose a time. Passcode Lock Initially, iPod touch doesn’t require you to enter a passcode to unlock it. Setting a passcode enables data protection. See “Security features” on page 33. Set a passcode: Go to Settings > General > Passcode Lock to set a 4-digit passcode. If you forget your passcode, you must restore the iPod touch software. See “Updating and restoring iPod touch software” on page 137. 104 Chapter 26 SettingsTurn passcode lock off or change your passcode Go to Settings > General > Passcode Lock. Set how long before your passcode is required Go to Settings > General > Passcode Lock and enter your passcode. Tap Require Passcode, then set how long iPod touch will wait after being locked, before it requires your passcode in order to be unlocked again. Turn Simple Passcode on or off Go to Settings > General > Passcode Lock. A simple passcode is a four-digit number. To increase security, turn off Simple Passcode and use a longer passcode with a combination of numbers, letters, punctuation, and special characters. Erase data after ten failed passcode attempts Go to Settings > General > Passcode Lock and tap Erase Data. After ten failed passcode attempts, all settings are reset, and all your information and media are erased by removing the encryption key to the data (which is encrypted using 256-bit AES encryption). Restrictions You can set restrictions for the use of some apps and for purchased content. For example, parents can restrict explicit music from being seen on playlists, or turn off YouTube access. Turn on restrictions: Go to Settings > General > Restrictions, then tap Enable Restrictions. Important: If you forget your passcode, you must restore iPod touch. See “Updating and restoring iPod touch software” on page 137. You can set the following restrictions: Safari Safari is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. You cannot use Safari to browse the web or access web clips. YouTube YouTube is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. Camera Camera is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. You cannot take photos. FaceTime You cannot make or receive FaceTime video calls. The FaceTime icon is removed from the Home screen. iTunes The iTunes Store is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. You cannot preview, purchase, or download content. Ping You cannot access Ping or any of its features. Installing Apps The App Store is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. You cannot install apps on iPod touch. Deleting Apps You cannot delete apps from iPod touch. doesn’t appear on app icons when you’re customizing the Home screen. Location Turn Location Services off for individual apps. You can also lock Location Services so that changes to the settings can’t be made, including authorizing additional apps to use the services. Accounts The current Mail, Contacts, Calendar settings are locked and you cannot add, modify, or delete accounts. In-app Purchases Turn off In-App Purchases. When enabled, this feature allows you to purchase additional content or functionality within apps downloaded from the App Store. Require Password Requires you to enter your Apple ID for in-app purchases after the time period you specify. Set content restrictions Tap Ratings For, then select a country from the list. You can then set restrictions using a country’s ratings system for music, podcasts, movies, TV show, and apps. Content that doesn’t meet the rating you select won’t appear on iPod touch. Chapter 26 Settings 105Multiplayer Games When Multiplayer Games is turned off, you can’t request a match, send or receive invitations to play games, or add friends in Game Center. Adding Friends When Adding Friends is off, you can’t make or receive friend requests in Game Center. If Multiplayer Games is turned on, you can continue to play with existing friends. Date & Time These settings apply to the time shown in the status bar at the top of the screen, and in world clocks and calendars. Set whether iPod touch shows 24-hour time or 12-hour time: Go to Settings > General > Date & Time, then turn 24-Hour Time on or off. (24-Hour Time may not be available in all areas.) Set whether iPod touch updates the date and time automatically Go to Settings > General > Date & Time, then turn Set Automatically on or off. If iPod touch is set to update the time automatically, it determines your time zone based on your Internet connection and updates it for the time zone you’re in. If you’re traveling, iPod touch may not be able to automatically set the local time. Set the date and time manually Go to General > Date & Time, then turn Set Automatically off. Tap Time Zone to set your time zone. Tap the “Date & Time” button, then Set Date & Time and enter the date and time. Keyboard You can turn on keyboards for writing in different languages, and you can turn typing features, such as spell-checking, on or off. For information about typing, see “Typing” on page 23. For information about using international keyboards, see Appendix A,“International Keyboards,” on page 131. International Use International settings to set the language for iPod touch, turn keyboards for different languages on or off, and set the date, time, and telephone number formats for your country or region. Set the language for iPod touch: Go to Settings > General > International > Language, choose the language you want to use, then tap Done. Set the calendar format Go to Settings > General > International > Calendar, and choose the format. Set the Voice Control language for iPod touch Go to Settings > General > International > Voice Control, then choose a language. Set the date, time, and telephone number formats Go to Settings > General > International > Region Format, then choose your region. The Region Format also determines the language used for the days and months that appear in apps. 106 Chapter 26 SettingsAccessibility To turn on accessibility features, go to Settings > General > Accessibility and choose the features you want. See Chapter 30,“Accessibility,” on page 118. Profiles This setting appears if you install one or more profiles on iPod touch. Tap Profiles to see information about the profiles you install. Reset You can reset the word dictionary, network settings, home screen layout, and location warnings. You can also erase all of your content and settings. Erase all content and settings: Go to Settings > General > Reset, then tap Erase All Content and Settings. After confirming that you want to reset iPod touch, all content, personal information, and settings are removed. It cannot be used until it’s set up again. Reset all settings Go to Settings > General > Reset and tap Reset All Settings. All your preferences and settings are reset. Information (such as contacts and calendars) and media (such as songs and videos) aren’t affected. Reset network settings Go to Settings > General > Reset and tap Reset Network Settings. When you reset network settings, your list of previously used networks and VPN settings not installed by a configuration profile are removed. Wi-Fi is turned off and then back on, disconnecting you from any network you’re on. The Wi-Fi and “Ask to Join Networks” settings are left turned on. To remove VPN settings installed by a configuration profile, go to Settings > General > Profile, then select the profile and tap Remove. This also removes other settings and accounts provided by the profile. Reset the keyboard dictionary Go to Settings > General > Reset and tap Reset Keyboard Dictionary. You add words to the keyboard dictionary by rejecting words iPod touch suggests as you type. Tap a word to reject the correction and add the word to the keyboard dictionary. Resetting the keyboard dictionary erases all words you’ve added. Reset the Home screen layout Go to Settings > General > Reset and tap Reset Home Screen Layout. Reset location warnings Go to Settings > General > Reset and tap Reset Location Warnings. Location warnings are requests made by apps to use Location Services. iPod touch presents a location warning for an app the first time the app makes a request to use Location Services. If you tap Cancel in response, the request isn’t presented again. To reset location warnings so that you get a request for each app, tap Reset Location Warnings. Settings for apps See other chapters for information about settings for apps. For example, for Safari settings, see Chapter 13,“Safari,” on page 69. Chapter 26 Settings 107Contacts 27 About Contacts Contacts lets you easily access and edit your contact lists from personal, business, and organizational accounts. You can search across all of your groups, and the information in Contacts is automatically accessed to make addressing emails quick and easy. Send an email. Send a text message. Make a FaceTime video call. See a map and get directions. Syncing contacts You can add contacts in the following ways:  Use your iCloud contacts. See “iCloud” on page 16.  In iTunes, sync contacts from Google or Yahoo!, or sync with applications on your computer. See “Syncing with iTunes” on page 17.  Set up a Microsoft Exchange account on iPod touch, with Contacts enabled. See “Contacts accounts and settings” on page 110.  Set up an LDAP or CardDAV account to access business or school directories. See “Contacts accounts and settings” on page 110.  Enter contacts directly on iPod touch. See “Adding and editing contacts” on page 109. 108Searching contacts You can search titles, and first, last, and company names in your contacts on iPod touch. If you have a Microsoft Exchange account, an LDAP account, or a CardDAV account, you can also search those contacts. Search contacts: In Contacts, tap the search field at the top of any list of contacts and enter your search. Search a GAL Tap Groups, tap Directories at the bottom of the list, then enter your search. Search an LDAP server Tap Groups, tap the LDAP server name, then enter your search. Search a CardDAV server Tap Groups, tap the searchable CardDAV group at the bottom of the list, then enter your search. Save contact information from a GAL, LDAP, or CardDAV server Search for the contact you want to add, then tap Add Contact. Contacts can also be found through searches from the Home screen. See “Searching” on page 27. Adding and editing contacts Add a contact on iPod touch: Tap Contacts and tap . If isn’t visible, make sure you’re not viewing an LDAP, CalDAV, or GAL contacts list; you can’t add contacts to those. Edit contact information: Choose a contact, then tap Edit. Add a new field Tap Add Field. Change a field label Tap the label and choose a different one. To add a new label, scroll to the bottom of the list and tap Add Custom Label. Add a contact’s Twitter user name Tap Add Field, then tap Twitter. Change the ringtone or text tone for the contact Tap the ringtone or text tone field, then choose a new sound. The default sound is set in Settings > Sounds. Delete an item Tap , then tap Delete. Assign a photo to a contact Tap Add Photo, or tap the existing photo. You can take a photo with the camera or use an existing photo. To import photos from your contacts’ Twitter profiles, go to Settings > Twitter. Sign in to your Twitter account, then tap Update Contacts. Delete a contact In Contacts, choose a contact, than tap Edit. Scroll down and tap Delete Contact. Chapter 27 Contacts 109Unified contacts When you sync contacts with multiple accounts, you might have entries for the same person in more than one account. To keep redundant contacts from appearing in the All Contacts list, contacts from different accounts that have the same name are linked and displayed as a single unified contact. When you view a unified contact, the title Unified Info appears at the top of the screen. Link a contact: Tap Edit, the tap and choose a contact. If you link contacts with different first or last names, the names on the individual contacts won’t change, but only one name appears on the unified card. To choose which name appears when you view the unified card, tap the linked card with the name you prefer, then tap Use This Name For Unified Card. View contact information from a source account Tap one of the source accounts. Unlink a contact Tap Edit, tap , then tap Unlink. Linked contacts aren’t merged. If you change or add information in a unified contact, the changes are copied to each source account in which that information already exists. Contacts accounts and settings You can add additional Contacts accounts and adjust the way contact names are sorted and displayed. Add a Contact account: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars, then tap Add Account. To change Contact settings, go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars for these options: Set how contacts are sorted Tap Sort Order to sort by first or last name. Set how contacts are displayed Tap Display Order and choose to display by first or last name. Setting your My Info card Tap My Info and select the contact card with your name and information from the list. The My Info card is used by Reminders, Safari, and other apps. Set a default Contacts account Tap Default Account, then select an account. New contacts you create without specifying another account are stored here. Use iCloud to keep Contacts up to date on your iOS devices and computers Go to Settings > iCloud, then turn on Contacts. See “iCloud” on page 16. 110 Chapter 27 ContactsNike + iPod 28 About Nike + iPod With a Nike + iPod Sensor (sold separately), the Nike + iPod app provides audible feedback on your speed, distance, time elapsed, and calories burned during a run or walk. You can send your workout data to nikeplus.com, where you can track your progress, set goals, and participate in challenges. Review your workout history. Calibrate based on your last workout. Choose a workout type. Choose a standard workout. Choose or create a custom workout. Activating Nike + iPod The Nike + iPod app doesn’t appear on the Home screen until you turn it on. For help setting up Nike + iPod, see the Nike + iPod documentation. Turn on Nike + iPod: Go to Settings > Nike + iPod. Linking a sensor Nike + iPod bases its workout data on a signal from a sensor (sold separately) that you attach to your shoe. The first time you start a workout, you’re prompted to activate your sensor, which automatically links the sensor to iPod touch. You can also use Nike + iPod settings to link a sensor to iPod touch. Nike + iPod can link to only one sensor at a time. To use a different sensor, use Nike + iPod settings to link to the new sensor. 111Link your sensor to iPod touch: Attach the sensor to your shoe, then go to Settings > Nike + iPod > Sensor. Link iPod touch to a different sensor Go to Settings > Nike + iPod > Sensor and tap Link New. Working out with Nike + iPod After activating Nike + iPod and inserting the Nike + iPod Sensor in your Nike+ ready shoe, you’re ready to collect workout data. Important: Before starting any exercise program, you should consult with a physician and have a complete physical examination. Do a warmup or stretching exercise before beginning any workout. Be careful and attentive while exercising. Slow down, if necessary, before adjusting your device while running. Stop exercising immediately if you feel pain, or feel faint, dizzy, exhausted, or short of breath. By exercising, you assume the risks inherent in physical exercise, including any injury that may result from such activity. Work out using Nike + iPod: Open Nike + iPod, tap Workouts, and choose a workout. Data collection continues while iPod touch is asleep. Pause or resume your workout: If your workout is interrupted, wake iPod touch and tap on the lock screen. Tap when you’re ready to go. End your workout Wake iPod touch, tap , then tap End Workout. Change workout settings Go to Settings > Nike + iPod. Calibrating Nike + iPod To ensure accurate workout data, you can calibrate Nike + iPod to the length of your walking or running stride. Calibrate Nike + iPod: Record a running or walking workout over a known distance of at least a quarter mile (400 meters). Then, after you tap End Workout, tap Calibrate on the workout summary screen and enter the actual distance you covered. Reset to the default calibration Go to Settings > Nike + iPod. Sending workout data to nikeplus.com At nikeplus.com you can track your progress over time, view a record of all of your past workouts, set and monitor goals, and compare your results with others. You can even compete with other Nike + iPod users in online workout challenges. Send workout data wirelessly to nikeplus.com from iPod touch: With iPod touch connected to the Internet, open Nike + iPod, tap History, then tap “Send to Nike+.” See your workouts on nikeplus.com In Safari, go to nikeplus.com, log in to your account, and follow the onscreen instructions. 112 Chapter 28 Nike + iPodiBooks 29 About iBooks iBooks is a great way to read and buy books. Download the free iBooks app from the App Store, and then get everything from classics to best sellers from the built-in iBookstore. Once you download a book, it’s displayed on your bookshelf. To download the iBooks app and use the iBookstore, you need an Internet connection and an Apple ID. If you don’t have an Apple ID, or if you want to make purchases using another Apple ID, go to Settings > Store. See “Store settings” on page 99. Note: The iBooks app and the iBookstore may not be available in all areas and languages. Using the iBookstore In the iBooks app, tap Store to open the iBookstore. From there, you can browse featured books or best sellers, and browse for books by author or topic. When you find a book you like, you can purchase and download it. Note: Some features of the iBookstore may not be available in all locations. Purchase a book: Find a book you want, tap the price, then tap Buy Book, or Get Book, if it’s free. Get more information about a book You can read a summary of the book, read reviews, and download a sample of the book before buying it. After buying a book, you can write a review of your own. Download a previous purchase Tap Purchased. You can also download an item while browsing; just tap Download where you usually see the price. Automatically download purchases made on other iOS devices and computers In Settings, choose Store, then turn on the kinds of purchases you want to automatically download. 113Syncing books and PDFs Use iTunes to sync your books and PDFs between iPod touch and your computer. When iPod touch is connected to your computer, the Books pane lets you select which items to sync. You can sync books that you download or purchase from the iBookstore. You can also add DRM-free ePub books and PDFs to your iTunes library. There are several websites that offer books in ePub and PDF format. Sync an ePub book or PDF to iPod touch: In iTunes on your computer, choose File > Add to Library and select the file. Select the book or PDF in the Books pane in iTunes, and then sync. To add a book or PDF to iBooks without syncing, email the file to yourself from your computer. Open the email message on iPod touch, then touch and hold the attachment and choose “Open in iBooks” from the menu that appears. Reading books Reading a book is easy. Go to the bookshelf and tap the book you want to read. If you don’t see the book you’re looking for, tap the name of the current collection at the top of the screen to go to other collections. Tap to play. Go to a different page. Add a bookmark. Read a book while lying down: Use the portrait orientation lock to prevent iPod touch from rotating the screen when you rotate iPod touch. See “Viewing in portrait or landscape orientation” on page 20. Each book has a particular set of features, based on its contents and format. Some of the capabilities described below might not be available in the book you’re reading. For example, printing is available only for PDFs, and if a book doesn’t include a recorded narration, you won’t see the read aloud icon. 114 Chapter 29 iBooksShow the controls Tap near the center of the page. Turn the page Tap near the right or left margin of the page, or flick left or right. To change the direction the page turns when you tap the left margin, go to Settings > iBooks > Tap Left Margin. View the table of contents Tap . With some books, you can also pinch to see the the table of contents. Add or remove a bookmark Tap . You can have multiple bookmarks. To remove a bookmark, tap it. You don’t need to add a bookmark when you close a book, because iBooks remembers where you left off. Add or remove a highlight Double-tap a word, use the grab points to adjust the selection, then tap Highlight and choose a color. To remove a highlight, tap the highlighted text, then tap . To underline words, tap . To change the color, tap the highlighted text, tap the current color, then select a new color from the menu. Add, remove, or edit a note Double-tap a word, tap Highlight, then choose from the menu that appears. To view a note, tap the indicator in the margin near the highlighted text. To remove a note, delete its text. To remove a note and its highlight, tap the highlighted text, then tap . To change the color, tap the highlighted text, then select a color from the menu. To add a note to a highlight, tap the highlighted text, then tap . See all your bookmarks Tap , then tap Bookmarks. See all your notes Tap , then tap Notes. Enlarge an image Double-tap the image to zoom in. Go to a specific page Use the page navigation controls at the bottom of the screen. Or, tap and enter a page number, then tap the page number in the search results. Search in a book Tap . To search the web, tap Search Web or Search Wikipedia. Safari opens and displays the results. Search for other occurrences of a word or phrase Double-tap a word, use the grab points to adjust the selection, then tap Search in the menu that appears. Look up a word Double-tap a word, use the grab points to adjust the selection, then tap Define in the menu that appears. Definitions are not available for all languages. Listen to a book Tap . This feature is not available for all books. If you have a visual impairment, you can also use VoiceOver to speak the text of almost any book. See “VoiceOver” on page 118. iBooks stores your collections, bookmarks, notes, and current page information using your Apple ID, so you can read books seamlessly across all your iOS devices. iBooks saves information for all of your books when you open or quit the app. Information for individual books is also saved when you open or close the book. Turn syncing on or off: Go to Settings > iBooks. Some books might access video or audio that’s stored on the web. Turn online video and audio access on or off: Go to Settings > iBooks > Online Audio & Video. Chapter 29 iBooks 115Changing a book’s appearance Some books let you change the type size, font, and page color. Change the brightness: Tap near the center of a page to display the controls, then tap . If you don’t see , tap first. Change the font or type size Tap near the center of a page to display the controls, then tap . Tap Fonts to select a typeface. Not all books support changing the font. Some books allow you to change the type size only when iPod touch is in portrait orientation. Change the color of the page and text Tap near the center of a page to display the controls, tap , then tap Theme. This setting applies to all books that support it. Turn justification and hyphenation on or off Go to Settings > iBooks. Some books and PDFs can’t be justified or hyphenated. Printing or emailing a PDF You can use iBooks to send a copy of a PDF via email, or to print all or a portion of the PDF to a supported printer. You can only email or print PDFs, not ePub books. Email a PDF: Open the PDF, then tap and choose Email Document. A new message appears with the PDF attached. When you finish your message, tap Send. Print a PDF Open the PDF, then tap and choose Print. Select a printer, the page range, and number of copies, then tap Print. See “Printing” on page 26. Organizing the bookshelf Use the bookshelf to browse your books and PDFs. You can also organize items into collections. Touch and hold a book to rearrange. View collections. Move a book or PDF to a collection: Go to the bookshelf and tap Edit. Select the items you want to move, then tap Move and select a collection. When you add a book or PDF to your bookshelf, it appears in your Books or PDF collection. From there, you can move it to a different collection. You might want to create collections for work and school, for example, or for reference and leisure reading. 116 Chapter 29 iBooksView a collection Tap the name of the current collection at the top of the screen, then pick a new collection from the list that appears. Manage collections Tap the name of the current collection you’re viewing, such as Books or PDFs, to display the collections list. You can’t edit or remove the built-in Books and PDFs collections. Sort the bookshelf Tap the status bar to scroll to the top of the screen, then tap and select a sort method from the choices at the bottom of the screen. Delete an item from the bookshelf Tap Edit, then tap each book or PDF that you want to delete so that a checkmark appears. Tap Delete. When you finish deleting, tap Done. If you delete a book you purchased, you can download it again from Purchases in the iBookstore. Search for a book Go to the bookshelf. Tap the status bar to scroll to the top of the screen, then tap . Searching looks for the title and the author’s name. Chapter 29 iBooks 117Accessibility 30 Universal Access features iPod touch (3rd generation or later) incorporates a variety of accessibility features, including:  VoiceOver screen reader  Zoom magnification  Large Text  White on Black  Speak Selection  Speak Auto-text  Mono Audio and balance  AssistiveTouch  Support for braille displays  Playback of closed-captioned content With the exception of VoiceOver, these accessibility features work with most iPod touch apps, including third-party apps you download from the App Store. VoiceOver works with all apps that come preinstalled on iPod touch, and with many third-party apps. For more information about iPod touch accessibility features, go to www.apple.com/accessibility. Each accessibility feature can be turned on or off in Accessibility settings on iPod touch. You can also turn some features on or off in iTunes when iPod touch is connected to your computer. Turn on accessibility features using iPod touch: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility. Turn on accessibility features using iTunes: Connect iPod touch to your computer and select iPod touch in the iTunes device list. Click Summary, then click Configure Universal Access at the bottom of the Summary screen. Large Text can only be turned on or off in iPod touch settings. See “Large Text” on page 129. VoiceOver VoiceOver describes aloud what appears onscreen, so you can use iPod touch without seeing it. VoiceOver tells you about each element on the screen as you select it. When you select an element, a black rectangle (the VoiceOver cursor) encloses it and VoiceOver speaks the name or describes the item. Touch the screen or drag your fingers to hear different items on the screen. When you select text, VoiceOver reads the text. If you turn on Speak Hints, VoiceOver may tell you the name of the item and provide instructions for you—for example, “double-tap to open.” To interact with items on the screen, such as buttons and links, use the gestures described in “Learning VoiceOver gestures” on page 121. 118When you go to a new screen, VoiceOver plays a sound and automatically selects and speaks the first element of the screen (typically, the item in the upper-left corner). VoiceOver also lets you know when the display changes to landscape or portrait orientation, and when the screen is locked or unlocked. Note: VoiceOver speaks in the language specified in International settings, which may be influenced by the Region Format setting. VoiceOver is available in many languages, but not all. Setting up VoiceOver Important: VoiceOver changes the gestures used to control iPod touch. Once VoiceOver is turned on, you have to use VoiceOver gestures to operate iPod touch—even to turn VoiceOver off again to resume standard operation. Note: You can’t use VoiceOver and Zoom at the same time. Turn VoiceOver on or off: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > VoiceOver. You can also set Triple-click Home to turn VoiceOver on or off. See “Triple-click Home” on page 128. Turn spoken hints on or off Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > VoiceOver. When Speak Hints is turned on, VoiceOver may tell you the action of the item or provide instructions for you—for example, “double-tap to open.” You can also add Hints to the rotor, then swipe up or down to adjust. See “Using the VoiceOver rotor control” on page 122. Set the VoiceOver speaking rate Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > VoiceOver and drag the Speaking Rate slider. You can also add Speech Rate to the rotor, then swipe up or down to adjust. See “Using the VoiceOver rotor control” on page 122. Change typing feedback Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Typing Feedback. Use phonetics in typing feedback Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Use Phonetics. Text is read character-by-character. Voiceover first speaks the character, then its phonetic equivalent—for example, “f” and then “foxtrot.” Use pitch change Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Use Pitch Change. VoiceOver uses a higher pitch when entering a letter, and a lower pitch when deleting a letter. VoiceOver also uses a higher pitch when speaking the first item of a group (such as a list or table) and a lower pitch when speaking the last item of a group. Set the rotor options for web browsing Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Rotor. Tap to select or deselect options, or drag up to reposition an item. Change VoiceOver pronunciation Set the rotor to Language and then swipe up or down. The Language rotor position is available when you select more than one pronunciation. Select the pronunciations available in the language rotor Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Language Rotor. To change the position of a language in the list, drag up or down. Change the language for iPod touch Go to Settings > General > International > Language. Some languages may be affected by the Region Format setting in Settings > General > International. Skip images while navigating Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Navigate Images. You can choose to skip all images or only those without descriptions. Speak notifications when you unlock iPod touch Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Speak Notifications. If this is off, iPod touch speaks only the time when you unlock it. Chapter 30 Accessibility 119Using VoiceOver Select items on the screen: Drag your finger over the screen. VoiceOver identifies each element as you touch it. You can move systematically from one element to the next by flicking left or right with a single finger. Elements are selected from left-to-right, top-to-bottom. Flick right to go to the next element, or flick left to go to the previous element. Enable vertical navigation Add Vertical Navigation to the rotor, use the rotor to select it, then swipe up or down to move to the item above or below. See “Using the VoiceOver rotor control” on page 122. Select the first or last element on the screen Flick up or down with four fingers. Unlock iPod touch Select the Unlock button, then double-tap the screen. Select an item by name Triple-tap with two fingers anywhere on the screen to open the Item Chooser. Then type a name in the search field, or flick right or left to move through the list alphabetically, or tap the table index to the right of the list and flick up or down to move quickly through the list of items. Change the name of a screen item so it’s easier to find Tap and hold with two fingers anywhere on the screen. Speak the text of the selected element: Flick down or up with one finger to read the next or previous word or character (twist the rotor control to choose characters or words). You can include the phonetic spelling. See “Setting up VoiceOver” on page 119. Stop speaking an item Tap once with two fingers. Tap again with two fingers to resume speaking. Speaking automatically resumes when you select another item. Change the speaking volume Use the volume buttons on iPod touch, or add volume to the rotor and swipe up and down to adjust. See “Using the VoiceOver rotor control” on page 122. Mute VoiceOver Double-tap with three fingers. Double-tap again with three fingers to turn speaking back on. To turn off only VoiceOver sounds, set the Ring/Silent switch to Silent. If an external keyboard is connected, you can also press the Control key on the keyboard to mute or unmute VoiceOver. Change the reading voice Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Use Compact Voice. Speak the entire screen from the top Flick up with two fingers. Speak from the current item to the bottom of the screen Flick down with two fingers. Speak the iPod touch status information Tap the top of the screen to hear information about the time, battery life, Wi-Fi signal strength, and more. “Tap” the selected item when VoiceOver is on: Double-tap anywhere on the screen. “Double-tap” the selected item when VoiceOver is on Triple-tap anywhere on the screen. Adjust a slider With a single finger, flick up to increase the setting or down to decrease the setting. VoiceOver announces the setting as you adjust it. Scroll a list or area of the screen Flick up or down with three fingers. Flick down to page down through the list or screen, or flick up to page up. When paging through a list, VoiceOver speaks the range of items displayed (for example, “showing rows 5 through 10”). You can also scroll continuously through a list, instead of paging through it. Double-tap and hold. When you hear a series of tones, you can move your finger up or down to scroll the list. Continuous scrolling stops when you lift your finger. 120 Chapter 30 AccessibilityUse a list index Some lists have an alphabetical index along the right side. The index can’t be selected by flicking between elements; you must touch the index directly to select it. With the index selected, flick up or down to move along the index. You can also double-tap, then slide your finger up or down. Reorder a list You can change the order of items in some lists, such as the Rotor and Language Rotor elements in Accessibility settings. Select on the right side of an item, double-tap and hold until you hear a sound, then drag up or down. VoiceOver speaks the item you’ve moved above or below, depending on the direction you’re dragging. Rearrange the Home screen On the Home screen, select the icon you want to move. Double-tap and hold the icon, then drag it. VoiceOver speaks the row and column position as you drag the icon. Release the icon when it’s in the location you want. You can drag additional icons. Drag an item to the left or right edge of the screen to move it to a different page of the Home screen. When you finish, press the Home button . Turn the screen curtain on or off Triple-tap with three fingers. When the screen curtain is on, the screen contents are active even though the display is turned off. Unlock iPod touch Select the Unlock switch, then double-tap the screen. Learning VoiceOver gestures When VoiceOver is turned on, the standard touchscreen gestures have different effects. These and some additional gestures let you move around the screen and control individual elements when they’re selected. VoiceOver gestures include two- and three-finger gestures to tap or flick. For best results when using two- and three-finger gestures, relax and let your fingers touch the screen with some space between them. You can use standard gestures when VoiceOver is turned on, by double-tapping and holding your finger on the screen. A series of tones indicates that normal gestures are in force. They remain in effect until you lift your finger. Then VoiceOver gestures resume. You can use different techniques to enter VoiceOver gestures. For example, you can enter a two-finger tap using two fingers from one hand, or one finger from each hand. You can also use your thumbs. Many find the “split-tap” gesture especially effective: instead of selecting an item and double-tapping, you can touch and hold an item with one finger, then tap the screen with another finger. Try different techniques to discover which works best for you. If your gestures don’t work, try quicker movements, especially for double-tapping and flicking gestures. To flick, try quickly brushing the screen with your finger or fingers. When VoiceOver is turned on, the VoiceOver Practice button appears, which gives you a chance to practice VoiceOver gestures before proceeding. Practice gestures: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > VoiceOver, then tap VoiceOver Practice. When you finish practicing, tap Done. If you don’t see the VoiceOver Practice button, make sure VoiceOver is turned on. Here’s a summary of key VoiceOver gestures: Navigate and read  Tap: Speak item.  Flick right or left: Select the next or previous item.  Flick up or down: Depends on the Rotor Control setting. See “Using the VoiceOver rotor control” on page 122.  Two-finger tap: Stop speaking the current item. Chapter 30 Accessibility 121 Two-finger flick up: Read all from the top of the screen.  Two-finger flick down: Read all from the current position.  Two-finger “scrub”: Move two fingers back and forth three times quickly (making a “z”) to dismiss an alert or go back to the previous screen.  Two-finger triple tap: Open the Item Chooser.  Three-finger flick up or down: Scroll one page at a time.  Three-finger flick right or left: Go to the next or previous page (such as the Home screen, Stocks, or Safari).  Three-finger tap: Speak additional information, such as position within a list or whether text is selected.  Four-finger tap at top of screen: Select the first item on the page.  Four-finger tap at bottom of screen: Select the last item on the page. Activate  Double-tap: Activate the selected item.  Triple-tap: Double-tap an item.  Split-tap: An alternative to selecting an item and double-tapping is to touch an item with one finger, then tap the screen with another to activate an item.  Touch an item with one finger, tap the screen with another finger (“split-tapping”): Activate the item.  Double-tap and hold (1 second) + standard gesture: Use a standard gesture. The double-tap and hold gesture tells iPod touch to interpret the subsequent gesture as standard. For example, you can double-tap and hold, then without lifting your finger, drag your finger to slide a switch.  Two-finger double-tap: Play or pause in Music, Videos, YouTube, Voice Memos, or Photos. Take a photo (Camera). Start or pause recording in Camera or Voice Memos. Start or stop the stopwatch.  Two-finger double-tap and hold: Open the element labeler.  Two-finger triple-tap: Open the Item Chooser.  Three-finger double-tap: Mute or unmute VoiceOver.  Three-finger triple-tap: Turn the screen curtain on or off. Using the VoiceOver rotor control The rotor control is a virtual dial that you can use to change the results of up and down flick gestures when VoiceOver is turned on. Operate the rotor: Rotate two fingers on the iPod touch screen around a point between them. Change the options included in the rotor: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Rotor and select the options you want to be available using the rotor. The effect of the rotor setting depends on what you’re doing. If you’re reading text in an email you received, you can use the rotor to switch between hearing text spoken word-by-word or character-by-character when you flick up or down. If you’re browsing a webpage, you can use the rotor setting to hear all the text (either word-by-word or character-by-character), or to jump from one element to another of a certain type, such as headers or links. 122 Chapter 30 AccessibilityThe following lists show the available rotor options, depending on what you’re doing. Reading text Select and hear text by:  Character, word, or line Speaking Adjust VoiceOver speaking by:  Volume or rate  Use of typing echo, pitch change, or phonetics (using Apple Wireless Keyboard) See “Controlling VoiceOver using an Apple Wireless Keyboard” on page 125. Navigating Select and hear text by:  Character, word, or line  Heading  Link, visited link, non-visited link, or in-page link  Form control  Table or row (when navigating a table)  List  Landmark  Image  Static text  Items of the same type  Buttons  Text fields  Search fields  Containers (screen regions such as the dock) Zoom in or out Entering text Move insertion point and hear text by:  Character, word, or line Select edit function Select language Using a control Select and hear values by:  Character, word, or line Adjust the value of the control object Chapter 30 Accessibility 123Entering and editing text with VoiceOver When you enter an editable text field, you can use the onscreen keyboard or an external keyboard connected to iPod touch to enter text. There are two ways to enter text in VoiceOver—standard typing and touch typing. With standard typing, you select a key, then double-tap the screen to enter the character. With touch typing, you touch to select a key and the character is entered automatically when you lift your finger. Touch typing can be quicker, but may require more practice than standard typing. VoiceOver also lets you use the editing features of iPod touch to cut, copy, or paste in a text field. Enter text: Select an editable text field, double-tap to display the insertion point and the onscreen keyboard, and type characters.  Standard typing: Select a key on the keyboard by flicking left or right, then double-tap to enter the character. Or move you finger around the keyboard to select a key and, while continuing to touch the key with one finger, tap the screen with another finger. VoiceOver speaks the key when it’s selected, and again when the character is entered.  Touch typing: Touch a key on the keyboard to select it, then lift your finger to enter the character. If you touch the wrong key, move your finger on the keyboard until you select the key you want. VoiceOver speaks the character for each key as you touch it, but doesn’t enter a character until you lift your finger. Note: Touch typing works only for the keys that enter text. Use standard typing for other keys such as Shift, Delete, and Return. Move the insertion point: Flick up or down to move the insertion point forward or backward in the text. Use the rotor to choose whether you want to move the insertion point by character, by word, or by line. VoiceOver makes a sound when the insertion point moves, and speaks the character, word, or line that the insertion point moves across. When moving forward by words, the insertion point is placed at the end of each word, before the space or punctuation that follows. When moving backward, the insertion point is placed at the end of the preceding word, before the space or punctuation that follows it. To move the insertion point past the punctuation at the end of a word or sentence, use the rotor to switch back to character mode. When moving the insertion point by line, VoiceOver speaks each line as you move across it. When moving forward, the insertion point is placed at the beginning of the next line (except when you reach the last line of a paragraph, when the insertion point is moved to the end of the line just spoken). When moving backward, the insertion point is placed at the beginning of the line that’s spoken. Choose standard or touch typing With VoiceOver turned on and a key selected on the keyboard, use the rotor to select Typing Mode, then flick up or down. Delete a character Select the , then double-tap or split-tap. You must do this even when touch typing. To delete multiple characters, touch and hold the Delete key, then tap the screen with another finger once for each character you want to delete. VoiceOver speaks the character as it’s deleted. If Use Pitch Change is turned on, VoiceOver speaks deleted characters in a lower pitch. Select text Set the rotor to Edit, flick up or down to choose Select or Select All, then double tap. If you chose Select, the word closest to the insertion point is selected when you double-tap. If you chose Select All, the entire text is selected. Pinch apart or together to increase or decrease the selection. Cut, copy, or paste Make sure the rotor is set to edit. With text selected, flick up or down to choose Cut, Copy, or Paste, then double-tap. 124 Chapter 30 AccessibilityUndo Shake iPod touch, flick left or right to choose the action to undo, then double-tap. Enter an accented character In standard typing mode, select the plain character, then double-tap and hold until you hear a sound indicating alternate characters have appeared. Drag left or right to select and hear the choices. Release your finger to enter the current selection. Change the language you’re typing in Set the rotor to Language, then flick up or down. Choose “default language” to use the language specified in International settings. The Language rotor appears only if you select more than one language in the VoiceOver Language Rotor setting. See “Setting up VoiceOver” on page 119. Using VoiceOver with Safari When you search the web in Safari with VoiceOver on, the Search Results rotor items lets you hear the list of suggested search phrases. Search the web: Select the search field, enter your search, then select Search Results using the rotor. Flick right or left to move down or up the list, then double-tap the screen to search the web using the current search phrase. Using VoiceOver with Maps With VoiceOver, you can zoom in or out, select pins, and get information about locations. Zoom in or out: Use the rotor to choose zoom mode, then flick up or down to zoom in or out. Select a pin: Touch a pin, or flick left or right to move from one item to another. Get information about a location: With a pin selected, double-tap to display the information flag. Flick left or right to select the flag, then double-tap to display the information page. Editing videos and voice vemos with VoiceOver You can use VoiceOver gestures to trim Camera videos and Voice Memo recordings. Trim a voice memo: On the Voice Memos screen, select the button to the right of the memo you want to trim, then double-tap. Then select Trim Memo and double-tap. Select the beginning or end of the trim tool. Flick up to drag to the right, or flick down to drag to the left. VoiceOver announces the amount of time the current position will trim from the recording. To execute the trim, select Trim Voice Memo and double-tap. Trim a video: While viewing a video, double-tap the screen to display the video controls. Select the beginning or end of the trim tool. Then flick up to drag to the right, or flick down to drag to the left. VoiceOver announces the amount of time the current position will trim from the recording. To execute the trim, select Trim and double-tap. Controlling VoiceOver using an Apple Wireless Keyboard You can control VoiceOver using an Apple Wireless Keyboard paired with iPod touch. See “Using an Apple Wireless Keyboard” on page 26. The VoiceOver keyboard commands let you navigate the screen, select items, read screen contents, adjust the rotor, and perform other VoiceOver actions. All the keyboard commands (except one) include Control-Option, abbreviated in the table below as “VO.” VoiceOver Help speaks keys or keyboard commands as you type them. You can use VoiceOver Help to learn the keyboard layout and the actions associated with key combinations. Chapter 30 Accessibility 125VoiceOver keyboard commands VO = Control-Option Read all, starting from the current position VO–A Read from the top VO–B Move to the status bar VO–M Press the Home button VO–H Select the next or previous item VO–Right Arrow or VO–Left Arrow Tap an item VO–Space bar Double-tap with two fingers VO–”-” Choose the next or previous rotor item VO–Up Arrow or VO–Down Arrow Choose the next or previous speech rotor item VO–Command–Left Arrow or VO–Command–Right Arrow Adjust speech rotor item VO–Command–Up Arrow or VO–Command–Down Arrow Mute or unmute VoiceOver VO–S Turn the screen curtain on or off VO–Shift-S Turn on VoiceOver help VO–K Return to the previous screen, or turn off VoiceOver help Escape Quick Nav Turn on Quick Nav to control VoiceOver using the arrow keys. Quick Nav is off by default. Turn Quick Nav on or off Left Arrow–Right Arrow Select the next or previous item Right Arrow or Left Arrow Select the next or previous item specified by the rotor setting Up Arrow or Down Arrow Select the first or last item Control–Up Arrow or Control–Down Arrow "Tap” an item Up Arrow–Down Arrow Scroll up, down, left, or right Option–Up Arrow, Option–Down Arrow, Option–Left Arrow, or Option–Right Arrow Change the rotor Up Arrow–Left Arrow or Up Arrow–Right Arrow You can also use the number keys on an Apple Wireless Keyboard to enter numbers in Calculator. Single-letter Quick Nav for the web When you view a web page with Quick Nav enabled, you can use the following keys on the keyboard to navigate the page quickly. Typing the key moves to the next item of the indicated type. Hold the Shift key as you type the letter to move to the previous item. H Heading L Link R Text field B Button 126 Chapter 30 AccessibilityC Form control I Image T Table S Static text W ARIA landmark X List M Element of the same type 1 Level 1 heading 2 Level 2 heading 3 Level 3 heading 4 Level 4 heading 5 Level 5 heading 6 Level 6 heading Using a braille display with VoiceOver You can use a refreshable Bluetooth braille display to read VoiceOver output in braille, and you can use a braille display with input keys and other controls to control iPod touch when VoiceOver is turned on. iPod touch works with many wireless braille displays. For a list of supported displays, go to www.apple.com/accessibility/iphone/braille-display.html. Set up a braille display: Turn on the display, then go to Settings > General > Bluetooth and turn on Bluetooth. Then go to Settings > General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Braille and choose the display. Turn contracted braille on or off Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Braille. Turn eight-dot braille on or off Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Braille. For information about common braille commands for VoiceOver navigation and information specific to certain displays, go to support.apple.com/kb/HT4400. The braille display uses the language that’s set for Voice Control.This is normally the language set for iPod touch in Settings > International > Language. You can use the VoiceOver language setting to set a different language for VoiceOver and braille displays. Set the language for VoiceOver: Go to Settings > General > International > Voice Control, then choose the language. If you change the language for iPod touch, you may need to reset the language for VoiceOver and your braille display. You can set the leftmost or rightmost cell of your braille display to provide system status and other information:  Announcement History contains an unread message  The current Announcement History message hasn’t been read  VoiceOver speech is muted  The iPod touch battery is low (less than 20% charge)  iPod touch is in landscape orientation  The screen display is turned off Chapter 30 Accessibility 127 The current line contains additional text to the left  The current line contains additional text to the right Set the leftmost or rightmost cell to display status information: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Braille > Status Cell, and tap Left or Right. See an expanded description of the status cell: On your braille display, press the status cell’s router button. Triple-click Home Triple-click Home provides an easy way to turn some of the Accessibility features on or off when you press the Home button quickly three times. You can set Triple-click Home to turn VoiceOver on or off, turn White on Black on or off, or present the options to:  Turn VoiceOver on or off  Turn White on Black on or off  Turn Zoom on or off Triple-click Home is turned off by default. Set the Triple-click Home function: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > Triple-click Home and choose the function you want. Zoom Many iPod touch apps let you zoom in or out on specific elements. For example, you can double-tap or use the pinch gesture to expand webpage columns in Safari. Zoom is also a special accessibility feature that lets you magnify the entire screen of any app you’re using, to help you see what’s on the display. While using Zoom with an Apple Wireless Keyboard (see “Using an Apple Wireless Keyboard” on page 26), the screen image follows the insertion point, keeping it in the center of the display. Turn Zoom on or off: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > Zoom. Or, use Triple-click Home. See “Triple-click Home” on page 128. Note: You can’t use VoiceOver and Zoom at the same time. Zoom in or out Double-tap the screen with three fingers. By default, the screen is magnified 200 percent. If you manually change the magnification (by using the tapand-drag gesture, described below), iPod touch automatically returns to that magnification when you zoom in by double-tapping with three fingers. Increase magnification With three fingers, tap and drag toward the top of the screen (to increase magnification) or toward the bottom of the screen (to decrease magnification). The tap-and-drag gesture is similar to a double-tap, except you don’t lift your fingers on the second tap—instead, drag your fingers on the screen. Once you start dragging, you can drag with a single finger. Move around the screen When zoomed in, drag or flick the screen with three fingers. Once you start dragging, you can drag with a single finger so that you can see more of the screen. Hold a single finger near the edge of the display to pan to that side of the screen image. Move your finger closer to the edge to pan more quickly. When you open a new screen, Zoom always goes to the top-middle of the screen. 128 Chapter 30 AccessibilityLarge Text Large Text lets you make the text larger in alerts, and in Calendar, Contacts, Mail, Messages, and Notes. Set the text size: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > Large Text. White on Black Use White on Black to invert the colors on the iPod touch screen, which may make it easier to read the screen. When White on Black is turned on, the screen looks like a photographic negative. Invert the screen’s colors: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > White on Black. Speak Selection Even with VoiceOver turned off, you can have your iPod touch read aloud any text you can select. Turn on Speak Selection and adjust speaking rate: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > Speak Selection. Have text read to you Select the text, then tap Speak. Speak Auto-text Speak Auto-text speaks the text corrections and suggestions iPod touch makes when you’re typing. Turn Speak Auto-text on or off: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > Speak Auto-text. Speak Auto-text also works with VoiceOver or Zoom. Mono Audio Mono Audio combines the left and right stereo channels into a mono signal played through both channels. You can adjust the balance of the mono signal for greater volume on the right or left. Turn Mono Audio on or off and adjust the balance: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > Mono Audio. AssistiveTouch AssistiveTouch helps you use iPod touch if you have difficulty touching the screen or pressing the buttons. You can use a compatible adaptive accessory (such as a joystick) together with AssistiveTouch to control iPod touch. You can also use AssistiveTouch without an accessory to perform gestures that are difficult for you. Turn on AssistiveTouch: Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > AssistiveTouch. You can also set Triple-click Home to turn AssistiveTouch on or off; go to Settings > General > Accessibility > Triple-click Home. Adjust the tracking speed Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > AssistiveTouch > Touch speed. Show or hide the AssistiveTouch menu Click the secondary button on your accessory. Hide the menu button Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > AssistiveTouch > Always Show Menu. Chapter 30 Accessibility 129Perform a flick or drag that uses 2, 3, 4, or 5 fingers Tap the menu button, tap Gestures, and then tap the number of digits needed for the gesture. When the corresponding circles appear on the screen, flick or drag in the direction required by the gesture. When you finish, tap the menu button. Perform a pinch gesture Tap the menu button, tap Favorites, and then tap Pinch. When the pinch circles appear, touch anywhere on the screen to move the pinch circles, then drag the pinch circles in or out to perform a pinch gesture. When you finish, tap the menu button. Create your own gesture Tap the menu button, tap Favorites, and then tap an empty gesture placeholder. Or, go to Settings > General > Accessibility > AssistiveTouch > “Create custom gesture.” Lock or rotate the screen, adjust iPod touch volume, or simulate shaking iPod touch Tap the menu button, then tap Device. Simulate pressing the Home button Tap the menu button, then tap Home. Move the menu button Drag it to any location on the screen. Exit a menu without performing a gesture Tap anywhere outside the menu. Universal Access in OS X Take advantage of the Universal Access features in OS X when you use iTunes to sync information and content from your iTunes library to iPod touch. In the Finder, choose Help > Mac Help, then search for “universal access.” For more information about iPod touch and OS X accessibility features, go to www.apple.com/accessibility. Minimum font size for mail messages To increase readability, you can set the minimum font size for Mail message text to Large, Extra Large, or Giant. Set the minimum mail message font size: Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars > Minimum Font Size. The Large Text setting overrides this minimum font size. Widescreen keyboards Many apps, including Mail, Safari, Messages, Notes, and Contacts, let you rotate iPod touch when you’re typing, so you can use a larger keyboard. Voice Control Voice Control (iPod touch 3rd generation or later) lets you control iPod music playback using voice commands. See “Using Voice Control with Music” on page 38. Closed captioning Turn on closed captioning for videos: Go to Settings > Video > Closed Captioning. Note: Not all video content includes closed captions. 130 Chapter 30 AccessibilityInternational Keyboards A Appendix International keyboards let you type text in many different languages, including Asian languages and languages that are written from right to left. Adding and removing keyboards To type text in different languages on iPod touch, you use different keyboards. By default, only the keyboard for the language you’ve set is available. To make keyboards for other languages available, use Keyboard settings. For a list of supported keyboards, go to www.apple.com/ ipodtouch/specs.html. Add a keyboard: Go to Settings > General > International > Keyboards > Add New Keyboard, then choose a keyboard from the list. Repeat to add more keyboards. Remove a keyboard: Go to Settings > General > International > Keyboards, then tap Edit. Tap next to the keyboard you want to remove, then tap Delete. Edit your keyboard list: Go to Settings > General > International > Keyboards. Tap Edit, then drag next to a keyboard to a new place in the list. Switching keyboards To enter text in a different language, switch keyboards. Switch keyboards while typing: Touch and hold the Globe key to show all enabled keyboards. To choose a keyboard, slide your finger to the name of the keyboard, then release. The Globe key appears when you enable more than one keyboard. You can also tap . When you tap , the name of the newly activated keyboard appears briefly. Continue tapping to access other enabled keyboards. Many keyboards provide letters, numbers, and symbols that aren’t visible on the keyboard. Enter accented letters or other alternate characters: Touch and hold the related letter, number, or symbol, then slide to choose a variant. On a Thai keyboard, for example, you can choose native numbers by touching and holding the related Arabic number. Chinese You can use keyboards to type Chinese in several different ways, including Pinyin, Cangjie, Wubihua, and Zhuyin. You can also use your finger to write Chinese characters on the screen. Typing using Pinyin Use the QWERTY keyboard to type Simplified or Traditional Pinyin. As you type, suggested characters appear. Tap a suggestion to choose it, continue typing Pinyin to see more options. If you keep typing Pinyin without spaces, sentence suggestions appear. 131Typing using Cangjie Build Chinese characters from the component Cangjie keys. As you type, suggested characters appear. Tap a character to choose it, or continue typing up to five components to see more options. Typing using Stroke (Wubihua) Use the keypad to build Chinese characters using up to five strokes in the correct writing sequence: horizontal, vertical, left falling, right falling, and hook. For example, the Chinese character 圈 (circle) should begin with the vertical stroke 丨. As you type, suggested Chinese characters appear (the most commonly used characters appear first). Tap a character to choose it. If you’re not sure of the correct stroke, enter an asterisk (*). To see more character options, type another stroke, or scroll through the character list. Tap the match key (匹配) to show only characters that match exactly what you typed. Typing using Zhuyin Use the keyboard to enter Zhuyin letters. As you type, suggested Chinese characters appear. Tap a suggestion to choose it, or continue entering Zhuyin letters to see more options. After you type an initial letter, the keyboard changes to show more letters. If you keep entering Zhuyin without spaces, sentence suggestions appear. Drawing Chinese characters When Simplified or Traditional Chinese handwriting formats are turned on, you can draw or write Chinese characters directly on the screen with your finger. As you write character strokes, iPod touch recognizes them and shows matching characters in a list, with the closest match at the top. When you choose a character, its likely follow-on characters appear in the list as additional choices. Touchpad Some complex characters, such as 鱲 (part of the name for the Hong Kong International Airport), 𨋢 (elevator), and 㗎 (particle used in Cantonese), can be typed by writing two or more component characters in sequence. Tap the character to replace the characters you typed. Roman characters are also recognized. Converting between Simplified and Traditional Chinese Select the character or characters you want to convert, then tap Replace. See “Editing text” on page 25. 132 Appendix A International KeyboardsJapanese You can type Japanese using the Romaji or Kana keyboards. You can also type facemarks. Typing Japanese kana Use the Kana keypad to select syllables. For more syllable options, tap the arrow key and select another syllable or word from the window. Typing Japanese romaji Use the Romaji keyboard to type syllables. Alternative choices appear along the top of the keyboard, tap one to type it. For more syllable options, tap the arrow key and select another syllable or word from the window. Typing facemarks or emoticons Using the Japanese Kana keyboard, tap the ^_^ key. Using the Japanese Romaji keyboard (QWERTY-Japanese layout), tap the Number key , then tap the ^_^ key. Using the Chinese (Simplified or Traditional) Pinyin or (Traditional) Zhuyin keyboard, tap the Symbols key , then tap the ^_^ key. Typing emoji characters Use the Emoji keyboard to add picture characters. You also can type emoji characters using a Japanese keyboard. For example, type はーと to get ♥. Using the candidate list As you type on Chinese, Japanese, or Arabic keyboards, suggested characters or candidates appear at the top of the keyboard. Tap a candidate to enter it, or flick to the left to see more candidates. Use the extended candidate list: Tap the up arrow at the right to view the full candidate list. Flick up or down to scroll the list. Tap the down arrow to go back to the short list. Using shortcuts When using certain Chinese or Japanese keyboards, you can create a shortcut for word and input pairs. The shortcut is added to the user dictionary. When you type a shortcut while using a supported keyboard, the associated word or input pair is substituted for the shortcut. Shortcuts are available for the following keyboards:  Chinese - Simplified (Pinyin)  Chinese - Traditional (Pinyin)  Chinese - Traditional (Zhuyin)  Japanese (Romaji)  Japanese (Kana) Turn shortcuts on or off: Go to Settings > General > Keyboard > Shortcuts. Appendix A International Keyboards 133Vietnamese Touch and hold a character to see the available diacritical marks, then slide to choose the one you want. You can also type the following key sequences to enter characters with diacritical marks:  aa—â  aw—ă  as—á  af—à  ar—ả  ax—ã  aj—ạ  dd—đ  ee—ê  oo—ô  ow—ơ  w—ư 134 Appendix A International KeyboardsSupport and Other Information B Appendix iPod touch Support site Comprehensive support information is available online at www.apple.com/support/ipodtouch. You can also use Express Lane for personalized support (not available in all areas). Go to expresslane.apple.com. Restarting and resetting iPod touch If something isn’t working right, try restarting iPod touch, forcing an app to close, or resetting iPod touch. Restart iPod touch: Hold down the On/Off button until the red slider appears. Slide your finger across the slider to turn off iPod touch. To turn iPod touch back on, hold down the On/Off button until the Apple logo appears. If you can’t turn off iPod touch or if the problem continues, you may need to reset iPod touch. A reset should be done only if turning iPod touch off and on doesn’t resolve the problem. Force an app to close: Hold down the On/Off button for a few seconds until a red slider appears, then hold down the Home button until the app quits. You can also remove an app from the recents list to force it to close. See “Opening and switching apps” on page 18. Reset iPod touch: Hold down the On/Off button and the Home button at the same time for at least ten seconds, until the Apple logo appears. Backing up iPod touch You can use iCloud or iTunes to automatically back up iPod touch. If you choose to automatically back up using iCloud, you can’t also use iTunes to automatically back up to your computer, but you can use iTunes to manually back up to your computer. Backing up with iCloud iCloud automatically backs up iPod touch daily over Wi-Fi, when it’s connected to a power source and is locked. The date and time of the last backup is listed at the bottom of the Storage & Backup screen. iCloud backs up your:  Purchased music, TV shows, apps, and books  Photos and videos in your Camera Roll  iPod touch settings  App data  Home screen and app organization  Messages Note: Purchased music isn’t backed up in all areas and TV shows are not available in all areas. 135If you didn't enable iCloud backup when you first set up iPod touch, you can turn it on in iCloud settings. Turn on iCloud backups Go to Settings > iCloud, then log in with your Apple ID and password, if required. Go to Storage & Backup, then turn on iCloud Backup. Back up immediately Go to Settings > iCloud > Storage & Backup, then tap Back Up Now. Manage your backups Go to Settings > iCloud > Storage & Backup, then tap Manage Storage. Tap the name of your iPod touch. Turn Camera Roll backup on or off Go to Settings > iCloud > Storage & Backup, then tap Manage Storage. Tap the name of your iPod touch, then turn Camera Roll backup on or off. View the devices being backed up Go to Settings > iCloud > Storage & Backup > Manage Storage. Stop iCloud backups Go to Settings > iCloud > Storage & Backup > Backup, then turn off iCloud Backup. Music that isn’t purchased in iTunes isn't backed up in iCloud. Use iTunes to back up and restore that content. See “Syncing with iTunes” on page 17. Important: Backups for music or TV show purchases are not available in all areas. Previous purchases may be unavailable if they are no longer in the iTunes Store, App Store, or iBookstore. Purchased content, as well as Photo Stream content, doesn't count against your 5 GB of free iCloud storage. Backing up with iTunes iTunes creates a backup of photos in your Camera Roll or Saved Photos album, and in text messages, notes, call history, contact favorites, sound settings, and more. Media files, such as songs, and some photos, aren’t backed up, but can be restored by syncing with iTunes. When you connect iPod touch to the computer you normally sync with, iTunes creates a backup each time you:  Sync with iTunes: iTunes syncs iPod touch each time you connect iPod touch to your computer. See “Syncing with iTunes” on page 17. iTunes won’t automatically back up an iPod touch that isn’t configured to sync with that computer.  Update or restore iPod touch: iTunes automatically backs up iPod touch before updating and restoring. iTunes can also encrypt iPod touch backups to secure your data. Encrypt iPod touch backups: Select "Encrypt iPod touch backup" in the iTunes Summary screen. Restore iPod touch files and settings: Connect iPod touch to the computer you normally sync with, select iPod touch in the iTunes window, and click Restore in the Summary pane. For more information about backups, including the settings and information stored in a backup, go to support.apple.com/kb/HT1766. Removing an iTunes backup You can remove an iPod touch backup from the list of backups in iTunes. You may want to do this, for example, if a backup was created on someone else’s computer. Remove a backup: 1 In iTunes, open iTunes Preferences.  Mac: Choose iTunes > Preferences.  Windows: Choose Edit > Preferences. 136 Appendix B Support and Other Information2 Click Devices (iPod touch doesn’t need to be connected). 3 Select the backup you want to remove, then click Delete Backup. 4 Click Delete, to confirm you wish to remove the selected backup, then click OK. Updating and restoring iPod touch software You can update iPod touch software in Settings or by using iTunes. You can also erase or restore iPod touch, and then use iCloud or iTunes to restore a backup. Deleted data is no longer accessible via the iPod touch user interface, but it isn’t erased from iPod touch. For information about erasing all content and settings, see “Reset” on page 107. Updating iPod touch You can update software in iPod touch Settings or by using iTunes. Update wirelessly on iPod touch: Go to Settings > General > Software Update. iPod touch checks for available software updates. Update software in iTunes: iTunes checks for available software updates each time you sync iPod touch using iTunes. See “Syncing with iTunes” on page 17. For more information about updating iPod touch software, go to support.apple.com/kb/HT4623. Restoring iPod touch You can use iCloud or iTunes to restore iPod touch from a backup. Restore from an iCloud backup: Reset iPod touch to erase all settings and information. Sign in to iCloud and choose Restore from a Backup in the Setup Assistant. See “Reset” on page 107. Restore from an iTunes backup: Connect iPod touch to the computer you normally sync with, select iPod touch in the iTunes window, and click Restore in the Summary pane. When the iPod touch software is restored, you can either set it up as a new iPod touch, or restore your music, videos, app data, and other content from a backup. For more information about restoring iPod touch software, go to support.apple.com/kb/HT1414. File sharing File Sharing lets you transfer files with a USB cable between iPod touch and your computer, using iTunes. You can share files created with a compatible app and saved in a supported format. Apps that support file sharing appear in the File Sharing Apps list in iTunes. For each app, the Files list shows the documents that are on iPod touch. See the app’s documentation for information about how it shares files; not all apps support this feature. Transfer a file from iPod touch to your computer: In iTunes, go to your device’s Apps pane. In the File Sharing section, select an app from the list. On the right, select the file you want to transfer, then click “Save to.” Transfer a file from your computer to iPod touch: In iTunes, go to your device’s Apps pane. In the File Sharing section, select an app, then click Add. The file is immediately transferred to your device for use with the app you selected. Delete a file from iPod touch: In iTunes, go to your device’s Apps pane. In the File Sharing section, select the file, then press the Delete key. Appendix B Support and Other Information 137Safety, software, and service information This table describes where to get more iPod touch-related safety, software, and service information. To learn about Do this Using iPod touch safely See the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/ipodtouch for the latest safety and regulatory information. iPod touch service and support, tips, forums, and Apple software downloads Go to www.apple.com/support/ipodtouch. The latest information about iPod touch Go to www.apple.com/ipodtouch. Using iCloud Go to www.apple.com/support/icloud. Using iTunes Open iTunes and choose Help > iTunes Help. For an online iTunes tutorial (may not be available in all areas), go to www.apple.com/support/itunes. Creating an Apple ID Go to appleid.apple.com. Using iPhoto in OS X Open iPhoto and choose Help > iPhoto Help. Using Address Book in OS X Open Address Book and choose Help > Address Book Help. Using iCal in OS X Open iCal and choose Help > iCal Help. Microsoft Outlook, Windows Address Book, or Adobe Photoshop Elements See the documentation that came with those apps. Obtaining warranty service First follow the advice in this guide and online resources. Then go to www.apple.com/support or see the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/ipodtouch. Battery replacement service Go to www.apple.com/batteries/replacements.html. Disposal and recycling information Your iPod touch must be disposed of properly according to local laws and regulations. Because this product contains a battery, the product must be disposed of separately from household waste. When your iPod touch reaches its end of life, contact Apple or your local authorities to learn about recycling options. Battery replacement: The rechargeable battery in iPod touch should be replaced only by Apple or an Apple Authorized Service Provider. For more information about battery replacement services, go to: www.apple.com/batteries/replacements.html For information about Apple’s recycling program, go to: www.apple.com/recycling Deutschland: Dieses Gerät enthält Batterien. Bitte nicht in den Hausmüll werfen. Entsorgen Sie dieses Gerätes am Ende seines Lebenszyklus entsprechend der maßgeblichen gesetzlichen Regelungen. Nederlands: Gebruikte batterijen kunnen worden ingeleverd bij de chemokar of in een speciale batterijcontainer voor klein chemisch afval (kca) worden gedeponeerd. Türkiye: EEE yönetmeliğine (Elektrikli ve Elektronik Eşyalarda Bazı Zararlı Maddelerin Kullanımının Sınırlandırılmasına Dair Yönetmelik) uygundur. 138 Appendix B Support and Other InformationEuropean Union—disposal information: The symbol above means that according to local laws and regulations your product should be disposed of separately from household waste. When this product reaches its end of life, take it to a collection point designated by local authorities. Some collection points accept products for free. The separate collection and recycling of your product at the time of disposal will help conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment. Union Européenne—informations sur l’élimination: Le symbole ci-dessus signifie que vous devez vous débarasser de votre produit sans le mélanger avec les ordures ménagères, selon les normes et la législation de votre pays. Lorsque ce produit n’est plus utilisable, portez-le dans un centre de traitement des déchets agréé par les autorités locales. Certains centres acceptent les produits gratuitement. Le traitement et le recyclage séparé de votre produit lors de son élimination aideront à préserver les ressources naturelles et à protéger l’environnement et la santé des êtres humains. Europäische Union—Informationen zur Entsorgung: Das Symbol oben bedeutet, dass dieses Produkt entsprechend den geltenden gesetzlichen Vorschriften und getrennt vom Hausmüll entsorgt werden muss. Geben Sie dieses Produkt zur Entsorgung bei einer offiziellen Sammelstelle ab. Bei einigen Sammelstellen können Produkte zur Entsorgung unentgeltlich abgegeben werden. Durch das separate Sammeln und Recycling werden die natürlichen Ressourcen geschont und es ist sichergestellt, dass beim Recycling des Produkts alle Bestimmungen zum Schutz von Gesundheit und Umwelt beachtet werden. Unione Europea—informazioni per l’eliminazione: Questo simbolo significa che, in base alle leggi e alle norme locali, il prodotto dovrebbe essere eliminato separatamente dai rifiuti casalinghi. Quando il prodotto diventa inutilizzabile, portarlo nel punto di raccolta stabilito dalle autorità locali. Alcuni punti di raccolta accettano i prodotti gratuitamente. La raccolta separata e il riciclaggio del prodotto al momento dell’eliminazione aiutano a conservare le risorse naturali e assicurano che venga riciclato in maniera tale da salvaguardare la salute umana e l’ambiente. Europeiska unionen—uttjänta produkter: Symbolen ovan betyder att produkten enligt lokala lagar och bestämmelser inte får kastas tillsammans med hushållsavfallet. När produkten har tjänat ut måste den tas till en återvinningsstation som utsetts av lokala myndigheter. Vissa återvinningsstationer tar kostnadsfritt hand om uttjänta produkter. Genom att låta den uttjänta produkten tas om hand för återvinning hjälper du till att spara naturresurser och skydda hälsa och miljö. Brasil—Informações sobre descarte e reciclagem: O símbolo indica que este produto e/ou sua bateria não devem ser descartadas no lixo doméstico. Quando decidir descartar este produto e/ou sua bateria, faça-o de acordo com as leis e diretrizes ambientais locais. Para informações sobre o programa de reciclagem da Apple, pontos de coleta e telefone de informações, visite www.apple.com/br/environment. Appendix B Support and Other Information 139Apple and the environment At Apple, we recognize our responsibility to minimize the environmental impacts of our operations and products. For more information, go to: www.apple.com/environment iPod touch operating temperature If the interior temperature of iPod touch exceeds normal operating temperatures, you may experience the following as it attempts to regulate its temperature:  iPod touch stops charging.  The screen dims.  A temperature warning screen appears. Important: You can’t use iPod touch while the temperature warning screen is displayed. If iPod touch can’t regulate its internal temperature, it goes into deep sleep mode until it cools. Move iPod touch to a cooler location and wait a few minutes before trying to use iPod touch again. 140 Appendix B Support and Other InformationK Apple Inc. © 2012 Apple Inc. All rights reserved. Apple, the Apple logo, AirPlay, AirPort, AirPort Express, AirPort Extreme, Aperture, Apple TV, Cover Flow, FaceTime, Finder, iBooks, iCal, iLife, iMovie, iPad, iPhone, iPhoto, iPod, iPod touch, iTunes, iTunes Extras, Keynote, Mac, Mac OS, Numbers, OS X, Pages, Safari, Spotlight, and Time Capsule are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. AirPrint, iMessage, the Made for iPod logo, and Multi-Touch are trademarks of Apple Inc. Apple Store, Genius, iCloud, iTunes Plus, iTunes Store, and MobileMe are service marks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. App Store, iBookstore, and iTunes Match are service marks of Apple Inc. IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license. Ping is a registered trademark of Karsten Manufacturing Corporation and is used in the U.S. under license. NIKE and the Swoosh Design are trademarks of NIKE, Inc. and its affiliates, and are used under license. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Apple Inc. is under license. Adobe and Photoshop are trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the U.S. and/or other countries. Other company and product names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective companies. Map data © 2010 Google. Mention of third-party products is for informational purposes only and constitutes neither an endorsement nor a recommendation. Apple assumes no responsibility with regard to the performance or use of these products. All understandings, agreements, or warranties, if any, take place directly between the vendors and the prospective users. Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Apple is not responsible for printing or clerical errors. 019-2268/2012-03 iPad 使用手冊 適用於 iOS 5.1 軟體目錄 9 第 1 章 : 概觀 9 概述資訊 10 按鈕 11 Micro-SIM 卡托盤 12 “主畫面” 螢幕 15 使用 Multi-Touch (多重觸控) 螢幕 18 第 2 章 : 使用入門 18 系統需求 18 設定 iPad 18 設定郵件和其他帳號 19 管理 iPad 上的內容 19 使用 iCloud 20 與 iTunes 同步 21 將 iPad 連接到電腦上 21 在 iPad 上檢視使用手冊 21 電池 23 使用並清理 iPad 24 第 3 章 : 基本概述 24 使用應用程式 25 自定 “主畫面” 螢幕 27 輸入 32 搜尋 33 列印 34 檔案共享 34 通知 36 Twitter 37 使用 AirPlay 37 使用 Bluetooth 裝置 38 安全性功能 39 第 4 章 : Safari 39 檢視網頁 40 連結 40 閱讀列表 40 閱讀器 40 輸入文字和填寫表單 40 搜尋 41 書籤和瀏覽記錄 41 列印網頁、 PDF 以及其他文件 41 Web Clip 242 第 5 章 : Mail 42 檢查和閱讀電子郵件 43 使用多個帳號 43 傳送郵件 43 使用連結和偵測的資料 44 檢視附件 44 列印郵件和附件 44 管理郵件 45 搜尋郵件 45 郵件帳號和設定 47 第 6 章 : 訊息 47 收發訊息 48 將訊息傳送給群組 48 傳送照片、 視訊和更多項目 49 編輯對話 49 搜尋訊息 50 第 7 章 : 相機 50 關於相機 50 拍攝照片和視訊 51 檢視、 共享和列印 51 編輯照片 52 裁剪視訊 52 上傳照片和視訊至您的電腦 52 照片串流 53 第 8 章 : FaceTime 53 關於 FaceTime 53 進行 FaceTime 通話 54 FaceTime 通話時的選項 55 第 9 章 : Photo Booth 55 關於 Photo Booth 55 選取特效 55 拍攝照片 56 檢視和共享照片 56 上傳照片至您的電腦 57 第 10 章 : 照片 57 檢視照片和視訊 58 檢視幻燈片秀 58 整理照片和視訊 58 共享照片和視訊 59 列印照片 59 使用相框 59 輸入照片和視訊 61 第 11 章 : 視訊 61 關於視訊 61 播放影片 62 觀賞租借的影片 目錄 362 在電視上觀賞視訊 63 從 iPad 刪除視訊 63 使用家庭共享 64 第 12 章 : YouTube 64 關於 YouTube 64 瀏覽和搜尋影片 65 播放影片 66 追蹤您喜愛的影片 66 共享影片、 評論和評分 66 在電視上觀賞 YouTube 67 第 13 章 : 行事曆 67 關於行事曆 67 檢視行事曆 68 新增事件 68 回應邀請函 69 搜尋行事曆 69 訂閱行事曆 69 從 Mail 輸入行事曆事件 69 同步行事曆 70 行事曆帳號和設定 71 第 14 章 : 聯絡資訊 71 關於聯絡資訊 71 同步聯絡資訊 72 搜尋聯絡資訊 72 新增和編輯聯絡資訊 73 聯絡資訊帳號和設定 74 第 15 章 : 備忘錄 74 關於備忘錄 74 編寫與閱讀備忘錄 75 搜尋備忘錄 75 列印或以電子郵件寄送備忘錄 76 第 16 章 : 提醒事項 76 關於提醒事項 76 設定提醒事項 77 以列表顯示方式管理提醒事項 77 以日期顯示方式管理提醒事項 78 管理已完成的提醒事項 78 搜尋提醒事項 79 第 17 章 : 地圖 79 尋找位置 80 取得行車路線 81 取得並共享位置資訊 4 目錄81 顯示路況 82 地圖顯示方式 83 第 18 章 : 音樂 83 新增音樂和視訊 83 播放歌曲和其他音訊 85 檢視專輯裡的音軌 85 搜尋音訊內容 85 iTunes Match 86 Genius 87 播放列表 87 家庭共享 88 第 19 章 : iTunes Store 88 關於 iTunes Store 88 尋找音樂、 視訊和更多項目 89 購買音樂、 有聲書和鈴聲 89 購買或租借視訊 89 追蹤演出者和朋友 90 連續播送或下載 Podcast 90 檢查下載狀態 90 檢視帳號資訊 90 驗證下載項目 91 第 20 章 : App Store 91 關於 App Store 91 尋找和下載應用程式 92 刪除應用程式 93 Store 設定 94 第 21 章 : 書報攤 94 關於書報攤 95 閱讀最新一期的刊物 96 第 22 章 : iBooks 96 關於 iBooks 96 使用 iBookstore 96 同步書籍和 PDF 97 閱讀書籍 98 更改書籍的外觀 99 學習筆記與字彙列表 99 與多媒體互動 99 列印或郵寄 PDF 100 整理書架 101 第 23 章 : Game Center 101 關於 Game Center 101 登入 Game Center 102 購買和下載遊戲 102 執行遊戲 102 與朋友進行遊戲 103 Game Center 設定 目錄 5104 第 24 章 : 輔助使用 104 輔助使用功能 104 關於 VoiceOver 113 按三下主畫面按鈕 113 縮放 113 放大字體 114 黑底白字 114 朗讀所選範圍 114 朗讀自動文字 114 單聲道音訊 114 AssistiveTouch 115 OS X 的輔助使用功能 115 郵件的最小字級 115 寬螢幕鍵盤 115 隱藏式字幕 116 第 25 章 : 設定 116 飛航模式 116 Wi-Fi 117 通知 117 定位服務 118 行動數據 118 VPN 118 個人熱點 119 亮度與桌面背景 119 相框 119 一般 124 搜尋應用程式 125 附錄 A: 在企業環境中使用 iPad 125 在企業環境中使用 iPad 125 使用設定描述檔 125 設定 Microsoft Exchange 帳號 126 VPN 連線 126 LDAP 和 CardDAV 帳號 127 附錄 B: 國際鍵盤 127 加入和移除鍵盤 127 切換鍵盤 127 中文 128 日文 129 輸入表情符號字元 129 使用候選字列表 129 運用使用者字典 130 越南文 131 附錄 C: 支援及其他資訊 131 iPad 支援網站 131 出現低電量影像或 “沒有在充電” 訊息 131 iPad 沒有回應 131 重新啟動和重置 iPad 132 顯示 “此配件不支援 iPad” 6 目錄132 應用程式未填滿螢幕 132 沒有顯示螢幕鍵盤 132 備份 iPad 134 更新與回復 iPad 軟體 134 無法傳送或接收電子郵件 135 聲音、 音樂和視訊 136 iTunes Store 和 App Store 136 安全性、 服務和支援資訊 137 處理和回收資訊 137 Apple 和環境保護 137 iPad 作業溫度 目錄 7概觀 1 閱讀這章節來瞭解 iPad 的功能、 如何使用控制項目以及其他內容。 概述資訊 多重觸控螢幕 多重觸控螢幕 前方相機 前方相機 主畫面 主畫面 應用程式 圖像 應用程式 圖像 狀態列 狀態列 揚聲器 揚聲器 Dock Dock 接頭埠 接頭埠 麥克風 麥克風 耳機插孔 耳機插孔 Micro-SIM 卡托 盤 (部分機型) Micro-SIM 卡托 盤 (部分機型) 睡眠 / 喚醒 睡眠 / 喚醒 背面相機 背面相機 音量按鈕 音量按鈕 側邊切換控制 側邊切換控制 您的 iPad 功能和 “主畫面” 螢幕可能看起來有所不同, 視您的 iPad 機型而定。 9配件 iPad 隨附以下的配件 : 10W USB 10W USB 電源轉換器 電源轉換器 Dock Connector to USB Cable 項目 功能 10W USB 電源轉換器 使用 10W USB 電源轉換器以供給電源給 iPad 並替電 池充電。 Dock Connector to USB Cable 使用接線來將 iPad 連接到 10W USB 電源轉換器以進 行充電, 並連接到電腦進行同步。 接線可搭配選 購的 iPad Dock 或直接插入 iPad 來使用。 按鈕 只要幾個按鈕便可輕鬆鎖定 iPad 和調整音量。 “睡眠 / 喚醒” 按鈕 不使用 iPad 時, 您可以讓其進入睡眠來將其鎖定。 在 iPad 鎖定時, 若您觸碰螢幕, 不會 有任何反應, 但音樂會持續播放, 且您可以使用音量按鈕。 睡眠 / 喚醒 按鈕 睡眠 / 喚醒 按鈕 鎖定 iPad 按下 “睡眠 / 喚醒” 按鈕。 解鎖 iPad 按下 “主畫面” 按鈕 或 “睡眠 / 喚醒” 按鈕, 然後拖移滑桿。 將 iPad 關閉 按住 “睡眠 / 喚醒” 按鈕幾秒鐘, 直到紅色滑桿出現為止, 然後拖 移螢幕上的滑桿。 開啟 iPad 按住 “睡眠 / 喚醒” 按鈕, 直到 Apple 標誌出現為止。 若您在一兩分鐘之內都沒有觸碰螢幕, 則 iPad 會自動鎖定。 您可以更改螢幕鎖定前的等待 時間, 或設定解鎖 iPad 的密碼。 設定“自動鎖定”時間: 在“設定”中,前往“一般”>“自動鎖定”,然後設定讓 iPad 自動鎖定的時間。 設定密碼: 在“設定”中,前往“一般”>“密碼鎖定”,然後點一下“開啟”或“關閉”。 使用 iPad Smart Cover (須另外購買) 和 iPad 2 或更新版本, 當您打開保護套時會自動 解鎖 iPad, 而當您關上時會鎖定 iPad。 使用 iPad Smart Cover: 在 “設定” 中,前往 “一般” > “iPad 保護套鎖定 / 解鎖”,然 後點一下 “開啟”。 “主畫面” 按鈕 “主畫面” 按鈕 可讓您隨時回到 “主畫面” 螢幕。 它也提供其他方便的快速鍵。 前往 “主畫面” 螢幕 : 按下 “主畫面” 按鈕 。 10 第 1 章 概觀在“主畫面”螢幕上,點一下應用程式來打開它。請參閱 第24頁「打開和切換應用程式」。 顯示多工處理列來查看最近使用的 應用程式 在 iPad 未鎖定時, 按兩下 “主畫面” 按鈕 。 顯示音訊播放控制項目 在 iPad 鎖定時 : 按兩下 “主畫面” 按鈕 。 請參閱 第 83 頁 「播 放歌曲和其他音訊」。 使用其他應用程式時 : 按兩下 “主畫面” 按鈕 , 然後由左向右 滑動多工處理列。 音量按鈕 使用音量按鈕來調整歌曲和其他媒體、 以及提示聲和音效的音量。 音量按鈕 音量按鈕 側邊切換 控制 側邊切換 控制 增加音量 按 “調高音量” 按鈕。 降低音量 按 “調低音量” 按鈕。 設定音量限制 在 “設定” 中, 前往 “音樂” > “音量限制”。 靜音 按住 “調低音量” 按鈕。 【警告】 如需更多避免聽力傷害的相關資訊, 請參閱 「iPad 重要產品資訊指南」, 位 於 : support.apple.com/zh_TW/manuals/ipad。 側邊切換控制 您可以使用 “側邊切換控制” 來停用音訊提示和通知。 您也可以使用它來鎖定螢幕旋轉, 並避免 iPad 顯示器在直向和橫向模式間切換。 將通知、 提示聲和音效靜音 將 “側邊切換控制” 向下滑來讓通知、 提示聲和音效靜音。 此切 換控制不會讓音訊播放 (如音樂、podcast、影片和電視節目) 靜音。 請參閱 第 122 頁 「側邊切換控制」。 鎖定螢幕旋轉 在 “設定” 中, 前往 “一般” > “使用側邊切換控制⋯”, 然 後點一下 “鎖定螢幕旋轉”。 請參閱 第 122 頁 「側邊切換控制」。 第 1 章 概觀 11Micro-SIM 卡托盤 Micro-SIM 在部分 4G 和 3G 機型中是用來處理行動資料。 如果沒有預先安裝 micro-SIM 卡, 或是您更改行動資料電信業者, 則必須要安裝或更換 micro-SIM 卡。 Micro-SIM Micro-SIM 卡 卡 SIM 卡 托盤 SIM 卡 托盤 SIM 卡退出 工具 SIM 卡退出 工具 打開 SIM 卡托盤: 將 SIM 卡退出工具的一端插入 SIM 卡托盤上的小孔中。 請用力按,並推 壓直到托盤彈出為止。 拉出 SIM 卡托盤來安裝或更換 micro-SIM 卡。 如果您沒有 SIM 卡退 出工具, 可能可以使用小型迴紋針的一端即可。 如需更多資訊, 請參閱 第 118 頁 「行動數據」。 “主畫面” 螢幕 在任何時候,只要按下“主畫面”按鈕 便可前往“主畫面”螢幕,其會顯示您 iPad 的應 用程式。 點一下任何圖像來開啟該應用程式。 請參閱 第 24 頁 「使用應用程式」。 狀態圖像 螢幕上方狀態列裡的圖像提供了 iPad 的相關資訊 : 狀態圖像 代表意義 飛航模式 顯示飛航模式已啟用, 此時無法連接 Internet, 或 使用 Bluetooth® 裝置。 沒有可用的無線功能。 請參 閱 第 116 頁 「飛航模式」。 LTE 顯示您電信業者的 4G LTE 網路 (iPad Wi-Fi + 4G) 已 可使用, 並可以透過 4G LTE 連接 Internet。 4G 顯示您電信業者的 4G 網路 (部分 iPad Wi-Fi + 4G 機 型) 已可使用, 並可以透過 4G 連接 Internet。 3G 顯示您電信業者的 3G 網路 (4G 或 3G 機型) 已可使 用, 並可以透過 3G 連接 Internet。 EDGE 顯示您電信業者的 EDGE 網路 (部分 4G 或 3G 機型) 已可使用, 並可以透過 EDGE 連接 Internet。 GPRS 顯示您電信業者的 GPRS 網路 (部分 4G 或 3G 機型) 已可使用, 並可以透過 GPRS 連接 Internet。 12 第 1 章 概觀狀態圖像 代表意義 Wi-Fi 顯示 iPad 具備 Wi-Fi Internet 連線。 格數愈多, 就代 表連線訊號愈強。 請參閱 第 116 頁 「加入 Wi-Fi 網 路」。 個人熱點 顯示 iPad 正在提供 “個人熱點” 給另一台 iPad、 iPhone 或 iPod touch。 請參閱 第 118 頁 「個人熱 點」。 同步 顯示 iPad 正在與 iTunes 進行同步。請參閱 第20頁「與 iTunes 同步」。 活動 顯示網路和其他活動。 部分協力廠商的應用程式會使 用圖像來顯示已啟用的程序。 VPN 顯示您已使用 VPN 連接網路。 請參閱 第 118 頁 「VPN」。 鎖定 顯示 iPad 已鎖定。 請參閱 第 10 頁 「“睡眠 / 喚醒” 按鈕」。 螢幕方向鎖定 顯示螢幕方向已鎖定。 請參閱 第 15 頁 「直向或橫向 檢視」。 定位服務 顯示項目正在使用“定位服務”。請參閱 第117頁「定 位服務」。 播放 顯示播放中的歌曲、 有聲書或 podcast。 請參閱 第 83 頁 「播放歌曲和其他音訊」。 Bluetooth 白色圖像 : Bluetooth 已啟用, 且已與裝置 (例如耳 麥或是鍵盤) 配對。 灰色圖像 : 已開啟 Bluetooth 並配對裝置, 但裝置位 於通訊範圍之外, 或者已經關閉。 沒有圖像 : 已關閉 Bluetooth 或是未配對。 請參閱 第 37 頁 「使用 Bluetooth 裝置」。 電池 顯示電池電量或充電狀態。 請參閱 第 22 頁 「替電池 充電」。 iPad 應用程式 iPad 隨附下列應用程式 : Safari 在 Internet 瀏覽網站。 旋轉 iPad 來以寬螢幕檢視畫面。 點兩下來放大或縮小, Safari 會 自動縮放網頁欄位來符合螢幕大小。 使用標籤頁打開多個頁面。 與電腦上的 Safari 或 Microsoft Internet Explorer 同步書籤。 將 Safari Web Clip 加入 “主畫面” 螢幕, 以便快 速連接您喜愛的網站。 將來自網站的影像儲存至您的 “照片圖庫”。 使用 AirPrint 列印 網頁。 請參閱 第 39 頁第 4 章 「Safari」。 Mail 使用最常見的郵件服務 (Microsoft Exchange 或多數標準的 POP3 和 IMAP 郵件服務) 傳 送和接收郵件。 傳送和儲存照片。 檢視 PDF 檔案和其他附件, 或在其他應用程式中打 開這些檔案。 使用 AirPrint 列印郵件和附件。 請參閱 第 42 頁第 5 章 「Mail」。 照片 將喜愛的照片和視訊整理成相簿。 觀看幻燈片秀。 放大來仔細觀看。 編輯照片並使用 AirPrint 列印照片。 使用 “照片串流” 來將您在 iPad 上拍攝的照片推播到您的裝置。 請參閱 第 57 頁第 10 章 「照片」。 第 1 章 概觀 13音樂 與 iTunes 資料庫同步, 並聆聽 iPad 上的歌曲、 有聲書和 podcast。 製作和管理播放列 表, 或使用 Genius 來為您製作播放列表。 聆聽資料庫中歌曲的 “Genius 組曲”。 使用 “家庭共享” 來播放您電腦的音樂。 使用 AirPlay 來以無線方式將音樂或視訊連續播送到 Apple TV 或相容的音訊系統。 請參閱 第 83 頁第 18 章 「音樂」。 訊息 透過 Wi-Fi 傳送訊息給其他 iOS 5 使用者, 並附上照片、 視訊和其他資訊。 您的訊息會 進行加密。 請參閱 第 47 頁第 6 章 「訊息」。 行事曆 讓 iPad 的行事曆保持最新狀態, 或是與 Mac OS X 或 Windows 行事曆同步。 訂閱其他人 的行事曆。 透過 Internet 與 Microsoft Exchange 或 CalDAV 伺服器同步。 請參閱 第 67 頁 第 13 章 「行事曆」。 備忘錄 隨時隨地記下備忘錄, 購物清單和偶發的靈感。 透過郵件傳送這些項目。 將備忘錄同 步至 Mail 或 Microsoft Outlook 或 Outlook Express。 請參閱 第 74 頁第 15 章 「備忘錄」。 提醒事項 透過到期日和列表的協助來管理生活事務。 “提醒事項” 可與您電腦上的 iCal 和 Microsoft Outlook 搭配使用。 您可以使用 iCloud 或 Microsoft Exchange 帳號, 讓您的提醒 事項在所有裝置之間保持最新狀態。 請參閱 第 76 頁第 16 章 「提醒事項」。 地圖 檢視世界各地的標準、 衛星、 混合或地形地圖。 您可以放大來仔細觀看, 或是觀看 “Google 街景視圖”。 尋找您目前的位置 : 取得詳細的行車、 大眾運輸或步行路線, 並查看目前的公路交通狀況。 在此地區裡尋找商業地點。 請參閱 第 79 頁第 17 章 「地 圖」。 YouTube 播放來自 YouTube 線上選集的影片。 搜尋任何影片,或是瀏覽精選影片、最多觀看次數、 最新上傳和評分最高影片。 設定並登入 YouTube 帳號,然後為影片評分、同步我的最愛、 顯示訂閱等等。 請參閱 第 64 頁第 12 章 「YouTube」。 視訊 播放 iTunes 資料庫或影片選集的影片、 電視節目、 Podcast, 和視訊。 使用 iTunes Store 在 iPad 上購買或租借影片。 下載視訊 Podcast。 請參閱 第 61 頁第 11 章 「視訊」。 聯絡資訊 整理 iPad 上的通訊錄, 並使用 iCloud 讓您所有的 iOS 裝置具有最新的通訊錄資訊。 請參 閱 第 71 頁第 14 章 「聯絡資訊」。 Game Center 與朋友一起發掘新遊戲並分享遊戲體驗。 邀請朋友或對手一起競賽。 查看排行榜上的玩 家排名。 賺取積點來取得成就感。 請參閱 第 101 頁第 23 章 「Game Center」。 14 第 1 章 概觀iTunes Store 在 iTunes Store 中搜尋音樂、 有聲書、 電視節目、 音樂錄影帶和影片。 瀏覽、 預覽、 購買和下載新的版本、 最受歡迎的項目等等。 購買或租借影片和購買電視節目, 並在 iPad 上觀看。 下載 Podcast。 閱讀評論或寫下您對喜好的商店項目所做的評論。 請參 閱 第 88 頁第 19 章 「iTunes Store」。 App Store 在 App Store 搜尋可供購買或下載的應用程式。 請閱讀評論或寫下您對喜好的應用程式所 做的評論。 在 “主畫面” 螢幕上下載並安裝應用程式。 請參閱 第 91 頁第 20 章 「App Store」。 書報攤 在一個方便的位置管理所有應用程式訂閱內容。 每當您應用程式訂閱內容有新的資訊時, “書報攤” 便會自動下載。 其作業全都在幕後執行, 因此您無須中斷正在進行的動作。 請參閱 第 94 頁第 21 章 「書報攤」。 FaceTime 透過 Wi-Fi 與其他 FaceTime 使用者進行視訊通話。 使用前方相機來面對面通話, 或者使 用背面相機來分享您看到的畫面。 請參閱 第 53 頁第 8 章 「FaceTime」。 相機 拍攝照片和錄製 HD 視訊。 在 iPad 上檢視照片和視訊、 透過郵件傳送, 或是將其上傳 到電腦或 Internet 上。 點一下來設定曝光。 裁剪並儲存視訊剪輯片段。 直接將視訊上傳 至 YouTube。 請參閱 第 50 頁第 7 章 「相機」。 Photo Booth 使用前方或背面相機來拍攝快照。 在拍攝快照前加入特效, 如旋轉或拉伸。 快照會儲 存在 “照片” 應用程式的相簿中。 請參閱 第 55 頁第 9 章 「Photo Booth」。 設定 在一個方便的位置上個人化所有 iPad 的設定-網路、 郵件、 網頁、 音樂、 視訊、 照 片和其他項目。設定“相框”、電子郵件帳號、聯絡資訊和行事曆。管理行動數據帳號。 設定自動鎖定和密碼來保護資料安全。 請參閱 第 116 頁第 25 章 「設定」。 【注意】 應用程式的功能和狀態會依您購買和使用 iPad 的地點而有不同。 直向或橫向檢視 您可以以直向或橫向來檢視 iPad 的內建應用程式。 旋轉 iPad 而螢幕也會跟著旋轉, 並自 動調整來符合新的方向。 例如, 您可能偏好橫向檢視 Safari 中的網頁或輸入文字。 網頁會自動在橫向模式中縮放至 較寬的螢幕, 使文字和影像變得更大。 螢幕鍵盤在橫向模式中也會變大, 這可協助您加 快輸入速度和提高準確性。 如果您不想讓螢幕旋轉, 請鎖定螢幕方向。 將螢幕鎖定在直向或橫向顯示 : 請按兩下 “主畫面” 按鈕 來檢視多工處理列, 然後 由左至右滑動。 點一下 來鎖定螢幕方向。 第 1 章 概觀 15您也可以將 “側邊切換控制” 設為鎖定螢幕方向,而非將音效和通知變成靜音。 在 “設 定” 中, 前往 “一般” > “使用側邊切換控制⋯”, 然後點一下 “鎖定螢幕旋轉”。 請參閱 第 122 頁 「側邊切換控制」。 使用 Multi-Touch (多重觸控) 螢幕 依您正在執行的作業而定, 多重觸控螢幕的控制項目會有所更改。 若要控制 iPad, 請使 用您的手指來撥動、 滑動、 點一下和點兩下。 使用多工處理手勢 您可以在 iPad 上使用多工處理手勢, 來返回 “主畫面” 螢幕、 顯示多工處理列, 或切 換到其他應用程式。 返回 “主畫面” 螢幕 : 四指或五指一起撥動。 顯示多工處理列 : 四指或五指向上滑動。 切換應用程式 : 四指或五指向左或向右滑動。 啟用或關閉多工處理手勢 : 在 “設定” 中, 前往 “一般” > “多工處理手勢”, 然 後點一下 “開啟” 或 “關閉”。 放大或縮小 當您在檢視照片、 網頁、 郵件或地圖時, 您可以放大或縮小。 使用兩指一起往內或往 外撥動。 檢視照片和網頁時, 您可以點兩下 (快速點兩次) 來放大, 然後再點兩下來 縮小。 檢視地圖時, 點兩下來放大地圖, 用兩指點一下可以縮小地圖。 16 第 1 章 概觀縮放是一種輔助使用功能, 可讓您放大任何應用程式的整個螢幕, 和協助您查看螢幕上 顯示的項目。 請參閱 第 113 頁 「縮放」。 調整亮度 若要調整螢幕的亮度,請按兩下 “主畫面” 按鈕 來檢視多工處理列。 由左至右滑動, 然後拖移亮度滑桿。 亮度亮度 使用 “自動亮度” 來自動調整螢幕的亮度: 在 “設定” 中,前往 “亮度與桌面背景”。 請參閱 第 119 頁 「亮度與桌面背景」。 使用螢幕鍵盤 當您需要輸入時, 螢幕鍵盤可隨時自動出現。 使用鍵盤來輸入文字, 例如聯絡資訊、 郵件和網址。 鍵盤可修正拼字錯誤、 預測正在輸入的單字、 且可記住您使用過的單字。 請參閱 第 27 頁 「輸入」。 使用列表 某些列表會沿著側邊顯示索引, 可協助您快速地導覽。 尋找索引列表中的項目 : 點一下字母來跳到以該字母開頭的項目。 沿著索引拖移您的手 指來快速捲視列表。 選擇項目 : 請點一下列表中的項目。 根據不同的列表, 點一下項目可能會有不同的功能 ; 例如打開新的列表、 播放歌曲、 打開郵件, 或顯示某人的聯絡資訊。 回到上一個列表 : 點一下位於左上角的返回按鈕。 第 1 章 概觀 17使用入門 2 請閱讀本章節來瞭解如何設定 iPad、 設定郵件帳號、 使用 iCloud 等等。 系統需求 【警告】 為了避免傷害, 在使用 iPad 前, 請先詳閱本手冊內的操作指示, 以及 「iPad 重要產品資訊指南」 內的安全資訊, 位於 support.apple.com/zh_TW/manuals/ipad。 · 若要使用 iPad, 您需要 :  Apple ID (以用於某些功能,包含 iCloud、App Store 和 iTunes Store 以及線上購買項目)  Internet 連線 (建議使用寬頻網路) 若要將 iPad 與電腦搭配使用, 您需要 :  配備 USB 2.0 埠並安裝下列作業系統的 Mac 或 PC :  Mac OS X 10.5.8 或以上版本 Windows 7、 Windows Vista、 或 Windows XP Home 或 Professional 整合 Service Pack 3  或以上版本  iTunes 10.6 或以上版本, 可於下列網址取得 : www.itunes.com/tw/download 設定 iPad 若要設定 iPad, 請將其開啟並依照 “設定輔助程式” 操作。 “設定輔助程式” 在螢幕 上的指示會引導您完成設定程序, 包含連接 Wi-Fi 網路、 以 Apple ID 登入或建立免費的 Apple ID、 設定 iCloud、 啟用建議的功能 (如 “定位服務” 和 “尋找我的 iPad”)。 在設定期間, 您可以透過從 iCloud 備份或從 iTunes 回復的方式, 來從另一台 iPad 拷貝應 用程式、 設定和內容。 請參閱 第 132 頁 「備份 iPad」。 設定郵件和其他帳號 iPad 可與 iCloud、 Microsoft Exchange、 許多常用 Internet 類型的郵件、 聯絡資訊以及行 事曆服務提供者搭配使用。 如果您還沒有郵件帳號,在您設定 iPad 時可設定免費的 iCloud 帳號,或稍後於 “設定” > iCloud 中設定一個帳號。 請參閱 第 19 頁 「使用 iCloud」。 設定 iCloud 帳號 : 前往 “設定” > iCloud。 設定另一個帳號 : 前往 “設定” > “郵件、 聯絡資訊、 行事曆”。 如果您的公司或組織支援的話, 可以使用 LDAP 或 CardDAV 帳號加入聯絡資訊。 請參 閱 第 71 頁 「同步聯絡資訊」。 如需關於在企業環境中設定 Microsoft Exchange 帳號的資訊, 請參閱 第 125 頁 「設定 Microsoft Exchange 帳號」。 18管理 iPad 上的內容 您可以使用 iCloud 或 iTunes 在 iPad 與您其他的 iOS 裝置和電腦間, 傳送資訊和檔案。  iCloud 會儲存各種內容, 例如音樂、 照片和其他項目, 並以無線方式將其推播到 您的 iOS 裝置和電腦上, 讓所有項目保持最新狀態。 請參閱下方的 第 19 頁 「使用 iCloud」。  iTunes 會在電腦和 “iPhone” 之間同步音樂、 視訊、 照片和其他項目。 您在一台裝置 上所做的更動會在同步時拷貝到其他裝置。 您也可以使用 iTunes 來將檔案拷貝到 iPad 供 應用程式使用, 或者將您在 iPad 上製作的文件拷貝到您的電腦。 請參閱 第 20 頁 「與 iTunes 同步」。 視您的需求而定, 您可以使用 iCloud 或 iTunes 或兩者。 例如, 您可以使用 iCloud 的 “照 片串流” 來將您使用 iPad 拍攝的照片自動推播到其他裝置, 並可使用 iTunes 來從電腦同 步照片相簿到 iPad。 【注意】 不要同時在 iTunes 的 “簡介” 面板中同步項目 (如聯絡資訊、 行事曆和備忘 錄), 又使用 iCloud 來讓該資訊在您的裝置上保持最新。 否則, 您可能會在 iPad 上看到 重複的資料。 使用 iCloud iCloud 會儲存您的內容, 包含音樂、 照片、 聯絡資訊、 行事曆和支援的文件。 儲存在 iCloud 上的內容會以無線方式推播到其他也設定了相同 iCloud 帳號的 iOS 裝置和電腦上。 iCloud 可在 iOS 5 裝置以及執行 OS X Lion v10.7.2 或以上版本的 Mac 上使用, 此外, 安裝了 “Windows iCloud 控制面板” 的 PC (需要 Windows Vista Service Pack 2 或 Windows 7) 也 可使用。 iCloud 功能包括 :  iTunes 雲端服務 : 可讓您隨時將先前購買的 iTunes 音樂和電視節目下載到 iPad 上, 不 需支付費用。  應用程式和書籍 : 可讓您隨時下載先前購買的 App Store 和 iBookstore 項目, 不需支付 費用。  照片串流 : 能讓您在某部裝置上所拍攝的照片自動顯示在所有其他裝置上。 請參閱 第 52 頁 「照片串流」。  文件雲端服務 : 針對已啟用 iCloud 功能的應用程式, 讓文件和應用程式資料在所有裝 置上保持最新狀態。  郵件、 聯絡資訊、 行事曆 : 讓您的郵件聯絡資訊、 行事曆、 備忘錄和提醒事項在所 有裝置上保持最新狀態。  備份 : 當連接電源與 Wi-Fi 網路時, 自動備份 iPad 的內容到 iCloud 上。 請參閱 第 132 頁 「使用 iCloud 備份」。  尋找我的 iPad : 在地圖上找出您的 iPad、 顯示訊息、 播放聲音、 鎖定螢幕或遠端清 除資料。 請參閱 第 38 頁 「尋找我的 iPad」。  尋找我的朋友 : 使用 “尋找我的朋友” 應用程式來追蹤您的家人和朋友 (在連接到 Wi-Fi 或行動網路時)。 從 App Store 下載免費應用程式。  iTunes Match : 若是訂閱了 iTunes Match, 您的所有音樂, 包含從光碟輸入或從 iTunes 以外的來源所購買的音樂, 都會顯示在您的所有裝置上, 並可下載和點播。 請參閱 第 85 頁 「iTunes Match」。 使用 iCloud, 您可享有免費的郵件帳號和 5 GB 的儲存空間, 供郵件、 文件和備份使用。 您購買的音樂、 應用程式、 電視節目和書籍, 以及您的 “照片串流” 不含在您免費空 間之內。 第 2 章 使用入門 19【注意】 部分國家或地區可能無法使用 iCloud,且 iCloud 功能可能因國家或地區而異。 如 需 iCloud 的相關資訊, 請前往 www.apple.com/tw/icloud 網站。 登入或建立 iCloud 帳號 : 前往 “設定” > iCloud。 若您訂閱了 MobileMe, 在 2012 年 6 月 30 日之前, 您都可以在 Mac 或 PC 上透過 www.me.com/move 將內容移轉至 iCloud。 啟用或停用 iCloud 服務 前往 “設定” > iCloud。 啟用 iCloud 備份 前往 “設定” > iCloud > “儲存與備份”。 尋找您的 iPad 參訪 www.icloud.com, 以 Apple ID 登入, 然後選擇 “尋找我的 iPad”。 【重要事項】必須在您的 iPad 上從“設定”> iCloud 中啟用“尋找我 的 iPad”,才能使用此功能來找出您的 iPad。 購買更多 iCloud 儲存空間 前往 “設定” > iCloud > “儲存與備份”, 然後點一下 “購買更 多儲存空間”。 如需購買 iCloud 儲存空間的相關資訊, 請前往 help. apple.com/icloud。 檢視或下載先前 iTunes Store 的購 買項目 前往 iTunes Store, 然後點一下 “已購買” 。 檢視或下載先前 App Store 的購買 項目 前往 App Store, 然後點一下 “已購買” 。 檢視或下載先前的 iBookstore 購買 項目 前往 iBooks, 點一下 Store, 然後點一下 “已購買” 。 啟用或關閉 “照片串流” 前往 “設定” > iCloud > “照片串流”。 啟用音樂、應用程式或書籍的“自 動下載” 前往 “設定” > Store。 如需更多 iCloud 的相關資訊, 請前往 www.apple.com/tw/icloud 網站。 如需支援資訊, 請前往 www.apple.com/tw/support/icloud。 與 iTunes 同步 與 iTunes 同步會將資訊從電腦拷貝到 iPad, 反之亦然。 您可使用 Dock Connector to USB Cable 將 iPad 連接到電腦進行同步, 或者使用 Wi-Fi 來設定 iTunes 進行無線同步。 您 可以設定 iTunes 同步音樂、 照片、 視訊、 podcast、 應用程式和更多項目。 如需同步 iPad 與電腦的詳細資訊,請打開 iTunes,然後從“輔助說明”選單中選擇“iTunes 輔助說明”。 設定 iTunes 無線同步 : 使用 Dock Connector to USB Cable 來將 iPad 連接到電腦。 在 iTunes 中, 於裝置的 “摘要” 面板中啟用 “透過 Wi-Fi 連線同步”。 當啟用 Wi-Fi 同步時, iPad 會每天自動同步。 iPad 必須已連接電源, iPad 和您的電腦皆須 連接相同的無線網路,且電腦上的 iTunes 必須打開。 如需更多資訊,請參閱 「iTunes Wi-Fi 同步」。 與 iTunes 同步的祕訣  如果您使用 iCloud 來儲存聯絡資訊、 行事曆、 書籤和備忘錄, 請不要又使用 iTunes 來 將其同步到 iPad。  在 iPad 上從 iTunes Store 或 App Store 購買的項目會同步回到您的 iTunes 資料庫。 您 也可以從電腦上的 iTunes Store 購買或下載內容和應用程式, 然後將它們同步至 iPad。  在裝置的 “摘要” 面板中,您可以設定 iTunes 在 iPad 與電腦連接時,才自動同步。 若 要暫時覆蓋此設定,請按住 Command 和 Option 鍵(Mac)或 Shift 和 Control 鍵(PC), 直到您在側邊欄中看到 iPad 出現。 20 第 2 章 使用入門 在裝置的 “摘要” 面板中,如果您想在 iTunes 進行備份時加密電腦上所儲存的資訊,請 選取“加密備份”。加密的備份會透過鎖頭圖像 顯示,並您需要密碼才能回復備份。如 果您並未選取此選項,備份中不會包含密碼(如用於郵件帳號的密碼),且如果您使用備 份來回復 iPad, 則必須重新輸入。  在裝置的 “簡介” 面板中, 當您同步郵件帳號時, 只有設定會被從您的電腦傳送到 iPad。 您在 iPad 上對郵件帳號進行的更動並不會影響到電腦中的帳號。  在裝置的 “簡介” 面板中,按一下 “進階” 來選取選項,這些選項讓您在下次同步時, 可以用電腦上的資訊來取代 iPad 上的資訊。  若您已經聆聽了一部分的 podcast 或有聲書, 在與 iTunes 同步內容時, 您的暫停點也會 一併納入。 若您已經開始在 iPad 上聆聽內容, 您可以使用電腦上的 iTunes 來找到之前 暫停的位置, 反之亦然。  在裝置的 “照片” 面板中, 您可以從電腦上的檔案夾來同步照片和視訊。 將 iPad 連接到電腦上 使用 Dock Connector to USB Cable 來將 iPad 連接到您的電腦。 將 iPad 連接到您的電腦讓您 可與 iTunes 同步資訊、 音樂和其他內容。 您也可透過無線方式來與 iTunes 同步資訊。 請 參閱 第 20 頁 「與 iTunes 同步」。 除了 iPad 正在與電腦進行同步以外, 您可以隨時中斷連接。 如果您在同步進行中時中斷 連接, 某些資料可能會等到下次您將 iPad 連接到電腦時, 才會進行同步。 取消同步 : 請拖移 iPad 上的滑桿。 在 iPad 上檢視使用手冊 您可以在 iPad 上使用 Safari 檢視 「 iPad 使用手冊」, 或者安裝免費的 iBooks 應用程式, 並從 iBookstore 下載使用手冊。 在 Safari 中檢視使用手冊: 在 Safari 中,點一下 ,然後點一下 「iPad 使用手冊」 書籤。 或前往 help.apple.com/ipad。 將使用手冊的圖像加入 “主畫面” 螢幕: 點一下 ,然後點一下 “加入主畫面螢幕”。 在 Safari 中檢視使用手冊 : 您尚未安裝 iBooks, 請打開 App Store, 搜尋並安裝 iBooks。 打開 iBooks 並且點一下 “書店”。 搜尋 “iPad 使用手冊”, 然後選取並下載使用手冊。 電池 iPad 內含充電式電池。 如需更多 iPad 電池的相關資訊, 請前往 www.apple.com/tw/ batteries/ipad.html 網站。 第 2 章 使用入門 21替電池充電 【警告】 如需替 iPad 充電的重要安全資訊, 請參閱 「iPad 重要產品資訊指南」, 位於 support.apple.com/zh_TW/manuals/ipad。 在狀態列右上角的電池圖像會顯示電池電量或充電狀態。 未充電 未充電 正在充電 正在充電 已充電 已充電 替電池充電 : iPad 充電的最佳方式是使用隨附的 Dock Connector to USB Cable 和 10W USB 電源轉換器來將 iPad 連接至電源插座。在您使用隨附的接線將 iPad 連接到 Mac 上的 USB 2.0 埠時, iPad 會在同步中同時慢慢充電。 【重要事項】 當 iPad 連接到 PC、已關機、進入睡眠模式或待機模式的電腦、USB 集線器, 或鍵盤上的 USB 埠時, 則 iPad 電池可能會耗盡, 而不會進行充電。 如果您的 Mac 或 PC 並未提供足夠的電源來替 iPad 充電,狀態列中便會出現“沒有在充電” 的訊息。 若要替 iPad 充電, 請將其從電腦中斷連接並使用隨附的 Dock Connector to USB Cable 和 10W USB 電源轉換器來將其連接至電源插座。 【重要事項】 若 iPad 電力不足, 則會顯示下列其中一個影像, 表示需要先充電至少二十 分鐘, 然後才可以使用 iPad。 若 iPad 電力嚴重不足, 螢幕可能會空白至少兩分鐘, 然 後才會顯示電力不足的影像。 或或 最大化電池電力 iPad 使用鋰離子電池。 若要瞭解如何讓 iPad 具備最長的電池壽命, 請前往 www.apple. com/tw/batteries、 www.apple.com/hk/batteries 網站。 22 第 2 章 使用入門更換電池 使用者無法自行更換 iPad 的電池, 電池僅能由 Apple 授權的服務供應商 (AASP) 進行更 換。 充電式電池的可循環充電次數有其限制, 若已達極限則必須加以更換。 依照當地法 規, AASP 也會回收 iPad 的電池。 若需要更多資訊, 請前往 www.apple.com/tw/batteries/ replacements.html。 使用並清理 iPad 您必須找到一個舒適的姿勢來使用 iPad, 並且適時的休息。 在使用 iPad 時, 請讓大腿、 桌面、 保護套或 dock 配件支撐 iPad。 請小心使用 iPad 來保持它的外觀。 如果擔心螢幕刮傷或磨傷, 您可以使用保護殼或保護 套 (須另外選購)。 若要清潔 iPad, 請拔掉所有接線, 並關閉 iPad (按住 “睡眠 / 喚醒” 按鈕直到紅色滑 桿出現, 然後滑動螢幕上的滑桿)。 使用微濕、 柔軟且不會產生棉絮的布料輕輕擦拭。 並避免讓機身的開口處受潮。 請勿使用玻璃清潔劑、 家用清潔劑、 噴霧劑、 溶劑、 酒 精、 氨水或其他研磨劑來清潔 iPad。 iPad 的螢幕具有疏油塗料, 您只需要使用柔軟且不 會產生棉絮的布料輕輕擦拭螢幕, 便可清除您的手所留下的油漬。 這些塗料的作用是為 了排斥油墨, 但時間久了效果會漸漸減弱, 另外若螢幕與磨砂材質產生摩擦之後也會影 響其效果, 也可能會刮傷螢幕。 如需更多關於使用 iPad 的資訊, 請參閱 「iPad 重要產品資訊指南」, 位於 support.apple.com/zh_TW/manuals/ipad。 第 2 章 使用入門 23基本概述 3 請閱讀本章節來瞭解如何在 iPad 上使用應用程式。 您也將了解如何搜尋、 列印、 共享檔 案, 以及執行更多操作。 使用應用程式 高解析度 “多重觸控式” 螢幕和簡單的手指手勢讓您更輕鬆使用 iPad 應用程式。 點一下 應用程式圖像來打開程式。 您可以在應用程式之間切換、 重新排列應用程式, 並將它們 收集到檔案夾中來加以整理。 打開和切換應用程式 打開應用程式 : 點一下 “主畫面” 螢幕中的圖像。 返回 “主畫面” 螢幕 : 按下 “主畫面” 按鈕 , 或者在螢幕上用四指或五指捏取。 多工處理的功能還可允許某些應用程式在幕後執行, 讓您可快速切換正在使用的應用程 式。 檢視最近使用過的應用程式 : 按兩下 “主畫面” 按鈕 。 最近使用的應用程式會顯示在螢幕下方的多工處理列中。 向左滑動查看更多應用程式。 強制應用程式關閉 : 觸碰並按住應用程式圖像, 直到圖像開始擺動, 然後點一下 。 當您下次開啟此應用程式時, 它會再新增到最近使用的項目列表中。 鎖定螢幕方向或使用音樂控制項目 : 請按兩下 “主畫面” 按鈕 , 然後由左至右沿著 螢幕底部滑動。 24畫面上會顯示螢幕方向鎖定、 亮度滑桿, 以及音樂控制項目。 亮度亮度 螢幕方向鎖定 螢幕方向鎖定 音樂控制項目 音樂控制項目 從 “主畫面” 螢幕中刪除應用程式 : 觸碰並按住應用程式圖像, 直到圖像開始擺動並 顯示 。 點一下 來刪除應用程式, 然後按下 “主畫面” 按鈕 。 【重要事項】 從 iPad 刪除某應用程式也會同時刪除該應用程式所建立的文件和資料。 捲視 向上或向下捲視。 您也可以在應用程式中 (例如 Safari、 “照片” 和 “地圖”) 進行 左右捲視。 拖移手指來進行捲視並不會選擇或啟用任何螢幕上的項目。 用手指滑動來快速捲視。 您可以等待捲動停止, 或是觸碰螢幕上的任何位置來立即停止捲動。 觸碰螢幕來停止捲 動並不會選擇或啟用任何螢幕上的項目。 若要快速捲動到列表、 網頁或郵件的最上方, 請直接點一下螢幕上方的狀態列。 自定 “主畫面” 螢幕 您可以自定 “主畫面” 螢幕上應用程式圖像的版面, 包含螢幕下方的 Dock 圖像。 第 3 章 基本概述 25重新安排圖像 您可以製作其他的 “主畫面” 螢幕, 並在多個 “主畫面” 螢幕上安排您的應用程式。 重新安排圖像 : 1 觸碰並按住 “主畫面” 螢幕上的任何應用程式, 直到其開始擺動。 2 拖移應用程式來安排其位置。 3 按下 “主畫面” 按鈕 來儲存您的排列方式。 移動圖像到另一個螢幕 在整理圖像時, 將圖像拖移至螢幕右側邊緣直到新的螢幕顯示為止。 您可以返回前一個螢幕, 並拖移更多的圖像至新的畫面。 製作其他 “主畫面” 螢幕 排列圖像時, 滑動至 “主畫面” 螢幕最右邊, 然後拖移圖像到螢 幕右側邊緣。 您最多可以製作 11 個 “主畫面” 螢幕。 Dock 上方 的圓點數顯示您所擁有的螢幕數量, 並指出您目前正在檢視的螢幕畫 面。 前往另一個 “主畫面” 螢幕 向左或向右滑動, 或是點一下一排圓點的左側或右側。 前往第一個 “主畫面” 螢幕 按下 “主畫面” 按鈕 。 將 “主畫面” 螢幕重置為原始的 佈局 在 “設定” 中, 前往 “一般” > “重置”, 並點一下 “重置主 畫面螢幕佈局”。 重置 “主畫面” 螢幕會移除任何你已製作的檔案 夾, 並對 “主畫面” 螢幕套用預設的桌面背景。 當您使用 Dock Connector to USB Cable 來將 iPad 連接到電腦時, 您可以在 iTunes 中 重新排列 “主畫面”螢幕上的圖像和螢幕順序。 請選擇 iTunes 側邊欄裡的 iPad,然後按一 下 “應用程式” 標籤頁。 整理檔案夾 您可以使用檔案夾來整理“主畫面”螢幕上的圖像。 一個檔案夾最多可存放 20 個圖像。 根 據之前用來製作檔案夾的圖像,在您製作檔案夾時,iPad 會自動為其命名,但您可更改名稱。 在 “主畫面” 螢幕上拖移檔案夾或將檔案夾移至新的 “主畫面” 螢幕或 Dock 上,藉此重 新安排檔案夾。 製作檔案夾: 觸碰並按住圖像直到 “主畫面” 螢幕圖像開始擺動,然後拖移圖像到另一個 圖像上。 iPad 會製作新的檔案夾, 其中包含兩個圖像並顯示檔案夾名稱。 您可以點一下名稱欄位, 藉此輸入不同的名稱。 26 第 3 章 基本概述新增圖像到檔案夾 當圖像開始擺動時, 拖移圖像到檔案夾上。 從檔案夾移除圖像 排列圖像時, 點一下檔案夾來開啟, 然後將圖像從檔案夾內拖出。 開啟檔案夾 點一下檔案夾。 接著您可以點一下某個應用程式圖像來開啟該應用程 式。 關閉檔案夾 點一下檔案夾外側, 或按下 “主畫面” 按鈕。 刪除檔案夾 從檔案夾中移除所有的圖像。 當檔案夾清空時會自動刪除。 重新命名檔案夾 排列圖像時, 點一下檔案夾來開啟, 然後在上方點一下名稱並使用 鍵盤輸入新名稱。 當結束整理 “主畫面” 螢幕時, 可按下 “主畫面” 按鈕 來儲存您的更動。 許多應用程式 (例如 Mail 和 App Store) 會在其 “主畫面” 螢幕圖像上顯示提示標記,帶 有數字的標記代表接收的項目數,而帶有驚嘆號的標記 則代表可能發生問題。 當檔案夾 包含應用程式時,則標示會出現在檔案夾上。帶有數字的標記顯示您尚未處理的項目總數, 例如接收的郵件及可下載的更新應用程式。 提示標記指出應用程式可能有問題。 更改桌面背景 您可以選擇想要用作桌面背景的影像或照片,設為“鎖定”螢幕或“主畫面”螢幕的桌面背景。 選擇 iPad 隨附的影像, 或來自 iPad 上 “相機膠卷” 或其他相簿的照片。 設定桌面背景 : 1 在“設定”中,前往“亮度與桌面背景”,點一下“鎖定”螢幕和“主畫面”螢幕,然後點一下“桌 面背景” 或 “儲存的照片”。 2 點一下選擇影像或照片。 當您選擇照片時, 可拖移或捏取照片來移動位置或放大或縮小, 直到照片顯示您想要的外觀。 3 點一下 “設定鎖定時螢幕”、 “設定主畫面螢幕” 或 “同時設定”。 輸入 當您需要輸入時,螢幕鍵盤可隨時自動出現。 使用鍵盤來輸入文字,例如聯絡資訊、郵件 和網址。 鍵盤可修正拼字錯誤、 預測正在輸入的單字、 且可記住您使用過的單字。 您也可以使用 Apple Wireless Keyboard 無線鍵盤來輸入。 當您使用外接的鍵盤時, 則螢 幕鍵盤不會出現。 請參閱 第 31 頁 「使用 Apple Wireless Keyboard」。 輸入文字 根據您所使用的應用程式, 在輸入時, 智慧型鍵盤會自動建議拼字修正來協助您避免拼字 錯誤。 輸入文字: 點一下文字欄位 (如備忘錄或新聯絡資訊中的文字欄位) 來顯示鍵盤,然後點 一下鍵盤中的按鍵。 第 3 章 基本概述 27若您觸碰到錯誤的按鍵, 則您可以將手指滑到正確的按鍵上。 在手指離開按鍵後, 字母才 會輸入。 刪除上一個字元 點一下 。 快速輸入句號或空格 請點兩下空格鍵若要關閉此功能,請前往 “設定” > “一般” > “鍵 盤”。 輸入大寫字母 輸入字母前, 請先點一下 Shift 鍵 。 或者觸碰並按住 Shift 鍵, 然 後移動滑桿來選擇字母。 啟用大寫鎖定功能 點兩下 Shift 鍵 。 Shift 鍵會變成藍色, 且所有輸入的字母都會變成 大寫。 點一下 Shift 鍵來關閉大寫鎖定。 若要關閉此功能, 請前往 “設定” > “一般” > “鍵盤”。 輸入數字、 標點符號或其他符號 點一下 “數字” 鍵 。 點一下 “符號” 鍵 來檢視其他的標 點符號和符號。 輸入重音字母或其他替換字元 觸碰並按住相關的按鍵, 然後滑動來選擇變體。 使用自動修正來輸入 “'ll” 輸入 “lll”。 例如, 輸入 “youlll” 會得到 “you'll”。 設定輸入的選項 前往 “設定” > “一般” > “鍵盤”。 隱藏螢幕鍵盤 點一下 “鍵盤” 鍵 。 聽寫 在支援聽寫的 iPad 上, 您可以聽寫文字, 而非在螢幕鍵盤上輸入。 例如, 您可以在 Mail 中聽寫郵件,或在“備忘錄”中聽寫備忘錄。 若要使用“聽寫”,iPad 必須連接 Internet。 啟用 “聽寫” : 前往 “設定” > “一般” > “鍵盤” > “聽寫”。 點一下來開始聽寫。 點一下來開始聽寫。 聽寫文字 : 從螢幕鍵盤點一下 , 然後開始聽寫。 完成時, 請再點一下 。 28 第 3 章 基本概述加入郵件 : 再點一下 並繼續聽寫。 輸入標點符號 : 說出標點符號。 【注意】部分國家或地區可能無法使用聽寫,且功能可能因國家或地區而異。您可能需要支 付行動數據的費用。 編輯文字 Multi-Touch 螢幕讓您更輕鬆地更改已輸入的文字。 當您需使用螢幕放大鏡時, 它可協助 您準確地放置插入點。抓取點可讓您選擇更多或更少的文字。您也可以在應用程式裡剪下、 拷貝和貼上文字, 或在不同應用程式中執行。 放置插入點 : 觸碰並按住以顯示放大鏡, 然後拖移它以放置插入點。 選擇文字: 點一下插入點來顯示選擇按鈕。點一下“選取”來選擇相鄰的單字,或點一下“全 選”來選擇所有文字。您也可以點兩下來將其選取。拖移抓取點來選擇更多或更少的文字。 在唯讀文件中 (例如網頁, 或您接收的郵件), 觸碰並按住來選擇單字。 抓取點 抓取點 剪下或拷貝文字 選擇文字, 然後點一下 “剪下” 或 “拷貝”。 貼上文字 點一下插入點, 然後點一下 “貼上” 以插入您最後剪下或拷貝的文 字。 或者選擇文字, 然後點一下 “貼上” 來取代文字。 還原最後的編輯 搖晃 iPad。 設定文字粗體、 斜體或加上底線 在適用時, 點一下 , 然後點一下 B/I/U。 尋找單字的定義 點一下單字來將其選取, 然後點一下 “定義”。 尋找替換的單字 點一下單字, 點一下 “選取”, 然後點一下 “建議”, 並點一下 建議的單字。 文字齊行 適用時, 選取您想要齊行的文字, 然後點一下向左箭頭或向右箭頭。 鍵盤佈局 在 iPad 上, 您可以使用位於螢幕底部的分開鍵盤來輸入, 或者使用位於螢幕中間的浮動鍵 盤。 第 3 章 基本概述 29使用分開鍵盤 觸碰並按住 “鍵盤” 按鍵 , 將手指滑動至 “分開鍵盤”, 然後 放開。 移動鍵盤 觸碰並按住 ,將手指滑動至 “浮動鍵盤” 來將鍵盤移至螢幕中間, 然後放開。 回到完整鍵盤 觸碰並按住 “鍵盤” 按鍵 ,將手指滑動至 “固定並合併鍵盤”, 然後放開。 讓完整鍵盤回到螢幕底部 觸碰並按住 “鍵盤” 按鍵 , 將手指滑動至 “固定鍵盤”, 然後 放開。 啟用或關閉 “分開鍵盤” 前往 “設定” > “一般” > “鍵盤” > “分開鍵盤”, 然後點一 下 “開啟” 或 “關閉”。 您可使用 “設定” 來針對螢幕軟體鍵盤和硬體鍵盤設定鍵盤佈局。 可使用的佈局為根據鍵 盤語言而定。 請參閱 第 127 頁附錄 B 「國際鍵盤」。 您可針對每個語言, 為螢幕軟體鍵盤和任一外接硬體鍵盤兩者來選擇不同的鍵盤佈局。 軟 體鍵盤佈局可決定 iPad 螢幕上的鍵盤佈局。 硬體鍵盤佈局可決定 iPad 所連接的 Apple Wireless Keyboard 佈局。 請參閱 第 31 頁 「使用 Apple Wireless Keyboard」。 選取硬體或軟體鍵盤佈局 前往 “設定” > “一般” > “國際設定” > “鍵盤”, 點一下語 言, 然後選擇軟體或硬體鍵盤佈局。 新增或移除國際鍵盤 前往 “設定” > “一般” > “國際設定” > “鍵盤”。 使用國際鍵盤 觸碰並按住螢幕鍵盤上的 “地球” 按鍵 “ 來顯示啟用的語言列 表, 然後滑動您的手指來選擇語言。 請參閱 第 127 頁附錄 B 「國際 鍵盤」。 自動修正與拼字檢查 針對許多語言, iPad 會自動修正拼字錯誤, 或在您輸入時提供建議。 當 iPad 建議某個單 字時, 您可以接受建議而不中斷您的輸入。 接受建議 : 請輸入空格、 標點符號或換行字元。 拒絕建議 : 請完成輸入您要的單字, 然後點一下建議旁邊的 “x”。 若您每次都拒絕相同單字的建議, iPad 便可能會接受該單字。 iPad 也會對你已輸入且可能有拼字錯誤的單字加劃底線。 30 第 3 章 基本概述取代拼錯的單字 點一下單字, 然後點一下其中一個替代拼法。 如果您想要的單字沒有出現, 請重新輸入單字。 啟用或停用自動修正或拼字檢查 前往 “設定” > “一般” > “鍵盤”。 將字詞加入鍵盤字典 前往 “設定” > “一般” > “鍵盤”。 點一下 “新增字詞⋯”。 在 “字詞” 欄位中輸入單字, 但將 “輸入碼” 欄位留空。 這會 將單字加入到鍵盤字典, 當您輸入此單字時, 將不會被視為拼錯的 單字。 使用者字典 “使用者字典”可讓您只需輸入幾個字元,而不必輸入較長的單字或字詞。每當您輸入字詞 的輸入碼時,便會出現展開的文字。 例如,輸入碼 “omw” 會展開成 “On my way!”。 製作輸入碼 : 前往 “設定” > “一般” > “鍵盤”, 然後點一下 “新增字詞”。 若要將單字或字詞加入到鍵盤字典中,以便 iPad 不會嘗試將其修正或取代,請將“輸入碼” 欄位留空。 編輯輸入碼 : 前往 “設定” > “一般” > “鍵盤”, 然後點一下輸入碼。 使用 Apple Wireless Keyboard 除了螢幕鍵盤外, 您也可以使用 Apple Wireless Keyboard 來搭配 iPad。 Apple Wireless Keyboard 是使用 Bluetooth 連線, 因此您必須將鍵盤與 iPad 配對。 請 參閱 第 37 頁 「將 Bluetooth 裝置配對」。 當鍵盤和 iPad 配對時,它可在範圍內(最遠可到 10 公尺或 33 英尺)隨時與鍵盤進行連接。 當您在文字欄位點一下且未顯示螢幕鍵盤時, 即可確認鍵盤已連接。 使用硬體鍵盤時切換語言 : 按住 Command 按鍵, 然後點一下空格鍵來顯示可使用的語 言列表。 再點一下空格鍵來選擇不同語言。 將無線鍵盤與 iPad 中斷連接 : 在鍵盤上按住電源按鈕直到綠燈熄滅。 當超出連線範圍時, iPad 會和鍵盤中斷連接。 將無線鍵盤與 iPad 取消配對: 在 “設定” 中,前往 “一般” > Bluetooth,點一下鍵盤名 稱旁的 , 然後點一下 “忘記此裝置設定”。 您可對無線鍵盤套用不同的佈局。 請參閱 第 127 頁附錄 B 「國際鍵盤」 和 第 29 頁 「鍵盤 佈局」。 第 3 章 基本概述 31搜尋 您可以在 iPad 上搜尋內建的應用程式,包含 Mail、“行事曆”、“音樂”、“視訊”、“備忘錄” 和 “聯絡資訊”。 搜尋個別的應用程式, 或使用 Spotlight 一次搜尋所有應用程式。 前往“搜尋”: 在“主畫面”螢幕的主頁面上,請用手指向右滑動或按下“主畫面”按鈕 。 在 “搜尋” 頁面上,您可以按下 “主畫面” 按鈕 來返回主要的 “主畫面” 螢幕。 搜尋 iPad: 在“搜尋”頁面上,請在“搜尋”欄位中輸入文字。 搜尋結果會自動隨著您的 輸入顯示。 點一下 “搜尋” 來退出鍵盤並查看更多結果。 點一下結果中的項目來打開它。 搜尋結果左側的圖像可顯示不同應用程式的搜尋結果。 在列表最上方, iPad 會根據之前的搜尋顯示最熱門的搜尋。 在列表最下方, 搜尋結果也包 含搜尋網頁或搜尋 Wikipedia 的選項。 這裡顯示已搜尋的應用程式列表, 以及在每個應用程式裡搜尋過的資訊 : 應用程式 搜尋內容 聯絡資訊 名字、 姓氏和公司名稱 Mail 所有帳號的 “收件人”、 “寄件人” 和 “標題” 欄位 (不會搜 尋郵件文字) 行事曆 事件標題、 邀請對象、 位置和附註 音樂 音樂 (歌曲、 演出者和專輯的名稱) 以及 podcast、 視訊和有聲書 的標題 備忘錄 備忘錄文字 訊息 姓名和訊息文字 提醒事項 標題 “搜尋” 也可以搜尋 iPad 中內建和已安裝應用程式的名稱。 如果您有許多應用程式,則可 以使用 Spotlight 來尋找並將其開啟。 從“搜尋”開啟應用程式: 輸入應用程式的完整或部分名稱,然後點一下來開啟應用程式。 您可以選擇搜尋的應用程式,以及搜尋的順序。 在“設定”中,前往“一般”>“Spotlight 搜尋”。 32 第 3 章 基本概述列印 iPad 可讓您以無線方式在支援 AirPrint 功能的印表機上進行列印。 您可以從下列 iPad 內建 應用程式進行列印 :  Mail - 電子郵件和可檢視的附件  “照片” 和 “相機” - 照片  Safari - 網頁、 PDF 檔案和可檢視的附件  iBooks - PDF 檔案  “備忘錄” - 目前顯示備忘錄  “地圖” - 螢幕上顯示的地圖畫面 其他從 App Store 取得的應用程式也可能支援 AirPrint。 支援 AirPrint 功能的印表機並不需要印表機軟體 ; 它們只是需要連接到與 iPad 相同的 Wi-Fi 網路。 如果您不確定印表機是否支援 AirPrint, 請參閱其說明文件。 如需關於 AirPrint 的更多資訊, 請前往 support.apple.com/kb/HT4356?viewlocale=zh_TW。 列印文件 AirPrint 會使用您的 Wi-Fi 網路以無線方式來將列印工作傳送到印表機。 iPad 和印表機必須 位於相同的 Wi-Fi 網路上。 列印文件 : 1 點一下 或 (視您使用的應用程式而定), 然後點一下 “列印”。 2 點一下 “選取印表機” 來選取印表機。 3 設定印表機選項, 如份數和雙面輸出 (如果印表機支援此功能的話)。 有些應用程式也 可讓您設定要列印的頁面範圍。 4 請點一下 “列印”。 當文件正在列印時, 如果您按兩下 “主畫面” 按鈕 , “列印中心” 應用程式會顯示 為最近的應用程式。 圖像上的標記會顯示等待列印的文件數,包含目前正在列印的文件。 第 3 章 基本概述 33查看列印工作的狀態 請按兩下 “主畫面” 按鈕 , 點一下 “列印中心” 圖像, 然後 選擇一個列印工作。 取消列印工作 請按兩下 “主畫面” 按鈕 , 點一下 “列印中心” 圖像, 選擇 一個列印工作, 然後點一下 “取消列印”。 檔案共享 “檔案共享” 可讓您透過 Dock Connector to USB Cable 接線在 iPad 與電腦 (使用 iTunes)之間傳送檔案。您可以共享使用相容應用程式所製作的檔案,並儲存為支援的格式。 支援檔案共享的應用程式會出現在 iTunes 中的“檔案共享應用程式”列表中。“檔案”列表 會針對每一個應用程式顯示 iPad 中的文件。如需共享檔案的方法,請參閱應用程式的文件; 並非所有的應用程式都支援這項功能。 從 iPad 傳送檔案至您的電腦: 在 iTunes 中,前往您裝置的“應用程式”面板。在“檔案共享” 區段中,從列表中選擇應用程式。 在右方選擇您要傳送的檔案,然後按一下 “儲存至”。 從您的電腦上傳送檔案到 iPad: 在 iTunes 中,前往您裝置的“應用程式”面板。在“檔案共享” 區段中,選擇應用程式,然後按一下“加入”。檔案會立即傳送到您的裝置,以與所選應用 程式搭配使用。 刪除 iPad 裡的檔案: 在 iTunes 中,前往您裝置的“應用程式”面板。在“應用程式”面板中“檔 案共享” 區段中, 選取 “檔案” 列表中的檔案, 然後按下 Delete 鍵。 通知 “通知中心” 會在一個地方顯示您所有的提示, 包含以下相關提示 :  提醒事項  行事曆事件  新郵件  新訊息  朋友要求 (Game Center) 34 第 3 章 基本概述提示也會顯示在鎖定螢幕上,或者當您使用 iPad 時,短暫顯示在螢幕最上方。您可以查看“通 知中心” 中目前所有的提示。 顯示 “通知中心” 從螢幕最上方向下滑動。 在 “通知中心” 中回應提示 請點一下提示。 在鎖定螢幕上回應提示 由左至右滑動提示 : 從 “通知中心” 中移除提示 點一下 , 然後點一下 “清除”。 設定通知的選項 請前往 “設定” > “通知”。 第 3 章 基本概述 35Twitter 在 “設定” 中登入您的 Twitter 帳號 (或建立新帳號) 來從下列應用程式啟用帶有附件的 Tweet :  “相機” 或 “照片” - 附上您 “相機膠卷” 相簿的照片  Safari - 附上網頁  “地圖” - 附上位置  YouTube - 附上視訊 登入 (或建立) Twitter 帳號 : 1 前往 “設定” > Twitter。 2 輸入現有帳號的使用者名稱和密碼, 或者點一下 “新增帳號”。 若要新增其他帳號, 點一下 “新增帳號”。 Tweet 照片、 視訊或網頁 檢視項目, 點一下 , 然後點一下 Tweet。 如果 沒有顯示, 請 點一下螢幕。 若要包含您的位置, 請點一下 “新增位置”。 “定位服務” 必須 啟用。 前往 “設定” > “定位服務”。 在 “地圖” 中 Tweet 位置 點一下位置大頭針, 點一下 , 點一下 “共享位置”, 然後點一 下 Tweet。 “定位服務”必須啟用。 前往“設定”>“定位服務”。 將 Twitter 使用者名稱和照片加到 您的聯絡資訊中 前往 “設定” > Twitter, 然後點一下 “更新聯絡資訊”。 為 “照片” 或 Safari 啟用或關閉 Twitter 前往 “設定” > Twitter。 加入您的目前位置 加入您的目前位置 附件附件 剩餘的可用字元 剩餘的可用字元 當您在編寫 Tweet 時, Tweet 螢幕右下角的數字會顯示您可輸入的剩餘字元數。 附件會使 用 Tweet 140 個字元中的一部分。 您可以安裝和使用 Twitter 應用程式來發佈 Tweet、 檢視您的時間列、 搜尋趨勢主題等等。 在“設定”中,前往 Twitter,然後點一下“安裝”。 若要瞭解如何使用 Twitter 應用程式, 請打開應用程式,點一下“更多”按鈕(⋯),點一下“帳號與設定”,點一下“設定”,然 後點一下 “手冊”。 36 第 3 章 基本概述使用 AirPlay 您可以使用 AirPlay 和 Apple TV 透過無線方式將音樂、 照片和視訊連續播送到 HDTV 電視 或揚聲器。 您也可以使用 AirPlay 來將音訊連續播送至 Airport Express 或 AirPort Extreme 基地台。 其他具備 Air-Play 功能的接收器可從協力廠商取得。 請參閱線上 Apple Store 以 瞭解詳細資訊。 iPad 和具備 AirPlay 功能的裝置必須位於相同的 Wi-Fi 網路上。 將內容連續播送到具備 Air-Play 功能的裝置: 開始視訊、 幻燈片秀或音樂,然後點一下 並選擇 AirPlay 裝置。 連續播送開始後, 您可退出正在播放內容的應用程式。 快速取用 AirPlay 控制項目 當螢幕啟用時, 按兩下 “主畫面” 按鈕 並捲動至多工處理列的 最左側。 將播放切換回 iPad 點一下 並選擇 iPad。 您可以透過 Apple TV 將 iPad 螢幕 (iPad 2 或新款機型) 鏡像輸出到電視上。 iPad 螢幕 上的所有內容都會顯示在電視上。 在電視上鏡像輸出 iPad 螢幕: 點一下多工處理列左側的 , 選擇 Apple TV, 並點一下出 現的 “鏡像輸出” 按鈕。 當啟用 AirPlay 鏡像輸出時, iPad 螢幕最上方會出現一條藍色列。 您也可以使用接線來將 iPad 螢幕鏡像輸出到電視上。 請參閱 第 62 頁 「在電視上觀賞視訊」。 使用 Bluetooth 裝置 您可以使用 iPad 連接 “Apple 無線鍵盤” 及其他 Bluetooth 裝置, 像是 Bluetooth 耳機。 有關支援的 Bluetooth 描述檔資訊, 請參閱 support.apple.com/kb/ HT3647?viewlocale=zh_TW。 將 Bluetooth 裝置配對 在使用 Bluetooth 裝置 (如鍵盤或耳機) 前, 您必須先將其與 iPad 配對。 將 Bluetooth 裝置與 iPad 配對 : 1 請依照裝置隨附的指示來讓其處於可被偵測的狀態。 2 在 “設定” 中, 請選擇 “一般” > Bluetooth, 然後啟用 Bluetooth。 3 選擇裝置, 如果出現提示, 請輸入識別碼或 PIN 號碼。 請參閱裝置隨附的識別碼或 PIN 碼 相關指示。 【注意】 配對 “Apple 無線鍵盤” 之前,請按下電源按鈕將其開啟。 iPad 一次只可以和一 個 Apple Wireless Keyboard 配對。 若要和不同鍵盤配對,則必須先將目前使用的取消配對。 在將鍵盤與 iPad 配對之後 , 產品名稱和 Bluetooth 圖像 會顯示在螢幕上。 在將耳機與 iPad 配對之後, 產品名稱和 Bluetooth 音訊圖像 會連同音訊和視訊播放的 控制項目, 顯示在螢幕上。 點一下 來切換到不同的音訊輸出, 例如內建揚聲器。 若要再使用螢幕鍵盤,請關閉 Bluetooth(位於 “設定”>“一般”> Bluetooth 中),或在 Bluetooth 鍵盤上按下 “退出” 鍵。 Bluetooth 狀態 Bluetooth 圖像會出現在螢幕最上方的 iPad 狀態列 :  (白色) : 已開啟 Bluetooth 並配對裝置。 第 3 章 基本概述 37 (灰色):已開啟 Bluetooth 並配對裝置, 但裝置位於通訊範圍之外, 或者已經關閉。  沒有 Bluetooth 圖像 : 已關閉 Bluetooth 或是未與裝置配對。 讓 Bluetooth 裝置與 iPad 取消配對 若您將 iPad 與某個 Bluetooth 裝置配對, 之後想使用另一個同類型的裝置, 您必須先將先 前的裝置取消配對。 取消配對 Bluetooth 裝置: 前往 “設定” > “一般” > Bluetooth,然後啟用 Bluetooth。 選擇裝置, 然後點一下 “忘記此裝置設定”。 安全性功能 安全性功能可協助防止 iPad 中的資訊被其他使用者取用。 密碼和資料保護 基於安全考量, 您可以設定密碼, 每次您必須輸入才能啟用或喚醒 iPad。 設定密碼: 前往“設定”>“一般”>“密碼鎖定”>“啟用密碼”。輸入 4 個數字的密碼, 然後再次輸入密碼進行驗證。之後您就需要輸入密碼來解鎖 iPad 或是顯示密碼鎖定的設定。 設定密碼會啟用資料保護,其會使用您的密碼作為加密 iPad 上所儲存之郵件及附件的密鑰。 (資料保護也可在其他從 Apple Store 取得的應用程式中使用。)在“設定”中,“密碼鎖定” 螢幕底下的通知會顯示已啟用資料保護。 若要提高安全性,請關閉“簡易密碼”(4 個數字)並使用由數字、字母、標點符號和特殊 字元組合而成的安全密碼。 請參閱 第 121 頁 「自動鎖定」。 尋找我的 iPad “尋找我的 iPad” 可以協助您使用 iPhone、 iPod touch 或另一台 iPad 來找到遺失或放錯 位置的 iPad。 您也可以使用已登入 www.icloud.com 或 www.me.com 的 Mac 或 PC 網頁瀏覽器, 來使用 “尋找我的 iPad”。 “尋找我的 iPad” 包含 :  在地圖上找出位置 : 在全螢幕地圖上找出您 iPad 的約略位置。  顯示訊息或播放聲音 : 編寫在 iPad 上顯示的訊息, 或播放兩分鐘的聲音。  Remote Passcode Lock (遠端密碼鎖定):遠端鎖定您的 iPad,若您之前沒有設定密碼, 可製作 4 位數的密碼。  Remote Wipe(遠端移除):移除 iPad 上的所有資訊和媒體,並將 iPad 回復為出廠設定, 來保護您的隱私。 【重要事項】 在您可使用這些功能前, 必須在您 iPad 上的 iCloud 或 MobileMe 設定中啟 用 “iPad”。 “尋找我的 iPad” 僅能在一個帳號下啟用。 使用 iCloud 啟用 “尋找我的 iPad” 前往 “設定” > iCloud, 並啟用 “尋找我的 iPad”。 使用 MobileMe 啟用 “尋找我的 iPad” 前往 “設定” > “郵件、 聯絡資訊、 行事曆”, 點一下您的 MobileMe 帳號, 然後點一下 “尋找我的 iPad”。 “尋找我的 iPad” 會使用 Wi-Fi 來找出您的 iPad。 如果 Wi-Fi 關閉或者如果您的 iPad 未連 接 Wi-Fi 網路, “尋找我的 iPad” 便無法找到它。 請參閱 第 19 頁 「使用 iCloud」。 38 第 3 章 基本概述Safari 4 檢視網頁 檢視書籤或“閱讀列表”。 檢視書籤或“閱讀列表”。 打開新網頁。 打開新網頁。 輸入網址 ( 輸入網址 (URL URL)。)。 搜尋網路和目前的網頁。 搜尋網路和目前的網頁。 點兩下項目或手指 開合來縮放。 點兩下項目或手指 開合來縮放。 檢視網頁 : 點一下位址欄位 (位於標題列上), 輸入網址, 然後點一下 “前往”。 您可以用直向或橫向的方向來檢視網頁。 清除位址欄位中的文字 點一下 。 在網頁中捲動 向上、 向下或左右拖移。 在網頁上的框架裡捲視 使用兩指在框架內捲視。 打開新網頁 點一下 。 您一次最多可以打開 9 個網頁。 前往另一個網頁 點一下網頁最上方的標籤。 停止載入網頁 點一下位址列中的 。 重新載入網頁 點一下位址列中的 。 關閉網頁 點一下網頁標籤頁上的 。 39保護私密資訊, 並阻擋某些網站 追蹤您的行為。 前往 “設定” > Safari, 並啟用 “私密瀏覽”。 設定 Safari 的選項 前往 “設定” > Safari。 連結 依照網頁上的連結來執行 : 請點一下連結。 以新標籤頁打開連結 觸碰並按住連結, 然後點一下 “以新標籤頁開啟”。 查看連結的目標網址 請觸碰並按住連結。 偵測到的資料 (如電話號碼和電子郵件位址) 在網頁中可能也會顯示為連結。 請觸碰並按 住連結來查看可用的選項。 請參閱 第 43 頁 「使用連結和偵測的資料」。 閱讀列表 “閱讀列表” 可讓您收集網頁的連結, 以供稍後閱讀。 將目前網頁的連結加入您的閱讀列表 : 點一下 , 然後點一下 “加入閱讀列表”。 將連結加入您的閱讀列表 : 觸碰並按住連結, 然後選擇 “加入閱讀列表”。 檢視您的閱讀列表 點一下 , 然後點一下 “閱讀列表”。 使用 iCloud 以便在您的 iOS 裝置和 電腦上讓閱讀列表保持最新。 前往 “設定” > iCloud, 然後啟用 “書籤”。 請參閱 第 19 頁 「使 用 iCloud」。 閱讀器 閱讀器會顯示網頁文章, 排除廣告或雜亂的版面, 讓您可以專心地閱讀內容。 在含有文章 的網頁上, 您可以使用 “閱讀器” 來僅檢視文章內容。 在 “閱讀器” 中檢視文章: 點一下 “閱讀器” 按鈕 (如果其出現在位址欄位的話)。 調整字體大小 點一下 。 書籤、加入 “閱讀列表” 或 “主 畫面” 螢幕、 共享或列印文章 點一下 。 返回一般顯示方式 點一下 “閱讀器”。 輸入文字和填寫表單 輸入文字 : 點一下文字欄位來顯示鍵盤。 搬移至另一個文字欄位 點一下文字欄位, 或是點 “下一個” 或 “上一個”。 提交表單 點一下 “前往”、 “搜尋” 或頁面上的連結來提交表單 (如果有 的話)。 若要啟用 “自動填寫” 來協助填寫表單, 請前往 “設定” > Safari > “自動填寫”。 搜尋 右上角的搜尋欄位可讓您搜尋網頁、 目前頁面或 PDF。 搜尋網頁、 目前頁面或可搜尋的 PDF : 在搜尋欄位中輸入文字。  若要搜尋網頁 : 點一下出現的建議之一, 或點一下 “搜尋”。 40 第 4 章 Safari 若要尋找目前網頁或 PDF 上的搜尋文字:捲視至螢幕底部,然後點一下 “此網頁” 下方 的項目。 第一個搜尋結果會反白選取。 若要找到後續的搜尋項目, 請點一下 。 更改搜尋引擎 前往 “設定” > Safari > “搜尋引擎”。 書籤和瀏覽記錄 當您儲存書籤時,您可以編輯其標題。書籤通常是儲存在“書籤”的最上層中。請點一下“書 籤” 來選擇另一個檔案夾。 將網頁加入書籤 : 打開網頁, 點一下 , 然後點一下 “新增書籤”。 檢視先前的網頁(瀏覽記錄): 點一下 ,然後點一下“瀏覽記錄”。若要清除瀏覽記錄, 請點一下 “清除”。 打開已加入書籤的網頁 點一下 。 顯示書籤列 點一下位址欄位。 若要總是顯示書籤列,請前往“設定”> Safari(位 於 “一般” 下方)。 編輯書籤或書籤檔案夾 請點一下 , 然後選擇內有書籤的檔案夾, 或是選擇您要編輯的檔 案夾, 然後點一下 “編輯”。 使用 iCloud 以便在您的 iOS 裝置和 電腦上讓書籤保持最新。 前往 “設定” > iCloud, 然後啟用 “書籤”。 請參閱 第 19 頁 「使 用 iCloud」。 將書籤與您電腦上的網頁瀏覽器同 步 請參閱 第 20 頁 「與 iTunes 同步」。 列印網頁、 PDF 以及其他文件 列印網頁、 PDF 或 “快速查看” 文件 : 點一下 , 然後點一下 “列印”。 如需更多資訊, 請參閱 第 33 頁 「列印文件」。 Web Clip 您可以製作 Web Clip, 它會在 “主畫面” 螢幕上顯示為圖像。 當您打開 Web Clip 時, Safari 會自動縮放到您儲存 Web Clip 時所顯示的網頁區域上。 加入 Web Clip : 打開網頁, 並點一下 。 然後點一下 “加入主畫面螢幕”。 除非網頁有自定圖像, 該影像也會用在 “主畫面” 螢幕上作為 Web Clip 的圖像。 iCloud 和 iTunes 會備份 Web Clip, 但 iTunes 或 MobileMe 並不會同步 Web Clip。 iCloud 也不會將 Web Clip 推播到其他裝置上。 第 4 章 Safari 41Mail 5 檢查和閱讀電子郵件 在 Mail 中, “信箱” 螢幕可讓您快速取用所有的收件匣和其他信箱。 當您打開信箱時,Mail 會擷取並顯示最近的郵件。您可以在 Mail 設定中設定擷取的郵件數。 請參閱 第 45 頁 「郵件帳號和設定」。 滑動來顯示郵件 列表。 滑動來顯示郵件 列表。 取得新郵件。 取得新郵件。 顯示郵件列表 在直向模式中, 由左向右滑動會顯示目前信箱的郵件列表。 然後請 點一下 “信箱” 來移至信箱列表。 將郵件以討論串方式來分類 前往 “設定” > “郵件、 聯絡資訊、 行事曆”。 如果您依討論串來整理郵件, 相關的郵件在信箱中會以單一項目來顯 示。 請參閱 第 45 頁 「郵件帳號和設定」。 檢查新郵件 選擇一個信箱, 或隨時點一下 。 載入更多郵件 捲動到郵件列表的底部, 點一下 “載入更多的郵件⋯”。 放大郵件的部分區域 點兩下郵件的區域。 再點兩下來將其縮小。 或者兩指往內或往外撥 動來放大或縮小。 調整文字欄的大小以符合螢幕大小 點兩下文字。 查看郵件的所有收件人 點一下 “詳細資訊”。 點一下名稱或電子郵件位址來查看收件人的 聯絡資訊。 然後點一下電話號碼或電子郵件位址來聯絡該位人員。 42將某個郵件收件人加到您的聯絡資 訊列表裡 點一下郵件, 並且點一下 “詳細資訊” 來查看該收件人 (如有需 要)。 然後點一下名稱或郵件位址, 並且點一下 “新增聯絡資訊” 或 “加入現有的聯絡資訊”。 將郵件標示為未閱讀 點一下郵件,並且需要的話,點一下“詳細資訊”。 然後點一下“標 示”。 若要將多封郵件標示為未閱讀, 請參閱 第 44 頁 「管理郵件」。 打開會議邀請函 請點一下邀請函。 請參閱 第 68 頁 「回應邀請函」。 使用多個帳號 若您設定了多個電子郵件帳號,“信箱”螢幕的“帳號”部分能讓您取用那些帳號。您也可 以點一下 “所有收件匣” 來以單一列表查看所有收到的郵件。 如需新增帳號的相關資訊, 請參閱 第 45 頁 「郵件帳號和設定」。 編寫新郵件時, 請點一下 “寄件人” 欄位並選擇要從其寄送郵件的帳號。 傳送郵件 您可以傳送郵件給任何擁有電子郵件位址的成員。 編寫郵件 : 點一下 。 從 “聯絡資訊” 加入收件人 在 “收件人” 欄位裡輸入名稱或電子郵件位址, 或點一下 。 重新排列收件人 若要將收件人從一個欄位移至另一個欄位, 如從 “收件人” 到 “副 本”, 請將收件人的名稱拖至新位置。 設定文字粗體、 斜體或加上底線 點一下插入點來顯示選擇按鈕, 然後點一下 “選取”。 拖移選取點 來選擇您想要套用樣式的文字。 點一下 , 然後點一下 B/I/U。 點一 下 “粗體”、 “斜體” 或 “底線” 來套用樣式。 透過電子郵件傳送照片或視訊 在 “照片” 中, 選擇照片或視訊, 點一下 , 然後點一下 “透 過電子郵件傳送照片” 或 “透過電子郵件傳送視訊”。 您也可以拷 貝和貼上照片與視訊。 若要在傳送多張照片或多個視訊, 請在相簿中檢視縮覽圖時點一下 。 點選照片和視訊, 點一下 “共享”, 然後點一下 “透過電子 郵件傳送”。 儲存郵件草稿以供稍後完成編輯 點一下 “取消”, 然後點一下 “儲存”。 郵件會儲存在 “草稿” 信箱裡。 觸碰並按住 來快速取用它。 回覆郵件 點一下 , 然後點一下 “回覆”。 附加在原始郵件裡的檔案或影 像並不會傳送回去。 若要包含附件, 請轉寄郵件而非回覆。 引述一部分您正在回覆或轉寄的郵 件 觸碰並按住來選擇文字。 拖移抓取點來選擇您要納入回覆的文字, 然後點一下 。 若要更改引言文字的縮排層級, 請觸碰並按住來選擇文字, 然後點 一下 。 點一下 “引言層級”,然後點一下 “增加” 或 “減少”。 轉寄郵件 打開郵件並且點一下 , 然後點一下 “轉寄”。 共享聯絡資訊 在“聯絡資訊”中,選擇聯絡資訊,點一下“簡介”螢幕下方的“共 享聯絡資訊”。 使用連結和偵測的資料 iPad 會偵測網頁連結、 電話號碼、 電子郵件地址、 日期和您可以使用的其他類型資訊, 以 打開網頁、 製作預先填寫位址的電子郵件、 製作或新增聯絡人的資訊, 或者執行一些有用 的動作。 偵測到的資料會以藍色帶有底線的文字顯示。 第 5 章 Mail 43點一下資料來使用其預設的動作,或者觸碰並按住來查看其他動作。 例如,針對地址,您 可以在 “地圖” 中顯示其位置, 或者將其加入 “聯絡資訊”。 檢視附件 iPad 會顯示電子郵件內文中許多常用格式的影像附件 (JPEG、 GIF 和 TIFF)。 iPad 能播放 多種音訊附件 (例如 MP3、 AAC、 WAV 和 AIFF)。 您可以在收到的郵件裡下載和檢視所 附加的檔案 (例如 PDF、 網頁、 文字、 Pages、 Keynote、 Numbers、 Microsoft Word、 Excel 和 PowerPoint 文件)。 檢視附檔: 點一下附件會以“快速查看”將其打開。 在可檢視前,您可能需要等待檔案下 載完成。 打開附檔 觸碰並按住附件, 然後選擇一個應用程式將其打開。 如果您沒有應 用程式支援該檔案格式, 且其不是 “快速查看” 支援的格式, 您 只能看到檔案名稱而無法將其打開。 儲存附加的照片或視訊 觸碰並按住照片或視訊, 然後點一下 “儲存影像或視訊”。 項目會 儲存至 “照片” 應用程式的 “相機膠卷” 相簿中。 “快速查看” 支援下列文件類型 : .doc、 .docx Microsoft Word .htm、 .html 網頁 .key Keynote .numbers Numbers .pages Pages .pdf “預覽程式”、 Adobe Acrobat .ppt、 .pptx Microsoft PowerPoint .rtf RTF 格式 .txt 純文字 .vcf 聯絡資訊 .xls、 .xlsx Microsoft Excel 列印郵件和附件 您也可以列印電子郵件和可以 “快速查看” 檢視的附件。 列印電子郵件 : 點一下 , 然後點一下 “列印”。 列印內文影像 觸碰並按住影像, 然後點一下 “儲存影像”。 然後打開 “照片”, 並從 “相機膠卷” 相簿中列印影像。 列印附件 點一下附件以 “快速查看” 進行檢視,然後點一下 並點一下 “列 印”。 如需更多資訊, 請參閱 第 33 頁 「列印」。 管理郵件 您可以管理任何信箱、檔案夾或搜尋結果視窗中的郵件。您可以刪除或將郵件標示為已閱讀。 您也可以將郵件從一個信箱或檔案夾移至相同帳號或不同帳號的另一個信箱或檔案夾。 您 可以新增、 刪除或重新命名信箱和檔案夾。 44 第 5 章 Mail刪除郵件 : 打開郵件, 並點一下 。 您也可以向左或向右滑過郵件標題,然後點一下“刪除”,藉此將郵件直接從信箱的郵件列 表裡刪除。 某些郵件帳號支援封存郵件,而非刪除郵件。當您封存郵件時,它會從“收件匣”移至“所 有郵件”。 請在 “設定” > “郵件、 聯絡資訊、 行事曆” 中啟用或關閉封存功能。 恢復郵件 刪除的郵件會被移至 “垃圾桶” 信箱。 若要更改郵件被永久刪除前,停留在 “垃圾桶” 的時間,請前往 “設 定” > “郵件、 聯絡資訊、 行事曆”。 然後點一下 “進階”。 刪除或搬移多封郵件 檢視郵件列表時, 請點一下 “編輯”, 選取您要刪除的郵件, 然 後點一下 “搬移” 或 “刪除”。 將郵件搬移至另一個信箱或檔案夾 檢視郵件時, 請點一下 , 然後選擇一個信箱或檔案夾。 加入信箱 前往信箱列表, 點一下 “編輯”, 然後點一下 “新增信箱”。 刪除或重新命名信箱 前往信箱列表, 點一下 “編輯”, 然後點一下信箱。 為信箱輸入 新的名稱或位置。 點一下 “刪除信箱” 來將其和所有內容刪除。 將多封郵件加上旗標或標示為已閱 讀 檢視郵件列表時, 請點一下 “編輯”, 選取您要的郵件, 然後點 一下 “標示”。 選擇 “以旗標標示” 或 “標示為已閱讀”。 搜尋郵件 您可以搜尋電子郵件的“收件人”、“寄件人”、“標題”和內文文字。Mail 會搜尋目前信箱 中已下載的郵件。 若為 iCloud、 Exchange 和某些 IMAP 郵件帳號, 您也可以在伺服器上 搜尋郵件。 搜尋電子郵件: 打開信箱,捲動至上方,然後在“搜尋”欄位中輸入文字。點一下“寄件人”、 “收件人”、“標題”或“全部”來選擇您要搜尋的欄位。如果您的郵件帳號支援,也會搜尋 伺服器上的郵件。 Mail 郵件也可包含在從 “主畫面” 螢幕進行的搜尋中。 請參閱 第 32 頁 「搜尋」。 郵件帳號和設定 帳號 若要處理 Mail 和您的郵件帳號設定,請前往 “設定” > “郵件、聯絡資訊、行事曆”。 您可以設定 : iCloud  Microsoft Exchange  Gmail  Yahoo!  AOL  Microsoft Hotmail  MobileMe   其他的 POP 和 IMAP 電子郵件系統 某些設定會根據您所設定的帳號類型而有所不同。 您的服務供應商或系統管理者會提供輸 入時的必要資訊。 更改帳號的設定: 前往“設定”>“郵件、聯絡資訊、行事曆”,選擇一個帳號,然後更改 想要的設定。 第 5 章 Mail 45停止使用帳號 前往 “設定” > “郵件、 聯絡資訊、 行事曆”, 並選擇一個帳號, 然後關閉帳號服務 (例如 Mail、 “行事曆” 或 “備忘錄”)。 如果帳號服務是關閉的, iPad 不會顯示或同步該帳號服務的資訊, 除非您將它再次啟用。 例如, 若要在放假時停止接收工作電子郵件, 這是不錯的方式。 在 iPad 上儲存草稿、 已傳送的郵 件和刪除的郵件 若為 IMAP 帳號, 您可以更改儲存這些郵件的位置。 前往 “設 定” > “郵件、 聯絡資訊、 行事曆”, 選擇 IMAP 帳號, 然後點 一下 “進階”。 選擇 “草稿信箱”、 “已傳送的信箱”、 “已刪 除的信箱” 的位置。 設定郵件從 Mail 永久移除前的等 待時間 前往 “設定” > “郵件、 聯絡資訊、 行事曆”, 選擇帳號, 然 後點一下 “進階”。 點一下 “移除”, 然後選擇時間:“永不”、 “一天之後”、 “一星期之後” 或 “一個月之後”。 調整電子郵件伺服器設定 前往 “設定” > “郵件、 聯絡資訊、 行事曆”, 然後選擇帳號。 請詢問您的網路管理者或 Internet 網路服務供應商以取得正確的設定資 訊。 調整 SSL 和密碼設定 前往 “設定” > “郵件、 聯絡資訊、 行事曆”, 選擇帳號, 然 後點一下 “進階”。 請詢問您的網路管理者或 Internet 網路服務供應 商以取得正確的設定資訊。 啟用或關閉封存郵件 前往 “設定” > “郵件、 聯絡資訊、 行事曆”, 然後選擇帳號。 請參閱 第 44 頁 「管理郵件」。 刪除帳號 前往 “設定” > “郵件、 聯絡資訊、 行事曆”, 選擇一個帳號, 然後向下捲動並點一下 “刪除帳號”。 所有與此帳號同步的電子郵件、 聯絡資訊、 行事曆和書籤資訊都會 從 iPad 移除。 傳送已簽名或加密的郵件 前往 “設定” > “郵件、 聯絡資訊、 行事曆”, 選擇帳號, 然 後點一下 “進階”。 啟用 S/MIME, 然後選擇憑證以進行簽名或加密 外寄郵件。 若要安裝憑證, 請從系統管理者取得設定描述檔、 使用 Safari 從簽發 人的網站取得憑證, 或者以 Mail 附件接收它們。 指定 “推播” 設定 前往 “設定” > “郵件、聯絡資訊、行事曆” > “擷取新資料”。 當 iPad 連接 Internet 時, “推播” 會遞送新的資訊 (可能會有些延 遲)。 若要暫停傳送電子郵件和其他資訊, 或是要節省電池電力時, 您可以關閉 “推播” 的功能。 在 “推播” 關閉時, 請使用 “擷 取新資料” 設定來決定請求資料的頻率。 為求最佳的電池效能, 請 勿過於頻繁地進行擷取。 Mail 設定 若要更改套用到所有帳號的設定, 請前往 “設定” > “郵件、 聯絡資訊、 行事曆”。 更改寄出或收到郵件時所播放的音效 : 前往 “設定” > “聲音”。 46 第 5 章 Mail訊息 6 收發訊息 使用 “訊息” 應用程式和內建的 iMessage 服務, 您可以透過 Wi-Fi 或行動網路連線, 傳 送文字訊息給其他 iOS 5 使用者。 “訊息” 可以包含照片、 視訊和其他資訊, 讓您看到 其他人正在輸入, 並讓其他人收到您已閱讀其訊息的通知。 因為 iMessage 會顯示在您所 有 iOS 5 裝置上 (登入相同的帳號), 您可以在其中一個 iOS 裝置上開始對話, 然後在另 一個裝置上繼續。 iMessage 也會進行加密。 【注意】 可能須支付行動數據費用或額外費用。 傳送文字訊息 : 點一下 , 然後點一下 並選擇聯絡資訊, 輸入名稱來搜尋您的聯絡 人, 或手動輸入電話號碼或電子郵件位址。 編寫訊息, 然後點一下 “傳送”。 【注意】 如果訊息沒有傳送出去, 會出現提示標記 。 如果位址欄位中出現提示, 請 確定您已輸入另一位 iOS 5 使用者的名字、 電話號碼或電子郵件位址。 在對話中, 點一 下提示來嘗試再次傳送訊息。 對話會儲存在 “訊息” 列表中。 藍色圓點 表示未閱讀的郵件。 點一下對話來檢視或 繼續。 在 iMessage 對話中, 您外寄的訊息會以藍色標明。 點一下編輯按鈕來 編輯或轉寄對話。 點一下編輯按鈕來 編輯或轉寄對話。 點一下編寫按鈕來 開始新的對話。 點一下編寫按鈕來 開始新的對話。 點一下“附加媒 體”按鈕來包含 照片或視訊。 點一下“附加媒 體”按鈕來包含 照片或視訊。 47使用表情符號字元 前往 “設定” > “一般” > “鍵盤” > “國際鍵盤” > “新增 鍵盤”, 然後點一下 “表情符號” 來讓鍵盤啟用。 若要在輸入訊 息時, 輸入表情符號字元, 請點一下 來顯示 “表情符號” 鍵盤。 請參閱 第 127 頁 「切換鍵盤」。 隱藏鍵盤 點一下右下角的 。 繼續先前的對話 點一下 “訊息” 列表中的對話, 然後輸入訊息並點一下 “傳送”。 顯示對話中較早的訊息 點一下狀態列來捲動至最上方, 然後點一下 “載入之前的訊息”。 使用其他電子郵件位址來接收 iMessage 前往 “設定” > “訊息” > “接收方式” > “新增其他電子郵件”。 依照訊息中的連結來執行 請點一下連結。 例如, 連結可能會在 Safari 中打開網頁, 或讓您將 電話號碼加到聯絡資訊中。 轉寄對話 選擇對話, 然後點一下 。 選擇要包含的部分, 然後點一下 “轉 寄”。 將其他人加入到聯絡資訊列表, 或者共享聯絡資訊。 在 “訊息” 列表中點一下電話號碼或電子郵件位址, 然後輸入 。 通知其他人您已經閱讀他們的訊息 前往 “設定” > “訊息”, 並啟用 “傳送讀取回條”。 設定 “訊息” 的其他選項 前往 “設定” > “訊息”。 管理訊息的通知 請參閱 第 117 頁 「通知」。 設定傳入簡訊的提示聲 請參閱 第 120 頁 「聲音」。 將訊息傳送給群組 群組訊息能讓您傳送訊息給多位接收者。 將訊息傳送給群組 : 點一下 , 然後輸入多位收件人。 傳送照片、 視訊和更多項目 您可以傳送照片、 視訊、 位置、 聯絡資訊和語音備忘錄。 傳送照片或視訊 : 點一下 。 附件大小的限制由您的服務供應商決定。 iPad 可能會壓縮照片和視訊附件 (如有需要)。 傳送位置 在 “地圖” 中, 點一下位置的 , 點一下 “共享位置”, 然後 點一下 “訊息”。 傳送聯絡資訊 在 “聯絡資訊” 中, 選擇聯絡資訊, 點一下 “共享聯絡資訊”, 然後點一下 “傳送訊息”。 將照片或視訊附件儲存至 “相機 膠卷” 相簿 點一下照片或視訊, 點一下 , 然後點一下 “儲存影像”。 拷貝照片或視訊 觸碰並按住附件, 然後點一下 “拷貝”。 儲存接收的聯絡資訊 點一下聯絡資訊泡泡, 然後點一下 “新增聯絡資訊” 或 “加入現 有的聯絡資訊”。 48 第 6 章 訊息編輯對話 若您想保留一部分的對話,您可以刪除您不要的部分。 您也可以從 “訊息” 列表中刪除整 個對話。 編輯對話 : 點一下 “編輯”, 選擇要刪除的部分, 然後點一下 “刪除”。 清除所有文字和附件, 但不刪除 對話 點一下 “編輯”, 然後點一下 “全部清除”。 刪除對話 滑動對話, 然後點一下 “刪除”。 搜尋訊息 您可以在 “訊息” 列表中搜尋對話的內容。 搜尋對話 : 點一下搜尋欄位, 然後輸入您要尋找的文字。 您也可以從 “主畫面” 螢幕來搜尋對話內容。 請參閱 第 32 頁 「搜尋」。 第 6 章 訊息 49相機 7 關於相機 如果您有 iPad 2 或新款機型, 您可以拍攝靜態照片和視訊。 背面有一個相機, 而正面相 機則用於 FaceTime 和自拍。 檢視您拍攝的照片和視訊。 檢視您拍攝的照片和視訊。 開始和停 止錄影。 開始和停 止錄影。 切換相機 / 攝影機 切換相機 / 攝影機 如果有啟用 “定位服務”, 照片和視訊會附上位置資料標籤, 可供一些應用程式和照片 分享網站使用。 請參閱 第 117 頁 「定位服務」。 【注意】 當您打開 “相機” 時,若 “定位服務” 已停用,程式可能會要求您將其啟用。 您可以使用 “相機”, 但不啟用 “定位服務”。 拍攝照片和視訊 拍攝照片 : 確定 “相機 / 視訊” 切換開關設為 , 然後對準 iPad 並點一下 。 您也 可以按下 “調高音量” 按鈕來拍攝照片。 錄製視訊 : 確定 “相機 / 視訊” 切換開關設為 , 然後點一下 開始或停止錄製, 或按下 “調高音量” 按鈕。 當您拍攝照片或開始錄製視訊時,iPad 會發出快門聲音。 您可以使用“音量”按鈕或“側 邊切換控制” 開關來控制音量。 【注意】 在某些國家或地區, “側邊切換控制” 開關不會讓快門聲靜音。 矩形會短暫顯示相機在拍攝畫面中的對焦以及設定曝光區域。 當您拍攝人像時,iPad (第 三代) 會用臉部偵測來自動對焦, 並最多跨 10 個面孔的範圍進行曝光平衡。 偵測到的每 個面孔上都會顯示一個矩形。 50放大或縮小 在螢幕上以手指捏取或撥開 (背面相機, 僅在相機模式)。 啟用格線 點一下 “選項”。 設定曝光 在螢幕上點一下人像或物件。 鎖定曝光 觸碰並按住螢幕直到矩形緩慢跳動。 “自動曝光鎖定” 會顯示在螢 幕上, 曝光會維持鎖定, 直到您再次點一下螢幕。 拍攝螢幕快照 同時按下並放開 “睡眠 / 喚醒” 按鈕和 “主畫面” 按鈕 。 螢幕 快照會加入至您的 “相機膠卷” 相簿。 【注意】在沒有相機的 iPad 上,螢幕快照會被加入到“儲存的照片” 相簿中。 檢視、 共享和列印 您使用 “相機” 拍攝的照片和視訊會儲存在您的 “相機膠卷” 相簿中。 檢視您的“相機膠卷”相簿: 由左至右滑動,或點一下螢幕左下角的縮覽圖影像。 您也可 以在 “照片” 應用程式中檢視您的 “相機膠卷” 相簿。 若要拍攝更多照片或視訊, 請點一下 “完成”。 如果您已在“設定”> iCloud 中啟用“iCloud 照片串流”,新照片也會顯示在您的“照片串流” 相簿, 並連續播送至您所有其他 iOS 裝置和電腦。 請參閱 第 19 頁 「使用 iCloud」。 如需更多檢視與共享照片和視訊的相關資訊,請參閱 第 58 頁 「共享照片和視訊」 和 第 52 頁 「上傳照片和視訊至您的電腦」。 在檢視全螢幕照片或視訊時, 顯 示或隱藏控制項目 請點一下螢幕。 以電子郵件寄送或以簡訊傳送照片 或視訊 點一下 。 Tweet 照片 以全螢幕檢視照片, 點一下 , 然後點一下 Tweet。 若要發表 Tweet, 您必須登入您的 Twitter 帳號。 前往 “設定” > Twitter。 若要包含您的位置, 請點一下 “新增位置”。 列印照片 點一下 。 請參閱 第 33 頁 「列印文件」。 刪除照片或視訊 點一下 。 編輯照片 您可以旋轉、增強畫質、移除紅眼現象和裁切照片。增強畫質會改善照片的整體暗部或亮部、 顏色飽和度和其他畫質。 自動增強 自動增強 裁切裁切 旋轉旋轉 消除紅眼 消除紅眼 編輯照片 : 以全螢幕檢視照片時, 點一下 “編輯”, 然後選擇工具。 使用紅眼現象工具,點一下要修正的每隻眼睛。 若要裁切,請拖移格線的角落,拖移照片 來重新調整位置,然後點一下“裁切”。在裁切時,您也可以點一下“裁切選項”來指定特 定外觀比例。 第 7 章 相機 51裁剪視訊 針對您剛錄製的視訊或任何位於您 “相機膠卷” 相簿中的視訊,您都可從開頭和結尾裁剪 影格。 您可以取代原始的視訊或將裁剪的版本儲存為新的視訊剪輯片段。 裁剪視訊: 檢視視訊時,請點一下螢幕來顯示控制項目。 在視訊的上方拖移影格檢視器的 任一端, 然後點一下 “裁剪”。 【重要事項】如果您選擇“裁剪原始檔”,被裁剪的影格會永久從原始的視訊中刪除。如果 您選擇“儲存為新的剪輯片段”,新的(經過裁剪的)視訊剪輯片段便會儲存在您的“相機 膠卷” 相簿中, 讓原有的視訊不受影響。 上傳照片和視訊至您的電腦 您可以將使用 “相機” 拍攝的照片和視訊上傳至您電腦的照片應用程式, 例如 Mac 上的 iPhoto。 上傳照片和視訊至您的電腦 : 使用 Dock Connector to USB Cable 來將 iPad 連接到電 腦。  Mac : 選擇您想要的照片和視訊, 然後按一下 iPhoto 或其他您電腦支援的照片應用程式 中的 “輸入” 或 “下載” 按鈕。  PC : 請依據照片應用程式隨附的指示來操作。 如果您在將照片和視訊上傳至電腦後將其從 iPad 刪除,則會從您的 “相機膠卷” 相簿移除 它們。 您可以使用 iTunes 的 “照片” 設定面板將照片和視訊同步至 iPad 上的 “照片” 應 用程式 (視訊僅可與 Mac 同步)。 請參閱 第 20 頁 「與 iTunes 同步」。 照片串流 使用 iCloud 的 “照片串流” 功能時, 您在 iPad 上所拍攝的照片會自動上傳到 iCloud, 並 推播到所有其他已啟用“照片串流”的裝置上。 從其他裝置和電腦上傳到 iCloud 的照片也 會推播到您 iPad 的 “照片串流” 相簿上。 請參閱 第 19 頁 「使用 iCloud」。 啟用 “照片串流” : 前往 “設定” > iCloud > “照片串流”。 當您結束 “相機” 應用程式, 且 iPad 已透過 Wi-Fi 連接 Internet 時, 新拍攝的照片會上 傳到您的“照片串流”所有加入“相機膠卷”的其他照片(包含從郵件和簡訊下載的照片, 以及從網頁儲存的照片、Photo Booth 和螢幕快照) 也會上傳到 “照片串流” 並推播到其 他裝置上。 “照片串流”可以橫跨各種 iOS 裝置,共享最多 1000 張您最近拍攝的照片 。 您 的電腦可以永久保存所有的 “照片串流” 照片。 從 “照片串流” 將照片儲存到 iPad 上 在 “照片串流” 相簿中, 點一下 , 選取您要儲存的照片, 然 後點一下 “儲存”。 從 iCloud 刪除照片 在 “照片串流” 相簿中選取照片, 然後點一下 。 從 iCloud 刪除多張照片 在 “照片串流” 相簿中, 點一下 , 選取您要刪除的照片, 然 後點一下 “刪除”。 【注意】 若要從 “照片串流” 刪除照片,您的 iPad 和所有其他 iOS 裝置都必須安裝 iOS 5.1 或以上版本。 如需更多資訊, 請參閱 support.apple.com/kb/HT4486?viewlocale=zh_ TW。 雖然刪除的照片會從裝置的 “照片串流” 中移除,但原始照片仍會保留在來源裝置的 “相 機膠卷” (或 “儲存的照片”) 相簿中。 52 第 7 章 相機FaceTime 8 關於 FaceTime FaceTime 可讓您透過 Wi-Fi 撥打視訊電話。 使用前方相機來面對面通話, 或者使用背面相 機來分享您周遭看到的畫面。 若要使用 FaceTime,您需要 iPad 2 或新款機型 和 Wi-Fi 來連接 Internet。請參閱 第120頁「網 路」。 和您通話的對象也必須有可搭配 FaceTime 使用的 iOS 裝置或電腦。 【注意】 FaceTime 無法在部分地區使用。 將影像拖至任一個角落。 將影像拖至任一個角落。 切換相機。 切換相機。 靜音 (您可以聽見並看見; 對方只能看見但聽不見)。 靜音 (您可以聽見並看見; 對方只能看見但聽不見)。 進行 FaceTime 通話 若要進行 FaceTime 通話, 請從聯絡資訊、 常用聯絡資訊或最近通話列表中選擇一位人員。 打開 FaceTime 後, 可能會收到使用 Apple ID 來登入或建立新帳號的提示。 撥打聯絡資訊 : 點一下 “聯絡資訊”, 選擇名稱, 然後點一下該人員用於 FaceTime 的 電話號碼或電子郵件位址。 FaceTime 必須在 “設定” > FaceTime 中完成啟用。 53重新撥打最近的通話 點一下 “通話記錄”, 然後從列表中選擇通話。 新增常用聯絡資訊 點一下 “常用聯絡資訊”, 然後點一下 , 選擇聯絡資訊並選取該 人員用於 FaceTime 的電話號碼或電子郵件位址。 撥打常用聯絡資訊 點一下 “常用聯絡資訊”, 然後在列表中點一下名稱。 加入聯絡資訊 點一下 “聯絡資訊”, 然後點一下 。 若聯絡資訊不在您的國家或地區中, 請確定輸入完整的號碼, 包括 國碼和區碼。 設定 FaceTime 的選項 前往 “設定” > FaceTime。 FaceTime 通話時的選項 當您正在使用 FaceTime 與某人通話時,可以切換相機、更改 iPad 的方向、讓麥克風靜音、 移動子母畫面的顯示、 打開另一個應用程式, 以及結束您的通話。 切換正面相機和背面相機 點一下 。 更改 iPad 的方向 請旋轉 iPad。 您朋友看到的影像會改為相符的畫面。 若要避免在移動時產生不必要的旋轉方向, 請鎖定 iPad 的方向。 請 參閱 第 15 頁 「直向或橫向檢視」。 讓通話靜音 點一下 。 您的朋友仍可以看得到您, 且您仍可以看到和聽見您的 朋友。 移動子母畫面的顯示 將內嵌視窗拖移至任何角落。 在通話時使用其他應用程式 請按下 “主畫面” 按鈕 , 然後點一下應用程式圖像。 您仍可以 與朋友通話, 但您無法看見對方。 若要回到通話, 點一下螢幕最上 方的綠色列。 結束通話 點一下 。 54 第 8 章 FaceTimePhoto Booth 9 關於 Photo Booth 如果您有 iPad 2 或新款機型, 使用 Photo Booth 來拍照是十分容易的事。 當您拍照時可套 用特效, 讓照片更加有趣。 Photo Booth 可搭配前方相機和背面相機使用。 選取特效 在您拍照前, 可以選取要套用的特效。 選取特效 : 點一下 , 然後點一下您想要的特效。 扭曲影像 : 如果您選取扭曲特效, 請將手指拖移過螢幕來更改扭曲程度。 您也可以兩指 一捏、 一滑或旋轉影像來更改扭曲程度。 拍攝照片 若要拍攝 Photo Booth 照片, 只要對準 iPad 並點一下即可。 拍攝照片 : 對準 iPad 並點一下 。 當您拍攝照片時, iPad 會發出快門聲音。 您可以使用位於 iPad 側邊的音量按鈕來控制快 門聲音的音量。 如果您將 “側邊切換控制” 設為無聲, 就不會聽到聲音。 請參閱 第 10 頁 「按鈕」。 55【注意】 在某些國家或地區, 即使 “側邊切換控制” 設為無聲, 也會播放音效。 切換前方相機和背面相機 : 點一下螢幕底部的 。 檢查您剛剛拍攝的照片 : 點一下您最後所拍照片的縮覽圖。 向左或向右滑動來檢視更多 縮覽圖。 如果您看不到控制項目, 請點一下螢幕來顯示控制項目。 刪除照片 : 選擇縮覽圖, 然後點一下 。 管理照片: 點一下一或多個縮覽圖。點一下 ,然後點一下“透過電子郵件傳送”、“拷 貝” 或 “刪除”。 檢視和共享照片 您使用 Photo Booth 拍攝的照片會儲存在 iPad 上“照片”應用程式的“相機膠卷”相簿中。 檢視 “相機膠卷” 相簿中的照片 : 在 “照片” 中, 點一下 “相機膠卷” 相簿。 若 要翻閱照片, 請點一下左按鈕或右按鈕, 或是向左或向右滑動。 請參閱 第 57 頁 「檢視 照片和視訊」。 您可以使用 Mail 來透過電子郵件傳送 Photo Booth 照片。 透過電子郵件傳送照片 : 點一下縮覽圖來選取照片, 或者再點一下來選取多張照片。 點 一下 , 然後點一下螢幕底部的 “透過電子郵件傳送” 按鈕。 Mail 會打開和製作一封新郵件, 並在其中附加照片。 上傳照片至您的電腦 將使用 Photo Booth 拍攝的照片上傳至您電腦的照片應用程式, 例如 Mac 上的 iPhoto。 上傳照片至您的電腦 : 使用 Dock Connector to USB Cable 接線來將 iPad 連接到電腦。  Mac:選取要上傳的照片,然後按一下 iPhoto 或其他您電腦支援的照片應用程式中的“輸 入” 或 “下載” 按鈕。  PC : 請依據照片應用程式隨附的指示來操作。 如果您在將照片上傳至電腦後將其從 iPad 刪除, 則會從 “相機膠卷” 相簿移除它們。 您可以使用 iTunes 的 “照片” 設定面板將照片同步至 iPad 上的 “照片” 應用程式。 56 第 9 章 Photo Booth照片 10 檢視照片和視訊 “照片” 可讓您在下列位置中檢視照片, 以及您在 iPad 上擷取或同步的視訊 :  “相機膠卷” 相簿 : 您使用內建相機拍攝的照片和視訊, 或是從電子郵件、 簡訊、 網頁或螢幕快照所儲存的照片和視訊  “照片串流” 相簿 : 從 iCloud 連續播送的照片 (請參閱 第 52 頁 「照片串流」)  “最新輸入的照片” 相簿:從數位相機、 iOS 裝置或 SD 記憶卡輸入的照片和視訊 (請 參閱 第 59 頁 「輸入照片和視訊」)  從電腦同步而來的 “照片圖庫” 和其他相簿 (請參閱 第 20 頁 「與 iTunes 同步」) 【注意】 在沒有相機的 iPad 上, “相機膠卷” 的名稱為 “儲存的照片”。 選擇您要檢視的照片。 選擇您要檢視的照片。 編輯照片。 編輯照片。 播放幻燈片秀。 播放幻燈片秀。 刪除照片。 刪除照片。 使用 AirPlay 將幻燈片 秀連續播送到 HDTV。 使用 AirPlay 將幻燈片 秀連續播送到 HDTV。 共享照片、指定給聯 絡人、做為桌面背景 ,或進行列印。 共享照片、指定給聯 絡人、做為桌面背景 ,或進行列印。 點一下螢幕來顯示控 制項目。 點一下螢幕來顯示控 制項目。 檢視照片和視訊 : 點一下螢幕最上方的其中一個按鈕。 例如, 點一下 “相簿”, 然後 點一下相簿來查看其縮覽圖。 點一下縮覽圖來以全螢幕查看照片或視訊。 您也可以撥動來打開或關閉相簿、 以全螢幕檢視照片或視訊, 或返回縮覽圖顯式方式。 您使用 iPhoto 8.0 (iLife '09) 或更新版本、 或 Aperture v3.0.2 或更新版本所同步的相簿, 可依事件或面孔檢視。 如果用來拍攝照片所使用的相機支援地理標籤, 您也可以依位置 來檢視照片。 57顯示或隱藏控制項目 點一下全螢幕照片或視訊。 查看下一張或上一張照片或視訊 請用手指向左或向右滑動。 放大或縮小 點兩下或捏取。 移動照片 請拖移照片。 播放視訊 在螢幕中央點一下 。 連續播送視訊至 HDTV 請參閱 第 37 頁 「使用 AirPlay」。 編輯照片或裁剪視訊 請參閱 第 51 頁 「編輯照片」 或 第 52 頁 「裁剪視訊」。 檢視幻燈片秀 檢視幻燈片秀: 點一下“幻燈片秀”。選取幻燈片秀選項,然後點一下“開始幻燈片秀”。 連續播送幻燈片秀至 HDTV 請參閱 第 37 頁 「使用 AirPlay」。 停止幻燈片秀 請點一下螢幕。 設定其他選項 前往 “設定” > “照片”。 整理照片和視訊 您可以製作、 重新命名或刪除 iPad 上的相簿, 以協助您整理照片和視訊。 製作相簿: 檢視相簿時,點一下“編輯”,然後點一下“新增”。選取要加入新相簿的照片, 然後點一下 “完成”。 【注意】 在 iPad 上製作的相簿不會同步回您的電腦。 重新命名相簿 點一下 “編輯”, 然後選擇相簿。 重新排列相簿 點一下 “編輯”, 然後向上或向下拖移 。 刪除相簿 點一下 “編輯”, 然後點一下 。 共享照片和視訊 以電子郵件、 簡訊或 Tweet 來傳送照片或視訊: 選擇照片或視訊, 然後點一下 。 如果 您看不到 , 請點一下螢幕來顯示控制項目。 若要發表 Tweet, 您必須登入您的 Twitter 帳號。 前往 “設定” > Twitter。 附件大小的限制由您的服務供應商決定。 iPad 可能會壓縮照片和視訊附件 (如有需要)。 傳送多個照片或視訊 檢視縮覽圖時,點一下 ,選取照片或視訊,然後點一下 “共享”。 拷貝照片或視訊 點一下 , 然後點一下 “拷貝”。 拷貝多個照片或視訊 點一下 , 選取照片和視訊, 然後點一下 “拷貝”。 在電子郵件或簡訊中貼上照片或視 訊 在您想要放置照片或視訊的位置觸碰並按住, 然後點一下 “貼上”。 儲存來自電子郵件的照片或視訊 如有必要, 請點一下來下載項目, 點一下照片或觸碰並按住視訊, 然後點一下 “儲存”。 儲存來自簡訊的照片或視訊 點一下對話中的影像, 點一下 , 然後點一下 “儲存”。 儲存來自網頁的照片 觸碰並按住照片, 然後點一下 “儲存影像”。 58 第 10 章 照片您接收的或者從網頁儲存的照片和視訊,會儲存到您的 “相機膠卷” 相簿中 (若 iPad 沒有 相機, 則會儲存到 “儲存的照片” 中)。 列印照片 列印照片 : 點一下 , 然後點一下 “列印”。 列印多張照片: 檢視照片相簿時,點一下 。選擇您要列印的照片,然後點一下“列印”。 如需更多資訊, 請參閱 第 33 頁 「列印」。 使用相框 當 iPad 鎖定時, 您可以顯示所有照片或所選相簿照片的幻燈片秀。 啟動 “相框”: 按下 “睡眠 / 喚醒” 按鈕來鎖定 iPad,再次按下按鈕來啟用螢幕,然後點 一下 。 暫停幻燈片秀 請點一下螢幕。 停止幻燈片秀 點一下幻燈片秀, 然後點一下 。 “相框” 的設定選項 前往 “設定” > “相框”。 關閉 “相框” 前往 “設定” > “一般” > “密碼鎖定”。 輸入照片和視訊 透過 iPad Camera Connection Kit (需另外購買), 您可以直接從數位相機、 另一台配備 相機的 iOS 裝置, 或從 SD 記憶卡來輸入照片和視訊。 輸入照片 : 1 將 SD Card Reader 或 Camera Connector (隨附在 iPad Camera Connection Kit 中) 插入 iPad Dock 接頭埠。  若要連接相機或 iOS 裝置 : 請使用相機或 iOS 裝置隨附的 USB 接線, 並將其連接到 Camera Connector 上的 USB 埠。 如果您是使用 iOS 裝置, 請確定其已開啟和解除鎖定。 若要連接相機, 請確定相機已開啟並處於傳輸模式。 如需更多資訊, 請參閱相機隨附的 說明文件。  若要使用 SD 記憶卡 : 請將卡片插入 SD Card Reader 上的插槽。 請勿強制將卡片插入 插槽 ; 它僅可以單一方向插入。 如需更多資訊, 請參閱 iPad Camera Connection Kit 說明文件。 2 將 iPad 解鎖。 3 “照片” 應用程式會打開並顯示可供輸入的照片和視訊。 4 選取您要輸入的照片和視訊。  若要輸入所有項目 : 點一下 “輸入全部”。  若只要輸入部分項目:請點一下您要包含的項目(每個項目上會出現勾選符號),點一下“輸 入”, 然後選取 “輸入所選項目”。 5 在照片輸入完畢後, 保留或刪除卡片、 相機或 iOS 裝置上的照片和視訊。 6 將 SD 讀卡機或 Camera Connector 中斷連接。 若要檢視照片,請查看“最新輸入的照片”相簿。新的“事件”包含先前選取供輸入的所有照片。 若要將照片傳送到您的電腦, 請將 iPad 連接到電腦上, 並使用照片應用程式 (如 iPhoto 或 Adobe Elements) 來輸入影像。 第 10 章 照片 5960 第 10 章 照片視訊 11 關於視訊 您可以使用 iPad 來檢視影片、 音樂錄影帶、 視訊 podcast 以及電視節目 (若您所在的地 區能夠使用)。 iPad 也支援特別功能 (例如章節、 字幕、 替用音訊以及隱藏式字幕)。 您可以從 iTunes Store 租借或購買視訊, 且能夠使用視訊轉換器接線來在電視或投影機上 觀賞視訊。 如果您有 Apple TV, 則可以使用 AirPlay 在電視上以無線方式觀賞視訊。 播放影片 播放視訊: 點一下“視訊”,然後點一下視訊的類別(例如“電影”)。點一下您想要觀看的 視訊。 若視訊有章節, 請點一下 “章節”, 然後點一下章節標題, 或直接點一下 。 汽車總動員 汽車總動員 2 © Disney/Pixar. 2 © Disney/Pixar. 拖移來往後或往前略過。 拖移來往後或往前略過。 點一下影片來 顯示或隱藏控 制項目。 點一下影片來 顯示或隱藏控 制項目。 使用 Apple TV 在電視上觀看 視訊。 使用 Apple TV 在電視上觀看 視訊。 拖移來調整 音量。 拖移來調整 音量。 顯示或隱藏播放控制項目 當視訊在播放時, 點一下螢幕。 調整音量 請拖移音量滑桿, 或是使用 iPad 側面的音量按鈕或相容耳機上的 按鈕。 觀賞寬螢幕 請旋轉 iPad。 縮放視訊以填滿螢幕或是符合螢幕 大小 點兩下螢幕。 或者, 點一下 , 來讓影片填滿螢幕, 或點一下 , 讓影片符合螢幕大小。 61暫停或繼續播放 點一下 或 , 或按下相容耳機上的中央按鈕 (或替用按鈕)。 從頭開始播放 如果視訊包含章節, 請沿著時間列將播放磁頭向左拖到底。 如果沒 有章節, 請點一下 。 如果進入視訊的時間少於 5 秒, 則會打開 您資料庫中的前一個視訊。 跳到特定章節 點一下 “完成”、 點一下 “章節”, 然後選擇章節。 (此功能有 時無法使用。) 跳到下一個章節 點一下 或快速按兩下相容耳機上的中央按鈕(或替用按鈕)。 (此 功能有時無法使用。) 跳到上一個章節 點一下 或快速按三次相容耳機上的中央按鈕 (或替用按鈕)。 如 果進入視訊的時間少於 5 秒, 則會打開您資料庫中的前一個視訊。 (此功能有時無法使用。) 倒轉或快轉 觸碰並按住 或 。 跳到影片中的任何一個播放點 將播放磁頭沿著時間列拖移。 向下滑動手指來將捲動速率調整為由快 至慢。 停止觀看影片 點一下 “完成”。 使用 AirPlay 在 Apple TV 上播放影 片 點一下 , 並選擇 Apple TV。 請參閱 第 62 頁 「在電視上觀賞視 訊」。 選擇其他音訊語言 點一下 , 然後從 “音訊” 列表裡選擇語言。 (此功能有時無法 使用。) 顯示或隱藏字幕 點一下 , 然後從 “字幕 “列表中選擇語言或 “關閉”。 (此功 能有時無法使用。) 將隱藏式字幕顯示或隱藏 前往 “設定” > “視訊”。 (此功能有時無法使用。) 觀賞租借的影片 您可以從 iTunes Store 租借標準畫質或高畫質格式的影片, 並在 iPad 上觀看。 您可以在 iPad 下載租借的影片, 或將其從電腦上的 iTunes 傳送至 iPad。 (租借影片的功能無法在 部分地區使用。) 影片必須完整下載才能觀看。 您可以暫停下載並稍後再繼續。 租借的影片會在數天後到 期, 且在您開始播放影片後, 必須在限制的時間內觀看完畢。 影片過期後會自動刪除。 在租借影片之前, 請先在 iTunes Store 查看影片的到期時間。 觀看租借的影片 : 點一下 “影片”, 點一下您想要觀看的視訊, 然後選取章節或直接 點一下 。 如果您沒有在列表中看到視訊, 可能仍在下載中。 將租借的影片傳送到 iPad : 將 iPad 連接到電腦上。 然後在 iTunes 側邊欄中選擇 iPad, 按一下 “影片”, 並選擇您想要傳送的租借影片。 您的電腦必須連接 Internet。 iPad 上 的租借影片無法傳送到電腦中。 在電視上觀賞視訊 您可透過無線方式使用 AirPlay 和 Apple TV 來連續播送視訊, 或者使用下列任一接線將 iPad 連接到您的電視 :  Apple Digital AV Adapter 和 HDMI 接線 Apple Component AV Cable  Apple Component AV Cable   Apple VGA Adapter 和 VGA 接線 Apple 的接線可以在許多國家購買。 請前往 www.apple.com/tw/store 或聯絡當地的 Apple 經 銷商。 62 第 11 章 視訊使用 AirPlay 連續播送視訊 : 開始播放視訊, 然後點一下 並從 AirPlay 裝置列表中選擇 Apple TV。 如果 沒有出現, 或者如果您沒有在 AirPlay 裝置列表中看見 Apple TV, 請 確定其位於和 iPad 相同的無線網路上。 如需更多資訊,請參閱 第 37 頁 「使用 AirPlay」。 在視訊播放時,您可退出“視訊”並使用其他應用程式。 若要返回在 iPad 上播放,請點一 下 並選擇 iPad。 使用接線連續播送視訊 : 使用接線來將 iPad 連接到您的電視或 AV 接收器, 並選擇對應的 輸入。 使用 Apple Digital AV Adapter 連接 將 Apple Digital AV Adapter 連接到 iPad 的 Dock 接頭埠上。 使用 HDMI 接線來連接轉換器的 HDMI 埠和電視或接收器。 若要在觀看視訊時讓 iPad 保持充電, 請使用 Apple Dock Connector to USB Cable 來將轉換器 的 30 針埠連接到您的 iPad 10W USB 電源轉換器上。 使用 AV 接線進行連接 請使用 Apple Component AV Cable、 Apple Composite AV Cable, 或是 其他與 iPad 相容的接線。 您也可以搭配 Apple Universal Dock 來使用 這些接線, 藉此將 iPad 連接到您的電視上。 您可使用 Dock 的遙控器 來控制播放。 使用 Apple VGA Adapter 連接 將 Apple VGA Adapter 連接到 iPad 的 Dock 接頭埠上。 使用 VGA 接線來 將 Apple VGA Adapter 連接到相容的電視、 投影機或 VGA 顯示器上。 使用 iPad 2 或新款機型, 當接線連接到電視或投影機時, iPad 螢幕會自動鏡像輸出在外接 顯示器上 (最高可達 1080p 解析度),且視訊會以 1080p 的最高解析度來播放。 部分應用 程式(如 Keynote)可能會使用外接顯示器作為第二個視訊顯示器。若為先前的 iPad 機型, 只有特定應用程式 (包括 YouTube、 “視訊” 和 “照片”) 會使用外接顯示器。 您也可以使用 “AirPlay 鏡像輸出” 和 Apple TV , 以無線方式來將 iPad 2 或新款機型 螢 幕鏡像輸出到電視上。 請參閱 第 37 頁 「使用 AirPlay」。 如果您是使用 Apple Digital AV Adapter 或 Apple Component AV Cable, 高解析度 的視訊會以 HD 畫質顯示。 從 iPad 刪除視訊 若要節省空間, 您可以從 iPad 刪除視訊。 刪除視訊: 在視訊列表中,點一下並按住影片,直到刪除按鈕出現,然後點一下 。刪除 影片之後, 請點一下 “取消” 或 “主畫面”。 當您從 iPad 刪除視訊時(非租借的影片),並不會從您電腦上的 iTunes 資料庫中刪除視訊, 且您可以稍後再將視訊同步回 iPad 上。 若您不要將視訊同步回 iPad 上, 請將 iTunes 設定 成不同步視訊。 請參閱 第 20 頁 「與 iTunes 同步」。 【重要事項】 若您從 iPad 刪除租借的影片, 影片將會永久刪除且無法傳送回電腦上。 使用家庭共享 “家庭共享”能讓您在 iPad 上播放來自 Mac 或 PC iTunes 資料庫的音樂、視訊和電視節目。 請參閱 第 87 頁 「家庭共享」。 第 11 章 視訊 63YouTube 12 關於 YouTube YouTube 可讓您觀賞世界各地的人們所傳送的短片影片。 部分 YouTube 功能需要有 YouTube 帳號。 若要設定帳號, 請前往 www.youtube.com。 若要使用 YouTube, iPad 必須連接至 Internet。 請參閱 第 120 頁 「網路」。 【注意】 YouTube 僅支援部分語言且無法在某些地區使用。 瀏覽和搜尋影片 瀏覽影片 : 點一下螢幕底部的任一瀏覽按鈕。 搜尋影片 點一下搜尋欄位, 輸入單字或片語, 並點一下 “搜尋”。 查看更多來自此 YouTube 使用者的 影片 全螢幕觀看時, 請點一下螢幕來查看控制項目, 然後點一下 。 請在側邊欄中點一下 “更多影片”。 您必須登入 YouTube 帳號。 查看類似的影片 請在側邊欄中點一下 “類似影片”。 64播放影片 觀看影片: 在您瀏覽的同時,點一下任一影片。 當有足夠的影片量下載到 iPad 後便會開始 播放。 點一下 以較快地開始播放影片。 拖移來往後或往 前略過。 拖移來往後或往 前略過。 點一下影片來顯示或隱 藏控制項目。 點一下影片來顯示或隱 藏控制項目。 拖移來調整 音量。 拖移來調整 音量。 檢視影片資訊、相關影 片和評論。 檢視影片資訊、相關影 片和評論。 將此影片加入 YouTube 我的最愛。 將此影片加入 YouTube 我的最愛。 顯示或隱藏影片控制項目 請點一下螢幕。 調整音量 請拖移音量滑桿, 或是使用 iPad 的音量按鈕或相容耳機上的音量按 鈕。 全螢幕觀賞 旋轉 iPad 來以橫向觀賞影片。 如果您仍會看到影片資訊, 請點一下 。 在填滿螢幕和符合螢幕寬度間切換 全螢幕觀賞影片時, 請點兩下影片。 您也可以點一下 來讓影片填 滿螢幕, 或點一下 , 讓影片符合螢幕大小。 如果您看不到這些 控制項目, 影片便已經完全符合螢幕大小。 暫停或繼續播放 點一下 或 。 您也可以按住相容耳機上的中央按鈕 (或相同作用 的按鈕)。 從頭開始播放 在影片播放的同時點一下 。 如果您觀賞該影片的時間少於五秒, 則將會跳至列表中的前一部影片。 向前或向後掃描 觸碰並按住 或 。 跳到任意點 將播放磁頭沿著時間列拖移。 向下滑動手指來將捲動速率調整為由快 至慢。 跳至列表中的下一部或上一部影片 點一下 來跳至下一部影片。 點兩次 來跳至上一部影片。 如果 您先前觀賞影片的時間少於五秒, 請只點一下。 停止觀看影片 點一下 “完成”。 使用 AirPlay 在 Apple TV 上播放影 片 點一下 並選擇 Apple TV。 如需相關資訊, 請參閱 第 37 頁 「使用 AirPlay」。 第 12 章 YouTube 65追蹤您喜愛的影片 顯示管理影片的控制項目: 全螢幕觀賞影片時, 請點一下來顯示播放控制項目, 然後點一 下 。 將影片加入我的最愛 點一下 “新增”, 然後選取 “我的最愛”。 如果您在觀賞影片, 請點一下 。 將影片加入播放列表 點一下 “新增”, 然後選取播放列表。 如果您沒有看到播放列表, 請登入。 訂閱此 YouTube 使用者 點一下 “更多影片”, 然後點一下 “訂閱”。 您必須登入 YouTube 帳號。 刪除我的最愛 點一下 “我的最愛”, 然後點一下 “編輯”。 刪除播放列表的影片或整個播放列 表 點一下 “播放列表”, 然後點一下 “編輯”。 將影片加上旗標 點一下 。 共享影片、 評論和評分 顯示共享、評分和評論的控制項目: 全螢幕觀賞影片時,請點一下來顯示控制項目,然後 點一下 。 為影片評分 點一下 “喜歡” 或 “不喜歡”。 您必須登入 YouTube 帳號。 新增評論 點一下 “評論”,然後點一下評論欄位。 您必須登入 YouTube 帳號。 將影片加入 “我的最愛” 或播放 列表 點一下 “加入”, 然後選擇 “我的最愛” 或播放列表。 透過電子郵件傳送影片的連結 點一下 “共享”。 將影片加上旗標 點一下影片來顯示工具列, 然後點一下 。 將您自己的影片傳送至 YouTube 打開 “照片” 應用程式, 選取影片, 然後點一下 。 在電視上觀賞 YouTube 如果您有 Apple TV,則可以使用 AirPlay 在電視上觀賞 YouTube 影片。 請參閱 第 65 頁 「播 放影片」。 您也可以使用接線將 iPad 連接到您的電視或投影機。 請參閱 第 62 頁 「在電視上觀賞視 訊」。 66 第 12 章 YouTube行事曆 13 關於行事曆 行事曆可讓您隨時掌握行程狀態。 您可以檢視個別的行事曆, 或者一次檢視數個行事曆。 您可以依日或月的顯示方式, 或者以列表來檢視事件。 您可以搜尋事件的標題、 邀請對 象和位置。 如果您輸入聯絡人的生日, 便可在 “行事曆” 中檢視那些生日。 您也可以在 iPad 上製作、 編輯或取消事件, 並將這些事件同步回您的電腦。 您可以訂 閱 iCloud、 Google、 Yahoo! 或 iCal 行事曆。 如果您有 Microsoft Exchange 或 iCloud 帳號, 則可以接收並回應會議邀請函。 檢視行事曆 您可以個別檢視行事曆或當作合併行事曆來查看, 讓您輕鬆地同時管理工作和家庭的行事 曆。 選擇顯示方式。 選擇顯示方式。 新增事件。 新增事件。 觸碰並拖移來 進行調整。 觸碰並拖移來 進行調整。 更改顯示方式 : 點一下 “列表”、 “日”、 “年” 或 “月”。 67檢視 “生日” 行事曆 點一下 “行事曆”, 然後點一下 “生日” 來包含您 “聯絡資訊” 中生日的事件。 查看事件的詳細資訊 請點一下事件。 您可以點一下事件相關的資訊來取得詳細資訊。 例 如, 如果有指定位置的地址, 點一下它便可打開 “地圖”。 編輯或刪除行事曆 點一下 “行事曆”, 然後點一下 “編輯”。 選擇要檢視的行事曆 點一下 “行事曆”, 然後點一下選擇您要檢視的行事曆。 iPad 上所 有所選行事曆的事件都會顯示在一個的行事曆裡。 新增事件 您可以直接在 iPad 上新增和更新行事曆事件。 加入事件 : 請點一下 , 然後輸入事件資訊, 並且點一下 “完成”。 您也可以觸碰並按住行事曆上的空白處來新增事件。請拖移抓取點來調整事件的持續時間。 設定提示 點一下 “提示”, 設定在事件開始之前的提示, 從五分鐘到兩天。 設定事件的預設提示 前往 “設定” > “郵件、聯絡資訊、行事曆” > “預設提示時間”。 更新事件 點一下 “編輯”, 然後更改事件資訊。 若要調整事件的時間或持續期間, 請觸碰並按住事件來將其選取。 然後將其拖移至新的時間, 或拖移抓取點來更改其持續期間。 刪除事件 點一下事件和 “編輯”,然後向下捲動,並且點一下 “刪除事件”。 邀請其他人參加事件 點一下 “邀請對象” 來從 “聯絡資訊” 中選擇人員。 需要 iCloud、 Microsoft Exchange 或 CalDAV 帳號。 回應邀請函 如果您有設定 iCloud、 Microsoft Exchange, 或支援的 CalDAV 帳號, 則可以接收並回 應來自您公司裡其他人的會議邀請函。 當您收到邀請函時, 行事曆中顯示的會議, 會以虛 線包圍起來, 而 會顯示在螢幕的右下角。 回應邀請函: 請點一下行事曆中的會議邀請函,或是點一下 來顯示“事件”螢幕,並點 一下邀請函。 查看管理者的聯絡資訊 點一下 “邀請函發起人”。 查看其他邀請對象 點一下 “邀請對象”。 點一下名稱來查看人員的聯絡資訊。 在回覆中加入註解 請點一下 “新增註解”。 您的註解將可供會議管理者查看, 但其他 邀請對象則不會看到。 視您使用的行事曆服務而定, 不一定可以使 用註解功能。 設定您的回覆狀態 點一下 “回覆狀態” 並選擇 “忙碌” 或 “有空”。 當有人邀請 您加入會議時, “忙碌” 會將時間視為已保留。 68 第 13 章 行事曆搜尋行事曆 在 “列表” 顯示方式中, 您可以在行事曆中搜尋事件的標題、 邀請對象、 位置和備忘 錄欄位。 “行事曆” 會搜尋您目前正在檢視的行事曆事件。 搜尋事件 : 點一下 “列表”, 然後在搜尋欄位中輸入文字。 “行事曆” 事件也可包含在從 “主畫面” 螢幕進行的搜尋中。 請參閱 第 32 頁 「搜 尋」。 訂閱行事曆 您可以訂閱使用 iCalendar (.ics) 格式的行事曆。 許多行事曆類型的服務, 包含 iCloud、 Yahoo!、 Google 和 OS X 的 iCal 應用程式, 皆支援行事曆訂閱。 訂閱的行事曆是唯讀的。 您可以從 iPad 中已訂閱的行事曆讀取事件, 但是無法編輯它們 或製作新的事件。 訂閱行事曆 : 前往 “設定” > “郵件、 聯絡資訊、 行事曆”, 然後點一下 “新增帳 號”。 點一下 “其他”, 然後點一下 “新增已訂閱的行事曆”。 您也可以點一下行事曆連結, 訂閱網路上已發佈的 iCal (或其他 .ics) 行事曆。 從 Mail 輸入行事曆事件 您可以從電子郵件輸入行事曆檔案來將事件加入到行事曆中。 您可以輸入任何標準的 .ics 行事曆檔案。 從行事曆檔案輸入事件 : 在 Mail 中, 打開郵件並且點一下行事曆檔案。 同步行事曆 以下為同步行事曆的方式 :  在 iTunes 中 : 當您將 iPad 連接到電腦時, 可以使用裝置的設定面板來和 Mac 上的 iCal 或 Microsoft Entourage, 或是 PC 上的 Microsoft Outlook 2003、 2007 或 2010 同步。  在 “設定” 中:開啟 iCloud、Microsoft Exchange、Google 或 Yahoo! 帳號的 “行事曆”, 以透過 Internet 同步您的行事曆資訊, 或者若您的公司或組織支援的話, 可設定 CalDAV 帳號。 請參閱 第 18 頁 「設定郵件和其他帳號」。 第 13 章 行事曆 69行事曆帳號和設定 有幾項設定可供“行事曆”和您的行事曆帳號使用。前往“設定”>“郵件、聯絡資訊、行事曆”。 行事曆帳號也會用來同步 “提醒事項” 的待辦事項。 新增 CalDAV 帳號: 前往“設定”>“郵件、聯絡資訊、行事曆”,點一下“新增帳號”, 然後點一下 “其他”。 在 “行事曆” 下方, 點一下 “新增 CalDAV 帳號”。 這些選項適用於您的所有行事曆 : 設定行事曆提示鈴聲 前往 “設定” > “聲音” > “行事曆提示”。 同步過去事件 前往 “設定” > “郵件、 聯絡資訊、 行事曆” > “同步”, 然 後選擇時間的期間。 未來的事件一率會加以同步。 設定在收到會議邀請函時發出提示 聲 前往 “設定” > “郵件、 聯絡資訊、 行事曆”, 並點一下 “收 到新邀請函時提示”。 啟用 “行事曆” 時區支援 前往 “設定” > “郵件、 聯絡資訊、 行事曆” > “時區”, 然 後啟用 “時區支援”。 設定預設的行事曆 前往 “設定” > “郵件、聯絡資訊、行事曆” > “預設行事曆”。 使用 iCloud 以便在您的 iOS 裝置和 電腦上讓 “行事曆” 保持最新。 前往 “設定” > iCloud,然後啟用 “行事曆”。 請參閱 第 19 頁 「使 用 iCloud」。 【重要事項】“時區支援”啟用時,“行事曆”會使用所選的城市時區來顯示事件的日期和時間。 “時區支援”關閉時,“行事曆”會依照您目前位置的時區(由 Internet 連線決定)來顯示事件。 當您在旅遊時, iPad 可能無法在正確的當地時間顯示事件或是發出提示聲。 若要手動設定 正確時間, 請參閱 第 122 頁 「日期與時間」。 70 第 13 章 行事曆聯絡資訊 14 關於聯絡資訊 “聯絡資訊” 可以讓您輕鬆取用和編輯來自個人、 公司和組織帳號的聯絡資訊列表。 您 可以跨所有群組搜尋, 而 “聯絡資訊” 中的資訊會自動取用, 以便讓輸入電子郵件位 址更為快速與容易。 在“地圖”中檢視。 在“地圖”中檢視。 加入或更改資訊。 加入或更改資訊。 尋找聯絡資訊。 尋找聯絡資訊。 同步聯絡資訊 您可以使用下列方式將聯絡資訊加入 :  使用您的 iCloud 聯絡資訊。 請參閱 第 19 頁 「使用 iCloud」。  在 iTunes 中,從 Google 或 Yahoo! 同步聯絡資訊,或與電腦中的應用程式同步聯絡資訊。 請參閱 第 20 頁 「與 iTunes 同步」。  在 iPad 上設定 Microsoft Exchange 帳號, 並啟用 “聯絡資訊”。 請參閱 第 73 頁 「聯 絡資訊帳號和設定」。  設定 LDAP 或 CardDAV 帳號來取用公司或學校目錄。 請參閱 第 73 頁 「聯絡資訊帳號和 設定」。  直接在 iPad 上輸入聯絡資訊請參閱 第 72 頁 「新增和編輯聯絡資訊」。 71搜尋聯絡資訊 您可以在 iPad 的聯絡資訊中搜尋稱謂、 名字、 姓氏和公司名稱。 如果您具有 Microsoft Exchange 帳號、 LDAP 帳號或 CardDAV 帳號, 您也可以搜尋這些聯絡資訊。 搜尋聯絡資訊 : 在 “聯絡資訊” 中, 請點一下搜尋欄位, 並輸入您的搜尋內容。 搜尋 GAL 點一下 “群組”, 再點一下列表底部的 “目錄”, 然後輸入您的 搜尋內容。 搜尋 LDAP 伺服器 點一下 “群組”, 再點一下 LDAP 伺服器名稱, 然後輸入您的搜尋 內容。 搜尋 CardDAV 伺服器 點一下 “群組”, 再點一下列表底部可搜尋的 CardDAV 群組, 然後 輸入您的搜尋內容。 儲存來自 GAL、 LDAP 或 CardDAV 伺服器的聯絡資訊。 搜尋您想要新增的聯絡資訊, 然後點一下 “新增聯絡資訊”。 “聯絡資訊” 也可透過從 “主畫面” 螢幕進行搜尋找到。 請參閱 第 32 頁 「搜尋」。 新增和編輯聯絡資訊 在 iPad 上加入聯絡資訊: >點一下““聯絡資訊””並點一下 。如果沒顯示 ,請確定您 並未正在檢視 LDAP、CalDAV 或 GAL 聯絡資訊列表;您無法將聯絡資訊加入到這些列表中。 編輯聯絡資訊 : 選擇一個聯絡資訊, 然後點一下 “編輯”。 新增欄位 點一下 “新增欄位”。 加入聯絡資訊的 Twitter 使用者名 稱 點一下 “新增” 按鈕, 然後點一下 Twitter。 更改欄位標籤 點一下標籤, 並選擇不同的標籤。 若要新增標籤, 請捲動至列表底 部並點一下 “新增自定標籤”。 更改聯絡資訊的鈴聲或訊息聲 點一下鈴聲或訊息聲欄位, 然後在 “設定” > “聲音” 中選擇新 的聲音。 刪除項目 點一下 , 然後點一下 “刪除”。 將照片指定給聯絡資訊 在編輯模式中, 點一下 “新增照片”, 或點一下現有的照片。 您 可以選擇使用相機拍攝照片, 或使用現有的照片。 若要從您聯絡資訊的 Twitter 描述檔中輸入照片, 請前往 “設定” > Twitter。 登入您的 Twitter 帳號, 然後點一下 “更新聯絡資訊”。 刪除聯絡資訊 在 “聯絡資訊” 裡, 選擇一個聯絡資訊, 然後點一下 “編輯”。 向下捲動並且點一下 “刪除聯絡資訊”。 72 第 14 章 聯絡資訊聯絡資訊帳號和設定 您可以新增其他 “聯絡資訊” 帳號, 並調整聯絡資訊名稱排序和顯示的方式。 新增“聯絡資訊”帳號: 前往“設定”>“郵件、聯絡資訊、行事曆”,然後點一下“新增帳號”。 若要更改“聯絡資訊”設定,請前往“設定”>“郵件、聯絡資訊、行事曆”以設定這些選項: 設定聯絡資訊的排序方式 點一下 “排序方式”, 並選擇依名字或依姓氏排序。 設定聯絡資訊的顯示方式 點一下 “顯示順序”, 並選擇依名字或依姓氏顯示。 設定您的 “我的資料” 名片 點一下 “我的資料”, 然後從列表中選取帶有您名字和資訊的聯絡 資訊名片。 “我的資料” 名片會由 Safari 和其他應用程式使用。 設定預設的 “聯絡資訊” 帳號 點一下 “預設帳號”, 然後選擇一個帳號。 您所製作的新聯絡資訊 (沒有指定其他帳號) 會儲存在這裡。 使用 iCloud 以便在您的 iOS 裝置和 電腦上讓“聯絡資訊”保持最新。 前往 “設定” > iCloud, 然後啟用 “聯絡資訊”。 請參閱 第 19 頁 「使用 iCloud」。 第 14 章 聯絡資訊 73備忘錄 15 關於備忘錄 iPad 配備了大型的顯示器和螢幕鍵盤, 讓您能輕鬆地記下備忘錄。 而 iCloud 可讓您在所 有其他 iOS 裝置和 Mac 電腦上取用這些在 iPad 上輸入的備忘錄。 您可以用橫向或直向的模式來閱讀和編寫備忘錄。 在直向模式中,請點一下 “備忘錄” 來 檢視您的備忘錄列表。 在橫向模式中, 備忘錄列表會顯示在左邊, 並且目前的備忘錄會以 紅色圓圈標示。 編寫與閱讀備忘錄 備忘錄會依照最後修改日期列出, 最上方的是最近修改過的備忘錄。 此列表會顯示每個備 忘錄開頭的幾個文字。 點一下列表中的備忘錄來閱讀或加以編輯。 加入備忘錄 : 點一下 , 輸入備忘錄, 然後點一下 “完成”。 以郵件傳送或 列印備忘錄。 以郵件傳送或 列印備忘錄。 刪除備忘錄。 刪除備忘錄。 點一下備忘錄來檢視內容。 點一下備忘錄來檢視內容。 新增備忘錄。 新增備忘錄。 檢視上一則或下一則備忘錄。 檢視上一則或下一則備忘錄。 閱讀備忘錄: 點一下列表中的備忘錄,或者點一下 或 來查看下一則或上一則備忘錄。 編輯備忘錄 請點一下備忘錄的任何位置來顯示鍵盤。 編輯備忘錄, 然後點一下 “完成”。 更改字體 前往 “設定” > “備忘錄”。 刪除備忘錄 點一下備忘錄底部的 。 使用 iCloud 來讓您的 iOS 裝置和 Mac 電腦都保有最新的備忘錄內 容。 前往 “設定” > iCloud 並啟用 “備忘錄” (預設為啟用)。 請參 閱 第 19 頁 「使用 iCloud」。 74搜尋備忘錄 您可以搜尋備忘錄的文字來尋找特定的備忘錄。 搜尋備忘錄: 在備忘錄列表上方出現的搜尋欄位中輸入文字。 在直向模式,請點一下“備 忘錄” 來顯示備忘錄列表。 搜尋結果會隨著您的輸入顯示。 點一下鍵盤按鈕來退出鍵盤並查看更多結果。 若要檢視 備忘錄, 請在搜尋結果列表中點一下備忘錄。 列印或以電子郵件寄送備忘錄 列印或以電子郵件寄送備忘錄 : 點一下備忘錄, 然後點一下 。 若要郵寄備忘錄, 您必須先在 iPad 上設定電子郵件功能。 請參閱 第 43 頁 「傳送郵 件」。 第 15 章 備忘錄 75提醒事項 16 關於提醒事項 “提醒事項” 可讓您使用列表和到期日來管理生活事務。 “提醒事項” 可搭配行事曆帳 號使用, 因此您所做的更動會自動在您所有的 iOS 裝置和電腦上更新。 將項目標示為 已完成。 將項目標示為 已完成。 新增提醒。 新增提醒。 更改顯示方式。 更改顯示方式。 在列表顯示方式和日期顯示方式間切換: 在螢幕最上方,點一下 “列表” 或 “日期”。 設定提醒事項 加入提醒事項 : 在 “提醒事項” 中, 點一下 , 然後輸入描述並點一下 “完成”。 在您加入提醒事項後, 可微調其設定 : 76設定提醒事項的日期或時間 點一下提醒事項, 然後點一下 “提醒”。 啟用 “指定日期”, 然 後設定您想要收到提醒的日期和時間。 到期的提醒事項會顯示在 “通 知中心” 裡。 將備忘錄加入到提醒事項 點一下提醒事項, 然後點一下 “顯示更多資訊”。 點一下 “備忘 錄”。 將提醒事項移至其他列表 點一下提醒事項, 然後點一下 “顯示更多資訊”。 點一下 “列表” 並選擇新的列表。 若要製作或編輯列表, 請參閱 第 77 頁 「以列表顯示方式管理提醒事 項」。 刪除提醒事項 點一下提醒事項,點一下 “顯示更多資訊”,然後點一下 “刪除”。 編輯提醒事項 點一下提醒事項, 然後點一下其名稱。 將提醒事項標示為已完成 點一下提醒事項旁邊的方塊, 這樣會顯示註記符號。 已完成的提醒事項會顯示在 “已完成” 列表中。 請參閱 第 78 頁 「管 理已完成的提醒事項」。 設定提醒事項播放的鈴聲 前往 “設定” > “聲音”。 使用 iCloud 以便在您的 iOS 裝置和 電腦上讓“提醒事項”保持最新。 前往 “設定” > iCloud, 然後啟用 “提醒事項”。 請參閱 第 19 頁 「使用 iCloud」。 以列表顯示方式管理提醒事項 將提醒事項整理成列表,讓工作、個人和其他待辦事項可輕易彼此區隔。“提醒事項”有一 個進行中提醒事項的列表,加上一個內建的已完成項目的列表。您可以加入自己的其他列表。 製作列表 : 在螢幕最上方, 點一下 “列表”, 然後點一下 “編輯”。 在列表之間切換 在列表顯示方式中, 點一下您想要檢視的列表。 檢視已完成的項目 在列表顯示方式中, 點一下 “已完成”。 更改列表的順序 在列表顯示方式中, 點一下 “編輯”。 拖移列表旁邊的 來更改 順序。 您無法將列表移至不同的帳號, 且您無法在列表中更改提醒事項的順 序。 刪除列表 在列表顯示方式中,點一下 “編輯”。 針對您想要刪除的每個列表, 點一下 。 當您刪除列表時, 列表中的所有項目會被刪除。 更改列表的名稱 在列表顯示方式中, 點一下 “編輯”。 點一下您想要更改的名稱, 然後輸入新的名稱。 點一下 “完成”。 設定新提醒事項的預設列表 前往 “設定” > “郵件、聯絡資訊、行事曆”,然後在 “提醒事項” 標題下方, 點一下 “預設列表”。 以日期顯示方式管理提醒事項 使用日期顯示方式來檢視和管理具有到期日的提醒事項。 檢視某個日期的提醒事項: 在螢幕最上方,點一下 “日期” 來檢視今天的提醒事項和過去 幾天未完成的項目。 第 16 章 提醒事項 77管理已完成的提醒事項 “提醒事項”會追蹤您標示為已完成的項目。您可以使用列表或日期顯示方式來查看項目, 或者也可以使用 “已完成” 列表。 檢視已完成的項目 : 點一下螢幕最上方的 “列表” 按鈕, 然後點一下 “已完成”。 將已完成的項目標示為未完成 點一下來移除註記符號。 項目會自動移回其原始列表。 同步先前的提醒事項 前往 “設定”>“郵件、聯絡資訊、行事曆”。 然後點一下 “同步” (在 “提醒事項” 下方)。 此設定適用於您所有提醒事項的帳號。 若要取得最佳效能, 請不要同步過多不需要的先前項目。 搜尋提醒事項 搜尋提醒事項 : 點一下搜尋欄位, 然後輸入搜尋詞語。 提醒事項會依其名稱來進行搜尋。 您也可以從 “主畫面” 螢幕來搜尋 “提醒事項”。 請參閱 第 121 頁 「Spotlight 搜尋」。 78 第 16 章 提醒事項地圖 17 尋找位置 【警告】 如需更多安全行車和導航的相關資訊,請參閱 「重要產品資訊指南」,位於: support.apple.com/zh_TW/manuals/ipad。 更多資訊 更多資訊 點兩下來放大;用雙指 點一下來縮小。或用手 指開合來放大或縮小。 點兩下來放大;用雙指 點一下來縮小。或用手 指開合來放大或縮小。 設定選項、例如顯示交 通狀況或衛星視圖。 設定選項、例如顯示交 通狀況或衛星視圖。 © 2012 Google. © 2012 Google. 地圖資料 地圖資料 © 2012 Google. © 2012 Google. 取得汽車、大眾交通工具 或步行的路線。 取得汽車、大眾交通工具 或步行的路線。 輸入搜尋內容。 輸入搜尋內容。 顯示商業地點或通 訊錄人員的位置。 顯示商業地點或通 訊錄人員的位置。 顯示您的目前位置。 顯示您的目前位置。 尋找位置 : 點一下 “搜尋”, 然後點一下搜尋欄位來顯示鍵盤。 輸入地址或其他搜尋 資訊, 然後點一下 “搜尋”。 您可以搜尋下列資訊 :  十字路口 (“8th and market”)  地區 (“greenwich village”)  路標 (“guggenheim”)  郵遞區號  商業地點 (“movies,” “restaurants san francisco ca,” “apple inc new york”) 您也可以點一下 來尋找聯絡資訊的位置。 79查看位置的名稱或描述 請點一下大頭針。 查看搜尋中找到的商業地點列表 點一下 。 點一下商業地點來查看其位置。 尋找您目前的位置 點一下 。 藍色的標記指示您目前的位置。 如果無法準確確定您的位置, 則會 在標記的周圍顯示圓圈。 圓圈越小, 準確度越高。 使用數位指南針 再點一下 。 圖像會更改為 , 且螢幕上會出現小型指南針 。 標示位置 觸碰並按住地圖, 直到大頭針顯示。 【重要事項】地圖、方向和以定位服務為基準的應用程式取決於收集資料的服務。由於這些 資料服務可能會更改且無法用於所有區域,導致地圖、方向或定位服務資訊可能無法使用、 不準確或不完整。 將 iPad 提供的資訊與您的周圍環境進行比較, 並遵從告示標誌來解決任 何不一致的問題。 當您打開“地圖”時,若“定位服務”已停用,程式可能會要求您將其啟用。您可以使用“地 圖”, 但不用啟用 “定位服務”。 請參閱 第 117 頁 「定位服務」。 取得行車路線 取得行車路線 : 1 點一下 “路線”。 2 輸入出發的位置和結束的位置。 點一下 來選擇“書籤”(包含您目前的大致位置和拖放的大頭針)、最近位置或聯絡資訊。 3 點一下 “路線”, 然後選擇開車 ( )、 大眾運輸 ( ) 或步行 ( ) 的路線。 4 請執行下列其中一個動作 :  若要一次檢視一個路線點, 請點一下 “開始”, 然後點一下 來查看下一個路線點。  若要在列表裡檢視所有路線, 請點一下 “開始”, 然後點一下 。 點一下列表上的任何項目來查看該路線點的地圖。 5 如果畫面上出現多個路線, 請點一下您要使用的路線。 如果您搭乘大眾運輸工具, 請點一下 來設定您的出發或抵達時間, 並且選擇旅行行程。 點一下車站處的圖像來查看該公車或火車的離開時間, 然後取得公共運輸供應商網站或聯 絡資訊的連結 (適用的話)。 從地圖上的位置取得路線 點一下大頭針, 點一下 , 然後點一下 “以本地為終點的路線” 或 “以本地為起點的路線”。 將位置加入書籤 點一下 “加入書籤”。 80 第 17 章 地圖取得並共享位置資訊 進行 FaceTime 通話 (當可用時)。 進行 FaceTime 通話 (當可用時)。 參訪網站。 參訪網站。 © 2012 Google. © 2012 Google. 地圖資料 地圖資料 © 2012 Google. © 2012 Google. 取得並共享位置資訊 : 點一下大頭針, 然後點一下 。 將商業地點加入您的聯絡資訊 點一下 “加入聯絡資訊”。 Tweet、 發送簡訊或以電子郵件傳 送您的位置 點一下 “共享位置”。 若要發表 Tweet, 您必須登入至您的 Twitter 帳號。 前往 “設定” > Twitter。 顯示路況 您可以在地圖上顯示主要街道和公路的交通狀況。 顯示路況 : 點一下或拖移螢幕右下角, 然後啟用 “路況”。 街道和公路會依照交通流量標示不同的顏色 :  灰色 - 目前無法取得資料  綠色 - 路況符合公告的速限  黃色 - 路況低於公告的速限  紅色 - 路況停停走走 交通路況無法適用於部分地區。 第 17 章 地圖 81地圖顯示方式 © 2012 Google. © 2012 Google. 地圖資料 地圖資料 © 2012 Google. © 2012 Google. 查看標準、 衛星、 混合或地形顯示方式 : 點一下或拖移螢幕右下角, 然後選取您想要 使用的顯示方式。 查看位置的 “Google 街景視圖” : 點一下 。 向左或向右滑動來移動顯示 360° 的全景 視圖 (內嵌畫面會顯示您目前的視圖)。 點一下箭頭來在街道上移動。 若要返回地圖顯 示方式, 請點一下內嵌地圖。 點一下來返回地 圖顯示方式。 點一下來返回地 圖顯示方式。 © 2012 Google. © 2012 Google. “街景視圖” 可能無法在部分地區使用。 82 第 17 章 地圖音樂 18 新增音樂和視訊 若要在 iPad 上取得音樂和其他音訊內容 :  您可以使用 iPad 從 iTunes Store 購買和下載內容。 在 “音樂” 中, 於瀏覽時點一下 Store。 請參閱 第 88 頁第 19 章 「iTunes Store」。  使用 “自動下載” 來自動下載您在其他 iOS 裝置和電腦上購買的新音樂。 請參閱 第 19 頁 「使用 iCloud」。  與您電腦上的 iTunes 同步。 您可以同步所有的媒體, 或者所選的歌曲和其他項目。 請 參閱 第 20 頁 「與 iTunes 同步」。  使用 iTunes Match 來在 iCloud 中儲存您的音樂資料庫, 並且在所有的 iOS 裝置和電腦上 取用資料庫。 請參閱 第 85 頁 「iTunes Match」。 播放歌曲和其他音訊 【警告】 如需避免聽力受損的重要相關資訊, 請參閱位於 support.apple.com/zh_TW/ manuals/ipad 網站上的 「重要產品資訊指南」。 您可以透過內建揚聲器、 連接至耳機埠的耳機, 或與 iPad 配對的無線 Bluetooth 立體聲耳 機來聆聽音訊。 當連接或配對耳機時, 聲音不會透過揚聲器播放。 瀏覽您的選集 : 點一下螢幕底部的任何一個按鈕。 您可以依播放列表、 歌曲、 演 出者或專輯來瀏覽。 點一下 “更多” 來依樂曲類型或作曲者進行瀏覽, 或查看您的 podcast。 播放歌曲或其他項目 : 請點一下項目。 使用螢幕最上方的控制項目來控制播放。 83檢視 “播放中” 螢幕 : 點一下螢幕最上方專輯封面的縮覽圖。 拖移來往後或往 前略過。 拖移來往後或往 前略過。 調整音量。 調整音量。 返回 返回 瀏覽音樂。 瀏覽音樂。 音軌列表 音軌列表 切換播放中和瀏覽模式。 切換播放中和瀏覽模式。 製作 Genius 播 放列表。 製作 Genius 播 放列表。 播放 / 暫停 播放 / 暫停 重複播放 重複播放 隨機播放 隨機播放 AirPlay AirPlay 重複歌曲 點一下 。 = 重複播放專輯或列表中的所有歌曲。 = 僅重複播放目前的歌曲。 = 不重複播放。 隨機播放歌曲 點一下 。 = 歌曲會隨機播放。 = 歌曲會依序播放。 跳到歌曲中的任何一個播放點 將播放磁頭沿著時間列拖移。 將手指向下滑動來降低移動速率。 設定 podcast 播放速度 點一下 。 再點一下來更改速度。 = 雙倍速度播放。 = 半速播放。 = 正常速度播放。 重複最後 30 秒的 podcast 點一下 。 使用封面插圖來瀏覽列表中的歌曲 從 “播放中” 螢幕, 由左向右滑動。 歌曲會自動開始播放。 使用 Ping 請參閱 第 89 頁 「追蹤演出者和朋友」。 在 AirPlay 揚聲器或 Apple TV 上播 放音樂 點一下 。 請參閱 第 37 頁 「使用 AirPlay」。 設定 “音樂” 的選項 前往 “設定” > “音樂”。 在使用另一個應用程式時,您可以按兩下“主畫面”按鈕 ,然後由左至右沿著螢幕底部滑動, 來顯示音訊播放控制項目。 暫停音樂時, 控制項目可用來操作目前正在播放的應用程式, 或是最近播放的應用程式。 應用程式的圖像會出現在右側。 點一下它來打開應用程式。 84 第 18 章 音樂在螢幕鎖定時, 按兩下 “主畫面” 按鈕 也會顯示音訊播放控制項目。 檢視專輯裡的音軌 查看包含目前歌曲之專輯裡的所有音軌: 從“播放中”螢幕,點一下 。(如果控制項目沒 有顯示,請先點一下螢幕。)請點一下音軌來播放。 再點一下 來回到“播放中”螢幕。 在音軌列表顯示方式中, 您可以為歌曲指定喜好程度。 您可在 iTunes 中製作智慧型播放列 表時使用喜好程度。 搜尋音訊內容 您可以搜尋 iPad 上的歌名、 演出者、 專輯、 歌曲作曲者、 podcast 和其他音訊內容。 搜尋音樂 : 瀏覽時, 在螢幕右下角的搜尋欄位中輸入文字。 您也可以從 “主畫面” 螢幕搜尋音訊內容。 請參閱 第 32 頁 「搜尋」。 iTunes Match iTunes Match 會將您的音樂資料庫儲存在 iCloud 中 (包含從光碟輸入的音樂), 並讓您在 iPad 和其他 iOS 裝置, 以及電腦上享受自己的音樂選集。 iTunes Match 是一項付費訂閱 的服務。 【注意】iTunes Match 無法在部分地區使用。 如果在“設定”>“音樂”中啟用了“使用行 動數據”, 則需要支付行動數據的費用。 訂閱 iTunes Match : 在電腦的 iTunes 中, 前往 Store > “啟用 iTunes Match”, 然後按一 下 “訂閱” 按鈕。 訂閱之後, iTunes 會將您的音樂、 歌詞和 “Genius 組曲” 加入 iCloud。 符合 iTunes Store 中現有音樂的歌曲會自動顯示在 iCloud 中供您取用。 其他剩餘的歌曲則會被上傳。 您能以 iTunes Plus 音質 (256 kbps 無 DRM 限制的 AAC) 來下載和播放相符的歌曲, 即使您的原 始歌曲的音質較差。 如需更多資訊, 請前往 www.apple.com/tw/icloud/features。 啟用 iTunes Match 前往 “設定” > “音樂”。 若啟用了 iTunes Match 功能, 即會移除來自 iPad 的同步音樂, 並且 停用 “Genius 組曲” 和 “Genius 播放列表”。 第 18 章 音樂 85Genius Genius 播放列表是從資料庫中挑選並可相互搭配的歌曲選集。 您可以在 iTunes 中製作 Genius 播放列表, 然後將它們與 iPad 同步。 您也可以直接在 iPad 上製作和儲存 Genius 播放列表。 “Genius 組曲”是針對相同種類的音樂,從您每次聆聽的資料庫重新製作為組曲的精選歌曲。 若要在 iPad 上使用 Genius, 請先在 iTunes 中啟用 Genius, 然後將 iPad 與 iTunes 同步。 “Genius 組曲” 會自動進行同步, 除非您以手動方式管理音樂並選擇想要在 iTunes 中同步 的組曲。 Genius 雖然是免費的服務, 但仍需要 Apple ID。 當您同步“Genius 組曲”時,iTunes 可能會從資料庫選取並同步您尚未選擇要同步的歌曲。 播放“Genius 組曲”: 點一下“播放列表”,然後點一下播放列表最上方的其中一個“Genius 組曲”。 製作 Genius 播放列表 : 播放歌曲, 然後點一下螢幕最上方的 。 “Genius 播放列表” 會被加到您的播放列表中, 接在 “Genius 組曲” 後面。 儲存 Genius 播放列表 檢視您的 “播放列表”, 點一下 “Genius 播放列表”, 然後點一 下 “儲存”。 播放列表會以您挑選的歌名來重新命名。 重新整理 Genius 播放列表 在播放列表中, 點一下 “重新整理”。 使用不同歌曲來製作 Genius 播放 列表 播放歌曲, 然後點一下 。 刪除已儲存的 Genius 播放列表 點一下播放列表, 然後點一下 。 在 iPad 上製作的 Genius 播放列表會在您與 iTunes 同步時拷貝到您的電腦。 【注意】 Genius 播放列表同步至 iTunes 後, 您無法將其直接從 iPad 中刪除。 請使用 iTunes 來編輯播放列表名稱、 停止同步或刪除播放列表。 86 第 18 章 音樂播放列表 您可以在 iPad 上製作和編輯自己的播放列表, 或者從電腦上的 iTunes 編輯同步的播放列 表。 製作播放列表: 檢視“播放列表”,然後點一下靠近螢幕最上方的“新增”。輸入並儲存標題, 選取要包含的歌曲和視訊, 然後點一下 “完成”。 當您製作播放列表, 並接著將 iPad 與您的電腦進行同步, 則此播放列表會同步至您的 iTunes 資料庫。 編輯播放列表 : 檢視 “播放列表”, 並選取播放列表。 點一下 “編輯”, 然後 : 若要加入更多歌曲 : 點一下 “新增歌曲”。 若要刪除歌曲 : 點一下 。 刪除播放列表中的歌曲並不會將其從 iPad 裡刪除。 若要向上或向下搬移列表中的歌曲 : 拖移 。 若您訂閱了 iTunes Match, 當您下次與電腦同步 iPad, 或透過 iCloud 無線同步時, 您編 輯的內容會拷貝到 iTunes 資料庫中的播放列表。 刪除播放列表 在 “播放列表” 中, 觸碰並按住播放列表, 然後點一下 。 從 iPad 刪除歌曲 在 “歌曲” 中滑動歌曲, 然後點一下 “刪除”。 歌曲會從 iPad 刪除, 但不會從您 Mac 或 PC 上的 iTunes 資料庫中刪 除。 家庭共享 “家庭共享”能讓您在 iPad 上播放來自 Mac 或 PC iTunes 資料庫的音樂、影片和電視節目。 iPad 和您的電腦必須位於相同的 Wi-Fi 網路上。 電腦上的 iTunes 必須開啟, 並且在 iPad 上啟用 “家庭共享” 以及登入了與 “家庭共享” 相同的 Apple ID。 【注意】 “家庭共享” 需要 iTunes 10.2 或以上版本, 可於下列網址取得 : www.itunes.com/tw/download。 贈品內容 (例如數位歌詞本和 iTunes Extras) 無法共享。 在 iPad 上播放來自電腦 iTunes 資料庫的音樂 : 1 在電腦的 iTunes 中, 前往 “進階” > “啟用家庭共享”。 2 登入, 然後按一下 “建立家庭共享”。 3 在 iPad 上,前往“設定”>“音樂”,然後使用相同的 Apple ID 和密碼登入“家庭共享”。 4 在 “音樂” 中, 點一下 “更多”, 然後點一下 “已共享” 並選擇您電腦的資料庫。 返回 iPad 中的內容 點一下 “已共享” 並選擇 “我的 iPad”。 第 18 章 音樂 87iTunes Store 19 關於 iTunes Store 使用 iTunes Store 來將內容加入到您的 iPad 中。 您可以瀏覽和購買音樂、 電視節目、 有聲 書和提示鈴聲。 您也可以購買和租借影片, 或者下載並播放 podcast 或 iTunes U 選集。 您 需要 Apple ID 才能購買內容。 請參閱 第 93 頁 「Store 設定」。 【注意】 iTunes Store 可能僅適用於部分國家和地區, 且 iTunes Store 的內容可能視不同地 區而有所不同。 功能可能會有所更改。 若要取用 iTunes Store, iPad 必須連接至 Internet。 請參閱 第 120 頁 「網路」。 尋找音樂、 視訊和更多項目 選擇類別。 選擇類別。 瀏覽內容 : 點一下其中一個內容類別 , 例如 Music (音樂) 或 Videos (視訊)。 搜尋內容 請點一下搜尋欄位並輸入一或多個單字, 然後點一下 “搜尋”。 購買、 評論或告知朋友項目資訊 點一下列表中的項目, 來在 Info (簡介) 螢幕查看更多詳細資訊。 探索演出者和朋友推薦 點一下 Ping。 請參閱 第 89 頁 「追蹤演出者和朋友」。 88購買音樂、 有聲書和鈴聲 當您在 iTunes Store 找到喜歡的歌曲、專輯、鈴聲或有聲書時,您可以購買它們並將其下載。 您可以在購買前先試聽項目, 以確定這是您要的項目。 試聽歌曲、 鈴聲或有聲書 : 點一下項目並依照螢幕上的指示操作。 兌換預付卡或促銷代碼 點一下 Music (音樂), 然後點一下螢幕底部的 Redeem (兌換) 並依照螢幕上的指示來操作。 當您登入後, 剩餘的商店信用餘額與 您的 Apple ID 資訊會一起顯示在多數 iTunes Store 螢幕的底部。 完成專輯 當您檢視任何專輯時,請點一下 Complete My Album(完成我的專輯) 下方其餘歌曲的折扣價格 (不適用於部分國家或地區)。 若要檢視 完成其他專輯所提供的折扣, 請點一下 Music (音樂), 然後點一 下 Complete My Album O∂ers (完成我的專輯價格)。 下載先前的購買項目 點一下 “已購買”。 您也可以在瀏覽時下載項目 ; 只要點一下 “下載” (通常您看到價 格的位置)。 自動下載在其他 iOS 裝置和電腦上 完成的購買項目 前往 “設定” > Store, 然後啟用您想要自動下載的購買項目種類。 購買或租借視訊 iTunes Store 可讓您購買和下載影片、 電視節目和音樂錄影帶。 有些影片也可供租借一段時 間。 視訊內容可能會有標準畫質 (SD) 格式、高畫質 (HD) 格式,或者兩種格式皆有。 購買或租借視訊 : 點一下 Buy (購買) 或 Rent (租借)。 您購買項目之後,它會開始下載並顯示在 Downloads(下載項目)螢幕中。請參閱第90頁「檢 查下載狀態」。 預覽視訊 點一下 Preview (預覽)。 在電視上使用 AirPlay 和 Apple TV 觀看預覽內容 開始播放預覽內容時, 請點一下 , 並選擇 Apple TV。 請參閱 第 37 頁 「使用 AirPlay」。 追蹤演出者和朋友 使用 Ping 與全世界最熱情的樂迷連結。 追蹤喜愛的演出者可知道最新發行專輯、近期演唱 會和巡迴演唱資訊、 及樂迷獨享的照片和影片,還有演唱者的在音樂界的影響。 讀取朋友 的音樂評論, 並查看他們購買哪些音樂及計畫參加哪個演唱會。 此外, 您還可發表喜愛的 音樂, 並為您的追隨者來發表評論。 您需要建立 Ping 描述檔, 才能建立與探索音樂連結。 建立您的 Ping 描述檔 : 在您的 Mac 或 PC 開啟 iTunes 應用程式, 按一下 Ping 然後依照 螢幕上的指示來操作。 追蹤演出者 點一下演出者描述檔頁面上的 “追蹤”。 追蹤朋友 點一下 “人物”, 在搜尋欄位中輸入朋友姓名, 然後點一下 “追 蹤”。 當您追蹤某人時, 該成員並不會自動追隨你。 在您的描述檔裡, 當 收到請求時您可選擇允許或拒絕被追蹤, 或不檢查而直接接收所有新 的追蹤者 (此為預設值)。 分享您的想法 當您瀏覽專輯和歌曲時, 可在音樂單曲上點一下 Post (發佈) 來發 表意見, 或在喜歡的歌曲上點一下 Like (喜歡)。 您的朋友會在他 們的 Ping Activity feed 中看到您的想法。 第 19 章 iTunes Store 89共享演唱會計畫 在您的描述檔頁面上點一下 Concerts (演唱會) 可查看您追蹤之演 唱者的近期演唱會, 並可查看您哪個朋友會去聽演唱會。 點一下 Tickets (購票) 來購買您的門票, 或點一下 I'm Going (我會參加) 讓其他人知道您也會前往演唱會。 (不適用於部分國家或地區。) 連續播送或下載 Podcast 您可以透過 Internet 來聆聽或觀看從 iTunes Store 連續播送的音訊或視訊 podcast。 您也 可以下載音訊和視訊 podcast。 連續播送 podcast : 點一下 Podcasts 來瀏覽 iTunes Store 中的 podcast。 視訊 podcast 會帶有視訊圖像 的標示。 下載 podcast 請點一下 Free (免費) 按鈕, 然後點一下 Download (下載)。 下載的 podcast 會顯示在 Podcast 播放列表中。 聆聽或觀看已下載的 podcast 在 “音樂” 中, 點一下 Podcast, 然後點一下 podcast。 視訊 podcast 也會顯示在您的視訊列表中。 檢查下載狀態 您可以檢查 Downloads (下載項目) 螢幕來查看進行中和排定之下載項目的狀態,包含您 預先訂購的購買項目。 查看正在下載的項目狀態 : 請點一下 Downloads (下載項目)。 預先訂購的項目不會在發行後自動下載。 回到 Downloads (下載項目) 螢幕來開始下載。 下載預先訂購的項目 點一下項目, 然後點一下 。 如果下載中斷, 它會在有 Internet 連線時再次開始下載。 或者, 如果您打開電腦中的 iTunes, iTunes 會完成下載至 iTunes 資料庫 (如果您的電腦已連接至 Internet 並使用相同 的 Apple ID 登入)。 檢視帳號資訊 若要在 iPad 上檢視您 Apple ID 的 iTunes Store 資訊, 請點一下您的 Apple ID (位於多數 iTunes Store 螢幕的底部)。 或者前往“設定”> Store,並點一下“檢視 Apple ID”。 您必 須登入才能檢視帳號資訊。 請參閱 第 93 頁 「Store 設定」。 驗證下載項目 您可以使用電腦中的 iTunes 來確認, 您在 iTunes Store 或 App Store 上購買的所有音樂、 視訊、應用程式和其他項目是否都已存在於 iTunes 資料庫中。 若下載中斷,您可能會想要 執行此步驟。 驗證您的下載項目 : 在電腦上的 iTunes 裡, 前往 Store > “檢查可用的下載項目⋯”。 若要查看所有的購買項目,請使用您的 Apple ID 登入,前往 Store > “檢視我的帳號”,然 後按一下 Purchase History (購買記錄)。 90 第 19 章 iTunes StoreApp Store 20 關於 App Store 您可以從 App Store 搜尋、 瀏覽、 評論和購買應用程式, 並直接下載到 iPad 上。 【注意】 App Store 可能無法在部分國家或地區使用, 且 App Store 內容可能因國家或地區 而異。 功能可能會有所更改。 若要瀏覽 App Store, iPad 必須連接 Internet。 請參閱 第 120 頁 「網路」。 若要購買應用 程式, 您需要一組 Apple ID。 請參閱 第 93 頁 「Store 設定」。 檢查應用程式 更新。 檢查應用程式 更新。 尋找和下載應用程式 瀏覽精選項目來查看新增、 受注目或建議的應用程式, 或是瀏覽 25 大排行榜來查看最常 用的應用程式。 如果您要尋找特定的應用程式, 請使用 Search (搜尋) 功能。 瀏覽 App Store: 點一下 Featured (精選項目)、 Categories (類型) 或 Top Charts (熱 門項目)。 91使用 Genius 來瀏覽 點一下 Genius, 依據現有的應用程式集內容, 來查看建議的應用程 式清單。 若要啟用 Genius, 請依照螢幕上的指示來操作。 Genius 雖 然是免費的服務, 但您仍需要 Apple ID。 搜尋應用程式 請點一下 Search (搜尋), 再點一下搜尋欄位並輸入文字, 然後點 一下 “搜尋”。 在 iTunes 中透過電子郵件傳送應 用程式 “簡介” 頁面的連結 點一下 “告知朋友”。 傳送應用程式給某人作為禮物 點一下 Gift This App (贈送此應用程式), 然後依照螢幕上的指示執 行。 回報問題 點一下 “回報問題”。 從列表裡選取問題, 或輸入註解, 然後點 一下 “回報”。 購買並下載應用程式 點一下價格 (或點一下 FREE (免費)),然後點一下 BUY NOW (立 即購買)。 若您已購買應用程式,則 Install (安裝) 會取代價格顯示在 “簡介” 螢幕上。 再次下載應用程式無須付費。 兌換預付卡或促銷代碼 點一下 Featured (精選項目) 螢幕底部的 Redeem (兌換), 然後 依照螢幕上的指示來操作。 查看下載項目的狀態 在您開始下載應用程式後, 其圖像會顯示在 “主畫面” 螢幕上, 並顯示進度指示器。 下載先前已購買的應用程式 點一下 Purchased (已購買), 在列表中尋找應用程式, 然後點一 下 Download (下載)。 您也可以在瀏覽時下載項目 ; 只要點一下 Download (下載) (通 常您看到價格的位置)。 自動下載在其他 iOS 裝置和電腦上 完成的購買項目 前往 “設定” > Store, 然後啟用您想要自動下載的購買項目種類。 刪除應用程式 您可以刪除從 App Store 安裝的應用程式。 如果您刪除應用程式, 與該應用程式相關的資 料也會被刪除。 刪除 App Store 應用程式: 觸碰並按住 “主畫面” 螢幕上的應用程式圖像,直到圖像開始 擺動, 然後點一下 。 完成刪除應用程式時, 按下 “主畫面” 按鈕 。 如需重置 iPad 以清除每個應用程式和您所有資料與設定的相關資訊,請參閱 第 123 頁 「重 置」。 92 第 20 章 App StoreStore 設定 使用 Store 設定來透過 Apple ID 登入、 建立新的 Apple ID 或編輯現有的帳號。 若您有多 個 Apple ID, 您可以使用 Store 設定來登出, 並使用另一個 Apple ID 來登入。 如需 iTunes Store 條款與條件的相關資訊, 請前往 www.apple.com/legal/itunes/ww/。 使用 Apple ID 登入: 前往 “設定” > Store, 點一下 “登入”, 然後點一下 “使用現有 Apple ID” 並輸入您的 Apple ID 和密碼。 檢視和編輯您的帳號資訊 前往 “設定” > Store, 點一下您的 Apple ID, 然後點一下 “檢視 Apple ID”。 點一下某個項目來進行編輯。 若要更改您的密碼, 請 點一下 Apple ID 欄位。 使用其他 Apple ID 來登入 前往 “設定” > Store,點一下您的帳號名稱,然後點一下 “登出”。 建立新的 Apple ID 前往 “設定” > Store, 點一下 “登入”, 然後點一下 “新增 Apple ID” 並依照螢幕上的指示執行。 自動下載購買項目 前往 “設定” > Store, 然後啟用您想要自動下載到 iPad 的購買項目 種類, 如 “音樂” 或 “書籍”。 您也可以關閉 “書報攤” 應用 程式的自動更新。 使用行動網路下載購買項目 前往 “設定” > Store, 然後啟用或關閉 “使用行動數據”。 透過 行動網路下載購買項目可能會產生電信費用。 “書報攤” 應用程式 只會在 iPad 連接 Wi-Fi 網路時更新。 請參閱 第 94 頁第 21 章 「書報 攤」。 第 20 章 App Store 93書報攤 21 關於書報攤 “書報攤” 可使用書架來整理報章雜誌應用程式的訂閱內容, 讓您快速且輕鬆地取用所 有出版品。 “書報攤” 應用程式會顯示在書架上, 每當有新一期的內容可取得時, 會 透過標記讓您得知新內容可供閱讀。 它們會自動遞送到 iPad。 觸碰並按住出版 品來重新排列。 觸碰並按住出版 品來重新排列。 尋找 “書報攤” 應用程式 : 點一下 “書報攤” 來顯示書架, 然後點一下 Store。 當您購買書報攤應用程式時, 它會加入您的書架以便取用。 在應用程式下載後, 請打開 來檢視該期內容和訂閱選項。 若要訂閱內容必須在應用程式內進行購買, 費用會記入您的 Apple ID 帳號。 請參閱 第 93 頁 「Store 設定」。 價格可能有所差異, 且 “書報攤” 應用程式可能無法適用於部分國家或地區。 94閱讀最新一期的刊物 當新聞報紙或雜誌有新的一期時, “書報攤” 會在連接 Wi-Fi 時自動下載, 並在應用程 式圖像上顯示標記來通知您。 若要開始閱讀,請打開 “書報攤”,然後找出帶有 “新增” 橫幅的應用程式。 每一個應用程式有自己的方式來管理各期內容。 如需如何刪除、 尋找和使用各期內容的 相關資訊, 請參閱應用程式的輔助說明資訊或 App Store 列表。 您無法將 “書報攤” 應 用程式從書架上移除, 也無法將其他類型的應用程式放到書架上。 關閉自動下載 : 前往 “設定” > Store, 並停用出版品的自動下載。 第 21 章 書報攤 95iBooks 22 關於 iBooks iBooks 是閱讀和購買書籍的最佳方式之一。 從 App Store 下載免費的 iBooks 應用程式, 然後從內建的 iBookstore 取得各種內容, 從經典作品到暢銷書。 一旦下載書籍後, 它便會 顯示在您的書架上。 若要下載 iBooks 應用程式和使用 iBookstore, 您需要 Internet 連線和 Apple ID。 如果您 沒有 Apple ID, 或您想要使用其他 Apple ID 進行購買, 請前往 “設定” > Store。 請參 閱 第 93 頁 「Store 設定」。 【注意】 iBooks 應用程式和 iBookstore 可能無法適用於部分語言或地區。 使用 iBookstore 在 iBooks 應用程式中,點一下 Store 來打開 iBookstore。 您可以瀏覽推薦書籍或暢銷書籍, 以及依照作者或主題來尋找書籍。 當您找到喜歡的書籍時, 可以購買並下載。 【注意】 iBookstore 的部份功能可能無法適用於部份地點。 購買書籍: 找出您要的書籍、點一下價格、點一下 Buy Book(購買書籍),如果是免費書籍, 則點一下 Get Book (取得書籍)。 取得書籍的相關資訊 您可以閱讀書籍的摘要、 閱讀評論, 並在購買前先下載書籍樣本。 購買書籍後, 您可以編寫自己的評論。 下載先前購買的項目 點一下 “已下載”,或點一下 “下載” (通常您看到價格的位置)。 自動下載在其他 iOS 裝置或電腦上 完成的購買項目 前往 “設定” > Store, 然後啟用您想要自動下載的購買項目種類。 同步書籍和 PDF 使用 iTunes 來在 iPad 和電腦之間同步書籍和 PDF, 並且從 iTunes Store 購買書籍。 當 iPad 連接到電腦後, “書籍” 面板可讓您選擇要同步的項目。 您也可將沒有 DRM 限制的 ePub 書籍和 PDF 加入到您的 iTunes 資料庫。 PDF 和 ePub 格式的書籍可以在網路上取得。 將書籍或 PDF 同步至 iPad: 然後在電腦上的 iTunes 中,選擇 “檔案” > “加到資料庫” 並選取 .pdf、 .epub 或 .ibooks 檔案。 將 iPad 連接到電腦上並同步。 若要將書籍或 PDF 加入 iBooks 而不經由同步, 請將它們從電腦上以電子郵件寄送給自己。 在 iPad 上打開電子郵件, 然後觸碰並按住附件, 並且從顯示的選單中選擇 “在 iBooks 中 打開”。 96閱讀書籍 若要閱讀書籍,十分輕鬆。 從書架點一下您想要閱讀的書籍。 如果您沒有看到正在尋找的 書籍, 請點一下 “藏書” 來移至其他藏書。 新增書籤。 新增書籤。 點兩下來縮放。 點兩下來縮放。 前往不同頁面。 前往不同頁面。 躺下時閱讀書籍 : 請使用方向鎖定以避免在旋轉 iPad 時, iPad 螢幕也會跟著旋轉。 請參 閱 第 15 頁 「直向或橫向檢視」。 每一本書籍都有其特殊的功能, 視其內容與格式而定。 以下敘述的部分功能可能無法在您 閱讀的書籍中使用。 例如,列印功能僅適用於 PDF, 以及如果書籍不包含錄製的旁白, 您 就不會看到朗讀的圖像。 顯示控制項目 在頁面的中央附近點一下。 翻頁 點一下靠近頁面右側或左側邊緣的位置, 或者向左或向右滑動。 若 要更改在您點一下左側邊緣時翻頁的方向, 請前往 “設定” > iBooks > “點一下左頁邊”。 檢視目錄 點一下 。 您也可以在某些書籍上以手指開合的方式來檢視目錄。 新增或移除書籤 點一下 。 您可以設定多個書籤。 若要移除書籤, 請點一下書籤。 當您關閉書籍時, 不需要加入書籤, 因為 iBooks 會記得您上一次離 開時的位置。 第 22 章 iBooks 97加入或移除重點 點兩下文字, 使用抓取點來調整選取範圍, 然後點一下 “重點” 來選擇顏色。 若要移除重點, 請點一下畫重點的文字, 然後點一下 。 若要在文字加上底線, 請點一下 。 若要更改顏色, 請點一下畫重點的文字, 然後再從選單中選擇新的 顏色。 新增、 移除或編輯筆記 點兩下單字, 然後點一下 “筆記”。 當您完成編寫筆記時, 點一 下頁面的其他位置來將其關閉。 若要檢視筆記, 請點一下靠近反白文字邊緣的指標。 若要移除筆記, 請刪除其文字。 若要移除筆記與重點, 請點一下畫 重點的文字, 然後點一下 。 若要更改顏色, 請點一下畫重點的文字, 然後再從選單中選擇新的 顏色。 若要加入筆記和重點, 請點一下畫重點的文字, 然後點一下 。 檢視所有書籤 點一下 , 然後從列表中選擇書籤。 檢視所有筆記 視書籍而定, 請點一下 , 然後點一下 “筆記”, 或點一下 。 請參閱 第 99 頁 「學習筆記與字彙列表」。 放大影像 點兩下影像來放大, 或在某些書籍中, 用手指撥動來放大影像。 前往特定頁面 使用螢幕底部的頁面導覽控制項目。 或者, 點一下 並輸入頁碼, 然後在搜尋結果中點一下頁面。 搜尋書籍內容 點一下 。 若要搜尋網頁, 請點一下 “搜尋網頁” 或 “搜尋 Wikipedia”。 Safari 會打開並顯示結果。 搜尋其他相同的文字或詞句 點兩下文字, 使用抓取點來調整選取範圍, 然後在顯示的選單中點 一下 “搜尋”。 查詢單字 點兩下文字, 使用抓取點來調整選取範圍, 然後在顯示的選單中點 一下 “定義”。 部分語言可能無法使用定義的功能。 聆聽書籍 點一下 。 此功能只能在部分書籍中使用。 如果您有視力障礙, 您也可以使用 VoiceOver 來朗讀幾乎每一本書籍 的文字。 請參閱 第 104 頁 「關於 VoiceOver」。 iBooks 會使用您的 Apple ID 來儲存您的藏書、 書籤、 筆記和目前頁面的資訊, 因此您可 以在不同的 iOS 裝置上流暢地閱讀書籍。 當您打開或結束應用程式時, iBooks 會儲存所有 書籍的資訊。 當您打開或關閉個別的書籍時, 也會儲存其資訊。 啟用或關閉同步 : 前往 “設定” > iBooks。 某些書籍可能會連接儲存在網路上的音訊或視訊。 啟用或關閉線上音訊與視訊的存取 : 前往 “設定” > iBooks > “線上音訊與視訊”。 【注意】 若 iPad 可使用行動數據連線, 播放這些檔案可能需要付費給電信業者。 更改書籍的外觀 部分書籍能讓您更改字級、 字體和頁面顏色。 更改亮度 : 點一下頁面靠近中央的位置來顯示控制項目, 然後點一下 。 若您看不到 , 請先點一下 。 98 第 22 章 iBooks更改字體或字級大小 點一下頁面靠近中央的位置來顯示控制項目, 然後點一下 。 點一 下 “字體” 來選擇字級。 並非所有的書籍都能更改字體。 當 iPad 是處於直向模式時, 部分書籍只能讓您更改字級大小。 更改頁面和文字的顏色 點一下頁面靠近中央的位置來顯示控制項目, 點一下 , 然後點一 下 “主題” 。 此設定會套用到所有支援此功能的書籍上。 使用全螢幕來顯示書籍 點一下頁面靠近中央的位置來顯示控制項目,點一下 ,點一下“主 題”, 然後啟用 “全螢幕”。 某些書籍會自動填滿整個螢幕。 啟用或關閉齊行和連字號 前往 “設定” > iBooks。 部分書籍和 PDF 無法齊行或斷字。 學習筆記與字彙列表 在支援的書籍中, 您可以使用筆記顯示方式以卡片來複習所有重點和筆記。 若要快速找到 筆記, 請依章節來檢視或搜尋其內容。 檢視您的筆記 : 點一下 。 依章節檢視筆記 章節列表中的標記會指出您已加到各章的筆記數和重點數。 如果您沒 有看到章節列表, 請點一下 “章節” 按鈕。 點一下章節來查看它的筆記。 點一下列表中的項目來查看筆記和上下 文的重點。 搜尋所有筆記 在筆記顯示方式中, 於搜尋欄位中輸入單字或片語。 如果您沒有看 到搜尋欄位, 請點一下 “章節” 按鈕。 隨即會顯示含有相符筆記 和重點的章節。 點一下章節來查看它的筆記。 以學習卡來複習筆記和字彙 點一下 “學習卡”。 每張卡片的正片會顯示您標為重點的文字。 請滑動來切換卡片。 如 果卡片含有筆記 (以 表示), 請點一下卡片來將其翻面。 點一下 來選擇要顯示哪些重點, 或者隨機排列卡片。 如果該章節 包含字彙列表, 您也可以在卡片中加入它。 透過電子郵件傳送您的筆記 在檢視筆記時,點一下 。 選擇您要共享的筆記,然後點一下 “透 過電子郵件傳送”。 刪除筆記 在檢視筆記時,點一下 。 選擇您要刪除的筆記,然後點一下 “刪 除”。 與多媒體互動 某些書籍具有互動性元件,如影片、圖表、簡報、圖庫、3D 物件和章節評論。 若要與多媒 體物件互動,請點一下、滑動或撥動它。 例如,使用簡報時,您可以點一下 來開始,然 後點一下來查看每個畫面。 若要以全螢幕來檢視元件,請用兩指往外撥。 完成時,請向內 捏來關閉。 列印或郵寄 PDF 您可以使用 iBooks 透過電子郵件來傳送 PDF 副本, 或者用支援的印表機來列印全部或一部 分的 PDF。 您可以用郵件寄送或列印 PDF, 但這些功能不適用於書籍。 郵寄 PDF: 打開 PDF,然後點一下 並選擇“郵寄文件”。隨即便會出現附加 PDF 的新郵件。 當您完成編寫郵件時, 點一下 “傳送”。 動作按鈕 列印 PDF 打開 PDF, 然後點一下 並選擇 “列印”。 選擇印表機、 頁面範圍 及份數, 然後點一下 “列印”。 請參閱 第 33 頁 「列印」。 動作 按鈕 第 22 章 iBooks 99整理書架 使用書架來瀏覽您的書籍和 PDF。 您也可以將項目整理到藏書中。 觸碰並按住書籍來 重新排列。 觸碰並按住書籍來 重新排列。 可從可從 iBookstore iBookstore 上取得。能取得的書籍可能會有所更動。 上取得。能取得的書籍可能會有所更動。 將書籍或 PDF 搬移至藏書中: 前往書架並點一下“編輯”。 點一下您想要搬移的項目,然 後點一下 “搬移” 並選取藏書。 當您將書籍或 PDF 加入書架時,便會顯示在“書籍”或 PDF 藏書中。 在此,您可以將其搬 移至其他藏書中。 例如,您可能想要為工作或學校建立相關的藏書, 或者供參考和閒暇時 閱讀。 檢視藏書 點一下 “藏書”, 然後從出現的列表中挑選新的藏數。 管理藏書 點一下“藏書”來顯示藏書列表。 若要編輯藏書名稱,請點一下“編 輯”。 您無法編輯或移除內建的 “書籍” 或 PDF 藏書。 排序書架 點一下 , 然後從螢幕底部的選擇中選取一種排序方式。 從書架上刪除項目 點一下 “編輯”, 然後點一下您想要刪除的每本書籍或 PDF, 這樣 會顯示註記符號。 點一下 “刪除”。 完成刪除時, 請點一下 “完 成”。 如果您刪除購買的書籍, 可以從 iBookstore 的 Purchases (購買項目) 再下載一次。 搜尋書籍 前往書架 : 點一下狀態列來捲動至螢幕最上方, 然後點一下 。 搜 尋的動作會尋找標題和作者名稱。 100 第 22 章 iBooksGame Center 23 關於 Game Center 在 Game Center 中尋找新的遊戲, 並與全世界的朋友分享您的遊戲體驗。 邀請您的朋友 來進行遊戲, 或是使用自動配對來尋找其他實力相當的對手。 在遊戲中達到特定的成就來 賺取獎勵積點, 查看您朋友已達成的進度, 並檢視排行榜來查看誰是最厲害的玩家。 【注意】 Game Center 可能無法在部分國家或地區使用, 且可進行的遊戲可能因國家或地 區而異。 若要使用 Game Center, 您必須連接 Internet 並擁有 Apple ID。 如果您有 iCloud 帳號, 就可以在 Game Center 中使用該 Apple ID。 如果您沒有 Apple ID, 或如果您想要對遊 戲使用其他 ID, 您可以在 Game Center 中建立一個帳號, 如下方 中所述。 顯示您的狀態、更改 照片或登出。 顯示您的狀態、更改 照片或登出。 邀請朋友進行遊戲。 邀請朋友進行遊戲。 選擇要玩的 遊戲。 選擇要玩的 遊戲。 回應朋友的邀請。 回應朋友的邀請。 登入 Game Center 登入: 打開 Game Center。 如果您在 “本人” 螢幕最上方看到您的別名和照片, 便已經 為登入狀態。否則,請輸入您的 Apple ID 和密碼,然後點一下“登入”。或者,點一下“新 增帳號” 來建立新的 Apple ID。 新增照片 點一下名稱旁的照片。 公佈您的狀態 點一下 “本人”, 點一下狀態列, 然後輸入您的狀態。 檢視您的帳號設定 點一下 “本人”, 點一下帳號橫幅, 然後選擇 “檢視帳號”。 101登出 點一下 “本人”, 點一下 “帳號” 橫幅, 然後點一下 “登出”。 每次您結束 Game Center 時, 無須登出。 購買和下載遊戲 Game Center 的遊戲可以從 App Store 取得。 購買和下載遊戲 : 點一下 “遊戲”, 然後點一下推薦的遊戲, 或點一下 “尋找 Game Center 遊戲”。 App Store 中的 Game Center 部分即會顯示可在 Game Center 中進行的遊戲。 您可以 瀏覽這個部分, 並從其中購買和下載遊戲。 請參閱 第 91 頁第 20 章 「App Store」。 購買朋友已經有的遊戲 點一下 “朋友”, 然後點一下朋友的姓名。 點一下您朋友遊戲列表 中的遊戲, 然後點一下遊戲的價格。 執行遊戲 執行遊戲 : 請點一下 “遊戲”, 選擇遊戲, 然後點一下 “執行遊戲”。 查看最高得分玩家列表 點一下 “遊戲”, 然後選擇遊戲, 並點一下 “排行榜”。 查看您可嘗試的成就 請點一下 “遊戲”, 選擇遊戲, 然後點一下 “成就”。 遊戲後返回 Game Center 按下 “主畫面” 按鈕, 或是在 “主畫面” 上點一下 Game Center。 與朋友進行遊戲 Game Center 能讓您與全世界的玩家進行交流。 您可以提出邀請來將朋友加入 Game Center, 或是接受其他玩家的邀請。 邀請朋友加入多人遊戲: 點一下“朋友”,選擇朋友與遊戲,並點一下“執行”。如果遊戲 允許或需要其他玩家,請選擇額外的玩家,然後點一下“下一步”。傳送邀請,然後等待其 他人接受邀請。 當每位玩家就緒時, 開始進行遊戲。 如果無法聯絡到朋友, 或朋友沒有回覆邀請, 您可以點一下 “自動配對” 來讓 Game Center 為您尋找其他玩家, 或是點一下 “邀請朋友” 來嘗試邀請其他朋友。 傳送朋友邀請 點一下 “朋友” 或 “邀請”, 點一下 “新增朋友”, 然後輸入 朋友的電子郵件位址或 Game Center 別名。 若要瀏覽您的聯絡資訊, 請點一下 。 若要在邀請中加入數位朋友, 請在每個位址後輸入 Return。 回覆朋友邀請 點一下 “邀請”,點一下該邀請,然後點一下 “接受” 或 “忽略”。 若要回報邀請的問題, 請向上滑動並點一下 “回報問題”。 查看朋友玩的遊戲, 以及查看您 朋友的分數。 點一下 “朋友”,點一下朋友的姓名,然後點一下 “遊戲” 或 “遊 戲點數”。 在朋友列表中尋找人員 點一下狀態列來捲動至螢幕最上方, 然後點一下搜尋欄位並開始輸 入。 避免來自其他人的遊戲邀請 請在 Game Center 帳號設定中關閉 “遊戲邀請”。 請參閱 第 103 頁 「Game Center 設定」。 讓您的電子郵件位址保持私密 請在 Game Center 帳號設定中關閉 “透過電子郵件尋找本人”。 請參 閱 第 103 頁 「Game Center 設定」。 停用所有多人遊戲活動 前往 “設定” > “一般” > “限制” > Game Center,並關閉 “多 人遊戲”。 102 第 23 章 Game Center不允許朋友邀請 前往 “設定” > “一般” > “限制” > Game Center,並關閉 “新 增朋友”。 查看朋友的朋友列表 點一下 “朋友”,點一下朋友的姓名,然後點一下其圖片下方的 “朋 友”。 移除朋友 點一下 “朋友”, 點一下姓名, 然後點一下 “移除朋友”。 回報不禮貌的行為或不適當的舉止 點一下 “朋友”, 點一下人員的姓名, 然後點一下 “回報問題”。 Game Center 設定 部分 Game Center 設定與您用來登入的 Apple ID 相關。 其他則位於您 iPad 的 “設定” 應 用程式中。 為您的 Apple ID 更改 Game Center 設定 : 請以您的 Apple ID 登入, 點一下 “本人”, 點一下 “帳號” 橫幅, 然後選擇 “檢視帳號”。 指定您想收到哪些 Game Center 的通知 : 前往 “設定” > “通知” > Game Center。 如 果 Game Center 沒有出現, 請啟用 “通知”。 更改影響 Game Center 的限制: 前往 “設定” > “一般” > “限制” > Game Center。 第 23 章 Game Center 103輔助使用 24 輔助使用功能 iPad 整合許多輔助使用功能, 包括 :  VoiceOver 螢幕閱讀器  縮放比例  放大字體  黑底白字  朗讀所選範圍  朗讀自動文字  單聲道音訊與平衡 AssistiveTouch   支援點字顯示器  播放隱藏式字幕內容 縮放、 黑底白字和單聲道音訊皆可與所有的應用程式搭配使用。 “放大字體” 可以與 Mail 和 “備忘錄” 搭配使用。 VoiceOver 可與內建的 iPad 應用程式和部分從 App Store 下 載的協力廠商應用程式搭配使用。 隱藏式字幕功能可與視訊和支援的 Podcast 搭配使用。 如需更多關於 iPad 輔助功能的資訊, 請前往 www.apple.com/tw/accessibility。 您可以在 iPad 上的 “輔助使用” 設定中啟用或關閉個別輔助使用功能。 您可以在 iPad 連 接至電腦時, 開啟或關閉 iTunes 的部分功能。 使用 iPad 啟用輔助使用功能 : 前往 “設定” > “一般” > “輔助使用”。 使用 iTunes 啟用輔助使用功能 : 將 iPad 連接到您的電腦, 並在 iTunes 的裝置列表中選擇 iPad。 按一下 “摘要”, 然後按一下 “摘要” 螢幕底部的 “設定輔助使用”。 關於 VoiceOver VoiceOver 會大聲描述在螢幕上顯示的內容, 這樣您無須觀看螢幕便可使用 iPad。 VoiceOver 會在您選取時, 告知您在螢幕上的每個元件。 當您選取元件時, 它會以黑色的 矩形框住 (即 VoiceOver 游標), 且 VoiceOver 會朗讀其名稱或描述該項目。 觸碰螢幕或拖移手指來聽取螢幕上的不同項目。 當您選取文字時,VoiceOver 會朗讀文字。 如果您啟用 “朗讀提示”, VoiceOver 可能會告知您該項目的名稱並為您提供提示, 例如 “點兩下來打開”。 若要與螢幕上的項目互動, 如按鈕或連結, 請使用 第 107 頁 「瞭 解 VoiceOver 手勢」 所述的手勢。 當您前往新的螢幕時, VoiceOver 會播放聲音, 並自動選擇和朗讀螢幕的第一個元件 (通 常為左上角的項目)。 VoiceOver 還可讓您瞭解何時顯示器更改為橫向或直向, 以及螢幕 何時鎖定或解鎖。 104【注意】 VoiceOver 會使用 “國際設定” 中指定的語言進行朗讀,可能會受 “地區格式” 設定(“設定”>“一般”>“國際設定”>“地區格式”)的影響。 VoiceOver 可用於多種 語言, 但並非全部語言皆適用。 設定 VoiceOver 【重要事項】 VoiceOver 會更改您用來控制 iPad 的手勢。 啟用 VoiceOver 之後, 您必須 使用 VoiceOver 手勢來操作 iPad, 甚至必須再次關閉 VoiceOver 才能繼續標準操作。 【注意】 您無法同時使用 VoiceOver 和 “縮放”。 啟用或關閉 VoiceOver: 前往 “設定” > “一般” > “輔助使用” > VoiceOver。 您也可 以設定 “按三下主畫面按鈕” 來啟用或關閉 VoiceOver。 請參閱 第 113 頁 「按三下主畫面 按鈕」。 啟用或關閉朗讀提示 前往 “設定” > “一般” > “輔助使用” > VoiceOver。 當 “朗 讀提示” 啟用時, VoiceOver 可能會告知您該項目的動作或為您提供 提示,例如 “點兩下來打開”。 您也可以將 “提示” 加到轉輪中, 然後向上或向下滑動進行調整。 請參閱 第 108 頁 「使用 VoiceOver 轉 輪控制項目」。 設定 VoiceOver 朗讀速度 前往 “設定” > “一般” > “輔助使用” > VoiceOver, 然後拖移 “朗讀速度” 滑桿。 您也可以將 “語音速度” 加到轉輪中, 然後 向上或向下滑動進行調整。 請參閱 第 108 頁 「使用 VoiceOver 轉輪控 制項目」。 更改輸入回饋 前往“設定”>“一般”>“輔助使用”> VoiceOver >“輸入回饋”。 在輸入回饋中使用音標 前往“設定”>“一般”>“輔助使用”> VoiceOver >“使用音標”。 文字會逐個字元朗讀。 VoiceOver 會先朗讀字元, 然後是其音標對等 單字, 例如 “f”, 然後是 “foxtrot”。 使用音調變更 前往 “設定” > “一般” > “輔助使用” > VoiceOver > “使用音 調變更”。 在輸入字母時, VoiceOver 會使用較高的音調, 而在刪除 字母時, 則會使用較低的音調。 VoiceOver 在朗讀群組 (如列表或表 格) 的第一個項目時, 也會使用較高的音調, 而在朗讀群組的最後 一個項目時, 會使用較低的音調。 設定網頁瀏覽的轉輪選項 前往 “設定” > “一般” > “輔助使用” > VoiceOver > “轉輪”。 點一下來選取或取消選取選項, 或者向上拖移 來重新調整項目的 位置。 更改 VoiceOver 發音 將轉輪設為 “語言”,然後向上或向下滑動。 當您選取多種發音時, “語言” 轉輪位置可隨時供您使用。 在語言轉輪中選擇可用的發音 前往“設定”>“一般”>“輔助使用”> VoiceOver >“語言轉輪”。 若要更改語言在列表中的位置, 向上或向下拖移 。 更改 iPad 的語言 前往 “設定” > “一般” > “國際設定” > “語言”。 某些語言 可能受 “設定” > “一般” > “國際設定” > “地區格式” 中 “地 區格式” 的影響。 導覽時略過影像 前往“設定”>“一般”>“輔助使用”> VoiceOver >“導覽影像”。 您可以選擇略過所有影像, 或只略過沒有描述的影像。 解鎖 iPad 時朗讀通知 前往“設定”>“一般”>“輔助使用”> VoiceOver >“朗讀通知”。 若此選項關閉, iPad 在您解鎖時只會朗讀時間。 使用 VoiceOver 選擇螢幕中的項目: 在螢幕上方拖移手指。 VoiceOver 會識別您觸碰的每個元件。 您可以 使用單指向左或向右滑動, 有系統地從一個元件移動到另一個元件。 這樣會由左至右、 從 上到下來選擇元件。 向右滑動來前往下一個元件, 或向左滑動來前往上一個元件。 第 24 章 輔助使用 105啟用直向導覽 將 “直向導覽” 加到轉輪中, 使用轉輪將其選取, 然後向上或向 下移至上方或下方的項目。 請參閱 第 108 頁 「使用 VoiceOver 轉輪控 制項目」。 選擇螢幕上的第一個或最後一個元 件 使用四指向上或向下滑動。 解鎖 iPad 選擇 “解鎖” 按鈕, 然後點兩下螢幕。 依名稱選擇項目 使用兩指在螢幕中的任意位置點三下, 打開” 項目選擇器”。 然後 在搜尋欄位中輸入名稱, 或者向左或向右滑動來依字母順序瀏覽列 表, 或者點一下列表右側的索引表, 並向上或向下滑動來快速瀏覽 項目列表。 更改螢幕項目的名稱, 以便更容 易找到 在螢幕中的任意位置使用兩指點一下並按住。 朗讀所選元件的文字 : 使用單指向下或向上滑動來朗讀下一個或上一個單字或字元 (轉 動轉輪控制項目可選擇字元或單字)。 您可以包含音標拼字。 請參閱 第 105 頁 「設定 VoiceOver」。 停止朗讀項目 使用兩指點一下螢幕。 再用兩指點一下來繼續朗讀。 當您選擇其他 項目時會繼續自動朗讀。 更改朗讀音量 使用 iPad 上的音量按鈕, 或將音量加到轉輪中, 並向上或向下進行 調整。 請參閱 第 108 頁 「使用 VoiceOver 轉輪控制項目」。 將 VoiceOver 設為靜音 請用三指點兩下螢幕。 再次使用三指點兩下螢幕來啟用朗讀。 若要 只關閉 VoiceOver 聲音, 請將 “側邊切換控制” 設為 “靜音”。 如果已連接外接鍵盤, 也可按下鍵盤上的 Control 鍵來將 VoiceOver 靜 音或取消靜音。 更改朗讀聲音 前往 “設定” > “一般” > “輔助使用” > VoiceOver > “使用壓 縮聲音”。 從最上方開始朗讀整個螢幕 使用兩指向上滑動。 從目前項目朗讀到螢幕底部 使用兩指向下滑動。 朗讀 iPad 狀態資訊 點一下螢幕最上方來聽取如時間、 電池電力、 Wi-Fi 訊號強度等等的 資訊。 在 VoiceOver 啟用時, “點一下” 選擇的項目 : 在螢幕中的任意位置點兩下。 在 VoiceOver 啟用時, “點兩下” 選擇的項目 在螢幕中的任意位置點三下。 調整滑桿 使用單指向上滑動來增加設定值, 或向下滑動來減少設定值。 捲動螢幕的列表或區域 使用三指向上或向下滑動。 向下滑動來移到列表或螢幕的下一頁, 或是向上滑動來移到上一頁。 當您在列表中的頁面之間移動時, VoiceOver 會朗讀顯示的項目範圍 (例如, “正在顯示第 5 行至第 10 行”)。 您也可以在列表中持續捲動, 而不是在其頁面之間移動。 點兩下並按住。 當您聽到一連串的提示音時, 您可以向上或向下移 動手指來捲動列表。 當您提起手指時, 持續捲動即會停止。 使用列表索引 部分列表會在右側顯示以字母順序排列的索引。 在元件之間滑動並無 法選擇索引 ; 您必須直接觸碰索引來將其選取。 選擇索引之後, 請 向上或向下滑動來在索引中移動。 您也可以點兩下, 然後向上或向 下滑動手指。 106 第 24 章 輔助使用重新排列列表順序 您可以重新排列某些列表的順序,如 “輔助使用” 設定中的 “轉輪” 和 “語言轉輪”。 選擇項目右側的 , 點兩下並按住直到您聽到 聲音,然後向上或向下拖移。 VoiceOver 會朗讀您上移或下移的項目, 視您拖移的方向而定。 重新排列 “主畫面” 螢幕 在 “主畫面” 螢幕上, 選擇您要搬移的圖像。 點兩下並按住, 然 後拖移圖像。 當您拖移圖像時,VoiceOver 會朗讀橫列和直欄的位置。 當圖像位於您要的位置時, 請放開圖像。 您可以拖移更多圖像。 將 項目拖移至螢幕的左側邊緣或右側邊緣, 來將其搬移至 “主畫面” 螢幕的其他頁面。 當您完成時, 請按下 “主畫面” 按鈕 。 啟用或關閉螢幕簾幕 使用三指點三下螢幕。 螢幕簾幕啟用時, 即使顯示畫面是關閉的, 但螢幕內容仍是啟用中。 解鎖 iPad 選擇 “解鎖” 開關, 然後點兩下螢幕。 瞭解 VoiceOver 手勢 啟用 VoiceOver 之後, 標準的觸控式螢幕手勢可能會產生不同的效果。 這些手勢和一些額 外的手勢可讓您移動螢幕, 並控制選擇的個別元件。 VoiceOver 手勢包含兩指和三指點一 下或滑動的手勢。 若要在使用兩指和三指手勢時取得最佳結果, 請放輕鬆, 讓您的手指 之間保留一些空隙來觸碰螢幕。 當 VoiceOver 啟用時, 您可以點兩下並按住螢幕來使用標準手勢。 一連串的提示音表示一 般手勢已生效。 生效狀態會保留到您提起手指為止。 然後會繼續使用 VoiceOver 手勢。 您可以使用不同的技巧來輸入 VoiceOver 手勢。 例如, 您可以使用一隻手的兩指或雙手各 使用單指, 來輸入兩指點一下動作。 您也可以使用拇指。 許多人發現 “分開觸碰” 的 手勢特別有效︰並非選取一個項目並點兩下, 而是以單指觸碰並按住項目, 然後用另一 指點一下螢幕。 請嘗試不同的技巧來發現最佳的方式。 如果您的